Volume II Part C

EXQUISITE LIVING RESIDENCES
ON PLOT NO. 345-0391

AT BURJ KHALIFA COMMUNITY, DUBAI, UAE

(BASEMENT + GROUND + MEZZANINE + 4 PODIUM + 59 FLOORS + ROOF)
ON PLOT NO. 345-0391,
BURJ KHALIFA COMMUNITY, DUBAI
IFC
VOLUME – II
SPECIFICATIONS
PART – C
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
Project No. 1705 – Rev. DD00
Prepared By:
ARIF & BINTOAK

Consulting Architects & Engineers
DECEMBER 2022
IFC
GENERAL – INDEX
VOLUME I
CONDITION OF CONTRACT
1. Instructions to Tenderers
2. Conditions of Contract
3. Form of Tender & Appendices
4. Form of Agreement BY OTHER
VOLUME II
PART – A: ARCHITECTURAL; STRUCTURAL & CIVIL SPECIFICATION
Part – A1: Division 01 – Division 05

Part – A2: Division 07 – Division 32
Part – A3: Project Vendor List
PART – B: ANNEXURE
Part – B: Soil Investigation Report
PART – C: PLUMBING / MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
Part – C: Division 21, 22, 23 (Fire / Plumbing / HVAC and related Section)
PART – D: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
Part – D: Division 26 (Electrical and related Section)
VOLUME III
1. Bill of Quantities - BOQ BY OTHER
Volume General Index

VOLUME IV
PROJECT DRAWINGS
1. Architectural Drawings
2. Structural Drawings
3. Mechanical Drawings
4. Electrical Drawings
Volume General Index

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ref Title
00 00 01 Table of Content
00 00 02 General Provisions
00 00 03 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
00 00 04 Basic Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Requirements
07 84 13 Penetration Fire Stopping
21 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment’s
21 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeves Seal for Fire Suppression Piping.
21 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Fire Suppression System.
21 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping
21 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression piping and Equipment
21 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Fire Suppression piping and

Equipment
21 05 53 Identification of Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment
21 08 00 Commissioning of Fire Suppression
21 10 00 Water Based Fire Suppression System
21 13 19 Pre Action Sprinkler System
21 13 39 Foam Water System
21 22 00 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System
21 31 13 Fire Pumps
22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment’s
22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeves Seal for Plumbing Piping.
22 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping.
22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
00 00 01 Table of Content Rev.00 Page 1 of 3

22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing piping and Equipment
22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Plumbing piping and Equipment
22 05 53 Identification of Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing
22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping
22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties
22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
22 12 00 Facility Potable Water Storage Tanks
22 13 16 Sanitary Waste, Vent and Storm Piping
22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
22 14 29 Sump Pumps
22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters
23 01 30.51 HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning
23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeves Seal for HVAC Piping.
23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping and Equipment
23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control of HVAC
23 05 53 Identification of HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC
23 07 13 Duct Insulation
23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation
23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation
23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC
23 09 00 Instruments and Control Devices for HVAC
23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC

23 09 93 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Control
22 11 13 Facility Fuel Oil Piping
23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping
23 21 16 Hydronic Specialties
23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment
23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casing
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
23 33 19 Duct Silencers
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 34 33 Air Curtains
23 35 00 Special Exhaust Systems
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets
23 41 00 Particulate Air Filters
23 42 00 Gas Phase Air Filtration
23 57 19 Plate Type Liquid-to-Liquid Heat Exchangers
23 74 13 Package, Outdoor Central Station Air Handling Units
23 81 26 Split-System- Air-Conditioners
23 82 19 Fan Coil Units
40 97 00 Variable Frequency Drives
25 00 00 Building Management System & Data Point List
00 00 05 ETS Room - Annex
END OF TABLE OF CONTENT

SECTION 00 00 02
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCE TO CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
A. The Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions) and Division
1 - General Requirements, apply to the work specified in Division 07, 20,21,22, 23, 25, 32,
33, 40 & 48. Unless the specifications contain statements which are more definitive or more
restrictive than those contained in the Conditions of the Contract, the specifications shall not
be interpreted as waiving or overruling any requirements expressed in the Conditions of the
Tender.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The scope of the work included under this specifications shall include complete mechanical
systems as shown in the Tender Documents and specified herein. Any work reasonably
inferable or required to result in a complete installation or the intended operation and
performance of the systems, shall be included in the Base Tender except where there is
specific reference to exclusion and incorporation in other quotations.
B. Check the design and accept the responsibility for proper performance of all mechanical
systems in accordance with relevant standards, codes and design parameters listed here in
after.
C. The contractor shall liaise with the authorities having jurisdiction to obtain NOC’s and shop
drawing approvals and also arrange for inspection of all works by the authorities having
jurisdiction over the works. This shall occur on an ongoing basis throughout the construction
process. On completion of the work present to the consultant, for the owner, final
unconditional approval certificates of the inspecting authority.
D. It is the Contractor Responsibility to coordinate with all other trade such as District Cooling
requirements, Green Building requirement, Swimming pool Requirements, Landscape &
Irrigation requirements etc. and to provide a workable system for the project.
E. The Contractor Shall include in the scope of work to provide the wild air provision required
for execution of false ceiling, ID, FF&E works. It is the contractor responsibility to appoint a
specialist sub-contractor for wild air system. The Proposed Wild air system shall be provided
the dedicated Chillers, Chilled water pumps, AHU’ & FCU’s required for maintaining the
temperature for wild air provisions. In any circumstance, Permanent HVAC Equipment’s
installed for Air-conditioning and Ventilation of projects shall be not used for wild air
provision.
1.3 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR
A. The scope of Mechanical Work on this job includes variety of high quality Equipment and
Systems, as detailed in the specification and drawings. It is important to achieve the
intended quality of performance for long term functioning of the services installation.
00 00 02 General Provisions Rev.00 Page 1 of 45

B. Each Services Subcontractor must have the technical expertise to undertake this quality of
work with similar demonstrably completed projects in the United Arab Emirates. The
Consultant reserves the right to inspect any or all of the Services Subcontractor's
designated similar projects and to approve, or otherwise, the Contractor on the basis of the
work so demonstrated. The Consultant may request certificates of satisfaction from
Consultants or Owners of other projects done by the Subcontractor.
C. The Contractor will state clearly at the time of bid any Prime Subcontractor(s) proposed and
who will not be revocable by the Contractor. The Contractor is expected to have firm bid
prices from Subcontractors prior to submitting a bid and it is his responsibility to
contractually bind prospective Subcontractors at that time for both price and performance.
D. In the event that such Subcontractor is not acceptable to the Consultant, or fails to meet any
of the other requirements, the Consultant may nominate to the Contractor any of the other
acceptable Subcontractors who have bid the project to other Contractors at the prices bid to
those other contractors.
E. The Consultant is not obliged to give reasons for any acceptance or rejection of any Sub
contractor, or whether any rejection is due to past performance or to present staff limitations
or otherwise.
1.4 DESIGN AND INTENT
A. Contract Drawings and Specification provide indicative design and intent for the system
requirements
B. Based on the contract documents, contractors shall prepare the shop drawings, and carry
out installation and commissioning of all required systems to meet design intent for the job.
C. Any discrepancies or deficiencies in capacities, sizes or routes of equipment, pipes, cables,

etc or any other item in above documents which contractor feels may adversely affect the
performance of any system, must be brought to notice of the Engineer at the time of
Tendering.
D. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, sundries, labour, supervision, guarantees,
allowances for overhead and profit, etc., shown or implied in any of the contract documents.
Include equipment, tools, scaffolds, and other incidentals as may be required.
E. Consider the Specifications as an integral part of the work together with the drawings.
Consider any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably implied on the
other as properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the work of this
Division.
1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS
A. Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and
limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might affect
the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or others.
B. Examine the Specifications and all Drawings including the Specifications and Drawings of all
other Divisions before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.
C. Examine Drawings and Specifications of any existing works of this trade. Examine any
deficiency list or prepare one if not adequately covered in the scope of the work proposed.

This list shall be completed and agreed upon prior to tender acceptance or the Consultant
will treat any deficiency as attributable to this Contractor.
D. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or
expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions,
Drawing implications, etc.
1.6 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A. The drawings for services works are performance drawings, diagrammatic, and intended to
convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations of
apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate
architectural or Structural details.
B. Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items from
drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation of all
services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Water, Drainage, Gas, etc.,) before
proceeding with the work.
C. Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures, emergency
lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the reflected
ceiling drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with all trades.
These must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work commences for
installation of MEP items in False Ceiling.
D. Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/ or equipment
as indicated and/ or supplied by another Division of work of the Contract. Install all pipe
runs, conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and clearances, and to
conserve space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to provide adequate
space for service and maintenance.
E. Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures. Confirm also location of outlets
and fixtures provided by any other Division of Work under the Contract.
1.7 BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS
A. Prepare 1:50 scale drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and
openings for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations, equipment
bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof curbs, wall openings, trenches,
pertaining to MEP works.
1.8 DEFINITIONS
A. Specific terminology, as used in this specification Sections, shall have the following
meanings:
1. "Furnish"...Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,

assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements.
2. "Install"...Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements.
3. "Provide"...Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
4. "Piping"...Pipe, fittings, flanges, valves, controls, hangers, traps, drains, insulation,
vents and other items customarily required in connection with the transfer of fluids.
5. "Concealed"...Embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind wall

furring, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in crawl spaces or shafts.
6. "Exposed"...Not concealed.
7. "Conditioned"...Spaces directly provided with heating and cooling.
8. "Unconditioned"...Spaces without heating or cooling including ceiling plenums.
9. "Indoors"...Located inside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
10. "Outdoors"...Located outside the exterior walls and roof of the building.
B. Reference to the following codes and standards shall mean:
Reference Definition
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
DEWA Dubai Electricity and Water Authority
DCD Dubai Civil Defense
DM Dubai Municipality
ASASI Advanced Sustainability Assessment Index
AGA American Gas Association
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engi-
neers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineering
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
AWWA American Water Works Association
BS British Standards
CIBSE The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
DU Emirates Integrated Telecommunication Company
IPC International Plumbing Code
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PESDG Plumbing, Engineering Services Design Guide
WRAS Water Regulation Advisory Scheme
C. References to codes, standards, manufacturer's information, etc. are the latest publication in
effect at date of Tender’s submission.
D. The Project in general shall fully in compliance with ASASI Green building requirement.
Contractor shall refer to "Green Building Tender Requirement and documentations" for
proper implementation of the same.
1.9 MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, AND MATERIAL DOCUMENTATION
A. For all works, use only new material and equipment. For materials not specified, use high
quality commercial items. If a Manufacturer is specified on a similar item, then the same
Manufacturer may be proposed for the non specified items. Obtain approval of all other
Manufacturers from the Consultant..

B. "New" is defined as newly manufactured, "state of the arts," tested and proven item of
equipment. Items which have been held in stock for any extended period of time by either
the Manufacturer or the Supplier will be rejected..
C. Client/Engineer shall have right to ask the contractor to supply any particular specified
manufacturer's items.
D. All plant & equipment shall be packed in accordance with the requirements of the
manufacturers recommendation and instruction. Contractor shall be responsible for any loss
or damage arising out of deficient or inadequate packing.
E. Contractor shall submit to Engineer copy of material documentation for certificate of origin,
bill of lading, original packing etc. for reference.
1.10 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a specific manufacturer's product is

specified, the Tender shall be based on that product only. Any substitutions for the specified
product shall be offered as a Tenderer's Initiative. Refer to Division 1. Substitutions shall
not be permitted after the Tender phase without a Tenderer's Initiative included.
B. Where several manufacturers’ products are specified, the bid shall be based upon the
specified products only. Any substitutions from the specified products shall be offered as a
Bidder's Initiative. Substitutions shall not be permitted after the bidding phase without a
Bidder's Initiative included with the bid. Any substations other than the specified products
are subject to cost saving in favour of client.
C. Note that where only one manufacturer's product is specified, the associated systems have
been designed on the basis of that product. Where several manufacturer's products are
specified, the basis of design is the scheduled product. For products other than the basis of
design, pay additional costs related to modifications to the systems and/or structure required
by the use of that product.
D. It is the intent of these specifications that service organizations such as balancing agencies
follow the above substitution procedures.
1.11 STANDARDS AND AUTHORITIES
A. All equipments and installations shall be in accordance with local Codes and Regulations. In
general, all equipment and installation shall also be in accordance with either British
Standard Specifications or a European or North American specification as detailed in the
contract documents. Provide labor, materials, services, apparatus, and drawings required to
comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on the
drawings and/or specified.
1.12 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install equipment, ductwork, conduit and piping in a workmanlike manner to present a neat
appearance and to function properly to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Install ducts and
pipes parallel and perpendicular to the building planes. Install all piping and ductwork
concealed in chases, behind furring, or above ceiling, except in unfinished areas. Install all
exposed systems neatly and group to present a neat appearance.
B. Install all gauges, thermometers, etc., to permit easy observance.

C. Install all equipment and apparatus which requires maintenance, adjustment, or eventual
replacement with due allowance for this.
D. Install control valves to guarantee proper sensing. Shield elements from direct radiation and
avoid placing them behind obstructions.
E. Install all panels and boards, etc., to permit easy operation.
F. Include in the work all requirements of Manufacturers as shown on their drawings.
G. Replace all work unsatisfactory to the Consultant without extra cost and to the standard
required by the Consultant. This applies to any item which is found to be defective in service
during the maintenance period, or extended maintenance period as appropriate.
1.13 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATES
1. The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least one year after
take over by the Owner. However, for compressor of all A/C units, guarantee shall be
for 5 years after taking over by the Owner.
2. All guarantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of
whether the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project
or not.
3. Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental
charges and sundries.
4. Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then
the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.
1.14 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations
on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to
provide more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project specific information and

properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
C. Submittal Time: Warranties shall be submitted along with As Built Drawings and Operation,
Maintenance manual as part of close out documentation
1.15 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. The complete Mechanical Systems shall be tested and commissioned by a third party
testing and commissioning agencies.
B. The contractor to appoint a third party to do the task of Testing and commissioning for the
project.
C. Testing & commissioning agencies shall be capable of doing such task and shall have the
international certifications to do such works. Testing Agency should have minimum of 5
years experience in UAE and carrier out such kind of commissioning activities in the building
projects.
D. Contractor shall submit prequalification document for third party testing for Engineer’s
approval.
1.16 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A. Equipment and associated items shall operate under conditions of load without sound or
vibration deemed objectionable by the Engineer as per 21 05 48, 22 05 48 and 23 05 48. In
the case of moving equipment, sound or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it
is installed, or annoyingly noticeable within the room in which it is installed, shall be deemed
objectionable. Sound or vibration deemed objectionable shall be corrected in an approved
manner as per 15071 at no extra cost to the Owner. Vibration control shall be provided by
means of approved vibration isolators and installed in accordance with the isolator
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. The sound pressure levels around mechanical and electrical equipment (fans, pumps,
motors, etc.) in equipment spaces shall not exceed 85 dBA at any point one (1) meter from
the equipment, with all equipment in the room operating. The sound criteria apply to the
complete range of each piece of equipment.
C. Contractor to have Acoustical and Vibration Specialist to review an approved format

equipment layout and selection to meet Acoustical criteria for building type per ASHRAE or
criteria listed by Engineer.
D. Continuous vibration from building services plant should be limited to achieve the building
services noise limits specified for each area and by adhering to BS 6472 Guide to evaluation
of human exposure to vibration in buildings (1 Hz to 80 Hz).
E. In the event of excessive vibration being produced when the building services are
commissioned and balanced, measurements shall be undertaken to determine the
acceptability of the vibration levels produced.
F. Maximum exposure to continuous (8 hour night-time) vibration from building services on any
floor, ceiling or wall should not exceed BS 6472 Curve 4 in all office and public circulation
areas and BS 6472 Curve 8 in all plant / equipment rooms.
G. To substantiate this, measurements shall confirm that a vibration velocity level of 0.1 mm/s
is not exceeded plant / equipment rooms, measurements should confirm that a maximum
vibration velocity level of 0.3 mm/s rms is not exceeded on any equipment room floor, wall or
ceiling.
1.17 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate and furnish in writing to the Engineer any information necessary to permit the
work to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
B. Participate in the preparation of coordination drawings. The procedure shall be supervised

by the General Contractor. No installation of permanent systems shall proceed until the
coordination drawings are reviewed by the General Contractor and the Engineer. No extra
charges shall be allowed for changes required to accommodate installation of systems
provided under other divisions of this contract.
C. Coordination Drawings shall be prepared for each floor level and shall be of a scale not less
than 1:50. Coordination Drawings shall include equipment, ductwork, and piping plans and
elevations with dimensions. Coordination Drawings shall also include required access
points through ceiling panels, access doors, cover plates, etc.
D. Mechanical Coordination Drawings shall be developed from ductwork and piping Shop
Drawings and contractor fabrication Drawings. Electronic or other reproduced Engineering
Design Drawings used as Coordination Drawings are not acceptable.
E. Devices and appurtenances which are to be installed in finished areas shall be coordinated
with the Engineer for final approval as it relates to location, finish, materials, color and
texture.
F. When work is installed without proper coordination, changes to this work deemed necessary
by the Engineer shall be made to correct the conditions without extra cost to the Owner.
1.18 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Each item of equipment shall be located so as to be accessible for maintenance or repair

without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or other materials. For the
large Air Handling units the Contractor shall ensure that these can be built up on site from
components which can be taken into the area. Any openings, framing or special lifting
equipment which may be required shall be included by the General Contractor after
receiving the advice of the Subcontractor at Tender stage.
B. Any item of equipment needing maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for

maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, piping, ducts, or
other materials. All high level walkways shall be advised to the General Contractor and
coordinated before Tender.
C. Cleanouts shall be located to permit rodding of all drain lines. These shall be located
wherever possible external to occupied areas, and to minimize spillage problems during
rodding.
1.19 ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS
A. Install all concealed mechanical equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations

easily accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result
in a minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as built drawings.
B. Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all
pertinent information for installation.
Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where
applicable
C. Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with
other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to obtain
approval.
D. Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of
structure and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a
minimum opening of 600 x 600 mm.
E. Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations
F. Lay in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.
Provide panels in glazed tile walls of 2.6mm thick 304 alloy stainless steel, no 4 finish, with
recessed frame secured with stainless steel, countersunk, flush headed screws.
Provide panels in plaster surfaces with dish shaped door and welded metal lath, ready to
take plaster. Provide a plastic grommet for door key access.
Provide other access doors of welded 2.6 mm thick steel, flush type with concealed hinges,
lock and anchor straps, complete with factory prime coat. Submit details to Consultant for
approval.
1.20 METAL TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
A. Materials, fabrication, and installation shall be provided by the Contractor.
1.21 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND MOTOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Regardless of voltage, provide temperature control wiring, interlock wiring, and equipment
control wiring for the equipment provided under this division of the specifications.
B. Furnish electrical disconnect switches, Variable Frequency Drives (Controllers) starters and
combination starter disconnects required for equipment provided under this division of the
specifications and as described under Division 22 and Division 23.
C. Power wiring not used for control functions, complete from power source to motor or
equipment junction box, including power wiring through starters, shall be provided under
Division 16.
D. Coordinate to ensure that electrical devices furnished or provided are compatible with the
electrical systems used.
E. Furnish circuit breakers rated for motor protection (for installation under Division 16) for
equipment purchased under this division of the specification.
1.22 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
A. Submit shop drawings and samples for materials and equipment as listed in this and in each
subsequent section.
B. Present a schedule of shop drawings after award of the contract and not later than what is
specified in the contract documents, indicating the anticipated date when the drawings will
be submitted for review. Assume full responsibility for timely submission of all drawings.
Allow a minimum of three weeks for the Consultant's review.
C. Show all MEP services items at 1:50 scale on the layout drawings and at 1:20 scale details
for shafts, plant areas, pump room, etc. Base all dimensions of equipment on the approved

make and models. Co-ordinate with all other trades for location, routes and levels. Show all
requirement of maintenance spaces, access doors and cleanouts.
D. Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,

accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes.
E. The submission of samples will be subject to the same procedure as that of shop drawings.
F. The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations
from the Consultant's drawings and specifications, unless he has, in writing, called the
Consultant's attention to such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The
Consultant's review shall be construed to apply to, and only to, general arrangements and
shall not relieve the Contractor from the entire responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant
shall be on the understanding that any item submitted shall be ordered with options and
modifications to fully meet the specification. Any fabrication, erection, setting out or other
work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at the
Contractor's risk and cost.
1.23 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Keep one complete set of approved Mechanical shop drawings at site office.
B. Show on those prints the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the building.
Dimension underground services at key points of every run in relation to structure and
building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation to floor level of the
building and give reference datums to Municipal bench marks.
C. Indicate exact location of all services left for future work. Show and dimension all work
embedded in the structure.
D. At the end of job execution, revise the negatives of the original shop drawings to incorporate
any and all changes, done at site during execution of job so that the Às Built' drawings shall
indicate the exact Às Built' condition of all services.
E. Before preliminary handing over, 2 sets of prints of these Às Built' drawings shall be
submitted to Engineer for approval. Upon approval 4 sets of prints shall be properly bound
and handed over to client as part of Preliminary Handing Over of the job.
F. 2 CDs of 'As Built' drawings shall be provided.
1.24 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. At the time of Preliminary Handing Over, contractor shall hand over to client 4 bound sets of
the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. These shall consist of, but not limited to,
following:-
1. List of all equipment installed.
2. General layout.
3. Wiring diagram of control panels.
4. Operation instructions, including start-up and shutdown procedure.

5. Maintenance instructions, including preventative maintenance instructions for

components of the equipment.
6. Lubricating instruction and recommended cycle of lubrication.
7. Complete parts lists, showing manufacturer's name catalogue number, as recommended

by manufacturer for all system equipment, necessary for 2 years operation.
The contractor is to prepare a draft for discussion with the Consultant prior to finalizing the
documents.
B. The section dealing with complete systems shall be subdivided into each service with a
ready means of reference and detailed index. The function and manner of operation of each
system shall be clearly described together with illustrations and line diagrams in schematic
form showing the location and function of control valves, items of equipment and spaces or
areas which are served by these items. The colour coding and identification systems
employed shall be explained.
C. Contractor shall submit invoices of all equipment which covers the guarantee, particularly
where the guarantee is more than one year, like compressor, water tank etc. with O&M
manual.
D. The O & M manuals shall be generally prepared to widely accepted international standards
like BSRIA , etc.
1.25 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working

condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance
period to keep the equipment in best working order. This maintenance period shall be for a
period of one year after the `Preliminary Handing Over'.
B. At the time of Preliminary Handing Over, the contractor shall run training sessions for
Owner's operating staff to explain the functions of all systems and equipment and the
operating procedures.
C. The preventive regular maintenance and faults maintenance shall be entirely contractors
responsibility during the one year maintenance period after Preliminary Handing Over.
Contractor's maintenance team shall be deployed to carryout weekly checks of all

equipment and controls, monthly cleaning of all filters and necessary greasing and
lubrication. A visit schedule shall be submitted and agreed with Engineer before Preliminary
Handing Over
D. All fault and failure complaints shall be attended by contractor as soon as possible, but,
repairs must be carried out within maximum of 12 hours after the reported failure.
E. Contractor shall repair/replace all equipment, controls and systems, provide new coat of
paint for equipment and piping at the end of maintenance period and offer entire MEP
installation for checking and approval of Engineer and Client before issue of Final Handing
Over Certificate.

1.26 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Provide the Owner's representative with two (2) sets of special tools required for operation
and maintenance of equipment provided.
1.27 CONTRACTOR STAFF AT SITE
A. The Prime Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the
Contract, qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting,
testing, and adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.
B. Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and
Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the proposed
Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise unacceptable, the
onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is given.
C. Where the Contractor's or Subcontractor's staff is, or becomes during the Contract deficient
in the choice of adequate or acceptable personnel, the Contractor is to remedy the situation
by appropriate measures.
D. Approval of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent

the withdrawal of that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so
desire. In the event of such disapproval then the Contractor will be required to rectify the
position as stated above within 14 days.
E. In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right to
order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a "forthwith" basis.
F. The Contractor will remedy the situation on a similar forthwith basis and in any event will not
be allowed to proceed with any area of work which as a result is left without proper
supervision or technical backup until such time as the Consultant is again satisfied by the
measures taken.
1.28 CLEANING
A. Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the premises
all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other items used in
the performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the buildings broom clean
with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.
B. Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from over painting,
etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.
1.29 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
A. Flushing and pre-commissioning cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with BSRIA
standards i.e. AG 1/2001.
B. Flush all fluid carrying systems after completion with a stream of water or appropriate fluid at
the highest obtainable pressure and velocity for a period of two hours. Discharge the
flushing fluid through all strainers and out through line sized valves with hose ends. Clean all
strainers. Repeat flushing operation to the approval of the Consultant until no foreign matter
collects in the strainers. Drain all tanks and clean tanks.

C. If the water pressure normally available on site is, in the Consultant's opinion, inadequate to
perform proper flushing, then the Contractor shall provide at his own expense, pumps,
tanks, etc., to give pressure and volume flows to the Consultant's satisfaction.
D. Ensure that all valves including control valves are fully open during the flushing and
cleaning. Before starting up any fans, inspect and clean the inside of all air handling systems
including fans, ducts, coils, terminal units, to ensure that they are free from dust and debris.
Carry out additional cleaning operations of systems as specified in other sections of this
Division.
1.30 INSPECTION,TESTING AND ADJUSTING
A. All the works provided as part of this Contract shall be inspected and commissioned in
accordance with all relevant British Standard Specifications, and Codes of Practice and to
the entire satisfaction of the Consultant.
B. Certified and approved third party testing and commissioning Agency shall carry out the
Inspection, testing and adjusting. The Duties of testing and Inspection Agencies shall
include but not limited to the following:
C. Carry out all tests specified. Carry out all tests required by Authorities having jurisdiction.
Test equipment to the requirements of the Manufacturer.
D. Provide all equipment, labour, instruments, loading devices, incidentals, and pay for all fuel,
power and sundries required to carry out the tests
E. All installations shall be inspected and tested in sections as the work proceeds and on
completion as composite systems and it shall be noted that the Consultant or any of the
other relevant Authorities may require to inspect or test any equipment during manufacture
at the Manufacturer's works. All necessary arrangements shall be made as part of this
Contract.
This will generally not apply to specified items unless specifically noted in these documents,
but may be necessary for alternate equipment, should this be considered at all
F. All tests shall be arranged in cooperation with the Consultant and his Engineer and all other
concerned parties and shall be subject to at least 24 hours notice in writing of the time,
location and nature of the test to be performed. No test shall be considered valid unless the
Consultant is present.
G. All necessary skilled and unskilled labour shall be provided for attendance during the tests
(including pre and post test activities,) and the test media shall be provided and
subsequently disposed of except where specifically stated otherwise.
H. The testing and adjusting is the contractual responsibility of the Contractor but actual
performance of the tests is expected to be the sole responsibility of the Prime Subcontractor.
I. Have all testing and balancing performed by only persons who are thoroughly versed in this
type of testing and balancing and with proven ability. Submit names, complete with
experience records, and references for approval of the Consultant.
J. Any defects occurring at any time during the test duration shall be made good and a
complete re test shall be carried out, all at no cost to the Contract.
K. Where failure occurs during a test, inspection or commissioning procedure which results in
damage to the building fabric and/ or any services not provided as part of this Contract, or
requires subsequent builder's work to be carried out, to the entire satisfaction of the
Consultant at no cost to the Owner or the Consultant.
L. All test points shall be provided which are necessary to carry out the specified tests and
commissioning procedures including facilities for measuring or monitoring temperature,
pressure, pressure drop, volume flow, in duct sound power or sound pressure, humidity, or
other relevant conditions in both air side and water side systems. Such points shall be fitted
with removable plugs, flanges, or other appropriate and approved devices.
M. Prepare test report forms for each test to be performed and submit these to the Consultant
at least two weeks prior to the commencement of any tests.
N. Test only after the system installation has been completed and the system has been put into
continuous operation. Perform the testing, adjusting, and balancing when outside conditions
are commensurate with the design conditions for the given system. Add dummy loads to the
system if outside conditions are less severe than the specified points.
O. Prepare a complete list of instruments for each test containing, for each instrument:
Name of instrument Manufacturer.
Scale and full scale accuracy.
Date of last calibration test.
Name of last calibrating company
P. All instruments and consumables, such as recording paper, necessary for conducting the
tests shall be provided, including but not limited to the following:
Tube type velometer.
Sloping tube manometer.
Pitot tubes of various lengths.
Mercury in glass thermometers.
Weekly recording thermometers.
Anemometer for diffusers, with collector.
Ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter.
Power factor meter.
Insulation tester.
Earth loop impedance tester.
Tachometer
Q. Duplicate signed test certificates shall be provided after each test which will be
countersigned by the Consultant who witnesses the test. The test certificate shall give the
following particulars:
Apparatus or section under test.
Maker's number (if any).
Nature, duration and conditions of test.
Result of test.
R. No test shall be valid until the test certificate is provided.
S. Duplicate copies of test certificates carried out at Manufacture's works shall be forwarded to
the Consultant for approval prior to despatch of the article to site.
T. No section of the works shall be insulated or in any other way concealed prior to testing and
inspection and subsequent concealment where applicable shall only take place following
written authority from the Consultant.
U. All necessary facilities, measuring and recording instruments including test pumps and
gauges for inspection, testing and commissioning requirements shall be provided and shall
be checked or calibrated as necessary before use.

The Consultant reserves the right to call for a demonstration of the accuracy of any
instruments provided.
V. All representatives present during inspection, testing and commissioning shall be fully
conversant with the system concerned and the method of system and instrument operation.
Manufacturer's or Specialist Subcontractors' representatives shall attend where specifically

indicated elsewhere in the specification or where necessary to ensure full service and
cooperation is available to the Consultant to enable the works to be tested and
commissioned in accordance with the requirements of the specification.
W. All necessary precautions shall be taken to safeguard against damage during inspection,
testing or commissioning. Any damage so caused shall be made good at no cost to the
contract.
X. All tests shall last for the minimum time period stated or longer if necessary to ensure all
sections have been fully examined as required by the test.
Y. All performance tests shall be carried out initially prior to the Consultant being requested to
witness the tests and thereby avoid unnecessary re tests being required.
Z. To enable testing and commissioning to be carried out the Consultant will, on request,
provide the necessary information concerning design intent and all certificates shall indicate
any variation in terms of the actual and percentage deviation from the design value.
AA. All items with electrical supplies shall be certified ready for use by the Electrical
Subcontractor.
BB. Submit all test reports in triplicate to the Consultant for his review and records. Perform all
tests called for in other sections of this Division. Unless specified otherwise test, adjust and
balance the following systems :
Electrical Switchgear and Control Gear.
Pumps.
Air Handling Units.
Fan Coils.
Piping Systems.
Tanks and Receivers.
Air Supply Systems.
Motors and Starters
CC. Pumps
Electrical inputs.
Motor speed.
Inlet and outlet pressures.
Inlet and outlet temperatures.
Flow rate.
Noise levels.
Automatic changeover facilities function test
DD. Fans & Motors

Fan rpm.
Motor rpm.
Motor voltage to all phases.
Motor current to all phases.
Static pressure across fan.
Air flow through fan.
Air temperature at fan suction and discharge.

Verify fan rotation.

Noise measurements for 6 central frequencies for the full range of speed, flow, pressure
generated.
Power input at maximum condition.
EE. Fan Test Certificates
Duplicate type test certificates shall be provided for fans, indicating performance curves,
sound levels, etc., when tested in accordance with B.S. 848.
FF. For Central System Components

Static pressure across filters.
Static pressure across coils.
Air flow at each main duct.
Air temperature before and after each coil(both DB and WB.)
Fresh air and return air quantities.
Noise measurements at 6 central frequencies
GG. Piping Systems
All services shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test at the pressure stated in the
specification for the service concerned. Where no pressure is indicated, the pressure shall
be two times the maximum working pressure specified or two times the head where a
maximum pressure is not specified. The minimum test pressure shall be 100 psi. All safety
valves, pressure and altitude gauges shall be effectively isolated or removed prior to the test
and subsequently refitted. The test shall be for the time indicated in the specification, or
where none is indicated it shall be for a period of not less than 4 hours. For a satisfactory
test there shall be no loss of pressure at any point in the system for the full duration of the
test.
HH. Pipe Supports
Pipe supports for drainage, water supply or fire fighting services shall be of hot dip
galvanized clamps, factory rubber lined complete with threaded rod & rawl plugs.
II. Air Distribution Systems
For air handling systems adjust and balance all system components ensuring that the test
data are within three percent of design requirements for the overall system and within five
percent for each component. Repeat balancing and adjusting until the requirements are
met. Submit a test report listing the measured data versus design data for the following
sections.
Air Leakage.
Air Distribution.
Grilles and Diffusers.
JJ. Air Leakage Tests
Air leakage tests shall be conducted on all ventilating systems before ductwork is enclosed.
The tests shall be sustained for 30 minutes at the design pressure plus 50% during which
time the leakage, if any, must not increase. The air shall be released to zero and the section
of ductwork immediately retested at the designed pressure for that section without any
increase in leakage. Blanks shall be inserted at each flange as the sections are tested, and
these shall be left in position until the installation is complete when they shall be removed.

The blanks at the flange joints shall be removed and the flanges resealed, the main fans
shall be operated at the designed volume and pressure. Under this condition each flange
joint shall be inspected with a soap and water test.
The total leakage of air for the complete system when measured at the fan discharge shall
not exceed 3% of the total air volume, and the aggregate of the progressive section tests
shall not exceed the permitted total leakage.
KK. Air Distribution Tests
Smoke tests shall be conducted on all ventilating systems to ensure correct air diffusion
from outlet terminals.
LL. Grilles and Diffusers

Air flow rate.
Manufacturer's Ak factors.
Noise measurements.
MM. Electric Motor Test Certificates
Duplicate type test and abbreviated tests shall be provided for electric motors in accordance
with BS.4999 as appropriate. For motors in excess of 40 KW routine individual test
certificates shall be provided in accordance with BS.4999.
NN. Starter and Control Gear Certificates
Duplicate type test certificates shall be provided for all starters and control gear in
accordance with BS.587, and for control panels as a whole, routine individual high voltage
tests shall be carried out as allowed in BS 587.
OO. Plumbing Services
Plumbing services shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test at the pressure stated in
the specification for the service concerned. Where no pressure is indicated, the pressure
shall be two times the maximum working pressure specified or two times the head where a
maximum pressure is not specified, subject to a minimum test pressure of 7 Bar. The test
shall be for the time indicated in the specification, or where none is indicated it shall be for a
period of not less than 4 Hours.
Sterilization of entire cold water services installation including storage tanks and the pipe
runs shall be carried out as detailed elsewhere in these specifications.
1.31 TEMPORARY USAGE
A. The Consultant reserves the right to use any piece of mechanical equipment, device, or
material installed under this section for such reasonable lengths of time as may be required
to make a complete and thorough test of same before the final completion and acceptance
of the work.
B. Such tests shall not be construed as acceptance of any part of the work, and it is agreed
and understood that no claim for damage will be made for any injury or breakage to any
part or parts of the above due to these tests, where caused by weakness, inaccuracy of
parts, or by defective materials or workmanship.

1.32 INSPECTION OF THE WORK
A. The representatives of the Owner and the Consultant will make periodic visits to the site
during construction to ascertain that the work is being executed in reasonable conformity
with all plans and specifications. Each Subcontractor must maintain the quality control as
intended in the contract documents.
Correct all deficiencies immediately as noted during field inspections.

Request in writing for a final inspection of all services after :-
All deficiencies noted during job inspections have been corrected.
All systems have been balanced and tested and are ready for operation.
All balancing reports have been submitted and reviewed.
All instruction manuals have been submitted and reviewed.
The cleaning up is finished in all respects.
All spare parts and replacement parts specified have been provided and receipt of the
same acknowledged.
1.33 COMMISSIONING OF SERVICES
A. All piping systems shall be filled with treated water, or appropriate fluid, vented as
necessary, and brought to operating conditions and the flows then regulated to the design
values.
B. All water circuits shall be balanced by means of the regulating valves provided and flow
rates shall be determined on a temperature and pressure drop basis. Flow through pumps
shall be measured by relating the pressure drop across the pump to manufacturers test
curves. A copy of the test curve indicating the final operating point shall be forwarded to the
Consultant.
C. All refrigerant systems shall be vacuumed, purged and charged according to A.S.H.R.A.E.
standard methods. All safety controls and interlocks will be tested as part of the
commissioning procedures.
D. Flow through coils shall be adjusted to give the design temperature difference. In general
water systems shall be balanced in accordance with the C.I.B.S.E. Commissioning Code
Nos A, B, C, and W. Upon completion of balancing and testing operations for heating and
cooling systems, temperature measurements shall be taken in all rooms and the readings
tabulated in schedule form together with hourly ambient temperature readings taken over
the measuring period. Two copies of the schedule shall be forwarded to the Consultant.
E. All ventilating systems shall be commissioned in accordance with the procedures

recommended in the CIBSE Commissioning Code, Air Distribution. Duplicate schedules of
commissioning results shall be forwarded to the Consultant and shall detail the recorded air
volume and percentage deviation from design air volume, for each air input and extract
terminal. Wet and dry bulb temperature measurements shall be taken in all rooms served by
air supply systems and the results indicated on the schedule of commissioning results.
These shall be recorded together with external ambient wet and dry bulb temperatures
measured at hourly intervals over the measuring period.
F. Sound pressure levels (dBA) shall be measured in all rooms containing supply or extract
terminals, all plant rooms, all rooms immediately adjacent to plant rooms and all rooms
located above or below plant rooms. The Consultant may at his discretion request a
spectrum band analysis of sound pressure in any locations.

G. Fault conditions shall be simulated and all alarms and safety devices shall function correctly.
Such proving tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Consultant and certificates
shall be provided specifically detailing all check procedures which have been carried out.
H. Following proving tests all installations shall be left in working order ready for handover.
I. All electrical systems shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with latest IEE
regulations and local authority codes.
J. If the A/C system commissioning is carried out at a time other than June to August period
(peak ambient conditions), the contractor shall, then, carryout summer reliability Test in the
same period next year within 1 year maintenance period. The system must run continuously
for 15 days without any failures during the said Test. All test and commissioning data shall
be witnessed by the Engineer and a report submitted by Contractor for approval and record.
K. Generally all testing and commissioning procedures shall be in accordance with BSRIA,
ASHRAE and CIBSE guidelines and recommendations.
1.34 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION
A. Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract for a period of one
year from the date of acceptance of the completed work, or if so noted, for longer periods for
parts of the work.
B. Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above and
repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work required
by other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to repair damage
caused by the failure of any part of this section.
C. Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence when
the completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into operation. In
the event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost to the Owner is
involved, this Contractor shall be liable to the full extent of the guarantee as indicated in the
specification.
1.35 WORK COVERED IN OTHER DIVISION
A. The Services Contractor is to be aware of the overall scope of the job and must coordinate
with other trades and other Contractors on site as necessary to ensure a complete
mechanical installation. The contractual obligation on the General Contractor to coordinate
does not relieve the Subcontractors of the obligation to also coordinate and be aware.
1.36 REVIEW BY ENGINEER
A. 120 days from the award of the tender package, the MEP contractor shall submit for review
to the owner and engineer, a testing and commissioning plan for all major pieces of
equipment. The plan should cover all required labor and material required to commission
each piece of equipment, any required assistance from other Contractor’s, the General
Contractor, or the Owner. The plan should describe the proposed methodology to
commission each piece of equipment, including detailed step by step procedures.
B. Notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of the date and time of tests specified to be
witnessed by the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to demand repetition of any

testing where he is unable to attend due to insufficient notice without additional cost to the
Owner.
1.37 PROTECTION OF FLOORS
A. Protect existing flooring from damage during the construction period. Provide plywood or
similar material under equipment or materials stored on floors, and in areas where
construction may damage the floor surfaces. Floor surfaces (including sealer) damaged
during the construction shall be replaced at the cost of the Contractor at fault.
1.38 LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURER
A. The procurement of all major equipment like Chillers, AHUs, FCUs, Pumps, Fans, Controls,
etc. shall take place from the Manufacturer’s Authorised Sales and Service Representatives
with supply through their Dubai Offices.
B. All items should be locally available with the Authorised Agents who shall have their back-up
service facility.
C. All Equipment and materials shall be issued with test certificates to confirm that these are
manufactured to the appropriate standards. A copy of the certificates will be passed to the
Engineer for approval, with a further copy being incorporated within the "0 + M" Manuals.
D. All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Fire Dampers
etc., must have Local Civil Defence approval. Fire protection pump sets and sprinkler
system equipment shall be UL certified and FM approved.
PRODUCT APPROVED MANUFACTURER
AIRCONDITIONING AND VENTILATION

ETS Room Refer Manufacturer List in the ETS Room
Annex.
AHU's , FAHU's & Fan Coil Units
York
Trane
Daikin
Carrier
Trosten
Euroclima
PHE ( Plate Heat Exchangers)

ALFA LAVAL

SONDEX
HISAKA
Air Curtains
FREGO
NATIONAL
VTS clima (wings)
Heat pipes
SPC
AMERICAN HEAT PIPE
HEAT PIPE TECHNOLOGY
Rotary Heat Wheel

BRY-AIR
OSTBERG
ENVENTUS
Non-Thermal Plasma Tube for FAHU

JONIX
Or equivalent
Ducted & Decorative Split Units

York
Trane
Daikin
Carrier
HVAC Testing & Commissioning 3rd. Party

Sutton International
Babil
Reef Tech

Prime Tech
Refrigeration Plant for Garbage Room

FRIGA-BOHN, MARIO DORIN
Or Equivalent.
Duct Air Leak Testing and Sealing

Aero Seal
Or Equivalent.
Specialist for Sound And Vibration Con-

trol/Testing Mason
Unison
Kinetics
BMS & Automatic controls

Honeywell
Siemens
ALC- Carrier
SAUTER
Chilled Water Pumps

ITT ( Bell & Gossett)-Xylem
KSB
Grundfos
Armstrong
EBARA
Chilled Water Dynamic Pressurization Unit

Reflex
IMI (TA Hydronics)
Flamco

Spriotech
Vacuum De-gasser Reflex
IMI (TA Hydronics)
Flamco
Spriotech
Air & Dirt Separator Reflex
IMI (TA Hydronics)
Flamco
Spriotech
AAV
WEICCO
SPIROX- SARCO
FLAMCO
Chilled Water BTU Meters

Landis+Gyr
Kamstrup
INTEGRA
ISTA
Black Steel Seamless Pipes (ASTM A 53,

Schedule-40 Grade -B) for plant room & under Nippon
Ground Chilled Water Piping
Sumitomo
SHIELD
Black Steel ERW Pipework (ASTM A 53,

Schedule-40 Grade -B) for above Ground SHIELD
Chilled Water

SURYA
TATA
ZENITH
Pre-insulated Under Ground Chilled water pip-

ing ( With leak detection System) Perma Pipe
Gulf cool therm
TCTI
Petromar
M. S. Welded Pipe Fittings (CHW)

Shield
BKL
M. I. Threaded Pipe Fittings (CHW) Crane
Shield
BIS
Chilled Water Valves

TECOFI
Crane
Tozen
TFL
ITAP / ABO
Hattersley
NIBCO
KITZ

FLOWCON
PICV Valves
IMI -TA HYDRAUNICS
Danfoss (from Technoflow)
FLOWCONTROL IND. (DeltaPValve)
FRESE
Pressure and Temperature Gauges

Wiess
Hunter
Winters
Chilled Water Chemical Treatment

METITO
CULLIGAN
WATER BIRD
CORODEX
Fans - Axial and Propellor

Systemair
Nuair
Greenheck
Penn
Flakt Woods
S&P
ELEKTROVENT
DYNAIR

Fans - Centrifugal
Systemair
Nuair
Greenheck
Penn
Flakt Woods
S&P
ELEKTROVENT
DYNAIR
Fans - Smoke Extract

Systemair
Nuair
Greenheck
Penn
Flakt Woods
S&P
ELEKTROVENT
DYNAIR
Copper Pipes and Fittings (REFERIGERENT

PIPE) Wednusberry
Kembla
Mueller
MAKSAL

GI Duct Sheets
AGIS
Nippon
Nishin
JINDAL
ALUMINUM SHEET FOR CLADDING

HINDALCO
BALCO
G.I Duct Fabricators

LEMINAR
GMAMCO
KAD Air-conditioning
CENTURY MECHANICAL
GULF DUCT INDUST.
Ductwork Flexible Connections

Aeroduct
AFS
Durodyne
Ductmate
Ductwork Joints
Ductmate
Aero Duct
AFS
Excelair
CRAYFLANGE

Flexible Ductwork
Interlock
Thermaflex
AFS
Crayflex
Duraflex
Fire Rated Duct & Access Panels (UL Listed)

GMAMCO
BETEC CAD
FIREMAC
Flame Sheild
Fire Rated Coating (UL Listed)

Ocean
Dupont
Kidde Fire Protection
FENLAND FIRE COATING
FLAMEBAR
Fire Dampers, Fire and Smoke Dampers and

Smoke Dampers (UL Listed / DCD approved) Ruskin Titus
GMAMCO
AEROVAC
BETEC CAD

Air Master
EXCELAIR
VCDs, Motorized Dampers and Access Doors

Ruskin Titus -UAE
GMAMCO
AEROVAC
BETEC CAD
Air Master
EXCELAIR
Sound Attenuators
BETEC CAD
GALLOWAY ACOUSTICS
Ruskin Titus -UAE
GMAMCO
GULF ACOUSTICS
AEROVAC
EXCELAIR
Acoustic Louvers
BETEC CAD
GALLOWAY ACOUSTICS
Ruskin Titus -UAE
GMAMCO

GULF ACOUSTICS
AEROVAC
EXCELAIR
Sand Trap Louvers

Air Master
BETEC CAD
Ruskin Titus -UAE
BETA
EXCELAIR
TECHNALCO
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers

Air Master
BETEC CAD
Ruskin Titus -UAE
BETA
EXCELAIR
TECHNALCO
Thermal Insulation - Ductwork (Fiber Glass)

KIMMCO
Knauf
Johns Manville
Acoustic Insulation - Ductwork

Johns Manville
KIMMCO

Knauf
Thermal Insulation - Refrigerant pipe, & Con-

densate Drain Pipe work K-Flex
Armacell
Kai-flex
Thermal Insulation - Chilled Water Pipe work

Johns Manville
KIMMCO
Knauf
Thermal Insulation - Diesel Engine Exhaust

KIMMCO
Knauf
Johns Manville
Insulation Adhesives and Sealants

Idenden
Fosters
Childers Insulation
FEVICOL
Pipe work Support Hangers

Fischer
MUEPRO
UNISON
Grinnel
Sesmic & Vibration Isolation Controls (Ductwork

and Pipe work) KINETICS
MASON

UNISON
AMBERBOOTH
Expansion Joints, Bellows and Guides

Mason
Unison
AMBERBOOTH
ITT Bell and Gossett
Fire Barriers, Fire Sealants and Smoke Stops

(UL Listed) Hilti
3M
NulliFire
FIRE FIGHTING
FIRE FIGHTING SUB CONTRACTOR
NAFFCO
AL ARABIA
SWAIDI ENGINEERING
SCIENTECHNIC
Fire Pump and Motors - UL Listed and FM ap-

proved Aurora
Patterson
RB Pumps
Peerless
Naffco
Fire Pump Controller

Tornatech

Metron
Cutler Hammer
ITT-Bell and Gosset A.C
Naffco
Fire Extinguishers
Bristol
Naffco
Norsen
Moyne Robert
Angus
Fire Hose Cabinets

Norsen
Bristol
Naffco
Shield
Fire Hose Reel / Hose Race (UL Listed and FM

Approved) Angus Fire Armour
Walker Fire
Bristol
Tyco
Shield
Naffco
Fire Suppression System - UL listed Clean

Agent FM200

NOVEC 1230
Fike
Ansul
Mega flexon
Naffco
Kidde
Janus
Foam System
Chemguard
National
Viking
Naffco
Pre-Action System
Chemguard
National
Viking
Naffco
Fire Protection "ERW ' Pipe work (Galvanized

ASTM A53, ERW, Schedule. 40 Grade B) SHIELD
SURYA
ZENITH
TATA
Fire Protection Valves and Accessories (UL

Listed and FM Approved) Grinnell

Kennedy
Victaulic
Bristol
Valmatic
Viking
Central
Master Control
Shield
G.I. Pipes Joints / Fittings

Grinnell
Nippon/Sumitomo
Kessel
Zurn
Shield
Victaulic
Grooved End Pipe Joints / Fittings

National
Viking
UNISON
Victaulic
Shield
Landing Valves - (UL Listed and FM Approved)

Angus Fire Armour

Elkhart
Viking
Sheild
Naffco
Siamese Connections (UL Listed and FM Ap-

proved) Grinnell
Viking
Walker Fire
Elkhart
Naffco
Spare Sprinkler Head Cabinets and Tools - UL

Listed and FM approved Grinnell
Reliable
Central
Viking
Bristol
CML
Shield
AAV
WEICCO
SPIROX- SARCO
FLAMCO
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

Manhole Covers / Frames

Ducast
Ostermier
RPA
FRA
STATON
RBA
Backflow Preventers
Claval
Honeywell Braukman
Shield
Spirax Sarco
Watts
GRP Panal Tank (Domestic Water)

Bridgestone
Sekuzi
Mitsubishi
LG
SUNNIK
SAMSUNG
HDPE, Drainage Pipe and Fittings

Hepowrth
Geberit
APV

Ployfab
Delayed Action Ball Float Valves

ITT Bell and Gossett
Jenkin Bros
Keraflo
Kinetics
Pegler
Altitude Valves
SINGER
BERMAD
Honeywell
Watts
Drainage Acoustic Insulation

Armacell
Silent Lag
UNISON
Sound Seal
Drainage Specialties
J.R. Smith
Wade International
Zurn
Geberit
Ideal
Fischer

Watts
Stainless Steel Cover, Linear Shower drain and

Grating Ostermeier
DHABI Steels
FRANCO
Grease Interceptor & Oil Interceptors (DM Ap-

proved) Hepworth
ACO
MPI
Watts
Kessel
Zurn
Pex Pipes and Fittings

WIRSBO
JRG SANIPEX
HELIROMA
VIALLI
Pipe work Support Hangers

Fischer
MUEPRO
UNISON
Grinnel
PHD
WEICCO

Plumbing Specialties
Wade International
Yamato
Zurn
Bradley
Watts
IDEAL
MBBM
Plumbing Valves
Crane
Pegler
TFL
Hattersley
KITZ
PPR Pipe work and Fittings (Domestic Water)

Polo Ecosan
Polymutan
Aquatherm
VIALLI
Pressure and Temperature Gauges

Wiess
Hunter
Winters
PVC (Pressure) Pipes and Fittings

HEPWORTH

MARELY
TERRAIN
George Fishcher
NATIONAL PLASTICS
MODERN PLASTICS (MPI)
POLYFAB
COSMOPLAST
Sound Proof Drainage Pipe System

Geberit
REHAU-Rupiano
POLO KAL
SKOLAN
WAVIN AS
Starters, Contactors and Motor Control Centres

ABB
Dorman Smith
Merlin Gerin
Potable Water Pumps & Sump Pumps

ABS
Armstrong
EBARA
KSB
Grundfos

Lowara
Test Plugs
Watts
Trerice
Thermostatic Mixing Valves – Hot Water

Watts
Honeywell
Bradley
Caleffi
Thermal Insulation - Hot & cooled Cold Water

piping (Fiber Glass) KIMMCO
Knauf
Johns Manville
Thermal Insulation – Condensate Drain piping

K-Flex
Armacell
Kai-flex
uPVC Drainage Pipes and Fittings

Hepworth
Polypipe Terrain
Marley
Wavin
NATIONAL PLASTICS
MODERN PLASTICS (MPI)
POLYFAB

COSMOPLAST
Pipe-in-pipe system ( for High level drainage at

Kitchen Area's) George Fishchers
Hepworth
Marley
Water Hammer Arrestors

J R. SMITH
SURGETROL-sealtech
Wade International
WATTS
Water Pressure Reducing Valves (Domestic)

Honeywell Braukman
SPIRAX-SARCO
Singer
Watts
Domestic Water Cooling system (DX)

CLINT
AQUACAL
TEMPCON
Swimming Pool Heat Pump (DX)

CLINT
AQUACAL
TEMPCON
Central LPG system Specialist

Eurotech Gas
Royal Gas

Cylingas
Lootah BC gas
AAV
WEICCO
SPIROX- SARCO
FLAMCO
Puddle flange
Fikree Mechanical
Servetec
MPI
Hepworth
ERW G.I Pipes (G.I Sleeves for Fire Sealant)

Surya
Universal Pipe
Fuel Oil system

Al Sabbah / Semco
Flowline
Auxfys
Electric Water Hetaer

Ariston
A.O Smith
Hi-Therm
Link Seal or Modular Seal ( for all services pen-

etrations from Basement retaining Wall) Hauff-Technik
Trumbull
Garlock

SECTION 00 00 03
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. External Design Condition (Summer):
- Site Location : Dubai, United Arab Emirates

- External Design Conditions (Summer) : 46° C db 30° C
B. Internal Design Conditions (Summer):

0 0
- Bed Rooms 23 C + 1 C
0 0
- Living/Dining 23 C + 1 C
0 0
- Kitchens 24 C + 1 C
0 0
- Admin/Offices 23 C + 1 C
0 0
- General Offices 23 C + 1 C
0 0
- Entrance Lobbies 23 C + 1 C
0 0
- Lounge Sitting Areas 23 C + 1 C
0 0
- Meeting Rooms 23 C + 1 C
- Service Rooms
0 0
- Service areas (uncontrolled) 25 C - 28 C
0 0
- Pump Rooms 25 C - 28 C
0 0
- Telephone /Electrical Room 25 C - 28 C
0 0
- Pantry, Toilets (uncontrolled) 25 C + 2 C
0 0
- Garbage Room 21 C + 2 C
0 0
- GSM room 21 C + 2 C
0 0
- LV Room 25 C - 28 C
The Pantries and toilets shall be extract ventilated to provide relief conditions. No direct
control of temperature is provided.
Relative humidity:
Shall not be directly controlled but shall typically be between 50% and 60%. The resultant
relative Humidity from the heat load calculation shall be 50% and not less than 45%.
00 00 03 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Rev.00 Page 1 of 23

C. Internal Heat Gains due to Lights and Equipment:
- Bed Rooms : 2 w/ft2

- Living Rooms : 3 w/ft2
- Dining : 3 w/ft2
- Office/ Admin. : 3 w/ft2
D. Population Density:
In general HVAC design will comply with ASHREA 62.1-2007 standard for default occupan-
cy density.
- Bed Rooms : 2 person

- Living Rooms : 6 to 8 person ( based on furniture Layout)
- Meeting Room : 15 ft2/person
- Office/Admin. : 100 ft2/person
E. Fresh Air Provision:
To ASHRAE 62.1-2007 standards, the HVAC system design will incorporate fresh air provi-
sions to the building at the following rates:
- Bed Rooms : 11 cfm/person

- Living Rooms : 11 cfm/person
- Meeting Room : 6 cfm/person
- Office : 17 cfm/person
F. Exhaust Provision:
- Toilets : 25 cfm for each Powder Room.
- Pantry : 50 cfm for each pantry.
- Office : General exhaust (10% lesser than the fresh air supply in order to
maintain +ve pressure in the offices)
- Other Areas : General exhaust (10% lesser than the fresh air supply in order to
maintain +ve pressure in the conditioned space)
G. Pressure Philosophy:
1. Fresh air requirement to each zone shall be generally determined by the level
of dirty extract to that same zone, or to a value as required for the levels of
occupancy in each zone.
2. Area requiring no dirty extract shall be pressurized by returning less air than
that of supply air.
3. Areas requiring dirty extract (toilets, kitchens, etc) shall be maintained
undernegative pressure by extracting volumes more than the supply volume.

4. The building shall be kept under positive pressure to prevent hot air infiltra-
tion.
H. Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management:

Project shall comply with following minimum requirement:
1. A fire condition sensed through the fire annunciation panel shall signal the
FAHU to switch off.
2. Fire dampers shall be positioned in all ductwork crossing firewalls, with the
exception of smoke exhaust ducts. They shall be triggered from a fusible link
connection cited in the damper.
3. All staircases shall be pressurized via dedicated supply air fans to keep the
staircases under positive pressure in case of fire. Pressure relief dampers
(rated at 65pa as per NFPA standards) shall be provided to relieve the ex-
cess pressure to open the door easily.
4. Typical floor corridors shall be provided with smoke management system by
means of smoke extract & Make up air system as required by local authori-
ties.
5. Fire man's Elevator & Lobby shall be pressurized. All other Passenger Eleva-
tor shall not be pressurized, since we have dedicated lobbied for all the ele-
vator.
6. Ground floor main Entrance lobby (Atrium) will be smoke ventilated at Level 4
high level, in order to maintain the smoke layer at 1830mm from the topmost
level. Necessary make up air will be provided through entrance door opening
or by means of relief damper which will be provided on the glass coordinating
with Architect.
7. Podium Car parking floors shall be ventilated by natural ventilation as per
Dubai civil defense requirement.
8. Basement Car parking floors shall be ventilated by ducted ventilation system
as per Dubai civil defense requirement.
The extract air fans shall run for normal ventilation at 6 air changes / hour, for high CO con-
centration and in smoke (fire) mode at 10 air changes / hour.
Make up air shall be provided through ramp opening of connected to ground floor.
CO sensors shall be provided in car park area to monitor the CO concentration.
I. Structure:
Roof “u” value 0.30 W/m2.K
Walls “u” value 0.56 W/m2.K
J. Glass:
“U” value 1.9 W/m2.K,
Shading coefficient 0.25
K. Infiltration:
Corridor/Service Cores 0.3 AC/Hr

L. Duct System:
1. Duct for Meeting/ Board rooms: 4 to 4.57 m/sec air velocity at main duct and
80% of this listed value at branches and 50% or less in the final run outs to
outlets.
2. Air Outlets for Guest rooms: 1.8 m/sec supply and 2.2 m/sec return at the
neck of air diffusers.
3. Duct for open offices and remaining areas: 4.8 to 5.33 m/sec air velocity at
main duct and 80% of this listed value at branches and 50% or less in the fi-
nal run outs to outlets.
4. Air Outlets open offices and remaining areas: 2.2 m/sec supply and 2.5m/sec
return at the neck of air diffusers.
M. Pipe Work System:
Pipe work Size Design velocity

15mm - 200mm 1.2 m/sec to 1.8m/sec
250mm - 500mm 2.0 m/sec to 2.4 m/sec
N. Noise Levels:
Maximum noise levels (Noise Criterion, which sets maximum limits on background noise
levels in occupied spaces due to operation of mechanical and electrical systems) generated
by the operation of building services installation in various areas shall be.
- Bed Rooms NC 30 - 35 (35-40 dB)
- Living Rooms NC 30 - 35 (35-40 dB)
- Meeting rooms NC 30 - 35 (35-40 dB)
- Offices NC 30 - 35 (35-40 dB)
- Corridors & Public Areas NC 40
- Kitchen, Laundry NC 45
- Plant rooms NC 60
Major equipment shall be isolated as follows:
 Pumps will be mounted on neoprene isolators if installed slab-on grade; and spring
isolators with inertia bases if installed over an occupied floor.
 Floor mounted fans on spring isolators. Inertia bases will be used if located over an
occupied floor.
 Air handling unit will be provided with internal spring isolation for unit fans.
 All fan discharge and intake connections shall be provided with acoustically lined
ducts and/or silencers.

 In-line fans will be provided with spring isolators and thrust restraints.
 Diffusers registers and grilles will be selected for an NC value of 25 or under.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Flexible Joints
5. Air Vents
6. Test Plugs
7. Mechanical sleeve seals.
8. Sleeves.
9. Escutcheons.
10. Grout.
11. Fire Rates Sleeves
12. Painting.
13. Wedge Anchors, Threaded Rods, Nut, Bolt and Washers
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
5. HDPE: High Density Poly Ethylene.
G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons.
B. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to BS 4515.
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to BS 4515.
1. Certify that each welder has passed qualification tests for welding processes involved
and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing
and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately
modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply
with requirements.
1.7 WELDING
A. General welding requirements:
1. All welding shall be generally in accordance with BS 4515 (Specification for field
welding of Carbon steel pipelines.) This will be modified where appropriate for other
materials and may be relaxed or varied by order of the Engineer, provided that the
Contractor has made a reasonably comprehensive request for an alternate.
2. Tack welds shall be performed by fully qualified welders and all tack welds shall be of
a length equal to twice the pipe thickness and shall fully penetrate the pipe walls.
3. Where welding is carried out in the proximity of inflammable materials special
precautions shall be taken to prevent risk of fire or other damage to the building
fabric.
4. Where oxyacetylene cutting equipment or any welding plant is being used by an
operative for any of the works defined in the contract documents, then fire
extinguishers shall be supplied and carried as part of the equipment. The operators of
cutting and welding equipment shall be trained in the use of the fire extinguishers
which they carry and all extinguishers shall be fully charged and ready for use. In all
cases, extinguishers shall be positioned immediately adjacent to the position where
cutting and welding is being carried out and shall be readily accessible for use in the
event of an emergency.
5. All accommodation benches, tools, welding plant, acetylene, oxygen or electricity,
filler rods and electrodes, which are necessary for installations where welding is
required shall be provided as part of this contract.
6. No welded joints shall be left partially completed. Any joints tacked in position must
be promptly finished within the working day. The Consultant will reject all work not
done in accordance with this instruction.
7. Where work is rejected, pipes must be machine cut at least 150 mm either side of
rejected welds and proper weld preparation must be used on the shortened sector.
Where shorter fill-in sections are required because of such rejection and reworking,
then new full sized lengths must be supplied by the Contractor.
8. Where pipes with longitudinal seams are specified, pipe seams shall be arranged
such that adjacent seams are opposed 45 deg. From each side of top dead centre
and branches shall be made only with weldable fittings.
9. All filler metals which are coated shall be protected from excessive moisture changes.
Filler materials or flexes which show any sign of deterioration shall not be used. If
requested by the Consultant samples of filler rods to be used shall be submitted to
him for approval before any work is done on site.
10. These may be submitted, at the Contractor’s cost, to an independent testing
laboratory for verification.
B. Tests for welder qualification
1. The purpose of the welder’s qualification tests is to determine the ability of the
welders to make sound and acceptable welds. Before any site welding on the
contract is allowed, each proposed welder shall carry out the tests required in the
presence of the Engineer, or the Owner’s Insurance Inspector.
2. Any weld test specimens which have been suitably marked and approved shall be
kept on site by a responsible person, so that they can be produced at any time, at the
request of the Engineer.
3. All accommodation benches, tools, welding plant, acetylene, oxygen, electricity, test
pieces, filler rods, electrodes, facilities for cutting and grinding, polishing, bending and
examining, which are necessary for welders qualification tests shall be provided by
the Contractor. In the absence of any items for inspecting the welds, the Engineer
may submit the finished samples to an independent laboratory for testing at the
Contractor’s expense.
4. Under no circumstances shall a welder be employed on the contract, either on or off
the site for welding operations other than those for which that welder is qualified.
5. Copies and records of all test reports shall be promptly given to and kept by the
Engineer.
6. Even welders holding a certificate for welding are to be tested at this job site in full
accordance with the specifications
C. Tests for qualification on steel pipes
1. Each test shall be carried out in accordance with the test procedures laid down in
B.S. 2640 and B.S.2971. The test position shall be similar to the working conditions

expected to be encountered and test pieces shall not be rotated to suit any individual
welding procedure. Each test sample shall be subjected to the following examinations
and tests:
2. Pipes up to 100 mm dia., Visual examination and normal tongue bend test. X-Ray
test.
3. Pipes over 100 mm dia., Visual examination and 2 normal tongue bend tests and 2
reverse bend test. X-Ray tests.
4. The Engineer may at his discretion require macro-etch examination in the event of
any doubt.
5. For a successful test the weld shall conform in all respect to the requirements of the
British Standards. Each welder who qualifies shall be issued with a metal punch with
an identifying number and shall stamp adjacent to each weld.
6. If any test sample does not reach the required standard, two further welds shall be
made and tested as detailed. Both of the re-tests shall be successful for the welder to
qualify for the work in this specification.
D. Testing of welded pipework installation
1. Testing of welded pipework installation shall be of non destructive test method.

Which is radiography and shall be 10% of total number of welding joints and
ultrasound testing for 90% of welding joints.
2. If a weld fails the testing requirements, then two additional welds made by the same
operative shall be tested, at no cost to the contract. If both additional welds are
successful then, in the case of destructive testing, the cost of making good shall be at
no cost to the Owner.
3. If either of the two additional welds fails the test requirements, then further tests on
other or all of the welds made by that operative shall be carried out, at the
Consultant’s discretion. All costs resulting from either of the two additional welds
failing the test requirements shall be at no cost to the Owner.
4. If either of the two additional welds fails, then operative concerned shall not make any
further welds on any service unless approved by the Engineer. The detailed
requirements concerning testing shall be as follows:
E. Destructive testing
1. Destructive testing and examination shall be exactly as detailed under Tests for
Welder Qualification.
F. Non-destructive testing:
1. Shall consist of radiographic inspection to comply with B.S. 2600 and B.S.2910. Non-
destructive testing shall be carried out by a specialist company approved by the
Engineer, but paid by the Contractor.
2. Radiographic tests shall be performed on a minimum of 5% of the welds sized
150mm or smaller. Radiographic tests shall be performed on a minimum of 10% of
the welds of piping measuring 160mm or larger. Ultrasonic tests shall be performed
on the remaining balance of the welds.
3. The specialist company shall provide a report on the radiographic tests which have
been made, including an interpretative results section. The report and films shall be
handed to the Engineer.
4. The material of the image quality indicator shall be radiographically similar to that of
the filler metal under examination.
5. The use of X-Ray and Gamma Radiation sources shall be in strict accordance with
the requirements of the lonizing Radiation (Sealed Sources) Regulations. The
required radiographic sensitivity shall not be more than 2, and the required image
details shall be readily seen on each radiograph.

6. Radiographs which do not comply with this requirement, whatever the cause, shall be
unacceptable and the weld in question shall be re-examined at no cost to the Owner.
7. All interested parties shall be advised well in advance where and when radiographic
tests are to be conducted, in order that appropriate precautions may be taken.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,
and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified
elsewhere in the specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to the relevant piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B. Pipe Threads: British Standards for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Divisions piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1. Nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2 mm maximum thickness unless thickness or

specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: Lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to British
Standards.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with British Standards for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1. CPVC Piping: BS 4346
I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
J. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling

housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.
K. PPR Heat Fusion Joining Systems: Pipe and fittings shall be Electro fusion welding,
according to the manufacturer recommended procedures. All electro bench welding and
coupling electro-fusion equipment shall be supplied directly from the manufacture. Piping
and joints shall be shop fabricated in a controlled environment when practical to ensure
proper alignment and welding of pipe.
1. The manufacturer shall provide fusion training for PPR piping. The personnel
operating heat fusion joining equipment and on-site joint inspector shall be trained by
the manufacturer or manufacture’s authorized representative. The fusion equipment
and operator shall be required to demonstrate successful field experience.
2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and
with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1. Underground Piping DN 40 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

2. Underground Piping DN 50 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-
cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11

equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint
end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-
joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 1725 kPa minimum working
pressure at 82 deg C.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 1035 or 2070 kPa

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-
face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 1035 or 2070 kPa
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at 107°C.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic
lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070 kPa minimum working pressure at
107° C.
2.6 FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A. Provide flexible connectors at all pumps, fan coil units, Roof Top Packaged units, Energy
Recovery Ventilators and condensers.
B. Elastomeric flexible connectors may be provided as expansion joints in water piping at set
intervals (not exceeding 18m), ensuring that thermal movement at any joint does not exceed
the allowable axial movement of the connector.
C. Construction of flexible connectors shall be Neoprene inner tube and outer cover with multi-
ply nylon tyre cord fabric reinforcement.
D. Standard duty flexible connectors shall be rated for working pressure and 1.5 times test
pressure, up to 105°C. Manufacturer shall certify that each unit is individually pressure
tested.
E. Connectors for pipe size 65 mm and above shall be of spherical single bellow design with
captive steel floating flanges to facilitate alignment. Flanges shall be epoxy powder coated.
Bellows shall have steel wire reinforcement at the lips.

F. Connectors for pipe size up to 50 mm shall be of double bellow design with threaded ends.
End connections shall be triangular flanges made from forged steel and epoxy coated. MI
unions will not be accepted.
G. Connectors for FCUs shall be of bronze coupler (union), for connections up to 25mm,
suitable for direct threaded or brazed connection (as required) to the FCU header, and as
above for 32mm and above sizes.
H. Usage of flexible hose / SS braided hose for FCU connections will not be accepted.
I. For copper piping up to 54 mm, provide double bellow flexible connectors with bronze
sweet-end connections at both sides, suitable for brazing to copper pipe.
J. For copper piping above 54 mm, provide standard spherical bellow connectors with steel
floating flanges, bolted at both ends to bimetallic flanges brazed to copper pipe.
K. Where flexible connectors are connected to unanchored piping or isolated equipment,

provide control units when pressure exceeds the maximum recommended for this
application by the manufacturer.
2.7 AIR VENTS
A. Air Vents shall be installed on all coils, at all high points of piping inside and outside plant
rooms, at the head of vertical rises and other high points required for efficient operation and
venting of system.
B. Air vents shall be provided at all high points in the pipework, whether indicated on the
drawings or not.
C. Automatic air vents shall have full brass body construction with leakproof polypropylene float
and non-corroding components. Air vents shall be complete with detachable isolation check
valves to facilitate removal of the main body without draining the system. The air outlet shall
be of brass and be suitable for direct flare connection to copper pipe. Unless otherwise
stated, air vents shall be suitable for 1600kPa working pressure and 2400kPa test pressure,
up to 110°C.
D. Cooling coils on air handling units, fan coils and ductwork systems, in addition to all high
points of pipe work which require venting, shall be provided with 6 mm diameter air cocks
unless some other form of venting is specified or has been indicated on the drawings.
E. For coils and similar cased appliances, the air cock shall be located for convenient operation
external to the outer casing.
F. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for the design and positioning of all air vents.
G. For fire protection systems (i.e. Sprinklers and wet risers) the vents shall be UL listed / FM
approved and approved by the Dubai Civil Defense Authority.
H. Vents on air separators shall be float actuated designed to purge free air from the system
and provide positive shut-off at the working pressure at maximum working temperature.
Vents shall be tightly sealed against loss of system water and prevent entrance of air in
negative pressure situations. These vents shall be constructed of cast iron and fitted with
components of stainless steel, brass, EPDM and silicon rubber.
I. Manual Vents

The vents on coils and other mechanical equipment shall be as per approved equipment
manufacturer’s standards. Only these may be manual type and all other vents shall be
automatic.
2.8 TEST PLUGS
A. Provide test plugs of solid brass or stainless steel at the following locations, whether
indicated on the drawings or not:
1. Across control valves, strainers, metering stations

2. Take-off and return of piping branch circuits
B. Plugs shall have leakproof neoprene twin-core design. They shall be suitable for receiving
temperature and pressure probes up to 3.5 mm stem diameter. Restraining straps shall be
present to prevent loss of plug caps.
C. Plugs shall be rated for 3500kPa working pressure up to 87°C.
D. Extended body test plugs shall be installed on insulated piping so that plug caps extend
beyond the outer surface of insulation. Tapering of insulation at test plug locations shall be
avoided.
2.9 MECHANICAL SLEEVE STALLS / LINK SEALS
A. Link seal modular seal assembly shall be provided as shown on the drawings for pipe
penetrations through valve chambers, basement / wall openings with pipe penetrations.
B. Sufficient quantity and type of Link-Seal modular seals required to effectively provide a
hydrostatic seal at each penetration shall be provided.
C. Each individual link shall be conspicuously and permanently identified / marked with the
name of the manufacturer and model number.
D. Link Seals shall be modular, mechanical type, consisting of inter-locking synthetic rubber
links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and the wall opening.
The elastometric element shall be sized and selected per manufacturer’s recommendations
and have the following properties as designated by ASTM. Coloration shall be throughout
elastomer for positive field inspection. Each link shall have a permanent identification of the
size and manufacturer’s name molded into it.
1. For Standard service Applications

o o
-40 to 180 F ( -40 to 80 C)
EPDM = ASTM D2000 M3BA510
Color = Black / Blue
E. Link Seaals shall be Lloyd’s, DNV and TUV certified for pressure tightness.
F. Link Seal Modular Seal Pressure Plates

1. Link Seal modular seal pressure plates shall be molded of glass reinforced Nylon
Polymer with the following properties:
IZOD Impact – Notched = 2.05 ft.-lb / in. per ASTDM D-256
Flexural Strength @ Yield = 30,750 psi per ASTDM D-790
Flexural Modulus = 1,124,000 psi per ASTDM D-790
Elongation Break = 11.07% per ASTDM D-638
Specific Gravity = 1.38 per ASTD D-792
2. All pressue plates shall have a permanent identification of the manufacturer’s name
molded into it.
G. All fasteners shall be size according to the link seal manufacturer’s recommendations and
latest technical data. Bolts, flange hex nuts shall be:
316 Stainless
H. Link Seals shall be installed at site by contractor using proper tools as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
I. Link Seals shall be only E.U / U.S.A origin supplied by an authorized local representative.
J. Supplier to provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, Mill Test report and Certificate
of country of origin ( USA / E.U. origin ).
K. Link Seal Modular Seal components and systems shall be manufactured at a plant with a
current ISO-9001:2000 registration. Copy of ISO-9001:2000 registration shall be a submittal
item.
L. Wall sleeve dimensions to be selected based on the OD of the penetrating pipe and the
suitable link seal model recommended by the manufacturer / supplier.
2.10 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends for all fire
rated sleeves at walls.
B. uPVC Pipe: BS 3505 Class ‘C’ for all non fire rated crossings.
C. Puddle Flanges: puddle flanges for all the crossing of the retaining wall , RCC water tanks
shall be provided with same material of the pipe work. For RCC water tanks puddle flanges
shall be stainless steel. Grade-316 with grit bonding up to water storage level.
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely
covers opening.

B. One Piece, Deep Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-
plated finish.
C. One Piece, Cast Brass Type: With set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome plated or rough brass.
D. Split Casting, Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated or rough brass.
E. One Piece, Stamped Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
G. One Piece, Floor Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H. Split Casting, Floor Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.12 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2. Design Mix: 40 MPa, 28 day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.13 FIRE RATED PIPE SLEEVES
A. Install Fire rated Pipe sleeve to conform to all rated building enclosures. Sleeve shall meet
BS 476 Part 20/22. Install per manufacturers instructions. Expansion rate for pipe collars to
be 25:1. Secure pipe as required by sleeve manufacture.
B. Use only fire stop products that have been UL1479, ASTM E-814 OR UL-2079 tested for
specific fire rated construction conditions as detailed below:
Material Type Area / Location Type of fire stop to be applied

PVC pipe dia Slab concrete/ fire Intumescent cast in fire stops
100 mm and walls Intumescent fire collars
above Intumescent fire wraps
PVC pipe dia 75 Slab concrete/ fire Intumescent fire stop sealant
mm and less walls
Metal Pipes / Slab concrete/ fire Intumescent fire stop sealant or
Metal ducts walls Elastomeric fire stop sealant
Cables Slab concrete/ fire Intumescent fire stop sealant
walls
Cable trays / Bus Slab concrete/ fire Fire stop mortar or fire stop
bars walls
Multiple metal Slab concrete/ fire Flexible bricks or fire stop board.
pipes walls

Installation shall be carried out by a certified, licensed or otherwise qualified by the fire
stopping manufacturer, specialist and the complete installation to be certified by the third
party (approved) as per civil defense regulation.
2.14 PAINTING
A. General Requirements: Where particular methods of finish and painting are not specified,
ensure following requirements are met:
1. Protect all metal work, plant, equipment, pipelines, ductlines, ancillaries, brackets and
supports against corrosion and oxidization.
2. Provide ferrous metals, machined or otherwise with protective coatings at
manufacturer’s works.
3. All electrical containment elements like tray, trunking, supports etc exposed to public
view like Car park etc shall be applied with primer and painted to a colour of
Engineer’s choice.
4. Ensure all items requiring on-site decorative finishes are provided primed to suit base
material and required finish.
5. Dry film thickness of the painting shall be minimum 150 to 200 microns.
B. Anti-corrosive and decorative paints systems shall be from one of the approved
manufacturers. Contractor shall make a proposal, for the painting and anticorrosive
treatments for various items of work for approval.
Painting Requirements:
Surface Anticorrosive coating / paint

1 All uninsulated steel pipework installed Two coats of Red Oxide primer. In
in conditioned space within the building addition apply 2 coats of synthetic
and within ceiling voids. enamel paint, colour to Engineer’s
choice for exposed to view pipes.
2 Uninsulated steel pipes installed Coats of two pack epoxy paint on all
outside the building on roof and in the pipework. Colour to engineers
basements. approval.
3 All galvanized steel pipes surfaces Two coats of Zinc chromate / calcium
exposed to view, un-insulated plumbate primer followed by two
coats of approved synthetic paint.
Colour to engineer’s choice (for fire
services colour shall be red).
4 All uninsulated PVC pipework surface Two coats of UV resistant white
exposed to sunlight, on roof or in car paint.
parks (except basement car parks)
5 Supports exposed to view in car parks, Galvanized and painted for corrosion
roof, and plant rooms. protection.
6 Supports in ceiling void 1 coat of red oxide primer and 2
coats of black enamel.
7 Support, brackets, hangers in car park Mild steel brackets, angels, channels
areas, roofs and other exposed and hangers, all galvanized after
locations like plant rooms. manufacture.

8 Man hole covers, gratings, gully traps, Tar based epoxy coating.
carpark and external areas.
Note: All equipment, pipework ancillaries shall be provided with factory applied paint.
o
Use heat resistant paint for applications to surfaces over 80 C. Ensure paints are applied in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.
2.15 WEDGE ANCHORS,THREADED RODS, NUT, BOLT & WASHERS
A. Fasteners and Anchors
1. Bolts and nuts: ASTM A307; ASTM A449.

2. Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts: ASTM A563.
3. Carbon Steel Washers: ASTM F436.
4. Carbon Steel Threaded Rod: ASTM A36; or ASTM A193 Grade B7.
5. Wedge Anchors: ASTM A510; or ASTM A108.
6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs: ASTM F593.
7. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F594.
8. Zinc Plating: ASTM B633.
9. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: ASTM A153.
2.16 DRILLED-IN ANCHORS
A. Wedge Anchors: Wedge type, torque-controlled, with impact section to prevent thread
damage and wedge dimples to prevent spinning during installation, complete with required
nuts and washers. Provide anchors with length identification markings conforming to ICBO
ES AC01.
1. Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel
anchors manufactured from materials conforming to ASTM A510 or ASTM A108 with
zinc plating in accordance with ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (SC1).
2. Exterior Use: Provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be AISI
[Type 316] stainless steel provided with stainless steel AISI [Type 316] nuts and
washers of matching alloy group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than
the specified minimum full-size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener.
Stainless steel nuts shall conform to ASTM F594 unless otherwise specified. Avoid
installing stainless steel anchors in contact with galvanically dissimilar metals.
B. Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchors: Torque-controlled, exhibiting follow-up expansion under load,
with provision for rotation prevention during installation.
1. Interior Use: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide carbon steel
anchors manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 898 Part 1, with zinc plating
equivalent to ASTM B633, Type III Fe/Zn 5 (5µm min.).
2. Exterior Use: Provide stainless steel anchors. Stainless steel anchors shall be
manufactured from materials conforming to ISO 3506 Part 1 and having corrosion
resistance equivalent to AISI [Type 316] stainless steel. Stainless steel anchors shall
be provided with stainless steel AISI [Type 316] nuts and washers of matching alloy
group and minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the specified minimum full-
size tensile strength of the externally threaded fastener. All nuts shall conform to ISO
3506 Part 2 unless otherwise specified. Avoid installing stainless steel anchors in
contact with galvanically dissimilar metals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division Sections specifying piping
systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment
rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern

type.
b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-
plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,
stamped-steel type.
f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: split-casting, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-
steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

rough-brass finish.
i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.
j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
M. All the products intended to use for this project shall be seismic (zone-2a) complaint as per
local Authority regulation.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas

or other wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 6.4 mm annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN 150.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes DN 150 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of
cast iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint.
P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25 mm annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter or Upvc class ‘C’ pipes,
machine cut, Flush with finished structure inside and to suite flashing on outside.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm and larger in diameter.
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.

Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25
mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve.
Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make watertight seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
U. CPVC sleeves may be used with approval from Engineer.
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division Sections
specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply British Standards, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to British Standard or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with British Standard.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F. Grooved joints: Apply on ASTM B-88 copper tubes for sizes – 65 mm and above as per
manufacturers instructions.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to British Standards.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
3. Contractor to provide any transitions required for threading piping between ASME
and British Standards.
H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
J. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with British Standards for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to BS 4346.
3. uPVC Piping – push fit to BSEN-1401-1, 1329 and BS-5254 & 5255.
K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to BS 4660.
L. HDPE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping DN 50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN 65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials
of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights
are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 100 mm larger in
both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods high tensile strength steel deformed bars grade 12mm dia to
connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel
rods on 450 mm centers around the full perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through
concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with
items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 40 MPa, 28 day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified.
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with BS4515.
3.7 INSTALLATION
A. Drilled-In Anchors:
1. Drill holes with rotary impact hammer drills using carbide-tipped bits. Drill bits shall be
of diameters as specified by the anchor manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings, all holes shall be drilled perpendicular to the concrete surface.
a. Embedded Items: Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded

items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Exercise care in drilling to avoid
damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. Notify the Engineer if
reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging prestressing tendons,
electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
b. Base Material Strength: Unless otherwise specified, do not drill holes in
concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design
strength.
2. Perform anchor installation in accordance with manufacturer instructions.

3. Wedge Anchors, Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Set
anchors to manufacturer’s recommended torque, using a torque wrench. Following
attainment of 10% of the specified torque, 100% of the specified torque shall be
reached within 7 or fewer complete turns of the nut. If the specified torque is not
achieved within the required number of turns, the anchor shall be removed and
replaced unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
4. Cartridge Injection Adhesive Anchors: Clean all holes per manufacturer instructions to
remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Holes do not
need to be cleaned for HIT-TZ Rods with HY-150 in accordance with ICBO ER-5942.
Holes may be dry, damp or wet. Inject adhesive into holes proceeding from the
bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid
introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. Follow manufacturer recommendations to
ensure proper mixing of adhesive components. Sufficient adhesive shall be injected
in the hole to ensure that the annular gap is filled to the surface. Remove excess
adhesive from the surface. Shim anchors with suitable device to center the anchor in
the hole. Do not disturb or load anchors before manufacturer specified cure time has
elapsed.
3.8 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.\
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout
END OF SECTION

SECTION 20 01 00
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING AND HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-01Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section,
and this Section is directly applicable to them.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Basic and supplemental requirements common to Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Work.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by a
specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to
this Project.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and
standards addressed within the Contract Documents.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. These definitions are included to clarify the direction and intention of these Specifications. For
further clarification, contact the Architect/Engineer.
1. Concealed / exposed: "Concealed" areas are those areas that cannot be seen by the building
occupants. "Exposed" areas are all areas, which are exposed to view by the building
occupants, including under counters, inside cabinets and closets, plus all mechanical rooms.
“Exterior” areas are those that are outside the building exterior envelope and exposed to the
outdoors.
2. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for
unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
3. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at Project Site including the actual
"unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,
finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
4. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended
use.
20 01 00 Basic Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Requirement Rev.00 Page 1 of 7

A. Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC systems shall be coordinated with other systems and trades
to include but not be limited to: Electrical systems, fire alarm, security systems, transport systems,
telephone and data systems.
B. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper
relation of Contractor’s Work to the building structure and to the Work of all trades. The Contractor
shall visit the premises and become thoroughly familiar with all details of the Work and working
conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the Architect/Engineer of any
discrepancy before performing any Work. Adjustments to the Work required in order to facilitate a
coordinated installation shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner or the Architect/Engineer.
C. All dimensional information related to new structures shall be taken from the appropriate Drawings.
All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actual measurements
made by the Contractor on the Site.
D. The Drawings are subject to the requirements of Reference Standards, structural and architectural
conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall
coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of Work.
Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended
ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All
exposed Work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless
otherwise noted.
E. When the Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe and ducts, the Contractor
shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with
proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping and duct systems are generally
intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as
possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all
required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all
finished areas.
F. Where core drilling of floor or wall penetrations is required, Work shall be performed in accordance
with Division 03 Specifications. Where applicable Division 03 Specifications are not included in the
Project, core drilling shall be in accordance with generally accepted standards, and be performed
by licensed personnel where applicable.
G. Certify in writing that neither the Contractor nor any of Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers will
supply any materials that contain any asbestos in any form for this Project.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All equipment, ductwork, and materials shall be delivered to the Project Site clean and sealed for
protection.
B. Take particular care not to damage the existing construction in performing Work. All finished floors,
step treads and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workers or their tools
and equipment during the construction of the Project.
C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust and dust/debris both before and after
installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection
must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

D. All material affected by weather shall be covered and protected to keep the material free from
damage while material is being transported to the Site and while stored at the Project Site.
E. During the execution of the Work, open ends of all piping and conduit, and all openings in
equipment shall be closed when Work is not in progress, and shall be capped and sealed prior to
completion of final connections, so as to prevent the entrance of foreign matter.
F. All equipment shall be protected during the execution of the Work. All ductwork and equipment
shall be sealed with heavy plastic and tape to prevent build-up of dust and debris.
G. All ductwork and air handling equipment shall be wiped down with a damp cloth immediately before
installation to ensure complete removal of accumulated dusts and foreign matter.
H. All plumbing fixtures shall be protected and covered to prohibit usage. All drains shall be covered
until placed in service to prevent the entrance of foreign matter.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, and local requirements, and
conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All equipment installed shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local
stock of repair parts.
C. Responsibility for furnishing proper equipment and/or material and ensuring that equipment and/or
material is installed as intended by the manufacturer, rests entirely upon the Contractor. Contractor
shall request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specific manufacturers
during the installation.
D. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new, free from all defects, suitable for the
intended use and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the best standard practice for
the type of Work involved. All Work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in their respective
trades, and the installations shall provide a neat, precise appearance. Materials and/or equipment
damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation shall not be repaired at the job Site
but shall be replaced with new materials and/or equipment.
E. Materials and equipment manufactured domestically are preferred when possible. Materials and
equipment that are not available from a domestic manufacturer may be by a non-domestic
manufacturer provided they fully comply with Contract Documents.
F. Prevention of Rust: Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by model
number; otherwise, surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust inhibiting coating.
2.2 NAMEPLATES
A. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog
number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. All data on nameplates shall be
legible at the time of Final Inspection.
B. Nameplates shall be black laminated rigid phenolic with white core. Nameplate minimum size shall
be 1 inch high by 3 inches long with 3/16-inch-high engraved white letters.

C. Nameplate Fasteners: Fasten nameplates to the front of equipment only by means of stainless
steel self-tapping screws. Stick-ons or adhesives will not be allowed unless the NEMA enclosure
rating is compromised, then only epoxy adhesive shall be used to attach nameplates.
D. Nameplate Information: In general, the following information is to be provided for the types of
electrical components or enclosures supplied with equipment.
1. Individual Starters, Contactors, Disconnect Switches, and Similar Equipment: Identify the
device, and voltage characteristics source and load served.
2.3 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS)
A. Except as otherwise noted, provide stainless steel or chrome plated brass floor and ceiling plates
around all pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., passing exposed through walls, floors or ceilings, in any
spaces except underfloor and plenum spaces.
B. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe or against the insulation on lines
that are insulated and positively secured to such pipe or insulation.
C. For finished ceiling installation, secure escutcheons to ceiling with escutcheon fasteners.
D. Plates will not be required for piping where pipe sleeves extend ¾-inch or more above finished
floor.
E. Round and rectangular ducts shall have closure plates (not chrome plated) made to fit accurately at
all floor, wall and ceiling penetrations.
2.4 ROOF PENETRATIONS AND FLASHING
A. Pipe, conduit and duct sleeves, pitch pockets and flashings compatible with the roofing installation
shall be provided and installed for all roof penetrations by a contractor qualified in such Work.
Installation shall comply with the Contract Documents and with FM General Data Sheets 1-28, 1-29,
1-31 & 1-49 along with the FM approval guide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Cooperate with trades of adjacent, related or affected materials or operations, and with trades
performing continuations of this Work in order to effect timely and accurate placing of Work and to
coordinate, in proper and correct sequence, the Work of such trades.
B. The size of equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular
manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor to determine that the equipment proposed will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings
shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable
arrangement.
C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors,
drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service
without disassembly of another part.
D. Space Requirements:

1. Consider space limitations imposed by contiguous Work in location of equipment and material.
Do not provide equipment or material which is not suitable in this respect.
2. Make changes in material and equipment locations of up to five (5) feet, to allow for field
conditions prior to actual installation, and as directed by the Architect/Engineer at no additional
cost to the Owner.
E. Contractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment
scheduled and indicated on the Drawings. Should any equipment be provided requiring changes to
the electrical design, the required electrical changes shall be made at no cost to the Owner.
F. Connections for equipment other than Divisions 21, 22, 23:
1. Rough-in and provide all gas, air, water, steam, sewer, etc. connections to all fixtures,
equipment, machinery, etc., furnished by the Owner and/or other trades in accordance with
detailed rough-in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of
the equipment connections, or as detailed.
2. After the equipment is set in place, make all final connections and provide all required pipe,
fittings, valves, traps, etc.
3. Provide all backflow preventers and air gap fittings required, using approved devices. In each
service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve.
On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap.
4. Provide all ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation of vent hoods,
fume hoods, etc.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable and local requirements, referenced standards and
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations.
C. Piping may be run exposed in rooms typically without ceilings such as mechanical rooms, janitor's
closets, tight against pan soffits in exposed "tee" structures, or storage spaces, but only where
necessary. Shutoff and isolation valves shall be easily accessible.
D. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduits run exposed in
machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building lines, except that piping
shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping and ducts run in furred ceilings, etc., shall be
similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All pipe openings shall be kept closed until the
systems are closed with final connections.
E. Prior to the installation of any ceiling material, gypsum, plaster or acoustical board, the Contractor
shall notify Owner’s Project Manager so that arrangement can be made for an inspection of the
above-ceiling area about to be "sealed" off. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the
Owner at least five (5) calendar days prior to the inspection.
F. Precedence of Materials:

1. The Specifications determine the nature and setting of materials and equipment. The Drawings
establish quantities, dimensions and details.
2. If interference is encountered, the following installation precedence of materials shall guide the
Contractor to determine which trade shall be given the "Right of Way":
a. Building lines
b. Structural members
c. Structural support frames supporting ceiling equipment
d. Electric tracked vehicle system
e. Pneumatic trash and linen system
f. Pneumatic tube system
g. Soil and drain piping
h. Vent piping
i. Supply, return and outside air ductwork
j. Exhaust ductwork
k. HVAC water and steam piping
l. Condensate piping
m. Fire protection piping
n. Natural gas piping
o. Medical/Laboratory gases
p. Domestic water (cold and hot, softened, treated)
q. Refrigerant piping
r. Electrical conduit
3. Coordinate fire suppression, plumbing and HVAC systems with transport systems as required
to maintain transport system right-of-way.
3.3 TESTING
A. When any piece of mechanical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to
operate the equipment, Contractor may do so, provided that Contractor properly supervises the
operation, and has the Owner’s written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however,
not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or
date of Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first.

B. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall
properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency
list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance
certification will be the same date.
C. Before the Work is accepted, an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the installed
materials and/or equipment shall personally inspect the installation and operation of manufacturer’s
materials and/or equipment to determine that materials and/or equipment are properly installed and
in proper operating order. The qualifications of the manufacturer’s representative shall be
appropriate to the technical requirements of the installation. The qualifications of the manufacturer’s
representative shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. The decision of the Owner concerning
the appropriateness of the manufacturer’s representative shall be final. Testing and checking shall
be accomplished during the course of the Work where required by Work being concealed, and at
the completion of the Work. In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a
signed statement from each manufacturer’s representative certifying as follows:"I certify that the
materials and/or equipment listed below have been personally inspected by the undersigned
authorized manufacturer's representative and is properly installed and operating in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations."
D. Check inspections shall include piping, equipment, heating, air conditioning, insulation, ventilating
equipment, controls, mechanical equipment and such other items hereinafter specified or
specifically designated by the Architect/Engineer.
E. The Contractor shall execute, at no additional cost to the Owner, any tests required by the Owner or
the National Fire Protection Association, ASTM, etc. Standards listed. The Contractor shall provide
all equipment, materials and labor for making such tests.The Owner will pay reasonable amounts of
fuel and electrical energy costs for system tests. Fuel and electrical energy costs for system
adjustment and tests, which follow Substantial Completion by the Owner, will be borne by the
Owner.
F. Notify the Owner’s Project Manager and the Architect/Engineer in writing at least seven (7) calendar
days prior to each test and prior to other Specification requirements requiring Owner and
Architect/Engineer to observe and/or approve tests.
G. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall include
date, time, personnel performing, observing and inspecting, description of the test and extent of
system tested, test conditions, test results, specified results an other pertinent data. Data shall be
delivered to the Architect/Engineer as specified under "Requirements for Final Acceptance." The
Contractor or Contractor’s authorized job superintendent shall legibly sign all Test Log entries.
H. Refer to Commissioning Specification Sections for additional Start-up, pre-functional and

operational checkout, and for functional performance test procedures.
3.4 TRAINING
A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and instruction shall be provided as specified under the
Division 01 Section entitled “Project Closeout Procedures.”
B. Specific training and operating instructions for individual equipment components shall be as
specified in the individual Specification Sections.
END OF SECTION 200100

SECTION 07 84 13
PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this
Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Applications of fire stop systems include:
1. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical bus
ways and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal
barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.
2. Openings and penetrations in fire-rated partition or walls containing fire doors.
3. Multiple electrical boxes located within the same stud cavity.
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by
a specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable
to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with all applicable requirements and
standards.
D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
E. ASTM E-814 Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA):
F. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(UL):
G. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
07 84 13 Penetration Fire Stopping Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

H. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
I. UL Fire Resistance Directory:
1. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR)
2. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
3. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW)
J. Joint Systems (XHBN)
1. Ìnternational Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop System Engineering

Judgments
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Fire stopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire-rated

construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and
hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
Provide firestop systems that have been manufactured and installed to maintain performance
criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Submittal
Procedures Section.
B. Product Data:
Submit product data including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA product sheet, for specific products.
C. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components.
D. Quality Assurance Submittals:
Submit the following:
1. Certificates: Product certificates stating that materials comply with specified

performance characteristics and physical requirements.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions.
A. Source Limitations:
Obtain fire stop through-penetration and joint systems from a single manufacturer.
B. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on-site during initial

installation of fire stop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and
installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations
published in their literature and drawing details.
C. Fire stop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814, tested assemblies that
provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated.
D. Proposed fire stop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having
local Jurisdiction.
E. Fire stop Systems do not re-establish the structural integrity of load bearing
partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural
engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.
F. For those fire stop applications that exist for which no tested system is available through a
manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar system designs or
other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval
prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the
International Fire stop Council (September 7, 1994).
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels.
B. Store materials protected from weather and damage and at temperature conditions in
compliance with manufacturer's requirements.
C. Before handling, read product data sheets and material safety data sheets. Do not use
damaged or expired materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE STOP SYSTEM
A. Penetrations of fire resistant assemblies:
Penetrations of pipes, tubes, conduits, wires, cables, ducts and vents through fire resistant
walls and shaft enclosures, and floor, ceiling, and roof elements of fire resistant assemblies
shall be protected in accordance with the following:
1. Non-combustible penetrations:
Non insulated metal ducts and non-combustible pipes shall be protected by an

approved through-penetration protection system that has been tested in accordance
with ASTM E-814". The annular gap around the penetrations shall be packed with
mineral wool/ rock wool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with Fire stop silicone
sealant to an appropriate depth meeting requirements of approved local authorities
systems.

2. Combustible penetrations:
Metal ducts with combustible jackets or insulation shall be protected by an approved

through-penetration protection system that has been tested in accordance with ASTM
E-814". The annular gap around the duct shall be packed with mineral woo!/ rock wool
and the ends shall be filled and sealed with Fire stop in tumescent water-based
sealant to an appropriate depth meeting requirements of approved local authorities
systems.
3. Single cable or bunched cables
The annular gap around cable or bunches of cables shall be packed with rock
wool/mineral wool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with UL approved Fire stop
in tumescent water-based sealant to an appropriate depth meeting requirements of
approved local authorities systems.
4. Cable trays crossings
Permanent system: approved Fire stop in tumescent water-based sealant shall be

applied around and between the cables. The opening shall be sealed with trowalable
fire resistant cement-based mortar.
When making the seal, refer to manufacturer's approved systems for instructions and
thickness of mortar to be applied;
Temporary system where future changes are expected: approved ready-to-use, in

tumescent flexible block firmly seated shall be built up inside the opening sealing it
completely. Fire stop in tumescent water-based sealant shall be applied around and
between the cables.
When making the seal, refer to manufacturer's approved systems for instructions.
B. Non metal pipe crossings less than 50 mm diameter:
The annular gap around the penetrates shall be packed with mineral wool/ rock wool and the
ends shall be filled and sealed with approved Fire stop in tumescent water-based sealant to an
appropriate depth meeting requirements of local authorities.
C. Non metal pipe crossings of 50 mm diameter and more:
The annular gap around the penetrations shall be packed with mineral wool/ rock wool and the
ends shall be filled and sealed with approved Fire stop in tumescent water-based sealant to an
appropriate depth meeting requirements of approved systems.
The pipes shall be provided with a approved pre-assembled graphite based in tumescent jacket
contained in a metal housing, fixed around the pipe with metal fixings.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. UL listed Materials complying DCD Requirement (Hilti CP 606, FS One, CP636 & CP6484 etc..)

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:
Comply with manufacturer's product data including product technical bulletins, product
catalogue installation instructions and product carton instructions.
B. EXAMINATION
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed
and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.
C. PREPARATION
Prepare surface to receive fire stop system products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for surface preparation.
Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before,
during and after installation of fire stopping.
D. INSTALLATION
Install fire stop materials in accordance with local authorities’ regulations.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through-penetration or construction

joint fill materials.
Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal.
Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to
installation of fire stop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains
to duct work.
E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing
areas.
Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities.
F. PROTECTION
Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.
END OF SECTION 07 84 13

SECTION 21 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install high efficiency single- and three-phase
electric motors required for equipment supplied under this division of Work as indicated by
the Contract Documents, with supplementary items necessary for proper installation. Refer
to Electrical Drawings for motor starter sizes. Disconnect switches to be furnished in Division
26.
B. The Fire Suppression Subcontractor shall furnish starters for Fire Suppression Work. Motor
starters shall be provided in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. Some motors
furnished in mechanical equipment rooms shall have starters furnished and installed as part
of Division 26 (as per Specification Section 26 29 14, Motor Starters). Coordinate with
Division 26.
C. Motors rated at less than 190 Watts and intended for intermittent operation need not conform
to these Specifications.
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified
by a specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
applicable to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements
and standards addressed within the following references:
1. AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. AFBMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
3. EISA - The Energy Independence & Securities Act 2007.
21 05 13 Common Motors Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment’s Rev.00 Page 1 of 10

4. ANSI/EEE 112 – Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
5. ANSI/NEMA/ MG 1 – Motors and Generators Part 31.
6. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
7. ANSI C19 – Industrial Control Apparatus.
8. NEMA ICS – Industrial Control and Systems.
9. NEMA RV 3 - Application and Installation Guidelines for Flexible and Liquidtight Flexible
Metal and Nonmetallic Conduits
10. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical
Metallic Tubing, and Cable
11. NEMA FB 2.20 - Selection and Installation Guidelines For Fittings for Use With Flexible
Electrical Conduit and Cable
12. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports
13. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports
14. NEMA OS 3 - Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes
15. UL 508 – Industrial Control Equipment.
16. ANSI/EEE 117 – Standard Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of Insulating
Materials for Random Wound AC Electric Machinery.
17. ANSI/NEMA MG 2 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection,
Installation and Use of Electric Motors.
18. ANSI/UL 674 – Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
19. ANSI/UL 1004 – Electric Motors.
A. Motors associated with variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be inverter-duty rated, and
provided with grounded shaft or ceramic bearings to insulate shaft, and Class F 105 degrees
C rise insulation. Ref. NEMA MG1 Part 31.
B. Conform to NFPA 70.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. All motors provided by the Contractor shall be of the same manufacturer unless they are an
integral part of the piece of equipment to which they are attached.
B. Product Data: Provide the following information for each motor:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Rated full load horsepower.

3. Rated volts.
4. Number of Phases.
5. Insulation Class.
6. Frequency in Hertz.
7. Full load amperes (FLA).
8. Locked rotor amperes (LRA) at rated voltage or NEMA code letter.
9. Nominal speed at full load (rpm).
10. Service factor.
11. NEMA design letter.
12. NEMA machine type (ODP, WP-I, TEFC, etc.).
C. For motors one horsepower and larger, include the following additional information:
1. NEMA frame size.
2. NEMA insulation system classification. For motors required to be installed outdoors,

include information showing compliance for outdoor application.
3. Maximum ambient temperature for which motor is designed.
4. Time rating.
5. Bearing size and type data.
6. Guaranteed efficiency and power factor at full load, 75% load, 50% load, 25% load and
0% load.
D. For motors 20 horsepower and larger, include the following additional information:
1. No load amperes.
2. Safe stall time.
0% load.
4. Motor manufacturer’s recommended maximum power factor correction capacitor (kvar)

that can safely be switched with the motor.
5. Expected value of corrected power factor at no load, 50 percent, 75 percent and full load.
6. Full load amperes with corrected power factor.
7. Maximum guaranteed slip at full load.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly Drawings, bearing data
including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.
F. Alternate Motors:
1. If a motor horsepower rating larger than indicated is offered as a substitute and

accepted, provide required changes in size of conductors, conduits, motor controllers,
overload relays, fuses, circuit breakers, switches and other related items at no change in
the Contract price.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum one-year manufacturer’s warranty including coverage for motors one
horsepower and larger.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Electrical Service: Refer to Drawing schedules for required electrical characteristics.
C. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment and for temperature rise in
accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor and motor
enclosure type.
1. Totally Enclosed Motors: Design for a service factor of 1.00 and an 80 degrees C
maximum temperature rise in the same conditions.
2. Explosion Proof Motors: UL approved and labeled for hazard classification, with over
temperature protection.
D. Visible Stainless Steel Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles,
RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer’s name and model
number, Service Factor, Power Factor, efficiency.
E. Electrical Connection: Provide adequately sized metal electrical connection box for conduit
connection. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide
metal electrical box for conduit connection.
F. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest ANSI, IEEE and NEMA Standards and
shall be fully coordinated with the equipment served, shall be of sizes and electrical
characteristics scheduled and of approved manufacturer as listed below or of the same
manufacturer as the equipment which they serve. Nameplate rating of motors shall match
the characteristics scheduled.
G. All motors shall be designed for normal starting torque unless the driven machine requires
high starting torque and shall be selected for quiet operation, free from magnetic hum.

H. All motors shall be provided with adequately sized electrical connection box for attachment of
flexible conduit. Paragraph 1.03 of this specification refers to the NEMA standards and
publications relevant to applications and use of both metal and liquid tight flexible conduit.
When motors are connected to driven equipment by the use of a V-belt drive, they shall be
furnished with adjustable rails.
I. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specified or noted otherwise on the
construction drawing.
J. Motors ¼ to ¾ hp shall be Subtype II and meet the minimum requirements of EPAct92 for
minimum NEMA nominal efficiency motors.
K. Motors 1 to 200 hp shall be Subtype I and meet the minimum requirements of NEMA Table
12-12 for NEMA premium efficiency motors.
2.2 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service
Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.
F. Single phase motors, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase,
capacitor start, induction run, 120 volt, 60 hertz motors with dripproof enclosures except as
hereinafter specified. These motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection and shall
be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.
2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speeds: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise)
insulation, minimum Service Factor as specified herein, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings,
automatic reset overload protector.

E. Single phase motors shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent split phase,
capacitor start, induction run, 120 volt, 60 hertz motors. These motors shall have built-in
thermal overload protection with automatic reset and shall be rated for temperature rise as
hereinbefore specified for 3-phase motors.
2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall

have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
F. Enclosures shall be of the open dripproof type with a service factor as specified herein and
Class B insulation rated at 90 degrees C temperature rise measured above 40 degrees C
room ambient condition at full load, unless otherwise noted.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
H. Single phase motors, in general, shall be less than 3/4 horsepower and shall be permanent
split phase, capacitor start, induction run, 120 volt, 60 hertz motors. These motors shall have
built-in thermal overload protection and shall be rated for temperature rise as hereinbefore
specified for 3-phase motors.
2.5 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A. Enclosures shall be of the open drip proof type with a service factor as specified herein and
B. All motors 3/4 horsepower and larger, unless smaller motors are indicated to be supplied as
3-phase, shall be 3-phase and shall be squirrel cage high efficiency induction type with
standard NEMA frame sizes.
C. Three phase motors not connected to variable frequency drives are to be protected for phase
loss and phase unbalance protection.
D. Motors 1 HP and larger shall have integral frames.
E. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque.
F. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
G. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B
characteristics.
H. Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B

motors.

I. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
J. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to
determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance
data.
K. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets
of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
L. Bearings:
1. Ball or roller type, double shielded with continuous grease relief to accommodate
excessive pressure caused by thermal expansion or over lubrication.
2. All motor bearings shall be factory prepacked with a nondetergent lubricant and shall be
provided with lubrication fitting arranged to provide easy access when installed on the
driven apparatus except as noted hereinafter.
3. Permanently lubricated factory-sealed motors may be provided in fractional horsepower

sizes only where they are an integral part of a piece of approved apparatus.
4. All bearings shall be designed for L-10, 40,000 hour minimum life hours of continuous
service. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt centerline at
end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Direct driven fans may require specific bearings
other then ball type, verify equipment specification where motor may be used where
bearing life requirement may exceed L-10 rating. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
M. Sound Power Levels: Refer to ANSI/NEMA MG 1.
N. Part Winding Start (Where Indicated): Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with
rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel. Bearings shall be double shielded
with waterproof non-washing grease.
O. Nominal Efficiency and Power Factor: Meet or exceed values as scheduled at load and rated
voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112.
P. Motors one horsepower and larger shall be provided with a copper frame grounding lug of
hydraulic compression design, for installation by the electrical subcontractor.
2.6 STARTING EQUIPMENT
A. Each motor shall be provided with proper starting equipment. Starting equipment shall be
furnished by this Division.
B. Relays and equipment supplied by this Contractor shall be integral with electrical equipment
supplied.
2.7 RATING
A. Speed and Size: Speed and approximate horsepower ratings are specified in equipment
Specification Sections or are indicated on the Drawings. Furnish motors sufficiently sized for
the particular application and with full-load rating not less than required by the driven
equipment at specified capacity. Size motors so as not to overload at any point throughout
the normal operating range.

B. Voltage:
1. Single phase: 115 volts for 120-volt nominal system voltage.
2. Three phase: 200 volts for 208-volt nominal system voltage.
4. Three phase: 230/460 volts for 240/480-volt nominal system voltage.
C. Frequency: 60 Hertz.
D. Efficiency: Provide energy-efficient motors meeting the requirements of NEMA MG1-12.55A,

Table 12Y and MG 1.41.3. Efficiency to be determined by testing in accordance with NEMA
MG 112.53 using IEEE 112A – Method B.
E. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1-12.47 but not less than those indicated per the
Table below.
F. Table: NEMA Open Motor Service Factors:
Horsepower 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM

1/6 – 1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35
½ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15
¾ 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15
1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15
1.5-150 and above 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
150
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable and local requirements, referenced standards
and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations
C. Properly install and align motors after installation on the driven equipment.
D. Motor feeders shall be free of splices. In special cases when splice-free feeders are
impractical, splices may be allowed given prior written approval from the Owner.
E. Use crimp-on, solderless copper terminals on the branch circuit conductors. For motors 20
horsepower and larger, use 5300 Series 3M motor lead splicing kit or approved equal.
F. When the motor and equipment are installed, the motor’s nameplate must be in full view.

3.2 TESTING
A. General: Provide all necessary instruments, labor and personnel required to perform motor
inspection and testing.
B. Inspection: Inspect all motors for damage, moisture absorption, alignment, freedom of
rotation, proper lubrication, oil leaks, phase and rotation and cleanliness, and report any
abnormalities to Owner before energizing.
C. Tests: Motor full load current and full load voltage shall be measured. Motor phase loss and
phase unbalance protection shall be tested. Motor Test Report forms included at the end of
this Section shall be completed and submitted prior to Substantial Completion.
D. Energizing: After installation has been thoroughly checked and found to be in proper
condition, with thermal overloads in motor controllers properly sized and all controls in place,
energize the equipment at system voltage for operational testing.
E. Motor Test Report Form:

DATE
SHEET OF
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NO.
MOTOR DESIGNATION , LOCATION
HP , FLA , LOCATION
PHASE LOSS AND PHASE UNBALANCE PROTECTION

INSULATION CLASS
SERVED FROM PANEL/MCC
MEASURED CONDITIONS
TEMPERATURE: degrees F
RELATIVE HUMIDITY: %
CURRENT (AMPS): ∅A , ∅B , ∅C
VOLTAGE (VOLTS): ∅B , ∅BC , ∅CA
∅AN , ∅BN , ∅CN

SECTION 21 05 17
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.4 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-
iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.
D. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.
F. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
21 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire Suppression piping, Rev.00 Page 1 of 6
G. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.Include clamping ring,
bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling
annular space between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure
plates to sealing elements.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large
enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.
1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP
sleeves.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve- seal
system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for
sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor
level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal
pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified
in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at

service piping entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and
for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and
make a watertight seal.
3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than 65mm : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
b. Piping 65mm and Larger : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than 65mm : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system
b. Piping 65mm and Larger : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
system
system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller 65mm : Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
b. Piping 65mmand Larger : Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
SECTION 21 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.

2. Piping pressure and Temperature test plugs.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 21 10 00 Section " Water Based Fire Suppression System"

2. Division 21 13 19 Section " Pre Action Sprinkler System"
3. Division 21 13 39 Section " Foam Water System ".
4. Division 21 22 00 Section " Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System ".
5. Division 21 31 13 Section " Fire Pump".
standards addressed within all references.
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. B40.100-2013 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
2. B40.200-2008 Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading
E. International Code Council (ICC):

1. IPC-2018 International Plumbing Code
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70–2020 National Electrical Code (NEC)
21 05 19 - Meters and Gages for Fire Suppression Piping Page 1 of 3

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified. Include scale range, ratings, and
calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit a meter and gage schedule
showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and
gage.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under
specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1
Section "Project Closeout". Include data for the following:
2. Piping pressure and Temperature test plugs.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type, bottom
connection, liquid-filled.
B. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
D. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi.

2. All fluids: 2 times operating pressure.
2.2 PRESSURE GAUGE ACCESSORIES
A. Syphon: 1/4-inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each end.
B. Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc. Disc material
shall be suitable for fluid served and rated pressure.
2.6 PIPING PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing valve-type
core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a dial-type thermometer or
pressure gage. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded cap with retention chain and body of
length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure rating shall be 500 psig.
B. Core Material: Conform to the following for fluid and temperature range:
1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to 93 deg C): Neoprene.

PART3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 requirements.
3.2 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge valve, located on pipe at most readable
position.
B. Install as shown on plans, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Pressure Gauge Ball Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon in lieu of snubber for
steam pressure gages.
D. Pressure Gauge Accessories:
1. Install ball valve between system and pressure gauge.

2. Install in piping tee with snubber.
E. If applicable, cut rubber nipple on top of pressure gauge per manufacturer recommendations.
3.3 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plugs: Install where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.
B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked
and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

SECTION 21 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVE FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1. Butterfly Valves
2. OS & Y Gate Valves
3. Check Valves
4. Ball Valves
5. Air Vents and Drain Valves
6. Fire Department Connection
1. Division 21 10 00 Section "Water Based Fire Suppression system"

2. Division 21 13 19 Section "Pre Action Sprinkler system"
3. Division 21 13 39 Section "Foam Water System"
4. Division 21 22 00 Section " Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System ".
5. Division 21 31 13 Section " Fire Pumps ".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
3. NRS: Non rising stem.
4. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
5. RS: Rising stem.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
accessories. All the types of valves to be submitted as samples for approval.
21 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. WRAS Compliance: WRAS approved materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block checks valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
hand wheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES, GENERAL
A. All fire protection water control valves within the building shall be either wedge gate valves
with painted iron wheel handles, shall have gland followers in stuffing boxes, and shall be
constructed so that they may be repacked while open and under pressure, or slow-closing
gear-operated butterfly valves. All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and
working pressure cast or stamped on body. All fire protection valves are to be Civil Defense
Authority and NFPA approved. All valves shall be UL listed FM approved. All valves shall be
with screwed, flanged, or mechanical coupling ends as required by the piping system in
which they are installed.
B. Valves shall be selected for the working pressure required. All isolating valves and control
valves shall be provided with the proper and efficient operation and maintenance of the
entire systems and as may be required by the Water Supplies Department. All valves
supplied shall be suitable for the working pressure and test pressure of the various water
supply system.
C. Furnish all valves and accessory material necessary in the piping whether or not shown on
drawings as follows.
D. All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall be coated with oil
and graphite.
E. Packing’s should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.

F. Plastic or metal plates (rustless) shall be provided to indicate the open/close status as well
as the use of each valve in the pump and tank rooms, and in the town main.
2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Use for floor/ zone control valves.
B. Butterfly valves to have cast iron full lug body, 316 stainless steel stem with bronze
bushings and aluminum bronze disc.
C. Valves 100 mm and larger, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, iron body, 316 stainless steel
upper and lower stems, bronze disc and copper alloy bearings.
D. The stem journals will be a multiple seal design providing for completely independent seals.
The stem disc assembly will be such that the need for pins, screws or bolts is not required.
Positive stem retention to be provided to permit removal of handle or actuator while under
full operating pressure.
E. The valve seats to consist of replaceable resilient elastomer.
F. Valves to be supplied with enclosed worm gear operator and with built-in micro switches for
supervisory monitoring purposes.
G. Valve body to be full-lug pattern to comply with and be compatible with flanges of
appropriate pressure rating. No semi-lug valves are acceptable.
H. Valve shall have flag indicator and be factory wired for tamper switch installation.
2.3 OS & Y GATE VALVES
A. Bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, wedge gate, iron body, bronze trim with flanged
ends, threaded or grooved ends.
B. Valves shall be used at riser control valves and fire pump control valves.
C. Gate valves to be backseating and suitable for repacking under pressure. Packing to be
non-asbestos.
D. Valves 50 mm (2 in) and smaller, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, bronze to ASTM B61
solid wedge and screwed ends. OS & Y 1400 Pa (water, oil gas)
E. Valve 65 mm and larger, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, iron body bronze mounted, OS
& Y solid wedge, flanged ends, 1200 kPa (water).
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. Check valves shall be of materials similar to the gate valves for the appropriate systems in
which they will be installed. All check valves shall be of slow closing type to eliminate the
sudden surge in the pipe line on closing.
B. Valves 50 mm and smaller, bronze to ASTM B61 designed of both horizontal and vertical
mounting replaceable composition disc, screwed cap and ends.
C. Valves 65 mm and larger, iron body, Underwriters Laboratories pattern, bronze mounted,
regrind renew bronze disc and seat ring, bolted cap, designed for either horizontal or vertical
mounting, flanged ends.
D. Swing Type: Use for water and low pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller with
screwed bonnet, screwed end; 65mm and larger with bolted bonnet, flanged end or grooved
end. Valves to have renewable bronze seat and disc.
E. Silent Type: Use wet riser pumps. Valves to have cast iron body and bronze or stainless
steel trim and to be of the center guide type, with flanged end or grooved end.
F. Working pressure shall be 150% greater than the system pressure and of minimum PN16 or
class 250.
2.5 BALL VALVES
A. Use for sprinkler floor control valve trim, pump trim, hose reel system and as drain valves.
B. Provide ball valves of the bronze top-entry body type, having a straight-through full port flow
passage. Design to permit disassembly without removing body from line.
C. Construct seats and all gland packing of Teflon. Lever handle to be vinyl covered. Body to
be 2-piece screwed end.
D. Provide lever for quarter turn operation; lever to indicate open or closed position.
E. When used as drain valves, provide with hose thread and brass cap with chain. Cap to be
rated for full system pressure.
F. Ball float valves in nominal sizes up to and including 50mm dia. shall be to BS1212 part 1 In
brass with copper float to BS1968
G. Ball float valves in nominal sizes up to and including 76mm dia. shall be to BS1212 part-1
H. In cast iron with bronze trim and copper ball float to BS1968 With flanged ends, flanges to
BS4504, part I, rated at working pressure involved but in no case less than PN10.
2.6 AIR VENTS AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Air vents and drain valves shall be provided at high points and low points respectively in all
piping systems.
B. Air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless steel float and
guides, and noncorrodible valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by a
lock-shield valve.
C. Drain valves shall be connected to the nearest building floor drain or drain point of adequate
size
D. All components shall be UL listed, FM approved.
2.7 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Provide breeching inlets, UL listed/ FM Approved, flush type fire department connection
selected to meet local fire department requirements and complete with clapper valves,
female swivels, cap and chains. A Breeching inlet shall be provided at ground floor level.
The inlet couplings shall be not less than 600mm nor more than 1500mm above the finished
floor level.
B. Provide connections to suit the local fire department requirements.

C. Finish for the cabinet for housing fire department connection shall be stainless steel
D. Equip each Siamese connection with check valve with automatic ball drip piped to nearest
floor drain.
E. Provide identification signage in the required languages and in accordance with local fire
department requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
G. Do not pressurize the valves under closed condition.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications and comply with civil defense
requirements.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 21 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install chain wheel operators on valves DN 100 and larger and more than 2400 mm above
floor. Extend chains to 1520 mm above finished floor elevation.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 00 Section 00 00 03 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic
piping joint construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

SECTION 21 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Divison-01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the following:
1. Hangers, supports, and anchors for fire protection equipment, tanks, and piping
systems.
2. Supplementary steel for support or attachment of fire protection tanks, equipment,

and piping to general construction elements of the project.
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless
identified by a specific edition date.
D. IBC: International Building Code
E. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
1. NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
2. NFPA 14: Standard for the Installation of Stand pipe and Hose Systems
3. NFPA 16: Standard for the Installation of Foam water sprinkler and Foam water spray
system.
4. NFPA 2001: Standard for the Installation of Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
21 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression piping and Equipment’s Rev.00 Page 1 of 12
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed clause-wise compliance statement.
B. Compliance statement must include response to all the points under Quality Assurance.
C. Product technical literature for each type of hanger / support and seismic restraint.
D. Shop drawings for multiple piping supports and trapeze hangers. Include design calculations
and indicate size and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS SP58 (Pipe Hangers and
Supports – Materials, Design and Manufacture).
B. Clevis or Band Hangers used for sprinkler system piping shall be UL listed.
C. All manufactured hangers and supports shall be fully hot-dipped galvanized post
manufacture, according to ASTM B633 SC3.
D. Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support
and trapeze shall be done by a qualified engineer.
E. Detailed seismic force calculations shall be provided to support the recommended design of
the seismic bracing system.
F. Test certificate for heat aging at 110° C, as per ASTM D2240, shall be furnished for EPDM
gasket used as separation between pipe and hangers.
G. Each hanger and support shall have the manufacturer’s name and part number stamped on
it.
H. All hangers and supports shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001 certified facility.
Manufacturer’s ISO certificate, clearly stating Pipe Supports within the scope of registration,
shall be furnished.
I. Country of Origin certificate shall accompany supplies, indicating the actual place of
manufacture of goods.
J. Pipe hangers and supports and accessories shall be hot dipped galvanized and from the
same manufacturer.
K. All strut channels, C channels & L angles, threaded rods, nuts, washers shall be hot dipped
galvanized and from the same manufacturer.
L. Structural Calculations / Recommendations shall be submitted by the manufacturer and

shall be checked and verified by a professional structural engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Hangers for all services shall provide means of vertical pipe level adjustment after
installation.
B. Where axial pipe expansion or contraction is indicated on account of thermal changes in the
fluid medium, roller-based hangers and supports or Teflon based slide assemblies shall be
provided for the entire pipe length. Chilled water or hot water pipe runs of over 20m without
changes in direction shall always be supported on roller based or sliding supports.
C. Heavy-duty steel trapezes to support multiple pipes shall be designed for the combined
weight of pipe, water and adjacent fittings, and field fabricated from ASTM A36 structural
steel channel.
D. Hangers and supports shall be fully hot-dipped galvanized post manufacture as standard,
according to ASTM B633 SC3.For severely corrosive conditions, as determined by the
Engineer, provide epoxy powder coated finish over hot-dipped galvanized, with a 1000-hour
salt spray test rating as per ASTM B117. Alternatively, hot dip galvanized finish according to
ASTM A123 may be provided.
E. Hangers and supports shall be made from mild steel as standard.
F. Hangers and supports shall be made from hot-dipped galvanized steel.
G. Dielectric Protection – Steel pipe hangers and supports shall be furnished with fitted EPDM
gasket when installed with any type of non-ferrous pipe.
H. For insulated piping, rubber support inserts shall be provided at all pipe support locations to
prevent crushing of insulation.
I. Hangers shall closely fit the outer diameter of plain or insulated pipe. Oversized hangers
shall not be accepted.
J. Anchors shall be provided as required, in order to localize pipe expansion, resist internal
pressure thrust and prevent undue strain on piping connections. Anchor design shall not
create a thermal or acoustic continuity from the pipe to the building structure.
K. Hangers and supports shall be selected and installed to ensure thermal pipe movement is
axially guided into expansion devices and build up of pipe stress is minimized.
L. Riser piping support system design shall ensure pipe is adequately anchored to resist
imposed loads and thrust. Risers shall be guided to prevent buckling, while permitting axial
pipe movement. Support system shall isolate the pipe thermally and acoustically from
building structure. Anchors and guides specially designed for riser piping shall be installed.
M. Piping shall be braced to resist seismic forces as per the ‘Seismic Restraint Requirements’
section.
N. Vibration isolators shall be provided at first five pipe hanger and support locations adjacent
to isolated rotating mechanical equipment, to minimize transmission of noise and vibration
to the building structure.
O. The selected manufacturer shall submit specific technical recommendations with regard to
the following key aspects of the overall pipe support system. Technical recommendations
shall be supported by a professional structural engineer.
1. Riser piping support system.

2. Seismic restraint system.
3. Type and positioning of pipe anchors and guides.
2.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide adjustable clevis hangers (MSS Type 1) for all individually suspended piping where
provision for thermal expansion and contraction is not required.
B. Clevis hangers shall have a solid steel bolt with threaded end as the cross rod. Cross rod
made from threaded rod or fully threaded bolt will not be accepted.
C. For insulated pipe where effective outer diameter does not correspond to a standard pipe
size, intermediate sizes of clevis hangers shall be provided to ensure a close fit. Oversized
hangers will not be accepted.
D. Clevis hangers used with any type of non-ferrous piping shall be additionally fitted with
EPDM gasket lining to prevent direct contact between dissimilar materials.
E. Provide U-Strap clamps (MSS Type 26) or U-Bolts (MSS Type 24), as directed by the
Engineer, for fixing pipe to channel where multiple pipes are supported on a trapeze and
F. U-Strap clamps shall have slotted mounting holes to facilitate alignment with holes drilled in
channel.
G. U-Bolts shall be of heavy construction and shall be supplied with four nuts and two washers.
U-Bolts made from threaded rod shall not be accepted.
H. For installation with non-ferrous pipe, U-Strap clamps shall be fitted with EPDM gasket lining
and U-Bolts shall be fitted with a full rubber sleeve. Additionally, a rubber strip shall be
provided between the pipe and channel.
I. Provide roller supports or Teflon based slide assemblies - for all chilled or hot water piping
straight runs over 20 m without changes in direction and for any other situation where pipe
requires to be allowed to move axially to prevent build up of stress.
The type of support provided shall be one of the following, as directed by the Engineer:
1. Pipe roller set (MSS Type 41)

2. Roller stand / roller chair (MSS Type 44)
3. Adjustable roller hanger (MSS Type 43)
4. Adjustable roller stand (MSS Type 46)
5. Clamp shoe slide assembly (MSS Type 35)
J. Complete roller supports, including the rolls, shall have a full steel construction.
K. Roller bolts shall be solid steel with threaded end. Use of threaded rod or fully threaded bolt
through the roll will not be accepted.
L. For trapeze mounted parallel pipes, the roller supports or slide assemblies shall be mounted
on the channel.
M. For non-ferrous pipe where provision is required for thermal expansion and contraction,
clamp shoe slide assemblies with fitted EPDM gasket lining shall be provided.
N. Adjustable swivel ring type UL listed band hangers (MSS Type 10) may be used for
sprinkler system piping. These shall be complete with knurled swivel nuts.
O. For individually supported pipe above 80 mm running close to the floor, where provision for
thermal expansion and contraction is not required, provide adjustable pipe stanchion
saddles (MSS Type 38) with vertical leveling arrangement and U-Bolt for securing the pipe.
The saddle shall be mounted on a floor stanchion comprising steel base flange and welded
pipe upright column.
P. For pipe 80 mm or smaller, running close to the floor, provide a structural steel base and fix
pipe to channel using U-Strap clamps or U-Bolts, as directed by the Engineer.
2.3 VERTICAL PIPING SUPPORTS
A. The overall support system for all risers piping shall be implemented based on manufacturer
recommendations, which shall ensure riser piping is appropriately anchored, guided and
stabilized and expansion devices are permitted to function properly.
B. Chilled water, hot water, and condenser water riser piping above 100 mm size shall be
installed with engineered all-directional acoustic pipe riser anchors and acoustic pipe riser
guides.
C. Acoustic anchors shall be capable of resisting all imposed loads and thrust acting at the
anchor location. They shall have a telescoping design incorporating a substantial fabric
reinforced neoprene element, to reduce structural transmission of noise from piping and
prevent formation of a thermal bridge at anchor location. The anchors shall have a minimum
seismic rating of 1g in all three axes. These shall be attached to the pipe (one pair at each
anchorage location) by means of an extended double-bolt riser clamp, specifically designed
for installation of acoustic anchors.
D. Acoustic guides shall direct pipe movement axially into installed expansion devices (to
ensure they function properly) and prevent lateral buckling or radial motion of riser pipe.
They shall have a telescoping design incorporating a substantial fabric reinforced neoprene
element, to reduce structural transmission of noise from piping and prevent formation of a
thermal bridge at guide location. The guides shall have a minimum seismic rating of 1g in
the horizontal plane. These shall be attached to the pipe (one pair at each guide location) by
means of an extended double-bolt riser clamp, specifically designed for installation of
acoustic guides.
E. Riser clamps (MSS Type 8) shall be provided at each floor to support steel riser pipe which
has not been installed with engineered acoustic riser anchors and guides. For steel riser
piping installed with acoustic anchors and guides, riser clamps shall be provided for
stabilization of pipe at all floors where riser guides are not present.
F. For insulated pipe where effective outer diameter does not correspond to a standard pipe
size, intermediate sizes of riser clamps shall be provided to ensure a close fit. Oversized
clamps will not be accepted.
G. For uninsulated non-ferrous plumbing pipe risers, provide offset pipe clamps fitted with
EPDM gasket lining. Riser clamps fitted with EPDM lining may also be used.
H. Insulated plumbing piping (except hot water) shall be supported using offset pipe clamps or
riser clamps.
I. Offset pipe clamps may be installed to support uninsulated steel piping up to 200 mm.
2.4 WALL SUPPORTS
A. Provide welded channel wall brackets for support of pipe close to the wall. Pipes may be
supported on wall brackets using U-Strap clamps, U-Bolts or Roller supports as appropriate.
Alternatively, pipes may be suspended from the brackets using threaded rods and clevis
hangers / roller hangers. Use one of the following for indicated loads.
1. Light(MSS Type 31) : 340 kg

2. Medium (MSS Type 32) : 675 kg
3. Heavy (MSS Type 33) : 1350 kg
B. For supporting pipe up to 100 mm running very close to the wall, J-Hooks or offset J-Hooks
shall be provided as appropriate.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with

pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior
and exterior applications.
2. Properties: Non-staining, non-corrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28 day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
and other accessories.
C. Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
D. Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping”, is not exceeded.
E. Field fabricates heavy-duty steel trapezes from ASTM A36 steel shapes, welded according
to AWS D-1.1.
F. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
G. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Do not hang piping from other piping.
I. Field fabricated anchors shall be entirely separate from pipe hangers and shall be of heavy
welded steel construction. The design shall ensure a thermal and acoustic break is provided
between the pipe and building structure. Anchor loads, locations, method of fixing and
design details shall be certified by a structural engineer and submitted for review prior to
commencement of works.
J. Do not use branch connections as anchorage points.
K. Install seismic cable bracing at an angle of 45o +/- 15o to the ceiling slab. The installation
shall permit thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe and not impede the functioning of
vibration isolators if present.
L. Provide washers and lock nuts to threaded hanger rods.
3.2 SPACING OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
PIPE BORE (mm) MAXIMUM SUPPORT SPACING (M)
NOMINAL STEEL PIPE COPPER PIPE IRON PIPE
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
Up to 15 1.8 2.4 1.2 1.8 - -
20 2.4 3.0 1.4 2.1 - -
25 2.4 3.0 1.8 2.4 - -
32 2.7 3.0 2.4 3.0 - -
40 3.0 3.6 2.4 3.0 - -
50 3.0 3.6 2.7 3.0 1.8 1.8
65 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 - -
80 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 2.7 2.7
100 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 2.7 2.7
125 3.7 5.4 3.0 3.6
150 4.5 5.4 3.6 4.2 3.7 3.7
200 5.6 6.0 - - 3.7 3.7
250 5.0 6.0 - - 4.5 5.4
300 6.1 10.0 - - 8.0 10.0
350 10.0 12.0 - - - -
400 10.5 12.6 - - - -
450 11.0 13.2 - - - -
500 12.0 14.4 - - - -
600 14.0 16.8 - - - -
700 - - - -
800 - - - -
900 - - - -
1000 - - - -
PIPE BEFORE (mm) MAXIMUM SUPPORT SPACING (M)
NOMINAL UPVC PIPE POLYETHYLENE PIPE Class D,E,6,7

Class O,B,C Type
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
Up to 10 - 0.6 0.3 0.45
15 - 0.6 0.4 0.6
20 - 0.65 0.4 0.6

Class O,B,C Type
25 - 0.75 0.4 0.6
32 - 0.8 0.45 0.7
40 - 0.9 0.45 0.7
50 1.1 1.2 0.55 0.85
65 1.2 1.4 0.55 0.85
80 1.4 1.5 0.6 0.9
100 1.5 1.7 0.7 1.1
125 1.7 1.9 - -
150 1.8 2.1 - -
175 2.0 2.3 - -
200 2.1 2.5 - -
225 2.3 2.7 - -
250 2.4 2.9 - -
300 2.6 3.1 - -

Class O,B,C Type
350 2.9 3.4 - -
400 3.1 3.7 - -
450 3.4 3.7 - -
Above 450 3.7 3.7 - -
B. Maximum horizontal support spacing for grooved steel pipe is 6 meters.
C. Vertical Support Spacing: Check total self-weight and pressure loading against
manufacturer’s recommendations when using mechanical joints or end load capable flexible
couplings. Ensure adequate pipe support when using non-end load capable flexible
couplings.
D. Space vertical support intervals for plastics pipe at not greater than twice horizontal intervals
tabulated.
E. Where multiple pipe runs of differing bores are supported from a common point, use support
spacing of pipe requiring closest spacing. Spacings give for PVC-U pipe to BS 3505 are for
20oC. Support continuously for temperatures 60oC and above.
F. Provide hanger or support within 300 mm of horizontal elbows and tees. Install additional
hangers at concentrated loads including valves, flanges, strainers, expansion joints and
other pipeline ancillaries. Install spring hangers in header piping at the location of all suction
and discharge drop risers to pumps, chillers, heat exchangers, cooling towers etc.
3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assembles and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size
or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel
according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space
attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and
expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at
top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so
maximum pipe deflections allowed by British Standards is not exceeded.
3.4 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support

equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
3.5 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy duty steel trapezes and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.7 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop
painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM – A780.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the Vibration isolation and seismic control for fire protection
equipment, tanks, and piping systems.
B. This Section includes the following mechanical vibration isolation materials and their
installation:
1. Inertia Bases
2. Isolation pads.
3. Isolation mounts.
4. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
5. Restraining braces.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State ofCali-
fornia.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identi-
fied by a specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be ap-
plicable to this Project.
D. Seismic-Restraint Loading Shall comply with following:
1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: 2009.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: 2009.
a. Component Importance Factor: as required by IBC 2009.
21 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Fire Suppression Piping & Equipment, Rev.00 Page 1 of 5
b. Component Response Modification Factor: as required by IBC 2009.

c. Component Amplification Factor: as required by IBC 2009.
3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): as re-

quiredby IBC 2009.
4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: as required by IBC
2009.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint calculations and

details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation and licensed in the State of New Jersey.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC and NFPA 13 unless requirements
in this Section are more stringent.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."
C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing
maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred
to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INERTIA BASES
A. Structural Bases:
1. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusseted brackets, to support equipment

and motor, with motor slide rails.
2. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and

to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.
B. Concrete Inertia Bases:
1. Construction: Structural steel channel perimeter frame, with gusseted brackets and
anchor bolts, reinforcing; concrete filled.
2. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base.
4. Concrete: Minimum 20 MPa concrete.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over
pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut
to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
B. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated
top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color- code
or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded
element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal op-
eration.
2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for
bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.
C. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

eration.
2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applica-
tions shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they
will be subjected.
B. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of
slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one
end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with
corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
C. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections to hanger rod.
D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc- coated
steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum
length of eight times diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127 and NFPA 13.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a
maximum of 80 feet o.c.
3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
C. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to au-
thorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to pro-
vide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to struc-

ture at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
F. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embed-
ded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons,
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-
duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural el-
ement to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exteri-
or applications.
3.2 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sec-
tions or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connec-
tions terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural el-
ement from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment.Comply with
requirements in Division 21 Section "Wet Pipe Sprinkler System" for piping flexible con-
nections.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1. Equipment labels.
2. Stencils
3. Access panel and door markers
4. Pipe labels.
5. Valve tags.
6. Warning tags
7. Ceiling Tacks
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
B. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1996 (Reaffirmed 2002).
C. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
D. NFPA 14 – Installation of standpipe and Hose Systems.
E. ASTM E 84 Surface burning characteristics of building materials (also NFPA 255 and UL 723)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements 01 33 00.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for fire suppression
equipment, piping and valve identification.
21 05 53 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

1. Equipment Label Schedule: Provide a schedule of all equipment to be labeled with the
proposed content for each label.
2. Access Panel and Door Markers: Provide a schedule of all panels and doors to be labeled
with the proposed content for each label.
3. Pipe Label Schedule: Provide a schedule of each piping systems indicating a proposed
nomenclature and location of all pipe markers.
4. Valve Tag Schedule: Provide a proposed valve numbering scheme and schedule for each
piping system. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on
tag, room or space location of valve, normal-operating position (open, closed, or
modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shut-off
and similar special uses.
5. Warning Tags: Provide a schedule of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content
for each label.
D. Closeout Submittals: Record actual as built locations of valve tags and update schedules
accordingly.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section with minimum five years documented experience
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum
five years documented experience.
C. ASME Standards: Comply with ASME A13.1 for color scheme, lettering size, length of color field,
and viewing angles of identification devices.
D. All lettering shall be in both English and Arabic languages
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels clearly identifying product name
and manufacturer until ready for installation.
B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors until ready for installation.
C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to commencing Work of this section.
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work.
C. Inspect and make notes of job conditions prior to installation:

1. Record minutes of the conference and provide copies to all parties present.
2. Identify all outstanding issues in writing designating the responsible party for follow-up
action and the timetable for completion.
3. Installation of identification system shall not begin until all outstanding issues are resolved
to the satisfaction of the Architect.

1.9 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.11 COORDINATION
where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION GENERAL
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each
application specified. For each identification type, provide all products from same manufacturer
with same text, style, color, shape, and other identification features.
1. Provide nameplates with the unit number on all mechanical equipment.

2. Access panel and door markers for standpipes, hose and fire extinguisher cabinets, fire and
smoke dampers, etc
3. Provide pipe identification labels including direction-of-flow arrows and with service
indicated. All labels shall have background colors matched with specific service designation.
4. Provide valve tag numbers on all valves.
5. Warning tags at motors and equipment controlled by automatic starters, etc
2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment (Indoor Application):

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for fire suppression piping and
equipment engraving, 1/16 inch thick.
2. Letter Color: White
3. Background Color: Red
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 1
by 3 inches.
5. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch.
6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Plastic Labels for Equipment (Outdoor Application):

1. Material: MS-215 Max-Tek with printed graphics protected by a chemical and UV resistant
MS-3000 top laminate.
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 1
by 3 inches.
6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
2.3 STENCILS
A. Stencils for Pipes & Equipment (Indoor & Outdoor Application) where applicable:
1. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 20-30 mm Outside
Diameter of Insulation or Pipe 200 mm long color field, 15 mm high letters.
2. 40-50 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch 200 mm long color field, 20 mm
high letters.
high letters.
4. 200-250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600 mm long color field, 65 mm high
letters.
5. Over 250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800 mm long color field, 90 mm high
letters.
6. Equipment: 65 mm high letters.
7. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME
A13.1.
high letters.
high letters.
letters.
letters.
A13.1.
2.4 ACCESS PANEL AND DOOR MARKERS
A. Access Panel and Door Markers:

1. Material and Thickness: 1/16-inch- thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to identification.
4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.
2.5 PIPE LABELS (INDOOR PIPING)
A. Provide labels for above ground piping located indoors, and not exposed to sunlight or a harsh
environment.
B. Pre-printed, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
C. Lettering shall be sub-surface printed and protected from direct contact by a layer of plastic.
Markers with surface printed lettering will not be accepted.
D. Pipe Labels for pipe O.D. less than 8 inches: MS-970 Coiled, semi rigid plastic formed to cover full
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive in contact with the pipe
surface.
E. Pipe Labels for pipe O.D. 8 inches and over: MS-970 Strap-on, semi rigid plastic to cover partial
circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe with nylon ties
F. Pipe Label Schedule:
G. Pipe Label Color Schedule:
Pipe O.D. (including Marker Style Marker Width Lettering Marker Type
insulation) Height
1/4 inch to 3/8 inch MS970-TM 3 inches 1/4 inch Coil-on
1/2 inch to 1 inch MS970-A 8 inches 1/2 inch Coil-on
1-1/8 inch to 2-1/4inch MS970-B 8 inches 3/4 inch Coil-on
2-3/8 inch to 3-1/4inch MS970-C 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on

Pipe O.D. (including Marker Style Marker Width Lettering Marker Type
insulation) Height
3-3/8 inch to 4-1/2inch MS970-D 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
4-5/8 inch to 5-7/8inch MS970-E 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
6 inch to 7-7/8 inch MS970-FC 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on

8 inch to 10 inch MS970-G 24 inches 2-1/2 inch Strap-on
Over 10 inch MS970-H 32 inches 3-1/2 inch Strap-on
2. Lettering Color: White
2.6 PIPE LABELS (OUTDOOR PIPING)
A. Provide labels for above ground piping located outside, and exposed to sunlight or a harsh
environment, the following product is specified.
C. Pipe markers shall be constructed of MS-995 Maxilar material. Pipe markers shall withstand
direct contact with all process chemicals, operating temperatures up to 250 degrees F, and
prolonged exposure to direct sunlight.
D. Pipe markers shall be constructed of printed 5 mil (0.005 inch) polyester and top laminated with
MS1000 clear ultra violet and chemical resistant plastic film that is engineered to provide
maximum durability of the printed legend. Markers shall be pre-coiled to wrap entirely around
the circumference of pipe up to 10 inch outside diameter, and self-sealed with a strip of clear
ultra violet and chemical resistant plastic film. Coiled markers shall seal to themselves, and not
the pipe surface.
E. Pipe Labels for pipe O.D. up to 10 inches: Shall be labeled with a single piece, preprinted
marker that wraps entirely around the circumference of the pipe, overlaps and seals to itself
rather than adhere to the pipe surface.
F. Pipe Labels for pipe O.D. 10 inches and greater: Shall be constructed of printed 5 mil (0.005 inch)
polyester and top laminated with MS1000 clear ultra violet and chemical resistant plastic film that
is pre-applied to an acrylic-faced, co-extruded ABS plastic carrier. Carrier shall have pre-formed
legs running the entire length of the part to ensure marker remains straight and aligned with pipe.
Flow direction shall be identified by application of a separate arrow label of same construction.
Carriers shall be affixed to piping by means of two stainless steel straps that wrap entirely around
the circumference of the pipe.
G. Pipe Label Schedule:
Pipe O.D. (including Marker Style Marker Width Lettering Height Marker Type
insulation)
3/4 inch to 1 inch MS995-A 8 inches 1/2 inch Wraparound
1-1/8 inch to 2-3/8 MS995-B 8 inches 3/4 inch Wraparound
inch
5 inch to 7-7/8 inch MS995-E 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Wraparound
8 inch to 10 inch MS995-J 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Wraparound
Over 10 inch MS995-MB 32 inches 2-1/2 inch Carrier

2.7 VALVE TAGS
A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 inch letters for piping abbreviation and 1/2 inch
numbers.
1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032 inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes
for attachment hardware.
2. Background Color: Natural brass.
3. Letter Color: Black.
4. Tag Size: 1-1/2 inches, round.
5. Fasteners: Brass S-Hooks and Jack Chain.
B. Valve Tags: For outdoor labeling of fire suppression valves.

MS-3000 top laminate, and having stainless steel grommet protected predrilled holes with
2. Background Color: Red.
3. Letter Color: White.
4. Tag Size: Minimum 1-1/2 inches.
5. Fasteners: Stainless steel S-Hooks and stainless steel Jack Chain.
2.8 WARNING TAGS
A. Warning Tags:
1. Material: Reprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.
2. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.
3. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.
4. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
5. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
2.9 CEILING TACKS
A. Provide steel ceiling tacks with a color-coded head 3/4 inch diameter and a 1.5 inch serrated
shank.
1. Provide ceiling tacks in acoustical tile ceilings to locate equipment, valves or dampers that
require regular maintenance or are part of a Life Safety System.
2. Tacks shall be color coded as follows (coordinate with Owner):
• Yellow - HVAC equipment
• Red - Life Safety (fire dampers, sprinkler valves, etc.)
• Green - Plumbing Valves
• Blue - Heating/Cooling Valves
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. For labels that are installed using pressure-sensitive adhesives, clean piping and equipment
surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease,
release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
C. For pipe markers that are pre-coiled or strap-on type and do not adhere directly to the piping, no
surface preparation is necessary.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Equipment Labels:
1. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of fire suppression equipment.
2. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
C. Access Panel and Door Markers.

1. Install or permanently fasten markers on access panels and door for fire suppression
equipment.
D. Pipe Labels: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished
spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums;
and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible
enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
E. Valve Tags: Install tags on all shut-off valves and control devices in piping systems, except valves
within factory-fabricated equipment units.
F. Warning Tags:
1. Install or warning tags on each major item of fire suppression equipment to have a warning
tag.
2. Locate tags where accessible and visible.
G. Mark location of equipment or valves located above ceilings with identifying "buttons" to help in
identification for maintenance.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.


SECTION 21 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
B. Division 01 Section "Special Procedures."
C. Division 21 Fire Suppression Sections
1.3 SUMMARY
A. The purpose of this Section is to define responsibilities in the Commissioning process.

Additional system testing is required within individual Specification Sections.
B. Ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents.
General Commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Division 01. Execute
all Commissioning responsibilities assigned and include the cost of Commissioning in the
Contract price.
C. Fire Protection Systems to be commissioned include the following:
1. Fire Pump
2. Wet Standpipe System
3. Automatic Sprinkler System
4. Fire Protection Water Storage/Break Tank
5. Fire Water Tank and piping system including valves, high/low level, over flow, metering,
basin and circulation loop.
6. Fire Suppression system
21 08 00 Commissioning of Fire Suppression, Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

standards.
D. Commissioning of system shall be fully in compliance with NFPA 3 – Standard for

commissioning of Fire Protection and Life safety systems 2021
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning: A systematic process confirming that building systems have been installed,
properly started, and consistently operated in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents, that all systems are complete and functioning in accordance with the Contract
Documents at Substantial Completion, and that Contractor has provided Owner adequate
system documentation and training. Commissioning includes deferred and/or seasonal tests
as approved by Owner.
B. Commissioning Plan: Document prepared by Contractor and approved by Owner that

provides the structure, schedule, and coordination plan for the Commissioning process from
the construction phase through the warranty period. The Commissioning Plan must satisfy
the Owner’s test requirements.
C. Commissioning Team: Working group made up of representative(s) from the

Architect/Engineer (A/E), Contractor, Test, Adjust, and Balance (TAB) Firm, Building
Automation System (BAS) provider, specialty manufacturers and suppliers, and Owner.
Contractor will provide ad-hoc representation of subcontractors on the Commissioning Team
as required for implementation of the Commissioning Plan.
D. Deferred Tests: Functional Performance or Integrated System Tests performed after

Substantial Completion due to partial occupancy, partial equipment acceptance, seasonal
requirements, design, or other Site conditions that prohibit the test from being performed prior
to Substantial Completion.
E. Deficiency: Condition of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in

compliance with Contract Documents.
F. Factory Testing: Testing of equipment at the factory, by factory personnel with an Owner’s
representative present if deemed necessary by Owner.
G. Functional Performance Test Procedures: Commissioning protocols and detailed test

procedures and instructions in tabular and script-type format that fully describe system
configuration and steps required to determine if the system is performing and functioning
properly. Contractor prepares these procedures to document Functional Performance Tests.
H. Functional Performance Test (FPT): Test of dynamic function and operation of equipment

and systems executed by Contractor. Systems are tested under various modes, such as
during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying
outside air temperatures, life safety conditions, power failure, etc. Systems are run through
all specified sequences of operation. Components are verified to be responding in
accordance with Contract Documents. Functional Performance Tests are executed after
Start-ups and Prefunctional Checklists are complete.
I. Integrated System Test: Test of dynamic interactive function and operation of multiple
systems. Integrated System Tests are tested under various modes, such as fire alarm and
emergency situations, life safety conditions, power failure, etc. Systems are integrally
operated through all specified sequences of operation. Components are verified to be
responding in accordance with Contract Documents. Integrated System Tests are executed
after Functional Performance Tests are complete and prior to Substantial Completion.
Integrated System Tests provide verification that the integrated systems will properly function
according to the Contract Documents.
J. Integrated System Test Procedures: Commissioning protocols and detailed test procedures
and instructions in tabular and script-type format fully describe system configurations and
steps required to determine if the interacting systems are performing and functioning
properly. Contractor prepares these procedures to document Integrated System Tests.
K. Prefunctional Checklist: A list of static inspections and material or component tests that
verify proper installation of equipment (e.g., belt tension, oil levels, labels affixed, gages in
place, sensors calibrated, etc.). The word Prefunctional refers to before Functional tests.
Prefunctional Checklists must include the manufacturer’s Start-up checklist(s). Contractor
shall sign Prefunctional Checklists as complete and submit with the Request for Start-
up/Functional Performance Test Form.
L. Start-up: The activities where equipment is initially energized, tested, and operated. Start-up
is completed prior to Functional Performance Tests.
M. Test Requirements: Requirements specifying what systems, modes and functions, etc. must
be tested. Test requirements are not detailed test procedures. Test requirements and
acceptance criteria are specified in the Contract Documents.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall prepare Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance Test (FPT)
procedures and execute and document results. All Prefunctional Checklists and tests must
be documented using specific, procedural forms in Microsoft Word or Excel software
developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, Contractor shall submit those forms to the
Owner for review and approval.
B. Contractor shall provide Owner with documentation required for Commissioning Work. At
minimum, documentation shall include: Detailed Start-up procedures, full sequences of
operation, Operating and Maintenance data, performance data, Functional Performance Test
Procedures, control drawings, and details of Owner-contracted tests.
C. Contractor shall submit to Owner installation and checkout materials actually shipped inside
equipment and actual field checkout sheet forms used by factory or field technicians.
D. Contractor shall review and approve other relative documentation for impact on FPT’s of the
systems:

1. Shop drawings and product submittal data related to systems or equipment to be

commissioned. The Subcontractor responsible for the FPT shall review and incorporate
comments from the Owner and A/E via the Contractor.
2. Incorporate manufacturer’s Start-up procedures with Prefunctional checklists.
3. Draft Test, Adjust and Balance (TAB) Reports: Review and provide comments to Owner.
4. Factory Performance Test Reports: Review and compile all factory performance data to
assure that the data is complete prior to executing the FPT’s.
5. Completed equipment Start-up certification forms along with the manufacturer’s field or
factory performance and Start-up test documentation: Subcontractor performing the test
will review the documentation prior to commencing with the scheduled FPT’s. Owner
may require that system one-line diagrams and applicable Specification Section(s) be
attached to the FPT documentation.
6. Final TAB Reports: Subcontractor performing the test will review the documentation prior
to commencing with the scheduled FPT’s.
7. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) information per requirements of the Technical

Specifications and Division 01 requirements: To validate adequacy and completeness of
the FPT, the Contractor shall ensure that the O&M manual content, marked-up record
Drawings and Specifications, component submittal drawings, and other pertinent
documents are available at the Project Site for review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all specialized tools, test equipment and instruments required to execute Start-up,
checkout, and testing of equipment.
B. All specialized tools, test equipment, and instruments required to execute Start-up, checkout,
and testing of equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure
system performance within specified tolerances. A testing laboratory must have calibrated
test equipment within the previous twelve (12) months. Calibration shall be NIST traceable.
Contractor must calibrate test equipment and instruments according to manufacturer’s
recommended intervals and whenever the test equipment is dropped or damaged.
Calibration tags must be affixed to the test equipment or certificates readily available.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Construction Phase:
1. In each purchase order or subcontract that is written for changes in scope, include the
following requirements for submittal data, Commissioning documentation, testing
assistance, Operating and Maintenance (O&M) data, and training, as a minimum.
2. Attend Pre-Commissioning Meeting(s), Pre-Installation Meeting(s), and other Project

meetings scheduled by the Contractor to facilitate the Commissioning process.
3. Provide manufacturer’s data sheets and shop drawing submittals of equipment.
4. Provide additional requested documentation to the Contractor, prior to O&M manual

submittals, for development of Pre-functional Checklist and Functional Performance
Tests procedures.
a. Typically, this will include detailed manufacturer’s installation and Start-up, operating,
troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any Owner-contracted
tests, full factory testing reports, if any, and full warranty information, including all
responsibilities of the Owner to keep the warranty in force clearly identified.
b. In addition, the installation, Start-up, and checkout materials that are actually shipped
inside the equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the
factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Contractor.
c. This information and data request may be made prior to normal submittals.
5. With input from the BAS Provider and A/E, Clarify the operation and control of
commissioned equipment in areas where the Specifications, BAS control drawings, or
equipment documentation are not sufficient for writing detailed test procedures.
6. Prepare the specific Functional Performance Test procedures specified in Section 20 08

16. Ensure that Functional Performance Test procedures address feasibility, safety, and
equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during the
tests.
7. Develop the Commissioning Plan using manufacturer’s Start-up procedures and the
Prefunctional Checklists. Submit manufacturer’s detailed Start-up procedures and the
Commissioning Plan and procedures and other requested equipment documentation to
Owner for review.
8. During the Start-up and initial checkout process, execute and document related portions
of the Prefunctional Checklists for all commissioned equipment.
9. Perform and clearly document all completed Prefunctional Checklists and Start-up
procedures. Provide a copy to the Owner prior to the Functional Performance Test.
10. Address current A/E and Owner punch list items before Functional Performance Tests.
Air and water test, adjust and balance shall be completed with discrepancies and
problems remedied before Functional Performance Tests of the respective air or water
related systems are executed.
11. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to assist in execution of
Functional Performance Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the
agreed-upon schedules and for a sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests,
adjustments, and problem solving.
12. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as

interpreted by the Owner’s Project Manager and A/E and retest the system and

equipment.
13. Compile all Commissioning records and documentation to be included in a

Commissioning and Closeout Manual.
14. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and
updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions.
15. During construction, maintain as-built marked-up Drawings and Specifications of all
Contract Documents and Contractor-generated coordination Drawings. Update after
completion of Commissioning activities (include deferred tests). The as-built drawings
and specifications shall be delivered to the Owner both in electronic format and hard
copies as required by the Owner.
16. Provide training of the Owner’s operating personnel as specified.
17. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain

the validity of the warranty.
B. Warranty Phase:
1. Execute seasonal or deferred tests, witnessed by the Owner, according to the

Specifications.
a. Complete deferred tests as part of this Contract during the Warranty Period.
Schedule this activity with Owner. Perform tests and document and correct
deficiencies. Owner may observe the tests and review and approve test
documentation and deficiency corrections.
b. If any check or test cannot be completed prior to Substantial Completion due to the
building structure, required occupancy condition, or other condition, execution of
such test may be delayed to later in the Warranty Period, upon approval of the
Owner. Contractor shall reschedule and conduct these unforeseen deferred tests in
the same manner as deferred tests.
2. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals, Commissioning

documentation, and as-built drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal
testing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.3 TESTING
A. Prefunctional Checklists and Start-up:
1. Follow the Start-up and initial checkout procedures listed in this Section and in Division
1. Start-up and complete systems and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting
the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Prefunctional Checklists shall be complete prior to commencement of a Functional

Performance test.
B. Functional Performance Tests:
1. Functional Performance Tests are conducted after system Start-up and checkout is
satisfactorily completed.
C. Coordination Between Testing Parties:
1. Factory Start-ups: Factory Start-ups are specified for certain equipment. Factory Start-
ups generally are Start-up related activities that will be reviewed and checked prior to
Functional Performance Tests. All costs associated with factory Start-ups shall be
included with the contract price unless otherwise noted. Notify the Commissioning Team
of the factory Start-up schedule and coordinate these factory Start-ups with witnessing
parties. The Commissioning Team members may witness these Start-ups at their
discretion.
2. Independent Testing Agencies: For systems that specify testing by an independent

testing agency, the cost of the test shall be included in the Contract price unless
otherwise noted. Testing performed by independent agencies may cover aspects
required in the Prefunctional Checklists, Start-ups, and Functional Performance Tests.
Coordinate with the independent testing agency so that Owner and/or A/E can witness
the test to ensure that applicable aspects of the test meet requirements.
3.4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Inspection, Tests and Adjustments Of Fire Pumps:
1. Prior To Start Up
a. Check the pump motor assembly alignment. Adjust if necessary. Weld steel cleats
on pump and motor bases to lock them in aligned position.
b. Tighten and lock foundation and coupling bolts.
c. Check pump shaft for free rotation.
d. Check electrical continuity and insulation of motor and the control panel, by
meggering.
e. Ensure that the relief valve is correctly calibrated and installed.
f. Shut off the system isolating valve/s and open the test line.
g. Ensure that the circuit breaker trip rate is correctly selected and the elements
properly installed. Adjust the star delta change over timer to the period recommended
by the motor manufacturer.
h. Check system power supply voltage. Perform all other checks outlined in the
controller operation manual, before energising the controller.
i. Ensure that the suction lines and the pump casing are full of water.
2. Start Up
a. Check and correct, if necessary, the direction of rotation of the pump, by momentary
operation of the emergency start lever.
b. Close the valve on the test line partially to avoid the operation of the pump at high
discharge rates.
c. Start the pump on manual mode.
d. Check the motor full load current by manipulating the flow.
e. Check the pressure relief valve for proper operation by gradually closing the test
valve.
f. Check the pump and motor bearings for signs of overheating.

g. Check the suction line for signs for entry of air and proper suction intake flow.
3. Verification of Performance
a. Check the pump head at nominal flow and at 150% of nominal flow and ensure
conformity with design requirements.
b. Close the test line and stop the pump. Release the system pressure gradually with
the test valve. Check and adjust the pressure switch setting for automatic cut-in.
Check and adjust the pressure switch setting for automatic cut-in and cut-out of
jockey pump.
4. Put System in to Service

a. Isolate the fire pump controllers.
b. Close the test line and open the system isolating valve. Ensure that the system
outlets are closed.
c. Fill the system with the jockey pump. Maintain pressure for 24 hours and ensure that
there are no leaks.
d. Energize fire pump controllers and ensure that the system is in automatic mode
3.5 TRAINING
A. Submit a written training plan to the Owner and Architect/Engineer for review and approval.
Contractor’s training plan shall cover the following elements:
1. Equipment included in training.
2. Intended audience.
3. Location of training.
4. Objectives.
5. Subjects covered.
6. Duration of training on each subject.
7. Instructor for each subject.
8. Methods (classroom lecture, video, Site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations,

written handouts, etc.).
9. Instructors and qualifications.
B. Contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. Provide a training plan ten (10) calendar days prior to the scheduled training, in
accordance with Division 01.
2. Provide Owner personnel with comprehensive training in the understanding of the

systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of commissioned
mechanical equipment or system.

3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands-on training
on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation,
including Start-up, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired
or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on

each major piece of equipment. This representative may be the Start-up technician for
the piece of equipment, the installing contractor, or manufacturer’s representative.
Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of
operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be
required to execute the training.
6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the O&M manual
and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.
7. Training shall include:
a. Usage of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material

included in the O&M manuals.
b. Review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating
requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts
inventory suggestions. The training shall include Start-up, operation in all modes
possible, shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.
c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.
d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
f. Explanation of information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans
and manuals in the facility.
g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
8. Hands-on training shall include Start-up, operation in all modes possible, including
manual, shutdown, and any emergency procedures and maintenance of all pieces of
equipment
9. Training shall occur after Functional Performance Tests are complete and shall be
scheduled with the Owner’s Project Manager.
C. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner and Owner’s Test, Adjust, and Balance Firm for
verification testing and final adjustments and balancing as may be indicated in the Contract
Documents or as directed by Owner.
D. Provide training on each system/piece of equipment according to the following schedule:

[Edit the following as appropriate for the Project].

Hours System
Fire Pump System

Wet Standpipe/Sprinkler Fire Protection System
Dry Fire Sprinkler System
Pre-Action Fire Sprinkler System
Chemical Fire Suppression System
_____ Foam water System

SECTION 21 10 00
WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division-01 Specification Section, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section in conjunction with the contract documents and drawings indicates the design,
materials, equipment, installation, inspection, testing and operations requirement of the Fire
Protection Systems. Requirements are included but not limited to;
1. Water Based Fire Suppression System

2. Sprinkler System
3. Standpipe, Hose System and Cabinets
4. Fire Pump Set and Fire Pump Controller
5. Portable Fire Extinguishers
6. Fire Fighting Control Valves and Specialty Valves
7. Piping, Fitting, Support and Accessories
B. Contractor is responsible for reviewing the design, preparing working drawings to meet
DCD’s requirement and doing submissions for getting approval. In addition, contractor is
responsible for entire supporting system which shall be designed to withstand the operating
weight and internal pressure, in addition to stability in both axial and lateral directions
without relative motions. Contractor has to take all safety measures to assure the supporting
system is working safely.
A. The design of Fire Protection System shall be complete with all necessary equipment,
devices and accessories for proper system operation. System design and installation shall
reflect high quality of professional work that properly account for practical maintenance and
aesthetic concerns, as well as meets the design requirements of the latest NFPA Standards
and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense). Deviation from the standards
including in-efficient designs, unnecessary materials and special system modification in
order to meet the above desired criteria shall be avoided.
B. Entire Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems shall include sprinkler heads, hoses, nozzles,
instantaneous couplings, piping, valves, tamper switches, flow alarms and other
appurtenances as required by the latest NFPA Standard and Local or State Agencies, or by
the Owner's insurance company. The entire Sprinkler and Standpipe Systems and/ or other
System shall be hydraulically designed unless otherwise noted.
C. Design Criteria:
1. Sprinkler throughout the building shall be based on the latest NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems) and the following design criteria:
21 10 00 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems Rev.00 Page 1 of 29

Hazard Classification Design Criteria
Light Hazard 4.10 lpm over the most remote 139 sq. mtr. area. Using
quick response fire sprinkler heads with head tempera-
ture rating complying with NFPA 13-2010, Table 6.2.5.1
Ordinary Hazard Group 1 6.10 lpm over the most remote 139 sq. mtr. area. Fire
sprinkler head temperature rating complying with NFPA
13-2010 Table 6-2.5.1
Ordinary Hazard Group 2 8.10 lpm over the most remote 139 sq. mtr. area. Fire
13-2010 Table 6-2.5.1
Extra Hazard Group 1 12.20 lpm over the most remote 232 sq. mtr. area Fire
13-2010 Table 6-2.5.1
2. Hydraulic design: The hydraulic design area shall be the hydraulically most
demanding “rectangular area” having a dimension parallel to the branch line equal to
1.2 times the square root of the area of the sprinkler operation.
3. Maximum water flow velocity shall not exceed 5.0 meter per second in any system
piping of hydraulically designed system.
4. Standpipe: Where shown on the drawings Standpipe System shall be installed as
Class I system per NFPA 14 (Standpipe and Hose Systems). Hydraulic calculations
are required for all wet standpipes serving two or more hose stations.
5. Hydraulic calculation shall be performed using an approved computer program
software generated calculation. Hand calculation programs or calculation on
spreadsheet will not be accepted. All calculation programs shall use the Hazen-
Williams calculation method.
D. Where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense), walk-in cold
storage rooms shall be provided with Dry Pipe Sprinkler System.
E. For Dry-pipe systems, increase the area of sprinkler operation by 30 percent without
revising the density.
F. All Dry-pipe system, regardless of the volume, are required to deliver, sustained water flow
to inspector’s test connection 60 seconds upon opening of the inspector’s test valve. All Dry
pipe system shall be provided with a UL listed or FM approved quick opening device.
G. Additional fire protection required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense)
or latest Fire Code requirement for the building not mentioned or referred to in this
specification shall be foreseen by the Fire Protection Specialist Contractor without
commercial implication.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. After award of contract and prior to fabrication, Fire Protection System Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer complete design submittals for approval. Design submittals package
shall include the following:
1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s catalogue data sheets containing details of technical

information, system and component operating instructions for the following;

a. Sprinklers heads, escutcheon and guards, including sprinkler flow

characteristic, temperature rating, finish and mounting orientation.
b. Standpipe, Hose system and Cabinets that includes size / type / finish, hose
connection / type / length of fire hoses, finish of fire hose coupling / type /
material, finish of nozzle and finish of fire hose rack.
c. Fire Pump Set and Fire Pump Controller that includes rated capacities,
certified pump performance curves with each selection point indicated,
operating characteristics of furnished accessories and specialties for each
pump / pressure maintenance pump and Factory test certificates (i.e.
Calibration, Hydrostatic, Pump Performance, etc.) shall be submitted.
d. Portable Fire Extinguishers that includes size, type, rating and capacity.
e. Fire Fighting listed valves, system control and specialty valves that include
size, pressure ratings and type.
f. Piping, Fitting, Support and Accessories; pressure rating and class, load etc.
g. Listed alarm / monitoring switches that include size, pressure rating, electrical
rating, etc.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and calculations for the system and shall include the
following:
1. Approved Sprinkler and Fire Fighting System piping drawings: Working plans
according to NFPA 13 - 2010 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems) and NFPA 14 - 2007
(Standpipe and Hose Systems), that have been approved by Authority Having
Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense), including system hydraulic calculation.
2. Fire fighting, sprinkler system and pump room arrangement plans, elevations,
sections and details.
3. Details of anchoring and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
4. Power, signal and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate wiring diagrams between
manufacturer installed and field-installed wiring.
5. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, shipping, and operating weights,
furnished specialties and accessories.
C. Coordination Drawings
1. Coordinated layout and installation of Fire Fighting System, Sprinkler System and
Specialties with other construction discipline that penetrates ceiling, including other
services. This layout shall clearly indicate pipe bottom elevations and routes thus
avoiding collision with other services.
2. Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale, coordinated penetrations and ceiling mounted
fixtures. Show the following:
a. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
d. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to
concealed valves, tamper switch, water flow switch, etc.
e. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speaker,
sprinklers, detectors, access panels and special moulding.
f. Elevation of Sprinkler System and Fire Fighting System pipe work.
D. As-Built Drawings
1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall revise all Fire Protection
Design files, calculations, manuals, operating instructions to agree with construction
as actually accomplished and installed. The notation “AS-BUILT” shall be entered in
the revision block, dated and initiated.

2. As - built submittals shall be submitted and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
the Final Acceptance Testing (FAT). This delivery shall include both electronic and
hard copies of all related drawings with quantities to be advised by the Engineer.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s charts showing the full range and ratings of
sprinkler coverage available, valves, fittings and specialty valves.
F. Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified elsewhere in this Section.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance manual fully
describing maintenance schedules, replacement parts, and other operation
requirements for Sprinkler System / Standpipe and Hose System / Other Systems,
control / specialty valves, pumps, pump drivers and controllers to include in Operation
and Maintenance manuals specified and required in relevant Division . Factory test
certificates of the fire pumps, control / specialty valves, etc. shall also be submitted as
mentioned above.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. The Contractor shall, at his cost, appoint a Specialist Sub-contractor for Fire
Protection Systems. The Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall be
one of those listed elsewhere in the Specification and be approved by the Dubai Civil
Defense) and subject to Engineers approval. The Specialist Fire Protection System
Sub-contractor shall be entirely responsible for the Design, Supply, Installation,
Testing and Commissioning of the Fire Protection Systems in line with the
Specification, Drawings and to Engineers and Dubai Civil Defense approval. After
preparation of Shop Drawings and their approval by the Engineer, the Specialist Fire
Protection System Sub-contractor shall obtain their final approval from Dubai Civil
Defense. After installation, testing and commissioning of the various systems, the
Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall arrange inspection by the
Dubai Civil Defense and obtain their approval / acceptance of the installation.
2. Installer responsibilities includes designing, fabricating, installing, testing and
commissioning of a complete Fire Fighting System, Sprinkler System, Other System
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.
B. Use only those products specifically listed and approved for Fire Protection services by UL-
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated, FM-Factory Mutual Testing Laboratories, BSI Kite
mark, LPCB, or other approved agencies of international reputations, where stipulated.
1. All products shall conform to the requirements of the following:
a. Dubai Civil Defense

b. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association of USA, Latest Edition
c. BS-EN - British Standard Specifications
d. Local Authority, International Electro Technical Commission, IEC, IEE
Standards in the selection and installation of electrical components and
systems.
2. Fire Pumps and Controllers shall be (UL) Listed and (FM) Factory Mutual approved
testing laboratories and underwriters laboratories incorporated for fire protection
services.

a. Pumps / Controllers shall also conforms to NFPA 20 - 2010 (Installation of

Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection) complying with the additional
requirements, if stated. Design shall be based on the occupancy hazards as
specified in latest NFPA Codes and Standards.
b. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be UL Listed and FM
Approved defined in NFPA 70 – 2008 (National Electrical Code), Article 100,
by testing agency acceptable to Dubai Civil Defense, and marked for intended
use.
c. Source Limitation: Obtain Fire pumps, Pressure maintenance pump and
Controllers through one source from a single manufacturer for each type of
equipment.
d. Factory visit shall be arrange by the Contractor for Engineers / Owner’s
representative/s to witness factory testing of the Fire Pump set before
shipment to the project site at the Contractor’s cost.
e. Factory acceptance test shall be witnessed by the Consultant’s Engineer,
Client Representative, Project Manager’s Representative and Contractor’s
Representative. The Contractor shall provide to and for Business Class air
passage to the place of test, which shall include 5 Stars accommodations for
the testing period. Test Report shall be submitted before the shipment of the
products. The test shall be carried out by approved laboratories. The
independent lab details and method statement for testing shall be submitted for
approval before commencement of testing. The test shall demonstrate the
compliance of the performance of the equipment with the equipment
schedules.
f. Failure to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and re-
testing
g. Submit written test results of factory acceptance tests for approval prior to
shipping.
h. Approval of equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the
equipment to the site and does not constitute final acceptance by the Engineer.
i. The visit in the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to
the site and does not constitute final acceptance by the Engineer.
j. Test and inspect fire pumps with their controllers according to latest NFPA 20
(Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection) for certified shop tests.
k. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to requirements
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Materials and equipment used in the installation of the Fire Fighting System and Sprinkler
System and/or Other Systems shall be new and listed by the
B. All equipment shall be UL/FM approved.
C. Fire Protection Equipment Directory or the FM Approval Guide, latest edition. The standard
products and the latest design of the manufacturer shall be used and installed per their
listing, approval or manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be
of the same manufacturer (e.g. couplings shall be from one manufacturer) All materials shall
be installed per their listing or approval and per the manufacturer’s recommendation and
specification.

2.2 SYSTEM CONTROL VALVE AND TRIMMINGS
A. System Isolating Valve
1. Cast Iron body, Outside Screw & Yoke (OS&Y) construction with solid wedge, flanged
ends for 65 mm & above / threaded ends for 50 mm & below. Valve shall be UL / FM
approved. The valve shall have a minimum working pressure of 1207 kpa. Use 2100
kpa rated valves where applicable.
B. Wet Alarm Check Valve
1. Alarm Check Valve: Cast Iron body, flap type construction with flanged ends, metered
by-pass with ball valve for pressure maintenance flow, test and alarm flow parts,
bolted access cover, pressure gauges (as specified elsewhere) at inlet and outlet and
shall be UL / FM approved.
2. Test and Drain Valve: All bronze valve with screwed ends complete with metering
orifice, discharge turn dish etc.
3. Alarm Test Valve: All bronze ball valve with screwed ends, operating lever, engraved
position indicator attached to the body.
4. Strainer: All bronze, Y - type strainer with screwed ends, screwed cover and stainless
steel screen for alarm supply line.
5. Water Motor Alarm: The Gong, Gong Mount, and Water Motor Housing shall be
fabricated from a corrosion resistant aluminum alloys. The bearing type shall be
polymer drive bearings which do not require lubrication, and the Gong shall be closely
fitted to the Gong Mount to eliminate the need for a separate cover.
6. Pressure Switch: The switch housing shall be weather proof and oil resistant. The
cover shall incorporate tamper resistant screws. It shall have normally closed / open
contacts (SPDT) and rated for 2.5 amps at 30 VDC / 15 amps at 250 VAC, whichever
is required.
C. Dry Pipe Valve
1. Dry Pipe Valve: Shall be low differential, latched closed spring assisted, self resetting
clapper, shall be UL listed & FM approved, suitable for both vertical or horizontal
installation, supplied with grade “E” EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12, serviceable without removal from the
line, flange ends for installation with ANSI class 150 flange, rated for service up to
300 psi (2065kPa) working pressure.
2. Where a system in a refrigerated space is supplied by an automatic air compressor,
the air shall be moisture free, and any device or apparatus used for automatic
maintenance of air pressure shall be of a type specifically listed for such service and
capable of controlling the required air pressure and maximum airflow to the system.
Piping details shall be consistent with those referenced in NFPA 13 -2010 (Installation
of Sprinkler Systems), Refrigerated Spaces. Where used, nitrogen shall be
introduced through a pressure regulator set to maintain system pressure.
2.3 FLOOR (ZONE) CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
A. The Sprinkler System shall be adequately zoned as per latest NFPA 13 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems) requirements and as shown in the drawings. Each zone shall have a
zone control valve assembly consisting of the following;
1. UL / FM Approved Butterfly valve with built-in tamper switch with normally close /
open contacts and shall be connected to the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel and or
Monitoring Panel. The valve shall be wafer type or grooved type with valve body
made of bronze material, stainless steel disc & stem and geared slow-close

mechanism. Valve shall have a minimum pressure rating of 1207 kpa working
pressure. Use 2100 kpa rated valves where applicable, and or in case system has
excessive working pressure.
2. UL / FM Approved Non-return Valve, either flanged ends or grooved ends type
connection rated at 1207 kpa working pressure. Use 2100 kpa pressure rating valves
where applicable, and or in case system has excessive working pressure. Valve body
shall be made of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, clapper shall be stainless
steel, valve seal shall be of Class “E” EPDM material and the valve shall be provided
with a protective coating (Non lead paint).
3. UL / FM Approved Test & Drain Assembly consisting of 32 mm diameter drain valve
and sight glass. This shall be connected to a drain riser pipe.
4. UL Listed & FM Approved Water Flow Switch with specification as described
elsewhere in this Section.
5. UL Listed pressure gauge assembly, labeled, minimum 3-1/2 inches dial, liquid filled
type, moisture proof, weather resistant, 0 – 300 psi scale and with 5 psi increments.
2.4 INSPECTOR TEST CONNECTION
A. Inspector test connection shall be provided at the end of the farthest branch line with a test
valve installed in an accessible location and terminated to a nearest drain. Provide sight
glass after the valve in order to check flow of water equivalent to a flow of one sprinkler.
2.5 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. General Requirements for Sprinklers
1. One of the characteristics of sprinklers ability to control or extinguish a fire is its

thermal sensitivity measured in Response Time Index (RTI). Sprinklers defined as
fast response shall have a thermal element with response time index of 50 meters-
second or less, and sprinklers defined as standard response have a thermal element
with a response time index of 80 meters-second or more.
2. UL Listed & FM Approved Quick response sprinkler head with temperature rating of
570C to 790C. Sprinkler heads shall be used where required in the premises, except
in freezers, cold rooms and mechanical rooms where temperature ratings shall be
verified to its ambient room temperature base on NFPA 13 - 2010 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems). All sprinklers shall be rated for 1207 kpa / 1730 kpa, where
required except otherwise as noted.
3. UL Listed and FM Approved concealed type sprinklers shall be used in all the area’s
with false ceiling.
4. UL Listed & FM Approved Standard response sprinkler head with temperature ratings
shall be ordinary classification between 570C and 790C. The exceptions are that
intermediate classification sprinklers rated at 1000C shall be used in electrical closets
and mechanical rooms and any other areas in which high temperatures are
experienced. For systems with high pressure, all sprinklers shall be high pressure
type rated for 1730 kpa.
5. All sprinklers shall be installed at least (12 inches) 300 mm from any air distribution
devices. Sprinkler location at wall mounted and peninsular shelving units shall be a
minimum of 450 mm away.
6. Provide two (2) sprinkler head wrenches for each type sprinkler head.
7. All sprinklers shall be supplied from one (1) manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
Submit one (1) sample of each sprinkler to be utilized on this project to be approved
technically by the Engineer and the colour finishes to be approved by the Interior
Designer.
8. Sprinklers using rubber O-rings or rubber seals shall not be permitted for use in this
project.

9. Provide sprinklers in concealed spaces (i.e. ceiling void) whenever the space
contains combustible construction materials and the space height exceeds 800 mm.
B. Standard Response Sprinklers
1. Exposed Sprinklers – Standard Response, UL Listed / FM Approved
a. Exposed sprinklers shall be large glass bulb operated, standard response,

either upright or pendent type automatic sprinkler head as indicated and shown
on the drawings. Finish shall be chrome (or as per Interior Designer
requirements), temperature rating shall be 680C at a pressure of 1207 kpa for
unconditioned areas and shall be 570C at a pressure of 1207 kpa for
conditioned areas.
b. Provide wired sprinkler guards on sprinklers subjected to any mechanical
damages.
2. Concealed Sprinklers – Standard Response, UL Listed / FM Approved
a. Concealed sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, standard response at 680C

temperature rating, standard coverage and includes a unique 2 piece base
elements / cover assembly at 570C temperature rating that will accommodate
the pendent type sprinkler oriented in the ceiling opening. The flat cover plate
of the sprinkler head (which is normally soldered to the retainer at three points)
once exposed to heat from a fire shall fall away to expose the sprinkler
assembly. Once the 5 mm glass bulb rated temperature is reached, the fluid
inside the bulb expands sufficiently to shatter and activate the sprinkler
allowing flow of water. Colour finish shall be approved by the Architect.
3. Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers – Standard Response, UL Listed / FM Approved
a. Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, standard response,

standard coverage, where coverage more than the requirement of the standard
sprinkler head, the extended coverage sprinkler head shall be provided and
includes an adjustable 2 piece recessed escutcheon from sidewall flush
position.
C. Quick Response Sprinkler
1. Exposed Sprinklers – Quick Response, UL Listed / FM Approved
a. Exposed sprinklers shall be glass bulb operated, quick response, upright or

pendent type automatic sprinklers as indicated on the drawings with chrome
finish. Temperature rating shall be 570C to 790C at 1725 kpa.
2. Horizontal Sidewall Sprinklers – Quick Response (Light Hazard areas only), where
coverage more than the requirement of the standard coverage sprinkler head the
extended coverage sprinkler head shall be provided, UL Listed / FM Approved
a. Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall be glass bulb operated, quick response

horizontal sidewall sprinkler rated at 570C to 790C. Sprinkler shall be chrome
plated and/or the colour shall be approved by the Interior Designer.
3. Concealed Sprinklers – Quick Response, UL Listed / FM Approved
a. Concealed sprinklers shall be glass bulb type, quick response, standard

coverage and includes a unique 2 piece base elements / cover assembly at
570C temperature rating that will accommodate the pendent type sprinkler

head at 680C temperature rating oriented in the ceiling opening. The flat cover
plate of the sprinkler head (which is normally soldered to the retainer at three
points) once exposed to heat from a fire shall fall away to expose the sprinkler
assembly. Once the 3 mm glass bulb rated temperature is reached, the fluid
inside the bulb expands sufficiently to shatter and activate the sprinkler
allowing flow of water. Colour finish shall be approved by the Interior Designer.
D. Sprinkler Type Application Schedule
1. The following schedule shall be used to determine which type of sprinkler should be
installed in a given area.
ROOM TYPE CEILING TYPE SPRINKLER TYPE
Mechanical Room Exposed-Lay-In Upright

Offices Lay-In Concealed
Meeting Rooms Lay-In Concealed
Toilet rooms Lay-In Concealed
Corridors Dry wall / Lay-In Concealed
Vestibule Dry wall; Lay-In Concealed
Storage Dry wall; Lay-In Recessed Pendent
2. The sprinkler heads shall be of the spray pattern installed in an upright position or
pendent position as may be required where indicated in the drawing.
3. Installed in areas without false ceiling: Provide Upright / Pendent Sprinkler, Glass
bulb sprinkler head, 13 mm orifice and color finish shall be as per Interior Designer’s
approval. The sprinkler shall be UL / FM approved.
4. Horizontal Side Wall Sprinkler: The automatic sprinklers designed for installation
along with a wall or lintel. The sprinkler shall be glass bulb type and shall have UL /
FM approval.
5. Horizontal Side Wall Extended coverage sprinkler covering 7300 mm shall use 20
mm orifice with ¾” NPT inlet.
6. Spare Sprinklers: A set of spare sprinkler heads shall be provided in a Spare
Sprinkler cabinet together with sprinkler wrenches / spanners as mentioned
elsewhere in this specification.
7. Provide sprinklers in ceiling voids above 800 mm and in concealed spaces wholly or
partially enclosed by exposed combustible construction.
2.6 LANDING VALVES
A. Pressure Regulating Type Landing Valve
1. Pressure regulating type landing valve shall be installed where valve outlet pressure
exceeds 7 bars. The valve shall be factory calibrated to supply minimum flow of 945
lpm at a pressure of 7 bars at the valve outlet. The valve shall be UL/ FM Approved or
KITE mark approved. The body shall be cast brass with 65 mm diameter female
threaded inlet, internal pressure regulator and 65 mm nominal diameter and female
instantaneous outlet to BS 336.
2.7 FIRE HOSE
A. Fire hose shall be UL Listed & FM Approved for 40 mm (1-1/2”) diameter and minimum of
30 mtr. (100 ft.) long. Fire hose shall be 100% polyester double jacket with synthetic rubber

lining. Specifically designed for where abrasion resistance and high pressure are being
considered. 100% virgin polyester yarn in both the wrap, inner jacket twill weave, plain
waive on outer jacket, with applicable coupling to adopt the Local Fire Brigade connections.
2.8 INSTANTANEOUS COUPLINGS AND REDUCER COUPLINGS
A. Hose coupling and coupling reducers 65 mm x 40 mm diameter shall be Gunmetal, chrome

plated, instantaneous design to BS 336, Listed, KITE mark or LPCB approved.
2.9 FIRE HOSE REEL
A. The automatic fire hose reel drum shall be made of stainless steel with the cabinet
supported with reinforced support arm, shall be chrome plated and swing through 180
degrees. Welding of any part on cabinet front shall not be allowed. The reels shall be
manufactured complying with BS-EN 671 and comprises of hose having a three ply with two
layers of synthetic rubber and a textile reinforced rubber hose, 25 mm. diameter x 30 m
long, coiled on a revolving drum. The outer end of a hose shall be fitted with a “jet / spray /
shut-off” control nozzle. The inner end of the hose shall be connected through the reel to the
water supply. Within three revolutions of the reel, the hose reel valve shall open
automatically.
2.10 FIRE CABINETS
A. Cabinet shall be manufactured by an ISO-9001 manufacturing company and certified (e.g.

BVQI, LPCB, UL or any reputable certifying bodies).
B. Fire hose cabinets, hose, valves, nozzle, couplings and reducer couplings shall be approved
and listed intended for fire use and shall be in conformance with the requirement of the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense). Fire hose cabinets shall be provided
according to its type as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the specification.
C. Fire hose cabinet in the parking area shall be made of 1.2mm thick mild steel sheet
fabricated that all joints shall be welded and ground smooth. Architrave trimming shall be
100 mm depth of the same finish of the door. Hinges shall be solid pin type machined from
steel rods and welded to cabinet door. Cabinet & Door shall be electro static powder coated
painted, to RAL finish and to the Architect’s approval. Cabinets shall be installed as shown
in the drawing and where applicable
D. Fire hose cabinet in the office area shall be made of 1.2mm thick stainless steel sheet
fabricated that all joints shall be welded and ground smooth. Architrave trimming shall be
steel rods and welded to cabinet door. Cabinet & Door shall be with brushed stainless steel
finish and to the Architect’s & ID approval. Cabinets shall be installed as shown in the
drawing and where applicable
E. Where floor areas having block work enclosure fire hose cabinets shall be recessed
frameless type (Door & Architrave) as per the Interior Design and Architecture drawings.
Door shall be made of 1.2 mm thick stainless steel design to hold the cladding of the same
finish of wall. Hinges shall be solid pin type machined from steel rods and welded to cabinet
door. The cladding finish shall be of the same material of the wall and to the approval of the
Interior Designer.
F. Recessed fire hose cabinet shall be of 1.2 mm thick electro galvanized steel sheet.
Fabricated that all joints shall be welded and ground smooth. Architrave trimming shall be

steel rods and welded to cabinet door. Cabinet shall be electro static powder coated
painted, to RAL finish and to the Interior Designer’s approval. Cabinets shall be installed as
shown in the drawing and where applicable.
G. All fire hose / valve cabinet used in the through penetration fire rated wall shall be UL fire
rated cabinets with insulation materials and UL classified to restore firestop around
penetration.
H. Surface mounted fire hose cabinet shall be 1.2 Stainless Steel 316 sheet. Fabricated that all
joints shall be welded and ground smooth. Hinges shall be solid pin type machined from
steel rods and welded to cabinet door. Cabinets shall be subject to the approval of the
Interior Designer and shall be installed as shown in the drawing and where applicable.
I. All fire hose / valve cabinets shall be clearly marked to indicate its contents, letters shall be
red and shall be 65 mm in height. Visibly identified as per the requirement of NFPA 14 -
2007 (Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems) and to the approval of the Authority
Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense). Contents of Fire hose cabinets according to its
type are as follows:
1. FHC-1
a. 65 mm nom. dia. Pressure Regulating Type Landing valve
2. FHC-2
a. Hose reel with 25 mm dia. x 30 m long rubber hose, angle valve and adjustable
nozzle.
b. 65 mm dia. Pressure reducing type landing valve
c. 40 mm dia. x 30 m long hose with instantaneous couplings, coupling reducer
and nozzle.
d. Water fire extinguisher, 9 liters capacity
e. CO2 fire extinguisher, 5 kgs. Capacity
3. FHC-2A (Recessed mounted)
nozzle.
c. 40 mm dia. x 30 m long hose with instantaneous couplings, reducer coupling
and nozzle.
4. FHC-3S (Surface mounted)
nozzle.
and nozzle.
5. FHC-4 (Free Standing)

nozzle.
and nozzle.
2.11 FIRE HYDRANTS:
A. Fire hydrants shall meet or exceed all applicable requirements and tests of ANSI and the
latest revisions of AWWA Standard C502. Fire hydrants shall meet all test requirements
and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Fire hydrants shall meet all test
requirements and have full approval of Factory Mutual. Fire hydrants shall meet the
following requirements
1. Fire hydrants shall be rated for a working pressure of 250 Psig. (1725 kPa).
2. Fire hydrants shall be of the compression type, opening against the pressure and
closing with the pressure.
3. Fire hydrants shall have a minimum 4-1/2” main valve opening and a minimum inside
lower/upper barrel diameter (I.D.) of 6” to assure maximum flow performance.
Pressure loss at 1,000 GPM shall not exceed the following values:
a. 4” Pumper Nozzle: 4.40psi

b. 4.5” Pumper Nozzle: 4.75psi
B. Fire hydrants shall be three-way in design, having one pumper nozzle (size as specified)
and two 2-1/2” hose nozzle(s). Nozzle thread type shall be as specified by the enduser.
Nozzles shall thread counterclockwise into hydrant barrel utilizing “o” ring seals. A suitable
nozzle lock shall be in place to prevent inadvertent nozzle removal.
C. The bonnet assembly shall provide an oil reservoir and lubrication system that automatically
circulates lubricant to all stem threads and bearing surfaces each time the hydrant is
operated. This lubrication system shall be sealed from the waterway and any external
contaminants by use of “o “ ring seals. An anti-friction washer shall be in place above the
thrust collar to further minimize operating torque. The oil reservoir shall be factory filled with
a low viscosity, FDA approved non-toxic oil lubricant which will remain fluid through a
temperature range of –600 F. to +1500 F.
D. The operating nut shall be a one piece design, manufactured of ASTM B-584 bronze. It
shall be pentagon/square in shape and the nut dimensions shall be as specified by the
enduser. The operating nut shall be affixed to the bonnet by means of an ASTM B-584
bronze hold down nut. The hold down nut shall be threaded into the bonnet in such a
manner as to prevent accidental disengagement during the opening cycle of the hydrant.
The use of Allen head set screws as a means of retention is unacceptable. A resilient
weather seal shall be incorporated into the hold down nut, for the purpose of protecting the
operating mechanism from the elements.
E. The direction of the opening shall be as specified by the end user . An arrow shall be cast
on the bonnet flange to indicate the specified opening direction.

F. The hydrant bonnet shall be attached to the upper barrel by not less than eight bolts and
nuts and sealed by an “o” ring.
G. Hydrants shall be a “traffic-model” having upper and lower barrels joined at the ground line
by a separate and breakable “swivel” flange providing 3600 rotation of upper barrel for
proper nozzle facing. This flange shall employ not less than eight bolts. The safety flange
segments shall be located under the upper barrel flange to prevent the segments from
falling into the lower barrel when the hydrant is struck. The pressure seal between the
barrels shall be an “o” ring. The proper ground line shall be cast clearly on the lower barrel
and shall provide not less than 18” of clearance from the centerline of the lowest nozzle to
the ground.
H. The operating stem shall consist of two pieces, not less than 1 1/4” diameter (excluding
threaded or machined areas) and shall be connected by a stainless steel safety coupling.
The safety coupling shall have an integral internal stop to prevent the coupling from sliding
down into the lower barrel when the hydrant is struck. Screws, pins, bolts, or fasteners used
in conjunction with the stem couplings shall also be stainless steel. The top of the lower
stem shall be recessed 2” below the face of the safety flange to prevent water hammer in
the event of a “ drive over” where a vehicle tire might accidentally depress the main valve.
I. The lower barrel shall be an integrally cast unit. The use of threaded on or mechanically
attached flanges is deemed unacceptable. The hydrant bury depth shall be clearly marked
on the hydrant lower barrel.
J. Composition of the main valve shall be a molded rubber having a durometer hardness of 95
+/- 5 and shall be reversible in design to provide a spare in place. Plastic (polyurethane)
main valves are unacceptable. The main valve shall have a cross section not less than 1”.
K. Hydrants shall be equipped with (2) two drain valves which drain the barrel when the
hydrant is closed and seal shut when the hydrant is opened. These drain valves shall be an
integral part of the one piece bronze upper valve plate. They shall operate without the use of
springs, toggles, tubes, levers or other intricate synchronizing mechanisms.
L. The upper valve plate, seat ring and drain ring (shoe bushing) must be ASTM B-584 bronze
and work in conjunction to form an all bronze drain way. A minimum of two (2) internal and
two (2) external drain openings are required. Drains ported through an iron shoe must be
bronze lined.
M. The bronze seat ring shall thread into a bronze drain ring (or shoe bushing) providing a
bronze to bronze connection. Seat rings shall be “o” ring pressure sealed
N. The shoe inlet size and connection type shall be as specified (flanged, MJ, etc.), having
ample blocking pads for sturdy setting and the MJ connection must have two strapping lugs
to secure the hydrant to piping. A minimum of six bolts and nuts is required to fasten the
shoe to the lower barrel.
O. The interior of the shoe including the lower valve plate and stem cap nut shall have a
protective coating that meets the requirements of AWWA C-550. If a stem cap nut is
utilized, it must be locked in place by a stainless steel lock washer or similar non-corrosive
device that will prevent the cap nut from backing-off during normal use.
P. Hydrants shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in materials or

workmanship for a period of ten years (10) from the date of manufacture. The
manufacturing facility for the hydrant must have current ISO certification.
2.12 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. The Water Fire Extinguisher shall have a Kite mark approval and shall comply with BS-EN3
standard. The cylinder shall be special CRCA sheet with Argon / CO2 welding process and
factory tested to 30 bars. Provide Water fire extinguisher of 9 ltr. capacity and the rating
shall be 21A.
B. The Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers shall have a KITE mark approval and shall comply
with BS EN3 standards. The cylinder shall be made of high grade steel and shall have high
gloss polyester finish. The cylinders shall be tested to 250 bars. Provide CO2 fire
extinguishers of 5 kgs. capacity and the rating shall be 55B.
C. The Dry powder Fire Extinguishers shall have a KITE mark approval and shall comply with
BS EN3 standards. The cylinder shall be made special cold rolled steel sheet with Argon /
CO2 welding process and the rising pipe shall be made of Aluminum. The cylinder shall
have a minimum working pressure of 14 bars. Provide Dry powder fire extinguishers of 6
kgs. capacity with 34A & 183B rating.
D. The Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishers shall have a KITE mark approval and shall comply
with BS 7937 standards. The cylinder shall be tested to 15 bars and shall have a safety
valve to provide maximum safety. The capacity shall be 6 liters with 75F / 13A ratings. They
shall be provided in all kitchen areas, if indicated in the drawing.
E. All fire extinguishers shall be mounted inside a cabinet, either surface / recessed mounted
as shown in the drawings. Cabinet shall be of size capable of accommodating two (2) nos.
of fire extinguishers. Cabinet shall be of stainless steel construction with finishes subject to
the Interior Designer’s approval, and acceptable to the Local Authority (Dubai Civil
Defense).
2.13 FIRE BLANKETS
A. Provide fire blankets in kitchens where indicated in the drawings. Fire blankets shall have a
BS Kite mark and shall be LPCB approved. Fire blanket shall be manufactured from 430
gm/sq. m glass fiber material which shall withstand temperature up to 5500C. The size shall
be (1200 mm) 4 ft x (1200 mm.) 4 ft. or (1200 mm) 4 Ft. x (1800 mm) 6 ft as indicated on
the drawings.
2.14 FIRE BRIGADE BREECHING INLETS
A. The Breeching Inlet connection shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm flanged
outlet and 65 mm diameter instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains.
A non-return (check) valve shall be provided to protect the inlets. The coupling shall comply
with BS 336. The Breeching inlet shall have BSI KITE mark approval and shall be housed in
a box with wired glass door. Construction material for the cabinet shall be polished stainless
steel. Breeching inlet location shall be accessible and as per approval of Authority Having
Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense).
2.15 AUTOMATIC AIR RELIEF VALVES
A. Air release valve shall be made of copper alloy to BS 1400. The valve shall be 25 mm
diameter size and tested to 2415 KPa.
2.16 FIRE PROTECTION VALVES

A. All Fire protection valves shall be UL listed and FM approved with 1200 kpa minimum
pressure rating. Valve shall have 2070 kpa pressure rating if valves are components of high
pressure piping system.
B. Valves controlling water flow in fire protection piping shall be O.S&Y (Outside Screw &
Yoke) type with tamper switch, except as noted, and shall be UL Listed and FM approved.
C. All Fire protection service valves (Gate valve, Check valves & Butterfly valves) shall be
from one source.
D. Gate valve shall be OS& Y type or Non-rising type, resilient seated as indicated in the
drawing. Sizes up to 50 mm and below shall be threaded type. The valve body shall be cast
bronze and wheel shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL listed and rated for 1207 kpa
working pressure. Use 2070 kpa pressure rating if valves are components of high pressure
piping.
E. Sizes 65 mm dia. and above shall be Cast Iron OS&Y / Non-rising flanged type Gate valves
where indicated. The valve body shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL listed / FM
approved and rated for 1207 kpa working pressure (or 1380 / 1725 kpa where required).
F. Use class 1725 kpa OS&Y gate valves where required. The valve body shall be cast iron
and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA standards.
G. Check valves shall be swinging type or split clapper type with flanged / grooved ends. The
valve body shall be cast iron. The valve shall be UL listed / FM approved and rated for 1380
kpa working pressure (or 2070 kpa where required).
H. Use class 1725 / 2070 kpa check valves where required. The valve body shall be cast steel
and shall be designed & manufactured according to AWWA standards.
I. Butterfly valves shall be wafer type or Grooved type with built-in valve tamper switch. The
valve body shall be made of bronze material and stainless steel disc & stem. The valve shall
be UL listed / FM approved and rated for 1207 kpa working pressure. Use 2070 kpa
pressure rating if the valve is a component of a high pressure piping.
J. Globe type valve shall be bronze, 1207 kpa pressure rating, UL / FM approved. Use 2070
kpa pressure rating if valve is a component of high pressure piping.
K. Y–Type Strainer. Shall be rated at 300 psi ( 2065Kpa) Y - Type Strainer consisting of Ductile
Iron Body, ASTM A-536 grade 65-45-12, Type 304 Stainless Steel cylindrical removable
baskets with 1/16” perforations and 41% open area for 2” - 3” strainer size. 1/8” (3.2mm)
diameter perforations and 40% open area 4” - 12” strainer size.
L. Suction Diffuser. Shall be Grooved End type rated at 300 psi, Ductile Iron Body , ASTM A-
395 grade 65-45-15 body with base support boss. Diffuser of 304 Stainless Steel with 5/32”
(4mm) diameter holes for 3” - 12”. Removable start up prefilter 20 mesh 304 Stainless steel
screen. Provide connections for pressure measurement and drain. Access coupling style 07,
flange ANSI Class 150 standard.
M. Riser Check Valve. Shall be Grooved type Riser check valve, Black Enamel Painted, Ductile
Iron Body to ASTM A536 grade 65-45-12 4” - 8”, Grade “E” EPDM encapsulated Ductile Iron
disc, stainless steel spring and shaft, rated to 300 psi (2070 kpa). Suitable for Anti Hammer
service and horizontal or vertical installation. Provide drilled, tapped and plugged stream for
2” drainage outlet and ½” pressure taps both upstream and downstream of disc. UL listed
and FM approved.

N. Pressure Reducing Valve. Shall be UL listed / FM Approved and suitable for both horizontal
and vertical installation per UL Listing. Regardless of the variations in inlet pressure or
demand, the valve shall function to reduce higher inlet pressure to a constant lower outlet
pressure. The valve shall be flanged end connections and globe type. Pressure control
valve shall be single seated, line pressure operated, diaphragm actuated and pilot
controlled. Valve body and bonnet shall be ductile iron to ASTM A536 epoxy coated both
internally and externally. Disc shall be corrosion resistant seat and resilient. Main valve stem
shall use integral bushing for top and bottom guide. Precision dowel pins shall be used for
body, bonnet and diaphragm alignment. Seat rings of main valve shall be bronze per ASTM
B61, and Buna-N for diaphragms, resilient seats and O-rings. Pilot control shall be bronze
with copper tubing. Where required, pressure setting of pressure reducing valve shall be
done in the factory, at this point, all pressure data of the system shall be provided by the
contractor.
O. Flexible Joints: Flexible Couplings shall be installed at pump suction and discharge flanges
to reduce the noise and vibration. It shall be flanged end type rated at 150#, pipe ends shall
be carbon steel and 321 stainless with 304 stainless braided sheath corrugated hose. The
flexible joints shall be rated at 2380 kpa working pressure.
P. Building Expansion Joints: Flexible couplings shall be used to accommodate any movement
in the pipe due to Building expansion or contraction. A proper study and calculation needs to
be provided by the Manufacturer.
2.17 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A. Provide FM Approved tamper switches on all control valves. PIV switches shall be weather-
resistant and shall monitor target position. OS&Y switches shall monitor stem movement
and shall be complete with mounting J-bolts.
B. Electric valve supervision switches shall be installed for all internal (inside) and external
(outside) fire protection valves 2½ inches or larger. The devices shall be electrical, single-
pole, double-throw, with normally closed / open contacts and includes design that signals
controlled valve is in other than normal position.
C. For wet pipe sprinkler systems, install a pressure operated water flow alarm initiation device,
unless otherwise noted on the contract drawings. All vane type water flow alarm initiation
devices shall be equipped with an adjustable delay of audible alarm initiation. Adjustment
range shall be from 0 to 120 seconds. Vane type water flow switch.
D. Water flow vane-type alarm initiation devices shall be labeled as to the correct orientation of
flow when mounted on system piping. When drilling of the system riser is necessary to
mount flow switch, the drilled out disc (coupon) shall be retrieved and attached to the
mounting u-bolt of the flow switch.
E. Where pressure operated water flow alarm initiation devices are used, any valve installed
upstream of the device on the alarm line shall be electrically supervised. Pressure operated
alarm initiation devices shall be an electrical-supervision type, water-flow switch with retard
feature. The device shall include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and
design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow.
F. A vane-type water flow alarm initiation device shall be installed on the air gap drain for all
reduced pressure backflow prevention devices.
G. Pressure Switch: System Sensor Alarm. Contact ratings 10A @ 125/250 vac or 2.5A @
6/12/24 vdc. Working pressure 250 psi and max adjustment range 4-20 psi, differential
pressure to be 3 psi, UL 4x & Nema 4 rated for indoor and outdoor use.

H. Low-pressure supervision shall be installed on all dry pipe systems and be connected into
the Fire Alarm System.
I. Any device that is to be installed in a hazardous location defined by NFPA 70 - 2008 shall
be rated for occupancy.
2.18 GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges shall be UL listed and labeled, minimum 3-1/2 inch dial, liquid filled type,
moisture proof weather resistant, 0 - 300 psi scale, 5 psi increments.
2.19 HDPE PIPES & FITTING (UNDER GROUND BURRIED PIPE)
A. All fire fighting pipe buried under ground shall be of HDPE pipe as per Dubai civil defense
requirement.
B. HDPE Pipe: Approved HDPE pipes and Fittings confirming to AWWA C906-07 with
temperature & pressure rating not less than the system working pressure by taking in to
consideration of de-ration factor for temperature, recurring surge & occasional surge
pressure. Based on the system proposed, the HDPE pipes and fittings shall be rated for
PN16 at water temperature for Dubai ambient conditions. Contractor to submit the suitable
HDPE pipe and fittings for Engineers approval.
C. Thrust block shall be provided underground fire fighting piping network wherever required.
Contractor to submit necessary calculation for thrust block selection for engineer’s approval.
D. The complete method statement for installation underground buried pipe shall be submitted
for engineer’s review before proceeding with installations at site.
2.20 STEEL PIPES & FITTINGS
A. All pipes shall be Galvanized steel, ERW, conform to ASTM A-53, Schedule 40, Grade B.
B. Sprinkler and fire fighting specialty fittings shall be UL listed & FM approved, with 175 psig
(1200 kpa) minimum working pressure rating and made of materials compatible with piping.
Specialty fittings shall have 300 psig (2070 kpa) working pressure if fittings are components
of high pressure.
C. Threaded Fittings: Fittings for 50 mm diameter and below shall be 2070 kpa Ductile Iron
threaded type. All fittings shall be and UL / FM approved.
D. Fittings 65 mm diameter and above shall be mechanical roll grooved type. Grooved fittings
shall be UL / FM approved. Use 2070 kpa or 3450 kpa rated fittings as per system
pressure. All mechanical coupling shall be rigid type, except in areas where subject to
seismic forces a flexible mechanical coupling shall be used.
E. When pipes are assembled by screwed fittings or by roll grooved, the minimum thickness
required shall withstand to a pressure of 2070 kpa.
F. Bushing / hexagonal reducers shall not be used. Only concentric type reducer is acceptable.
G. All piping and fittings shall be painted with primer coat and painted finish with fire protection
red per NFPA requirements.

H. All painting of sprinkler system piping shall be complete and as specified under painting
specification.
I. All piping crossing building expansion joints shall be provided with flexible joint fitting 600
mm away from the building expansion joint.
J. All system piping shall be provided with flushing connection with readily removable fitting at
the end of the cross main pipe.
2.21 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Provide sleeves for piping passing through walls, floors, roofs, equipment, structural
members, and other building components. Where a pipe passes thru holes in platforms,
foundations, walls or floors, sleeves shall be provided with sizes nominally 50 mm larger
than the pipe that pass thru for 25 mm up to 80 mm diameter and 100 mm larger than the
pipe that passes thru for 100 mm up to larger. Sleeves shall be securely fastened to the
assembly penetrated.
1. Through penetration of fire resistive rated walls;
a. Annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be protected by an approved

penetration fire stop system installed and tested in accordance with ASTM
E814, with minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch of water and
shall have an F rating of not less than the required fire resistive rating of the
wall penetration.
b. Sealant in one and two hour walls shall be UL listed and installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
2. Through penetration of fire resistive rated floor and floor assemblies
a. Annular space between sleeves and pipes shall be protected by an approved

through penetration fire stop system installed and tested in accordance with
ASTM-E814, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.25 mm of
water. The system shall have an F and a T rating of not less than one hour but
not less than the required rating of the floor penetration.
b. Sealant in one and two hour walls shall be UL listed and installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.
B. Schedule of Sleeve Materials
Sleeve Type Sleeve Material

1 1.3 mm galvanized steel.
2 Std. weight galvanized steel pipe.
Std. weight galvanized steel pipe with a continuously welded water stop of
3 6.5 mm steel plate extending a minimum of 50 mm from the outside of the
sleeve.
4 Cast iron pipe sleeve with center flange.
Std. weight galvanized steel pipe with flashing clamp device welded to pipe
5 sleeve or watertight sleeves with oakum and lead caulking as required, or
approved equivalent.
6 Metal deck and wall sleeves.
C. Escutcheon Plates

1. Schedule of Escutcheon Plate Materials
Location Escutcheon Plate Material

Finished spaces : Anodized aluminum or chrome-plated brass
Unfinished spaces : Plain brass, cast iron or aluminum
D. Schedule of Sleeve Caulking and Packing
Caulking/Packing Type Caulking / Packing Requirements
1 Space between pipe and sleeve shall be packed with mineral wool
and caulked watertight with fire rated caulking.
Space between pipe or pipe covering and sleeve shall be caulked

2 with a non-combustible permanently waterproof, non-staining, fire
proof compound leaving a smooth, finished appearance to match
existing.
3 Rubber mechanical jointed watertight seals
2.22 PIPE HANGERS
A. The components of hanger assembly that directly attach to the pipe or the structure shall be
UL listed / FM approved.
B. All hangers shall be made of steel. Hangers shall be Galvanized and UL / FM approved.
The spacing of the hanger supports shall be complying with NFPA 13 – 2010 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems) requirement.
C. Piping shall be hung with hangers and supports independent of any other hangers, support
systems, or devices. Non related materials may not be suspended from or attached to
sprinkler piping or components.
D. Powder driven supports or anchor shall not be used. Do not mix piping material and hanger
material of dissimilar metals.
E. Riser pipe shall be provided with trust force arrest pipe support (for vertical run) / hanger
(horizontal run) to minimize pipe sway.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. This article covers tests and inspections performed at the source to verify that products and
materials comply with requirements specified in Part 2.
B. If needed, insert requirement for Owner or Contractor to retain a qualified testing agency to
evaluate materials and products.
C. Verify testing procedures and certification programs with standards organizations. Verify
type of label or stamp provided by standards organization.

D. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of the fire protection system in accordance
with these specifications and the contract drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate with
architectural, mechanical, and electrical, design and construction documents, to ascertain
the required information, to affect a properly designed and installed sprinkler system for the
building construction and occupancy classification. The installation shall reflect high quality
professional work that properly accounts for practical maintenance concerns and aesthetics.
E. The installation of the fire protection systems shall be complete with all necessary
accessories for proper operation and shall be accomplished by a specialist fire fighting
contractor or licensed company regularly engaged in this type of work, and in accordance
with requirements of the National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense).
F. The fire protection system installation shall be coordinated with the other trades
(mechanical, electrical and structural, etc.).
G. The installation shall comply with all mandatory, advisory interpretations, and recommended
applicable rules of the latest editions of the NFPA standards and the Authority having
jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense).
3.2 ALARM CHECK VALVE
A. Alarm Check Valves shall be provided with internally and externally galvanized trim piping
and fittings, pressure gages, a retarding chamber, water motor gong, alarm switch, testing
bypass, and all necessary pipe, fittings and accessories.
B. The retarding chamber drain line shall be piped independently of the main drain line.
C. The drain line from the water motor gong shall be piped to discharge through the wall as
close to the grade line as possible.
D. Piping between the alarm check valve and a pressure actuated alarm initiating device shall
be galvanized piping not less than 3/8 inch nominal pipe size.
E. Piping supplying the retard chamber, water motor gong, and associated drains shall be
galvanized. Galvanized fittings are to be used where galvanized piping is required.
3.3 DRY PIPE VALVE (Where required)
A. Proper operation of the Dry Pipe Valve depends upon its trim being installed in accordance
with manufacturer’s instruction.
B. Open clapper assembly prior to system hydrostatic test.
C. The dry pipe valve and associated trimmings shall be installed I a readily visibly and access
able location.
D. All nipple, fittings, and devices must be clean and free of scale and burrs before installation.
Use pipe thread sealant sparingly on male pipe threads only.
3.4 SPRINKLERS

A. Accurately align sprinklers heads in hung ceiling areas symmetrically with diffusers, grilles,
lighting fixtures and ceiling tiles.
B. Install heads in center tiles / coordinated with architectural design this may result in
additional heads which shall be provided at no additional cost unless otherwise indicated.
C. Sprinkler shall not be installed closer than 1800 mm apart.
D. Where suspended ceilings are installed, the sprinkler Contractor shall install pendent
sprinklers as shown on the reflected ceiling plans. Where these plans do not specify the
location of the pendent sprinklers, the Contractor shall obtain the original reflected ceiling
plans, and design sprinkler locations at least 150mm from ceiling tile edges, (dimension the
location) and 750mm from HVAC supply diffuser. If a sprinkler lands with in 750mm of the
HVAC supply diffuser the contractor shall install an intermediate temperature rated sprinkler.
Locate sprinklers along straight lines to the extent possible, follow a repetitive pattern.
Pendent sprinklers shall be installed by means of an approved flexible application (such as
flex head or approved equal), or Return bends from 25mm outlet tees in branch lines.
E. Sprinklers are required to be installed in elevator machine room and top / bottom of elevator
shaft.
F. Sprinklers are required to be installed beneath staircase mid-landing.
G. Where ceiling void is above 800 mm and concealed spaces are enclosed by exposed
combustible construction, sprinklers are required.
H. Garbage and linen chute shall be provided with sprinklers as per NFPA 13 and as shown /
detailed in the drawing.
3.5 FLOOR (ZONE) CONTROL ASSEMBLIES
A. The use of 65 mm nom. size valve with size adjustment spools shall be permitted up to 100
mm nom. line size.
B. The system drain line shall be connected to the nearest drain (waste water or storm water
systems only).
3.6 FIRE CABINETS
A. Landing valve hose connection system for Class 1 shall be located in the mid-landing of the
stairway enclosure, with fire stopping material in the penetration of the recessed cabinet, or .
B. Hose Reel or Hose Rack shall be located in the corridor space adjacent to the stairway or
space adjacent to the stairway enclosure.
C. Provide fire rated framing of correct size, extending to the plaster finish on all recessed fire
cabinets.
D. Secure fire cabinets in wall by screws, at the frame.
E. Provide steel angle base supports for taking up the weight of cabinets installed in shaft
walls.
F. Cut openings in fire cabinets using appropriate tools. Provide fire rated material grommets
at these openings to prevent rattling and entry of dust.

G. Provide boxed sheet metal stiffeners or external, supporting steel framing for installing hose
reels and similar items.
3.7 AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVES
A. Provide access doors in shaft walls, where installed in inaccessible places. Provide drain
pipe to convenient location.
3.8 SWITCHES
A. Co-ordinate with the electrical works and ensures their connection with the building fire
alarm system.
3.9 LANDING VALVES
A. Identify clearly each landing valve, their elevations with respect to the pump center line and
the maximum pump discharge pressure etc., datas shall be furnished to the manufacturer of
pressure reducing type valves for a the purpose of calibrating these landing valves.
B. Pressure reducing type landing valves installed at site, shall be calibrated at the factory and
sealed and tagged to this effect.
3.10 PIPINGS
A. Pitch sprinkler piping to main and auxiliary drain outlets to provide for complete drainage.
Number of drain outlets shall be kept to a minimum.
B. Install piping approximately as indicated and modify to suit building conditions and to avoid
interference with other trades. Maintain access to all pipes and duct work and maintain
required pitch.
C. Sloped branch pipe to drain back to cross main pipe and sloped cross main pipe to drain
back to riser pipe. Where downward offset are un-avoidable, auxiliary drain shall be
provided.
D. Provide additional offset, fittings, valves, drain where required by construction and work of
other trades.
E. Run in chases, recesses, shaft, hung ceiling and beam cuts where applicable. Do not cover
before examination and testing. Run parallel with or right angles to walls and other piping
neatly spaced and with plumb riser.
F. Joints: Install joint in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. For screwed piping,
threads shall be clean-cut of exact length. Ream pipe after cutting and threading. Apply
approved compound on male thread only, apply graphite on drain plugs.
G. Provide di-electric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined.
H. Provide tapered reducing fittings for changes in pipe size, no bushing will be permitted,
except with prior special approval.

I. Expansion swings: Provide elbow swings or expansion loops in piping for vertical and
horizontal expansion and contraction and building expansion joint crossings. Install flexible
joints 600 mm away from building expansion joints.
3.11 FIRE PUMPS
A. Examination
1. Examine areas, concrete bases, and conditions, with the presence of the Installer, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the fire
pumps.
2. Examine roughing-in for fire suppression piping to verify actual locations of piping
connections before fire pump installation.
B. Concrete Bases
1. Install concrete bases with dimensions indicated for fire pumps, pressure
maintenance pumps, and controllers.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450 mm) centers around full perimeter of
base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachments to supported
equipment.
6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements as specified.
C. Pump Installation
1. Install and align fire pump, pressure-maintenance pump, and controller according to
NFPA 20 (Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection).
2. Install pumps and controllers to provide access for periodic maintenance including
removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and other accessories.
3. Set base mounting type pumps on concrete bases, Disconnect coupling halves
before setting. Do not re-connect couplings until alignment operations have been
completed.
4. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal wedges
having small taper, at points near anchor bolts, to provide ¾ to ½ inch (19 to 38 mm)
gap between pump base and concrete base for grouting.
5. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Verify that
coupling faces / pump suction & discharge flanges are leveled and plumbed.
6. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than diameter of fire-pump
nozzles.
7. Install valves that are same size as piping connecting fire pumps, by-passes, test
headers, and other piping systems.
8. Install pressure gauges on fire pump suction and discharge at pressure gauge
tapping.
9. Support pumps and piping separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.

10. Install piping accessories, hangers and supports, anchors, valves, meters and
gauges and equipment supports.
11. Install flow meters and sensors where indicated. Install flow meter-system
components and make connections according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
12. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but
not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturer’s wiring diagram
submittals to electrical installer.
D. Alignment
1. Align fire pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on concrete
base, grout have been set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.
2. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill base plate completely with
grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after
grout had hardened. Check alignment and make necessary corrections, if required.
3. Align piping connections.
4. Align pump and driver for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 1.4 and to
tolerance specified by the pump manufacturer.
E. Connections
1. Piping installation requirements as specified. Drawings indicate general

arrangements of piping, fittings, and specialties.
2. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3. Connect water supply and discharge piping for fire pumps with flexible connectors.
Connect water supply and discharge piping to pressure maintenance pump with
flexible connectors as specified.
4. Connect relief valve (if provided) discharge to point disposal.
5. Connect flow meter system sensors and meters.
6. Connect controllers to pumps driver.
7. Connect fire pump controllers to building fire alarm system.
8. Ground equipment according to Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
9. Connect wiring according to Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
F. Field Quality Control
1. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
2. Perform field test for each fire pump when installation is complete. Comply with
operating instructions and procedures in NFPA 20 (Installation of Stationary Pumps
for Fire Protection) to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible,
malfunctioning equipment shall be corrected in the field, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactory corrected or that does not
perform as indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Verify that each fire
pump performs as indicated.
3. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports as follows;
a. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leakage. Repair
leakage and retest until no leakage exist.
b. Final checks before start-up: Perform the following preventive maintenance

operations and checks:
1) Lubricate oil lubrication type bearings.

2) Remove grease lubrication type bearing covers, flush bearing with

kerosene, and clean thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
3) Disconnect coupling and check electric motor for proper rotation.
Rotation shall match direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
4) Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand, If pump is bound or of it drags
even slightly, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and
corrected.
c. Starting procedure for pump is as follows:
1) Prime pump by opening suction valve and closing drains, and prepare
pump for operation.
2) Open sealing liquid supply valves if pump is so fitted.
3) Start motor.
4) Open discharge valve slowly.
5) Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for
proper flow to ensure lubrication of packing. Do not tighten gland
immediately, but let packing run in before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes.
6) Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls / equipment.
e. Furnish fire hose in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or
other acceptable location to dispose of fire pump test water. Fire hose are for
field acceptance tests only and are not a property of Owner.
G. Demonstration
1. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps, drivers, controllers and
pressure maintenance pump.
2. Install pumps in such a manner that avoids horizontal elbows at pump suction,
excludes air entrapment in suction line and allows unrestrained movement of the
pump assembly (for vibration isolation purposes).
3. Make required adjustments to pipe sizes, immediately after the pump flanges. Use
flanged eccentric reducing spool with level crown at pump suction and concentric
type at discharge.
4. The suction pipe shall be sized such that, with the pump operating at 150% of rated
capacity, the velocity of the suction pipe located within 10 pipe diameters upstream of
the pump suction flange do not exceed 4.57 meter per second (15 ft/sec).
5. Install pump flexible connections at suction and discharge to prevent carry over of
pump vibrations to system piping. Anchor piping immediately after the flexible
connections.
6. Install the suction header horizontally. Make foundations for different models of
pumps to suit the suction header, so that all the suction lines are horizontal.
7. Vortex inhibitor shall be installed at the entrance of the suction pipe
H. Control Panels
1. Panels shall be fabricated from minimum 1.2 mm thick sheet steel and shall have
continuously welded butt joints. Apply two coats of red oxide primer and two coats of
baked on fire red enamel. All required holes and cut outs shall be done at the factory.

2. All internal wiring shall be done in a neat and professional manner, using cable ties,
slip-on spiral plastic bundle sheaths etc. Provide ample free lengths to allow full swing
of doors.
3. Provide suitable legs, drilled for bolting down to house keeping pads.
4. Wall mounted panels shall be stiffened with profiled sections welded to the back
plate, as required. Top of wall mounted panels shall be at 180 cm above FFL.
5. All panels shall have enclosures to IEC IP-56, NEMA Type 4, watertight and
corrosion resistant, dust-tight and oil tight.
I. Conduits, Trunking And Cable Trays
1. Fix conduits to walls / ceilings with two piece clamps, spaced at not more than
120cm.
2. Trunking shall be attached to walls by brass screws in plastic expansion plugs.
3. Cable tray hangers shall be attached to ceilings with expansion anchors and studs.
Support vertical cable trays by bolting to steel angles extending from floor to ceiling.
J. Identification
1. Control, drain, test, and alarm valves and zone water flow switches shall be provided
with identification signs of the standard design adopted by the automatic-sprinkler
industry, or their equivalent.
2. A hydraulic data information nameplate shall be secured to the riser with chain,
directly above the controlling alarm check valve and shall include the following design
data;
a. Building designation
b. Location of remote area
c. Design density
d. Area of application
e. System demand (gpm (l/s) and psi (kPa) at base of riser)
f. Data shall be permanently engraved on the nameplate and material shall be
durable plastic or aluminum. Minimum height of lettering is 1/8".
3. The Contractor shall furnish and place in a clear, plastic envelope attached to each
sprinkler alarm check valve riser: one complete set of typed or printed maintenance
and operating instructions, a set of prints of the as-built working drawings and
hydraulic calculations of the sprinkler system.
4. Contractor shall supply each riser with a cabinet containing maintenance and repair
equipment (spare heads, wrench, etc.).
5. Each Contractor shall affix an identification tag on each system riser indicating:
Name of the Contractor

Business Address of the Installing Contractor
Phone Number
24-hour emergency contact phone number.
3.12 FLUSHING
A. Before connecting sprinkler systems to the main supply, each sprinkler supply line shall be
flushed out thoroughly by the Fire Protection Specialist Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer, through an unrestricted opening not less than (100 mm) 4 inches in diameter.
Minimum flowing quantities are specified in NFPA 13 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems).

B. Failure to comply with this requirement shall necessitate flushing of the entire sprinkler
system by the Contractor at no additional cost.
C. A (100 mm) 4 inch temporary pipe or two 2½ inch fire hoses shall be provided by the
Contractor to discharge water to a suitable location, as designated by the Engineer.
3.13 PAINTING AND LABELLING
A. The above ground steel piping system including valves, piping in finish areas, miscellaneous
metal work shall be cleaned, pre-treated, primed and painted.
B. Coating shall only applied on clean, dry surfaces using clean brushes. Surface shall be
cleaned to remove all dust, dirt, rust and mill scale.
C. Galvanized pipe shall wash primed with proper material before painting. Application shall be
as per the manufacturer recommendation for pipe surface corrosion protection.
D. Contractor shall paint those portions of fire protection as required by Painting Specification.
Labeling shall be as follows:
1. Sprinkler system (e.g. inspector tests, drain valves) shall be labeled with all
information required by NFPA Standard 13 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems).
2. Metal or rigid plastic identification signs. The signs shall be secured with corrosion-
resistant wire, chain, or other approved means. These signs shall be provided by the
manufacturer, manufacturer's representative, or installer of the sprinkler system.
3. Sprinkler riser shall be labeled with building and sprinkler system riser numbers.
Labeling shall be accomplished with the use of "Brady" or approved equal self-
sticking labels. The colour and size shall contrast the surface that it is applied to.
The labels shall be provided and applied by Fire Protection Systems Maintenance
Organization.
4. Label all valves, pumps, controllers, specialty valves with their individual designated
functions. All valves shall bear normally open or normally closed label thus avoiding
mal-operation.
3.14 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed as per the requirement of NFPA 13

(Installation of Sprinkler Systems) before any ceiling is installed below the sprinkler piping.
Each water control valve shall be fully opened and closed under water pressure proper
operation.
B. Where sprinkler locations are roughed-in, using plugged drop nipples projecting below the
level of finished ceiling; the hydrostatic testing shall be performed two times.
C. First, after the system is completed using the plugged drops and before the ceiling panels is
installed.
D. Second, after the plugged drop nipples are cut to length for the finished ceiling, or replaced
with other drop nipples of correct length and the sprinkler installed.
E. Prior to the acceptance of the installation, the Specialist Fire Protection System Contractor
shall, in the presence of the Engineer, subject the system to the tests required by NFPA for
the completion of the Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate. In addition complete
operating test of Wet pipe, Dry pipe, Stand pipe and Fire hose systems shall be performed.

F. The system shall be complete, tested and ready for operation and shall include all
necessary / required connections and shall be accomplished prior to carpet installation.
Testing shall be as required to conform to current applicable requirements of NFPA and
Local Code Authority. The serving Authority having jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense),
Engineers and Owners shall be allowed to conduct such tests as may be required. Any cost
in connection with these, test is borne by the Contractor.
G. Alarm Testing: Contractor shall be responsible for testing new alarms and modified alarms
installed under this contract. Defective alarms shall be replaced immediately.
3.15 INSPECTION, TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF FIRE PUMPS
A. Prior To Start - Up
1. Check the pump motor/diesel engine driver assembly alignment. Adjust if necessary.
Weld steel cleats on pump and motor bases to lock them in aligned position.
2. Tighten and lock foundation and coupling bolts.
3. Check pump shaft for free rotation.
4. Check electrical continuity and insulation of motor and the control panel, by
meggering.
5. Ensure that the relief valve is correctly calibrated and installed.
6. Shut off the system isolating valve/s and open the test line.
7. Ensure that the circuit breaker trip rate is correctly selected and the elements properly
installed. Adjust the star - delta change over timer to the period recommended by the
motor manufacturer.
8. Check system power supply voltage. Perform all other checks outlined in the
controller operation manual, before energizing the controller.
9. Ensure that the suction lines and the pump casing are full of water.
B. Start - Up
1. Check and correct, if necessary, the direction of rotation of the pump, by momentary
operation of the emergency start lever.
2. Close the valve on the test line partially to avoid the operation of the pump at high
discharge rates.
3. Start the pump on manual mode.
4. Check the motor full load current by manipulating the flow.
5. Check the pressure relief valve for proper operation by gradually closing the test
valve.
6. Check the pump and motor bearings for signs of overheating.
7. Check the suction line for signs for entry of air and proper suction intake flow.
C. Verification Of Performance
1. Check the pump head at nominal flow and at 150% of nominal flow and ensure
conformity with design requirements.
2. Close the test line and stop the pump. Release the system pressure gradually with
the test valve. Check and adjust the pressure switch setting for automatic cut-in.
Check and adjust the pressure switch setting for automatic cut-in and cut-out of
jockey pump.
D. Put System Into Service
1. Isolate the fire pump controllers.

2. Close the test line and open the system isolating valve. Ensure that the system
outlets are closed.

3. Fill the system with the jockey pump. Maintain pressure for 24 hours and ensure that
there are no leaks.
4. Energize fire pump controllers and ensure that the system is in automatic mode.
3.16 SPARES
A. The installing fire protection specialist contractor shall supply the owner with quantities of
spare parts equal to a minimum of ten percent (10%) of the total quantities of each system
replaceable part utilized in this installation.
3.17 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing fire fighting specialist contractor shall provide
operational training to each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall
include system operation, manual and functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
3.18 WARRANTY
A. All fire fighting and sprinkler system including fire pump set components furnished, and
installed under this contract, shall be guaranteed against defects in design, materials and
workmanship for the full warranty period which is standard with the manufacturer, but in no
case less than one (1) year from the date of system acceptance, except for those equipment
having a specified warranty period.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 13 19
PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. A double interlocked pre-action system shall be provided with the method of release being an
electric solenoid valve and a pneumatic actuator. The electric solenoid valve will open upon
activation of the electrical supplemental detection system. The pneumatic actuator shall open
upon loss of supervisory air due to activation of a sprinkler. Both devices must activate before the
deluge valve will open. Opening of the deluge valve shall not be dependent on release device
order of activation. The riser shall be a listed and approved assembly provided with all necessary
appurtenances to complete the system. A rubber seated check valve shall be installed
downstream of the deluge valve and prior to the supervisory air connection.
B. System shall be installed in accordance with drawing and specifications, however, no

requirements of NFPA 13 shall be violated. Material and labor necessary to fully comply with
drawings and specifications and with rules, regulations, ordinances shall be furnished by the
Contractor.
C. Scope of work:
1. Hydraulic design of sprinkler system
2. Shop drawings
3. Riser Assembly
4. Air Compressor
5. Release Control Panel
6. Smoke/Heat Detectors
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07 84 46: Fire-Resistive Joint Systems
B. Section 09 91 00: Painting
C. Section 21 05 00: Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
D. Division 26: Electrical
1.3 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Comply with local and state licensure requirements for installation of fire protection system.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Not more than 1000 closed sprinklers shall be controlled by any one pre-action valve, or
maximum 750 gallon system capacity.
B. Sprinkler piping and detection devices shall be automatically supervised when there are more
than 20 sprinklers on the system.
21 13 19 Pre Action Sprinkler System Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

C. Automatic sprinklers on pre-action system installed in the pendent position shall use a return
bend pipe arrangement and be located in a heated area. Provide approved dry pendent type if
installed in an area subject to freezing.
D. Sprinkler piping shall be galvanized for dry pipe system.
E. Design 100% hydraulically calculated pre-action sprinkler system in accordance with Owner's
insuring agency guidelines, NFPA 13, state and local code requirements.
F. Design system to serve area as noted on Drawings.
G. Refer to Section 21 10 13 for design density of sprinkler head in light and ordinary hazard
occupancies.
H. Maximum pipe velocity of 25 feet/second.
I. System air pressure shall be restored to normal in 30 minutes or less.
J. Provide accelerator when system capacity exceeds 500 gallons.
K. System shall be designed for water to reach the most remote sprinkler head within 60 seconds.
L. A fire-hydrant flow test shall be performed/obtained by contractor as a basis for hydraulically

calculated systems. Testing shall be conducted at a location representative of the actual future
system(s) supply and be no more than 6 months old at date of submission. The flow test report
shall be submitted with sprinkler system drawings/calculations and have, as a minimum, the
following information:
1. Contractor’s name, company, telephone number and address.
2. Project Name.
3. Date, time and location of flow test.
4. Static pressure (in pounds per square inch).
5. Residual pressure (in pounds per square inch).
6. Flowing (in gallons per minute).
7. Elevation of hydrant(s) tested.
A. Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) listed and Factory Mutual (F.M.) approved material.
B. Comply with local fire department standards for hose threads, operating nuts and accessories for
hydrants and siamese connections.
C. The automatic sprinkler system installer shall provide a permanently attached nameplate located
at the controlling alarm, indicating the location and the discharge densities over designed areas of
discharge including gallons per minute and residual pressure, and hose stream demand supplied
by the sprinkler piping.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. After award of contract and prior to fabrication, Fire Protection System Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer complete design submittals for approval. Design submittals package shall
include the following:


a. Sprinklers heads, escutcheon and guards, including sprinkler flow characteristic,

temperature rating, finish and mounting orientation.
b. Standpipe, Hose system and Cabinets that includes size / type / finish, hose
connection / type / length of fire hoses, finish of fire hose coupling / type / material,
finish of nozzle and finish of fire hose rack.
c. Fire Pump Set and Fire Pump Controller that includes rated capacities, certified
pump performance curves with each selection point indicated, operating
characteristics of furnished accessories and specialties for each pump / pressure
maintenance pump and Factory test certificates (i.e. Calibration, Hydrostatic,
Pump Performance, etc.) shall be submitted.
d. Portable Fire Extinguishers that includes size, type, rating and capacity.
e. Fire Fighting listed valves, system control and specialty valves that include size,
pressure ratings and type.
f. Piping, Fitting, Support and Accessories; pressure rating and class, load etc.
rating, etc.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and calculations for the system and shall include the
following:
1. Approved Sprinkler and Fire Fighting System piping drawings: Working plans according
to NFPA 13 - 2010 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems) and NFPA 14 - 2007 (Standpipe
and Hose Systems), that have been approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai
Civil Defense), including system hydraulic calculation.
2. Fire fighting, sprinkler system and pump room arrangement plans, elevations, sections
and details.
4. Power, signal and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate wiring diagrams between
manufacturer installed and field-installed wiring.
5. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities, shipping, and operating weights,
furnished specialties and accessories.
1. Coordinated layout and installation of Fire Fighting System, Sprinkler System and
Specialties with other construction discipline that penetrates ceiling, including other
services. This layout shall clearly indicate pipe bottom elevations and routes thus
avoiding collision with other services.
2. Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale, coordinated penetrations and ceiling mounted
fixtures. Show the following:
a. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
d. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed
valves, tamper switch, water flow switch, etc.
e. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speaker,
sprinklers, detectors, access panels and special moulding.
f. Elevation of Sprinkler System and Fire Fighting System pipe work.
1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall revise all Fire Protection Design
files, calculations, manuals, operating instructions to agree with construction as actually
accomplished and installed. The notation “AS-BUILT” shall be entered in the revision
block, dated and initiated.
2. As - built submittals shall be submitted and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the
Final Acceptance Testing (FAT). This delivery shall include both electronic and hard
copies of all related drawings with quantities to be advised by the Engineer.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s charts showing the full range and ratings of
sprinkler coverage available, valves, fittings and specialty valves.
F. Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified elsewhere in this Section.
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance manual fully
describing maintenance schedules, replacement parts, and other operation requirements
for Sprinkler System / Standpipe and Hose System / Other Systems, control / specialty
valves, pumps, pump drivers and controllers to include in Operation and Maintenance
manuals specified and required in relevant Division . Factory test certificates of the fire
pumps, control / specialty valves, etc. shall also be submitted as mentioned above.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. The Contractor shall, at his cost, appoint a Specialist Sub-contractor for Fire Protection
Systems. The Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall be one of those
listed elsewhere in the Specification and be approved by the Dubai Civil Defense) and
subject to Engineers approval. The Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall
be entirely responsible for the Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of
the Fire Protection Systems in line with the Specification, Drawings and to Engineers and
Dubai Civil Defense approval. After preparation of Shop Drawings and their approval by
the Engineer, the Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall obtain their final
approval from Dubai Civil Defense. After installation, testing and commissioning of the
various systems, the Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall arrange
inspection by the Dubai Civil Defense and obtain their approval / acceptance of the
installation.
2. Installer responsibilities includes designing, fabricating, installing, testing and
commissioning of a complete Fire Fighting System, Sprinkler System, Other System and
providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
B. Use only those products specifically listed and approved for Fire Protection services by UL-
Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated, FM-Factory Mutual Testing Laboratories, BSI Kite
mark, LPCB, or other approved agencies of international reputations, where stipulated.

c. BS-EN - British Standard Specifications

d. Local Authority, International Electro Technical Commission, IEC, IEE Standards in

the selection and installation of electrical components and systems.
2. Fire Pumps and Controllers shall be (UL) Listed and (FM) Factory Mutual approved
testing laboratories and underwriters laboratories incorporated for fire protection services.
a. Pumps / Controllers shall also conforms to NFPA 20 - 2010 (Installation of

Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection) complying with the additional requirements, if
stated. Design shall be based on the occupancy hazards as specified in latest
NFPA Codes and Standards.
b. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be UL Listed and FM
Approved defined in NFPA 70 – 2008 (National Electrical Code), Article 100, by
testing agency acceptable to Dubai Civil Defense, and marked for intended use.
c. Source Limitation: Obtain Fire pumps, Pressure maintenance pump and
Controllers through one source from a single manufacturer for each type of
equipment.
d. Factory visit shall be arrange by the Contractor for Engineers / Owner’s
representative/s to witness factory testing of the Fire Pump set before shipment to
the project site at the Contractor’s cost.
e. Factory acceptance test shall be witnessed by the Consultant’s Engineer, Client
Representative, Project Manager’s Representative and Contractor’s
Representative. The Contractor shall provide to and for Business Class air
passage to the place of test, which shall include 5 Stars accommodations for the
testing period. Test Report shall be submitted before the shipment of the products.
The test shall be carried out by approved laboratories. The independent lab
details and method statement for testing shall be submitted for approval before
commencement of testing. The test shall demonstrate the compliance of the
performance of the equipment with the equipment schedules.
f. Failure to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and re-
testing
g. Submit written test results of factory acceptance tests for approval prior to
shipping.
h. Approval of equipment at the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the
equipment to the site and does not constitute final acceptance by the Engineer.
i. The visit in the factory only allows the manufacturer to ship the equipment to the
site and does not constitute final acceptance by the Engineer.
j. Test and inspect fire pumps with their controllers according to latest NFPA 20
(Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection) for certified shop tests.
k. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to requirements indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Supply and install a preaction sprinkler system assembly coordinated with the releasing panel
provided under Division 28. The unit shall be UL listed and FM approved. All system components
shall be tested and listed for their use together.
B. The system shall be a double interlocked pre-action with electric-pneumatic release containing all

hydraulic, and pneumatic components required for the control of a pre-action system. The system
shall be fully interfaced with the releasing panel provided under Division 28.
1. Viking Deluge Valve Model E, complete with Schedule 40 galvanized steel Viking EZ-
Trim rated at 250 psi.
2. Release trim with solenoid valves, pneumatic actuator and each supervisory device
required.
C. Air Supply: Air compressor and supervisory trim shall be provided and adjusted for the selected
configuration. The air supply must be regulated and of the proper size in order to be able to
restore normal system air pressure within 30 minutes.
.
D. System Drain: The drain collector of the system shall be connected to an Open Drain. The drain
piping shall not be restricted or reduced and shall be of the same diameter as the drain collector.
Manifolding of multiple units is permitted provided the manufacturer’s recommendations are
carefully followed and complied with.
E. See Section 21 10 13 for the following:

1. Valves
2. Piping and Fittings
3. Hangers and Supports
4. Sprinkler Heads
5. Switches
6. Pipe Installation
F. See electrical and fire alarm drawings and specifications for electrical requirements for pre-action
sprinkler system.
G. Detection: Division 28.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. Sprinkler contractor shall coordinate installation of mains and sprinkler heads with all other
disciplines.
B. Coordinate sprinkler heads with signs, diffusers and smoke or detecting system equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide and install system as shown on contract drawings.
B. All work shall meet N.F.P.A. and state and locate code requirements.
C. Contractor shall provide Owner with technical data sheets, operation and maintenance
instructions booklet. Provide one booklet at main riser pre-action sprinkler riser.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 13 39
FOAM WATER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division-01 Specification Section, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section in conjunction with the contract documents and drawings indicates the design,
materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing and operations requirement of the
Foam – Water Sprinkler System. Requirements are included but not limited to;
1. Automatic Control Valve

2. Wet Pilot Actuation
3. System Isolation Valve
4. Foam Concentrate Storage Tank
5. Foam Ratio Controller
6. Discharge Devices
7. Tamper Switch
8. Pressure Alarm Switch
9. Piping, Fitting, Support and Accessories
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
A. Foam – Water Deluge System shall be suitable for Class A & B fires and shall be provided
with both automatic and manual operation. The system shall deliver foam to the area being
protected for a specified period at a given foam application rate.
A. Foam – Water Sprinkler System is a system comprising of overhead pipework connected to

a foam concentrate storage tank and water supply. The system shall consist of a control
valve which actuates automatically via detection system and manually via manual release
device connected in the trimmings of the control valve. Upon activation of the control valve,
water flows into the piping, foam is injected into the water and the resulting foam solution
flows to the discharge outlets. The system shall continue to discharge until manually shut
off. The design and installation shall reflect high quality of professional work that properly
account for proper system operation, practical maintenance and aesthetic concerns, as well
as meets the design requirements of NFPA 16 (Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and
Foam – Water Spray Systems) Standard and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil
Defense).
21 13 39 Foam Water System Rev.00 Page 1 of 10

B. The system shall include complete equipments and devices and other appurtenances as
required by the latest NFPA 16 Standard and Local or State Agencies, or by the Owner's
insurance company. The System shall be hydraulically designed.
C. Where required, water soluble and certain flammable liquids and polar solvents that are
destructive to conventional foam concentrates, an alcohol – resistant foam concentrate shall
be used.
D. Foam products manufacturer shall be consulted as to the limitations and for

recommendations of foam concentrate usage.
E. Design Criteria:
1. The system shall be designed and arranged for automatic and manual operation.
2. Design discharge density shall be in accordance to the occupancy standard for foam
2 2
– water system, but in no case less than 0.16 gpm / ft (6.5 mm / m ).
3. Drain facilities shall be provided.
4. Discharge duration shall be 10 minutes over the entire protected area.
5. Design concentration shall be 3% foam concentrate in a given amount of foam
solution.
6. Foam proportioning system shall be capable to meet the condition specified in NFPA
16 Standard (Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and Foam – Water Spray
System), latest edition.
2
7. Discharge devices shall not exceed 9.3 m spacing per device, or shall not exceed
3000 mm spacing between discharge devices on the branch pipe or between branch
pipe.
8. Pipe sizes adjustment shall be based on 20% (maximum variation) above the
discharge rate per discharge device.
9. The system shall be hydraulically calculated using UL Listed and approved computer
program software generated calculation. Hand calculation programs or calculation on
spreadsheet will not be accepted. All calculation programs shall use the Hazen-
Williams calculation method.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Specialist Contractor shall submit to the Engineer complete design submittals for approval.
Design submittals package shall include the following:

a. Deluge valve including basic and actuation trim, size, pressure ratings and
type.
b. Isolation valve that include the pressure rating, type and size.
c. Foam concentrate storage tank that include capacity, inlet / outlet, gauges,
vent, inspection / cleaning facility and sizes.
d. Foam ratio controller that include technical data as to size, pressure, flow
capacity, rating, orifice, etc.
e. Discharge devices including flow / pressure characteristic, type, finish and
mounting orientation.
f. Pilot sprinklers (heat detectors) including temperature rating, pressure rating,
type and size.
rating, etc.
h. Piping, Fitting, Support and Accessories that include pressure rating and class,
thickness schedule, load etc.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings / calculations that includes the following:
1. Approved Foam – Water Sprinkler System piping drawings: Working plans according
to NFPA 16 - 2007 (Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and Spray Systems), that
have been approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense), including
system hydraulic calculation.
2. Foam – Water Sprinkler system piping / discharge devices / pilot sprinklers
arrangement plans, elevations, sections and details.
1. Coordinated layout and installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler system with other
construction discipline or other services. This layout shall clearly indicate pipe bottom
elevations and routes thus avoiding collision with other services and location of main
equipment.
1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall revise all Design files,
calculations, manuals, operating instructions to agree with construction as actually
accomplished and installed. The notation “AS-BUILT” shall be entered in the revision
block, dated and initiated.
2. As - built submittals shall be submitted and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
the Final Acceptance Testing. This delivery shall include both electronic and hard
copies of all related drawings.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s charts showing the full range and rating of
discharge nozzle, pilot sprinkler coverage available, valves, pipe, fittings and pipe supports.
F. Test Reports: Written reports of tests shall also be submitted, as required elsewhere in the
Specifications.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance manual fully
describing maintenance schedules, replacement parts, and other operation requirements for
Foam – Water Sprinkler system control valves, foam supply storage tank, foam concentrate,
foam controller, discharge outlets, pilot sprinklers, etc., to include in the Operation and
Maintenance manuals specified and required in relevant Division . Factory test certificates of
the control valves, foam ratio controller, foam tank, etc. shall also be submitted as required.
A. Qualifications of Specialist Contractor
1. The Contractor shall, at his cost, appoint a Specialist Sub-contractor for Foam –
Water Sprinkler System. The Specialist Sub-contractor shall be one of those listed
elsewhere in the Specification and be approved by the Dubai Civil Defense and
subject to Engineers approval. The Specialist Sub-contractor shall be entirely
responsible for the Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of the
Foam – Water Sprinkler System in line with the Specification, Drawings and to
Engineers and Dubai Civil Defense approval. After preparation of Shop Drawings and
their approval by the Engineer, the Specialist Sub-contractor shall obtain their final
approval from Duabi Civil Defense. After installation, testing and commissioning of
the various systems, the Specialist Fire Protection System Sub-contractor shall
arrange inspection by the Dubai Civil Defense and obtain their approval / acceptance
of the installation.

2. Installer responsibilities include designing, fabricating, installing, testing and

commissioning of a complete Foam – Water Sprinkler System and providing
professional engineering service responsibility.
B. Use only those products specifically listed and approved for Foam – Water Sprinkler System
services by UL-Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated, FM-Factory Mutual Testing
Laboratories, or other approved agencies of international reputations, where stipulated.

c. UL – Underwriter’s Laboratory Listing
d. FM – Factory Mutual Approval
e. Local Authority, International Electro Technical Commission, IEC, IEE
Standards in the selection and installation of electrical components and
systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be
of the same manufacturer. All materials shall be installed per their listing or approval and per
the manufacturer’s recommendation and specification.
B. Materials and equipment used in the installation of the Foam – Water Sprinkler System shall
be new and listed by the UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory or the FM Approval Guide,
latest edition. The standard products and the latest design of the manufacturer shall be used
and installed per their listing, approval or manufacturer’s recommendations.
2.2 SYSTEM CONTROL DELUGE VALVE AND TRIMMINGS
A. The assembly shall be automatically re-settable type by hydraulic means, and shall employ
a positive vent on the priming line to ensure that the valve will not prematurely reset. The
unit shall be compatible and suitable for Foam – Water Sprinkler system use.
B. The valve shall be low differential, latched closed spring assisted, self resetting clapper,
hydraulic release, valve and trim shall be UL Listed and FM approved, for vertical or
horizontal installation, supplied with grade “E” EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-536, grade 65-45-12, serviceable without removal from the line,
flange ends for installation with ANSI class 150 flange rated service up to 300 psi (2065
kpa) working pressure.
C. Valve shall be employ both hydraulic actuations provided with trimmings, and manual
actuation via manual pull lever connected in the basic actuation trim.
D. Valve trim shall form part of the listing and approval of the control valve assembly for its
proper operation. Trim package includes the water supply and valve chamber pressure
gauges, inlet / outlet valve trim connections, manual control station, main drain valve, alarm
and test valve.
2.3 WET PILOT ACTUATION TRIM

A. System actuation shall be by means of wet pilot actuation trim provided along with the
control valve, which provides a connection for the detection system consisting of wet pilot
line sprinklers and manual control station. Piping shall be as per manufacturer
recommendations and pilot sprinklers shall be minimum K-Factor of 5.6 orifice, listed and
approved automatic sprinklers, with spacing of not less than 2500 mm in accordance to
NFPA 15 (Water Spray Fixed System for Fire Protection). Maximum height of wet pilot
sprinklers above the control valve shall be as per manufacturer’s recommended limitations.
Wet pilot line piping shall be galvanized pipe, Seamless, ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40.
2.4 FOAM CONCENTRATE STORAGE TANK
A. Foam concentrate storage tank shall be constructed with a material compatible with the
foam concentrate being stored and be located permanently with ambient temperature
considering the temperature limitations for which foam concentrates are listed.
B. Foam bladder tank as a component of Balance Pressure Foam System shall be UL listed
and FM approved. The tank shell shall be constructed of steel complying ASME
specifications, tensile strength not less than 70,000 psi. The circumferential, as well as the
longitudinal body seam shall be machine welded. Bladder shall be manufactured of a vinyl
based polymer, or a polyester reinforced copolymer. The bladder material shall have an
ASTM D-412 tensile strength of at least 3000 psi and Ann ASTM D-624 Graves tear
strength of at least 420 psi.
C. The assembly shall be complete with filling, gauging of foam concentrate level, draining,
cleaning / inspection facility, vent, inlet / outlet connections and shall be UL Listed and FM
Approved.
2.5 FOAM CONCENTRATE
A. Aqueous Film Forming Foam (AFFF), a concentrate that uses fluorinated surfactants plus
foam stabilizers usually diluted with water to a concentration of 3% foam solution shall be
used. The foam concentrate shall be UL Listed and FM Approved for intended application
and hazard to be protected.
2.6 FOAM RATIO CONTROLLER
A. The system shall use a ratio controller designed to inject correct amount of foam
concentrate into the water stream over various flows and pressures. The principle of
operation is based on using a venturi. As water passes through the inlet, pressure is being
reduced in the annular area of the inlet nozzle, which in turn allows the metering of the foam
concentrate into the water stream through a foam concentrate metering orifice. The unit
shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant brass material. Inlet nozzle shall be secured by
two stainless steel set screws allowing the nozzle to be removed from the unit for cleaning /
or repair. Metering orifice shall be sized for specified type and percentage foam
concentrate. The unit shall be UL Listed and FM Approved.
2.7 ISOLATION VALVE (Upstream / Downstream)
A. Cast Iron body, Outside Screw & Yoke (OS&Y) construction with solid wedge, flanged ends
for 65 mm & above / threaded ends for 50 mm & below. Valve shall be UL / FM approved.
The valve shall have a minimum working pressure of 1207 kpa. Use 2100 kpa rated valves
where applicable. Downstream isolation valve shall be installed above the riser check valve,
as required.
B. OR, UL / FM Approved Butterfly valve with built-in tamper switch with normally close / open
contacts. The valve shall be wafer type or grooved type with valve body made of bronze
material, stainless steel disc & stem and geared slow-close mechanism. Valve shall have a
minimum pressure rating of 1207 kpa working pressure. Use 2100 kpa rated valves where
applicable, and or in case system has excessive working pressure.
2.5 DISCHARGE DEVICE
A. All foam sprinklers shall be supplied from one (1) manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
Nozzle shall be of material compatible with the foam concentrate being used. Submit one
(1) sample of each foam sprinkler to be utilized on this project to be approved technically by
the Engineer and the color finishes to be approved by the Interior Designer. It shall be UL
Listed and FM Approved for Foam – Water Sprinkler system use.
2.6 FIRE DEPARMENT CONNECTION
A. Provide system fire department connection in an accessible location for the fire brigade first
response unit. It shall be connected in the riser pipe upstream of foam ratio controller. The
body shall be brass with an integral clapper assembly separating the flow between inlets.
The fire department connection shall be in accordance to NFPA 13 latest edition and shall
be UL Listed and FM Approved.
2.7 PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH
A. System control valve shall include a pressure switch connected in the alarm trimming line.
The switch housing shall be weather proof and oil resistant. The cover shall incorporate
tamper resistant screws. It shall have normally closed / open contacts (SPDT) and rated for
2.5 amps at 30 VDC / 15 amps at 250 VAC, whichever is required. The pressure switch
shall be UL Listed and FM Approved.
2.8 WATER MOTOR ALARM GONG
A. System control valve shall also include a water motor alarm gong activated by water flow
and is connected in the integral alarm trim line. The gong, gong mount, and water motor
housing shall be fabricated from a corrosion resistant aluminum alloys. The bearing type
shall be polymer drive bearings which do not require lubrication, and the gong shall be
closely fitted to the gong mount to eliminate the need for a separate cover. It shall be UL
Listed and FM Approved.
2.9 PRESSURE GAUGE
A. UL Listed pressure gauge assembly, labeled, minimum 3-1/2 inches dial, liquid filled type,
moisture proof, weather resistant, 0 – 300 psi scale and with 5 psi increments.
2.10 VALVE TAMPER SWITCH
A. Provide FM Approved tamper switch on all system isolation valves. Tamper switch shall be
weather-resistant and shall monitor target position. OS&Y switches shall monitor stem
movement and shall be complete with mounting J-bolts.

A. All steel piping shall be Seamless steel pipes, conform to ASTM A-53, Schedule 40, Grade
B. Pipes and fittings shall be of material compatible with the foam concentrate, foam
solution, or water being used and as specified in NFPA 16, latest edition.
B. Foam - Water Sprinkler system specialty fittings shall be UL listed & FM approved, with 175
psig (1200 kpa) minimum working pressure rating and made of materials compatible with
piping and foam – water system application. Specialty fittings shall have 300 psig (2070
kpa) working pressure if fittings are components of high pressure.
C. Threaded Fittings: Fittings for 50 mm diameter and below shall be 2070 kpa Ductile Iron
threaded type. All fittings shall be UL / FM approved.
D. Bushing / hexagonal reducers shall not be used. Only concentric type reducers are
acceptable.
E. All piping and fittings shall be painted with primer coat and painted finish with fire protection
red per NFPA requirements, or as required by the Engineer or Authority Having Jurisdiction
(Dubai Civil Defense).
F. All painting of foam – water sprinkler system shall be complete and as specified under
painting specification.
2.12 PIPE SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEON PLATES
A. Provide sleeves for piping passing through walls, floors, roofs, equipment, structural
members, and other building components. Where a pipe passes thru holes in platforms,
foundations, walls or floors, sleeves shall be provided with sizes nominally 50 mm larger
than the pipe that pass thru for 25 mm up to 80 mm diameter and 100 mm larger than the
pipe that passes thru for 100 mm up to larger. Sleeves shall be securely fastened to the
assembly penetrated.
2.13 PIPE HANGERS
A. The components of hanger assembly that directly attach to the pipe or the structure shall be
UL listed / FM approved.
B. All hangers shall be made of steel. Hangers shall be Galvanized and UL / FM approved.
The spacing of the hanger supports shall be complying with NFPA 13 – 2010 (Installation of
Sprinkler Systems) requirement.
C. Piping shall be hung with hangers and supports independent of any other hangers, support
systems, or devices. Non related materials may not be suspended from or attached to
sprinkler piping or components.
D. Powder driven supports or anchor shall not be used. Do not mix piping material and hanger
material of dissimilar metals.
E. Riser pipe shall be provided with trust force arrest pipe support (for vertical run) / hanger
(horizontal run) to minimize pipe sway.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. The installation of the Foam – Water Sprinkler System shall be complete with all necessary
accessories for proper operation and shall be accomplished by a specialist contractor or
licensed company regularly engaged in this type of work, and in accordance with
requirements of the National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense).
B. The Foam – Water Sprinkler System installation shall be coordinated with the other trades
(mechanical, electrical and structural, etc.). The installation shall comply with all mandatory,
advisory interpretations, and recommended applicable rules of the latest editions of the
NFPA standards and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Dubai Civil Defense).
3.2 CONTROL VALVE
A. Proper operation of the Deluge Valve unit depends upon its trim being installed in
accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. The deluge valve and associated trimmings
shall be installed in a readily visible and accessible location.
B. All nipple, fittings, and devices must be clean and free of scale and burrs before installation
in order to avoid clogging that may result to mal operation of the system. Use pipe thread
sealant sparingly on male pipe threads only.
C. Install control valve in an accessible location or in adjacent area, as near as possible to the
hazard / area being protected.
3.3 DISCHARGE DEVICES
A. Nozzles shall be spaced as indicated in the drawings and as per NFPA 16 (Installation of
Foam – Water Sprinkler and Foam – Water Spray System) latest edition, and as per
manufacturer’s recommendation for the specified application and use. Discharge devices
shall be UL Listed and FM Approved, and shall be suitable for foam – water system use and
applications.
B. Factors affecting the positioning of the nozzles shall be considered such as the shape / size
of the protected area, design / characteristics of discharge spray pattern, environmental
effects, orientation and mechanical damages.
3.4 FOAM CONCENTRATE STORAGE TANK
A. Foam concentrate storage tank shall be located as indicated in the design drawings, or as
possible near to the hazard being protected. All accessories and piping connections shall
be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendation for installation. For location of the foam
storage tank, temperature limitation for which the foam concentrate are listed shall be put
into considerations.
3.5 SWITCHES
A. Co-ordinate with the electrical works and ensures their connection with the building fire
alarm system.
3.6 PIPINGS

A. Install piping approximately as indicated and modify to suit protected area conditions.
B. Provide additional offset, fittings, valves & drains where required by installations.
C. Joints: Install joint in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. For screwed piping,
threads shall be clean-cut of exact length. Ream pipe after cutting and threading. Apply
approved compound on male thread only, apply graphite on drain plugs.
D. Provide di-electric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined.
E. Provide tapered reducing fittings for changes in pipe size, no bushing will be permitted,
except with prior special approval.
3.7 FLUSHING
A. Before connecting Foam – Water Sprinkler system to the main supply, each supply line
shall be flushed out thoroughly by the Specialist Contractor in the presence of the Engineer,
through an unrestricted opening not less than (100 mm) 4 inches in diameter. Minimum
flowing quantities are specified in NFPA 13 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems) latest edition.
B. Failure to comply with this requirement shall necessitate flushing of the entire system by the
Contractor at no additional cost.
C. A (100 mm) 4 inch temporary pipe or two 2½ inch fire hoses shall be provided by the
Contractor to discharge water to a suitable location, as designated by the Engineer.
3.8 PAINTING AND LABELLING
A. The aboveground steel piping system including valves, piping in finish areas, miscellaneous
metal work shall be cleaned, pre-treated, primed and painted as required.
B. Coating shall only be applied on clean, dry surfaces using clean brushes. Surface shall be
cleaned to remove all dust, dirt, rust and mill scale.
C. Pipe shall be wash primed with proper material before painting. Application shall be as per
the manufacturer recommendation for pipe surface corrosion protection.
D. Specialist Contractor shall paint those portions of Foam – Water Sprinkler system as
required by Section 09900, “Painting”. Labelling shall be as follows:
1. Foam – Water Sprinkler system (e.g. inspector tests, drain valves) shall be labelled
with all information required by NFPA Standard 13 (Installation of Sprinkler Systems)
and NFPA 16 (Installation of Foam – Water Sprinkler and Foam – Water Spray
System).
2. Metal or rigid plastic identification signs. The signs shall be secured with corrosion-
resistant wire, chain, or other approved means. These signs shall be provided by the
manufacturer, manufacturer's representative, or installer of the water spray system.
3. Labeling shall be accomplished with the use of "Brady" or approved equal self-
sticking labels. The colour and size shall contrast the surface that it is applied to.
The labels shall be provided and applied by Fire Protection Systems Maintenance
Organization.
3.9 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

A. Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed as per the requirement of NFPA 13

(Installation of Sprinkler Systems) and NFPA 16 latest edition. Each water control valve
shall be fully opened and closed under water pressure proper operation.
B. Prior to the acceptance of the installation, the Specialist Contractor shall, in the presence of
the Engineer, subject the system to the tests required by NFPA for the completion of the
Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate. In addition, complete operating test of Foam –
Water Sprinkler system shall be performed.
C. The system shall be complete, tested and ready for operation and shall include all
necessary / required connections. Testing shall be as required to conform to current
applicable requirements of NFPA and Local Code Authority. The serving Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Engineers and Owners shall be allowed to conduct such tests as may be
required. Any cost in connection with these, test is borne by the Specialist Contractor.
D. Alarm Testing: Contractor shall be responsible for testing new alarms and modified alarms
installed under this contract. Defective alarms shall be replaced immediately.
3.10 SPARES
A. The installing specialist contractor shall supply the owner with quantities of spare parts
equal to a minimum of ten percent (10%) of the total quantities of each system replacable
part utilized in this installation. As maybe required by the Engineer / Local Authority, 100%
foam concentrate standby supply shall be provided.
3.11 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing specialist contractor shall provide operational training
to each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include system operation,
manual functions, trouble procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and
emergency procedures.
3.12 WARRANTY
A. All Foam – Water Sprinkler System components furnished, and installed under this contract,
shall be guaranteed against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full
warranty period which is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1)
year from the date of system acceptance, except for those equipments having a specific
warranty period.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 22 00
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes clean agent fire suppression systems and the following:
1. Extinguishing Agent
2. Extinguishing agent containers
3. Detection and alarm devices
4. Fire Extinguishing Control and Alarm panels
5. Piping and piping specialties
6. Accessories
7. Connection devices and wiring between system components
8. Connection devices for power integration into building fire alarm system
B. This section, in conjunction with the contract documents and drawings, indicates the
materials and operation required for the design and installation of Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System. Requirements are included for the design, installation, testing and
commissioning of the system.
C. The fire protection specialist contractor shall include in his tender for the complete Clean
Agent Fire Suppression System, detailed on the tender drawings and in this specification, to
the standards and approval of Local Authority (Local Civil Defense).
D. The hazard areas indicated in the drawing shall be protected with a clean agent fire
suppression system to match the requirements set forth in this specification, the codes
mentioned below and to the requirements of Local Authority (Local Civil Defense).
A. Clean agent fire suppression sytem shall be an engineered system for total flooding of the
hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling and below the raised floor, where
required. Provide separate zones above and below raised floor.
B. The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Fire Suppression System supplied &
installed by a specialist fire protection sub-contractor authorized by the manufacturer.
C. The clean Agent fire suppression system shall be either NOVEC 1230 or FM 200 fire
suppression system for engineer's approval.
D. Design Criteria
21 22 00 Clean Agent Fire Extingusihing System Rev.00 Page 1 of 12

1. The system shall provide Clean agent fluid with a minimum design concentration (%
by volume) 4.2% by volume for class A hazard and a minimum of 5.85% by volume
for class B hazard in all areas and/or protected spaces with NOVEC 1230 at the
minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area and shall be in
accordance to NFPA 2001 (Clean Agent Fire Suppression System) – latest edition
and manufacturer recommendations. System design concentration shall not exceed
10% for normally occupied spaces and/or of the NOAEL (No Observed Adverse
Effect Level) and LOAEL (Lowest Observable Adverse Effect Level) values after
discharge, adjusted for maximum space temperature anticipated, unless provisions
for room evacuation before agent release are provided, as specified in NFPA 2001
latest edition. Discharge time shall be designed for a time period based on the agent
used and as per requirements of NFPA 2001 - latest edition.
2. The system shall be automatically actuated via detection zones using photoelectric
smoke /or heat detectors installed at maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft (23.2 sq. m) per
detector, in both room, underfloor and above ceiling protected spaces. If the air flow
is one air change per minute, photoelectric detectors only shall be installed at a
spacing not to exceed 125 sq. ft. (11.6 sq. m.) per detector (Ref. NFPA 72-2007
Edition).
3. If the FM-200 system is proposed, then the system shall be sized to provide a
minimum concentration level by volume of 7% FM-200 agent in protected spaces.
The system should be designed to discharge its contents in 10 seconds or less.
Room concentration levels after discharge shall not exceed a 10% concentration level
by volume. The complete system design and installation shall fully in compliance with
latest NFPA and civil defense requirements.
E. The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, automatic and manually operated
actuators, agent storage containers, clean fluid agent, discharge nozzles, pipe / fittings and
supports, manual release and abort stations, audible / visual alarm devices, auxiliary
devices / controls, shutdowns, alarm interface, caution/ advisory signs, functional check-out
/ testing, training and all other operations necessary for a functional U.L. Listed and/or F.M.
approved Clean Agent Fire Suppression System.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. After award of contract and prior to fabrication, clean agent fire suppression system
Specialist Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval complete design submittal.
Design submittals package shall include the following:
1. Manufacturer's product technical data sheets, UL / FM certificates, installation & start-

up instructions and ratings for all the equipments pertaining to Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System.
2. Shop drawings for each area clearly indicating the agent storage tanks, capacity,
agent weight, location of all plant and equipment, pipe runs with sizes and lengths,
control panels with terminal wiring ports, detectors, conduit runs, manual pull stations,
abort stations, audible and visual alarm, shutdown and interfacing with other services,
etc.
3. Auxiliary details and information such as hydraulic flow calculations from a UL listed
computer programme supporting the pipe size / routing shown in the drawing, agent
quantity, flow, pressure and agent discharge time. Include details (where required)
door holders, special sealing requirements, operation and control documentation,

damper operation, alarm devices, shutdown functions, remote signalling, etc.,

required for successful operation of clean agent fire suppression system.
4. Schematic wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field
electrical connections of detection zones, automatic controls, manual release and
abort stations, visual and audible alarm connections, including interfacing with fire
alarm control panel, shutdown of other services, etc.
5. All information necessary for the complete supply and installation of the proposed
clean agent fire suppression system, to include manufacturer recommended spare
parts list.
A. The clean agent fire extinguishing system shall comply with the latest edition of the following
standards:
NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems

NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 75 - Standard for Protective Signaling
ISO 14520 - International Standardization Organization
Local Agency - Local Civil Defense
B. Installer Qualifications
1. The Clean agent fire suppression system specialist sub-contractor shall be an

experienced firm engaged in fixed fire suppression system and trained / authorized by
the supplier / manufacturer to design, install, test and commission the clean agent fire
suppression system. The specialist sub-contractor shall have an access to fluid agent
gas recharging station within 24 hours after discharge.
2. The Specialist sub-contractor shall be fully responsible for the design, supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of a complete functional clean agent fire
suppression system in accordance to the specifications, drawings, to Engineer’s and
Local Civil Defense approval. After preparation of all shop drawings, the Specialist
sub-contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineers, of which the final approval
shall come from Local Civil Defense. Final inspection of the installed, tested and
commissioned clean agent fire suppression system shall be arranged by the
specialist sub-contractor with Duabi Civil Defense and secure their approval /
acceptance.
3. The Specialist sub-contractor shall only use those products specifically listed (UL –
Underwriter’s Laboratories) and approved (FM – Approved) for fire protection use and
services such as clean fluid agent, agent cylinders, control panel, automatic / manual
actuators, detectors, manual release / abort stations, audible / visual signal devices,
etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of the
supplier's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. When one or more
pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be duplicates produced
by one manufacturer.

B. All devices and equipment shall be U.L Listed and/or FM approved. All materials used for
the installation must be new, free from all defects and imperfections unless otherwise
indicated.
C. All product and components shall be stored in a clean dry place. Protected from weather,
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage.
D. Systems shall be designed in accordance with the latest manufacturer's design guidelines.
2.2 CLEAN AGENT STORAGE CYLINDER AND DISCHARGE VALVE
A. Clean fluid agent containers shall be located in a designated area as shown in the drawings
/or as near as possible to the protected hazard in order to reduce the amount of pipe and
fittings required in installing the system.
B. The clean fluid agent shall be stored in Agent Storage Containers conforming to the
regulation of the U. S. Department of Transportation and/or Canadian Transport
Commission when used as shipping containers, and if not, they shall be designed,
fabricated, inspected and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Containers shall be suitably designed to a maximum pressure
0
developed at 55 C, or at maximum controlled temperature limit. Containers shall be super-
pressurized with nitrogen to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70° F (2482 kpa at 21° C).
Containers shall be of material construction conforming to NFPA 2001 latest edition.
C. Each container shall be fitted with a resilient pressure seat type pressure operated
discharge valve with threaded anti recoil protective cap and an integral safety relief device
to protect the cylinder against excessive internal pressure. The discharge valve shall be of
forged brass body fitted with external connections for actuation devices and shall also be
provided with removable pressure gauge or a solenoid valve assembly with gauge for visual
pressure monitoring.
D. The cylinders shall be mounted in a free standing steel racks properly arranged to allow
servicing, removal and weighing of cylinders. Portable beam scale shall be provided for
weighing the cylinders in place.
E. When multiple cylinders are connected in a common manifold, each cylinder shall be fitted
with a check valve. Check valve utilizing “O” ring seats shall not be used due to possible
dislodge during discharge.
F. Provide liquid level indicator and pressure switch (as required) in each cylinder.
2.3 CONTROLS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Automatic operation shall be by means of photo-electric type smoke /or heat detectors
arranged in a cross-zoned detection circuit. Operation of the detector in any detection zone
shall activate the first stage alarm (bell), and operation of the second zone circuit will
activate the second stage alarm (horn/strobe), and send an electric signal causing the
normally de-energized / closed electric actuator (solenoid valve) on the pilot head to
activate after the preset delay time allowing agent flow to the discharge nozzles.
Pyrotechnic actuator devices are not acceptable.
2.4 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

A. Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided, within the manufacturers guidelines, to

distribute the clean fluid agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be
designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution in accordance to NFPA 2001
(Clean Agent Fire Suppression System).
B. Nozzles shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant material designed specifically for clean
agent fire suppression system application and shall also be permanently marked identifying
the manufacturer, type and size of orifice.
C. Ceiling plates, can be used with the nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes through ceiling tiles.
D. Nozzle/s shall be ordered based in the actual installation of the pipework in order to
determine the proper size of nozzle orifice.
A. Distribution piping, and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements, NFPA 2001 and approved piping standards and guidelines. All distribution
piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using good, accepted practices and quality
procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported and anchored at all directional
changes and nozzle locations.
B. Pipes and Fittings: Pipes shall be galvanized steel as per ASTM A53, Gr. B, Seamless,
Sch. 40. Non metallic pipes shall not be allowed. Fittings shall be UL / FM approved ductile
iron material, threaded / grooved type and rated for minimum 620 psi working pressure,
class 300 lbs..
C. Cast iron and class 150 lbs. fitting shall not be used.
D. All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burrs,
mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
E. All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the male thread
ONLY. Coating of the threads shall start at least two (2) threads back from the pipe end.
Care must be taken on small diameter pipe thread so as not to allow sealant to enter valves
or controls.
F. Use concentric reducers ONLY wherever pipe reduction occurs. Bushing reducers are not
acceptable.
G. All pilot pipework used for pressure releasing shall either be ¼” threaded pipe or stainless
steel tubing. If threaded pipe is used, minimum Schedule 40 is required with pipe fitting
rated at 300 lbs malleable or ductile iron. 150 lbs fittings are not acceptable.
H. Wherever piping crosses thru building walls, slabs, they shall be sleeved. Sleeves shall be
schedule 40 pipes at least two (2) times the diameter of the pipe being sleeved, and
extends 2” above when crossing floor slab. Sleeves shall be packed with an approved
sealing material.
I. Pipework shall be properly supported and anchored to structural members where

longitudinal or lateral movement is possible. Rigid hangers shall be used wherever straight
runs and change of direction / elevation occurs, fabricated and installed in a workmanlike
manner so that they will not disengaged by the movement of the supported pipe. All piping
supports shall be arranged so that no excessive bending stresses are induced into the
piping from concentrated loads between supports. Maximum spacing of supports shall be
as follows;

FOR THREADED PIPEWORK
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (mm) MAXIMUM SPAN (meters)
6.4 1.50
15 1.50
20 1.80
25 2.10
32 2.44
40 2.74
50 3.00
65 3.35
80 3.66
100 4.30
FOR GROOVED PIPEWORK
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (mm) MAXIMUM SPAN (meters)
6.4 2.10
15 2.10
20 2.10
25 2.10
32 2.10
40 2.10
50 2.10
65 3.00
80 3.00
100 3.00

2.6 CONDUITS AND WIRES
A. Conduits shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and to Authority
Having Jurisdiction (Local Civil Defense).
B. Conduits filling shall not exceed 40% of interior cross sectional area where three (3) or more
cables are contained in a single conduit.
C. Cable shall be original highly dressable easy to terminate and install fire resistant cable, and
shall be in conformance and approved for BS5839-1:2002.
D. Cables shall have BASEC and LPCB approval to BS5839-1:2002, approval to EN50200
classification PH 30 and the new integrated, shock and water test to BS8434-1.
E. Cable shall have excellent data / signal transmission characteristics, for voice alarm,
addressable and networked systems.
F. Cables shall be supported by a fixing that can withstand the same fire condition as that of
the cable. Clips shall be LSOH coated metal clips.
G. Conductor shall be annealed copper solid circular conductor complying with BS6360 Class
1 or Class 2.
H. Insulation shall be high performance damage resistant insudite. Screen shall be laminated
aluminum tape screen bonded to sheath and in contact with full size tinned annealed
copper circuit protective conductor which provide automatic screen earthing. Sheath shall
be robust thermoplastic LSOH sheath and color red.
I. Detection and alarm cables shall be separated from any open conductors (ie., Power or
Class 1 circuits) as per National Electrical Code (NEC). Control & monitoring cables shall
be fire rated (FP – 200 / Approved equal). The cable shall be laid through conduits of
sufficient size.
2.7 CONTROL PANEL
A. Extinguishing Control Panel shall communicate with and control the equipments to make a
complete workable / operational system such as smoke detectors, manual release, abort
switch, alarm devices, actuating / releasing components and other system controlled
devices.
B. The control panel shall include indicating circuits, releasing circuits, alarm contacts, trouble
contacts, auxiliary contacts, initiating zones, manual release circuit and abort circuit.
C. System display shall indicate the status of the following parameters of the system as
follows;
1. AC POWER : Green LED

2. SYSTEM ALARM : Red LED
3. RELEASE : Red LED
4. SUPERVISORY : Yellow LED
5. SYSTEM TROUBLE : Yellow LED
6. CIRCUIT TROUBLE : Yellow LED
7. ALARM SILENCED : Yellow LED
8. POWER TROUBLE : Yellow LED

D. System control switch operation shall be as follows;
1. Activation of the Piezo Silence Switch in the control panel in response to alarm /
trouble / supervisory conditions shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and
change the Alarm or Trouble LED from flashing mode to a steady mode. When a new
Alarm or Trouble conditions occur in the system will cause the control panel to
resound the local piezo sounder thereby repeating the Alarm / Trouble sequences.
2. Activation of the Alarm Silence Switch shall cause all alarms indicating appliances in
alarm condition to return to the normal condition.
3. Activation of System Reset Switch shall cause all initiating devices, appliances as
well as all associated output devices and circuits back to their normal operating
mode. Activating the LAMP TEST function will activate the local piezo sounder and all
LED’s.
4. Activation of Alarm Activate Switch shall activate the indicating circuits and alarm
relays.
E. System Operation
1. In the event of alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions, corresponding LED’s will

flash until acknowledged. Whenever new alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions
occur will reactivate all indications and flashes new events.
2. In case of short circuit in any zone will cause the supervisory LED to flash. Operating
the piezo silence switch shall silence the piezo causing the supervisory LED to
function in a steady mode. Open circuit shall be reported as a zone trouble.
3. A control switch shall be use in case initiating circuit will be put to Disable / Enable
mode. In dis-able mode, a red zone LED alarm will illuminate, however, their will be
no piezo or output circuit activation.
4. A facility shall be provided in the control panel in order to display previous status of
the panel and can also be used in diagnosing trouble conditions.
F. Zone modules / function relays and optional volt / ampere meter shall be included.
G. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided along with the control panel for AC units shutdown, door
closers, electrical equipment shutdown, interface with fire alarm control panel, etc.
H. The following functions shall also be included in the Control panel;
1. Protection of output circuits against false activations.

2. Battery / Earth fault supervision.
3. Zero (0) to thirty (30) seconds adjustable delay timer.
4. Selectable cross zone (meaning gas release will occur upon two (2) zones are in
alarm condition).
5. Optional three (3) method selectable abort function. (1) Standard UL method; (2) IRI
method; and (3) Local AHJ method.
6. A second release circuit maybe selected in place of supervisory circuit.
7. A supervised manual release circuit which when activated shall override the abort.
8. Timer to supervise microprocessor.
9. Slide-in zone identification labels.
I. Power Supply
1. The Power supply shall be designed to meet UL and NFPA requirements for power
limited initiating / indicating devices operations and is an integral component to the
control panel (with integral battery charger for use with 15 AH batteries) which will

provide all power needs for control panel and related devices. Input power shall be
220 vac, 1 ph, 50 hz.
2. The power supply shall also provide 2.25 amperes of regulated 24 vdc power for
release circuits and alarm indicating devices, resettable power 24 vdc up to 200 ma,
non-resettable power 24 vdc up to 200 ma.
3. Positive-temperature-coeffecient thermistors, circuit breakers, fuses, or other
overcurrent protection shall be provided on all power outputs.
J. The control panel shall be housed inside a cabinet either in recessed or wall mounted, as
the case maybe, the back box and the door shall be made of steel with a provisions of
electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. A key lock shall be provided in the door
and shall also include a glass / transparent material opening for viewing the indicators. If the
cabinet is designed for recessed mounting, a trim shall be provided. Cabinet shall also
provide a space enough for the 2 x 7AH/12AH batteries.
2.8 BATTERIES
A. Batteries shall be 12 volts, Gell cell type and two (2) numbers shall be supplied. It shall have
a sufficient capacity to power the control panel for not less than ninety (90) hours upon
normal AC-power failure. Batteries shall be maintenance free, requiring no liquids, fluid
level checks, refilling, spills and leakage.
2.9 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Optical Smoke Detectors
1. The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA No. 72 – current edition.
2. Optical Smoke detector shall continuously measure the smoke level in the air, and
gives a proportional output. It shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72. The
detector shall be an optical light scattering type sensitive to visible smoke and be
stable under all environmental conditions. The internal test and calibration circuits
shall use the same optical elements as the smoke sensing circuits, to ensure
reliability.
3. A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in alarm
mode.
B. Heat Detectors
1. The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA No. 72 – current edition.
0
2. Heat detectors used in areas with ambient temperature not exceeding 49 C shall be
0
fixed temperature / rate-of-rise heat detector rated at 57 C. Areas where the ambient
0 0
temperature exceeds 49 C but not 71 C, fixed temperature / rate-of-rise shall be
0
rated at 88 C. The detector shall be suitable to operate in the presence of slow or fast
rising temperatures due to burning combustibles.
3. A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in alarm
mode.
C. Manual Release Station (Electric)
1. The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a
means of manually discharging the Suppression System.

2. The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device(s)
requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
3. Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the
system to discharge, and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in
the same manner as if the system had operated automatically.
4. A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard and
shall have an advisory sign, provided at each location.
D. Abort Station
1. The Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be located next to each
manual switch.
2. The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the
Control Panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists.
3. "Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted.
4. The Abort Station shall be located adjacent to each manual station.
E. Audible and Visual Alarms
1. Audible alarm and visual signal devices shall operate from the Control Panel.
2. The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall operate on 24 volts Dc
power to allow supervision of the circuit wires.
3. The alarm bell and horn shall deliver a minimum sound level of 92 decibels at a
distance of 3.0 meters from the device.
4. Horn and strobe light are to operate simultaneous from one power supply with flash
rate of 1-3 flashes per second minimum over the listed input voltage range.
5. A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the
protected space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
F. Manual Actuator
1. Manually operated actuator shall be provided for independent means of operation of

clean agent system. The unit shall activate the system without the need for external
power or stored energy, thereby providing a fail safe method of activation. The device
is intended to be used by the human occupants to control the discharge of the
extinguishing agent manually.
G. Liquid Level Indicator
1. The liquid level indicator shall be installed in the clean agent storage container to
provide means of verifying the level of agent in a container without having to remove
the container and weigh it on a calibrated scale. The device shall enable the inspector
to determine the level of agent with the container safely secured in its installed
position.
H. Cylinder Pressure Switch
1. Pressure switch shall be provided in each agent container in order to monitor the
internal pressure of the container. This will be connected to the control panel that
when pressure falls to preset setting the control panel will sound an alarm.
I. Caution and Advisory Signs
1. Provide signs, as required, to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of
the equipment supplier

2. Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.

3. Manual discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station.
4. Flashing light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a protected
space.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance to NEC, NFPA 72, NFPA 2001, Local and State Codes,
as shown in the drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
B. System installation in general shall be conducted by experienced technicians and

supervised by an Engineer who has successfully installed a fire extinguishing system of the
same type and designed as specified herein. The services of the qualified manufacturer's
representatives, experienced in the installation and operation of the system being provided
shall be furnished to supervise the preliminary testing, including final testing, system
adjustment and instructions.
C. The cylinder shall be actuated only by the burst of rupture disc which is maintenance free
actuation.
D. Fire sensing element in each area protected by clean agent fire suppression system shall
use either optical smoke detectors /or heat detectors installed for a maximum coverage of
2
25m . These detectors shall be installed in all three voids namely room, sub-floor / false
floor and false ceiling of the protected area (as applicable). Detection shall be wired to
provide a double knock signal using cross-zoned detection method of operation.
E. All conduits, junction boxes, supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and
maybe exposed in unfinished areas. Detectors / devices shall not be installed prior to
system programming or test period. If construction is still on-going on this period, measures
shall be taken to protect the devices from possible contamination and physical damages.
3.2 TESTING
A. Hydrostatic test shall be perform in accordance to NFPA 2001 (Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System) of the installed pipework. The test shall be by pneumatic means. After
the test, a flow test using either nitrogen or inert gas shall be perform on the pipework to
verify that the flow is continuous and unobstructed.
B. Room integrity test shall be perform using blower door fan method in accordance to the
procedures outlined in NFPA 2001 – latest edition. The test is required in order to examine
and locate, then effectively seal significant air leaks that might result to a failure of the
enclosure to hold the agent concentration level in a specified holding period. Test results
shall be recorded.
C. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall perform the test, as required by
the Engineer or the Client or by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Local Civil Defense).
D. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to a functional and
operational test (no gas discharge) including the in place of each field devices, by which,
any devices found in-operational shall be corrected or replaced. When all the required
corrections have been rectified, the system shall be re – tested and the Engineer and /or
Client representative shall be notified of the readiness for final inspection. At this time, any

and all required test shall be repeated and any defects corrected until the system is found to
be acceptable.
3.3 INSTRUCTION
A. Conduct operation and maintenance instruction to the building personnel. “Hands-on”

demonstrations of the operation and maintenance of all system components and the entire
system.
3.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide spare parts required for the system to include quantity equivalent to 10% of each
item supplied and to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
3.5 TRAINING
A. Prior to final acceptance, the installing fire fighting specialist contractor shall provide
operational training to each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall
include system operation, manual and functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
3.6 WARRANTY
A. All equipments / devices supplied and installed under this contract shall be guaranteed
against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which is
standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of final
system acceptance
END OF SECTION

SECTION 21 31 13
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section,
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers providing all labor and materials for the installation of electric motor driven fire
and jockey pumps complete with controllers, valves, piping, supports, alarms and supplementary
items necessary for a complete, operational, code compliant and approved system.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be applicable to
this Project.
C. All materials, installation and Workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and
standards addressed within the following references:
1. UAE Fire and Lift Safety Code of Practice
2. NEMA MG-1 - Motors and Generators
3. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum)
4. NFPA 20 - Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps
5. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code
6. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory
7. UL 448 - Pumps for Fire Protection Service
8. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps
9. UL 1478 - Fire Pump Relief Valves
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 20 and FM Data Sheet 3-7N for installation and testing of fire pumps, drivers and
controllers.
21 31 13 Fire Pumps Rev.00 Page 1 of 13
B. Dubai Civil Defense is the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (DCD) for fire protection system
equipment, materials, installation and applicable Code interpretations.
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 20 and FM Guidelines.
B. Obtain and become familiar with requirements of Owner's insurance underwriter and incorporate all
applicable provisions for compliance.
C. Thoroughly and clearly document all Project related communications with code and regulatory
agents and expediently forward communication documentation to the Project Manager.
D. Equipment and components shall bear UL and FM label or marking.
E. Maintain at least one copy of all system related documents on Site.
F. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

Section with minimum three years documented experience. The manufacturer shall supply all
necessary pump accessories (controller, driver and accessories, gauges, etc.) to provide a
complete pump installation, as detailed in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheets. The
pump manufacturer shall be held accountable for the complete pump package and installation.
G. Installer's Qualifications: The system shall be installed by a firm having minimum three years
experience regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire pump systems in accordance with
requirements of the National Fire Protection Association and UAE Fire and Life Safety Code of
Practice.
H. The manufacturer of the fire pump system shall be responsible for compliance with all applicable
codes.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. No Work shall be performed until the Shop Drawings, calculations and product data have
been approved by Project Manager and the project fire protection engineer consultant.
This will require early processing of all submittals. The Contractor is solely liable for any
Work performed or material purchases made prior to this approval.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturers literature including general assembly, pump curves showing

performance characteristics with pump and system with operating point indicated, NPSH
curve, controls, wiring diagrams, and service connections.
C. Record Documents:
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, weights,

clearances, and methods of assembly.
2. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fire pump(s) meet or exceed specified

requirements at specified operating conditions. Submit summary and results of shop tests
performed in accordance with NFPA 20.
3. Field Reports: Indicate summary of hydrostatic test and field acceptance tests performed
in accordance with NFPA 20.
4. Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Indicate support details, connection requirements,

and include start-up instructions for fire pump system.
5. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

field acceptance tests.
6. Provide full written description of manufacturer’s warranty.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. A complete set of instructions covering the installation, maintenance and operation of the
fire pump system shall be bound in booklet form and furnished to the Owner.
2. Operation Data: Include manufacturer’s instructions, start-up data, trouble-shooting

check lists, for pumps, drivers, and controllers.
3. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s literature, cleaning procedures, preventive

maintenance recommendations and procedures, replacement parts lists, and repair data
for pumps, drivers and controllers.
A. Accept fire pumps and components on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage. Comply with
manufacturers rigging and installation instructions.
B. Protect fire pumps and components from physical damage including effects of weather, water, and
construction debris.
C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps, and maintain in place until installation.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire pump, driver, and controller for one year from date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Provide one complete set of gaskets, screens and seals for each pump type and model supplied.
1.9 "Pump-heads shown in the schedules are only approximate values. The contractor shall calculate
total pressure-drop and arrive at the required pump-head before ordering the pumps and shall
submit the calculation for approval of the engineer. The required pump and motor h.p. Shall be
provided without additional costs
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, local requirements, and
B. Pressure ratings of pumps, pipe, fittings, valves, gauges and all other water carrying
appurtenances shall be suitable for the anticipated system pressures in which they are installed.

C. The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the space and access available for the installation of a
factory assembled packaged unit and as an option may assemble the various components in place
at the Site in lieu of providing a factory assembled unit. However, all components of the system
shall be compatible and be furnished by a single source manufacturer and all electrical services
and interconnecting equipment wiring must be provided for within this Contractors bid.
D. All of the equipment listed herein, shall be mounted on a structural steel base that is equipped with
grout holes. All wiring and piping including pressure sensing lines, bypass with check valve and
shut-off valves, as well as approved pump suction and discharge valves shall be furnished firmly
anchored to the steel base by means of structural steel supports and arranged such that single
point connections are required for piping and power supply.
E. The packaged pumping system shall include all electrical wiring between components and shall be
completed and tested at the factory prior to shipment. The entire assembly shall be painted red
after hydrostatic and electrical tests.
F. All pilot lights and visual indicators shall be illuminated from the rear by long life LED lamps. Neon
and incandescent lamps are not acceptable.
G. All similar components shall be of one manufacturer, (i.e., controllers).
H. The shall be with following configuration:
1. 1 Electric Main Fire pump
2. 1 Diesel Standby Fire pump (1 Electric Standby pump for Level-22 & Level-46)
3. 1 jockey pump
I. Each system shall be design to ensure the maximum pumping capacity even if 1 pump fails..
J. The fire pumps, motor, engine and electric pump controllers and diesel pump controllers shall be
UL listed or FM approved, built in the country where the agreement is made. Unit responsibility
must be submitted from the manufacturer.
K. The fire pumps and engine driven shall be in accordance with NPFA 20 (curves, starting,
protection, …).
L. The contractor shall provide fully certified hydraulic calculations for exact sizing of the pumps.
M. The pumps shall be furnished with a full set of bench test certificates proving acceptability for the
design points of this installation.
N. Refer to fire and jockey pump schedules on Contract Drawings for required pump capacities and
electrical characteristics.
2.2 FIRE PUMP
A. The fire pump shall deliver not less than 150% of the rated capacity at a pressure of not less then
65% of the rated head. The shutoff head shall not exceed 140% of the rated head.
B. The pump shall be a horizontal split case, double-suction, bronze-fitted, centrifugal pump with the
pump driver complete with flexible coupling and coupling guard. The pump shall have a common
horizontal centerline between the suction and discharge connections. The suction and discharge
connections shall be the same size, thus eliminating the need for pipe increasers or decreasers.

C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings,
seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
D. Impeller: Bronze double suction fully enclosed, balanced and keyed to shaft.
E. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball bearings, greaseable and replaceable without opening casing,
selected for minimum 50,000 hour life.
F. Shaft: Alloy steel with replaceable bronze shaft sleeve.
G. Seal: Packing gland with minimum four rings graphite impregnated packing and bronze lantern
rings, 230 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.
H. Base plate: Cast iron with integral drain rim.
I. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided their products meet or exceed these
Specifications and the Contract drawing schedules: Aurora, Peerless, Patterson or Allis-Chalmers.
2.3 FIRE PUMP ACCESSORIES
A. Eccentric suction reducer and OS&Y gate on suction side of pump. No butterfly valve shall be
installed on suction side of pump.
B. Concentric increaser and check valve in pump discharge and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve on
system side of check valve.
C. Fire pump bypass fitted with normally open and supervised OS&Y gate or butterfly valves and
double-check valve assembly.
D. Suction pressure gauge, 3-1/2 inch minimum diameter dial with snubber, valve cock and lever
handle.
E. Discharge pressure gauge mounted on board attached to pump, 3-1/2 inch minimum diameter dial
with snubber, valve cock and lever handle.
F. Float operated ¾-inch automatic air release valve.
G. Venturi flow meter system, FM approved, meter reading in GPM, flow sensor, and all required
accessories.
H. Fire pump test header with number and size of hose valves per NFPA 20.
2.4 FIRE PUMP ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE
A. The electric motor for the fire pump shall be a standard NEMA design B, open drip proof,
continuous duty rated, suitable for Y-delta start with 1.15 service factor and UL listed for fire pump
applications. The locked rotor current shall not exceed the values specified in NFPA 20. The motor
shall be wound for 480 volts, three phase, 60 cycles operation, 1750 rpm with operating
horsepower as scheduled on Contract Drawings and as required by the fire pump to meet NFPA
Standards.

2.5 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER
A. The controller shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire pump service and shall meet or exceed
all the requirements of the latest editions of NFPA 20 and the National Electric Code, NFPA 70.
The fire pump controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic type designed for
wye/delta reduced voltage closed transition type operation having the same horsepower, voltage,
phase, and frequency rating as required of the motor, be housed in a NEMA 3R enclosure and
include the following:
1. Time delay circuit breaker set at 300 percent motor full load current.
2. Isolation switch with single external operating handle interlocked with circuit breaker.
Operating mechanism shall be flange or side mounted.
3. Non-fused control power transformer.
4. START and STOP pushbuttons for manual control.
5. Ammeter test links and voltmeter test studs.
6. POWER AVAILABLE pilot light to indicate power on the load side of the circuit breaker
and PHASE REVERSAL pilot light for the line side of the motor starter. Pilot lights shall
be mounted externally.
7. Surge protector wired to the line side of the isolation system.
8. Solid state pressure switch and transducer with energize to start relay. Pressure switch
shall be differential adjustable type with LED indicators for trip and reset.
9. Minimum run time, adjustable 0 - 10 minutes with timed-out LED indicator. Per NFPA 20
and FM pump should be arranged for “manual stop” the run-timer and auto stop function
must be disabled.
10. Magnetic contactors with externally operable mechanical start mechanism.
11. Two sets each of dry form "C" contacts for remote indication of PUMP RUNNING,
POWER FAILURE and PHASE REVERSAL.
12. The electric fire pump controller shall also include an automatic start relay of the drop-out
type, and a local built-in alarm panel powered from a separate reliable 120 VAC power
source.
13. The local alarm panel shall have individual indicating lights with a common alarm bell and
silence button for POWER FAILURE, PUMP RUNNING, PHASE REVERSAL, LOW
DISCHARGE PRESSURE, TRANSFER SWITCH IN EMERGENCY, ISOLATION
SWITCH OPEN and REMOTE START.
14. A local indicating light and two sets of remote alarm contacts shall be furnished to
monitor SUPERVISORY POWER of the local alarm panel.
15. Two sets of dry form "C" remote alarm contacts shall be provided for LOW DISCHARGE
PRESSURE, TRANSFER SWITCH IN EMERGENCY and ISOLATION SWITCH OPEN.
16. A separate pressure switch shall be supplied to monitor discharge pressure.
17. All indicators shall be illuminated from the rear by long life LED lamps. Incandescent
lamps are not acceptable.
B. The electric fire pump controller shall be manufactured by Metron, Firetrol or Master.
2.6 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE:
A. Diesel engine shall be UL listed or FM approved for fire protection service.
B. The engine shall be of the self contained, mounted on a suitable base with the following
minimum plus any others that may be necessary by NFPA-20 and local CD requirements.
1. Dual battery set sized to NFPA -20 requirements with electrolyte shipped in separate
containers, rack and cables.
2. Dual battery charger of proper type for batteries used (included in UL Listed / FM
Approved controller). Power to battery charger shall be supplied from electric pump
control panel. Wiring from control panel to battery chargers shall be by the contractor.
3. Electric starter with suitable generator and voltage regulator.
4. Engine water pump.
5. Heat exchanger cooling system.
6. Lubricating oil pump and filter.
7. Fuel injection system.
8. Air cleaner.
9. Proper instrument panel, complete with engine run warning light, water temperature
gauge, oil pressure gauge, voltmeter, totalizing type tachometer and hour meter.
10. Industrial Grade Muffler.
11. Cooling water line for the engine heat exchanger assembly.
12. Flexible exhaust connectors.
13. All engine wiring for automatic starting shall terminate in a proper junction box to
permit connection to control panel.
2.7 FUEL SYSTEM :
A. A suitable fuel system for the diesel engine shall be furnished. It must be in accordance with
NFPA Pamphlet No.20 and shall include above surface day storage tank, flexible hose
connectors, combination vent, and fill cap.
2.8 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE CONTROLLER :
A. Automatic Microprocessor Diesel Drive Engine Control Panel: The automatic engine control
panel shall be UL/FM approved for fire pump service and meet the requirements of NFPA20.
The panel shall be of the floor mounted type, and enclosed in moisture and dust tight housing. A
combination manual and automatic type controller with “Manual-Off-Automatic” selector shall be
provided and a 240 volt single phase power failure relay or a pressure switch, which will ( when
the system pressure drops ) activate all electric circuits to automatically start the engine an
manually stop.

B. Automatic starting for the diesel engine will be done by automatic cranking from battery 1, and if
failed from battery 2, with certain cranking and rest period (period is programmable). Controller
will try to crank engine up to six times, but if engine did not start after these six attempts, “Failed
To Start Alarm” will be activated,
C. The engine shall be started automatically by the Controller at least once a week, adjustable, and
operate a minimum of 30 minutes (adjustable). An appropriate timing arrangement shall
determine the day and hour of this test.
D. Pressure recorder (7 day drive) shall be provided within the control panel.
E. The controller shall incorporate the following:
1. Each charger shall be completely independent of the other charger and equipped with its
own individual power transformer, rated for a maximum continuous charge current of
10A. The charger shall be of solid state electronic design, with semi-conductor type
rectifier
2. In case of battery failure, the charger shall initiate an alarm and provide a signal to
prevent the use of the defective battery during the start attempt cycle.
3. Relays: All relays shall be equipped with manual test buttons, status “ON” – “OFF”
indicators, be of the plug in type and shall meet all voltage and current requirements.
4. Remote Alarm Circuit :
a. Engine run indicator / free contact.
b. Test running indicator / free contact.
c. Automatic mode indicator / free contact.
d. DC power healthy indicator / free contact
e. Deluge valve on alarm / indicator / free contact (programmable).
f. Remote start on alarm / indicator / free contact
5. Description of Operation: A four positions main switch shall provide selection of three
starting method and one OFF position.
a. OFF position shall shut down engine and alarms under any condition.
b. AUTO position: a water pressure switch mounted inside the controller shall provide
the engine start on water pressure drop. The automatic starting circuit shall
alternate the two storage batteries after each start attempt. The attempt to start
cycle shall consist of six cranks and five rest periods of 15 seconds duration. In
the event of one battery failure, the starting cycle shall lock itself to the remaining
battery. In case of engine failure, the controller shall stop any further cranking and
energize the ENGINE FAIL TO START alarm. A manual stop pushbutton shall
enable engine shut down, but only after all starting causes have returned to
normal. The automatic Weekly Exercise cycle shall also be operational in the auto-
position. This cycle shall be programmed on the 7 day time clock. A short opening
of the water solenoid valve shall create a momentary pressure drop and cause
automatic engine start. A manual test switch located on the time clock shall
allow for manual test operation of the weekly exercise cycle. The 7 day time clock

shall hold its time on A/C power failure and not require resetting.
c. TEST Position: Engine shall start in the same manner as the above exercise cycle
start. Auto Start and Manual Shut down
d. MANUAL Position: Start pushbutton “Battery 1” or “Battery 2”, shall override all
automatic starting circuits, and allow for direct manual engine start.
e. Safety Shut Down: Engine over speed condition shall shut down engine without
time delay and lock out until manually reset.
F. The controller shall provide the following additional safety features Engine shut down in case of
low oil pressure, test or optional AC failure operation only.
2.9 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. The automatic transfer switch shall be wired to the fire pump controller and mounted in a separate
compartment with an isolation barrier. The automatic transfer switch shall include an isolation
switch and externally operable handle, voltage and frequency sensitive relays for normal power,
voltage and frequency sensitive relays for emergency power sensed from emergency control
power transformer, normal and emergency control power transformers, and time delays for
ENGINE START, TRANSFER TO EMERGENCY, RETRANSFER TO NORMAL and ENGINE
COOLDOWN. The transfer switch shall also include provisions for preventing higher than inrush
currents when transferring power in either direction, a TEST switch and pilot lights for NORMAL
POWER and EMERGENCY POWER.
B. The automatic transfer switch shall be manufactured by Metron, Firetrol or Master.
2.10 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE (JOCKEY) PUMP
A. Electrically operated, horizontal turbine close-coupled or vertical multi-stage centrifugal type with
standard open drip-proof motor.
B. The following manufacturers are acceptable provided their products meet or exceed these
Specifications and the Contract drawing schedules: Aurora, Peerless or Allis-Chalmers
2.11 JOCKEY PUMP CONTROLLER
A. The electric jockey pump controller shall include a circuit breaker, magnet starter with overloads,
pressure switch, H-O-A selector switch, minimum run timer, dual fused control power transformer,
START pushbutton, two sets of dry form "C" remote alarm contacts for PUMP RUNNING and
NEMA 3R enclosure.
B. The jockey pump controller shall be manufactured by Metron, Firetrol or Master.
2.12 FIRE PUMP REMOTE ALARM PANEL
A. A U.L. listed remote alarm panel shall be provided at a point of constant attendance. Factory-
assembled and wired remote alarm panel complying with UL 508 and requirements in NFPA 20 –
2010 (Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection). The remote alarm panel shall be located
in the Fire Command Room mounted in the wall. Include audible and visible alarms matching fire
pump controller.

B. The alarm circuitry shall consist of fully repetitive alarm circuitry which closes to alarm. It shall
operate at 24 VDC derived from each A.C. input.
C. Audible and visual alarms shall be provided to indicate all of the alarm contacts provided on the fire
pump controller.
D. A momentary Alarm Silence switch shall be provided.
E. Remote Start Pushbutton.
F. Description: Factory-assembles and wired remote alarm panel complying with UL 508 and
requirements in NFPA 20 – 2010 (Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection). The remote
alarm panel shall be located in the Fire Command Room mounted in the wall. Include audible and
visible alarms matching fire pump controller type.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, NEMA Type 4, remote wall mounting type.
a. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard red paint applied to factory-assembled and tested

unit before shipping
2. Features: Include manufacturer’s standard features and the following:
a. Engine / Motor operating condition

b. Loss of line power
c. Phase reversal
d. Low water alarm
2.13 FLOW METERING DEVICE
A. Description: Fire pump flow meter device that will indicate flow reading not less than 175 percent of
fire pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match pipe, tubing, flow meter, fittings and Globe
type (UL / FM) Throttle valve.
1. FMG-Approved Manufacturers as per list.

2. UL-Listed manufacturers as per list.
3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 KPa) minimum.
4. Sensor: Venturi, annubar probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Flow Meter: Compatible with flow sensor, the dial not less than 4-1/2 inches (115 mm) in
diameter or manufacturer’s equivalent size.
6. Permanently Mounted Flow Meter: Suitable for wall mounting with copper tubing to
connect to flow sensor.
7. Portable Flow meter: With two 12 foot (3.7 m) hoses, in carrying case.
2.14 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP (JOCKEY PUMP)
A. Pressure Maintenance Pump – General: Factory assembled and tested pump with electric motor
driver, controller, accessories and specialties. Pump shall include cast iron or stainless steel
casing, bronze or stainless steel impellers, mechanical seals and suction / discharge flanges
machined to ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions unless Class 250 flanges are indicated and
except that connections may be threaded in sizes where flanges are not available.

1. Finish : Manufacturer’s standard colour paint applied to factory

assembled and tested unit before shipping.
2. Nameplate : Complete with capacity, characteristics and other pertinent data.
B. Regenerative Turbine, Pressure Maintenance Pump: Close-coupled type complying with HI 1.1-1.2
and HI 1.3 requirements for regenerative turbine centrifugal pumps, including base.
1. Driver : NEMA MD-1, TEFC, squirrel cage induction motor complying

with NFPA 20 – 2010 (Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire
Protection) and NFPA 70 – 2008 (National Electrical Code). Include
wiring compatible with the controller used.
C. Controller : UL 508, factory assembled, wired and tested, Across-the-line type

for combined automatic and manual operation.
1. Enclosure : UL 508, NEMA 250, Type 4, wall mounted type for field
electrical wiring
a. Finish : Manufacturer’s standard colour paint applied to factory assembled

and tested unit before shipping.
2. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following;
a. Fusible disconnect switch

b. Pressure switch
c. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch
d. Pilot light
e. Running period timer
D. Accessories and Specialties : Match pressure maintenance pump suction and discharge ratings as
required for pump capacity rating. Include the following:
1. Circulation relief valve

2. Suction and discharge pressure gauges
E. Pressure gauges
1. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inch (90 to 115 mm) diameter dial with range of 0 to
300 psig (0 to 2070 KPA) minimum. Include caption “WATER” on dial face.
F. GROUT
1. Description: ASTM C 1107, factory mixed / packaged, dry, hydraulic cement, non-shrink /
non-metallic grout and suitable for interior / exterior applications.
a. Properties: Non-staining, non-corrosive and non-gaseous.

b. Design Mix: 50000 psi (34.5 MPa), 28 days compressive strength.
G. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1. Test and inspect fire pumps with their controllers according to NFPA 20 for certified shop
tests.
2. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to requirements indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended
by manufacturer.
D. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to
pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings or pump suction and discharge.
E. Flow meter shall discharge into atmospheric suction tank. Flow meter loop shall not circulate back
to the pump suction line.
F. Locate fire pump test hose valve header on exterior wall accessible from grade level.
G. Provide piping to, and route discharge from all relief valves and drains to exterior of building and
terminate at a location and in a manner to prevent any damage to surrounding areas.
H. Provide full line size bypass with double-check valve assembly around surge tank and fire pump.
I. Coordinate connection to electrical service.
3.2 INSTRUCTIONS AND START-UP
A. Contractor shall provide for the service of a competent factory-trained supervising agent from the
fire pump manufacturer to inspect the completed installation, start the system and acquaint the
operators with the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment.
3.3 TESTING
A. Perform acceptance and operation testing on entire system in accordance with NFPA 20.
B. Test shall be witnessed the Fire Consultant and DCD.
C. A field performance characteristic curve shall be produced and compared for verification to the
factory performance curve.
D. Submit verification of test results to Architect/Engineer and include within operation and
maintenance manual.
E. Check, align, lubricate and certify pumps per NFPA 20 prior to startup. Notify Owner 48 hours in
advance of alignment check.
3.4 WARRANTY
A. The complete system shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials or Workmanship
under normal use and service for a period of one year after date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 22 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
26.
B. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish starters for Plumbing Work. Motor starters shall be
provided in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. Some motors furnished in mechanical
equipment rooms shall have starters furnished and installed as part of Division 26 (as per
Specification Section 26 29 14, Motor Starters). Coordinate with Division 26.
22 05 13 Common Motors Requirements for Plumbing Equipment’s Rev.00 Page 1 of 10

9. NEMA RV 3 - Application and Installation Guidelines for Flexible and Liquid tight Flexible
Locations.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer.

22 05 13 Common Motors Requirements for Plumbing Equipment’s Page 2 of 10
3. Rated volts.
10. Service factor.
1. NEMA frame size.

4. Time rating.
0% load.
1. No load amperes.
2. Safe stall time.
0% load.



the Contract price.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
enclosure type.

I. All air handling unit motor(s) with single and fan array arrangements, exhaust fan motors,
chilled and hot water pump motors shall be compatible with variable frequency drive
controllers. Equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with VFD manufacturer to ensure
compatibility. Characteristics of motors furnished on equipment shall be furnished to VFD
manufacturer for review, prior to installing motor on equipment. VFD’s shall be furnished with
driven equipment and shall be run tested as an equipment unit at factory prior to shipment.
Submit run test report prior to shipping. F.O.B. of motors to factory shall be by the equipment
manufacturer.
J. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specified or noted otherwise on the
K. Motors ¼ to ¾ hp shall be Subtype II and meet the minimum requirements of EPAct92 for
L. Motors 1 to 200 hp shall be Subtype I and meet the minimum requirements of NEMA Table


characteristics.

motors.

data.
L. Bearings:

supplied.
2.7 RATING

B. Voltage:

Table below.

1/6 – 1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35
½ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15
¾ 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15
1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15
1.5-150 and above 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
150
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type.
B. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers shall be permanent split capacitor
type.
C. Single-phase motors for fans shall be capacitor start, capacitor run type.
D. Motors located in exterior locations and in direct drive axial fans, roll filters, humidifiers and
draw-through air units shall be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-sealed type.
3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 TESTING

DATE
SHEET OF
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NO.
HP , FLA , LOCATION

INSULATION CLASS
MEASURED CONDITIONS

SECTION 22 05 17
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
2.1 SUMMARY
1. Sleeves.
5. Grout.
2.1 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES

22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing piping, Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.
3. Metraflex Company (The).
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5. Proco Products, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling


match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

sleeves.

system.

level.
ring is specified.



system
system.
system
system.


SECTION 22 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Water meters.
2. Calibrated balance valves.
4. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
5. Piping pressure and temperature test plugs.
1. Division 22 11 16 Section " Domestic Water Piping "

2. Division 22 11 19 Section " Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
3. Division 22 11 23 Section " Domestic Pumps".
4. Division 22 14 29 Section "Sump Pumps".
D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

1. B40.100-2013 Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
2. B40.200-2008 Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading
E. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

1. C700-2015 Cold Water Meters, Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case
2. C701-2015 Cold Water Meters-Turbine Type, for Customer Service
3. C702-20115 Cold Water Meters – Compound Type
4. C707-2010 (R2016) Encoder-Type Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water Meters
22 05 19 - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 7

F. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. C2–2017 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
G. International Code Council (ICC):

1. IPC-2018 International Plumbing Code
H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 70–2020 National Electrical Code (NEC)
I. NSF International (NSF):

1. 61-2019 Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects
2. 372-2016 Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content
1.2 SUBMITTALS
gage.
D. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1
1. Water meters.
2. Calibrated balance valves.
4. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
5. Piping pressure and temperature test plugs.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 DOMESTIC WATER METER AND IRRIGATION DEDUCT WATER METER
B. Potable water services meter shall be provided as shown in the drawings, where DEWA water
meters are not available. The Water meter shall be of Electronic type smart meters complying with
DEWA standards and shall be possible to interface with BMS for monitoring. Dedicated Billing
software shall be provided in the BMS PC for Billing.
C. The Potable Water meter shall be of multi jet Electronic type suitable for Hot & Cold water
application with maximum temperature up to 90°C. The Meter shall be available in different sizes
varying from DN 15 to DN 150 based on location of use. The Meter shall consist of a rotatable
Electronic counter with the optical interface which enclosed in a Housing made of Brass and a multi
jet mechanical flow measurement unit made of plastic. The meter Housing shall be provided with
the external threaded end for inlet and out let pipe connection according to ISO228 and shall be
provided with necessary accessories (union, seals, nuts and washers) for the poper installation with
potable water piping network. The Meter shall be provided with M-Bus communication protocol for
the remote reading and Billing via software on the BMS system. The Meter shall be proved with the
following features and Technical specifications:
Features:
The following minimum features shall be included in the meters:

• Available with either M-Bus communication protocol for remote reading.

• Electronic sensor control for flow rate recording
• Lithium battery, lifetime 10 years
• Optical interface included as standard
• Adjustable reading date for billing
• Rotatable integrator
• Single-line 7-digit display for easy reading
• BMS interface for Billing and capable of detecting water leakage by billing trend and give an
alarm in case of alarm and over consumption. ( to be coordinated with BMS)
Specifications:
Medium :Potable water

Medium temperature : 0…90°C
Ambient temperature : 0…55°C
Storage temperature : -20…55°C
Operating pressure : DN15: max. 10bar
DN20-40: max. 16bar
Protection class : IP54
Measuring process : Fully electronic compact water
meter with impeller scanning and multijet volume measurement
Display : LCD, 7-digit
Measuring : Units m³/h, l/h, m³, l
Environmental class :C
Battery lifetime :10 years
Interfaces : Optical With M-Bus Communication protocol for remote reading.
Sizing
• water meters should be selected in such a way that permanent system flow rates are between
transition flow rate (Q2) and permanent flow rate (Q3)
• The flow rate shall not drop below minimum flow rate (Q1) and shall not exceed overload flow
rate (Q4)
• Maximum short term flow rate may be reached for not more than 15 minutes per day
Function
Electronic Counter:
• The electronic counter (or simply ‘counter’) shall contain circuits for recording the flow and
displaying data. It shall be permanently fixed to the flow sensor but can be rotated for better
readability.
• The meter shall read from a single line seven-digit display with units and symbols. A push button
shall provide control of various display loops. All failures and faults shall be recorded auto-
matically and displayed on the LCD screen. For protection all relevant data is saved in a volatile
memory. This memory saves measured values, device parameters and types of error at regular
intervals.
Flow Sensor:
• The multijet technology of the flow sensor combines high measuring accuracy with long term
stability. The impeller is connected to the counter by inductive sensing.
Power Supply:
• Lithium battery 3.0V DC with 10 year nominal lifetime.
Interfaces:
• Water meters shall be equipped with a ZVEI optical interface for communication and testing as
standard. And additionally have an M-Bus interface on board as standard.
D. The measuring element shall consist of the transmission coupling, measuring element insert, rotor,
inlet and outlet straightening vanes with nose cones, and calibration ring assembly. The register
and measuring element shall be designed and constructed so that they may be removed without
removing the meter housing from the installation. Meters shall be designed for maximum operating
temperature of 120 degrees F and a maximum operating pressure of 150 PSI.
E. Meter housing shall be cast bronze construction. Nose cone, straightening vanes and rotor shall
be thermoplastic construction. Rotor thrust bearings shall be sapphire jewels and rotor bearing
pivots shall be 316 stainless steel. Register lid and shroud shall be thermoplastic and bronze and
trim shall be stainless steel.
F. Transmission coupling between measuring element and meter register shall be ceramic magnetic
direct drive.
G. Register shall be a straight-reading odometer-type totalization display, 360 degree test circle with
center sweep hand and flow finder to detect leaks. Register gearing shall consist of self-lubricating
thermoplastic gears all permanently sealed. Registration for meters less than 6" shall be calibrated
for 100,000,000 gallons @ 100 gallons/sweep hand revolution. Registration for meters 6" and
larger shall be calibrated for 1,000,000,000 gallons @ 1,000 gallons/sweep hand revolution.
H. Register shall be installed using either tamper detection seal wire screws or TORX tamper resistant
seal screws. A tamper resistant calibration plug seal shall also be provided to protect from
unauthorized personnel.
I. Meters shall be provided with an integral 316 stainless steel strainer manufactured and installed into
its inlet end complete with a removable cover plate which will permit easy access to the strainer for
routine cleaning.
J. Provide remote readout device if meter is installed greater than 5’-0” above finished floor. Mount
remote readout device on wall at 5’-0” above finished floor.
K. Insulation: Removable closed cell insulation, preformed to match meter housing.
L. See Plumbing Equipment Schedules for specific performance requirements.
2.2 CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVES
A. Pre-Set Balance Feature. Valves to be designed to allow Installing Contractor to pre-set balance
points for proportional system balance prior to system start-up in accordance with scheduled flow
rates.
B. Valve Design and Construction. All valves 1/2" to 3" pipe size to be of bronze body/brass ball
construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves to have differential pressure read-
out ports across valve seat area. Read-out ports to be fitted with internal EPT insert and check
valve. Valve bodies to have 1/4" NPT tapped rain/purge port.Valves to have memory stop feature to
allow valve to be closed for service and then reopened to set point without disturbing balance
position.All valves to have calibrated name plate to assure specific valve settings.Valves to be leak-
tight at full rated working pressure.
C. Valves 4" pipe size to be of cast iron body/brass vane construction with differential pressure read-
out ports fitted with internal EPT insert and check valve.
D. Preformed Insulation. All vales to be provided with molded insulation to permit access for balance
and read-out.
E. Design Pressure/Temperature.
1. 1/2" - 3" NPT connections 300 psig to 250 deg. F.

2. 1/2" and 3/4" Sweat connections 200 psig at 250 deg. F.
3. 4" flanged connections 125 psig at 250 deg. F.
F. Calibrated balance valves to be ITT Bell and Gossett Model CB or equivalent.
2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type, bottom
connection, liquid-filled.
B. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
D. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi.

2. All fluids: 2 times operating pressure.
2.4 PRESSURE GAUGE ACCESSORIES
A. Syphon: 1/4-inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each end.
B. Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc. Disc material
shall be suitable for fluid served and rated pressure. Provide extension for use on insulated
systems.
2.5 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range span.
B. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:

1. Domestic and Laboratory Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 115
deg C with 1-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold, Laboratory Cold, and Tepid Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale
divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions).
2.6 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of
1.5 percent of range span.
B. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 115 deg C with 1-
degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C
with 1-degree scale divisions).
3. Hot Water: 30 to 300 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 150 deg C with 1-degree scale
divisions).
4. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 70 deg C with 1-
5. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C with 1-
6. Steam and Condensate: 50 to 400 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (10 to 205 deg C with
1-degree scale divisions).
2.7 MERCURY-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches
long.
B. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
C. Tube: Red reading, mercury filled, magnifying lens.
D. Scale: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.
2.8 GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Standard: ASME B400.200.
B. Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches
long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red reading, magnifying lens, with non-mercury fluid.
E. Scale: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.
2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design
pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently
fastened to well and cap.
2.10 PIPING PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing valve-type
core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a dial-type thermometer or
pressure gage. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded cap with retention chain and body of
length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure rating shall be 500 psig.
B. Core Material: Conform to the following for fluid and temperature range:
1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to 93 deg C): Neoprene.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
3.2 THERMOMETERS
A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer standing on floor.
B. Install as shown on plans and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in vertical position. Fill
well with oil or graphite and secure cap. Provide extension on insulated systems. Install in socket
extending to center of pipe.
3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
position.


3.4 TEST PLUGS
3.5 FLOW MEASURING METERS
A. Install where shown on plans and elsewhere as indicated. Provide manufacturer-recommended

upstream and downstream straight distances.
B. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable
position. Maintain manufacturer-recommended minimum upstream and downstream distances.
C. Window Flow Meters: Install in vertical upward position with impact tube mounted in bushing
centered on pipe with 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of straight
unrestricted piping for 1-1/4 inches and smaller, 20 pipe diameters upstream and 10 pipe diameters
downstream for 1-1/2 inches and larger. Calibrate meter after installation in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Calibrate meter after installation in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Connect meter to EMCS. Coordinate with controls contractor and provide all necessary
interconnections for accurate transmission of data.

SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1. Gate Valve - Threaded.

2. Gate Valve – Flanged.
3. Ball Valve – Threaded (lever operated)
4. Strainers
5. Drain Valves
6. Non Return Valves
7. Ball Float operated valves. (Delayed action)
8. Vent Cocks
9. Pressure Reducing Valves
10. Safety Valve
11. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves.
12. Thermostatic mixing valves.
13. Chain Wheel Actuators
1. Division 22 11 16 Section " Domestic Water Piping "

2. Division 22 11 19 Section " Domestic Water Piping Specialties"
3. Division 22 11 23 Section " Domestic Pumps".
4. Division 22 14 29 Section "Sump Pumps".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1. CWP: Cold working pressure.

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
4. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
5. SWP: Steam working pressure.
6. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
7. WRAS: Water regulations Advisory Scheme.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application.
Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties;
and accessories. All the types of valves to be submitted as samples for approval.
A. British Standard Compliance: BS 8558, EN 1092-1, EN62552, EN1984 ISO 7121.
B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block checks valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
hand wheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.7 APPLICATION
1. Provide Class 125 or equal valves for all pipe sizes. All plumbing valves shall be
bronze body valves approved with European standards.
2. Provide Class 125 or equal valves for pipe sizes DN 50 and smaller except where
noted otherwise.
3. Provide Class 250 or equal valves for pipe sizes larger than DN 50.
4. All the valves pressure rating shall be 1 ½ times of the working pressure of the
system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES, GENERAL
A. Refer to "Valve Applications" under “Part 3-Execution” for applications of valves.
B. Bronze Valves: DN 50 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Ferrous Valves: DN 65 and larger with flanged ends or grooved.

D. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for
system pressures and temperatures.
E. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Actuators:
1. Chain wheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in
the "Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
2. Gear Drive: For quarter-turn valves DN 200 and larger.
3. Hand wheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
4. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves DN 150 and smaller, except plug valves.
5. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every
10 plug valves, for each size square plug head.
G. Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
H. Valve Flanges: For cast-iron valves, steel valves, and bronze valves refer to British
Standards.
I. Valve Ends:
1. Threaded: With threads according to British Standard.
J. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.2 GATE VALVE
A. Gate Valve – Flanged (65 and 300 mm): Cast Iron Gate Valves to BS 1171, Non-rising
Stem, Bronze trim, Bolted Bonnet, Flanged Ends, Pressure Rating: PN16, PN25, European
Standards up to 100 mm, Operation: Hand Wheel.
2.3 BALL VALVE
A. Threaded (lever operated) 15 mm to 50 mm: Bronze or DZR copper alloy body, Threaded to
BS-21, Chrome or Nickel plated DZR sphere with full bore flow aperture. PTFE seats and
stem seals, Extended Stem for Chilled Water Application, Lever operated, Pressure rating
PN-20
2.4 BALANCING VALVES
A. 15 mm to 50 mm: Bronze double regulating valve to BS 5154
B. 65 & above: Fixed Orifice Double Regulating Valves to BS7350 Double Regulating Valve
Globe pattern with characterized throttling disc. Ductile Iron body, DZR trim, PTFE Disc
Insert, Fitted with P84 insertion Pressure Test Points, Flanged PN16, 25; Pressure Rating:
PN16, 25. PN-20 to BS7350 non-raising hand wheel, WRAS approved, DZR copper alloy
stem, EPDM stem seal, bronze body, threaded ends
2.5 STRAINERS

A. Strainers: (15 to 50 mm): Bronze Y-Strainers, Stainless Steel Screen (0.75 mm perforation),
Screwed-in Cap, Threaded BS21 taper, Pressure Rating : PN32, WRAS approved.
B. Strainers: (65 to 600 mm): Cast Iron Y-Strainers, Stainless Steel Screen (1.5mm
perforation), Bolted Cap, Flanged ends to PN16, 25, Bosses drilled, tapped & plugged, Cap
drilled, tapped & plugged to accept blow down valve, Pressure Rating : PN16, 25
2.6 DRAIN VALVES
A. Drain Cock for Fan Coil Units (15 to 25 mm): Bronze Drain Taps to BS2879 Type 2, Screw
down angle pattern, Lockshield operation, Inlet threaded male BSP, Outlet ribbed for hose
connection, Pressure Rating : PN10
B. Drain Cock for Pipeline (15 to 25 mm): Bronze Draw-off Ball Valve, Inlet threaded Male
BSP, Outlet with Hose Union, threaded BS21 Taper, Pressure Rating: PN25, Lever
operated, WRAS approved.
2.7 NON RETURN VALVES
A. Non-Return Valves (15 to 50 mm): Bronze Swing Check Valves to BS 5154 Series B, Metal
Disc, Screwed-in Cap, Threaded BS21 Taper, BSI Kitemark approved, Pressure rating:
PN25
B. Non Return Valves (65 to 300 mm): Cast Iron Check Valves, Wafer pattern, Cast Iron Body,
Bronze trim, Resilient Seated (EPDM Body Seat Ring), Stainless Steel Spring, Suitable for
mounting between PN16/ANSI 150 Flanges, Pressure rating:PN16
C. Check Valves (65 to 300 mm): Cast Iron Check Valves to BS EN 1234, Swing pattern,
Cast Iron Body and Cover, Bronze trim, Bolted Cover, Flanged ends to PN16 , Pressure
Rating : PN16
2.8 BALL FLOAT OPERATED VALVES
A. Delayed Action type. Bronze or DZR copper alloy body inlet threaded / flanged. Spindle and
head effectively guided and arranged with stops to engage with valve body and prevent over
travel, linkage fulcrum adjustable relative to vertical plane, securely locked to body tapping
when set screwed plug from access door, float and lever arm. Spin copper float, halves
brazed or welded together with centre sleeve continuity to lever arm for feed and expansion
application use long arm type to close when tank containing 150 mm depth. Copper
canister, gunmetal secondary float galvanized steel support bracket.
2.9 VENT COCKS: (BALL TYPE)
A. Bronze or DZR copper alloy body, chrome plated DZR-Ball PTFE seats and stem seals
blow out proof stem, permanently identified ports in T- configuration level operated.
2.10 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Pilot operated, hydraulically operated, diaphragm type with a low flow by-pass capability.
The low flow bypass capability shall be achieved by using a balanced direct acting PRV as
an integral part of main valve. At very low flows when the main valve is almost completely

closed, to prevent the possibility of cavitations the direct acting valve shall by pass the main
valve and maintain the flow. Pilot connection shall include a strainer. Bronze construction
o
including trim. Diaphragm Buna and rubber for cold, viton for hot water (120 C), DN-50 and
smaller shall be screwed with unions. DN-65 and larger shall be flanged.
2.11 SAFETY VALVES:
A. Safety Valves, Copper Alloy, Single Spring: Material – Bronze or DZR copper alloy body,
Ends- Threaded to BS 21, Spring Type – Single spring loaded, high lift type.
B. Safety Valves , Cast iron, Single Spring: Material – Cast iron body, Ends- Flanged to BS EN
1092-2, spring type – Single spring loaded, high lift type.
2.12 TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES:
A. Combined Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and
complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input
and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief
valve with sensing element that extends into tank.
2.13 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES:
A. General: Manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body. Include
check stop and union on hot and cold water supply inlets, adjustable temperature setting,
and thermometer.
1. Type: Bimetal thermostat, operation and pressure rating 860 kPa minimum.
2. Type: Liquid-filled motor, operation and pressure rating 690 kPa minimum.
3. Comply to all the National Water Supply Authority Regulations / bye laws and building
and plumbing (UK: BS 6700) Regulations.
4. Environmental Conditions
o
a. Ambient Temperature Range: 0-60 C
b. Ambient Humidity Range: 0 – 100% RH
5. Electrical
a. Supply Voltage: 12V AC, through separate transformer, PT100 or PT220.

b. Power Consumption: 6 Watts
c. Electronic Circuitry Protection: By 500mA Quick-blow fuse.
d. Cable Entry: Base threaded to accept 20 mm . conduit.
B. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:
1. Construction
a. Piping, valves, and unions.

b. Piping Component Finish: Rough bronze
c. Base: Gunmetal, nickel plated.
d. Cover Assembly: Aluminium, red textured painted finish, electrical chamber
protected against total immersion and ingress of dust to IP66.
e. Shuttle Connecting Rod and Seats: Stainless steel.

f. Hydraulics and Electronics Separation: Stainless steel flexible bellows master

seal plus three auxiliary “O” seals.
g. Bleed Hole: Provides early warning in the event of bellows or “O” seal
deterioration.
h. Electronics: Plug in solid state microelectronic circuitry.
i. Motor: Low inertia servo motor with reduction gearbox protected by a current
limiting circuit.
j. Temperature Probe Assembly: Interchangeable su-assembly incorporating a
highly sensitive thermistor encapsulated in a rugged brass housing.
k. Temperature Display: Red, 2 digit LED display indicating outlet temperature.
2. Connections and Fixing
a. Connections: Inlet and outlet 32 mm BSP standard.

b. Configuration: Hot inlet on right, cold on left, top outlet
c. Fixing: Designed for connection to exposed pipework, which must be
adequately supported as the controller is not secured to any wall surface.
3. Interface
a. Allows input / output capability for remote monitoring
C. Photographic-Process, Thermostatic Water Mixing-Valve Assemblies: Factory-fabricated,

thermostatic water mixing valve; volume-control valve; unions; check stops; thermometer;
atmospheric vacuum breaker; piping; escutcheons; and panel enclosure.
1. Sizes and Arrangement: Controls mounted shall be in front of panel cover with
factory-or field-installed inlet valves. Assembly shall control outlet-water temperature
o
within 0.25 C throughout temperature and flow operating ranges.
2. Panel: Stainless-steel box
3. Panel Mounting: Recessed
4. Maximum Pressure – 1000 kPa
5. Maximum Operating Pressure – 7000 kPa
o o
6. Blend water temperature range – 30 C to 50 C
7. Flow shall be as per system requirement.
2.14 CHAIN WHEEL ACTUATORS
A. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.
1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for valve.
2. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.
3. Chain: Hot dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling.
C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material
composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
G. Do not pressurize the valves under closed condition.
A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not
indicated, use the following:
1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service: Ball pr butterfly valves.
3. Pump Discharge: Spring loaded, lift disc check valves.
B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of
valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C. Domestic Hot-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Gate Valve, DN 50 and Smaller

2. Ball Valves, DN 50 and Smaller
3. Balancing Valve DN 65 & larger.
4. Swing Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller.
5. Swing Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger.
6. Strainers DN 50 and Smaller.
7. Strainers DN 65 and Larger.
8. Drain Valves.
9. Vent Cocks.
10. Chain Wheel Actuators.
D. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1. Gate Valve, DN 50 and Smaller

2. Ball Valves, DN 50 and Smaller.
3. Swing Check Valves, DN 50 and Smaller.
4. Swing Check Valves, DN 65 and Larger.
5. Double regulating valves DN 50 and smaller.
6. Double Regulating Valves DN 65 and larger.
7. Strainers.
8. Drain Valves
9. Pressure Reducing Valves where pressure exceeds 3.0 Bar.
10. Ball Float Operated Valves.
11. Safety Valves
12. Thermostatic Mixing Valve.

E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1. For Steel Piping, DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
2. For Steel Piping, DN 65 and larger: Flanged ends, Class 150 or Class 300
F. Contractor to verify operating pressure on system to determine pressure class of valves,

flanges and accessories.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
F. Install chainwheel operators on valves DN 100 and larger and more than 2400 mm above
floor. Extend chains to 1520 mm above finished floor elevation.
G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts
according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service
but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION
22 05 23

SECTION 22 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Hangers, supports, and anchors for Plumbing equipment, tanks, and piping systems.
2. Supplementary steel for support or attachment of Water tanks, equipment, and piping
to general construction elements of the project.
1.3 REFERENCES
D. IBC: International Building Code
E. IPC: International Plumbing code
F. IOP: Institute of Plumbing
G. IFGC: International Fuel Gas Code
H. ASPE: American Society of Plumbing Engineers
I. ASTM F 708
J. ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.
K. ANSI/AMSE B31.9 – Building Services Piping.
L. MSS SP-58 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
M. MSS SP-69 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application.
22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing piping and Equipment’s Rev.00 Page 1 of 12
N. MSS SP-89 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Supports."
1.5 SUBMITTALS
it.
shall be furnished.
same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
installation.
steel channel.
section.

channel.

on the channel.
guides.
acoustic guides.
riser clamps.
2.4 WALL SUPPORTS


used.


grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
to AWS D-1.1.


A.
Up to 15 1.8 2.4 1.2 1.8 - -
20 2.4 3.0 1.4 2.1 - -
25 2.4 3.0 1.8 2.4 - -
32 2.7 3.0 2.4 3.0 - -
40 3.0 3.6 2.4 3.0 - -
50 3.0 3.6 2.7 3.0 1.8 1.8
65 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 - -
80 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 2.7 2.7
100 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 2.7 2.7
125 3.7 5.4 3.0 3.6
150 4.5 5.4 3.6 4.2 3.7 3.7
200 5.6 6.0 - - 3.7 3.7
250 5.0 6.0 - - 4.5 5.4
300 6.1 10.0 - - 8.0 10.0
350 10.0 12.0 - - - -
400 10.5 12.6 - - - -
450 11.0 13.2 - - - -
500 12.0 14.4 - - - -
600 14.0 16.8 - - - -
700 - - - -
800 - - - -
900 - - - -
1000 - - - -

Class O,B,C Type
Up to 10 - 0.6 0.3 0.45
15 - 0.6 0.4 0.6
20 - 0.65 0.4 0.6

Class O,B,C Type
25 - 0.75 0.4 0.6
32 - 0.8 0.45 0.7
40 - 0.9 0.45 0.7
50 1.1 1.2 0.55 0.85
65 1.2 1.4 0.55 0.85
80 1.4 1.5 0.6 0.9
100 1.5 1.7 0.7 1.1
125 1.7 1.9 - -
150 1.8 2.1 - -
175 2.0 2.3 - -
200 2.1 2.5 - -
225 2.3 2.7 - -
250 2.4 2.9 - -
300 2.6 3.1 - -

Cl OBC T
350 2.9 3.4 - -
400 3.1 3.7 - -
450 3.4 3.7 - -
Above 450 3.7 3.7 - -
couplings.
tabulated.
building structure.
top of inserts.


K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to British Standards.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90 : 305 mm long and 1.22 mm thick.

b. DN100 : 305 mm long and thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 : 457 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 : 610 mm long and 1.91 mm thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 : 610 mm long and 2.67 mm thick.
4. Pipes DN200 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

equipment supports.
the following:
3.6 ADJUSTING

3.7 PAINTING
"Painting."
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the Vibration isolation and seismic control for plumbing equipment,
tanks, and piping systems.
B. This Section includes the following mechanical vibration isolation materials and their
installation:
1. Inertia bases.
2. Vibration isolators.
3. Flexible Connectors.
4. Seismic Restraint Devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
B. IBC: International Building Code.
C. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
D. OSHPD: Office of State-wide Health Planning and Development for the State ofCali-
fornia.

22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Plumbing Piping & Equipment, Rev.00 Page 1 of 5


quiredby IBC 2009.

2009.
5. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels.
6. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of
Noise Sources.
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping.
B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as recommended by manufac-

turer.
C. Consider upper floor locations critical unless otherwise indicated.
D. Use concrete inertia bases for motors in excess of 40 hp and on base mounted pumps
over 10 hp.
E. Maintain room maximum sound levels, in Noise Criteria (NC) as defined by ANSI S1.8.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC, BS, IPC and ASPE unless re-
quirements in this Section are more stringent.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing
maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred
to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals
based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear
and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over
pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut
to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.
1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
B. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated
top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color- code
or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

eration.
C. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

eration.
2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applica-
tions shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdic-
tion.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they
will be subjected.
B. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of
slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one
end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with
corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
C. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections to hanger rod.
D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for
rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc- coated
steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor
bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum
length of eight times diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. The Contractor shall provide vibration isolation to all distributed piped services following
the guidelines tabulated below which refers to the use of Resilient Inserts (RI) within the
pipe clamps, neoprene hangers (NH), spring hangers (SH) and spring mounts (SM).
Isolator Static
Service Pipe Diameter
Types Deflection
Less than 50 mm NH, NM 8 mm
Domestic Water
More than 150 mm SH, SM 25 mm
Less than 50 mm NH, NM 8 mm
Heat Recovery
More than 150 mm SH, SM 25 mm
Rainwater All RI Not required
Rainwater, Sprinkler, Dry
Riser / Vent, Hose Reel & All RI Not required
Sanitary Sewer
B. Equipment Restraints:
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
C. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127 and NFPA 13.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a
maximum of 80 feet o.c.

D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to au-
thorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to pro-
vide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to struc-

ture at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
G. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during
coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embed-
ded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons,
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-
duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural el-
ement to which anchor is to be fastened.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exteri-
or applications.
A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sec-
tions or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connec-
tions terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural el-
ement from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment.Comply with
requirements in Division 22 Section "Water based fire suppression System" for piping
flexible connections.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
2. Stencils
3. Pipe labels.
4. Valve tags.
5. Ceiling tacks
A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
C. International Plumbing Code.
D. ASTM E 84 Surface burning characteristics of building materials (also NFPA 255 and UL 723)
1.5 SUBMITTALS

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for Plumbing
22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Rev.00 Page 1 of 8
for each label.
accordingly.


1.9 SEQUENCING


1.11 COORDINATION

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION GENERAL
indicated. All labels shall have background colors matched with specific service
designation.
3. Provide valve tag numbers on plumbing valves

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanicalengraving,
1/16 inch thick.
2. Letter Color: Black
3. Background Color: White
4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but notless than 1
by 3 inches.
6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and withsubstrate

1. Material: MS-215 Max-Tek with printed graphics protected by a chemical andUV resistant
by 3 inches.
6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and withsubstrate.
2.3 STENCILS
high letters.
high letters.
letters.
letters.
A13.1.

high letters.
high letters.
letters.
letters.
A13.1.
environment.
surface.
insulation)
1-1/8 inch to 2-1/4 MS970-B 8 inches 3/4 inch Coil-on
inch
2-3/8 inch to 3-1/4 MS970-C 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
inch
3-3/8 inch to 4-1/2 MS970-D 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
inch
4-5/8 inch to 5-7/8 MS970-E 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
inch

Service Lettering Color Background Color

Domestic Cold Water Piping White Green
Domestic Hot Water Piping White Green
Sanitary Waste Piping White Green
Sanitary Vent Piping White Green
Storm Water Piping White Green
Natural Gas Piping Black Yellow
Compressed Air Piping White Blue
the pipe surface.
insulation)
inch
2-1/2 inch to 4-3/4 MS995-D 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Wraparound
inch

2.6 VALVE TAGS
numbers.

2. Background Color: To match pipe label color by system.
3. Letter Color: Either white or black for best contrast to background color.
2.7 CEILING TACKS
shank.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION

3.3 INSTALLATION

equipment.
enclosures.
F. Mark location of equipment or valves located above ceilings with identifying "buttons" to help in
3.4 PROTECTION

SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation" for insulation for Pipes and Valves.
4. Division 22 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks and other equipment.
5. Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field applied jackets.
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation Rev.00 Page 1 of 9


A. All insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM standards. Insulation meeting British standard
specifications and codes of practice will be considered if properly submitted.
B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer and cement material
containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less / Tested to BS 476 Part 6 & 7 and have to achieve a Class ‘O’
rating.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke
developed rating of 150 or less/ Tested to BS 476 Part 6 & 7 and have to achieve a
Class ‘O’ rating.
3. Insulation must comply with NFPA 90A and 90B, to be tested to ISO 5659 for smoke
& toxicity.
C. In addition to complying with the relevant standards, all insulating material shall be free from
asbestos.
D. Insulating materials shall be acceptable only if they are equal to or better than the grades or
classes of fire resistance as follows:
1. BS 476, Part 4, (Noncombustible grade.)
2. BS 476, Part 5 Class P, (Not easily ignitable.)
3. BS 476, Part 6, (Fire Propagation Index a maximum of 12.6)
4. BS 476, Part 7, Class 1, (Surface spread of flame.)
E. All insulation finishes and coverings shall be classified as Class 1 surface spread when tested
in accordance with BS 476, Part 7.
F. All adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers shall be classified as Class 1 surface
spread when tested in accordance with BS 476, part 7.
G. Insulation of insulating materials shall be carried out per BS 5970 and BS 5422.

A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
type, grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for insulation application.
C. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping
that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials
with aluglass finish. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for
sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. Thermal Conductivity : ASTMC5:18:1998, at mean temperature 25oC = 0.035 w/mk
and mean temperature 36 oC = 0.037 w/mk. Density = 45 to 60 kg/m3, water vapour
permeability : 0.09µgm/N.h, noise reduction : Up to 32 db(A).
B. Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation: pre-formed fiber glass rigid sections with factory applied
aluglass facing of density 64 kg/m³ or 80 kg/m3 having K value not exceeding 0.032 W/m.K at
25 °C. Aluminum cladding should be done for the pipes plant rooms/outside/exposed.
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous

calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
1. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2. Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
D. Fungicidal Protective Coatings
1. Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over external surfaces of insulated
chilled water pipes and exterior surfaces of insulated ductwork.
2. Coating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.2 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicate sizes. 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.

B. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:

1. Stainless Steel: Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.
C. Wire: 1.6 mm, soft annealed, stainless.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet
or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger,
support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75 mm wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges
of strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing
lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor
retarder.
4. Vapor Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50 mm below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
S. Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor retarder mastic where
floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.

3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe
surface.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts,
plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
pipe surface.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation
and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access
to stainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
3.5 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 300 mm intervals
and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm.
Secure inner layer with 1.6 mm, soft annealed, stainless steel wire spaced at 300 mm
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless steel bands at 300 mm intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral fiber, hydraulic setting cement to surface of installed
insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of
glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging
adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same
material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.

1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without
disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
3.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50 mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6 mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.

B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40 mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75 mm wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor retarder mastic.
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 25 mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Seal with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50 mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands
300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass cloth jacket as specified
in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.

3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Domestic hot water supply and return and cooled cold water supply.
1. Operating Temperature: 15 to 60 deg C.
2. Insulation Material: Fiber glass. Pipe section with algulass facing.
3. Insulation Thickness: 25mm
4. Vapor Retarder Required: NO. Insulation shall be provided with aluglass facing.
5. Exposed pipe and plant room piping field applied jacket: Aluminum
B. Service: Condenser Water piping.

1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C
2. Insulation Material: Closed Cell. with aluglass finish.
3. Insulation Thickness: 25mm
4. Exposed Pipe Field Applied Jacket: Aluminium.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: NO. Insulation shall be provided with aluglass facing.
C. Service: Diesel engine exhaust and muffler.
1. Operating Temperature: 454 deg C and lower.

3. Insulation Thickness:
a. Steel Pipe:100 mm, 80Kg/m³.

b. Muffler:100 mm. 80Kg/m³.
4. Field Applied Jacket: 0.9 mm Aluminum.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: No. (with Aluglass facing).
END OF SECTION
22 07 19

SECTION 22 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. Division 22 Plumbing Sections
1.3 SUMMARY

Contract price.
C. Plumbing Systems to be commissioned include the following:
1. Sanitary Waste and Vent
2. Roof and Storm Drainage
3. Domestic Water Booster Pumps
4. Domestic Water Storage/Break Tank
5. Domestic Water Heaters
6. Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pumps
7. Domestic Cold Water Distribution
8. Domestic Hot Water Distribution
22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing, Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

9. LPG Distribution
10. Plumbing Fixtures
standards.
D. CIBSE Commissioning codes for Plumbing Systems
E. BSRIA Guide BG2 /2010 for commissioning of water System.
1.5 DEFINITIONS






1.6 SUBMITTALS
systems:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION


Tests procedures.

tests.
Owner for review.

equipment.


B. Warranty Phase:

Specifications.

testing.
3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 TESTING

Performance test.
discretion.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR WATER SUPPLY (HOT AND COLD)
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to
end of system. Check the flow against approved pump flow rate.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hot and cold water systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Pressure test all the circuits 1.5 times the maximum working pressure.
4. Balance the hot water system and check the flow rates at all draw off points.
5. Adjust the pressure maintaining valves (systems).
6. Set system mixing valves are open to achieve the hot water leaving temp.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
9. Complete adjustment of all controls, including operating times, set points, etc. to the initial
operating values, linked controls.
10. Check the operation of all the limit switch contacts, levels, etc.
11. Check the programming cycles (turning off at night, shedding load, limitations, etc.)
12. The following shall be checked in particular.
a. The temperatures reached (on leaving the domestic hot water production point, on
arriving in the rooms).
b. The hot and cold water pressures.
c. The flow rates.
d. The noise levels.
e. The absence of condensation on the pipework.
f. The proper operation of the regulation devices and of the linked controls
g. The absence of leaks
h. The quality of the adjustments and of the finishes.
D. This list is not exhaustive and the engineers may require additional tests to those specified
initially in the test programme if he considers it necessary.
E. If the discrepancies between the measured values and the contractual nominal values are
beyond the permissible technical tolerances, the Contractor shall immediately implement all
corrective measures to achieve the expected results.
3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR WATER STORAGE TANKS TESTING
A. Clean and disinfect potable-water storage tanks.
B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:
1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.
2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
3. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L of chlorine. Isolate
tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L of chlorine. Isolate
tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
4. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not
present in water coming from tank.
5. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows
evidence of contamination.
C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
D. Commissioning:
1. Perform the following final checks before filling:
b. Verify that tests of tanks are complete.

c. Verify that tests of piping systems are complete.
d. Check piping connections for leaks.
e. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
f. Check for proper seismic restraints.
E. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to
operating level.
3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR HOT AND COLD WATER FLUSING AND DISINFECTION
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow

of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
B. Cleaning:
1. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
a. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
b. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed as per BS6700 and method
statement, procedures described in either or as described below:
c. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
d. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 mg/L of
chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
e. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
f. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the engineer. Repeat procedures if
biological examination shows contamination.
g. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
h. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work
progresses.

C. Flushing And Disinfection:
1. Flushing
a. Every new water service, cistern, distributing pipe, hot water cylinder or other
appliance such a service shall be thoroughly flushed with drinking water before being
taken into use. Where a system is not brought into use immediately after
commissioning and it has not been flushed at regular intervals (up to 30 days
depending on the characteristics of the water), it shall be disinfected before bringing
into use.
2. Safety
a. Systems, or parts of systems, shall not be used during the disinfection procedure and
all outlets shall be marked with “DISINFECTION IN PROGRESS, DO NOT USE’.
b. To avoid the generation of toxic fumes, no other chemicals, like toilet cleansers shall
be added to the water until disinfection is complete.
c. All building users shall be informed of the disinfection before it takes place. This
includes those users not normally in attendance during working hours, i.e. cleaners
and security guards.
3. Disinfection Procedure
a. The system to be disinfected shall be thoroughly flushed prior to commencement of
the disinfection procedure.
4. Methods Using Chlorine as a Disinfectant
a. The system shall be filled with chlorinated water at an initial concentration of 50mg/l
(50 p.p.m) for a contact period of 1h. If the free residual chlorine measured at the end
of the contact period is less than 30 mg/l (30 p.p.m) the disinfection process shall be
repeated.
b. After successful chlorination, the system shall be immediately drained and thoroughly
flushed with clean water. Flushing shall continue until the free residual chlorine is at
the level present in the drinking water supplied.
5. Post Disinfection
a. After flushing, a sample(s) for bacteriological analysis shall be taken, and analysed,
under the supervision of microbiologist, who shall also determine the number and
method of collection of samples.
b. Where a bacteriological analysis of the samples indicates that adequate disinfection

has not been achieved, the installation shall be flushed, re-disinfected and further
samples taken.
c. Provided there is no suspicion that the system has been fouled by sewage, drainage
or animals prior to disinfection, the installation may be put into service before the result
of the bacteriological analysis is known.
d. For supply pipes (including unvented hot water systems off the supply pipe) and after
flushing, disinfectant solution should be injected through a properly installed injection
point at the upstream end of the supply pipe, until the disinfectant solution discharged
at the downstream end of the pipeline is equal to the initial concentration; the contact
period then commences.
e. In gravity distribution systems within buildings, one method of introducing disinfectant

solution is as follows:
f. After flushing, the system should be filled with water and the servicing valve on the
supply to the cistern closed. The capacity of the cistern should be assessed and a
calculated quantity of disinfectant solution of known strength should be added to the
cistern to give the initial concentration of disinfectant solution in the cistern. The
disinfectant solution should be drawn around the system by successively opening
each draw-off fitting, working away from the cistern, and closing it when disinfectant
solution at the initial concentration is discharged, (as determined by using colorimetric
methods, where possible). The cistern should be refilled and disinfected as above as
necessary during this operation, maintaining the initial concentration of disinfectant
solution in the cistern at all times. The contact time should commence when the entire
system is filled with disinfectant solution, including the cistern, up to overflow level.
g. Irrespective of the method of disinfection, the contact time commences when the
entire system, including the cistern up to overflow level, is full of disinfectant solution at
the required initial concentration.
3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM
A. Water Test
1. There is no justification for a water test to be applied to the whole of the plumbing
system. The part of the system mainly at risk is that below the lowest sanitary appliance
and this may be tested by inserting a test plug in the lower end of the pipe and filling the
pipe with water up to the flood level of the lowest sanitary appliance, provided that the
static head does not exceed 6m.
B. Performance Tests
1. General: All appliances, whether discharged singly or in groups, should drain speedily,
quietly and completely to ensure that adequate water seals are retained during peak
working conditions the tests described below should be carried out. After each test a
minimum of 25 mm of water seal should be retained in every trap. Each test should be
repeated at least three times, the trap or traps being recharged before each test. The
maximum loss of seal in any one test, measured by a dip stick or small diameter
transparent tube, should be taken as the significant result.
2. Tests for self-siphonage and induced siphonage in branch discharge pipes. To test for
the effect of self-siphonage the appliance should be filled to overflowing level and
discharged by removing the plug; WC pans should be flushed. The seal remaining in the
trap should be measured when the discharge has finished. Ranges of appliances,
connected to a common discharge pipe should also be tested for induced siphonage in a
similar way. The number of appliances which should be discharged together is given in
table. The seal remaining in all the traps should be measured at the end of the
discharge. The worst conditions usually occur when the appliances at the upstream end
of the discharge pipe are discharged.
Table: Number of sanitary appliances to be discharged for performance testing

Type of Number of Number of appliances to be discharged

use appliances of simultaneously
each kind on the
stack 9 litres WC Wash Basin Kitchen Sink
1 to 9 1 1 1
10 to 24 1 1 2
25 to 35 1 2 3
Domestic 36 to 50 2 2 3
51 to 65 2 2 4
1 to 9 1 1
10 to 18 1 2
19 to 26 2 2
Commercial 27 to 52 2 3
or Public 53 to 78 3 4
79 to 100 3 5
1 to 4 1 1
5 to 9 1 2
10 to 13 2 2
14 to 26 2 3
27 to 39 3 4
40 to 50 3 5
Congested
51 to 55 4 5
56 to 70 4 6
71 to 78 4 7
79 to 90 5 7
90 to 100 5 8
Note: These figures are based on a criterion of satisfactory service of 99%. In practice, for
systems serving mixed appliances, this slightly overestimates the probable hydraulic
loading. The flow load from urinals, spray tap basins and showers is usually small in most
mixed systems; hence these appliances need not normally be discharged.
3. Test for induced siphonage and back pressure in discharge stacks. A selection of
appliances connected to the stack should be discharged simultaneously and the trap and
seal losses due to positive or negative pressures in the stack should be noted. These
selected appliances should normally be close to the top of the stack and on adjacent
floors, as this gives the worst pressure conditions. Table shows the number of
appliances which should be discharged simultaneously.
4. As an example, for a block of flats nine storeys high with the stack serving one WC, one
wash basin, one sink and one bath on each floor, the test would consists of one WC, one
wash basin and one sink being discharged simultaneously on the top floor. Where the
stack served two WCs, two wash basins, two baths and two sinks on each floor, the
discharge test would consist of one WC one wash basin and two sinks. The WC, wash
basin and one sink would be discharged on the top floor and the remaining sink on the
floor immediately below.
5. For the purpose of this test, baths are ignored as their use is spread over a relatively long
period and consequently they do not add materially to the normal peak flow on which
table is based. Where a stack serves baths only.

C. Inspection and Testing of Drainage Works
1. General
a. Site inspections and tests are necessary to ensure that materials and components are
properly installed and that they will adequately fulfill the functional and performance
requirements of the drainage system without creating a health risk or causing a
nuisance.
b. Generally, drainage works are inspected and tested in tow stages; as the work
proceeds and immediately before the works are-handed over upon completion. The
works should be protected during all stages of construction, and the entry of foreign
matter into any part of the system prevented.
2. Testing Sequence
a. First stage testing. Tests should be carried out to locate and remedy any defects in
soundness that may exist at the time of construction. Such tests should take place
immediately before the work is covered up so as to facilitate replacement of any faulty
pipes or pipe fittings or to rectify any joint defect. Inspection of the pipeline will reveal
any defects in the support and bedding.
b. Final Testing. Testing and inspection should take place immediately before handover
when all relevant works have been completed.
3. Pre-test Procedures
a. Safety. Before any tests are applied, attention should be given to the safety of the
operatives and other persons involved in the testing operation. It is essential that
proper means of access should be provided to the area of work and the sides of any
trench or excavation in which work is to be tested adequately supported and free from
hazards.
b. Where a water test is to be applied, drain stoppers and bags should be properly
secured in position and provision made for the final removal of the stopper or bag from
surface level by means of a strong cord attached to the inlet ferrule.
c. Cleansing. All obstructions, debris and superfluous matter should be removed from
sections of pipeline, inspection chambers, manholes, or similar underground
chambers and they should be flushed out before testing. Great care should be taken
when a chemical cleaning agent is used to remove deposits of cement mortar from the
surfaces of benchings and channel inverts. Protective clothing, including gloves and
eye shields, should be provided for operatives using or handling the chemicals,. On
completion of the work, all treated surfaces should be thoroughly hosed down.
4. Checking the bore
a. Before any tests are applied, a disc or ball type profile testing device should be
passed through all drains and private sewers between inspection chambers, manholes
or other suitable points of access and through all accessible branch drains.
5. Witnessing and documentation of tests
a. All tests should be carried out and recorded in the presence of an authorized testing
officer and a record made. A certificate signed and dated by the testing officer should
be issued upon the completion of a satisfactory test. The certificate should indicate
the location and give a brief description of the work. Alternatively, s set of construction
drawings, deposited on site, may be used by the testing officer who should date and
sign the relevant drawing against the section of the work tested and found satisfactory.
Where a public authority has a statutory right to inspect and test drainage works,
sufficient notice should be given to the authority for this to be carried out.
6. Soundness tests for gravity drains and private sewers
a. A water test is generally preferred since it relates very closely to conditions found in
practice. It is also less stringent than an air test but it suffers from the disadvantage of
providing and disposing of large quantities of water. An air test is easier to apply but
results can be affected by small changes in temperature. A change in temperature of
1oC will result in a corresponding change in air pressure of about 38 mm water gauge.
Therefore, if the pressure drop is marginally above that recommended, the pipeline
should not be deemed unsatisfactory on the air test alone.
b. Water Test
1) Gravity drains and private sewers up to and including 300 mm diameter should
be tested to an internal pressure of 1.5m head above the invert of the pipe at
the high end of the line and not more than 4 m head at the lower end. Testing
should be carried out between inspection chambers, manholes or other suitable
points of access and through any accessible branch drains. Where the test
head of water is in excess of 4 m at the lowest point of the pipeline under test
(including the minimum test head of 1.5m), the pipeline may be tested in
sections by means of appropriately placed test branches. The test branches
may be extended up to the finished surface with a suitable termination and
used as additional points of access. Alternatively, where it can be achieved
satisfactorily, the pipeline may be subjected to an air test. Solvent welded
uPVC pipelines should be allowed to stand for 1 h to 2 h before applying the
test and should be suitably anchored to prevent flotation when the test is
applied before backfilling the trench. Where cement mortar joints are used, they
should be left for at least 24 h before testing.
2) Test Procedure. Use the test procedure given in items (a) to (f) as follows.
a) Fit expanding plugs or bag stoppers, suitably secured to resist the full
hydrostatic head, at the lower end of the pipe and in any branches as
necessary.
b) Fit a similar plug or bag stopper into the top end of the pipeline together
with a standpipe or flexible tube leading from a container connected to
the plug or bag.
c) Fill the pipeline with water making sure that there are no pockets of
trapped air.
d) Fill the standpipe or other test apparatus to a height of 1.5m above the
pipe or channel invert.
e) Allow the pipeline to stand for 2 h for absorption, topping up as
necessary.
f) After 2 h, measure the loss of water from the pipeline by noting the
quantity of water needed to maintain the test head in the apparatus over
a period of 30 min.

3) Acceptance Criteria. The rate of water loss should not exceed 1 L/h per metre
diameter per linear metre run of pipe. For various pipe diameters this rate of
loss over a 30 min period may be expressed as follows :
DN 100 pipe 0.05 litres per metre run

4) Interpretation of results. A change in water level in the test apparatus may be

due to one or more of the following causes, which can generally be rectified or
appropriate allowances made for in the testing procedure:
a) Absorption by pipes or joints

b) Exposure of pipes in direct sunlight, or changes of ambient temperature
when pipes are laid, i.e. the expansion/ contrac
c) contraction of thermoplastic pipes or rigid pipes acting as a ‘thermal
sink’.
d) Trapped air.
e) Leakage past expanding plugs or bag stoppers
Other causes of test failure may include any of the following items (1) to (4). Such cause should
be rectified by replacement of the defective work and the tests repeated until soundness is
achieved.
f) Sweating of pipes or joints
g) Damaged, faulty or improperly assembled pipe joints.
h) Cracked pipe barrels
i) Deformation of flexible pipes in the immediate vicinity of a joint resulting
in a loss of joint integrity.
Note: Some pipes absorb more water or trap more air at the joints than others. Allowance
should be made for this when carrying out the test.
If when carrying out a final water test, the minimum test head is determined by the overflow level
of any gully, inspection chamber, manhole, etc. in connection with the work being tested, the
prior approval of the testing officer should be sought.
c. Air Test
1) General. The test should be carried out by inserting expanding drain plugs or
inflatable canvas or rubber bags in the upper and lower ends of the pipeline,
and pumping air in under pressure. Where cement mortar joints are used, the
joint should be left for at least 24 h before testing. Solvent welded uPVC
pipelines should be allowed to stand for 1 h to 2 h before applying the test.
2) Test Procedure. Use the test procedure given in items (a) to (e) as follows.
a) Fit expanding plugs or inflatable canvas or rubber test bags into the ends
of the pipeline and of all associated branches.
b) Connect a glass ‘U’ tube gauge (manometer) to one of the sealing plugs
and a means of applying the air pressure to another sealing plug or
stopper inserted in the section of pipework under test. For a positive test
result over the whole of the pipeline, the manometer and air pressure
source should be located at opposite ends of the pipework under test,
c) Apply pressure either by mouth or hand pump to achieve a pressure of

slightly more than 100 mm water gauge for pipelines, or where gullies
and / or ground floor appliances are connected, of slightly more than 50
mm water gauge.
d) Allow 5 min for stabilization of air temperature.
e) Adjust air pressure to 100 mm or 50 mm water gauge as necessary.
3) Acceptance criteria. Without further pumping, the head of water should not fall
by more than 25 mm in a period of 5 min for a 100 mm water gauge test
pressure and 12 mm for a 50 mm water gauge test pressure.
4) Interpretation of Results. There are several possible contributing factors that
could cause an apparent failure in the air test. These include the following.
a) Temperature changes of the air in the pipe due to direct sunlight or cold
wind acting on the pipe barrel.
b) Dryness of the pipe wall
c) Leaking plugs or fault testing apparatus.
These factors should be investigated before resorting to the water test.
D. Maintenance and Periodic Inspection
1. Drainage systems should be inspected at regular intervals and, where necessary,

thoroughly cleaned out at the same time. Any defects discovered should be made good.
2. Cleaning of the Drainage System
The following operations should be carried out during the periodic cleaning of a drainage
system.
a. Covers of inspection chambers and manholes should be removed and the sides,
benchings and channels cleaned.
b. Intercepting traps, if fitted, should be plunged and flushed with clean water. Care
should be taken to see that the stopper in the rodding eye is securely replaced.
c. Main and branch drains should be cleaned and afterwards should be flushed with
clean water. Any obstructions found should be removed and not flushed into the
system.
d. Periodically, accumulated deposits in gullies should be removed. The traps should

then be plunged and thoroughly flushed out with clean water.
e. Covers of inspection chambers and gullies should be replaced, bedded in suitable

grease or other sealing material and / or bolted down as appropriate to the type.
Missing bolts and broken items should be renewed.
3. Methods of Cleaning
The drainage system should be cleaned, as appropriate, using one or more of the following
methods.

a. Rodding. Appropriate cleaning tools and techniques should be chosen to avoid

damage to the pipework to be cleaned. A set of rods with appropriate ends is basic
useful equipment. It is important that correctly designed proprietary ends are used on
the rods. Makeshift devices attached to the ends of rods should be avoided as they
are not as effective as the correctly designed article and could become detached and
create a blockage which would be difficult to remove. Furthermore, it is possible that
such devices could cause damage to the pipeline. If the rods have brass ferrules, they
should be checked to ensure that their fastenings are secure and that there are no
protruding shoulders or fastenings as these can cause damage to drain lines,
especially when entering through rodding eyes.
b. Jetting. High pressure jetting techniques are suitable for use with all currently
available pipe materials, and should also be considered.
c. Hydraulic rams, compressed air or other gases. Equipment is available for use with all
sizes of drain likely to be encountered in building drainage and is suitable for use with
all currently available pipe materials. The principle of operation is that a shock wave is
induced and is transmitted by water to the point of blockage, and the technique is
effective where the pipe is surcharged or can be filled with water from the blockage to
a point where the equipment can be used.
3.8 LPG SYSTEM
A. The complete system shall be tested, adjusted and balanced as per the specialist
manufacturer recommendations.
3.9 TRAINING
4. Objectives.





equipment


Hours System
Emergency Generator
Domestic Water Heaters
Domestic Hot Water Circulating System
Domestic Water Booster Pumps
Domestic Water Storage/Break Tank
LPG
Plumbing Fixture

SECTION 22 11 16
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Divion-01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building.
B. Exterior water meters will be purchased and installed as per Water Authority.
C. Interior water meters will be purchased and installed as per Water Authority.
D. Related Sections include the following:
E.
1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges" for thermometers, pressure gauges, and
fittings.
2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping
specialties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PEX: Cross-linked polyethylene plastic.
B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
C. PPR- Poly Propylene Random with aluminum sheath
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems
with 860 kPa, unless otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B. Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured

fitting the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with,
piping to be joined.
2.2 POLYPROPYLENE PIPES (PPR CT)
A. Polypropylene Copolymer Random (PPR CT) SDR7.4 pipes shall be manufactured according
to DIN 8077/8078; fittings shall be manufactured according to DIN 16962 Standard and Pipe
composite, Green Color made of special mixer of fiber three layer for more rigidity with less
linear expansion.
B. Pipes and fittings shall be joined using electro-fusion welding process. Welding shall be
made as recommended by the manufacturer. Threaded fittings shall be used to connect to
other piping systems, fixtures, etc., fitting with metal insert shall be DZR Brass sealed with
Teflon tape.
C. PPR-CT piping system shall be installed with special pre-caution for thermal expansion
especially for exposed installation.
D. Thermal expansion shall be compensated by use of proper elbows, fittings, as recommended

by the same manufacturer.
E. PPR-CT pipes shall not be installed or stored under direct UV light. Pipes in shafts and roof
shall be of Five layer PPR CT consisting of main pipe PPR-CT coated with UV protected
PPR-CT film treated to resist long time exposure to UV light. Pipes on roof shall be insulated
and cladded. Fittings should be UV protected and black in color.
F. Pipes bending shall be generally avoided, in extreme cases pipes may be bent by heating
with hot air without direct flames. The minimum bending radius shall be 8 times the pipe
diameter.
G. PPR-CT pipes and fittings shall be certified for portable water use by a recognized European
Standard, DVGW, SKZ, IQNET 9001:2008.
H. Pressure rating of pipes and fittings shall be PN 20 Pipes shall be suitable for working
pressure of 7.4 bars at a maximum temperature of 95 degree C.
I. All PPR CT pipes must be of five layer SDR 7.4 type.
J. The pipes and fittings used for conveying potable shall not constitute a toxic Hazard, shall not
support microbial growth and shall not give rise to unpleasant taste odour, cloudiness or
discoloration of water.
K. All installations inside false ceiling, bath rooms, kitchen for internal cold water and hot water
distribution pipes shall be Polypropylene including supply to PEX system.

L. Boosted cold and hot water pipe work from transfer pumps from Ground water tank to roof
storage tank shall be of Five layer PPR CT consisting of main pipe PPR-CT coated with UV
protected PPR-CT film treated to resist long time exposure to UV light and pipes on roof to be
thermally insulated by 19 mm flexible closed cell elastometric foam insulation and cladded
with 24 gauge aluminum cladding.
2.3 PVC-U CLASS E PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Pipes shall be in accordance with BS-3505 class E – WRAS approved.
B. All the fittings shall be in accordance with BS-4346 part-1
C. Joining: Solvent cement must be used for joining as per BS-4346 Part-3.
2.4 PEX PIPES AND FITTINGS ( DOMESTIC WATER APPLICATIONS )
A. Pex Pipes: DN-32 and smaller – cross linked polyethylene to DIN 16892/93, WRC / DVGW
o
approved, ASTM F876, F877 with protective conduit. 95 C PN-10
B. Cold – Blue
C. Hot – Red
D. Pex Fittings: All fittings shall be bronze or DZR copper alloy fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Domestic Water Piping on Service Side of Water Meter inside the Building: Use the following
piping materials:
1. Incoming pipe work between Water Authority incoming water meter and Belowground
RCC Storage tanks shall be PVC-u class E to BS-3505.
2. The Below ground tank shall be of RCC construction with GRP lining at inner surface of
the tank. The tank shall be constructed by the main contractor as per civil specifications.
3. Pipe penetrations through the water tank shall be with puddle flanges to engineer’s
approval.
4. All exposed water pipes to be insulated covered with Aluminum cladding.
B. Aboveground Domestic Water Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:
1. Cold water distribution pipe work shall be PPR to DIN 16962 up to size DIA 80mm.

2. Cold water distribution pipe work shall be PVC-U class E to BS3505, for sizes 100mm
and above.
3. Hot water supply shall be PPR to DIN 16962 with thermal insulation.
4. All final equipment connections to sanitary ware shall be with pex pipes installed within
flexible conduits chased in wall.
5. Cold water distribution piping shall be suitably insulated to avoid condensation.
D. Non-Potable-Water Piping:
1. U-PVC pipe; to BS 3505 Class E and fittings shall be to BS 4346 – Part 1 and solvent-
cemented joints.
E. Below Ground Piping
1. All below ground piping external to the building shall be of UPVC.
F. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
I. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
J. Under-Building-Slab, Water-Service Piping on Service Side of Water Meter: Refer to

Division 2 Sections "Water Distribution."
3.3 WATER METERS
A. Water meters shall be purchased and installed as per Water Authority Regulations.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
B. Install galvanized-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service
pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required
to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in the
relative Division section.
C. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Wall penetration systems are specified in Division Section
"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Pressure gauges are specified
in Division Section "Meters and Gauges," and drain valves and strainers are specified in
Division 22 Section 10 30 "Plumbing Specialties."

E. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Water-pressure regulators

are specified in Division 22 Section 10 30 "Plumbing Specialties."
F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
G. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
H. Die electric unions / flanges shall be installed for joining dissimilar metals.
A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 20 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION
A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation and install water meters
according to utility company's requirements.
B. Install water meters according to utility's requirements.
1. Install displacement-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install
valve on water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Install turbine-type water meters with shutoff valve on water-meter inlet. Install valve on
water-meter outlet and valved bypass around meter unless prohibited by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet
and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or
concrete piers.
4. Install fire-service water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on
full-size valved bypass around meter. Support meter, valves, and piping on brick or
concrete piers.
5. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility and of authorities

having jurisdiction.
A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and

Seismic Controls." Refer section 23 05 08.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1. Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.
2. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use
flanges instead of unions for DN 65 and larger.
A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of the engineer:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for the engineer to observe tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Re-inspection: If it’s found that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for re-inspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the engineer.
B. Test domestic water piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 1.5 times of operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a. Manually adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow

of hot water in each branch.
b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed as per BS6700 and method
statement, procedures described in either or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the engineer. Repeat procedures if

biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
END OF SECTION
22 11 16

SECTION 22 10 30
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART-1 GENERAL
A. Drawings a n d gener al provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following plumbing specialties:

1. Backflow preventers.
2. Water Regulators
3. Water Hummer Arrestors
4. Key-operation hydrants.
5. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
6. Sleeve penetration systems.
7. Flashing materials.

1. Division 22 05 19 Section "Meters and Gauges for plumbing systems" for water meters,
thermometers, and pressure gauges.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

3. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Domestic Water Piping: 860 kPa.
2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 30 kPa.
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa.
4. Force-Main Piping: 690 kPa.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate
materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;
and piping and wiring connections for the following:
22 10 30 Plumbing Specialties Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

2. Water regulators
3. Water hammer arresters, air vents, and trap seal primer valves and systems.
4. Hose bibbs and hydrants.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field test reports.
D. Maintenance Data: For plumbing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. Include the
following:
2. Water Regulators
3. Key-operation hydrants.
4. Miscellaneous piping specialties.
A. Product: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of plumbing specialties
and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Plumbing specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: As defined in British Standards and DEWA,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. British Standard Compliance: BS 5154, 2871, 6700, 4504 and 2879.
E. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic
water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-
dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1 through
9," for potable domestic water plumbing specialties.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Operating Key Handles: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed for each key-operated hose
bibb and hydrant installed.

PART-2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. General: BS 6700, backflow preventers.

1. DN 50 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. DN 65 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with flanged ends.
a. Interior Lining: Epoxy coating for backflow preventers having cast-iron or steel
body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
5. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.
B. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
atmospheric vent.
C. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: Nickel plated, with non removable and manual drain
features, garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to rough-bronze-finish hose
connections may be rough bronze.
D. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: Suitable for continuous pressure

application. Include inlet screen and two independent check valves with intermediate
atmospheric vent.
E. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: Suitable for continuous pressure application.

Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks;
and pressure-differential relief valve with air-gap fitting located between two positive-seating
check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 83 kPa maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
F. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: Suitable for continuous pressure application.

Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and two positive-
seating check valves.
G. Antisiphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: Suitable for continuous pressure application.

Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc, test cocks, and
atmospheric vent.
1. Pressure Loss: 35 kP maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range.
H. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: Suitable for continuous pressure application.

Include union inlet and two independent check valves.
I. Dual-Check-Valve-Type Backflow Preventers: Suitable for continuous pressure application for

carbonated beverage dispensers. Include stainless-steel body; primary and secondary checks;
ball check; intermediate atmospheric-vent port for relieving carbon dioxide; and threaded ends,
DN 10.
J. Reduced-Pressure Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: FM approved or UL listed, and

suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on
inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-differential relief valve with
air-gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves; and bypass with
displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer.
K. Double-Check Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: FM approved or UL listed, and

suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on
inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; two positive-seating check valves; and
bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow preventer.
L. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers: Suitable for at least 0.19-L/s flow and applications with
up to 30-kPa back pressure. Include two check valves; intermediate atmospheric vent; and
nonremovable, garden-hose threads on outlet.
2.2 WATER REGULATORS
A. General: Water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 1035 kPa minimum. Include
integral factory-installed or separate field-installed, Y-pattern strainer.
1. DN 50 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
a. General-Duty Service: Single-seated, direct operated, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Booster Heater Water Supply: Single-seated, direct operated with integral bypass.
c. DN 65 and Larger: ductile iron body with flanged ends.
d. Type: Single-seated, direct operated / pilot operating.

e. Type: Pilot-operated, single- or double-seated, ductile iron body main valve, with
bronze-body pilot valve.
2. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters:

The Water Hammer Arrester shall consist of a Copper body with a copper hexagonal male pipe
threaded inlet, an acetal, polycarbonate piston with Buna Nitrile or EPDM o-rings and lead free
solder. The device shall be pre-charged and sealed at the factory. The Water Hammer Arrester
shall comply to ASSE listed 1010 and ANSI A112.26.1 Standards.
0 0
Temperature Range : F33 F to 180 F
End connections : Threaded ANSI / ASME B1.20.1
B. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body / Brass body with replaceable seat disc complying with compression-
type faucets. Include DN 15 or DN 20 threaded or solder-joint inlet, of design suitable for
pressure of at least 860 kPa; integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable hose-
connection vacuum breaker; and garden-hose threads on outlet.
1. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated / chrome plated
brass body.
2. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated / rough chrome plated brass body. .
3. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated / rough chrome plated brass body..
4. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
5. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
6. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

7. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bib.
8. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bib.
C. Air Vents: Float type for automatic air venting.

1. Bolted Construction: Brass body with replaceable, corrosion-resistant Polypropylene float
and stainless-steel mechanism and seat; threaded DN 15 minimum inlet; 860 kPa
minimum pressure rating at 60 deg C; and threaded vent outlet.
D. Flexible Hose Pipes: Connections to ceiling suspended water heaters. Water closet
connections etc., - heavy duty stainless steel corrugated pressure rated to 10 Bar – Make –
Hamada Japan or equal.
E. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop- or field-fabricated, frost-proof assembly

constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide 25 mm
enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with
counterflashing.
F. Expansion Joints: Assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, packing gland, and
packing; of size and end types corresponding to connect piping
2.4 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
A. Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and stack

fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: Gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with neoprene O-ring at
base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch. Include PVC protective
cap for plug.
a. Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for plastic

chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 15-kg/sq. m, 1.2-mm thickness.
3. Burning: 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: The following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness.
2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness.
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: With 0.20 percent copper content and 1.01-mm minimum thickness,
unless otherwise indicated. Include Z275 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for
painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: Flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 1.01-mm minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: Lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
PART-3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 20 00 03 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to
other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with
1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.
2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap
fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe
diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or
under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gauges on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve.
Install water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water piping network with in the bathrooms,
toilets and kitchens.
E. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as required.
F. Install die electric union for connecting dissimilar metals.
G. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
H. Fasten recessed-type plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
I. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting and recessed-type plumbing specialties.
J. Install individual shutoff valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or
globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. Refer
to Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves.
22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties, Rev.00 Page 6 of 9

K. Install air vents at piping high points. Include ball, gate, or globe valve in inlet and drain piping
from outlet to floor drain.
L. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect plumbing specialties to piping specified in other Division 22 Sections.
D. Ground equipment / piping as per IEE Regulation.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
F. Connect plumbing specialties and devices that require power according to Division 16 Sections.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 2.4 mm thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead
sheets 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6 mm thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors
and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 250 mm, and skirt or
flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm
around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing
into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and
to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION
22 11 19

SECTION 22 11 23
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged booster, transfer and circulating pumps for domestic water
piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For all pumps specified. Include certified performance curves with operating
points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For all pumps and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For all pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty
1. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of successful start up, testing and
commissioning.
2. Warranty shall include all parts labor for 24 months
A. Product: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged

booster pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: As defined in British Standards and

DEWA or by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Packaged booster pumps, transfer pumps and circulating pumps shall be listed and labeled
as pumping systems by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps, Rev.00 Page 1 of 7

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Pump sets: Pumps and motor shall be factory assembled, control panel and pipe works shall be
factory or locally assembled at supplier’s factory authorized by the manufacturer.
2.2 PUMPSETS
A. Booster and Transfer pump sets:
B. Vertical multistage centrifugal pump sets - Booster and Transfer Pump sets for Domestic Water:
C. Packaged Booster Pump sets
1. Packaged pump sets shall be self-contained fully automatic package units. The units
shall be complete with duty/standby pumps, quantity (as shown on the equipment
schedule) and an automatic control panel consisting of the following:
D. 1 E. Starter with overload for each motor
F. 1 G. TP&N isolating switch, fully enclosed, interlocked with

panel door and external operating handle.
H. 1 I. Hour run meter for each pump
J. 1 K. System pressure gauge
L. 1 M. Residual current circuit breaker 100mA (for each

pump)
N. 1 O. Set timing relays
P. 1 Q. Hand / Off / Auto switch for each pump
R. 1 S. Duty pump selector switch or system mode selection

switch
T. 1 U. Run & trip lamps for each motor
V. 2 W. Indicating lamps, “Power On” and “Low Water”
X. 1 Y. Main neutral link
Z. 1 AA. Cyclic controller (2 numbers where standby jockey

pump is specified).
22 11 24 Domestic Water Pressure Boosting Systems (Constant Speed) Rev.00 Page 2 of 7

BB. 1 CC.Pressure switch with adjustable setting for each

pump
DD.1 EE. Dry run prevention relay and level switch in feed tank
2. The pump motors shall be suitable for continuous operation with Variable Frequency
Drives (VFD) and also constant speed operation
3. Pump set shall be provided with VFDs.
4. Pump set control shall be performed by a microprocessor based controller.
5. A hydraulic accumulator with replaceable diaphragm / expansion tank should be

provided with the set.
FF. The control Panel shall ensure:
a. The packaged booster pump set shall maintain a constant system pressure by
continuously varying the speed of one pump via a VFD. The other pumps shall cut
in/out on mains operation, as required by the system flow demand. At low demand,
the first pump in duty sequence shall operate through the VFD to maintain system
pressure. As the demand increases to more than the capacity of one pump, the
second pump in sequence (and so on for other duty pumps) shall be switched on
at constant, full speed and the first pump which is being operated through the VFD
shall continue to maintain the set system pressure. On drop in demand, the
constant speed pumps will be cut-off first and VFD operated pump will be switched
off last.
b. The VFD controlled pump shall always start first and stopped last.
c. All pumps shall be controlled by the VFD in rotation.
d. Pump duty changeover shall be automatic and depends on load, time and fault to
ensure equal operating time for all the pumps of the booster pump set. The
changeover shall also ensure equal operating time for all pumps with the VFDs.
e. All the pumps shall be of equal size and suitable for parallel operation and
connected for automatic cascade control.
f. Automatic switchover to standby pump in case of failure of any duty pump.
g. The controller shall maintain a constant set pressure by the closed loop control
principle i.e. continuously comparing the set value (pressure) with the feedback
signal from the pressure transmitter and maintaining zero deviation by adjusting
the speed of one pump via the VFD. Industry standard signals shall be used e.g. 0-
10V DC from controller to VFD corresponding to 0 – 100% speed and the pressure
transmitter output shall be 0-20 mA etc.

h. The controller shall automatically match the pump set performance to the system
demand by cutting in/out the required number of pumps. The controller shall
operate the system with as few pumps as possible. The frequency of starts and
stops shall be limited by the setting of minimum and medium switching sequences
on the controller.
i. The controller shall be set to site adjustable the maximum and minimum
permissible operating pressure. If the actual pressure exceeds the set value for 0.5
secs, the fault conditions shall be annunciated.
j. Dry run protection based on level switch in each feed tank (for each compartment
of the tank) with indication. A three position switch will be provided to enable
isolation of any one of the tanks or compartments (from dry run protection circuit)
for maintenance. The third position shall be of normal operation, i.e. all tanks (or
compartments) are included in dry run protection circuit. In case this feature is not
available with control panels supplied by the manufacturer, a separate panel with
necessary switches shall be provided and inter locked with the pump set control
panel.
k. A minimum two numbers of “Variable Frequency Drives” (i.e. VFDs) shall be

provided – 1 duty and 1 standby. The VFDs shall be set to operate in rotation on
preset (adjustable) time basis, to ensure equal operating time for the VFDs.
l. Star/Delta starters shall be provided for all other duty pumps of 5.5 kW or above
(DOL starters for less than 5.5kW). Alternatively VFDs may be used for all pumps.
m. The controller shall be capable of communicating with BMS, where specified.
n. Pumps and motor shall be factory assembled, control panel and pipe works shall be
factory or locally assembled at supplier’s factory authorized by the manufacturer.
GG. Pumps and accessories details:
1. Material
Casing : Stainless steel casing with drain connection fitted with plug.
Impellar: Stainless steel, multistage
Shafts : Stainless steel
Seal : Mechanical
Seal housing : As per manufacturer’s standard
2. Temperature
0
Range : Up to 50 C for cold water
0
Up to 120 C for hot water
3. Pressure : PN 16 minimum or 150% of maximum or as
Per the system requirement.

4. Motors: Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated. Select
motor that will not overload through full range of pump performance curve. Comply with
Division 20 Section "Motors." Vertical multistage high efficiency centrifugal pumps directly
coupled to a TEFC motor.
5. Control Valves: Isolation Valve on each pump discharge.
6. Header End Connections:
a. DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded.
b. DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.
7. Control Panel: Supplier’s Factory installed and connected as an integral part of unit
complying with IEC and UL 508; automatic for multiple-pump, with load control and
protection functions. Protected to IP 55 and wired to IEE wiring regulations.
8. Enclosure: IP55.
9. Hydro pneumatic Tank: Pre charged, bladder tank with replaceable natural rubber,
diaphragm or bladder.
10. Flexible Connectors
a. Description: Rubber bellows ends shall be according to the following:
b. DN 50 and Smaller: Threaded. Provide flanged ends if pump has flanged

connections.
c. DN 65 and Larger: Flanged.
11. Foot Valves shall be sized and pressure rated according to the pump manufacturers
design.
12. For negative suction applications, low-NPSH pumps designed to eliminate the risk of
cavitation shall be installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for packaged booster pumps to verify actual locations of connections
before booster pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged booster pumps.
1. Install inertia base for all the pumps as per the details of vibration specialist.
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified elsewhere in the
civil specification.

C. Bolt and grout each pump to a steel and concrete base supported on 25 mm thick neoprene-
steel-neoprene pads in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the size and
weight distribution of the pipe support. The minimum thickness of concrete base shall be as
follows:
1. Pumps < 7.5 hp 150 mm
2. Pumps 7.5 hp to 25 hp 200 mm
3. Pumps > 25 hp 250 mm
3.3 BOOSTER PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged booster pumps level on concrete bases with access for periodic
maintenance including removal of pumps, motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
1. Do not dismantle packaged booster pumps or remove individual components.
B. Vibration Isolation: Install on spring isolators with minimum deflection of 50 mm. Vibration
isolation devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic
Controls."
C. Support connected domestic water piping so weight of piping is not supported by packaged
booster pumps.
3.4 CONNECTIONS

B. Connect domestic water piping to packaged booster pumps. Install suction and discharge
pipe equal to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
1. Install flexible connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge piping.
Install flexible connectors same size as piping.
2. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to each booster pump suction and discharge
piping. Install ball, butterfly, or gate valves same size as suction and discharge piping.
General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Valves."
3. Install union or flanged connections on pump suction and discharge piping at connection
to domestic water piping.
4. Install piping adjacent to packaged booster pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following startup service:
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers if any.
4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Perform the following startup checks for each pump of packaged booster pump unit before
starting:
1. Verify bearing lubrication.
2. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing discharge valves, and prepare
pumps for operation.
3. Start motors.
4. Open discharge valves slowly.
5. Adjust settings.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting packaged booster pumps to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for
this purpose.
3.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Install identifying equipment markers and equipment signs on booster pumps. Labeling and
identification materials are specified in Division 20 Section "Mechanical Identification."
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 12 00
FACILITY POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes potable-water storage tanks and related specialties and accessories
for indoor installations.
1. Division 20 00 03 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric

fittings.
2. Division 20 07 16 Section "Equipment Insulation" for field-installed tank insulation.
3. Division 33 10 00 Section “Water Utility Distribution Equipments”
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. GRP: Glass-reinforced plastic resin.

2. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
A. Pressure Rating of Tanks and Piping Components: At least 1.5 times to system operating
pressure.
B. Must meet all DEWA requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thicknesses, insulation, finishes and
coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping
connections.
B. Factory Tests and Certification Reports: Provide documentation of test results and
compliance with certifications and standards listed below in the standard format
recommended by the certifying agency.
22 12 00 Facility Potable Water Storage Tank Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
A. BS 3396 Woven glass fiber fabrics for plastic reinforcement. BS 3496 E-glass fiber chopped
strand mat for reinforcement of polyester and other liquid laminating systems.
B. BS 3749 E-glass fiber woven roving, fabrics for the reinforcement of polyester and epoxy
resin system.
C. The panel shall be constructed based on BS EN 13280:2001 or SS245:1995 standards
D. BS 6920 Suitability of non-metallic products for use in contact with water intended for
human consumption with regard to water quality.
E. BS EN ISO 9001: Quality systems
F. SS 245: 1995 Permanent compressive strain test.
G. SS 245: 1995 Sunlight transmission test
H. SS 245: 1995 Physical properties test: (tensile, bending, elastic modulus, barcol hardness,
water absorption).
I. SS245: 1995 Hydrostatic test.
J. SS245: 1995 Leakage test.
K. SS245: 1995 Deflection test.
L. AS/NZS 4020: 1999 Metal toxicity test of Stainless steel in contact with water.
M. BS EN578: 1994 Opacity Test.
N. SS375: 2001 Testing of GRP for use in contact with water intended for human consumption.
O. Sealant test according to Korea Food & Drug Administration, Food code.
P. WRAS (UK) for hot and cold water up to 500C.
Q. BS-6700 Tanks 10000 ltrs and above shall have compartments.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer, importer or supplier of the water tank shall provide a certificate of guarantee,
against manufacturing and erection defects covering a period of minimum ten (10) years
from the date of erection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC, NONPRESSURE WATER STORAGE TANKS
A. Description: Plastic, nonpressure-rated, horizontal water tank.
B. Tank Material: Composite plastic complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tanks and according to the following:
1. Outer Shell Material: GRP.

2. Process: Hot Pressed.
C. Tappings: Factory fabricated of compatible materials, attached to tank before testing and
labeling.
1. DN50 and Smaller: With female thread.

2. DN65 and Larger: Flanged.
D. Manhole: Watertight, 600 mm in diameter with lockable hinges.
E. Cover for Open Tank: Plastic, same as or similar to tank material and with shape that
encloses top of tank.
F. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles with steel insert for continuous
bottom support. Hot Dip galvanized steel skid.
G. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles. Hot Dip galvanized steel skid.
H. Vertical Tank Support (Lader): Factory-fabricated steel stand / Hot Dip galvanized steel
Skid, supporting bottom of tank where indicated.
I. Internal Lader: PVC Lader
J. GRP Panels shall be factory pre-insulated all sides factory tested demonstrating compliance
with the following requirements:
1. Toxicity, stainless steel Nil AS/NZS 4020: 1999

2. Micro Biological Groth Nil
3. Ultra Violet Rays Stabilized/Resistant
4. Opacity Min. 99.9% BS 2782 / BSEN 578
5. Cavity Max. 2%
6. Water Absorption Max 0.2% BS 7491
2
7. Tensile Strength Min.1000 Kg/cm BS 2782
-5 2
8. Young’s Modulus Min. 1.40 x 10 Kg/cm
2
9. Flexural Strength Min. 1850 Kg/cm BS 2782
10. Barcol Hardness Min. 50 BS 2782
2
11. Impact Strength 50 Kg. cm / cm BS 3055.88
2
12. Shear strength Min. 870 Kg./ cm BS 2782
5 0
13. Thermal expansion Min. 1.7 x 10 / C JISK 6911
0
14. Thermal Conductivity Max. 0.15 Kcal/m. hr. C
0
15. Thermal Conductivity Max. 0.02 Kcal/m. hr. C
16. Coefficient of overall thermal transmission

2
a. Water – Panel – Air Max. 5.0 Kcal/m
2 0
b. Water Insulated Panel – Air Max. 0.9 Kcal/m h. C

17. Glass Content Min. 30%

18. Resin content Min 48%
19. Specific gravity 1.8
20. Light Transmission Max 0.2% SS 245: 1995
K. Resins used in the manufacturing of GRP panels should be fully cured before installation
and usage. Tests for 100% cure shall be conducted as per the relevant test methods of B.S.
4994.
L. The panel thickness to be designed based on FEM study with a safety factor 6 times the
actual hydrostatic water pressure according to BS 7491 / BSEN 13280 and SS 245: 1995.
M. Sides, bottom and roof panels, shall have uniform mass per unit area. Unless otherwise
specified 6mm minimum thickness and 17.5 Kg/M2 minimum mass should be used.
0
N. Tank shall be suitable for 100% humidity and > 50 C temperature, corrosion proof, UV
stabilized, non-toxic, non-staining, smooth inner surface, algae resistant.
O. Interior strengthening reinforcing steel shall be with stainless steel pipe section min dia12
mm grade 316. Nuts, bolts, Tie Rods and washers in contact with water and for the roof
shall be stainless steel 316 Grade L
P. Glass tube water level indicator to be provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for tanks. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete" and Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.2 WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so
devices needing servicing are accessible.
1. Install horizontal tanks on concrete piers and factory-fabricated saddles.

2. Install horizontal tanks on fabricated steel supports and saddles.
B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
C. Install tank seismic restraints.
D. All inlet / outlet flange connections to be made at factory only. No site drilling is allowed on
the tank panels.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.

B. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping, if indicated.
Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and
Gages."
C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges, flexible connectors, and
with shutoff valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor
drains.
D. Install the following devices on tanks:
1. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks.

2. Connections to accessories.
3. Glass tube type water level indicators to be provided.
4. Internal and external laders shall be provided for tanks more than 1.5mtr height.
A. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test, pressure water storage tanks to ensure structural
integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize tanks,
disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 24 hours with no leaks. Repair or replace
tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until test is satisfactory.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until results are satisfactory.
C. Prepare written reports for specified tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable-water storage tanks.
B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:
1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.
2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L of chlorine.

Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L of chlorine.
Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.
3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is
not present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows
evidence of contamination.
5. All above tests shall be carried out before the tank is put in use with prior approval
from the engineer.
C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Perform the following final checks before filling:
1. Verify that tests of tanks are complete.

2. Verify that tests of piping systems are complete.
3. Check piping connections for leaks.
4. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
5. Check for proper seismic restraints.
B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to
operating level.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 22 13 16
SANITARY WASTE VENT AND STORM PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes soil and waste, sanitary drainage vent piping and rain water piping
inside the building and the locations indicated.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:

2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer.
6. HDPE: High Density Polyethylene.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30 kPa.

2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 690 kPa.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.
B. Shop Drawings: For drainage system, include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
22 13 16 Sanitary, Waste, Vent and Storm Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 10

B. Comply with NSF 14 or BS EN standards for "Plastics Piping Systems Components and
Related Materials," for plastic piping components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Transition Couplings for Underground Pressure Piping: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve-type
coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to
and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. All drainage pipe to be uPVC BS 5255 for pipes diameters up to 50 mm a nd BS 4514 for 63
mm and above pipe sizes, except for condensate drain pipe and forced drain where it
should be uPVC Class-E.
C. All drainage piping passing above or through occupied areas shall be acoustically insulated
with an approved acoustic lagging material to the specified noise levels.
D. HDPE pipe shall be used for Kitchen waste with high temperature.
2.2 uPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS (Below Grade)
A. DN75 and larger to BSEN-1401-1 push fit type only.
2.3 uPVC PIPING (Above Grade)
A. uPVC Pipe: DN 75 and larger to BSEN 1329, solid-wall drain, waste, rain water and vent.
B. uPVC Fittings: DN 75 and larger to BSEN 1329 , waste, and vent patterns solvent weld only.
2.4 HDPE PIPING
A. HDPE Pipe: Smooth bore, single, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent Bell and Spigot with
electro-heat fused fittings. To BSEN 1519
1. HPDE Fittings: electro-heat fused, socket type, made to drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
B. HDPE Special Fittings: Drainage-pattern tube and tubular fittings with ends as required for
application.
2.5 UPVC PIPE & FITTINGS: (PRESSURIZED)
A. Pipe: DN75 and large to BS 3505 class E

B. Fittings: DN 75 and larger to BS 4346 Part 1
2.6 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: The barrier shall be constructed of a 2 mm thick barium sulphate loaded
limp vinyl sheet bonded to a thin layer of reinforced aluminum foil on one side. The barrier
shall have a nominal density of 4.8 kg/m2 and shall have a minimum STC rating of 28. The
barrier shall exhibit minimum flammability ratings of 0.0 seconds for flame out and afterglow
and 5 mm inches for char length when tested in accordance with Federal Test Std. No. 191-
5903. The barrier shall have a minimum thermal conductivity “K” value of 0.29 and a rated
o o
service temperature range of -40 C to 105 C. When tested for Surface Burning
Characteristics per ASTM E84, the barrier will have a flame spread index of no more than
10 and a smoke development index of no more than 40.
B. ACOUSTIC DRAIANGE PIPE LAGGING

All pipes running horizontally through occupied spaces shall be acoustically insulated with a
decoupling layer,The acoustic lagging shall comprise of two parts - a decoupler and a barri-
er. The Barrier shall be constructed of a minimum 2 mm thick barium sulphate loaded limp
vinyl sheet bonded to a thin layer of reinforced aluminum foil on one side. The barrier shall
have a nominal density of 4.8 kg per cubic meter and shall have a minimum STC rating of
28. The barrier shall have surface burning characteristics that is compliant with ASTM E84 -
flame spread index of 10 and smoke developed index of no more than 40. The barrier shall
have a minimum thermal conductivity “K” value of 0.29 and a rated service temperature of
105 deg C. The decoupler shall be a minimum of 50 mm thick fiberglass batting, non woven
porous scrimcoated glass cloth, quilted together in a matrix of which encapsulates the glass
fibres.
The composite material shall be fabricated to include a nominal 6” wide barrier overlap tab
extending beyond the quilted fibre glass to facilitate a leak tight seal around the fieldjoints.
Note that the above specifications are minimal and the exact required performance shall
becertified by the acoustic specialist sub consultant.
Standard of Acceptance - Kinetics KNM-100 ALQ, and
C. The decoupling layer shall be a combination of 25 mm fiber glass batting, non woven porous
scrim-coated glass cloth, quilted together in a matrix of 100 mm diamond stitch pattern
which encapsulates the glass fibers. The barrier shall be type KNM by Kinetics. The
composite material shall be type KFA by Kinetics. The composite material shall be
fabricated to include a nominal 150 mm wide barrier overlap tab extending beyond the
quilted fiber glass to facilitate a leak-tight seal around field joints. Nominal barrier width 1372
mm, nominal decoupler width 1219 mm.
2.7 SOUND ABSORBING COMPOUND WASTE PIPES MADE OF PP-MV (SOUND PROOF
DRAINAGE PIPING).
A. Socket Pipe
1. 3-layer, mineral – reinforced compound pipe made of non-halogen plastics,
2. PP inner layer, hot water resistant up to 97° C, sound absorbing intermediate layer
made of PP – MV mineral reinforced compound, PP exterior layer.
3. Minimum rigidity DN/OD 32 – 16>6 kN/m2, DN/OD 200 and 250 > 8 kN/m2.
4. Application classification B/D.
5. Color: RAL 5014 dove blue.
6. Moulded connecting sleeve with factory-fitted lip ring,

7. Low temperature impact resistant to -20°C in accordance with EN 1411
8. Average coefficient of linear expansion: LAK 0.05 mm.mK.
9. Fire behavior according to EN 13501-1: classification D-s2, d1
10. Modulus of elasticity: 2400 – 3100 MPa according to ISO 178
11. Leak proof under low pressure to 900 mbar
B. Moulded part (bend)
1. Single layer, mineral – reinforced moulded part made of non-halogen polypropylene

with connecting sleeve and factory – fitted lip-ring, hot water resistant up to 97 °C.
C. Moulded part (branch bend)
1. Single layer, mineral-reinforced moulded part made of non-halogen polypropylene

with connecting sleeve and factory – fitted lip ring, hot water resistant up to 97 °C
D. Moulded part (transition pipe)
1. Single layer, mineral reinforced moulded part made of non-halogen polypropylene

with connecting sleeve and factory – fitted lip ring, hot water resistant up to 97 °C.
E. Moulded Part (centric transition pipe with small spigot end)

with connecting sleeve and factory – fitted lip-ring, hot water resistant up to 97 °C.
F. Moulded part (double socket)

with connecting sleeve and factory fitted lip-ring, hot water resistant up to 97 °C.
G. Moulded part (collar)

H. Moulded part (long socket)

I. Moulded part (socket plug)
1. Single layer, mineral-reinforced moulded part made of non-halogen polypropylene,

hot water resistant up to 97 °C.
J. Moulded part (cleaning pipe)


K. Achievable sound 21 dB(A) shall be maintained.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Below grade Soil, Waste, Storm and Vent Piping (Non pressurized):
1. Soil, Storm and Vent Piping
a. DN 75 and larger: uPVC Pipes and fittings are manufactured to BSEN 1401-1
push fit type.
2. Waste Piping
a. DN 75 and larger: uPVC Pipes and fittings are manufactured to BSEN 1401-1
push fit type.
3. Waste Piping for Kitchens
a. HDPE Pipes and fittings are manufactured To BSEN 1519 with electro-heat
fused fittings.
B. Below grade Soil, Waste, Storm and Vent Piping (Pressurized):
1. uPVC Pipes and fittings are manufactured to BS-3505 Class E and BS-4346 Part 1
respectively.
C. Above grade Soil, Waste and Storm and Vent Piping:
1. Horizontal and Vertical Soil, Storm Vent Pipe work:
a. DN 32 to DN 50: UPVC Pipes and fittings manufactured to BSEN - 1329

solvent weld type.
b. DN-75 and above: UPVC Pipes and fittings manufactured to BSEN - 1329
solvent weld type.
2. All Horizontal and vertical waste pipe work.
a. Pipe and fittings are manufactured in UPVC to BSEN - 1329 solvent weld type.
3. Waste Piping for Kitchens
a. HDPE Pipes and fittings are manufactured To BSEN 1519 with electro-heat
fused fittings.
D. Air conditioning Condensate drainage Pipe and Fittings:

1. uPVC Pipes and fittings manufactured to BS-3505 Class E and BS-4346 Part 1
respectively.
2. Condensate drain piping shall be thermally insulated as specified under section
15083, Part 3.11.
E. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings
may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Flanges may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Generally, all above ground drainage installation shall be connected by gravity as indicated
on drawings. All work shall be installed and tested in accordance with BS5572 code of
practice for sanitary works.
H. All underground pipe to be protected with concrete and wrapped in polythene sheet.
I. All pipes under building and those subject to traffic especially under roads shall be protected
with reinforced concrete.
J. All the pipe work (high level) passing through living areas like bathrooms, offices, lobbies
etc. shall be acoustically insulated or sound proof pipes to be used. All the risers 4 meters
upstream and downstream of the foot shall be acoustically insulated as per specified in this
section under part 2.6 and 2.7.
A. Refer to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
B. During bad weather, or in wet fine-grained soils such as clays, silts or sands, it is important
to prevent the trench bottom being churned up by mean working in the trench. In such cases
a blanket of granular material 75 mm thick laid over the trench bottom immediately after
excavation, or alternatively a sealing layer of weak concrete 50 mm thick, is required.
C. Provide concrete of minimum compressive strength of 21 N/mm2 at 28 days to drain pipes

and concrete infill (Concrete Mix 1:15) where drain track is below level of bottom of
foundation base and within 900 mm horizontal distance from foundation base. The concrete
infill to be carried up to the level of the bottom of the foundation base.
D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.
F. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight. Refer to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall.
Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods" for wall penetration systems.
H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-

turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by
side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent
lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage
piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I. Drain tracks beyond 900 mm of adjacent foundations and where the bottom of the trench is
lower than a depth beneath the foundation equal to the horizontal distance between the
nearside of the trench and the foundation less 150 mm, shall be infilled with concrete up to
that depth.
J. Concrete bed and surround shall incorporate movement joints at each drain pipe joint.
K. Each joint shall form a plane surface in the concrete above and below the drain and vertical
to the drain and centre line and shall separate the lengths of concrete with 13 mm thick
resilient fibre board or expanded polystyrene pre-cut to pipe diameter and concrete cross-
section height and width.
L. Drains below roadways, car parks, and any area subject to vehicular traffic where less than
900mm of cover shall be bedded and surrounded with concrete of minimum compressive
strength of 21 N/mm at 28 days, 150 mm minimum thickness all round with provision for
movement joints.
M. Granular fill shall be laid in 100mm layers and had compacted to a level 300mm minimum
above top of pipe followed by main backfill material placed and compacted in 300mm layers
any trench sheeting being withdrawn as the work proceeds. Heavy mechanical compactors
shall not be used until there is at least 300mm cover over the pipes.
N. Construction vehicles shall not be allowed to cross drain trenches until the final surface is
placed except where timber sleepers or steel plates are positioned to bridge the trench.
O. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use
of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull
past each joint as completed.
P. Install soil waste drainage, storm and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN 80 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN 100 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Q. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
R. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems in locations indicated
and as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of Dubai Municipality.

2. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of Dubai Municipality.
S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

T. HDPE Heat Fusion Joining Systems: Pipe and fittings shall be Electro fusion welding,
according to the manufacturer recommended procedures. All electro bench welding and
coupling electro-fusion equipment shall be supplied directly from the manufacture. Piping
and joints shall be shop fabricated in a controlled environment when practical to ensure
proper alignment and welding of pipe.
U. The manufacturer shall provide fusion training for HDPE piping. The personnel operating
heat fusion joining equipment and on-site joint inspector shall be trained by the
manufacturer or manufacture’s authorized representative. The fusion equipment and
operator shall be required to demonstrate successful field experience.
A. Refer to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
3.5 CLEANOUTS ON SOIL WASTE VENT AND STORM WATER INSTALLATION
A. Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction of drainage pipes, greater than 45
degrees, inside the building, and where indicated on the drawings. Cleanouts shall be not
more than 30m apart in horizontal lines. A cleanout shall be provided at or near the foot of
each vertical waste or soil stack.
B. Cleanouts on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with finished
wall or floor. Pits or chases may be left in the wall or floor, provided they are of sufficient
size to permit removal of the cleanout plug and proper cleaning of the system.
C. Where it is necessary to conceal a cleanout plug, a heavy duty stainless steel covering plate
shall be provided, which will permit ready access to the plug.
D. Cleanout plugs shall be of heavy duty stainless steel with seal and lock. Final finish shall be
to the approval of the Architect.
E. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipe up to 100 mm pipe diameter and
not less than 100 mm for larger piping.
F. Cleanouts shall be so installed that there is a clearance of not less than 450 mm for the
purpose of rodding and cleaning.
G. Provide cleanout at foot of all stacks, changes of directions, at the ends of branch runs, in
straight runs as required and where indicated. Terminate as specified under “Cleanouts”.
A. Refer to Division 20 Section “Hangers and Supports”.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing
Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN 65
and larger.
D. Connect force-main piping to the following:
1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main or sanitary manhole.

2. Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge.
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the engineer.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-

in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Dubai Municipality to observe tests
specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Re inspection: If the engineer found that piping will not pass test or inspection, make
required corrections and arrange for re inspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by the engineer.
D. Test sanitary drainage, storm and vent piping according to the procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except
outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and
fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 30 kPa. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours during this time. Water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are airtight and watertight. Plug
vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce
air into piping system equal to pressure of 250 Pa. Use U-tube or manometer
inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain
constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
plumbing fixture connections for air and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

7. Performance test to be conducted as per BS 8301.
E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 30 kPa at the top of the crown of
the fitting. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in
test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Exposed PVC Piping to sunlight to be protected with two coats of UV resistant water-based
latex paint.
B. Exposed PVC pipes with in the car parking to be protected by approved type guard finish
subject to architect’s approval.
END OF SECTION
22 13 16

SECTION 22 13 19
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following drainage piping specialties:
1. Cleanouts.
2. Floor drains.
3. Roof flashing assemblies.
4. Through-penetration fire stop assemblies.
5. Roof drains.
6. Miscellaneous drainage piping specialties.
8. Manhole covers
9. Trench Drains
1. Division 22 13 16 Section "Sanitary Waste, Vent and Storm piping ".
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.
D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.
F. PUR: Polyurethane plastic.
G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, and accessories for the following:
22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Rev.00 Page 1 of 13

1. Oil interceptors.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
D. Samples to be provided for the items to be installed along with finishes like floor drains etc.
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in British
Standards and by Electricity Local Authority, by a testing agency acceptable to Local
Authority, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
sanitary and storm piping specialty components.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS:
A. Wall Clean outs: No hub dura coated cast iron body, gas and water tight ABS tapered
threaded plug and nickel bronze or stainless steel secured square smooth wall access cover
and frame. Finish to Architects approval.
B. Floor clean out: NEO-LOC / Push on Outlet heavy duty cleanout housing adjustable, Cast
Iron body without integral flange, secured scoriated cover with lifting device, with polished /
nickel bronze top. Finish to Architects approval.
2.2 FLOOR DRAIN:
A. Floor Drains, Shower Drains and Balcony Drains: Dura coated cast iron body with bottom
outlet combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with seepage slots and
Type – S stainless steel 316L square. Strainer medium duty.
B. Shower Drains: Shower Drain shall be made of stainless steel . Tile-in Floor Drain shall be
have 150x150mm size cover, with 22mm tile/marble insert depth, 110mm outlet, AISI 316L
C. Shower channel: Shower Channel drain shall be made of stainless steel.Tile-in Shower
channel shall be have 100x900mm (to be coordinated with Shower width) size cover, with
22mm tile/marble insert depth, 50mm outlet, AISI 316L

D. Funnel Drains: Dura coated cast iron body with bottom outlet combination invertible
membrane clamp and adjustable collar with Type-E polished nickel bronze strainer with 4”
diameter funnel.
E. Area Drains: Dura coated cast iron body and 12” Dia Top, with bottom outlet, seepage pan
and combination membrane flashing frame clamp and for heavy duty slotted grate with
sediment bucket, hinged grate, NEO-LOC gasket / Push on Outlet.
F. Floating Slab Drains: Dura coated cast iron upper and lower bodies, clamp collar, neoprene
flex gasket, isolation nipple, slotted polished bronze strainer with 100 mm diameter funnel.
G. Planter drains: Dura coated cast iron body with bottom and / or side outlet complete with
combination membrane flashing clamp/gravel guard, low silhouette dome and stainless
steel mesh screen over dome. A fine nylon mesh shall be provided over the stainless steel
screen to prevent ingress of soil.
2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thick, lead flashing

collar and skirt extending at least 200 mm from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot
reinforcement and counter flashing fitting.
1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.
2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:
1. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
2. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
3. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
4. Stack Fitting: Gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base
and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.
5. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.5 ROOF DRAINS
A. Rainwater outlet: 15” dia roof drain, ductile iron / cast iron body with combination membrane
flashing clamp, gravel guard (SS) and low silhouette polydome.
B. Rain water Down Spouts: Round stainless steel (Type-304) frame with secured, perforated
stainless steel hinged strainer to Architects approval.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected
piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. DN 50: 100-mm minimum water seal.

b. DN 65 and Larger: 125-mm minimum water seal.
B. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
3. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
4. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated
indirect waste piping.
C. Sleeve Flashing Device:
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve
for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe
extension in top of fitting that will extend 51 mm above finished floor and galvanized-
steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stacks piping.
D. Stack Flashing Fittings:
1. Description: Counter flashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for

terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
E. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.
Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
F. Expansion Joints:
1. Standard: British Standard.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
G. Air-Admittance Valves: Plastic housing with mechanical-operation sealing diaphragm,

designed to admit air into drainage and vent piping and to prevent transmission of sewer
gas into building.
1. Stack Vent Valve: Designed for installation as terminal on soil, waste, and vent
stacks, instead of stack vent extending through roof, in DN 50 to DN 100.
2. Fixture Vent Valve: Designed for installation on waste piping, instead of vent
connection, for single fixture, in DN 32 to DN 50.
2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 15-kg/sq. m, 1.2-mm thickness.
3. Burning: 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: Of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. General Applications: 3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness.
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: With 0.20 percent copper content and 1.01-mm minimum
thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include Z275 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized
finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: Flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 1.01-mm minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory
units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: British Standard, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.8 MANHOLE COVERS AND CATCH BASIN GRATINGS
A. All internal manhole covers and gratings etc. shall be constructed as per DM requirements.
All covers shall be ductile iron bolt down air tight double seal recessed top, medium duty.
B. Cover for external manholes subject to vehicular traffic shall be heavy duty ductile iron
single seal non rock heavy duty with push fit seal plate. Covers to be complete with lifting
key holes to BSEN 124. All covers shall be ductile iron and shall be grey epoxy coated, as
per DM specifications.
2.9 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Heavy duty ductile iron grates complying with BSEN-124 class. Ductile iron grade to BE
500/7 to ISO 1083 seating on angles. Test load of 400 kn. Concrete trench to be provided
as a part of structure with grip lining. Length and depth to be coordinated with structure.
Road gully per dm detail to be provided.
2.10 GREASE TRAPS
A. Grease traps are required wherever wastewater sources contain animal and vegetable
derived grease products.
B. The grease trap shall be fabricated, inspected, and tested for leakage before shipment from
the factory as a completely assembled system ready for installation.
C. Grease traps shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C1613 / Dubai Municipality
Standard Specification for Precast Concrete Grease Interceptor Tanks.

D. All grease traps shall be externally located, pre-manufactured, pre-cast concrete units
designed specifically for removing FOG (fat, oil, grease) from wastewater.
E. Provide a gasketed bolt-down manhole frame and cover.
F. Grease traps are to be designed for peak flow and sized based on required retention time.
Retention time shall be based on the manufacturer’s recommendation for operational
discharge of less than 200 mg/L of FOG during peak flows.
G. Grease traps shall be designed and certified to operate efficiently at their maximum flow
rate in GPM, and retain a minimum of twice its rated GPM in pounds of grease.
H. All design calculations and system designs shall be submitted to engineer for review and
approval.
I. Grease traps shall be sized in accordance with Standard PDI-G101 from the Plumbing and
Draining Institute.
J. Grease traps shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
K. Grease traps shall not be located under pavement but shall be located within five feet of a
paved vehicle access for cleaning and inspection, whenever possible.
L. Only waste from grease producing sources shall flow through the grease trap. All grease
traps shall be located upstream of the location where human waste enters the service line.
Sanitary wastes and other wastes shall flow through a separate lateral and connect to the
receiving main.
2.11 FULL AUTOMATIC GREASE SEPARATOR:
A. Fully automatic grease separator shall be manufactured as per EN1825 for free-standing
indoor installation, Fully automatic odour-free disposal, cleaning and refilling.
B. Inner cleaning and chopping, mixing & rinsing of grease content shall be with 175 bars
pressure and fresh water only. One standard potable water connection shall be provided for
cleaning of device needed.
C. Material of the body shall be PE in Round or Oval shape depending on nominal sizing and
space availability. Structural stability shall be guaranteed for 25 years for the tank and shall
be with vent pipe connection.
D. Switchbox/control display shall be connected to BMS for common fault messages during
operation. Electrical connection: 400V / 50 HZ / 6.9 kW
E. Filling device shall be provided with solenoid valve (connection ¾) for automatic refilling.
F. A separate coarse trap shall be provided at the inlet pipe avoid any solids entering into the
grease separator.
G. The grease separator shall be provided with separate pump for disposal and cleaning for
secured operation and reliability as per the below schedule:
1. Automatic high-pressure internal cleaning with pump.

a. Nominal pressure: 175 bar
b. Capacity: 13 l/min water consumption for cleaning

c. Chopping, mixing, rinsing in one process through high-pressure water
2. Disposal pump with free flow impeller.

d. Motor power: 3.0 kW/2850 rpm
e. Delivery performance: 20 m3/h at 1 bar medium delivery head (shall be custom-
ized for higher performance based on the project requirements)
H. Please refer to drainage drawings for capacity and Schedule of grease separator.
I. The Automatic Grease Separator shall have the following feature to be displaced in the
BMS for monitoring:
1. Grease level alarm for electronic measurement of layer of grease in the BMS.
2. Full warning (80%) and advance warning of fill level (50%) With two voltage-free
changeover contacts to display the warning in BMS.
2.12 OIL INTERCEPTOR:
A. Scope
The work covered by this section consists of the construction of a below ground oil
separator the Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, labour and materials necessary
to complete the work in accordance with the plans and specifications.
B. General Requirements
Oil Interceptor shall be of Class 1 Full Retention type Separator (Suitable for flow rate 3 L/S)
to reduce the risk of hydrocarbon pollutants causing groundwater contamination at the point
of discharge. Flow through the unit shall be by gravity. The internal design and configuration
shall ensure that contaminated water entering the unit is retained for a sufficient period to
ensure quiescent conditions within the separator.
Lighter than water pollutants, such as oils and petrol, shall rise to the surface of the water
and shall be retained within the separator. Separated liquid shall be discharged.
The separator design shall include the necessary requirements for: -

• Oil storage capacity
• Coalescer
• Automatic Closure Device
• Sludge storage.
• Oil level probe, Sludge level probe and alarm control panel.
C. Standards
European Standard – Separator systems for light liquids BS EN 858-1:2002
D. Performance Criteria
The separator shall be designed in accordance with the European Standard BS EN 858-1
and the Environment Agency’s Pollution Prevention Guidelines PPG3.
The oil separator shall meet the following requirements: -

• The separator shall have a Nominal Size (NS) that it is appropriate for the maximum flow
rate as shown on the approved drawings.
• The oil separator shall be designed to treat the whole of the specified flow and to
achieve a discharge concentration of less than 5 mg/litre of oil, i.e. the residual oil at the
outlet is <5mg/l.
• The oil separator shall be able to store up to the specified volume of separated oil
without affecting the separation quality.
E. Construction / Materials
The separator shall be manufactured from high grade GRP/Polyethylene in accordance with
BS 4994 / BS EN 976 and shall be constructed for transport to job site as one integral unit,
ready for immediate installation.
The separator shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and taking
into account specific site and ground conditions.
F. Components
The separator shall comprise chambers for Oil and sludge storage and shall be equipped
with access openings, fitted inlet/outlet connectors and vent points within necks / access
shafts.
The separator shall be gravity operated with non-turbulent flow through one or more
horizontal treatment chambers, utilising the underflow principle to retain light liquids in all
flow conditions, meeting invert elevations as dictated by the drawings.
The coalescence unit is where light liquids separation is enhanced reducing it to 5mg/litre or
less prior to discharge. Chambers shall be vented to the atmosphere. All vents shall
terminate at elevations above grade as indicated on the drawings. The vent lines from the
tank are primarily for pressure venting and equalization.
The top covers of the separator manways shall be removable. Covers shall be completely
casketed and sealed. Access covers shall be in accordance with EN 124 and shall be Class
D400 minimum.
Access covers with ventilation openings or those which can be bolted down, are not
permitted.
The separator shall be equipped with an automatic closure device seals and an oil sensor
alarm system to indicate that that the desired oil capacity has been reached.
G. Equipment
The separator shall be provided with an Automatic Closure Device to retain excess stored
oil and avoid contaminating the discharge. The automatic closure device shall seal off the
outlet when the retained oil reaches the pre-determined level.
Retained oil must be emptied from the unit once the level of oil is reached and the closure
device operated.
The automatic closure device shall be float operated so that it does not require any human
interference during filling operation and ensures the automatic shutting of the separator as
soon as the retention capacity is reached.

The separator shall include a coalescer unit to produce an improved discharge effluent
quality. The coalescer unit shall be stainless steel / non-metallic construction with durable
high volume reticulated inserts. The unit shall have a guide rail system and extension
handle with locating/ locking bracket.
The separator shall be supplied with a proprietary ‘fail safe’ automatic alarm/monitoring
system utilizing conductive probes for measurement of oil, and water levels. An alarm shall
be provided by the control unit to indicate when removal of the retained hydrocarbons is
required. The alarm shall be triggered by a probe which activates when the oil stored in the
separator reaches 90% of the allowable oil storage volume. The oil probe shall be fitted
within a dedicated tube located either in the body of the unit or within the access neck.
Any electrical device used within a separator or used to monitor sensors placed within a
separator shall be intrinsically safe and certified to a suitable explosion protection standard.
The location of the monitoring device, such as the alarm or ‘separator management system’
control panel, shall be located within an external kiosk at ground level as shown on the
approved drawings and conform to the requirements of BS EN 60079-10.
Alarm signals on the panel shall repeat the alarm to a set of volt-free contacts.
H. Installation
The unit shall be installed on a suitable concrete base slab and surrounded with a concrete
backfill. Tank to be surrounded in high-sulphate resistant C16/20 grade concrete in
accordance with supplier installation guidelines.
Electrical warning devices for light liquids and other electrical devices housed in the
separator shall be suitable for operation in a zone 0 hazardous area, as BS EN 60079
Each chamber will incorporate a single vent point; these shall extend above ground and as
a minimum of above flood level and as per Local municipal requirements. Vent pipe height
and location shall comply with relevant Local municipal standard details for Manhole
Chamber Vent Pipes.
Vent pipework from multiple chambers shall not be manifolded below ground level. Vent
pipes should be not less than 75mm diameter and of robust construction.
Separators should be vented in accordance with BS EN 752, subject to Public Works

Authority requirements.
I. Maintenance
The separator shall be provided with sufficient access points to allow for the inspection and
cleaning of all internal chambers.
A tripod and hoist or similar mechanical assist lifting equipment shall be used for raising and
lowering the coalescer unit during maintenance. This shall be undertaken in accordance
with Manufacturer’s instructions.
A portable pump is to be used for sludge and Oil removal/emptying.
J. SCHEDULE
FLOW
RATE TREATMENT TYPE MATERIAL ALARM UNIT
(L/S)

Class – 1 as per Sludge and Oil

3 L/s Full Retention GRP
EN858 Level alarms
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Anchor grease interceptors and solids interceptors to concrete bases.
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 480-mm centers around full perimeter of base.
2. For installed equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be imbedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
5. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 20 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining
materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN 100. Use DN 100 for larger drainage piping
unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN 100 and smaller and 30 m for
larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with
finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types
indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 750 mm or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 6.35-
mm total depression.
b. Radius, 750 to 1500 mm: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 1500 mm or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 25-mm total depression.
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through
roof.
H. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.
I. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic stacks at floor penetrations.
J. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between
drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where
penetrated.
2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
K. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 51 mm above floor.
L. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.
M. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.
N. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
O. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.
P. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy
access and maintenance.
Q. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.
R. Install sand /oil interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. Coordinate oil-interceptor
storage tank and gravity drain with Division 2 Section "Fuel Oil Distribution."
S. Install sand / oil interceptors with cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors that
do not have integral cleanout on outlet. Install trap on interceptors that do not have integral
trap and are connected to sanitary drainage and vent systems.
T. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.
U. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.

V. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
W. Install trap guard in all the floor drains.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 10 00 Sections. Drawings

C. Sand / Oil Interceptors: Connect inlet, outlet, vent, and gravity drawoff piping to unit; flow-
control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping; and gravity drawoff and suction piping to oil
storage tank.
3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are
required. Join flashing according to the following if required:
1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 30-kg/sq. m, 2.4-mm thickness or thicker.
Solder joints of lead sheets 20-kg/sq. m, 1.6-mm thickness or thinner.
2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.
B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 250 mm, and
skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200
mm around specialty.
C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.
3.5 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate

or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Oil interceptors.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in
addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 20 05 53 Section
"Piping and Equipment Identification."
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris
and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

to adjust, operate, and maintain grease removal devices. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION
22 13 19

SECTION 22 14 29
SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and relevant Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for sanitary drainage
piping systems in buildings:
1. Submersible sump pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of Sump pump specified. Include certified
performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of
selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sewage pump to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
D. Warranty
1. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of handover

2. Warranty shall include all parts labor for 24 months
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: As defined in UL or British Standards

and Electricity Local Authority, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
22 14 29 Sump Pumps Rev.00 Page 1 of 5

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases and pits. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork requirements are specified elsewhere in the civil specification”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex, single-stage, centrifugal,

submersible, direct-connected sump pumps complying with UL 778 or equal. Sump pumps
shall be suitable for handling foul water containing dirt, sand, fibres, solids etc. or waste
water containing dirt, sand, fibres etc as appropriate for the application. The metallic
construction impellers shall be designed to minimize chances of blockages and maximize
the size of solids which can be handled. The pumps shall be suitable for “stationery wet”
installation i..e the discharge connection shall be fixed to the sump floor (with stainless steel
fixings) and the pump shall automatically engage (or disengage) when it is lowered along
the guide bar (or raised). All guide bars, guide bar supports, fixings, lifting chains drop rods
for fixing float switches, pipe supports etc. within the sump shall be stainless steel. The
pump shall be externally pitch epoxy coated. Pump shall be with cutter arrangement.
Control panel assembly shall be done locally at factory authorized supplier’s facility.
B. Casing: Stainless steel with stainless-steel inlet strainer / Cast iron casing, legs that
elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange
suitable for piping connection.
C. Impeller: Stainless steel / Cast iron or other corrosion-resistant material.
D. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball
bearings and double / single-mechanical seals.
E. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection; three-
conductor waterproof power cable of length required, and with grounding plug and cable-
sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 20 Section
"Motors." The sump pump motor shall be suitable for 400 volts, 3-phase, 50 Hz power
supply, have Class ‘F’ insulation and IP 68 protection
F. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor with moisture alarm as per

manufacturer’s standard.
G. Pump Discharge Piping: The discharge pipe within the sump shall be PVC-U to BS-3505
Class E. A flanged connection shall be provided between the cast/ductile iron pipes and the
Upvc pressure pipework. The gate valves shall be resiliently seated of ductile iron
construction. The non-return valve shall be swing pattern of ductile iron construction. A
galvanized steel frame shall be provided around the pipes to protect them from mechanical
damage.
K. Controls: IP 55 enclosure, wall mounted; with four mechanical or micro pressure switches
in water tight enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to
alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one
pump cannot handle load. The sump pump control panels shall be IP 55 suitable for wall
mounting and equipped with anti condensation heater. The panel shall incorporate the
following:
1. Panel shall be equipped for each pump with:

a. MCB
b. Starter
c. Hand / Off/Auto (HOA) switch
d. Phase Failure Trip
e. ELS with audio and visual indications
f. A cyclic relay and 3 position (P1/P2/, P2/P1 and Auto) Duty selector switch
shall also be provided.
2. Selected duty pump shall operate independently controlled by float level control
switch when (HOA) switch in ‘Auto’ position. Duty selection shall be carried out from
the duty selector switch. The standby pump shall assist if required.
3. A set of four level switches shall be provided to control the operation as under:
a. Low level switch to stop the pumps.

b. Level 1 switch to start the duty pump
c. Level 2 switch to start “Duty Assist” pump.
d. Level 3 switch to raise a “high level” alarm.
4. Pumps shall operate as in (2) above except that duty selection shall be carried out by
cyclic relay and duty selector switch shall be in Auto position.
5. Pumps shall be capable of operating independently or simultaneously with HOA

switch in ‘Hand’ position overriding the float level switch.
6. In the event of duty pump failure, stand-by pump shall automatically operate.
7. Panel shall have on front door:
a. Duty selector switch

b. Hand off auto switch for each pump
c. Run and trip lamps for each pump
d. Panel alive lamp
e. Control circuit breaker fail lamp
f. Labels for above
g. Earth leakage
L. Operation: Each waste water pump is for 100% duty (i.e. one of the pumps is duty pump
and the other is standby). However, in the event of excessive flow into the chamber, if the
duty pump is unable to cope the standby pump shall be brought on to assist. Therefore the
panel design shall allow for two pumps working simultaneously
2.2 LEVEL REGULATOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
A. Level regulator (Float switch) for the drainage shall be ABS float switch type KS with Micro
switch in a plastic casing, shall freely suspended at the desired height from its own cable
and counter weight. When the liquid reach the pre-determined level, the micro switch shall
close or open the circuit, hereby starting or actuating an alarm device.
B. Regulator casing shall be made of Polypropylene and cable shall be H07RN-3G1.0 or

A05RN-4G0.75.
C. Length of the cable shall be suitably selected to connect the control panel without any joint

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of drainage and vent
piping connections before sump pump installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
B. Install sump pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.
C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
D. Suspend wet-pit-mounted, vertical sump pumps from pit covers. Make direct connections
to drainage piping.
E. Set submersible pumps on basin floors. Make direct connections to drainage piping.
1. Anchor guide-rail supports to pit bottoms and sidewalls or covers. Install pumps so
pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps are
lowered into place.
F. Install sump pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins
according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during
concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top
surface is flush with finished floor.
G. Construct sump pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set pit curb frame
recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so
top surface is flush with finished floor.
H. Install packaged, submersible pump units and make direct connections to drainage and
vent piping.
I. Install packaged, wastewater pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless recessed
installation is indicated. Make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.
J. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary, Waste, Vent,
and Storm Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal to or greater than size
of pump basin vent connection. Refer to Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste, Vent and
Storm Piping."
1. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions
on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as connected
piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves for sanitary
waste piping.
D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
2. Verify bearing lubrication.
3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not
operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:
1. Start motors.
2. Open discharge valves slowly.
3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.
1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as
required for system application.
2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not
indicated, for normal operation.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

to adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps.
END OF SECTION
22 14 29

SECTION 22 33 00
ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS (CENTRAL)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers providing all labor and materials for the complete first class installation of
point-of-use electric storage (6 - 50 gallon) tank type domestic water heaters indicated and
scheduled on Contract Drawings complete with all controls, piping, valves, wiring, supports,
accessories, testing, and other normal parts required for complete, code compliant, operable
installation that is acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.
1. 2009 Edition of the International Plumbing Code
2. Underwriters Laboratories Listings
3. 2008 Edition of the National Electric Code
A. Heaters shall be designed to limit the maximum temperature to avoid scalding.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years documented

experience specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section.
C. Provide equipment with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity

permanently identified.
D. Water heater shall meet or exceed the minimum energy factor requirements of ASHRAE
Standard 90.1b -2001. / European standard.
22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters Rev.00 Page 1 of 5

E. Installer Qualifications: Company shall have minimum three years documented experience
specializing in performing the Work of this section. Installation of plumbing systems shall be
performed by individuals licensed by Plumbing Examiners as a Master Plumber. Installation
may be performed by Apprentice Plumbers provided they are registered with the local board
of plumbing examiners and under direct supervision of a licensed plumber. All installation
shall be supervised by a licensed Master Plumber.
F. Products and installation of specified products shall be in conformance with applicable

European standard.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Include dimension Drawings of water heaters indicating piping, components and required
connections.
2. Manufacturer's data sheets, wiring diagrams and Installation Instructions.
3. Provide complete description of equipment materials, electrical characteristics, options

provided, warranty, maximum water pressure requirements and code compliance.
B. Record Documents:
1. Provide full written description of manufacturer’s warranty.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
A. Accept products on Site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. Maintain products in
factory packaging until installation.
B. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps when not factory provided. Maintain caps in place
until installation.
C. Protect components from damage after installation.
D. Do not allow use of heater for any reason, other than testing, during the construction phase
of this project.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide a three-year warranty in writing against tank leaks caused by
corrosion and one-year parts warranty against operational failure due to faulty manufacturing
or materials.
B. The complete system shall be warranted in writing against defects in materials or

workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year after date of Substantial
Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, local requirements,
2.2 POINT OF USE DOMESTIC WATER HEATER
A. Acceptable manufacturers
1. Ariston
2. A.O. Smith
B. Furnish and domestic hot water heaters with dimensions, capacities and electrical
characteristics as scheduled on the Contract Drawings and as outlined herein. This
Specification describes minimum quality and performance requirements. Variations of system
components by the individual referenced manufacturers are acceptable for installation in this
project provided they meet or exceed all of the requirements indicated herein, are compatible
with the electrical service provided and fit properly in the allocated space.
C. Heater shall have 8 bar working pressure and be equipped with extruded high density anode
rod. All internal surfaces of the heater exposed to water shall be glass-lined with an alkaline
borosilicate composition that has been fused to steel by firing at a temperature range of
1600°F.
D. Direct-Immersion threaded electric heating elements heating elements shall be medium watt
density with zinc plated copper sheath. Each element shall be controlled by an individually
mounted thermostat and high temperature cutoff switch. Heaters having single elements.
E. The heater outer jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall be provided with screwed
access cover for service and maintenance and shall enclose the tank with foam insulation.
F. Water heater shall have a properly sized, factory provided pressure relief safety valve.
G. The tank drain valve shall be located in the front for ease of servicing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide 4” high reinforced concrete housekeeping pad beneath floor mounted water heaters
or provide heater with legs/base manufactured by heater manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable local requirements, referenced standards and
C. Install water heaters, piping, wiring and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.

D. Furnish all supports required by the equipment included in this Contract in accordance with
the manufacturer’s published instructions.
E. Each water heater located above ceiling or at any location where leakage would result in
damage to the building or its contents shall be provided with and set within a safety pan
equipped with a minimum ¾ inch drain connection. Safety pans shall be minimum 24 gauge
galvanized sheet metal and be three inches larger on all sides than the water heater, with a
minimum depth of two inches.
F. Connect and extend copper piping from pan drain connection and temperature and pressure
relief valve and discharge separately to the exterior of the building and terminate between 6
and 24 inches above grade at a visible location that cannot cause damage to property or
personnel. Relief valve shall not discharge into safety pan.
G. Safety pan and relief valve drain lines shall be copper and installed so that all water will drain
completely out of the piping. Where it is impractical or physically impossible to extend a drain
line to the building exterior, drain lines shall discharge separately into a floor drain,
housekeeping mop sink or other location approved by the building inspector.
H. Each water heater shall be provided with clear access and unobstructed passageway that is
adequate to allow removal and replacement.
I. Install heater in a vertical position with a clearance on all sides for servicing. Coordinate
location of unit to avoid conflicts with other system or building components.
J. Furnish and install all necessary valves, strainers, unions, etc. to facilitate proper functioning
and servicing of equipment.
K. Provide dielectric isolation device where copper lines connect to ferrous lines or equipment.
L. Install an accessible line size shutoff valve in cold water inlet within two feet of heater.
M. Provide heat trap inlet piping for storage type heaters to prevention migration of heated water
into cold water system.
N. Provide heat trap in outlet piping for storage type heaters serving non-circulated distribution
systems.
O. Provide a vacuum relief valve in cold water supply to heaters having bottom feed inlet. Install
valve in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
P. Provide a temperature gauge in the outlet piping adjacent to storage type heaters. Locate
gauge in an easily readable position.
Q. Flush water supply line to remove all air, scale and dirt prior to connecting heater.
R. Take precautions to prevent heat generated by soldering procedures from being transmitted
to heater components.
S. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor for power and wiring required. Verify that electrical
power is connected to a properly grounded dedicated branch circuit of proper voltage rating
and equipped with ground fault interrupter. Each heater shall be provided with an
independent circuit. Insure that the correct wire and circuit breaker sizes are provided.

T. When all plumbing installation is completed, check for leaks and take corrective action before
proceeding. Flow hot water until temperature has stabilized. Verify and insure that the water
meets scheduled temperature at all outlets. Clean heater water prior to final inspection of
installation.
3.3 TRAINING
A. Contractor shall instruct and acquaint the Owner with the proper functioning, operation and
maintenance of the water heater and all associated installed components.

SECTION 23 01 30.51
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cleaning of the following existing duct systems:

1. Supply system.
2. Return system.
3. Exhaust system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASCS: Air system cleaning specialist.

B. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with

requirements.
B. Qualification Data: For ASCS.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. ASCS Qualifications: A member of a nationally recognized nonprofit industry organization

dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.
1. Certification: Employ a staff of ASCSs certified by a nationally recognized certification
program.
2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by a nationally recognized program and organization.
3. Experience: Submit records of experience in the field of HVAC systems cleaning.
4. Equipment, Materials, and Labor: Have equipment, materials, and labor required to
perform specified services.
B. Comply with current published standards of NADCA.
23 01 30.51 HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning Rev.00 Page 1 of 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable
materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G90 (Z275) coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to
view.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized
sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for lengths 900 mm or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Rectangular Duct Door: Double wall; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and
thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25-
by-25-mm butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized-steel sheet; with bendover tabs and foam gaskets.
2. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a. Less Than 300 mm Square: Secure with two sash locks.
b. Up to 450 mm Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c. Up to 600 by 1200 mm: Three hinges and two compression latches.
d. Sizes 600 by 1200 mm and Larger: Four hinges and two compression latches.
C. Round Duct Door: Double wall; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 25-
mm thickness. Include cam latches.
1. Frame: Galvanized-steel sheet; with spin-in notched frame.
D. Pressure Relief Access Door: Double wall; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill
and thickness as required for duct pressure class. Include vision panel with latches and retaining
chain.
1. Frame: Galvanized-steel sheet; with bendover tabs and foam gaskets.
E. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
F. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine systems to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for
performance of work.
B. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.
C. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CLEANING
A. Engage a qualified ASCS to clean the following systems:

1. Supply system.
2. Return system.
3. Exhaust system.
B. Perform cleaning before air balancing or mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical
devices before cleaning.
C. Use duct-mounted access doors, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for
inspection.
1. Install additional duct-mounting access doors to comply with duct cleaning standards.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Replace
damaged and deteriorated flexible ducts.
3. Reseal rigid-fiberglass-duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices.
4. Replace damaged fusible links on fire and smoke dampers. Replacement fusible links
shall be same rating as those being replaced.
5. Remove and reinstall ceiling components to gain access for duct cleaning. Clean ceiling
components after they have been removed and replaced.
D. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and restore to
their marked position on completion.
E. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. Where venting vacuuming system inside building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent
collection efficiency for 0.3-micron size (or greater) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system outside building, use filtration to contain debris removed
from the HVAC system and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and
other points of entry into building.
F. Clean the following metal-duct system components by removing visible surface contaminants and
deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
3. Air-handling-unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air
wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,
filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators, except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
room.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components.
G. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal-duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of ducts so areas being cleaned are under negative
pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct liner.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment, and do not permit duct
liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or
delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures.
7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present; use according
to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
H. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment, including
biocidal agents and protective coatings.
2. Visually inspect metal-duct systems for contaminants.
3. Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect duct systems.
3.3 DUCT ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install duct-mounting access doors where access doors do not currently exist to allow for the
cleaning of ducts, accessories, and terminal units as follows:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Downstream from volume dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.
3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers; reset or install new fusible links.
4. Before and after each change in direction, at maximum 15-mspacing.
5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
D. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 200 by 125 mm.
2. Two-Hand Access: 300 by 150 mm.
3. Head and Hand Access: 460 by 250 mm.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 530 by 355 mm.
5. Body Access: 635 by 355 mm.
6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 635 by 430 mm.
E. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 200 mm in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 250 mm in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 300 mm in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 460 mm in diameter.
5. Body Access: 600 mm in diameter.
F. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, pressure relief access doors:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 175 mm in diameter.
2. Two-Hand Access: 250 mm in diameter.
3. Head and Hand Access: 330 mm in diameter.
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 480 mm in diameter.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Reconnect ducts to fans and air-handling units with existing flexible connectors after cleaning
ducts and flexible connectors. Replace existing damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors.
B. For fans developing static pressures of 1250 Pa and higher, cover replacement flexible
connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
C. Reconnect terminal units to supply ducts with existing flexible ducts or replace damaged and
deteriorated existing flexible ducts with maximum 300-mm lengths of new flexible duct.
D. Reconnect diffusers or light troffer boots to low-pressure ducts with existing flexible ducts or
replace damaged and deteriorated existing flexible ducts with maximum 1500-mm lengths of
flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
E. Reconnect existing and new flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
A. Gravimetric Analysis: Sections of metal-duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, may be tested
for cleanliness according to NADCA vacuum test gravimetric analysis.
1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels,
system shall have passed cleanliness verification.
2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness
verification will have failed and metal-duct system shall be recleaned and reverified.
B. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning shall restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of
pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not known, coil
will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue, based on
thorough visual inspection.
C. Report results of tests in writing.
END SECTION 23 01 30.51

SECTION 23 05 13
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
26.
B. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish starters for HVAC Work. Motor starters shall be
provided in accordance with Division 26 Specifications. Some motors furnished in mechanical
equipment rooms shall have starters furnished and installed as part of Division 26 (as per
Specification Section 26 29 14, Motor Starters). Coordinate with Division 26.
D. ECM (Electronically Commutated Motor) motors on terminal units, fan-coil units, and
computer room air conditioning units are except from specification requirements that cannot
apply due to different electrical design characteristics.
23 05 13 Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment’s Rev.00 Page 1 of 10

9. NEMA RV 3 - Application and Installation Guidelines for Flexible and Liquidtight Flexible
Locations.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer.

3. Rated volts.
10. Service factor.
1. NEMA frame size.

4. Time rating.
0% load.
1. No load amperes.
2. Safe stall time.
0% load.



the Contract price.
1.6 WARRANTY
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
enclosure type.

I. All air handling unit motor(s) with single and fan array arrangements, exhaust fan motors,
chilled and hot water pump motors shall be compatible with variable frequency drive
controllers. Equipment manufacturer shall coordinate with VFD manufacturer to ensure
compatibility. Characteristics of motors furnished on equipment shall be furnished to VFD
manufacturer for review, prior to installing motor on equipment. VFD’s shall be furnished with
driven equipment and shall be run tested as an equipment unit at factory prior to shipment.
Submit run test report prior to shipping. F.O.B. of motors to factory shall be by the equipment
manufacturer.
J. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specified or noted otherwise on the
K. Motors ¼ to ¾ hp shall be Subtype II and meet the minimum requirements of EPAct92 for
L. Motors 1 to 200 hp shall be Subtype I and meet the minimum requirements of NEMA Table


characteristics.

motors.

data.
L. Bearings:

supplied.
2.7 RATING

B. Voltage:

Table below.

1/6 – 1/3 1.35 1.35 1.35 1.35
½ 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.15
¾ 1.25 1.25 1.15 1.15
1 1.25 1.15 1.15 1.15
1.5-150 and above 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
150
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type.
B. Single-phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers shall be permanent split capacitor
type.
C. Single-phase motors for fans shall be capacitor start, capacitor run type.
D. Motors located in exterior locations and in direct drive axial fans, roll filters, humidifiers and
draw-through air units shall be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-sealed type.
3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 TESTING

DATE
SHEET OF
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NO.
HP , FLA , LOCATION

INSULATION CLASS
MEASURED CONDITIONS

SECTION 23 05 17
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Sleeves.
5. Grout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.4 SLEEVES

23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC piping, Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.
3. Metraflex Company (The).
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5. Proco Products, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling


match piping OD.
2.5 GROUT

PART 3 - EXECUTION

sleeves.

system.

level.
ring is specified.



system
system.
system
system.


SECTION 23 05 19
METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
2. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Water temperature gauges/thermometers

2. Pressure/altitude gauges
3. Temperature and pressure test points
4. Digital Temperature Meter
5. Chilled Water or Condenser Water flow meters and Kw/Hr Meters
1. Section 23 2113 – Hydronic Piping

2. Section 23 0943 – Analog control equipment
3. Section 23 0923 – Direct-Digital Control Equipment
4. Section 23 0993 – BMS Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls
D. BS 5235 Specification for dial-type expansion thermometers; 1975
E. BS EN 837 - Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions, metrology,

requirements and testing
F. BS 759 - Valves, gauges and other safety fittings for application to boilers and to piping
installations for and in connection with boilers. Specification for valves, mountings and fittings
G. BS EN 13190 Dial thermometers
23 05 19 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

A. As a minimum water temperature gauges/thermometer shall be installed at the following positions

in addition to any other particular position stated elsewhere or indicated on the drawing:
1. On flow and return connections to heating and chilled water coils except on individual fan coil
units and induction type terminal units.
2. On flow and return chilled and condenser water connections to water chillers.
3. On the inlet and discharge connections to cooling towers.
4. On the cold feed connection to the HWS cylinders.
5. On the main HWS secondary flow and return connections to HWS cylinders.
6. On the flow and return connections to each heating boiler.
7. On the main common flow header from the water chillers and heating boilers.
8. On the primary flow and return connections to each HWS cylinder.
9. On branch return connections to the main return chilled water and heating headers.
10. On the flue connection to each boiler
11. On all connections to water plate heat exchangers
B. As a minimum pressure gauges and gauge cocks shall be fitted to indicate system
pressures/heads at the following positions in addition to any other particular position stated
elsewhere or indicated on the drawings:
1. On chilled water connections to each water chiller.

2. On condenser water connections to each water chiller.
3. Pressure differential gauges across the suction and discharge connection of every circulating
pump.
4. On the discharge of every spray pump.
5. On flow connections to cooling towers.
6. On the primary heating connections to the HWS cylinders.
7. On the inlet and outlet connection to pressure reducing valves.
8. On the inlet and outlet connections to strainers (32 mm and above).
9. On all inlet and outlet connections of water plate heat exchangers
C. As a minimum differential pressure gauges shall be applied to across:
1. Chilled water evaporators to each water chiller.

2. Condenser water connections to each water chiller.
3. Across the suction and discharge connection of every circulating pump.
4. As a minimum test plugs shall be installed at the following positions in addition to any other
particular position stated elsewhere or indicated on the drawings:
5. On the flow and return connections to each terminal heat transfer unit i.e. across each coil,
evaporator, condenser, heat exchanger etc.
6. On each port of every automatic valve.
7. On flow and return connections to each heating and cooling coil.
8. On the suction and discharge of each circulating or transfer pump.
9. On the inlet and outlet connections to strainers (32 mm and below).
10. On the flow and return of each branch line.
D. As a minimum Kw/hr energy meters comprising flow meter and supply / return temperature sensors
shall be provided in the following locations:
1. At the discharge of the Primary CHW pumps

2. At each main branch on the CHW and LTHW network as indicated on the drawings, schedules,
specifications or BMS system.
E. As a minimum water meters shall be provided in the following are areas for individual domestic
water metering for monitoring and management purposes:
1. Main incoming water supply (check meter against local authority meter)
2. Domestic hot water supply
3. Boiler make up to feed tank
4. Water Features
5. TSE sub meters on Landscape System
6. Any other area indicated on the drawings, schedules or in these specifications
F. As a minimum gas meters shall be provided in the following are areas:
1. Main line from LPG tanks

2. Any other area indicated on the drawings, schedules or in these specifications
1.5 SUBMITTALS
gage.
D. Contractor to provide the following information as part of a complete and comprehensive technical
submittal:
1. Operating Range
2. Total Range
3. Accuracy
4. BMS interfaces
E. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manuals" specified in Division 1
1. Water temperature gauges/thermometers

2. Pressure/altitude gauges
3. Temperature and pressure test points
4. Digital Temperature Meter
5. Chilled Water or Condenser Water flow meters and Kw/Hr Meters.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
2.1 TEMPERATURE GUAGES/ THERMOMETERS
A. Temperature ranges for Guages / Thermometers are to be as follows

1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 100˚C with 1˚C scale divisions
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 500˚C with 1˚C scale divisions

3. Chilled Water: -25˚C to 25˚C
4. Low Temperature Hot Water: 0 to 100˚C with 1˚C scale divisions
B. Accuracy to be +/- 1 percent of range span

C. Temperature gauges/thermometers shall be 100 mm diameter gas filled type acting through
mechanical linkage to BS EN 13190
D. Matt black case and polished chrome bezel and glass face. Horizontal or vertical rigid stem to suit
the particular application, black indicating pointer with red hand set and graduated in °C with the
range equal to twice the normal operating temperature.
E. Pointer movement to be clockwise for increase in temperature
F. Where gauges are externally located they shall be of weather resistant construction.
2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test thermometer
1. Material: Brass for use in copper pipework
2. Material: Stainless Steel for use in steel piping
3. Expansion neck length to be provided as required. Nominal thickness of 50mm but not less
than thickness of insulation.
4. Insertion length to extend 1/3 of pipe diameter
5. Cap to be threaded with chain permanently attached to socket
6. Heat transfer fluid to be oil or graphite
2.3 STATIC PRESSURE GUAGES

A. Accuracy to be +/- 1 percent of range span
B. Pressure guages shall be 100 mm diameter gas filled, bourdon tube type to BS 837-1
C. Matt black case and polished chrome bezel and glass face. Horizontal or vertical rigid stem to suit
the particular application, black indicating pointer with red hand set and graduated in kPa with the
range equal to twice the normal operating pressure with normal operation indicated as the mid-point
of the scale
D. Where gauges are externally located they shall be of weather resistant construction.
E. Where pressure gauges are fitted on boilers and pressure vessels clearly mark with operating and
maximum permissible working heads in accordance with BS 759
F. Connect to pipelines via matched guage cocks and cock connectors
2.4 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL GAUGES

A. Manufactured in accordance with BS EN 837-1 from 316L stainless steel where in contact with the
water.
B. Direct mounting of two independent bottom inlet Bourdon tube type linked to a single pinion gear
driving an adjustable red pointer which shall have a bi-directional differential range
C. 90 mm diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background, front
recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
2.5 TEMPERATURE / PRESSURE TEST PLUGS

A. Nickel-plated, brass-body test plugs in DN15 fitting are to be provided

B. Length to be as required to extend beyond insulation and cladding

C. Pressure rated to 3450kPa minimum
D. Core insert to be self sealing valve suitable for insertion of 3mm OD probe from dial type
thermometer or pressure guage
E. Core material for Air, Water, Gas from -7˚C to +93˚C to be chlorosulfonated polyethelene synthetic
rubber or neoprene
F. Test plug to be gasketed and threaded with retention chain or strap
2.6 ENERGY METERS

A. General
B. The contractor shall provide a fully working installation including all necessary hardware, devices,
software, engineering, commissioning, integration, networking and training etc. The system shall
facilitate remote monitoring of all energy meters via a PC based system and be complete with
printing facility for the automatic billing system. The Kw/Hr meter system may be connected via an
independent MBus network or connected directly to the BMS
C. The flow meter / Kw/Hr meter units shall be complete with one inline ultrasonic sensor, two
matching insertion type temperature sensors and isolated analogue outputs for supply / return
temperature 4 – 20 ma or 0-10 vdc. Unit shall be field calibrated and shall be provided with
necessary communication modules etc. for interface with BMS or central station network for remote
reading.
D. Material
1. Integrator top: SAN
2. PCB casing: ABS
3. Connection unit and bracket: PP
4. Gaskets: Sarlink 3150B
5. Flow meter to be Ultrasonic Type.
6. Temperature Sensors – Pt 500 with 10 m of cabling.
E. Approvals
1. All meters shall be certified for use either in the USA or Europe for use by district energy utility
providers.
2. The meter output shall be certified for use in billing.
3. Complies with test: OIML R75, EN1434, DS2340, PTB.
F. Performance
1. Accuracy: +/- (0.15+2/ΔT)%
2. Range: 1 °C – 40 °C
3. Flow Calculation: 30s intervals
4. Back up battery 20 year life
5. Power supply 220-240V AC, 50 Hz, 1 ph.
6. Backlit LCD display
G. Display Features
1. Accumulated thermal energy: MWh
2. Accumulated water flow: m3
3. Actual thermal power: kW
4. Actual water flow: l/h
5. Supply temperature: °C
6. Return temperature: °C
7. Peak thermal power: kWP
8. Peak water flow: l/h P
9. Hour Counter: HRS
10. Factory calibrated RS-232 data communication including inlet temp, outlet temp, volumetric
flow, calculated energy, and delta temp
2.7 TRANSIENT TIME ULTRASONIC CHILLED WATER METERS:
A. The Contractor shall provide transient time ultrasonic chilled water metering assemblies, sized for
the manufacturer’s minimum rated flow at minimum building load without exceeding maximum
allowable velocity at full building load. Maximum flow rate shall be pumped rate plus 20%.
Temperature shall be sensed by platinum RTD’s inserted in vertical separable thermometer wells.
Data from a flow sensor and temperature sensor shall be input into a software driven programmable
meter which shall calculate and display a read out of power (tons) and energy (ton hours) and shall
furnish a remote output signal for input into the Building Automation System. The meter
manufacturer shall furnish initial set−up and calibration of the metering assembly.
3. PART-3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Install in full accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install pressure gauges in piping tee with gauge cock at the most readable position. Select gauges
with bottom side or rear inlet as appropriate
C. Install snubbers on all pressure gauges installed in close proximity of pump discharge.
D. Provide red set hands to indicate normal or critical pressure in gauges subjected to variable
pressures.
E. Use remote reading type pressure gauges with armored capillary tubes, when installed above 2 Ms
from FFL.
F. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6. Provide full
line size valve bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
G. Provide one pressure Gauge per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and discharge
of pump. Pipe to Gauge.
H. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 60
mm for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation.
I. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
J. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets.
Refer to Section 23 0943. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted
thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers are not required.
K. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 3 m downstream of mixing dampers, coils, or other
devices causing air turbulence.
L. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
M. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

N. Install Gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level.
Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
O. Adjust Gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
P. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets
3.2 THERMOMETERS
A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer standing on floor.
B. Install as shown on plans and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in vertical position. Fill
well with oil or graphite and secure cap. Provide extension on insulated systems. Install in socket
extending to center of pipe.
3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
position.

3.4 TEST PLUGS
3.5 FLOW MEASURING METERS
A. Install where shown on plans and elsewhere as indicated. Provide manufacturer-recommended

upstream and downstream straight distances.
B. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable
position. Maintain manufacturer-recommended minimum upstream and downstream distances.
C. Window Flow Meters: Install in vertical upward position with impact tube mounted in bushing
centered on pipe with 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of straight
unrestricted piping for 1-1/4 inches and smaller, 20 pipe diameters upstream and 10 pipe diameters
downstream for 1-1/2 inches and larger. Calibrate meter after installation in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Calibrate meter after installation in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Connect meter to EMCS. Coordinate with controls contractor and provide all necessary
interconnections for accurate transmission of data.

SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Hangers, supports, and anchors for HVAC equipment, tanks, and piping systems.
2. Supplementary steel for support or attachment of HVAC Valves, equipment, and

piping to general construction elements of the project.
D. ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
1. ASHRAE Chapter 41: Absorption, Cooling, Heating, and Refrigeration Equipment
E. IBC: International Building Code
F. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
Supports."
23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping and Equipment’s Rev.00 Page 1 of 12
1.5 SUBMITTALS
it.
shall be furnished.
same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
installation.
steel channel.
section.

channel.

on the channel.
guides.
acoustic guides.
riser clamps.
2.4 WALL SUPPORTS

2.5 RUBBER SUPPORT INSERTS, SHIELDS AND SADDLES
A. Provide rubber support inserts made from molded hard rubber at all hanger and support
locations of insulated pipework, to transmit pipe load without crushing the insulation. The
rubber density shall not be less than 1000 kg/m3 and shall not exceed 1200 kg/m3. The
thickness of the inserts shall be same as the insulation, and vapor barrier shall be
continuous across the outside of the inserts.
Rubber support inserts shall be with sufficient width to cover the thermal insulation joints,
material control and molding quality to bear imposed pipe loads.
Usage of steel inserts within the rubber will not be permitted under any circumstance.
Standard width of the inserts shall be as per the following schedule:
Pipe Size Width

up to 50 mm 25mm
65 mm to 125 mm 38mm
150 mm to 350 mm 50mm
400 mm to 450 mm 75mm
500 mm and above 100mm
B. At locations where, insulated pipe is installed on rollers, provide insulation protection shields
outside the vapor barrier (MSS Type 40) between the rubber support inserts and roller.
The shields shall have flared ends to prevent cutting into the insulation and shall cover the
lower 180o of the pipe. The length of the shields shall be as per manufacturer’s standard
lengths, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
C. Pipe covering protection saddles (MSS Type 39) may be installed at support locations of
ferrous hot water piping, instead of rubber support inserts.
D. If pipe covering protection saddles are installed with insulated non-ferrous or chilled water
pipe, the surfaces in contact with the pipe shall be fitted with high compressive strength
fabric reinforced neoprene sleeves to avoid forming a thermal bridge (in case of steel chilled
water pipe) and contact between dissimilar metals (in case of non-ferrous pipe)

used.


grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
to AWS D-1.1.


A.
Up to 15 1.8 2.4 1.2 1.8 - -
20 2.4 3.0 1.4 2.1 - -
25 2.4 3.0 1.8 2.4 - -
32 2.7 3.0 2.4 3.0 - -
40 3.0 3.6 2.4 3.0 - -
50 3.0 3.6 2.7 3.0 1.8 1.8
65 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 - -
80 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 2.7 2.7
100 3.7 4.6 3.0 3.6 2.7 2.7
125 3.7 5.4 3.0 3.6
150 4.5 5.4 3.6 4.2 3.7 3.7
200 5.6 6.0 - - 3.7 3.7
250 5.0 6.0 - - 4.5 5.4
300 6.1 10.0 - - 8.0 10.0
350 10.0 12.0 - - - -
400 10.5 12.6 - - - -
450 11.0 13.2 - - - -
500 12.0 14.4 - - - -
600 14.0 16.8 - - - -
700 - - - -
800 - - - -
900 - - - -
1000 - - - -

Class O,B,C Type
Up to 10 - 0.6 0.3 0.45
15 - 0.6 0.4 0.6
20 - 0.65 0.4 0.6
25 - 0.75 0.4 0.6
32 - 0.8 0.45 0.7
40 - 0.9 0.45 0.7
50 1.1 1.2 0.55 0.85
65 1.2 1.4 0.55 0.85
80 1.4 1.5 0.6 0.9
100 1.5 1.7 0.7 1.1
125 1.7 1.9 - -
150 1.8 2.1 - -
175 2.0 2.3 - -
200 2.1 2.5 - -
225 2.3 2.7 - -
250 2.4 2.9 - -
300 2.6 3.1 - -

Cl OBC T
350 2.9 3.4 - -

Class O,B,C Type
400 3.1 3.7 - -
450 3.4 3.7 - -
Above 450 3.7 3.7 - -
couplings.
tabulated.
building structure.
top of inserts.


K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to British Standards.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe DN100 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. DN8 to DN90: 305 mm long and 1.22 mm thick.

b. DN100: 305 mm long and thick.
c. DN125 and DN150: 457 mm long and 1.52 mm thick.
d. DN200 to DN350: 610 mm long and 1.91 mm thick.
e. DN400 to DN600: 610 mm long and 2.67 mm thick.
4. Pipes DN200 and Larger: Include wood inserts.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

equipment supports.
the following:
3.6 ADJUSTING

3.7 PAINTING
"Painting."
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
B. This section describes the Vibration isolation and seismic control for HVAC equipment, tanks,
and piping systems.
C. This Section includes the following mechanical vibration isolation materials and their
installation:
1. Spring Isolators
2. Bases
3. Roof Curbs
4. Thrust Restraints
5. Hangers
6. Seismic Restraint Devices.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. IBC: International Building Code.
B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.
C. OSHPD: Office of State-wide Health Planning and Development for the State ofCali-
fornia.

23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control of HVAC, Rev.00 Page 1 of 17



quiredby IBC 2009.

2009.
5. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels.
6. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of
Noise Sources.
A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping.
B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as recommended by manufac-

turer.
C. Consider upper floor locations critical unless otherwise indicated.
D. Use concrete inertia bases for motors in excess of 40 hp and on base mounted pumps
over 10 hp.
E. Maintain room maximum sound levels, in Noise Criteria (NC) as defined by ANSI S1.8.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. All HVAC equipment, piping and ductwork shall be provided with and mounted on vibration
isolators
B. The work specified shall include providing all labor, tools, equipment, materials, etc., nec-
essary for a complete operational vibration isolation system.
C. Isolators shall be selected to provide stable starting and stopping, and equipment shall not
have excessive movement.

D. When required to prevent excessive lateral motion due to fan starting, provide a lateral-
type thrust restraint isolator. Lateral thrust restraint isolator shall not interfere with horizon-
tal isolation.
E. Select isolators for not less than the deflections indicated on the schedule. Isolators shall
be properly selected for the weights of the mechanical equipment provided.
F. Isolators located outdoors shall be hot dipped galvanized.
G. Isolators for mechanical equipment shall be selected to provide conformance with the lat-
est code with respect to seismic restraint.
H. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC, ASHRAE, SMACNA and DM un-
less requirements in this Section are more stringent.
I. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

J. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing max-
imum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to rat-
ings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on
independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile
loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified pro-
fessional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Springs
1. Spring isolators shall be freestanding, unhoused, laterally stable steel springs wound
from a high-strength spring steel. Springs shall have a lateral stiffness greater than
0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness and shall be designed to provide up to 50 percent
overload capacity.
2. Springs shall be selected to provide minimum operating static deflections shown on
the vibration isolation schedule below.
B. Elastomer Element
1. The elastomer insert shall be neoprene, molded from oil resistant compounds and
shall be color coded to indicate load capacity and selected to operate within its
published load range.
C. Hanger Bracket
1. The hanger bracket shall be welded steel and designed to carry a 500 percent
overload
2. without failure and to allow a support rod misalignment through a 30° arc without
metal-to-metal contact or other short circuit.

2.2 BASES
A. Type 1 - Structural Rail Bases
1. Bases shall be structural beam sections, with welded-on isolator support brackets
and prelocated and drilled anchor bolt holes or skids and shall be designed and
supplied by the isolation materials manufacturer.
2. Beam sections shall not be structurally connected to each other. Minimum section
depth of each member shall be equivalent to 8 percent of the longest span between
supporting isolators.
3. Isolator support brackets shall be welded to the structural beams as required to
obtain the lowest mounting height for the supported equipment.
B. Type 2 - Integral Structural Rail Bases
1. Bases shall be fabricated from structural beam sections as described above, except
that lateral cross members will be added to form a structurally integral, welded frame
to provide a rigid, distortion-free common frame to support and anchor separate
equipment components or driving and driven members.
C. Type 3 – Concrete Inertia Bases
1. Bases shall be constructed of concrete cast into a prefabricated inertia base frame
assembly designed and supplied by the isolation materials manufacturer. Concrete
shall be cast into base in the field.
2. Frame members shall be welded to form a structurally integral assembly, complete
with primer-painted steel perimeter members, welded and tied reinforcing rods,
recessed isolator brackets, and equipment anchoring bolts. Bases shall be shipped
ready for pouring of concrete fill in the field.
2.3 ISOLATORS
A. Type A - Machinery Mounting Pads for Air handing units, Fresh air handing units
1. Super waffle pad mounts 40mm shall be double ribbed elastomer multiple layer with
metal shims between. Pads shall be 65 durometer and designed to permit 825 kPa
loading. Provide bearing plates to distribute loads.
B. Type B - Spring Isolators for Fan coil units, suspended fans, & Suspended AHUS/FAHUS,
riser piping supports and plant room chilled water piping.
1. Vibration isolators for equipment which is subject to load variations and large external
or torquing forces shall consist of large diameter laterally stable steel springs
assembled into formed or welded steel housing assemblies designed to limit vertical
movement of the supported equipment.
2. Housing assembly shall be formed or fabricated steel members and shall consist of a
top-load plate complete with adjusting and leveling bolts, vertical restraints, isolation
washers and a bottom plate with non-skid noise stop pads and holes provided for
anchoring to supporting structure.
3. Spring elements shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph
2.1 A of this section.
C. Type C - Freestanding spring mounts for Pumps
1. Springs shall be assembled between a top and bottom steel load plate. The upper
load plate shall be provided with a steel leveling bolt lock-nut and washer for

attachment to the supported equipment. The lower load plate shall have a non-skid
noise isolation pad bonded to the bottom and have provisions for bolting the isolator
to the supporting structure.
2. Spring elements shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph
3. Spring shall be with 50 mm deflection.
D. Type D – Neoprene and Spring combined Isolators for suspended piping & suspended fans
1. Vibration isolators shall be neoprene, molded from oil-resistant compounds, with cast-
in-top steel load transfer plate for bolting to supported equipment and a bolt-down
plate with holes provided for anchoring to supporting structure. Top and bottom
surfaces shall have non-skid ribs.
2. Neoprene vibration isolators shall have minimum operating static deflections as
shown on the vibration isolation schedule or as indicated on the project documents
but not exceeding published load capabilities.
3. Except where support rails come integral with equipment, provide Type 1 or Type 2
rail bases to distribute the load.
4. Spring shall be with 50 mm deflection.
2.4 THRUST RESTRAINTS
A. Thrust restraints will be provided where required to reduce movements associated with fan
thrust.
B. Spring elements shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph 2.1 A of
this section.
C. Thrust restraints will be provided in sets of two (2).
2.5 TYPES OF HANGERS
A. Type E - Neoprene Hanger
1. Vibration isolators with maximum static deflection requirements under the operating
load conditions not exceeding .40 inches shall be hangers consisting of an elastomer-
in-shear insert encased in a welded steel bracket and provided with a stamped load
transfer cap.
2. Elastomer insert shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph
2.1 B of this section.
3. Hanger bracket shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph 2.1
C of this section.
B. Type F - Spring Hanger
1. Vibration isolators for suspended equipment, with minimum static deflection

requirement exceeding .4 inches, shall be hangers consisting of a freestanding,
laterally stable steel spring and elastomeric washer in series, assembled in a
stamped or welded steel bracket.
2. Hanger bracket shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph 2.1
C of this section.
3. The spring element shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph
C. Type G - Combination Neoprene / Spring Hanger

1. Vibration isolators for suspended equipment, where both high and low frequency
vibrations are to be isolated, shall be hangers consisting of a laterally stable steel
spring in series with an elastomer-in-shear insert, complete with load transfer plates
and assembled in a welded steel bracket.
2. The elastomer-in-shear element shall meet all the specified characteristics described
in paragraph 2.1 B of this section.
3. The spring element shall meet all the specified characteristics described in paragraph
4. The welded hanger bracket shall meet all the specified characteristics described in
paragraph 2.1 C of this section.
D. Additional Requirements for Spring Hangers
1. Springs on hangers for piping and ductwork shall be factory pre-compressed.
2.6 EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK ISOLATION SCHEDULE
A. Vibration isolation for equipment shall be provided in accordance with the schedule below :
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
GRADE 6m SPAN 9m SPAN
ISOLATED
TION (mm)
TION (mm)
HANGER
HANGER
DEFLEC-
DEFLEC-
DEFLEC-
EQUIPMENT
ISOLA-
ISOLA-
ISOLA-
BASE
BASE
BASE
TION
TOR
TOR
TOR
PUMPS3
Inline
Less than 15 HP -- -- -- G -- 25.4 -- G -- 25.4 --
Split Case
Less than 50 HP C 25.4 3 -- C 25.4 3 -- C 44.45 3
50 HP to 125 HP2 C 25.4 3 -- C 25.4 3 -- C 44.45 3
150 HP and Above2 C 25.4 3 -- C 44.45 3 -- C 44.45 3
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS4
Less than 301 RPM5 D 6.35 -- -- B 88.9 -- -- B 88.9 --

301 To 500 RPM D 6.35 -- -- B 63.5 -- -- B 63.5 --
Above 500 RPM D 6.35 -- -- B 38.1 -- -- B 38.1 --

EQUIPMENT LOCATION
ISOLATED
TION (mm)
TION (mm)
HANGER
HANGER
DEFLEC-
DEFLEC-
DEFLEC-
EQUIPMENT
ISOLA-
ISOLA-
ISOLA-
BASE
BASE
BASE
TION
TOR
TOR
TOR
PCAKAGED UNITS, CABINET FANS, AIR CONDITIONING UNITS4,7
Roof Mounted -- -- -- -- C 25.4 4 -- C 44.45 4
Below 15 HP
D 6.35 -- G C 25.4 -- G C 25.4 --
15 HP and Above - 6" Static Pressure & Below

Less than 301 RPM5 D 6.35 -- G C 88.9 -- G C 88.9 3
301 To 500 RPM D 6.35 -- G C 63.5 -- G C 63.5 3
Above 500 RPM D 6.35 -- G C 44.45 -- G C 44.45 3
15 HP and Above – Over 6" Static Pressure

Less than 301 RPM5 C 19.05 2* G C 88.9 3 G C 88.9 3
301 to 500 RPM C 25.4 2* G C 63.5 3 G C 63.5 3
Above 500 RPM5 C 25.4 2* G C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3
AXIAL AND TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS4,7
22" and Below Wheel

Diameter D 6.35 -- G C 25.4 -- G C 25.4 --
24" and Above Wheel Diameter - 2" Static Pressure and Below
Less than 301 RPM5 C 63.5 2* G C 88.9 3 G C 88.9 3
301 to 500 RPM C 25.4 2* G C 44.45 2* G C 63.5 3
Above 500 RPM C 25.4 2* G C 44.45 2* G C 44.45 2*
24" and Above Wheel Diameter - Over 2" Static Pressure

Less than 301 RPM5 C 63.5 3 G C 88.9 3 G C 88.9 3
301 to 500 RPM C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3 G C 63.5 3
Above 500 RPM C 25.4 3 G C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3

EQUIPMENT LOCATION
ISOLATED
TION (mm)
TION (mm)
HANGER
HANGER
DEFLEC-
DEFLEC-
DEFLEC-
EQUIPMENT
ISOLA-
ISOLA-
ISOLA-
BASE
BASE
BASE
TION
TOR
TOR
TOR
CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND UTILITY SETS7
22" and Below Wheel Diameter

50 HP and Below D 6.35 2* G C 25.4 2* G C 25.4 2*
Above 50 HP C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3
24" and Above - 50 HP and Below

Less than 301 RPM5 C 63.5 2* G C 88.9 2* G C 88.9 2*
301 to 500 RPM C 44.45 2* G C 44.45 2* G C 63.5 2*
Above 500 RPM C 25.4 2* G C 25.4 2* G C 25.4 2*
24" and Above – Above 50 HP

Less than 301 RPM5 C 63.5 3 G C 88.9 3 G C 88.9 3
301 to 500 RPM C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3 G C 63.5 3
Above 500 RPM C 25.4 3 G C 44.45 3 G C 44.45 3
* = Base 1 may be substituted for Base 2 provided isolated equipment is rigid and will resist torquing.
Notes: 1 Provide Type 1, 2 or 3 Base if required to stabilize supported equipment.

2 Provide 300mm thick Type 3 Base for pumps over 56KW.
3 Provide Type 3 Base large enough to provide elbow support for piping.
4 Provide Type 1 or 2 Base if required to support equipment properly.
5 Isolator natural frequency shall be 40 percent of the lowest equipment operating speed.
6 Provide Type 3 Base weighing 10 times maximum equipment unbalanced forces.
7 Provide thrust restraints for equipment scheduled to operate over 500 Pascal’s static
pressure.
8 Provide external vibration isolation on air handling units when factory supplied internal
isolation is unavailable.
B. Noise and vibration isolator types and minimum operating static deflections for suspended
or floor-mounted piping shall be as follows:
1. Type E, Type F and Type G hangers, or Type A and Type C floor mounts, with
minimum operating static deflections equivalent to 50 percent of connected
equipment isolator deflection shall be used to support all piping over 1 inch outside
diameter located within mechanical equipment rooms and for a minimum of 15

meters, whichever is greater, from connections to vibration isolated mechanical or

electrical equipment. Above requirement shall include pressure reducing stations.
2. For suspended piping, Type E or Type F, except first five hanger points connected to
isolated equipment shall be Type G.
3. For floor-mounted piping, Type C isolator for the first five support points, then Type A
isolator.
4. All piping connected to fire pumps and sprinkler systems do not require isolation. Do
not isolate anchor points or bases for pipe risers.
C. Noise and vibration isolator types and minimum operating static deflections for suspended
or floor-mounted sheet metal ductwork, air plenums, pressure reducing valves, sound traps
and similar air distribution elements shall be as follows:
1. Type G hangers, or Type C floor mounts with minimum operating static deflections
equivalent to 50 percent of connected equipment isolator deflection, or 1 inch,
whichever is greater, shall be used to support all sheet metal air distribution elements
located within mechanical equipment rooms and for a minimum of 15 meters from
connections to vibration isolation mechanical equipment.
D. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. Labor saving accessories
can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating
height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations,
and similar installation advantages, provided isolators supplied incorporate the specified
isolator type and do not degrade the noise and vibration isolation of equipment mounted.
E. Specified supplemental equipment base types can be deleted for unitary packaged air
handling equipment having a rigid frame and casing providing a distortion-free platform for
attachment of vibration isolators.
F. Provide flexible connections on all ductwork connected to isolated equipment. Neoprene

rubber flexible connection and mounting flange shall have a pressure rating 20 percent
greater than duct system pressure.
G. Provide flexible connections on all piping connected to isolated equipment. Provide control
rods with neoprene sleeves and neoprene washers to eliminate metal-to-metal contacts.
Connector pressure rating shall be 20 percent greater than system pressure rating. On
rotating equipment, provide flexible connections parallel to the rotating shaft.
2.7 SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Type I: Spring Incorporating Seismic Restraint

1. Shall comply with general characteristics of spring isolators.
2. Shall have vertical restraints and are capable of supporting equipment at fixed
elevation during equipment erection. Vertical restraint shall be separate from
equipment load support.
3. Shall incorporate seismic snubbing restraint in all directions at specified
acceleration loadings.
4. Mason Type SSLR.
B. Type II: Stationary Seismic Restraint

5. Each corner or side seismic restraint shall incorporate minimum 5/8" thick
pad limit stops. Restraints shall be made of plate, structural members or
square metal tubing in a welded assembly, incorporating resilient pads.
Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted to deck with

minimum 1.0 g acceleration capacity.

6. Seismic spring mountings as described above are an acceptable alterna-
tive providing all seismic loading requirements are met.
7. Mason Industries Type Z 1011, Type Z 1225.
C. Type III: Cable Seismic Restraint,

1. Metal cable type with approved end fastening devices to equipment and
structure. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members
or deck with aircraft cable and clamps as per ISAT guidelines.
D. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and

applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout
force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces
to which they will be subjected.
E. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of

slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and
to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-
resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
F. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;
and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
G. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.
H. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
I. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type
and size of attachment devices used.
J. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
K. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated

steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts
with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ICC-ES per ACI 318 appendix
D which are qualified for seismic zones. Minimum length of eight times diameter.
L. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Adhesive anchor bolts are not permitted where seismic restraint is
required. Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane
methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.
Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and
stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor
and as tested according to ICC-ES per ACI 318 appendix D which are qualified for seismic
zones.

2.8 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.
1. Powder coating on springs and housings.
2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for ex-
terior use.
3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior
use.
4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices
to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Install vibration isolators and inertia bases for all the dynamic equipment.
B. Install spring hangers on the pipe work near to the equipment.
C. Install sand trap louvers on the fresh air intake of ERV & Roof top Packaged units.
D. Install silencers on the duct work to achieve the required sound power levels as
recommended BY the acoustic specialist.
E. Install acoustic louvers on the intake and discharge locations of fresh air and exhaust air
ductwork.
F. Pipes, ducts, and their contents, or other services connected, shall be supported to avoid
load on equipment items. Flexible duct connectors at connections to fans or PAC's shall be
coated fabric 200 mm across a clear gap of 100 mm. The first five supports for ductwork on
either side of the vibration source shall also be provided with vibration isolators equal in
static deflection to that of the fan/PAC.
G. Electrical connections to equipment mounted on vibration isolation bases shall be made

through flexible conduit which changes direction by at least 90° in a minimum length of 25
conduit diameters.
H. Mineral insulated cables shall be looped through at least 360° at 75 mm radius or double the
permissible minimum radius, whichever is larger.
I. Within plant rooms, all pipes connected to equipment installed on spring vibration isolators
shall be suspended, supported and guided by means of appropriate spring vibration
isolators as described below. This includes domestic water pipes, Fire fighting pipes etc..
The only exclusions are roof and floor drains and sprinkler piping which shall be supported
by Type SM isolators or hung from Type SH isolators.
J. The first isolator both upstream and downstream of equipment on springs shall have a static
deflection equal to 1.5 times that of the equipment isolators, up to a maximum of 50 mm
deflection. The static deflection of the remaining SM/SH pipe isolators in the plant room
shall be 50 mm.

K. Piping in the plant room that is connected only to machinery installed on 50mm deflection
spring isolators shall be either supported from the floor or suspended from the structure on
spring hangers.
L. Where a pipe run connects multiple items of equipment in the plant room the pipe isolators
for the entire run shall be chosen to suit the connected equipment of greatest static
deflection.
M. Piping, conduit or mechanical equipment shall not be hung from or supported on other
equipment, pipes, or ductwork installed on vibration isolators. It shall be supported on or
suspended from the building structure.
N. Where pipes are ganged on a trapeze the pipes shall rest on the trapeze and the trapeze
shall be isolated from the structure with the appropriate isolators. Neoprene pipe riser
guides shall be used where lateral restraint is required.
O. All pipes outside the plant room with a diameter greater than 50 mm (including domestic
water, sanitary sewer and HVAC pipes, excluding roof/floor drain and vent pipes) shall be
supported on Type SM isolators or suspended on Type SH isolators, for the first 15 m.
P. Outside plant rooms all HVAC, and domestic cold water pipes with a diameter less than or
equal to 50 mm shall be isolated on Type NM and NH isolators for the first 15 m. All drain
pipes and vent pipes shall be isolated from the structure with closed cell neoprene, felt or
glass/mineral fibre sleeves between the pipe and pipe clamp or with Type NP pads between
the clamp and the structure. When it is compressed, the sleeve shall be not less than 3 mm
in thickness. This provision shall apply to all piping not otherwise required to be installed on
vibration isolators. In-line domestic water pumps and the surrounding piping shall be
installed on isolators as described above.
Q. Where pipes or flues rise in a vertical chase and are supported from a structure with Type
SH or NH isolators and require lateral bracing, Neoprene Riser Guides shall be mounted
around the pipe to limit lateral movement and to prevent direct contact with the supporting
structure.
R. Riser guides for isolated pipes and flues shall be 50 mm deflection spring mounts based on
the vertical edge of a steel angle. The guide shall allow the pipe to move axially, but shall
limit lateral movement to ± 25 mm.
S. Drainage pipework, including rainwater pipes and soil pipes located within spaces of NC/NR
35 or below shall be cast iron and shall be lagged and boxed-in. All pipe supports shall
incorporate neoprene inserts with a minimum thickness of 1/10th of the pipe diameter.
T. The following specification shall be considered for vibration control of flexible pipes and
hose connections:
U. Reinforced flexible pipe connectors should be used where pipes are to be located adjacent
to acoustically sensitive spaces needing to achieve NC/NR 35 or below. The correct
selection of connector will provide pipe flexibility so that isolators can function properly, can
protect equipment from strain due to misalignment and expansion or contraction of piping,
and to reduce noise and vibration transmission along the piping.
V. All flexible connectors require end restraint to counteract pressure thrust. Overextension
caused by pressure thrust on isolated equipment will cause failure which must be avoided. It
is recommended that the manufacturer’s recommendations on restraint, pressure and
temperature limits are followed.

W. Flexible pipe hose connectors of corrugated metal SS liner with SS braided metal or other
similar internal or external reinforcing, and intended for use without tie rods, should have the
minimum live lengths recommended by ASHRAE when used for anti-vibration purposes.
When hose connectors are used to connect equipment with high pressures > 16 bar (g)
multiple grooved couplings are recommended.
The guidelines tabulated below should be considered for hose connections to different plant
equipment.
Equipment Isolator Type

Pump connections (less than 16 bar(g) Flexible connectors (FC)
Pump connections (greater than 16 Double sphere flexible connectors(FC) to
bar(g) provide adequate vibration isolation
AHU connections, less than 80mm Direct connection
Double sphere Flexible connector (FC) to
AHU connections, 80mm and greater
provide adequate vibration isolation
FCU connections less than 20mm Direct connection
304 SS braided and SS 316 inner lining
FCU connections 20mm and above
Flexible hose (FH)
Connections to expansion tanks, deaer- Double sphere flexible connectors(FC) to
ators, heat exchangers etc provide adequate vibration isolation
Connections to chillers, cooling towers Double sphere flexible connectors(FC) to
and similar plant provide adequate vibration isolation
X. Where tie rod systems are used for vibration isolation on expansion joints or arched-type
connectors, these should be designed to achieve the vibration isolation required across the
entire joint. The tie rod fixings should use rubber/neoprene bushed washers to prevent
metal to metal contact throughout the normal range of movement of the joint.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Installation of all vibration isolation materials and supplemental equipment bases specified
in this section shall be accomplished as per manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Adjust leveling bolts and hanger bolts to level operating equipment. Piping flexible
connections shall not have any strain or lateral forces from misaligned piping.
C. Isolators shall be located for easy adjustment and inspection.
3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS
A. All the MEP Equipment’s in the project shall be provided with seismic restrains and bracing
system as per Dubai Municipality Seismic code 2013 and UBC1997 for tall Buildings.
B. All the Seismic Restraints requirement for non-structural MEP components of Tall Building
shall be as per Dubai Municipality “SEISMIC DESIGN CODE 2013” and Requirements.
C. Provide a seismic bracing system to restrain piping from excessive motion when subjected
to horizontal seismic forces, to prevent damage to adjacent equipment and building
structure. Bracing shall permit thermal expansion of pipe and ensure that vibration isolators,
if present, are not short-circuited.

D. Design of the seismic bracing system shall be provided by the manufacturer and approved
by the Engineer. Installation shall be certified by the manufacturer.
E. Seismic design force calculations shall be based on Seismic Zone 2A as per UBC 1997 and
as per Municipality.
3.4 SEISMIC BRACING & RESTRAINTS
A. The selection, positioning and installation of seismic bracing shall be based on the
recommendations of the manufacturer, as approved by the specialist.
B. Seismic restraint shall be provided by cable bracing kits, each comprising a pair of complete
assemblies with multi-strand galvanized steel wire cable, fixing brackets, stainless steel
thimbles and wire clips. Seismic bracing cable system & accessories shall be ICC-ES
certified.
C. All seismic anchors shall be accessories shall be ICC-ES certified.
D. Cables shall have a minimum load safety factor of 5.
E. All isolators and isolation materials shall be of the same supplier and shall be certified by the
manufacturer
F. The seismic portion of this specification to keep all mechanical equipment, chilled water
piping, riser piping life safety system and its piping and electrical building system
components in place during a seismic event.
G. Seismic restraints shall be designed in accordance with seismic force levels.The work in this
section includes, but is not limited to the following:
• Seismic restraints for isolated equipment.
• Sseismic restraints for non-isolated equipment.
• Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision
• Certification of seismic attachment of housekeeping pads.
• All mechanical and electrical systems
H. Life Safety Systems:
1. All systems involved with fire protection including fire rated ducting, dampers and
smoke exhaust fans sshall be protected with seismic cable bracing system and
seismic restraints
2. Transverse Bracing: Restraints applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline
of the pipes, ducts
3. Longitudinal Bracing: Restraints applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the
pipe, duct or conduit.
4. All seismic loads shall be included in the piping stress analysis to get appropriate
supports for chilled water piping network.
I. Descriptive Data:

1. Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators and specific restraints detailing
compliance with the specification.
2. Detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing vibration
isolators and seismic restraints by referencing numbered descriptive drawings.
J. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit fabrication details for equipment bases including dimensions, structural

member sizes and support point locations.
2. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling suspended equipment.
3. Where walls, floors, slabs or supplementary steel work are used for seismic restraint
locations, details of acceptable attachment methods for ducts, and pipe must be
included and approved before the condition is accepted for installation. Restraint
manufacturers’ submittals must include spacing, static loads and seismic loads at all
attachment and support points.
4. Specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations
for each piece of equipment.
K. Seismic Certification and Analysis: a. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all
connections of equipment to the structure. Calculations must be stamped by a registered
engineer.
A. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators.

Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment
base and supporting structure.
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.
3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
providing required submittals for component.
4. All equipment whether isolated or not, shall be bolted to structure to allow for
minimum 0.5g of acceleration. Bolt points and diameter of inserts shall be submitted
and verified as part of the contractor’s submission for each piece of equipment and
certified by a licensed civil or structural engineer.
5. All structurally suspended overhead equipment isolated or non-isolated shall be four
point independently braced within Type III seismic restraining system.
6. Where base anchoring is insufficient to resist seismic forces, supplementary
restraining such as seismic restraint system Type III shall be used above systems
center of gravity to suitably resist “g” force levels. Vertically mounted tanks may
require this additional restraint.
7. All anchor bolts and tie-ins to structure shall be designed per the Airport Structural
Design Standards.
B. Piping Restraints:
1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet at turns of more than 4 feet o.c., and
longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c.
4. Install Seismic Restraining System Type III: Taut for overhead suspended non-
isolated equipment, piping and slack with 1/2 inch cable deflection for isolated
systems.

5. Seismically restrain all piping with Type III restraining system in accordance with
guideline as outlined below.
6. Seismic restraints are not required for the following (this does not apply to any life
safety or high hazard equipment):
a. Gas piping less than 1 inch I.D.
b. Piping in Boiler and Mechanical Equipment rooms less than 1-1/4 inch I.D.
c. All other piping less than 2-1/2 I.D.
d. All piping suspended by individual hangers 12 inches in length or less
from thetop of the pipe to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member

of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required
submittals for component.
E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to
wall.
G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure

at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
H. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes
for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or
drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved
full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.6 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR NON-ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
A. All ceiling suspended piping not excluded by diameter or distance required from support:
Seismic Restraint Type III.
B. All ceiling mounted equipment: Seismic Restraint Type III.
C. All floor mounted equipment, including but not limited to tanks, domestic water heaters, etc.:
Seismic Restraint Type V

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent
sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the
connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural
element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with
requirements for piping flexible connections.
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.
B. After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band sound
measurements over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to plumbing equipment
rooms, duct and pipe shafts, and other critical locations. Provide one-third octave band
measurements of artificial sound sources in areas indicated as having critical requirements.
Submit complete report of test results including sound curves.
C. Furnish services of testing agency to take noise measurement. Use meters meeting
requirements of ANSI S1.4.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
2. Stencils
3. Pipe labels.
4. Valve tags.
5. Duct labels.
6. Ceiling Tacks
A. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.4 REFERENCES
C. ASHRAE Hand Book; 2022
D. SMACNA Standards.
E. DW-144 & DW-142
F. ASTM E 84 Surface burning characteristics of building materials (also NFPA 255 and UL 723)
1.5 SUBMITTALS

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for HVAC
23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

for each label.
accordingly.



1.9 SEQUENCING

1.11 COORDINATION

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION GENERAL
designation.
3. Provide valve tag numbers on HVAC piping valves.
4. Provide duct identification labels including direction-of-flow arrows and with service
designation.

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanicalengraving,
1/16 inch thick.
by 3 inches.

1. Material: MS-215 Max-Tek with printed graphics protected by a chemical andUV resistant
by 3 inches.
2.3 STENCILS
high letters.
high letters.
letters.
letters.


A13.1.
high letters.
high letters.
letters.
letters.
A13.1.
environment.
surface.
insulation)
1-1/8 inch to 2-1/4 MS970-B 8 inches 3/4 inch Coil-on
inch
2-3/8 inch to 3-1/4 MS970-C 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
inch
3-3/8 inch to 4-1/2 MS970-D 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
inch
4-5/8 inch to 5-7/8 MS970-E 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Coil-on
inch


Chilled Water Piping White Green
Condenser Water Piping White Green
Heating Water Piping White Green
Steam Piping White Green
Steam Condensate White Green
Refrigerant Piping Black Orange
the pipe surface.

insulation)
inch
2-1/2 inch to 4-3/4 MS995-D 12 inches 1-1/4 inch Wraparound
inch

H. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

Chilled Water Piping White Green
Condenser Water Piping White Green
Heating Water Piping White Green
Steam Piping White Green
Steam Condensate White Green
Refrigerant Piping Black Orange
2.6 VALVE TAGS
numbers.

2. Background Color: To match pipe label color by system.
3. Letter Color: Either white or black for best contrast to background color.
2.7 DUCT LABELS (non-plenum space)
A. Pre-printed, color-coded, with lettering indicating associated equipment, service, and showing flow
direction.
1. Contents: Include identification of duct service using same system designation as used on
Drawings and an arrow indicating flow direction. On each label, prefix the system
designation with the associated equipment number (example: AHU-1 SUPPLY AIR).
2. Material: MS900 vinyl with pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive backing.
3. Marker Size: 2-1/4 inch high, with length to suit required label content.
4. Lettering Size: Minimum 1-1/2 inches high
5. Direction-of-Flow Arrows: Separate unit for each duct label to indicate flow direction.
6. Arrow Marker Size: 2-1/4 inch by 6-1/2 inches.
B. Duct Label Color Schedule:

Supply Air White Green
Exhaust Air Black Yellow
Return Air White Blue
Relief Air White Blue
Outside Air White Blue

2.8 DUCT LABELS (plenum space)
A. Pre-printed, color-coded, with lettering indicating associated equipment, service, andshowing flow
direction.
1. Contents: Include identification of duct service using same system designation as used on
Drawings and an arrow indicating flow direction. On each label, prefix the system
designation with the associated equipment number (example: AHU-1 SUPPLY AIR).
2. Material: MS-4000 1.6 mil aluminum with pressure sensitive adhesive backing. Meets NFPA
101 Life Safety Code for class A materials.
3. Marker Size: 2-1/4 inch high, with length to suit required label content.
4. Lettering Size: Minimum 1-1/2 inches high
5. Direction-of-Flow Arrows: Separate unit for each duct label to indicate flow direction.
6. Arrow Marker Size: 2-1/4 inch by 6-1/2 inches.
B. Duct Label Color Schedule:

Supply Air White Green
Exhaust Air Black Yellow
Return Air White Blue
Relief Air White Blue
Outside Air White Blue
2.9 CEILING TACKS
shank.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 PREPARATION

3.3 INSTALLATION

equipment.
enclosures.
F. Duct Labels: Locate labels where ducts enter into and exits from concealed spacesor is
concealed by removable ceiling system as follows:
1. Near penetrations and on both sides of walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
2. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed duct.
4. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run.
G. Mark location of equipment or valves located above ceilings with identifying "buttons" to help in
3.4 PROTECTION

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1. Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
2. Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Variable-flow systems.
3. HVAC equipment quantitative performance settings.

4. Vibration measuring.
5. Sound level measuring.
6. Indoor air quality measuring.
7. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
8. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
B. This Section expands on and defines responsibilities of the Contractor in regards to Functional
Performance Tests (FPT’s) of the Commissioning process.
C. Contractor shall oversee the Commissioning activities with the Contractor’s Subcontractors and
the Architect/Engineer (A/E).
D. Prefunctional Checklists, tests and Start-ups are to be completed and documented for the
record prior to commencing with FPT’s. Refer to Section 23 08 00 for additional requirements.
E. Completed FPT Forms for all pieces of equipment and systems shall be submitted to the Owner
prior to Substantial Completion.
F. Refer to Attachments A and B at the end of this Section for example forms that indicate level of
documentation required for the Commissioning process.
23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC Rev.00 Page 1 of 45


to this Project.
standards.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Include in this article only essential submittals as determined on a section-by-section basis.

Consider the examples as a checklist, not as requirements needed for every Section.
B. "Action Submittals" are defined in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" as "Product Data,"
"Shop Drawings," "Samples," and "Schedules."
C. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
E. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
F. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
G. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable

results.
H. Noise criteria
1. All noise and vibration measurements shall be undertaken by a suitably qualified engineer
competent in noise and vibration measurements.
2. In addition to ANSI requirements, sound measuring instrumentation should also conform
to the latest revision of EN 60651 (IEC 60651) Type I with an octave band filter set
complying with the latest revision of EN 61620 (IEC 61620). All measuring equipment
must be calibrated prior to and after completion of the measurements.
3. Sound level measurements shall be taken with the source operating under design duty
using a microphone positioned between 1.2 and 1.5 m from the floor, and at least 1 m
from walls or other sound reflecting surfaces within the room. Where this not possible
(e.g. in small compartments) the details of the measurement positions shall be included
in the test data. The microphone shall be located at a point not less than 1 m from any
'small' identified sound emitting surface or point (e.g., grilles, diffusers, ducts, etc). For
'large' surfaces (e.g. louvers, etc) the measurement distance shall be not less than 3 m.
Site variations imposed shall be recorded.

4. Where practicable, sound pressure levels of internal noise fields shall be determined from
measurements taken from five (minimum) randomly chosen points in the area under
test.
5. Sound pressure levels of external noise fields shall also be determined. Results for both
internal and external noise fields shall be compared with specified levels.
6. Sound level measurements should include weighted single-figure dB LAeq(T) and octave
band dB Leq(T) levels covering the frequency range from 63 Hz to 8 kHz. The sound
levels should use a ‘fast’ time constant and cover a measurement period (T) of at least
1 minute when the noise sources are steady, or periods which are long enough to
ensure that a representative sound level has been recorded of the noise source.
7. Sound level measurements without the noise source(s) operating should be recorded to
determine the influence of background noise (from external or other extraneous
sources) on the measured sound levels. Corrections can then be applied to the
measured data so that an estimate of the actual noise source can be reported.
8. Vibration transducers used for building and external ambient vibration measurement shall
be accelerometers with a 'flat' response between the design operational limits. The
sensitivity of the accelerometer to vibrations in the design direction of measurement
shall be at least 20 times the sensitivity in perpendicular directions.
9. Vibration equipment used for surveys of electric motors and equipment shall comply with
the requirements of ISO 2954 and EN 60034-14, except that accelerometers rather
than velocity transducers may be used when making comparisons of building and
machine vibrations.
10. Sound level measurements recorded outdoors shall comply with the requirements of
Parts 1, 2, and 3 of ISO 1996 as applicable during favourable weather conditions, i.e.
no precipitation, sandstorms and wind speeds less than 5 m/s.
I. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
J. Smoke Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure
differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.
K. Smoke Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part
of a zoned smoke-control system.
L. Stair Tower Pressurization System: A type of smoke control system that is intended to positively
pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the
stair towers during an alarm condition.
M. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
N. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
O. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
P. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.

Q. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
R. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
S. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
T. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Include in this article prerequisites, standards, limitations, and criteria that establish an overall
level of quality for products and workmanship. Include only those quality-assurance provisions
that affect all Work of this Section rather than those that apply only to Part 2 - Products or Part 3
- Execution.
B. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" specifies basic qualification requirements that should
not be repeated here.
C. After award of contract and prior to fabrication, Fire Protection System Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer complete design submittals for approval. Design submittals package shall include
the following:
D. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 4 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
E. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4
copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"
Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
F. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
G. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
H. Warranties specified in this Section.
I. Prior to testing the Contractor shall submit the following information for approval by the Engineer
and/or Acoustic Consultant.
1. Details of the organisation and/or personnel carrying out the tests to demonstrate
appropriate qualifications.
2. Method statement.
3. Test instrumentation and calibration certificates.
J. Testing shall not proceed until all the details are approved by the Engineer and/or Acoustic
Consultant.

K. A comprehensive measurement report shall be produced in a format to be agreed with the

Engineer and/or Acoustic Consultant and shall contain the results of all noise and vibration
measurements undertaken. The report shall be issued for approval by the Engineer and/or
Acoustic Consultant within ten working days of the measurements.
L. In the event of a room failing to meet the specified acoustic performance, the Contractor shall
carry out necessary remedial works or replacement of equipment at no extra cost, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Acoustic Consultant.
A. TAB Firm Qualifications: TAB Firm to submit qualifications to Engineer for approval.
1. TAB for 5 consecutive years in UAE.
2. TAB Firm shall have at least one professional with minimum of 7 years dedicated
experience as a TAB Specialist.
B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner’s and Engineer's representatives on approval of TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a. Submittal distribution requirements.

b. The Contract Documents examination report.
c. TAB plan.
d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and
referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from CIBSE Commissioning Code, or SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing or TAB firm's forms approved by Engineer.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in CIBSE Commissioning Code or

AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F. Instrumentation Calibration: Instruments shall calibrated as required by instrument

manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
2. All instruments shall have a valid calibration certificates obtained within 3 months
preceding the commencement of commissioning.
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
1.08 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, and local requirements,
2.02 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are
required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these
balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record

Documents."
D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance
data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate
system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G. Examine system and equipment test reports.
H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K. Examine plenum ceilings and shafts used for return or exhaust air to verify that they are airtight.
Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
M. Examine valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.
N. Examine heat transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Coils are to be
pipe to provide counter flow between media.
P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

Q. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed
and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and
variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing
and diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at indicated values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
R. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.03 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in CIBSE Commissioning Code or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing” and this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-
control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in metric (SI) units.
3.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air handling unit components.
K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.05 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, and
other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps and
heat recovery equipment, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Provide motor and fan drive changes for required adjustments to pulley sizes and motor
sheave sizes to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
7. motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling
and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances
of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.06 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.07 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge
valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.
H. Flow through coils shall be adjusted to give the design temperature difference. In general water
systems shall be balanced in accordance with the C.I.B.S.E Commissioning Code Nos. A,B,C,
and W. Upon completion of balancing and testing operations for heating and cooling systems,
temperature measurements shall be taken in all rooms and the readings tabulated in schedule
form together with hourly ambient temperature readings taken over the measuring period. Two
copies of the schedule shall be forwarded to the Consultant.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Balance systems with automatic two way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow
through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.
3.09 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet steam pressure.
E. Check the setting and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR DX / VRF SYSTEMS TESTING & COMMISSIONING
A. PRE COMMISSIONING:
The following items must be checked prior to any VRF systems switched on:
Workshop drawing: A workshop drawing showing all VRF units with actual pipe work, wiring
must be produced. Totals lengths of liquid line pipe work installed, must be confirmed by
installation Engineers and marked on drawings for additional refrigerant charge calculation.
Refrigerant Pipe work: Refrigerant pipe size, refnet position, insulation to be checked. Ensure
liquid & Gas both pipes are insulated.
Airtight Test & Vacuum Drying: Pressure test and Vacuum drying of system refrigerant pipe
work must be completed as follows:
1. 3 Bar pressure should be held for a minimum of 3 minutes. \

2. 15 Bar pressure should be held for a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. 40 Bar pressure should be held for a minimum of 24 hours. Taking into account the
ambient temperatures across the 24 hours.
4. Drying: Evacuate the system to 5 Torr or -100.7KpaG from both the service valves.
System manifold gauges must not be used to measure vacuum. A Torr or Micron
gauge must be use at all times.
5. Test: After step 1, leave the system in vacuum state -100.7KpaG or 5Torr for minimum of
1 hour and confirm that there is no increase in the gauge pressure. After the Vacuum
test, charge pipe work with R410A (trim charge to leave the system with positive
pressure) and note the charged quantity.
Drain pipe: Condensate pipework must be completed with insulation and proper slope.
Wiring: All power wiring must be completed, tested and powered on at the unit isolators. All
transmission wiring with controls completed & connected.
Additional refrigerant Charge:. Sufficient supply of refrigerant R410A must be on site

adjacent to the Outdoor Units ready for use. Check trim charged Refrigerant quantity.
Stop Valve: Outdoor Unit both Liquid & Gas pipe Valves must be open.
B. COMMISSIONING:
Turn Power On: After completing pre-commissioning steps, Turn Outdoor & Indoor Unit
power on & ensure minimum 6 hours power was on (for crank case heater) before starting
VRF operation.
LED Display status: Check the LED status at the Outdoor Unit Control panel as shown below
to ensure the transmission is normal and free from Error:
If single Outdoor System: LED H3P -‘On’ all other LED – Off If Multi Outdoor System:
o Master Unit: LED H3P & H8P -‘On’ all other LED – Off
o Slave Unit 1: LED H8P -‘blink’ all other LED – Off
o Slave Unit 2: All LED ‘Off’
In all the above cases LED ‘HAP’ need to be Blinking.

Check any Error code at indoor Remote Controller.
Field Settings: Required Field setting to be set at the Master Outdoor unit PCB. Dip
switch -DS1 shall be set On (to prevent Heating mode startup by indoor Remote
Controller)
Additional Refrigerant Charge: Charge required additional refrigerant charge either by

1) By Automatic Refrigerant Charge function
2) Manual charge – as per calculation
Check Operation: Start Test Operation. System will check the below:
o Check for wiring error

o Stop valve status
o Excessive Refrigerant Charge
Check the Test operation result by the LED display of the outdoor unit

o Normal Completion Led H3P – On all other LED off

o Abnormal completion: LED 2& 3 On – all other LED off
Normal Operation: After the completion of Test Operation, operate the system normally
– start from indoor Remote Controllers one by one and ensure all units are operating
normally without any Error.
LABEL Entry: Record the total Refrigerant charge, pipe length and Field settings with a
Permanent Marker on the ‘Request for Indication Label’ and attach the label on the back
side of the Front panel (for future requirements).
Recording with Service Checker / data recorder: Connect the system with Service
checker and record minimum 1 hour of system operational data.
Handover: Ensure outdoor unit accessory – EL COMBO BOX, inspection door, unit
casing are all fitted properly. Explain Remote Controller function and basic maintenance
requirements to employer.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP/0.37 kW and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT TRANSFER COILS
A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT TRANSFER COILS
A. DX- Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Dry bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
3. Airflow.
4. Air pressure drop.
3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive
eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature
settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C. Measure outside air, wet and dry bulb temperatures.
3.15 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space
boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and
sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported
deficiencies are corrected.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by
adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions.
C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure
airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space
pressurization.
1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the
intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-
pressure side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent
space.
2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical
space and work to the least critical space.
3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.
D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust
the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference.
E. For spaces with pressurization being monitored and controlled automatically, observe and adjust
the controls to achieve the desired set point.

1. Compare the values of the measurements taken to the measured values of the control
system instruments and report findings.
2. Check the repeatability of the controls by successive tests designed to temporarily alter
the ability to achieve space pressurization. Test overpressurization and
underpressurization, and observe and report on the system's ability to revert to the set
point.
3. For spaces served by variable-air-volume supply and exhaust systems, measure space
pressurization at indicated airflow and minimum airflow conditions.
F. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode
or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating
mode.
G. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report
deficiencies.
3.16 PROCEDURES FOR STAIR-TOWER PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM MEASUREMENTS AND

ADJUSTMENTS
A. Before testing, observe the stair tower to verify that construction is complete. Verify the
following:
1. Walls and ceiling are free of unintended openings and are capable of achieving a
pressure boundary.
2. Firestopping and sealants are installed.
3. Doors, door closers, and door gaskets are installed and adjusted.
4. If applicable, window installation is complete.
B. Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature, and relative humidity on
each test day.
C. Test each stair tower as a single system. If multiple fans serve a single stair tower, operate the
fans together.
D. Air Balance:
1. Open the doors indicated to be open and measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each:
a. Stair-tower fan.
b. Air outlet supplying the stair tower.
2. For ducted systems, measure the fan airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse.
E. Pressurization Test:
1. After air balancing is complete, perform stair tower pressurization tests.

2. Establish a consistent procedure for recording data throughout the entire test. Set the
stair tower side of the doors as the reference point and the floor side of the doors with

positive pressure when higher than the stair tower, and negative pressure when lower
than the stair tower.
3. With the HVAC systems operating in their normal mode of operation and the stair tower
pressurization systems off, measure and record the following:
a. Pressure difference across each stair tower door with all doors in the stairwell
closed.
b. Force necessary to open each door, using a spring type scale.
4. With the HVAC systems operating and the stair tower pressurization system activated,
perform the following:
a. Place building HVAC systems in their normal operating mode including equipment
not used to implement smoke control, such as air-handling units, toilet exhaust
fans, fan coil units, and similar equipment.
b. Measure and record the pressure difference across each stair tower door with all
doors in the stair tower closed. Adjust the stair tower pressure relief to prevent
overpressurization.
c. Use a spring scale to measure and record the force needed to open the door
closest to the fan. With the initial door held in the open position, measure and
record the pressure difference across each remaining closed stair tower door.
d. Open additional doors (up to the number indicated) one at a time, and measure
and record the pressure difference across each remaining closed stair-tower door
after the opening of each additional door.
e. Open the doors indicated to be open and measure and record the direction and
velocity through each of the open doors by a traverse of every 0.093-sq. m grid of
door opening.
f. Calculate the average of the door velocity measurements. Compare the average
velocity to the Contract Documents and governing code requirements.
5. Repeat the pressurization tests with the smoke-control systems and the HVAC systems
operating.
6. Criteria for Acceptance:
a. The opening force on any door shall not exceed 133 N.

b. Code requirements.
F. Operational Tests:
1. Check the proper activation of the stair-tower pressurization system(s) in response to all
means of activation, both automatic and manual.
2. Verify that each initiating occurrence produces the proper system response under each of
the following modes of operation:
a. Normal.
b. Alarm.
c. Manual override of normal mode and alarm.

d. Return to normal.
3. Verify that the smoke detector at the stair pressurization fan inlet de-energizes the fan
and closes the damper at the fan.
4. If standby power is provided for stair pressurization systems, test to verify that the stair
pressurization systems operate while on both normal and standby power.
5. Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Prepare a complete report of observations, measurements, and deficiencies.
3.17 PROCEDURES FOR SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING
A. Before testing smoke control systems, verify that construction is complete and verify the integrity
of each smoke control zone boundary. Verify that windows and doors are closed and that
applicable safing, gasket, and sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing
until after the reported deficiencies are corrected.
B. Measure and record wind speed and direction, outside-air temperature, and relative humidity on
each test day.
C. Measure, adjust, and record airflow of each smoke control system with all fans that are a part of
the system operating as intended by the design.
D. Measure, adjust, and record the airflow of each fan. For ducted systems, measure the fan
airflow by duct Pitot-tube traverse.
E. After air balancing is complete, perform the following pressurization testing for each smoke-
control zone in the system:
1. Verify the boundaries of each smoke control zone.

2. With the HVAC systems in their normal mode of operation and smoke control not
operating, measure and record the pressure difference across each smoke control
zone. Make measurements after closing doors that separate the zones. Make one
measurement across each door. Clearly indicate the high and low pressure side of
each door.
3. With the system operating in the smoke control mode and with each zone in the smoke
control system activated, perform the following:
a. Measure and record the pressure difference across each door that separates the
smoke zone from adjacent zones. Make measurements with doors that separate
the smoke zone from the other zones closed. Clearly indicate the high and low
pressure side of the door. Doors that have a tendency to open slightly due to the
pressure difference should have one pressure measurement made while held
closed and another measurement made with the door open.
b. Continue to activate each separate zoned smoke-control system and make
pressure difference measurements.

c. After testing a smoke zone's smoke-control system, deactivate the HVAC systems
involved and return them to their normal operating mode before activating another
zone's smoke-control system.
d. Verify that controls necessary to prevent excessive pressure differences are
functional.
F. Operational Tests:
1. Check the proper activation of each zoned smoke-control system in response to all
means of activation, both automatic and manual.
2. Check automatic activation in response to fire alarm signals received from the building's
fire alarm and detection system. Initiate a separate alarm for each means of activation
to ensure that the proper operation of the correct zoned smoke-control system occurs.
3. Check and record the proper operation of fans, dampers, and related equipment as
outlined below for each separate zone of the smoke-control system.
a. Fire zone in which a smoke-control system automatically activates.

b. Type of signal that activates a smoke-control system, such as pull station, sprinkler
water flow, or smoke detector.
c. Smoke zone(s) where maximum mechanical exhaust to the outside is implemented
and no supply air is provided.
d. Positive pressure smoke-control zone(s) where maximum air supply is
implemented and no exhaust to the outside is provided.
e. Fan(s) "ON" as required to implement the smoke-control system. Multiple- or
variable-speed fans should be further noted as "MAX. VOLUME" to verify that the
intended control configuration is achieved.
f. Fan(s) "OFF" as required to implement the smoke-control system.
g. Damper(s) "OPEN" where maximum airflow must be achieved.
h. Damper(s) "CLOSED" where no airflow should take place.
i. Auxiliary functions to achieve the smoke-control system configuration such as
changes or override of normal operating pressure and temperature-control set
points.
j. If standby power is provided for the smoke-control system, test to verify that the
system functions while operating under both normal and standby power.
G. Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Unless required by

authorities having jurisdiction, perform testing without the use of smoke or products that
simulate smoke.
H. Prepare a complete report of observations, measurements, and deficiencies.
3.18 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS
A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
2. Velocity range of 2.5 to 254 mm/s.
3. Displacement range of 0.0254 to 2.54 mm.

4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.

5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a
minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
2. Clear the space of people.
D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is
complete.
E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid
interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 2.2 kW.
H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and
building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal,
vertical, and axial planes.
1. Pumps:
a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Pump Base: Top and side.
d. Building: Floor.
e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.
2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.

b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c. Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d. Equipment Base: Top and side.
e. Building: Floor.
f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation
blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the
differences.
J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
2. Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored.

4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the
travel-to-solid distance.
5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete
base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the
inertia base and the floor.
3.19 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS
A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying with

ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters. Comply with
requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound
meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.
C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air
velocities exceed 0.51 m/s, use a windscreen on the microphone.
D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete.
E. Close windows and doors to the space.
F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from
other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.
G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured.
Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-sight between the
sound source and the sound-level meter.
H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 1200 mm above the floor and at least 900
mm from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the measurements.
I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the
frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.
J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels
and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.
1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on
the difference and adjust measurements.
K. Perform sound testing at 2 locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each
space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing
multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one
location that is remote from the predominant sound source.
1. Inside each mechanical equipment room.
2. Each space above and below mechanical equipment rooms.
3.20 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions,
perform indoor-air quality testing.
B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:
1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge,
cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination.
2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters.
3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain.
4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal.
5. Evidence of water damage.
6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.
C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make measurements at
multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the following:
1. Most remote area.
2. One location per floor.
3. One location for every 500 sq. m.
D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-hour
intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:
1. Temperature.
2. Relative humidity.
3. Air velocity.
4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm).
5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm).
6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm).
7. Formaldehyde (ppm).
3.21 PROCEDURES FOR AIR DUCT LEAK TEST AND SEALING
A. Air Leak Test and Sealing shall be done for all the major duct system (Fresh Air, Extract, Smoke
Extract, Make up Air and Pressurization Ducts) in the project.
B. Air Lak Test and sealing shall be done as per SMACNA Class and procedures.
C. Duct Preparation:
1. Inspect air distribution systems for major leakage sites and significant accumulation of
hubris or debris
2. Remove all debris and significant dust and dirt (>1/8 inch deep) in air distribution system
using a NADCA approved duct cleaning method
3. Ensure adequate structural support for new and existing ductwork, including structural
integrity of all mechanical duct joints and transitions per SMACNA standards.
4. Temporarily remove or protect from aerosol particles building controls, fire and smoke
sensors as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Temporarily disable fire alarms and notify appropriate authorities.
6. Temporarily isolate air-moving equipment and block off air inlets and outlets, and other
devices and appurtenances as recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Protect occupied spaces from aerosol particles using manufacturer procedures.

8. All work shall be done in a substantial and workmanlike manner by factory trained
technicians.
D. Duct Sealing:
1. Repair all major leakage sites greater than ½ inch across using mastic and fiberglass
mesh tape per SMACNA standards
a. Mastic and fiberglass mesh tape shall meet UL 181 standards.
2. Seal existing ductwork from the inside using automated aerosolized sealant injection.
a. Manufacturer: Aeroseal, LLC
b. Application must be performed by a manufacturer approved service provider
c. Sealant shall comply with UL Outline Scope 1381
d. Sealant must cure with 2 hours with no VOC off-gassing thereafter
e. Sealant shall remain elastic after curing
f. Sealant shall be deposited substantially at areas of leakage only
3. Provide pre-sealing, post-sealing and sealing profile reports for all duct sections sealed.
4. Repair all injection and test holes in existing ductwork using patching plates sealed tight
per SMACNA standards.
5. Any injection ports in duct board shall be made and repaired using pumpkin-cuts
6. Any insulation (internal or external) shall be replaced on the patching plate.
E. Duct Testing:
1. Following completion of air handling unit installations, duct repairs, and duct sealing, test
all ductwork to insure that the air distribution system is properly sealed.
a. The supply ducts shall have air losses equal to or less than the Leakage Class
indicated in Table 1.
b. The return ducts shall have air losses equal to or less than the Leakage Class
c. The exhaust ducts shall have air losses equal to or less than the Leakage Class
d. The SMACNA Leakage Class (CL) is determined using the following relationship:
CL = F/p0.65
Where:
CL = Leakage Class, which is the permissible leakage rate

in CFM per 100ft2 of duct surface
F = Leakage Factor, CFM per 100ft2 of duct surface. Varies
with s.p.
p = Duct static pressure, in. w.g.
Duct Static Pressure Construction Class 1/2 in., 1 in. 2 in. w.g. 3 in. w.g. 4 in., 6 in., 10 in. w.g.
Seal Class A* A* A*
Transverse Joints, Transverse Joints, Transverse Joints, Seams,
Sealing Applicable Seams, Seams, and all Applicable Duct
and all Applicable Duct and all Applicable Wall Penetrations
Wall Penetrations Duct Wall
Penetrations
Leakage Class
Rectangular Metal 16 8 4
Round 8 4 2
Metal
Flexible 8 N/A N/A
Ducts
Ductboard 8 N/A N/A
Masonry 8 N/A N/A
*Aeroseal since it is applied to ductwork internally under pressure achieves Seal Class
A
Leak location is not relevant
F. Duct Reassembly and Cleanup:

1. Reinstall building controls and smoke detectors.
2. Enable fire alarms and notify appropriate authorities.
3. Remove blocking, reinstall grills and registers, and enable air handling fans.
4. Cleanup sealant residue that may have adhered to surfaces in occupied areas as
recommended by the Manufacturer.
5. All work shall be done in a substantial and workmanlike manner by factory-trained
technicians.
G. Warranty:
1. The Contractor shall warrant that the aerosol sealant application will be free from defects
for a period of 3 years from date of the sealing application. If defects should occur during
this period, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defective duct seals, including the
direct labor costs for performing the repair or replacement, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.22 TEMPERATURE CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions
and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.
G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates
on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.23 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.24 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.25 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in

three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final
report, as applicable:
1. Title page.

2. Name and address of TAB firm.

3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Engineer's name and address.
6. Contractor's name and address.
7. Report date.
8. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
9. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
10. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
F. Air Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data: Include the following:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in mm.
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:
a. Make and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in mm.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in LPS.

b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa.
f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in Pa.
g. Outside airflow in LPS.
h. Return airflow in LPS.
i. Outside-air damper position.
j. Return-air damper position.
G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in mm o.c.
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m.
h. Tube size in DN.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Airflow rate in LPS.

b. Average face velocity in m/s.
c. Air pressure drop in Pa.
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
h. Refrigerant Gas Suction pressure in Kpa.
i. Refrigerant Gas Discharge pressure in Kpa.
j. Refrigerant Gas Suction temperature in deg C.
k. Refrigerant Gas Discharge temperature in deg C.
H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in mm.
2. Motor Data:

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
a. Total airflow rate in LPS.

b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Suction static pressure in Pa.
I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in oC.
d. Duct static pressure in Pa.
e. Duct size in mm.
f. Duct area in sq. m.
g. Indicated airflow rate in LPS.
h. Indicated velocity in MPS.
i. Actual airflow rate in LPS.
j. Actual average velocity in MPS.
k. Barometric pressure in Pa.
J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air terminal device make.
f. Air terminal device number from system diagram.

g. Air terminal device type and model number.

h. Air terminal device size.
i. Air terminal device effective area in sq.

b. Air velocity in MPS.
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in LPS.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in MPS.
e. Final airflow rate in LPS.
f. Final velocity in MPS.
g. Space temperature in oC.
K. System-Coil Reports: For Refrigerant coils of terminal VRF units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

b. Entering-air temperature in oC.
c. Leaving-air temperature in oC.
d. Supply air temperature at air terminal in oC.
L. Air-to-Air Heat Recovery Unit Reports:

1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
2. Motor Data:

d. Full load amperage and service factor.
3. If fans are an integral part of the unit, include the following for each fan:
a. Make and type.

b. Arrangement and size.
c. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
d. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in mm.

a. Total exhaust airflow rate in LPS.

b. Outside airflow rate in LPS.
c. Total exhaust fan static pressure in Pa.
d. Total outside-air fan static pressure in Pa.
e. Pressure drop on each side of Plate Heat Exchanger in Pa.
f. Exhaust air temperature entering in oC.
g. Exhaust air temperature leaving in oC.
h. Outside-air temperature entering in oC.
i. Outside-air temperature leaving in oC.
j. Supply-air temperature of fresh air in oC.
k. Calculate sensible and total heat capacity of each airstream in kW.
M. Vibration Measurement Reports:

1. Date and time of test.
2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower.
4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.
5. Measurement readings for each measurement location.
6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken.
7. Description of predominant vibration source.
N. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test
forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band
for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record each tested location on
a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:
1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve.
2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number.
4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location.
5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.
6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal.
7. Description of predominant sound source.
O. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:

1. HVAC system designation.
2. Date and time of test.
3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of test.
4. Room number or similar description for each location.
5. Measurements at each location.
6. Observed deficiencies.
P. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.
3.26 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and
balance readings documented in the Final Report.
2. Randomly check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
c. Measure sound levels at two locations.
d. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
e. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
f. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing
and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that
a final inspection be made by Owner.
2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of
Owner.
3. Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be
rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a
normal 8-hour business day.
4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the
final payment.
3.27 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer
conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer
conditions.
C. Summer Reliability Tests: The summer reliability tests shall be made under the full responsibility
of the Contractor. Contractor shall provide full time skilled operators for running the plant during
the whole test period. The summer reliability tests, shall last for a period of 31 consecutive days
during which the whole system under test shall operate continuously without adjustment or
repair, other than normal running adjustments. The summer reliability test shall be completed
within the period from 30 June to 30 September.

EXAMPLE – FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST
HVAC Pumps
Project: _____________________________________ Project #:_____________________
Identification of Equipment or System: _________________________________________
Location of Equipment or System: _______________________________________________
Specification Section: ____________________ Detail/Drawing Number: _______________
Manufacturer / Supplier: ________________________________________________________
This Date: __________________ Time of Test: __________________

════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURE NUMBER: ___________________
PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST NUMBER: ___________
Components Included:
___ VFD for pump, ___ Heat Exchanger, ___ Other _________________________________
Other Related Functional Performance Tests: ______________________________________
1. General:
a. This Functional Performance Test is submitted for approval and is subject to the attached list
of outstanding items not completed successfully. Submit a Commissioning Deficiency Report
upon completion of any outstanding or deficient items. None of the outstanding items
preclude safe and reliable functional tests being performed.
b. ___ Commissioning Deficiency Report attached.
2. Participants:
Name Company Role/Participation

3. Functional Performance Test Prerequisites:
Specified Requirement Yes No Date to be

Submitted
a) The Prefunctional Checklist for this system is complete and
approved
b) The Prefunctional Checklist for the pump variable frequency drive
system is complete and approved
c) The Prefunctional Checklfor the air handling unit related to this
pump variable frequency drive system is complete and approved
d) All Architect/Engineer punchlist items for this system and related
equipment have been addressed and corrected
e) Sequence of operation is attached
f) Test, adjust, and balance (TAB) completed and approved for the
associated systems
g) TAB report provided
h) Design setpoint information included on forms
Controls:
i) DDC loops operational, temperature/pressure setpoints met
without hunting
ii) Master transmission diagram is updated on device graph
iii) Graphic programming is complete and operational
iv) System communicates with main controller
v) Pump is set to design/final setpoints
vi) Local reading of setpoints agree with remote readings
i) These Functional Performance Test procedures have been
reviewed and approved by installing contractor and applicable
subcontractors
4. Functional Performance Test Procedure:
Pass
Step Mode Test Procedure Expected Response
Yes No
1 Pump Off Standby check. HOA in Auto Verify by visual inspection that:
position. Unit commanded Off a) Discharge gauge pressure
by BAS. equals suction gauge
pressure.
b) No rotation of pump shaft.
c) Pump light indication shows
pump is off.
Pump indication shows pump as
being Off at the BAS.
2 Pump Start- HOA in Auto position. Unit Verify by visual inspection that:
up commanded On by BAS. a) Discharge gauge pressure
greater than suction gauge
pressure.
b) Rotation of pump shaft.
c) Pump light indication shows
pump is On.
Pump indication shows pump as
being On at the BAS.
3 Pump HOA in Auto position. Verify by local and remote
Operation Test results are recorded in reading that test results
table. correspond with TAB report and
sequence of operation as
described in the Contract
Documents.
4 Simulate HOA in Auto position. BAS indicates an alarm for

Pump Test results are recorded in Pump Trip condition.
Overload table.
Trip
5 Simulate HOA in Auto position. BAS indicates an alarm condition
Loss of Test results are recorded in for Loss of Pump condition.
Pump Flow table. Isolate DP switch
across suction and discharge
of pump and open sensing line
vent valves to relieve pressure
across DP switch.
5. Comments:
FINAL SIGN-OFF
Contractors attest that the above items have been verified and meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents except as noted on the attached Commissioning Deficiency Report.
General Contractor: Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Mechanical Subcontractor Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Other Subcontractor: Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Functional Performance Test procedure received and reviewed for completeness consultant
representatives. Integrated System Test can proceed.
Consultant: Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
EXAMPLE – FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST
Air Handling Units - Modular
Project: _____________________________________ Project #:_____________________
Identification of Equipment or System: _________________________________________
Location of Equipment or System: _______________________________________________
Specification Section: ____________________ Detail/Drawing Number: _______________
Manufacturer / Supplier: ________________________________________________________
This Date: __________________ Time of Test: __________________

════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURE NUMBER: ___________________
PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST NUMBER: ___________
Components Included:
___ VFD for AHU, ___ Return Fans (RF), ___ Outside Air Handling Unit, AHU _______,
Other _________________________________
Other Related Functional Performance Tests: ______________________________________
1. General:
a. This Functional Performance Test is submitted for approval and is subject to the attached list
of outstanding items not completed successfully. Submit a Commissioning Deficiency Report
upon completion of any outstanding or deficient items. None of the outstanding items
preclude safe and reliable functional tests being performed.
b. ___ Commissioning Deficiency Report attached.
2. Participants:
Name Company Role/Participation
3. Functional Performance Test Prerequisites:
Specified Requirement Yes No Date to be

Submitted
a) The Prefunctional Checklist for this system is complete and
approved
b) The Prefunctional Checklist for the following systems and
components are complete and approved:
i) Chilled water system
ii) Chilled water piping and valves
iii) Condenser water pumps
iv) Cooling towers
iii) Associated terminal units
iv) Variable frequency drives for associated pumps
c) All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems
are programmed and operable per the Contract Documents
including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop
tuning, and sensor calibrations completed.
d) Piping system flushing complete and required test reports
approved
e) Water treatment system complete and operational
f) Vibration control report approved
g) Test, adjust, and balance (TAB) completed and approved for the
hydronic systems and associated terminal units.
h) TAB report provided
i) All Architect/Engineer punchlist items for this system and related
equipment have been addressed and corrected
j) Safeties and operating ranges reviewed
k) Sequences of operation is attached
l) Schedules and setpoints attached
m) False loading equipment, system, and procedures ready (boilers,
preheat or reheat coils, control loops, override on outside air
(OSA) dampers, etc.)
n) Have all energy savings control strategies, setpoints, and
schedules been incorporated that this equipment and control
system are capable of? If not, list recommendations below:
o) Control Program Review: Review the software control program(s)

for this equipment. Parameters, setpoints, and logic sequences
appear to follow the specified written sequences.
p) These Functional Performance Test procedures have been
reviewed and approved by installing contractor and applicable
subcontractors
4. Current Setpoints for Functional Performance Test Procedure:
c. Record all values for current setpoints (SP), control parameters, limits, delays, lockouts,
schedules, etc., changed to accommodate testing.
Returned Returned
Parameter Pre-Test to Pre-Test Parameter Pre-Test to Pre-Test
Values Values √ Values Values √
Discharge air static Building static
pressure (SP) pressure
Discharge air temp. Dirty filter D.P.
Static P. reset OSA CFM
schedule
Discharge air reset
schedule
5. Sensor Calibration Checks:
d. Check the sensors listed below for calibration and adequate location. This is a
sampling check of calibrations done during Prefunctional Checklist.
e. “In calibration” means making a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6
inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent
thermostat, gage, or building automation system (BAS)) compared to the test
instrument-measured value is within the tolerances specified in the Prefunctional
Checklist requirements (__________________________). If not, install offset in
BAS, calibrate or replace sensor. Use the same test instruments as used for the
original calibration, if possible.
1st Final 1st Final

Gage Gage Gage Gage
Loc- or Instr. or BAS Loc- or BAS Instr. or
Sensor & ation BAS Meas’d Value Pass Sensor ation Value Meas’ BAS Pass
1 1
Location OK Value Value Y/N? & OK d Value Y/N?
Location Value
DAT Dis-
charge
SP
RAT
OSAT
1
Sensor location is appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation.
6. Device Calibration Checks:
f. The actuators or devices listed below checked for calibration. This is a spot check
on a sample of calibrations done during Prefunctional Checklist and start-up.
g. “In calibration” means observing a readout in the BAS and going to the actuator or
controlled device and verifying that the BAS reading is correct. Fix items out of
calibration or adjustment, via an offset in the BAS, or a mechanical fix.
Device or Actuator & Procedure / State 1st Site Final Pass
Location BAS Observation BAS Y/N
Value Reading
Cooling coil valve (CCV) 1. Intermediate

positions
position or command and 2. Full open
stroke* 3. Increase pressure
(open)
4. Closed
5. Remove power or air
(closed)
Relief damper position ** 1. Closed
2. Full open
Mixed air damper position ** 1. Closed
2. Full open
Main OSA damper position** 1. Closed
2. Full open
Min. OSA damper position** 1. Closed
2. Full open
Variable frequency drive 1. Min.: __________%
speed
(VFD)*** 2. Max.: __________%
* Set pumps to normal mode. Procedure 1. Command valve to a few intermediate positions. Verify that readings
in BAS reasonably correspond to the actual positions. For cooling coil valves (NO): Procedure 2. Lower space
setpoint to 20 deg. F. below space temperature. Verify BAS reading says CCV is 100% open. Visually verify
valve is 100% open. Procedure 3. For pneumatic actuators, by override in the BAS, increase pressure to valve
by ____ psi (do not exceed actuator rating). Verify valve stem and actuator position does not change. Restore
to normal. Procedure 4. Set space setpoint to 20F above space temperature. Verify BAS reading says CCV is
closed. Visually verify valve is closed. Procedure 5. Remove control air or electricity from the valve and verify
that the valve stem and actuator position do not change.
** 1. Command damper closed and verify that damper is shut and BAS reads shut.
2. Do the same, commanding damper fully open.
*** VFD: Procedure 1. Lower the controlling static pressure setpoint (duct or discharge) to be 1/4 of its current
value. Verify that the vanes are shut, or fan speed is at minimum for VFD and packaged controller reads the
same. Return the static pressure setpoint to normal. Procedure 2. Lower the space temperature setpoint to be
20F below space temperature and cause TU dampers to go to full cooling. Raise the static pressure setpoint as
necessary to cause the setpoint to not be met. Verify that the inlet vanes are fully open or the fan speed is at its
maximum and verify that the packaged controller reads the same. Return all to normal.
Notes:
7. Functional Performance Test Procedure:
Pass
Step1 Mode2 Test Procedure3 Expected Response4
Yes No
1 Fan Off Standby check with units Verify by visual inspection that:
commanded Off by BAS. 1. Return Air Dampers to AHU-
are Open.
2. Outside Air Dampers in AHU-
are Closed.
3. Isolation Dampers on AHU-
are Closed.
4. Relief Dampers in RF-
are Closed.
5. Cooling Coil Valve on Cooling
Coil of AHU- is Closed.
2 Unit Start- With units commanded on by 1. Supply Fan Isolation Dampers

up BAS. Open in AHU-
2. Supply Fan start through
VFDs
3. Supply Fan Isolation Dampers
in AHU- Open
4. AHU- Fans Start
5. RF- Isolation Dampers Open
6. RF- Fans start through VFDs
7. Exhaust Fans EF- start.
3 RF 1. Verify RF Volume, utilizing Verify that RF airflow meter

Volume airflow meters in Return Fans readings correspond to
Control RF____, Supply Fans in AHU- calculation.
____ and Garage Exhaust Fan
EF-1, and TAB established
CFMs for Exhaust Fans EF-
__, and ___, TAB established
Fixed Differential, make the
following calculation: (Return
Air Flow=Supply Air Flow, - EF-
1and2 Flow, -SF1 Flow-Fixed
Differential}
2. Trend Log RF____, AHU Verify that RF airflow meter

____, and SF-1 airflow rates at readings continue to correspond
5 min. intervals. Command off to calculation
EF-1 and 2 sequentially at 5
min. Intervals.
4 Duct Disable Duct Static Pressure Verify that VFD’s modulate as
Static Reset utilizing BAS Software. required to maintain SP setpoint
Pressure Adjust space temperature without hunting or overshooting
Control setpoint on significant quantity setpoint.
of zones to be well below
Pass
Yes No
observed reading.
5 High With units running at low flow Verify that BAS indicates an
Static condition, utilizing a squeeze alarm condition at ___” WG and
Pressure bulb, simulate an increase in shuts fans down at ___”WG
Alarm and discharge air static pressure.
Shutdown
6 Static 1. For Perimeter Terminal Verify that DA SP Spts increase
Pressure Units on floors 9-16, Reset by ___” WG at __ min intervals
Reset space temperature setpoints to until only one Perimeter TU
be below space temperatures. remains in saturation. Verify that
Utilizing BAS trend logging setpoints are met and
capabilities, Record at 5 min. maintained without excessive
intervals, Discharge Air SP hunting.
Spt, Perimeter TU Units in
saturation.
2. Reset space temperature
setpoints to be above space Verify that DA SP Spt decreases
temperatures. Utilizing the by ___”WG at __ min intervals
same Trending as above, until one Perimeter TU reaches
Record the same data points. saturation.
7 Discharge 1. For Perimeter Terminal Verify that Discharge Air
Temp. Units Floors 1-2, Reset space Temperature Setpoint is reset
Reset sensor setpoints to be above upwards at 2 deg increments
space temperatures. Utilizing every 6 min to maintain design
BAS Trend Logging, at 6 min cooling CFM at 5 perimeter TU’s
intervals, record DAT setpoint, to maintain design cooling CFM
DAT, and perimeter TU cooling
Flow rates.
2. For Perimeter Terminal
Units Floors 1-2, Reset space Verify that Discharge Air
sensor setpoints to be below Temperature Setpoint is reset
space temperatures. Utilizing downwards at 2 deg increments
BAS Trend Logging, at 6 min every 6 min to reach design
intervals, record DAT setpoint, cooling CFM at only 5 perimeter
DAT, and perimeter TU cooling TU’s. Both should happen
Flow rates. without excessive hunting.
8 Smoke Interfacing with EC, simulate a Verify that AHU System returns
Conditions fire mode with the Fire Alarm to FAN OFF Status, with OSA
System. and Relief Dampers in a Closed
Position.
9 Warm-up Place Unit’s BAS Control Mode Verify that dampers assume a
Control into Warmup. Overwrite RAT 100% Return Air Mode.
Sensor Reading to be 65 Deg.
F.
10 Warm-up Place Unit’s BAS Control Mode Verify that unit returns to Normal
Control in Warmup. Overwrite RAT Operation Mode.
Sensor Reading to be ___
Deg. F.
11 Freeze Overwrite Low Limit Detection Verify that system alarms, fans
Condition Thermostat reading to be __ stop, OSA Dampers close, Relief
Deg. F. Dampers Close, and RA
dampers open.
12 Return With AHU Unit __ running at Verify that system alarms and
Fan Static low air flow condition, that all Fans are shut down.
Pressure Overwrite RF __ return air fan
inlet SP to a reading below -
Pass
Yes No
___” W.G.
13 Manual With Fire Alarm System in Verify that Single Fan operates,
Smoke alarm, utilizing control panel in Isolation dampers open only on
Pressuriz. Fireman Control Center, select selected Fans, Return Fans are
System a floor and place floor into off, Outside Air Handling Units
purge mode. are off, OSA dampers open, and
return air dampers close.
14 Minimum Command AHU-1&2 System Verify that AHU ___ isolation
OSA Unit off. dampers are closed, and if OSA
Fan Off temperature is above __ Deg. F,
heating coil control valve is
closed.
15 Minimum Simulate a OSA temperature Verify that heating coil control
OSA Unit below 35 Deg. F. valve opens.
Fan Off
16 Minimum Utilizing BAS software, reset Verify that Face and Bypass
OSA Unit discharge air setpoint to 80 Dampers and Heating Coil
Temp. Deg. F. Control Valves modulate in
Control sequence to maintain __ Deg. F.
Setpoint.
17 Minimum Simulate a condition at low Verify that BAS system goes into
OSA Unit limit detection thermostat of alarm, AHU- __ Fans Shut
Freeze below 40 Deg. F. Down, AHU-___ Isolation
Condition Dampers Close, and Heating
Valve Opens.
18 On-Floor Place AHU-____ in normal Verify that RAF __-__ Start and
Return operating mode. Run.
Fan
Operation
19 Building Trend log the supply fan Observe in the trends that the
Static speed, the relief fan speed, building static pressure is
Pressure relief damper position and the maintained within +/- 0.05” of
building static pressure for 12 setpoint without excessive
hrs at 20 min. intervals. During hunting. Carefully examine
the trend, force, if necessary, during the extreme economizer
the economizer damper to be damper positions. Observe that
full open and at minimum. any relief dampers modulate as
Document these times. expected relative to relief fan
operation and static pressure.
20 AHU Filter Reset the Filter Differential Verify that the BAS reports an
Drop Pressure to exceed the setting alarm.
recommended by the filter
manufacturer.
21 Chilled 1. Utilizing BAS, place AHU Chilled Water Return
Water Units in WARMUP Mode. Temperature should approach
Valve RAT. If significant divergence is
2. Manually close isolation
Closing noted, review specified
Valve in Chilled Water
Efficiency performance requirements of
Supply to AHU Coil.
Chilled Water Control Valves.
3. Place thermometer in
Chilled Water Return
Piping adjacent to AHU.
Record temp. at 1 min.
intervals for 15 min.
4. Manually open isolation
Valve in Chilled Water
Supply to AHU Coil.
Pass
Yes No
5. Repeat Step 3.
6. Graph Results on
Temperature-Time Basis.
22 Supply Utilizing BAS, Command AHU- Verify that AHU-1, SF-1 Isolation
Fan 1, SF-1 into the off position. Dampers Close.
Isolation
Damper
23 Review Review schedules, current Submit approved differences to
setpoints and sequences with be incorporated into as-built
Specification Section 15___ record documentation.
and Control Drawings
prepared by BAS Provider.
Record Footnotes:
1
Sequences of operation specified in Contract Documents (attached).
2
Mode or function ID being tested from testing requirements of the Contract Documents.
3
Step-by-step procedures for manual testing, trend logging, or data-logger monitoring.
4
Include tolerances for a passing condition.
5
Record any permanently changed parameter values and submit to Owner.
8. Comments:
FINAL SIGN-OFF
Contractors attest that the above items have been verified and meet the requirements of the
Contract Documents except as noted on the attached Commissioning Deficiency Report.
General Contractor: Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Mechanical Subcontractor Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Other Subcontractor: Print Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Functional Performance Test procedure received and reviewed for completeness by Consultant
representatives. Integrated System Test can proceed.
Signature:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
SECTION 23 07 13
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation;
insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing
compounds.
1. Division 07 06 80 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements

for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 23 07 16 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and
application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 23 07 19 Section "HVAC Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 23 31 00 Section "HVAC Ducts and Casing" for duct liner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
dates of tests.
A. All insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM standards. Insulation meeting British
standard specifications and codes of practice will be considered if properly submitted.

23 07 13 Duct Insulation Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke developed
rating of 50 or less.
developed rating of 150 or less.
3. Insulation must comply with NFPA 90A and 90B
asbestos.
1. BS 4735, Class Q, (Burning rate nil, and not producing melted droplets.)
2. BS 476, Part 4, (Non combustible grade.)
E. All insulation finishes and coverings shall be classified as Class 1 surface spread when
tested in accordance with BS 476, Part 7.

specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim,
aluminum foil, and vinyl film and aluglass, the facing should have a vapour permeance of

zero and class ‘O’ fire rating. K value not exceeding 0.035 W/m.K at 25 °C. R value not
below not below 0.7 m².K/W at 25 °C.
B. Material shall achieve the following sound absorptive performances.
Minimum Random Incidence Sound Absorption Coefficient (α)

Third Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
125 250 500 1k 2k 4k
0.10 0.25 0.50 0.75 0.80 0.80
C. Acoustic Insulation (Duct Liner) shall be 25 mm thick, 48 Kg/m³ density glass fiber bonded
with thermosetting resins. Air stream surface shall be faced with black woven glass cloth
conforming to relevant BS & ASTM, NAIMA standards supplied in the form of rolls . NRC
value not below 0.75.
2.2 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aluglass facing having zero vapor presence are used with insulation than fungicide
protection coating is not required
C. Aluminum Jacket: sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy 0.9 mm thick Metal thickness
and corrugation dimensions are scheduled at the end of this Section.
1. Finish: Plain / Stucco
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, pre-sized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness
indicated.

1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the attached
surface.
E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and
washer manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length
sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
45 kg for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and
other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that
will adversely affect insulation application.
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the
length of ducts and fittings.
required for each duct system.
or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply
insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing

insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder
seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as
insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.

3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper

sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support
at top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION

A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and
sides of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400
mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-
sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 450 mm o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm
o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

square foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400
mm o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each
way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and
clips to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts
and plenums.
d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing
50 mm from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-
sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
segment for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to
outside and inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct
elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation
surface with 150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm
o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation
indicated to receive vapor retarder.
3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply Aluminum jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Apply sealant in all the joints and over laps.
3. Revert joints properly and revert should not affect the insulation.
3.6 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply, return and outside-air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply, return, and outside-air ductwork.
3. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Metal ducts with duct liner.

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
4. Flexible connectors.

5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Testing agency labels and stamps.
7. Nameplates and data plates.
8. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
E. For insulation and insulation finishes on ducts located in mechanical rooms and external to
the building, recover with aluminium jacket, held securely in place with friction type Z lock or
minimum 50mm overlap joint. Seal all longitudinal joints or seams completely with silicone
caulking and joint. Seal all longitudinal joints or seams completely with silicone caulking and
position these joints to shed water. Seal all circumferential joints with preformed but strips
minimum 50mm wide and placed to overlap adjacent jacketing a minimum of 12mm bands
and seals spaced as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Acoustic insulation (duct liner) shall be 25mm thick, 48 Kg/m³ density glass fiber bonded
with thermosetting resins. Air stream surface shall be faced with black woven glass cloth
conforming to relevant BS & ASTM, NAIMA standards supplied in the form rolls. NRC value
not below 0.75.
3.7 DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, concealed.
1. Material: Fiber glass blanket type with algulass facing.

3
2. Thickness: 25 mm, 24 kg/m density.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: No.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: No (with Aluglass facing).
6. Fire rated class “O”.
7. K value not exceeding 0.035 W/m.K at 25 °C.
8. R value not below 0.70 m2.K/W at 25 °C.
B. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, concealed.

3
C. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, concealed.

3

D. Service: Rectangular, supply-air ducts, exposed to ambient.
1. Material: Fiber glass board type with algulass facing.

3
4. Field-Applied Jacket: 0.9 mm Aluminum
E. Service: Rectangular, return-air ducts, exposed to ambient.

3
F. Service: Rectangular, outside-air ducts, exposed to ambient.

3
G. Duct work exposed in Parking Garages shall have 0.9mm thick Aluminum Jacket.
H. Duct work exposed in mechanical room shall have Aluglass facing and 0.9mm thick
Aluminum Jacket.
I. Service: Rectangular/Round, Supply/Return-air ducts, exposed to plant room, parking and

other areas.
1. Material: fiber glass board type with aluglass facing.

3
4. Field-Applied Jacket: 0.9 mm Aluminum.
END OF SECTION
23 07 13

SECTION 23 07 16
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install equipment insulation and covering indicated
by the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.
1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM C168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.
3. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission

Properties by Means of the Guarded- Hot-Plate Apparatus.
4. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
5. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
6. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
7. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow
Meter Apparatus.
8. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Tubular Form.
9. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

23 07 17 HVAC Equipment Insulation Rev.00 Page 1 of 7
10. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
11. ASTM C553 – Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.
12. ASTM C578 – Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
13. ASTM C591 – Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.
14. ASTM C612 – Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
15. ASTM C921 - Jackets for Thermal Insulation.
16. ASTM C1126 – Faced or Unfaced Rigid Celluar Phenolic Thermal Insulation.
17. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
18. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers
(Closed Cell Foam).
19. ASTM D2842 - Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
20. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
21. NFPA 90 – Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
22. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
23. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
24. ASTM D5590 - - Standard Test Method for Determining the Resistance of Paint Films
and Related Coatings to Fungal Defacement by Accelerated Four-Week Agar Plate
Assay
A. All equipment requiring insulation shall be insulated as specified herein and as required for a
complete system. In each case, the insulation shall be equivalent to that specified and
materials applied and finished as described in these Specifications.
B. All insulation, jacket, adhesives, mastics, sealers, etc., utilized in the fabrication of these
systems shall meet NFPA for fire resistant ratings (maximum of 25 flame spread and 50
smoke developed ratings) and shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer for
guaranteed performances when incorporated into their insulation system, unless a specific
product is specified for a specific application and is stated as an exception to this
requirement. Certificates to this effect shall be submitted along with Contractor’s submittal
data for this section of the Specifications. No material shall be used that, when tested by the
ASTM E84-89 test method, is found to melt, drip or delaminate to such a degree that the
continuity of the flame front is destroyed, thereby resulting in an artificially low flame spread
rating.
C. Application Company Qualifications: Company performing the Work of this Section must
have minimum three (3) years experience specializing in the trade.
D. All insulation shall be applied by mechanics skilled in this particular Work and regularly
engaged in such occupation.

E. All insulation shall be applied in strict accordance with these Specifications and with factory
printed recommendations on items not herein mentioned. Unsightly, inadequate, or sloppy
Work will not be acceptable.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide product description, service application, list of materials, “k” value, “R” value,
mean temperature range, and thickness for each service and location.
2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures that ensure acceptable

standards will be achieved. Submit certificates to this effect.
3. Samples: When requested, submit three (3) samples of any representative size
illustrating each insulation type.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide manufacturer’s recommendations for care and protection.
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s
identification including product thermal ratings and thickness.
B. Store insulation in original wrapping and protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect
insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics and insulation cements.
D. Maintain required ambient temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24
hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Type E1: Flexible fiberglass or mineral fiber blanket; ASTM C553; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75
degrees F; 2.0 lb/cu ft density.
B. Type E2: Rigid fiberglass or mineral fiber board; ASTM C612; 'k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees
F; 6.0 lb/cu ft density.
C. Type E3: Molded closed cell poyisocyanurate insulation; ASTM E96, ASTM C177, 'k' value
2
of 0.18 at 75 degrees F; ASTM D2842, maximum water absorption value of 0.05 lb/ft .

D. Type E4: Mineral Wool; ASTM C 547; preformed insulation high temperature insulation; 'k'
value of 0.35 at 300 degrees F.
E. Type E5: Closed cell, chemically neutral, neoprene insulation, 'k' value of 0.27 at 75 degrees
F; sheet form.
F. Type E6: Phenolic closed cell, ASTM C1126 rigid foam, 2.2 lbs. nominal density, CFC free;
ASTM C518, 'k' value of 0.13 at 75 degrees F.
G. Type E7: Rigid cellular glass; ASTM C552; ‘k’ value of 0.29 at 75 degrees F; 7.5 lb/cu ft
density. 0 permeability (Wet Cup Method) ASTM E96.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives: Use Childers CP-82 or Foster 85-20 adhesive for general purpose. For calcium
silicate, use Childers CP-97 or Foster 81-27 fibrous adhesive.
B. Sealants: For general purpose to seal the end of insulation, use Childers CP-30 L.O or
Foster 30-35 vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh for exterior applications. Interior
applications, use vapor barrier coating (2.04 F.) Use Childers CP-70 or CP-76; Foster 95-50
or 30-45 sealant on below ambient, closed cell pipe insulation, on all longitudinal and butt
insulation joints to prevent moisture transmission. Metal jacketing sealant shall be Foster 95-
44 or Childers CP-76.
C. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting mineral wool; Ryder one-coat.
D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive-resistant metal; 1 inch hexagonal pattern.
E. Primers: To assist with proper bonding with lagging adhesive/canvas, provide light coat of
Childers CP 50 AMV1 or Foster 81-42W diluted 50 percent with water over insulation or
Pittcoat 300 primer thinned with mineral spirits to cover insulating cements prior to finish
coating.
F. Coatings and Mastics: Vapor Barrier Coating for below ambient piping--Provide Foster 30-80
or Childers CP-38 on all elbows, fittings, and valves. Coating must adhere to MIL-C-19565C,
Type II and must be QPL listed. Weather barriers/breather mastics for all above ambient
piping—provide Childers CP-10/CP-11 or Foster 46-50.
***NOTE: When higher humidity levels may be of concern, only specify the following
fungus/mold resistant coating for below ambient piping: Foster 30-80 AF (anti fungal).
Coating must meet ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating**
G. Reinforcing Mesh: Provide Childers #10 or Foster Mast a Fab reinforicng mesh with coatings
and mastics.
H. Lagging Adhesives/Coatings: Provide Childers CP-50 AHV2 or Foster 30-36 for adhering
canvas and glass cloths over thermal insulation installed indoors. Adhesive must adhere to
MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A. lagging adhesive.
****NOTE: In areas where higher humidity levels may be of concern, only specify the following
fungus resistant lagging adhesive: Foster 30-36 AF or Childers CP-137 AF. (anti fungal)
Coatings shall meet ASTM D 5590 with 0 growth rating***.

I. Finish Coats: Provide Childers Encacel V or Foster 60-95 as a finish to coat the insulated
elbows/fittings and longitudinal seams and butt joints of vapor barrier jackets or glass cloth
jackets for exterior applications. Indoors applications, below ambient: provide vapor barrier
coating and reinforcing mesh (2.06G). For above ambient piping, use weather
barrier/breather mastic and with reinforcing mesh (2.06G). For calcium silicate indoors, use
lagging adhesive reinforced with canvas jacket. For finish coat over closed cell elastomeric,
use Foster 30-64 or Armstrong "Finish" acrylic finish.
PART 3 - PREPARATION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
B. Maintain required ambient temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24
hours.
C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics and insulation cements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
C. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
D. On exposed equipment, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
E. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring and beveling insulation. Secure
insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands.
F. Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.
On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
G. For insulated cold equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.
2. Finish with reinforcing mesh and vapor barrier coating.
3. Insulate entire system.
H. For insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field applied.
2. Finish with reinforcing mesh and weather barrier/breather mastic.
3. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges or
unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

4. For hot equipment conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions,
including those at equipment, but label the insulation to indicate a concealed flange or
union.
I. Inserts and shields:
1. Application: Equipment 2 inches in diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature
range.
6. Manufacturer shall be responsible to size the length of shield required to prevent

insulation from breaking.
J. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions and interruptions.
K. For equipment in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces, finish with aluminum
jacket. The longitudinal joint of the jacketing shall be placed with overlap directed to bottom
of pipe. The jacketing shall be overlapped a minimum of 3 inches, and it shall be held in
place using ¾ inch bands applied at 12 inches on center. Securing of the jacket shall be
made by the use of 1-inch x 0.016-inch aluminum or stainless steel bands and seals. The
shields at support points shall be secured with 1/2-inch or 0.020 inch stainless steel bands
and seals. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be primed with a red lead oxide primer. The metal
jacketing and fitting covers shall be fabricated of 9.016 inch aluminum or stainless steel with
a smooth finish.
L. For insulated cold equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Exterior
applications provide vapor barrier jacket or vapor barrier coating with reinforcing mesh. For
insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: use weather
barrier/breather mastic and reinforcing mesh. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located
on bottom side of horizontal equipment. Seal metal jacketing with metal jacketing sealant.
M. Each chilled water pump shall be insulated up to the face of the flanges on the piping
connection to the pump and any bare metal that projects over the bed plate of the pump and
from which condensation might drip onto the floor. Each heating hot water pump and
condensate return pump shall be insulated, but the insulation of the connecting piping shall
be beveled to the face of the pipe flange connection to the pump flange.
3.3 TESTING
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLICATION AND THICKNESS SCHEDULE
Insulation
Equipment Application Insulation Type
Thickness
Domestic Hot Water Storage Tanks All E2, E3 or E7 1-½”

Domestic Cold Water Storage Tanks All E2, E3 or E7 1-½”
Domestic Cold Water Pressure Tanks All E2, E3 or E7 1-½”
Hot Thermal Storage Tanks All E4 2”
Boiler Feed Water Storage Tanks All E4 2”
Steam Condensate Receivers All E4 1-½”
Condensate Tanks All E1, E2, E3 or E7 1”
Hot Water Expansion Tanks All E6 or E7 1”
35-75 Deg F E7 2”
75-150 Deg F E2 2”
Heat Exchangers/Converters 151-300 Deg F E3 2-½”
Above 300 Deg F E4 3”
Chilled Water Expansion Tanks All E6 or E7 1”
Air Separators All E6 or E7 1”
Deaerators All E4 2”
Flue Gas Breeching All E4 3”
Induced Draft Fan Scrolls All E4 3”
Flue Stacks to Roof All E4 3”
Boiler and Flue Boxes All E4 3”
Boiler Drum Heads All E4 3”
Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory All E5 or E7 1-½”
Insulated)
Chilled and Hot Water Pump Bodies All E6 or E7 1-½”
Chemical Feed (Chilled/Hot Water) All E5 ¾”
Muffler All E4 4”
END OF SECTION
23 07 17

SECTION 23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field
applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose fill pipe insulation in underground
piping outside the building.
2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
4. Division 23 Section "HVAC Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and
application for pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
5. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment’s" for
pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type
of insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
6. Application of field applied jackets.
dates of tests.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with
requirements.
23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation Rev.00 Page 1 of 9


A. All insulation shall be in accordance with ASTM standards. Insulation meeting British standard
specifications and codes of practice will be considered if properly submitted.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less / Tested to BS 476 Part 6 & 7 and have to achieve a Class ‘O’
rating.
developed rating of 150 or less/ Tested to BS 476 Part 6 & 7 and have to achieve a
Class ‘O’ rating.
3. Insulation must comply with NFPA 90A and 90B, to be tested to ISO 5659 for smoke
& toxicity.
asbestos.
1. BS 476, Part 4, (Noncombustible grade.)
E. All insulation finishes and coverings shall be classified as Class 1 surface spread when tested
in accordance with BS 476, Part 7.

type, grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for insulation application.
C. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping
that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed cell, sponge or expanded rubber materials
with aluglass finish. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for
sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. Thermal Conductivity : ASTMC5:18:1998, at mean temperature 25oC = 0.035 w/mk
and mean temperature 36 oC = 0.037 w/mk. Density = 45 to 60 kg/m3, water vapour
permeability : 0.09µgm/N.h, noise reduction : Up to 32 db(A).
B. Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation: pre-formed fiber glass rigid sections with factory applied
aluglass facing of density 64 kg/m³ or 80 kg/m3 having K value not exceeding 0.032 W/m.K at
25 °C. Aluminum cladding should be done for the pipes plant rooms/outside/exposed.
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous

calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
1. Preformed Pipe Sections: Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
2. Flat, curved, and grooved block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
3. Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
D. Fungicidal Protective Coatings
1. Fungicidal protective coatings shall be applied over external surfaces of insulated
chilled water pipes and exterior surfaces of insulated ductwork.
2. Coating shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.
2.2 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: Factory cut and rolled to indicate sizes. 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.

Woven glass fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.

C. Wire: 1.6 mm, soft annealed, stainless.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.

instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
required for each piping system.
or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation
ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields
over jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger,
support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.

O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75 mm wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges
of strip and spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing
lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor
retarder.
4. Vapor Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on
seams and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids
with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50 mm below
top of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
S. Fire Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through
penetrations of fire rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section
"Firestopping."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor retarder mastic where
floor supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION

1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe
surface.
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
pipe surface.

1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
pipe surface.
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation
and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access
to stainer basket.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
3.5 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 300 mm intervals
and tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm.
Secure inner layer with 1.6 mm, soft annealed, stainless steel wire spaced at 300 mm
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless steel bands at 300 mm intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral fiber, hydraulic setting cement to surface of installed
insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of
glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging
adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.

1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same
material and thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.


1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of
calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.

1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer basket without
disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
3.6 FIELD APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION

A. Apply glass cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50 mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6 mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40 mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75 mm wide joint strips at
end joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor retarder jackets and exposed
insulation with vapor retarder mastic.
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 25 mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Seal with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50 mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands
300 mm o.c. and at end joints.

3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass cloth jacket as specified
in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
the insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
3.8 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS


A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.
2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for
various pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.10 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders,
and field applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
3.11 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: chilled water supply and return.
1. Operating Temperature: 2º C to 24º C

3. Insulation Thickness:
a. Indoor Installation
1) <50 mm: 40 mm thick, 64 Kg/m³

2) >50 mm: 50 mm thick, 64 Kg/m³

b. Outdoor Installation
1) <65 mm: 40 mm thick, 80 Kg/m³

2) <150 mm, 50 mm thick, 80 Kg/m³
3) >200 mm, 65 mm thick, 80 Kg/m³
4. Exposed Field Applied Jacket: Foil and paper, 0.9 mm aluminum.

5. Vapor retarder Required: No. (with Aluglass facing).
END OF SECTION
23 07 19

SECTION 23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
C. Division 23 HVAC Sections
1.3 SUMMARY

Contract price.
C. HVAC systems to be commissioned include the following:
1. Plate Heat Exchangers
2. Pumps
3. Air Handling Units
4. Fans
5. Piping Systems
6. Ductwork Systems
7. Fire, Fire/Smoke and Volume Dampers
8. Split Systems
23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC, Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

9. BMS & Integrated Automatic Control System
standards.
D. CIBSE Commissioning codes for HVAC Systems
E. BSRIA Guide for commissioning of HVAC Systems.
1.5 DEFINITIONS






1.6 SUBMITTALS
systems:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION


Tests procedures.

tests.
Owner for review.

equipment.


B. Warranty Phase:

Specifications.

testing.
3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 TESTING

Performance test.
satisfactorily completed. Air balancing and water balancing shall be completed before
Functional Performance Tests.
discretion.

3.4 TRAINING
4. Objectives.




equipment

Hours System
Plate Heat Exchangers

HVAC Pumps
HVAC Piping Systems
Fresh Air Handler Units
Supplementary Supply Fans
Return Fan/Relief Fan
Air Handler Units
Split System AC
Basement Car Park Extract Fans
Stairwell Pressurization Fans
Corridor Smoke Extract Fans
Corridor Makeup Air Fans
Lift Pressurization Fans
Specialty Exhaust Fans
Restroom Central Exhaust Fans
Garage Exhaust Fans

SECTION 23 09 00
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Thermostats.
B. Humidistats.
C. Control valves.
D. Automatic dampers.
E. Damper operators.
F. Miscellaneous accessories.
A. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2007.
B. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2005).
C. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
D. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
E. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005.
F. ASTM B819 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems; 2000
(Reapproved 2006).
G. ASTM D1693 - Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics;
2008.
H. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.
I. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
J. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National
Fire Protection Association; 2009.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component.
Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams, and written
detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicating size, flow,
and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, velocities, and
static pressure drops for each system.
D. Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat and cover.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.

23 09 00 Instruments and Control Devices for HVAC Rev.00 Page 1 of 12
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels,
thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including
panels, thermostats, and sensors.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended
cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Binary s
name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum ten years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
ten years experience approved by manufacturer.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,
as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene 12 week before starting work of this section.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a 6 month period after Substantial Completion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,
as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
A. Unitized cabinet type for each system under automatic control with relays and controls mounted
in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push buttons and switches
flush on cabinet panel face.
B. NEMA 250, general purpose utility enclosures with enamelled finished face panel.
C. Provide common keying for all panels.
2.3 CONTROL VALVES FOR PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Valve
1. Construction
a. Valve shall be segmented rotary plug type. End connections to be flanged.
b. Body to be constructed of Carbon Steel
c. Trim - Stainless Steel.
d. Stem - stainless Steel.
e. Packing - PTFE or Graphite.
f. Plug - Stainless Steel - 316L
g. Gaskets - Graphite or Stainless Steel.
h. Seat.- Stainless Steel
i. Valve Characteristic - Linear
j. Minimum Valve Authority = 0.5
k. Leakage rating shall be minimum ANSI Class IV
l. Static Pressure Rating - 16 bar
m. Dynamic differential Pressure Rating - 10 bar
n. Range-ability (Ratio of Maximum Flow to minimum controllable flow) - minimum of 1:160
o. Valves shall be permanently lubricated.
p. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Samson - VETEC Type 72.3/R
2) Flowserve - Valtek Maxflo 3
3) Dezurik - RCV
B. Actuators for Heat Exchanger Control Valves
1. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action. And shall be suitable to operate with a 220/240 V, 50 Hz.
2. Field Bus communication protocols (Modbus or Profibus) ndustrial communication linked
to the main plant control.
3. Single power supply.
4. Provide positioner with PID control to fine tune the valve characteristic.
5. Motor characteristics such as NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor,
enclosure type, and efficiency.
6. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type with thermal overload protection. Gear
trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral
spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment
of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
7. Solid state speed control module with minimum 60 second valve opening closure time
suitable for field adjustment.
8. Direct mounted to valve with manual override hand wheel suitable for continuous duty,
weatherproof suitable for outdoor installation with Nema 4 or IP 68 certified enclosures
capable to operate in ambient temperature up to 158°F (70°C).
9. Electronic proportional control with servo amplifier capable of accepting 4-20 mA or 0-10
VDC for valve modulation.
10. Provide heater and thermostat in all actuators if unable to operate successfully at
operating temperatures.
11. Shall have a fail last position module and shall have a positional feedback to controller.
12. Actuators and positioners shall be matched to the valves.
13. Additionial features to be provided are:
a. PID auto tuning.
1) Push button or on site computer calibration.
2) Mechanical and Electrical limits.
2.4 CONTROL VALVES FOR COILS AND SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Control valves shall be two-way fully modulating service unless otherwise stated.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Up to 50 mm (2 inches): forged brass two-way ball valve with threaded end connections.
Valve shall be complete with chrome plated brass ball, characterizing disk, EPDM O rings,
graphite reinforced PFTE seats, actuator mounting flange, and nickel plated stem..
a. Valves shall provide a minimum of 500:1 rangeability.
b. Valves shall provide a minimum shut off pressure of 200 psi.
c. Valves shall be supplied with factory mounted actuators.
d. Valves shall be spring return type.
2. Over 50 mm (2 inches): forged brass two-way ball valve with class 150 flanged end connections.
Valve shall be complete with stainless steel ball and stem, characterizing disk, EPDM O rings,
graphite reinforced PFTE seats, and actuator mounting flange.
a. Valves shall provide a minimum of 500:1 rangeability.
b. Valves shall provide a minimum shut off pressure of 100 psi.
c. Valves shall be provided with factory mounted actuators.
d. Valves shall be spring return type.
3. Hydronic Systems:
a. Rate for service pressure of 1.5 times the operating pressure.
b. Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics, three way valves linear
characteristics. Size two way valve operators to close valves against pump shut off head.
c. Size control valves using nodal pressure analysis. Control valves shall be sized for a minimum
authority of 0.5.
d. Control valves shall have an operating differential pressure rating of at least 1.2 times the
calculated differential pressure based on nodal analysis.
C. Electronic Operators:
1. Actuators shall be selected for close off at 1.5 times the pump shut off head.
2. Acutators shall be spring return type so that they fail closed in the event of a power failure.
3. Actuators shall be proportional type - 0-10 V DC with auxilliary feedback switches.
D. Sizing Criteria:
1. Two-position service: Line size.

2. Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to a minimum of the pressure drop
through heat exchanger (load), or greater than 50% of the pressure difference between supply
and return mains.
3. Three-way Modulating Service: Pressure drop equal to a minimum of the pressure drop through
the coil exchanger (load).
4. Valves 1/2" through 2" shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class 125 or 250 depending on
the service requirements, spring loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position service.
Two-way valves to have replaceable composition disc, or stainless steel ball.
5. 2-1/2" valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with guided plug and Teflon packing.
E. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be furnished to provide the
following minimum close-off pressure ratings:
1. Water Valves:
a. Two-way: 120% of total system (pump) head.
b. Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at design flow or 100% of
total system (pump) head.
F. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans or as follows:
1. Chilled water control valves - normally closed.
2. Other applications - as scheduled or as required by sequence of operation.
2.5 DAMPERS
A. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500-D.
B. Frames: Extruded aluminum, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 2.7 mm (12
gage).
C. Blades: Extruded aluminum, maximum blade size 200 mm (8 inches) wide, 1200 mm (48 inches)
long, minimum 0.85 mm (22 gage), attached to minimum 13 mm (1/2 inch) shafts with set screws.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene mechanically attached, field replaceable.
E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel.
F. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.
G. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.
H. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 10 m/sec (2000 ft/min) and 1.0
kPa (4 inches wg).
I. Temperature Limits: -40 to 93 degrees C (-40 to 200 degrees F).
J. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type as hereinafter specified
and all two-position dampers shall be parallel blade types.

K. All leakage testing and pressure ratings will be based on AMCA Publication 500.
L. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 48". Provide a minimum of one damper
actuator per section.
M. Motorized Dampers - Smoke Operation:
1. Automatic control dampers that are used in conjunction with HVAC and the in a non dedicated
Smoke Management System shall be Listed under UL 555S. The dampers shall be rated for
operation under dynamic load conditions for all positions of operation (open-intermediate-closed)
and be provided with proof of position switches attached to the furthermost linked damper blade
from the damper operator. The activation of the switch will provide both open and closed status of
the damper. Both the damper and actuator shall be factory assembled and tested as one
assembly and shall be furnished to the job site as a complete assembly. Dampers shall be Class
1 leakage rated. NCA model SSD-3V-57 or approved equal.
N. Motorized Smoke and Fire Dampers:

1. Automatic control dampers that are used in conjunction with HVAC and the in a non dedicated
Smoke Management System shall be Listed under UL 555S. The dampers shall be rated for
operation under dynamic load conditions for all positions of operation (open-intermediate-closed)
and be provided with proof of position switches attached to the furthermost linked damper blade
from the damper operator. The activation of the switch will provide both open and closed status of
the damper. Both the damper and actuator shall be factory assembled and tested as one
assembly and shall be furnished to the job site as a complete assembly. Dampers shall be Class
1 leakage rated. Damper shall be provided with thermostatic override - NCA FSD-AF-O/R-58 or
approved equal. Provide spring return actuator.
O. Provide all necessary step down transformers to provide power for actuators.
2.6 DAMPER OPERATORS
A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent
greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system
pressures. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation.
1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement throughout damper
range.
2. Provide one operator for maximum 3.34 sq m (36 sq ft) damper section.
B. Electric Operators:
1. Spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with auxiliary end switch.
C. Actuators shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to
the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. All actuators shall be manufactured so as to
function without failure in a continuous 50 deg. C ambient condition.
D. Where necessary, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.
E. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring
return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.

F. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC
or 4-20 ma operating range.
G. All 24 VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10 VA
for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230 VAC shall
not required more than 11 VA.
H. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual
positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more
than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.
I. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction
of rotation
J. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be
pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical
connections.
K. Actuators shall have built-in switches to provide positional feedback to the BMS system.
L. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.
M. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated
torque.
1. Actuators shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to
the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator. All actuators shall be manufactured so as to
function without failure in a continuous 50 deg. C ambient condition.
N. Where necessary, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return

mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.
O. All rotary spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counter clockwise spring
return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return to the retracted position.
P. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 VDC or 0-20 ma control signal and provide a 2-10 VDC
or 4-20 ma operating range.
Q. All 24 VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10 VA
for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230 VAC shall
not required more than 11 VA.
R. All non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow manual
positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered. Spring return actuators with more
than 60 in-lb. torque capacity shall have a manual crank for this purpose.
S. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the reversing of direction
of rotation
T. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 1m electrical cable and shall be
pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical
connections.

U. Actuators shall have built-in switches to provide positional feedback to the BMS system.
V. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed.
W. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated
torque.
2.7 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS
A. Humidity Sensors:
1. Elements: Accurate within 5 percent full range with linear output.

2. Duct and Outside Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 – 100 percent
relative humidity.
B. Static Pressure Sensors:
1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input.
2. Temperature compensate with typical thermal error or 0.06 percent of full scale in temperature
range of 5 to 40 degrees C (40 to 100 degrees F).
3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3 percent.
4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc.
C. Equipment Operation Sensors:

1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 1250 Pa (0 to 5
inches wg).
2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential pressure switch piped across pump with adjustable pressure
differential range of 50 to 400 kPa (8 to 60 psi).
3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers, adjustable and
set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
D. Damper Position Indication: Potentiometer mounted in enclosure with adjustable crank arm
assembly connected to damper to transmit 0 - 100 percent damper travel.
2.8 THERMOSTATS
A. Electric Room Thermostats:

1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control.
2. Service: cooling only.
3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment, without thermometer.
4. Thermostats for fan coil units shall be complete with ON/OFF/AUTO/ 3 speed selector switches.
5. Thermostats shall communicate with the unit fan coil unit controller
6. All thermostats shall be factory preset for a minimum set point of 23 deg C.
7. Thermostat dead band shall be no greater than +/- 1.0 deg C.
B. Immersion Thermostat:
1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint and
adjustable throttling range.
C. Airstream Thermostats:
1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint in middle
of range and adjustable throttling range.
2. Averaging service remote bulb element: 2.3 m (7.5 feet).

2.9 TRANSMITTERS AND SWITCHES
A. Differential Pressure Transmitters

1. Field bus protocol output (Modbus or Profibus), isolated c/w LCD local Indicator and 316 stainless
steel diaphragm seal, carbon steel body.
2. Transmitter c/w 3-valve manifold 50 mm pipe mount
3. Process Temperature : 4° to 15° C
4. Design Pressure : 1034 kPa
5. Max. Differential Pressure :10 bar
6. Ambient temperature : -20° to 80° C
7. Accuracy : +/- 0.5% of the calibrated span.
8. Manufacturer:
a. E & H Deltabar S PMD 75
b. ABB
c. SIEMENS
d. Or Approved equal
B. Level Switches (Float)
1. All 316 stainless steel wetted parts, carbon steel body 50mm threaded connection
2. Sealed snap switch assembly with moving magnetic float
3. Form C contact, SPDT screwed connection
C. Temperature Detector
1. Platinum 100 ohm 3-wire Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD), integral to Transmitters
preferred.
2. 0.00385 ohm/ohm/°C, 6 mm diameter stainless steel sheath, spring loaded bayonet type, 15 mm
connection to well.
3. IEC IP65 aluminum RTD head (remote transmitter only) with screwed ceramic termination block
4. Thermo-well to be stepped drilled 316 stainless steel bar stock, 25 mm threaded process
Connection
5. Thermo-well tip to reach within mid third of pipe.
D. Level Column and Transmitters

1. Magnetic level column 50 mm unions screwed connection, 2000 mm length c/w ball check
gauges valves, vent plug and drain valves to meet CL 150# ANSI
2. Transmitter output - 4-20 mA calibrated to 0-100% of column
2.10 WET BULB MEASURING SYSTEM
A. Chilled mirror technology. IP65 outdoor sensor mounted in a conduit body suitable for conduit
mounting, transmitter is IP45 rated for indoor mounting. Humidity range, 10 to 90% at 80° F.
PT100 ohm RTD, 4 wire.
B. Accuracy : ±1.0° F
C. Repeatability : ±0.1° F
D. Hysteresis : none
E. Response time : 4 minutes, max
F. Power : 220 V ac, 50 Hz
G. Signal : 4 - 20mA dc with dew point from -4° C - +60° C

2.11 FLOW SWITCHES
A. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as shown.
B. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty
rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity with NEMA 1 Type enclosure unless otherwise
specified:
C. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-acting,
pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 Type enclosure, with scale range and differential
suitable for intended application, or as specified.
D. Current sensing relays may be used for flow sensing or terminal devices.
2.12 Temperature Transmitters:
A. One pipe, directly proportional output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or minus
1/2 percent of range for 93 degrees C (200 degree F) span and plus or minus 1 percent for 10
degrees C (50 degree F) span, with 10 degree C (50 degrees F) temperature range,
compensated bulb, averaging capillary, or rod and tube operation on 138 kPa (20 psig) input
pressure and 20 to 100 kPa (3 to 15 psig) output.
2.13 Humidity Transmitters:
A. One pipe, directly proportioned output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or minus 1
percent for 70 percent relative humidity span, capable of withstanding 95 percent relative
humidity without loss of calibration.
2.14 CONTROL CIRCUITS
A. Selector, momentary pushbutton, or momentary selector as required. Positions as required for

application.
B. Heavy duty, oil tight type, contacts as required.
C. Contact rating shall conform to NEMA A 600 designation.
2.15 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Plug in type with dust cover, socket and locking spring when relay mounted horizontally.
B. Coil: continuous operation at 240 VAC +_10% otherwise required.
C. Contacts: 3 pole, double throw, minimum.
D. 10 amps, make break, 240 VAC, resistive.
E. Insulation resistance: 1000 meg-ohms at 500 VDC.
F. Dielectric: 2000 VAC, 50 Hz.
G. Operating time:

H. 35 milliseconds (nominal) energization.

I. 100 milliseconds (nominal) de-energization.
J. Mechanical life: 106 operations
K. Temperature: 0° to 70°C
2.16 BIDIRECTIONAL FLOW METER
A. Dual Turbine Flow Meter shall be complete with all installation hardware necessary to enable
insertion and removal of the meter without system shutdown. The Proposed meter shall be
suitable for bi-directional flow applications. The flow meter shall be hand-insertable up to 400 psi.
The flow meter shall have two contra-rotating axial turbines, with electronic impedance-based
sensing and an averaging circuit to reduce measurement errors due to swirl and flow profile
distortion.
B. Wetted metal components shall be nickel-plated brass (unless optional 316L SS is otherwise
specified). Optional 316L SS construction is required for HW applications operating over 250
degrees F, and for any application in non-metallic pipe. The maximum operating temperature
shall be 280 degrees F, 300 F peak.
C. Each flow meter shall be individually wet-calibrated against a primary volumetric standard that is
accurate to within 0.1% and traceable to NIST*. The manufacturer’s certificate of calibration shall
be provided with each flow meter. Accuracy shall be within ± 0.5% of rate at the calibrated
velocity, within ± 1% of rate over a 10:1 turndown (3.0 to 30 ft/s) and within ± 2% of rate over a
50:1 turndown (from 0.4 to 20 ft/s).
D. The flow meter shall include integral analog output(s), 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V. Bi-directional
meters shall include an isolated contact closure output for direction. The flow meter shall be
covered by the manufacturer’s two year warranty.
E. Optional Flow Display: The Flow meter shall be Provided with a Display Module for local or
remote indication of flow rate and/or total.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar

components in other systems.
E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment

such as air handling units and air terminal units.
F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components.
G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment

such as air handling units and air terminal units.

3.2 INSTALLATION
B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate
1500 mm (60 inches) above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats. Refer to Section
16140.
C. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors
with sun shield.
D. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements.
E. Provide thermostats in aspirating boxes in where indicated.
F. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances, public areas, and where indicated.
G. Provide valves with position indicators and with pilot positioners where sequenced with other
controls.
H. Provide isolation (two position) dampers of parallel blade construction.
I. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas. Do not install motors in locations at
outdoor temperatures.
J. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing
angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment
room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and
engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face.
K. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in
"hand" position.
L. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 16155. Electrical material and
installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 16.
END OF SECTION
23 09 00

SECTION: 23 09 23
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. System Description
B. Operator Interface
C. Controllers
D. Power Supplies and Line Filtering
E. System Software
F. Controller Software
G. HVAC Control Programs
H. Control equipment.
I. Software.
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent
EditionAdopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field
programmablemicro-processor based units with communications to Building Management
System specified inSection 25 00 00 .
B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in amulti-
tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remotehardware,
software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local
areanetworks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.
D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and
thelike when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified
inSection 15928.
E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and

operators,indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required
to operatemechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary
forcomplete and fully operational system.
G. The Building Management Control System (BMS) shall be a direct digital control (DDC)
system,state of the art technology, freely expandable for any future expansion plans. The system
23 39 00 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC Rev.00 Page 1 of 31

(BMS)shall have a minimum controlling capacity of 10,000 physical points without upgrading
thesoftware or related hardware. In general the system shall support “Open Architecture
Concept”with capability to provide full software integration with third party suppliers through
BACNET,MODBus protocol or Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) Link.
H. The control system shall accommodate simultaneous multiple user operation. Access to
thecontrol system data should be limited only by operator password. Multiple users shall
haveaccess to all valid system data. An operator shall be able to log onto any work-station on
thecontrol system and have access to all appropriate data. The system shall be fully web enabled
asshown on the drawings and as specified in this specification.
I. The control system shall be designed such that each mechanical system will be able to
operateunder stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure, or
the loss ofany other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate under
control.
J. Communication at the enterprise and supervisory layers shall be over a high speed
TCP/IPnetwork. All nodes on this network shall be peers. The operator shall not have to know the
panelidentifier or location to view or control an object. Application Specific Controllers shall
beconstantly scanned by the network controllers to update point information and alarm
information.
K. This system shall interface with the main SCADA/PLC system that will operate the district
coolingprocess. Provide all necessary gateways in order to successfully convert the protocols so
thatinformation can be shared.
L. The documentation is schematic in nature. The Contractor shall provide hardware and
softwarenecessary to implement the functions and sequences shown.
1.4 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide a Building Management and Control System (BMCS) incorporating Direct Digital
Control(DDC), equipment monitoring, and control consisting of a Building management system
(BMS);General Purpose DDC Controllers (GPCs) interfacing directly with sensors, actuators
andenvironmental delivery systems (i.e. chilled water distribution, etc.); Air Handling Unit
DDCcontrollers, electric controls and mechanical devices for all items indicated on drawings
describedherein including dampers, valves, panels; a primary communication network to allow
dataexchange from GPC to GPC; Unitary DDC Controllers (UCs) interfacing with sensors,
actuators,terminal equipment devices; a secondary Bacnet communication network interfacing
UCs to UCnetwork management devices; hardware and software interfaces to third-party control
equipmentsuch as chillers.
B. Provide all labor, materials, tools, services and equipment required to complete controls
andinstrumentation work according with this Section of Specification and Drawings. The scope of
workof controls specified by this section shall include but not limited to the following:
C. Provide wiring in conduits which shall be done in accordance with the requirements of
ElectricalSection.
D. Provide wells for immersion temperature sensors. These wells shall be given to the
MEPContractor for installation.

E. Provide all necessary fluid flow measuring devices.
F. Provide all DDC Controllers with field devices - such as Control Valves with matching
flanges,Butterfly Valves for chillers, Control Damper Actuators, Sensors, Thermostats, Actuators,
LevelControllers, Transducers, Power Monitoring Unit, Controllers, specified by this section.
G. Provide DDC Enclosures / Panels in accordance with the requirement of Electrical Section
H. Provide the selector switches AUTO/OFF/ON for AHUs and Fans which shall be controlled by
BMS.
I. Provide all computer work Stations with peripherals.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data for each system component and software module.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations, and trunk
dataconductors.
2. List connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
3. Indicate system graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)point
addresses, and operator notations. Provide demonstration diskette containinggraphics.
4. Show system configuration with peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,modems,
and interconnections.
5. Indicate description and sequence of operation of operating, user, and application software.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions for all
manufacturedcomponents.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including controlunits,
thermostats, and sensors.
1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
2. Include submittals data in final "Record Documents" form.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Include interconnection wiring diagrams complete field installed systems with identified
andnumbered, system components and devices.
2. Include keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operatorfunction.
3. Include inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, andcalibration

tolerances.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Binarysname
and registered with manufacturer.
A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, 90A and 90B.
B. Design system software under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced

indesign of this Work and licensed at Erbil, Iraq.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

thissection with minimum three years documented experience.
D. All devices shall be UL / FM listed and labeled for the specific use, application and environment
towhich they are applied.
E. System shall be designed and manufactured to ISO 9001 quality standard, and all
electronicequipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC regulation Part 15, Section 15
governingradio frequency electromagnetic interference and be so labeled and European CE
rating forelectromagnetic emissions standards.
F. System devices used for smoke control shall have UL864 (UUKL smoke control) and
CSAapproval and shall be so certified at time of bid.
G. If DDC equipment of BMS supplier is not listed to be used for smoke operation (UL864 /
UUKLsmoke control), BMS supplier must provide alternative solution with additional controllers
/equipment, Fire Alarm Equipment, conduit and wiring which are required for interfacing with
FireAlarm System to comply with the smoke sequence of operation to the approval of the
Engineer andthe same must be included in the price of BMS supplier.
H. Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% above and 85% below rated voltage and
at3 hertz variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short circuit protection on
inputsand outputs according to UL 864 listing. Communication lines shall be protected against
incorrectwiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. Bus connected devices shall
be ACcoupled, or equivalent so that any single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus
communication.
I. For all input/output points of the DDC Outstations used for smoke operation, transient
protectors(isolators) should be provided to protect the GPC controllers against surge protection,
transientpower or sparking according to UL864 listing for smoke operation. The solution without
transientprotectors / isolators will not be acceptable. Fire Resistance cables shall be used for
smokeoperation. These DDC stations shall be fire rated.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Convene one week before starting work of this Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting the work of this Section.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for field programmable micro-processor based units.
1.9 PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS
A. Prior to delivery of software, the Binary and the party providing the software will enter into
asoftware license agreement with provisions for the following:
1. Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications.
2. Limiting copying.
3. Preserving confidentiality.
4. Prohibiting transfer to a third party.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A. Automatic temperature control field monitoring and control system using field
programmablemicro-processor based units with communications to Building Management
System specified inSection
B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-alone controllers, operating in amulti-
tasking, multi-user environment on token passing network, with central and remotehardware,
software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
C. Include computer software and hardware, operator input/output devices, control units, local
areanetworks (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators.
D. Controls for variable air volume terminals, radiation, reheat coils, unit heaters, fan coils, and
thelike when directly connected to the control units. Individual terminal unit control is specified
inSection 15928.
E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control valves, dampers and

operators,indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required
to operatemechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
F. Include installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments, and fine tuning necessary
forcomplete and fully operational system.
2.2 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. PC Based Work Station:
B. Workstation, controllers, and control backbone to communicate using BACnet protocol

andaddressing.
C. Hardware:

2.3 CONTROLLERS
A. BUILDING CONTROLLERS
1. General:
a. Manage global strategies by one or more, independent, standalone,

microprocessorbased controllers.
b. Provide sufficient memory to support controller's operating system, database,
andprogramming requirements.
c. Share data between networked controllers.
d. Controller operating system manages input and output communication signalsallowing
distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allowingfor central
monitoring and alarms.
e. Utilize real-time clock for scheduling.
f. Continuously check processor status and memory circuits for abnormal operation.
g. Controller to assume predetermined failure mode and generate alarm notification
upondetection of abnormal operation.
h. Communication with other network devices to be based on assigned protocol.
2. Communication:
a. Controller to reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (ETHERNET) DataLink/Physical

layer protocol.
b. Perform routing when connected to a network of custom application and applicationspecific
controllers.
c. Provide service communication port for connection to a portable operator's terminal orhand held
device with compatible protocol.
3. Anticipated Environmental Ambient Conditions:
a. Outdoors and/or in Wet Ambient Conditions:

1) Mount within waterproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 4 to 65 degrees C (40 to 150 degrees F).
b. Conditioned Space:
1) Mount within dustproof enclosures.
2) Rated for operation at 0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 120 degrees F).
4. Provisions for Serviceability:
a. Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.
b. Make all wiring connections to field removable, modular terminal strips, or to
atermination card connected by a ribbon cable.
5. Memory: In the event of a power loss, maintain all BIOS and programming information for
aminimum of 72 hours.
6. Power and Noise Immunity:
a. Maintain operation at 90 to 110 percent of nominal voltage rating.
b. Perform orderly shutdown below 80 percent of nominal voltage.
c. Operation protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios
up to5 W. at 1 m (3 feet).
B. INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

1. Hardwired inputs and outputs tie into the DDC system through building, custom application,or
application specific controllers.
2. All Input/Output Points:
a. Protect controller from damage resulting from any point short-circuiting or groundingand
from voltage up to 24 volts of any duration.
b. Provide universal type for building and custom application controllers where input
oroutput is software designated as either binary or analog type with
appropriateproperties.
3. Inputs:
a. Allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices.
b. Provide wetting current of 12 mA minimum, compatible with commonly available
controldevices and protected against the effects of contact bounce and noise.
c. Sense dry contact closure with power provided only by the controller.
4. Pulse Accumulation Input Objects: Conform to all requirements of binary input objects andaccept
up to 10 pulses per second.
5. Analog Inputs:
a. Allow for monitoring of low voltage 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA current, or resistancesignals
(thermistor, RTD).
b. Compatible with and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
6. Outputs:
a. Used for On/Off operation or a pulsed low-voltage signal for pulse width
modulationcontrol.
b. Outputs provided with three position (On/Off/Auto) override switches.
c. Status lights for building and custom application controllers to be selectable fornormally
open or normally closed operation.
7. Analog Outputs:
a. Monitoring signal provides a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA output signal for end
devicecontrol.
b. Provide status lights and two position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch for building and
customapplication controllers with manually adjustable potentiometer for manual override
onbuilding and custom application controllers.
c. Drift to not exceed 0.4 percent of range per year.
8. Tri State Outputs:

a. Coordinate two binary outputs to control three point, floating type, electronic
actuatorswithout feedback.
b. Limit the use of three point, floating devices to the following zone and terminal unitcontrol
applications:
c. Control algorithms run the zone actuator to one end of its stroke once every 24 hours
forverification of operator tracking.
9. System Object Capacity:
a. System size to be expandable to twice the number of input output objects required byproviding
additional controllers, including associated devices and wiring.
b. Hardware additions or software revisions for the installed operator interfaces are not tobe
required for future, system expansions.

2.4 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
A. Power Supplies:
1. Provide UL listed control transformers with Class 2 current limiting type or over-currentprotection
in both primary and secondary circuits for Class 2 service as required by the NEC.
2. Limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity.
3. Match DC power supply to current output and voltage requirements.
4. Unit to be full wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
5. Regulation to be 1 percent combined line and load with 100 microsecond response time for50
percent load changes.
6. Provide over-voltage and over-current protection to withstand a 150 percent current overloadfor 3
seconds minimum without trip-out or failure.
7. Operational Ambient Conditions: 0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 120 degrees F).
8. EM/RF meets FCC Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MIL-STD 810 for shock andvibration.
9. Line voltage units UL recognized and CSA approved.
B. Power Line Filtering:
1. Provide external or internal transient voltage and surge suppression component for
allworkstations and controllers.
2. Minimum surge protection attributes:
a. Dielectric strength of 1000 volts minimum.
b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less.
c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater.
d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.5 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. The system architecture shall be as follows:

1. Distributed Architecture - this shall allow the system to perform control and monitoringfunctions to
equipment that are distributed throughout the system.
2. The system shall be layered into three layers and contain a field layer (the level that containsall of
the field level controllers, and application specific controllers), a Supervisory layer (thisis the layer
that connects all of the field layers), and an enterprise layer (this is the layer thatconnects all of
the supervisory layers).
3. Peer to Peer Devices - All controllers shall be selected as Peer to Peer devices – allcommunicate
with each other. This gives the flexibility for information to be shared locallyfrom one controller to
another instead of all the information going back to the a centrallocation and then sent back to
others.
4. The system head end shall comprise of a work station that utilizes windows basedsoftwareto
provide web enabled access to the system. The workstation shall be capable ofstoringtrend data
which will be transferred to the main server once the overall system is inplace.
The following shall also be provided:
5. An internet connection located in the Control room.
6. The system shall be connected to the internet for external web access.

2.6 LAN AND PROTOCOLS
A. The following is a summary matrix of the Lan and Protocols within the BMs:
1. Layer: Field
a. Physical Media: Twisted Pair Wire
1) Protocol: Bacnet
(a) Carrier: RS 485
(1) Speed: Min 9600 bps
2. Layer: Supervisory
a. Physical Media: Cat 6 Cable
1) Protocol: Bacnet
(a) Carrier: TCP/IP on Ethernet
(1) Speed: 10/100 Mbps
3. Layer: Enterprise
a. Physical Media: Fibre Optic
1) Protocol: Bacnet
4. Layer: Specialized Sub Systems

a. Physical Media: Fibre Optic
1) Protocol: Bacnet
B. All wiring shall be in accordance with IEE wiring regulations but not in contradiction with
LocalAuthorities requirements and the same shall be properly supported. The wiring and
tubingexposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at right angles to the building
structure.All piping and wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to
preventobstruction to devices and terminals. All line voltage wiring, all wiring exposed, and all
wiring inequipment rooms shall be installed in rigid galvanized conduit in accordance to the
electricalspecifications. All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum and shielded. All wiring
in thecentral control room shall be installed in conduit.
C. All wiring above false ceilings shall run in PVC conduits embedded in the structural slab above
thefalse ceiling. Wiring located within the false ceiling maybe permitted to be installed
withoutconduits provided that this wiring is neatly installed, labelled and properly supported.
D. Provide a minimum 450mm long coil of wire at each device termination.
E. If any fire and life safety devices are controlled by the BMS, then provide fire rated (UL/FM)
wiringbetween the fire alarm system signallingdevice, all fire rated controlling devices and all life
safetydevices to be controlled by the BMS.
F. The BMS Contractor shall coordinate with Electro-Mechanical Contractor for assuring that
theconduit size and wire quantity, size and type are suitable for system supplied. The Contractor
shall review the proper installation of each type of device with the equipment supplier.

G. The Contractor shall provide all sensing, control, and wiring for all devices following unless
shownor specified elsewhere.
H. The BMS Contractor shall enter all computer data into the related computers including
allgraphics, control programs, initial approved parameters and settings, and English
descriptors.The BMS Contractor shall maintain CD copies of all data file and application software
for reloaduse in the event of a system crash or memory failure. One copy shall be delivered to the
Ownerduring training sessions, and one copy shall be archived in the BMS Contractor's local
softwarevault.
2.7 OPERATOR STATION
A. Work Station:
1. A personal computer (PC) based central, with minimum Pentium 5 processor, 500 MHzminimum
clock speed PC shall be provided
2. Display: Super video color graphics adapter (SVGA), 475 mm (19 inch) flat screen LCDmonitor.
3. Keyboard: Low profile, detachable, having Qwerty layout plus a 10 key numeric keypad,dedicated
function keys.
4. Minimum 20x DVD writer.
5. Minimum memory: 8 Mb RAM.
6. Memory clock speed: 66 MHz.
7. Cache memory: 256 kbyte.
8. Keyboard: Low profile, detachable, having Qwerty layout plus a 10 key numeric keypad,dedicated
function keys.
9. Hard disk drive: 120 gb.
10. Mouse: Software supported mouse with support software including self building menus
anddisplays of system operations and functions.
11. Modem: Internal type modem or proprietary data modem with cables and
communicationinterfaces required to provide the specified functions, minimum 14,400 bps rate.
12. Printer: Support color printer.
13. Operating System: Windows XP.
B. Printer:
1. Wide carriage with output of ten characters per inch and 132 characters per line of paper,capable
of using fan-fold paper.
2. Minimum operating speed of 120 characters per second.
3. Paper: Two cartons fanfold paper containing minimum 2500 sheets.
23 39 00 Digital Control Equipment Rev.00 Page 10 of 31

C. System Support: Minimum ten (10) work stations connected to multi-user, multi-
taskingenvironment with concurrent capability to:
1. Access DDC network.
2. Access or control same control unit.
3. Access or modify same control unit data base.
4. Archive data, alarms, and network actions to hard disk regardless of what
applicationprograms are being currently executed.
5. Develop and edit data base.
6. Implement and tune DDC control.
7. Develop graphics.
8. Control facility.
2.8 CONTROL UNITS
A. Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with programmable RAM
memory,local operator access and display panel, and integral interface equipment.
B. Battery Backup: For minimum of 48 hours for complete system including RAM without
interruption,with automatic battery charger.
C. Control Units Functions:
1. Monitor or control each input/output point.
2. Completely independent with hardware clock/calendar and software to maintain
controlindependently.
3. Acquire, process, and transfer information to operator station or other control units onnetwork.
4. Accept, process, and execute commands from other control unit's or devices or operatorstations.
5. Access both data base and control functions simultaneously.
6. Record, evaluate, and report changes of state or value that occur among
associatedpoints.Continue to perform associated control functions regardless of status of
network.
7. Perform in stand-alone mode:
a. Start/stop.
b. Duty cycling.
c. Automatic Temperature Control.
d. Demand control via a sliding window, predictive algorithm.
e. Event initiated control.
f. Calculated point.
g. Scanning and alarm processing.
h. Full direct digital control.
i. Trend logging.
j. Global communications.
k. Maintenance scheduling.
D. Global Communications:
1. Broadcast point data onto network, making that information available to all other
systemcontrol units.
2. Transmit any or all input/output points onto network for use by other control units and
utilizedata from other control units.
E. Input/Output Capability:
1. Discrete/digital input (contact status).

2. Discrete/digital output.

3. Analog input.
4. Analog output.
5. Pulse input (5 pulses/second).
6. Pulse output (0-655 seconds in duration with 0.01 second resolution).
F. Monitor, control, or address data points. Mix shall include analog inputs, analog outputs,
pulseinputs, pulse outputs and discrete inputs/outputs, as required. Install control unit's with
minimum30 percent spare capacity.
G. Point Scanning: Set scan or execution speed of each point to operator selected time from 1 to
250seconds.
H. Upload/Download Capability: Download from or upload to operator station. Upload/Downloadtime

for entire control unit database maximum 10 seconds on hard wired LAN, or 60 seconds
overvoice grade phone lines.
I. Test Mode Operation: Place input/output points in test mode to allow testing and developing
ofcontrol algorithms on line without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. In
testmode:
1. Inhibit scanning and calculation of input points. Issue manual control to input points
(setanalog or digital input point to operator determined test value) from work station.
2. Control output points but change only data base state or value; leave external field
hardwareunchanged.
3. Enable control actions on output points but change only data base state or value.
J. Local display and adjustment panel: Portable control unit, containing digital display, andnumerical
keyboard. Display and adjust:
1. Input/output point information and status.

2. Controller set points.
3. Controller tuning constants.
4. Program execution times.
5. High and low limit values.
6. Limit differential.
7. Set/display date and time.
8. Control outputs connected to the network.
9. Automatic control outputs.
10. Perform control unit diagnostic testing.
11. Points in "Test" mode.
2.9 LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
A. Provide communication between control units over local area network (LAN).
B. LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes.
C. Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN reconfiguration.
D. LAN Data Speed: Minimum as defined below Kb.
E. Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by multiple operation stations and
byauto-answer/auto-dial modems. Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems.

F. Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gauge twisted, shielded copper cable.
G. Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any station, shall be less than 3seconds.
Provide automatic reconfiguration if any station is added or lost. If transmission cableis cut,
reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's operation, without operatorintervention.
2.10 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Operating System:
1. Concurrent, multi-tasking capability.
a. Common Software Applications Supported: Microsoft Excel.

b. Acceptable Operating Systems:
2. System Graphics:
a. Allow up to 10 graphic screens, simultaneously displayed for comparison andmonitoring of

system status.
b. Animation displayed by shifting image files based on object status.
c. Provide method for operator with password to perform the following:
1) Move between, change size, and change location of graphic displays.
2) Modify on-line.
3) Add, delete, or change dynamic objects consisting of:
(a) Analog and binary values.
(b) Dynamic text.
(c) Static text.
(d) Animation files.
3. Custom Graphics Generation Package:
a. Create, modify, and save graphic files and visio format graphics in PCX formats.
b. HTML graphics to support web browser compatible formats.
c. Capture or convert graphics from AutoCAD.
4. Standard HVAC Graphics Library:
a. HVAC Equipment:
b. Ancillary Equipment:
B. Workstation System Applications:
1. Automatic System Database Save and Restore Functions:
a. Current database copy of each Building Controller is automatically stored on hard disk.
b. Automatic update occurs upon change in any system panel.
c. In the event of database loss in any system panel, the first workstation to detect the
lossautomatically restores the database for that panel unless disabled by the operator.
2. Manual System Database Save and Restore Functions by Operator with PasswordClearance:
a. Save database from any system panel.
b. Clear a panel database.
c. Initiate a download of a specified database to any system panel.

3. Software provided allows system configuration and future changes or additions by

operatorsunder proper password protection.
4. On-line Help:
a. Context-sensitive system assists operator in operation and editing.
b. Available for all applications.
c. Relevant screen data provided for particular screen display.
d. Additional help available via hypertext.
5. Security:
a. Operator log-on requires user name and password to view, edit, add, or delete data.
b. System security selectable for each operator.
c. System supervisor sets passwords and security levels for all other operators.
d. Operator passwords to restrict functions accessible to viewing and/or changing
systemapplications, editor, and object.
e. Automatic, operator log-off results from keyboard or mouse inactivity duringuser-adjustable, time
period.
f. All system security data stored in encrypted format.
6. System Diagnostics:
a. Operations Automatically Monitored:
1) Workstations.
2) Printers.
3) Modems.
4) Network connections.
5) Building management panels.
6) Controllers.
b. Device failure is annunciated to the operator.
7. Alarm Processing:
a. All system objects are configurable to "alarm in" and "alarm out" of normal state.
b. Configurable Objects:
1) Alarm limits.
2) Alarm limit differentials.
3) States.
4) Reactions for each object.
8. Alarm Messages:
a. Descriptor: English language.
b. Recognizable Features:
1) Source.
2) Location.
3) Nature.
9. Configurable Alarm Reactions by Workstation and Time of Day:

a. Logging.
b. Printing.
c. Starting programs.
d. Displaying messages.
e. Dialing out to remote locations.
f. Paging.
g. Providing audible annunciation.
h. Displaying specific system graphics.

10. Custom Trend Logs:

a. Definable for any data object in the system including interval, start time, and stop time.
b. Trend Data:
1) Sampled and stored on the building controller panel.
2) Archivable on hard disk.
3) Retrievable for use in reports, spreadsheets and standard database programs.
4) Archival on LAN accessible storage media including hard disk, tape, Raid arraydrive, and virtual
cloud environment.
5) Protected and encrypted format to prevent manipulation, or editing of historicaldata and event
logs.
11. Alarm and Event Log:

a. View all system alarms and change of states from any system location.
b. Events listed chronologically.
c. Operator with proper security acknowledges and clears alarms.
d. Alarms not cleared by operator are archived to the workstation hard disk.
12. Object, Property Status and Control:

a. Provide a method to view, edit if applicable, the status of any object and property in thesystem.
b. Status Available by the Following Methods:
1) Menu.
2) Graphics.
3) Custom Programs.
13. Reports and Logs:

a. Reporting Package:
1) Allows operator to select, modify, or create reports.
2) Definable as to data content, format, interval, and date.
3) Archivable to hard disk.
b. Real-time logs available by type or status such as alarm, lockout, normal, etc.
c. Stored on hard disk and readily accessible by standard software applications,
includingspreadsheets and word processing.
d. Set to be printed on operator command or specific time(s).
14. Reports:
a. Standard:
1) Objects with current values.
2) Current alarms not locked out.
3) Disabled and overridden objects, points and SNVTs.
4) Objects in manual or automatic alarm lockout.
5) Objects in alarm lockout currently in alarm.
6) Logs:
(a) Alarm History.
(b) System messages.
(c) System events.
(d) Trends.
b. Custom:
1) Daily.
2) Weekly.
3) Monthly.
4) Annual.

5) Time and date stamped.

6) Title.
7) Facility name.
c. Tenant Override:
1) Monthly report showing total, requested, after-hours HVAC and lighting serviceson a daily basis
for each tenant.
2) Annual report showing override usage on a monthly basis.
d. Electrical, Fuel, and Weather:

1) Electrical Meter(s):
(a) Monthly showing daily electrical consumption and peak electrical demandwith time and date
stamp for each meter.
(b) Annual summary showing monthly electrical consumption and peak demandwith time and date
stamp for each meter.
2) Fuel Meter(s):
(a) Monthly showing daily natural gas consumption for each meter.
(b) Annual summary showing monthly consumption for each meter.
3) Weather:
(a) Monthly showing minimum, maximum, average outdoor air temperature andheating/cooling
degree-days for the month.
C. Workstation Applications Editors:
1. Provide editing software for all system applications at the PC workstation.

2. Downloaded application is executed at controller panel.
3. Full screen editor for each application allows operator to view and change:
a. Configuration.
b. Name.
c. Control parameters.
d. Set-points.
4. Scheduling:
a. Monthly calendar indicates schedules, holidays, and exceptions.
b. Allows several related objects to be scheduled and copied to other objects or dates.
c. Start and stop times adjustable from master schedule.
5. Custom Application Programming:
a. Create, modify, debug, edit, compile, and download custom application programmingduring
operation and without disruption of all other system applications.
b. Programming Features:
1) English oriented language, based on BASIC, FORTRAN, C, or PASCAL syntaxallowing for free
form programming.
2) Alternative language graphically based using appropriate function blocks suitablefor all required
functions and amenable to customizing or compounding.
3) Insert, add, modify, and delete custom programming code that incorporates wordprocessing
features such as cut/paste and find/replace.
4) Allows the development of independently, executing, program modules designedto enable and
disable other modules.
5) Debugging/simulation capability that displays intermediate values and/or resultsincluding
syntax/execution error messages.
6) Support for conditional statements (IF/THEN/ELSE/ELSE-F) using compoundBoolean (AND, OR,
and NOT) and/or relations (EQUAL, LESS THAN, GREATERTHAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.

7) Support for floating-point arithmetic utilizing plus, minus, divide, times, square rootoperators;
including absolute value; minimum/maximum value from a list ofvalues for mathematical
functions.
8) Language consisting of resettable, predefined, variables representing time of day,day of the
week, month of the year, date; and elapsed time in seconds, minutes,hours, and days where the
variable values cab be used in IF/THEN comparisons,calculations, programming statement logic,
etc.
9) Language having predefined variables representing status and results of thesystem software
enables, disables, and changes the set points of the controllersoftware.
2.11 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. All applications reside and operate in the system controllers and editing of all applications
occursat the operator workstation.
B. System Security:
1. User access secured via user passwords and user names.
2. Passwords restrict user to the objects, applications, and system functions as assigned bythe
system manager.
3. User Log On/Log Off attempts are recorded.
4. Automatic Log Off occurs following the last keystroke after a user defined delay time.
C. Object or Object Group Scheduling:

1. Weekly Schedules Based on Separate, Daily Schedules:
a. Include start, stop, optimal stop, and night economizer.
b. 10 events maximum per schedule.
c. Start/stop times adjustable for each group object.
D. Provide standard application for equipment coordination and grouping based on function
andlocation to be used for scheduling and other applications.
E. Alarms:
1. Binary object is set to alarm based on the operator specified state.
2. Analog object to have high/low alarm limits.
3. All alarming is capable of being automatically and manually disabled.
4. Alarm Reporting:
a. Operator determines action to be taken for alarm event.
b. Alarms to be routed to appropriate workstation.
c. Reporting Options:
F. Maintenance Management: System monitors equipment status and generates

maintenancemessages based upon user-designated run-time limits.
G. Sequencing: Application software based upon specified sequences of operation in Section 15940.
H. PID Control Characteristics:

1. Direct or reverse action.
2. Anti-windup.
3. Calculated, time-varying, analog value, positions an output or stages a series of outputs.
4. User selectable controlled variable, set-point, and PED gains.
I. Staggered Start Application:

1. Prevents all controlled equipment from simultaneously restarting after power outage.

2. Order of equipment startup is user selectable.
J. Energy Calculations:
1. Accumulated instantaneous power or flow rates are converted to energy use data.
2. Algorithm calculates a rolling average and allows window of time to be user specified inminute
intervals.
3. Algorithm calculates a fixed window average with a digital input signal from a utility meterdefining
the start of the window period that in turn synchronizes the fixed-window averagewith that used
by the power company.
K. Anti-Short Cycling:
1. All binary output objects protected from short-cycling.
2. Allows minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.
L. On-Off Control with Differential:

1. Algorithm allows binary output to be cycled based on a controlled variable and set-point.
2. Algorithm to be direct-acting or reverse-acting incorporating an adjustable differential.
M. Run-Time Totalization:
1. Totalize run-times for all binary input objects.
2. Provides operator with capability to assign high run-time alarm.
2.12 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Input/Output Capability From Operator Station:

1. Request display of current values or status in tabular or graphic format.
2. Command selected equipment to specified state.
3. Initiate logs and reports.
4. Change analog limits.
5. Add, delete, or change points within each control unit or application routine.
6. Change point input/output descriptors, status, alarm descriptors, and engineering unitdescriptors.
7. Add new control units to system.
8. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters.
9. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color graphic displays.
10. Automatically archive select data even when running third party software.
11. Provide capability to sort and extract data from archived files and to generate custom reports.
12. Support two printer operations.
a. Alarm printer: Print alarms, operator acknowledgements, action messages, systemalarms,
operator sign-on and sign-off.
b. Data printer: Print reports, page prints, and data base prints.
13. Select daily, weekly or monthly as scheduled frequency to synchronize time and date
indigitalcontrol units. Accommodate daylight savings time adjustments.
14. Print selected control unit data base.
B. Operator System Access: Via software password with minimum 30 access levels at work
stationand minimum 3 access levels at each control unit.
C. Data Base Creation and Support: Changes shall utilize standard procedures. Control unit
shallautomatically check work station data base files upon connection and verify data base
match.
Minimum capability shall include:
1. Add and delete points.

2. Modify any point parameter.

3. Change, add, or delete English language descriptors.
4. Add, modify, or delete alarm limits.
5. Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, etc.
6. Create custom relationship between points.
7. Create or modify DDC loops and parameters.
8. Create or modify override parameters.
9. Add, modify, and delete any applications program.
10. Add, delete, develop, or modify dynamic color graphic displays.
D. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays:

1. Utilizes custom symbols or system supported library of symbols.
2. Sixteen (16) colors.
3. Sixty (60) outputs of real time, live dynamic data per graphic.
4. Dynamic graphic data.
5. 1,000 separate graphic pages.
6. Modify graphic screen refresh rate between 1 and 60 seconds.
E. Operator Station:
1. Accept data from LAN as needed without scanning entire network for updated point data.
2. Interrogate LAN for updated point data when requested.
3. Allow operator command of devices.
4. Allow operator to place specific control units in or out of service.
5. Allow parameter editing of control units.
6. Store duplicate data base for every control unit and allow down loading while system is online.
7. Control or modify specific programs.
8. Develop, store and modify dynamic color graphics.
9. Provide data archiving of assigned points and support overlay graphing of this data utilizingup to
four (4) variables.
F. Alarm Processing:
1. Off normal condition: Cause alarm and appropriate message, including time, system,
pointdescriptor, and alarm condition. Select alarm state/value and which alarms shall
causeautomatic dial-out.
2. Critical alarm or change-of-state: Display message, stored on disk for review and sort, orprint.
3. Print on line changeable message, up to 60 characters in length, for each alarm pointspecified.
4. Display alarm reports on video. Display multiple alarms in order of occurrence.
5. Define time delay for equipment start-up or shutdown.
6. Allow unique routing of specific alarms.
7. Operator specifies if alarm requires acknowledgement.
8. Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to normal.
9. Alarm notification:
a. Automatic print.
b. Display indicating alarm condition.
c. Selectable audible alarm indication.
G. Event Processing: Automatically initiate commands, user defined messages, take specific
controlactions or change control strategy and application programs resulting from event condition.
Eventcondition may be value crossing operator defined limit, change-of-state, specified state, or
alarmoccurrence or return to normal.
H. Automatic Restart: Automatically restart field equipment on restoration of power. Provide

timedelay between individual equipment restart and time of day start/stop.

I. Messages:
1. Automatically display or print user-defined message subsequent to occurrence of selectedevents.
2. Compose, change, or delete any message.
3. Display or log any message at any time.
4. Assign any message to any event.
J. Reports:
1. Manually requested with time and date.
2. Long term data archiving to hard disk.
3. Automatic directives to download to transportable media such as floppy diskettes for storage.
4. Data selection methods to include data base search and manipulation.
5. Data extraction with mathematical manipulation.
6. Data reports shall allow development of XY curve plotting, tabular reports (both statistical
andsummary), and multi-point timed based plots with not less than four (4) variables displayed.
7. Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under work
stationdirection.
8. Reports may either manually displayed or printed, or may be printed automatically on
daily,weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis.
9. Include capability for statistical data manipulation and extraction.
10. Provide capability to generate four types of reports: Statistical detail reports, summaryreports,
trend graphic plots, x-y graphic plots.
K. Parameter Save/Restore: Store most current operating system, parameter changes,

andmodifications on disk or diskette.
L. Data Collection:
1. Automatically collect and store in disk files.
2. Daily electrical energy consumption, peak demand, and time of peak demand for up toelectrical
meters over 2 year period.
3. Daily consumption for up to 30 meters over a 2 year period.
4. Daily billable electrical energy consumption and time for up to 1024 zones over a 10 yearperiod.
5. Provide archiving of stored data for use with system supplied custom reports.
M. Graphic Display: Support graphic development on work station with software features:
1. Page linking.
2. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols.
3. Single or double height characters.
4. Sixty (60) dynamic points of data per graphic page.
5. Pixel level resolution.
6. Animated graphics for discrete points.
7. Analog bar graphs.
8. Display real time value of each input or output line diagram fashion.
N. Maintenance Management:
1. Run time monitoring, per point.
2. Maintenance scheduling targets with automatic annunciation, scheduling and shutdown.
3. Equipment safety targets.
4. Display of maintenance material and estimated labor.
5. Target point reset, per point.
O. Advisories:
1. Summary which contains status of points in locked out condition.

2. Continuous operational or not operational report of interrogation of system hardware

andprogrammable control units for failure.
3. Report of power failure detection, time and date.
4. Report of communication failure with operator device, field interface unit, point,programmable
control unit.
2.13 LOAD CONTROL PROGRAMS
A. General: Support inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement.
B. Demand Limiting:
1. Monitor total power consumption per power meter and shed associated loads automaticallyto
reduce power consumption to an operator set maximum demand level.
2. Input: Pulse count from incoming power meter connected to pulse accumulator in controlunit.
3. Forecast demand (kW): Predicted by sliding window method.
4. Automatically shed loads throughout the demand interval selecting loads with
independentlyadjustable on and off time of between one and 255 minutes.
5. Demand Target: Minimum of 3 per demand meter; change targets based upon (1) time, (2)status
of pre-selected points, or (3) temperature.
6. Load: Assign load shed priority, minimum "ON" time and maximum "OFF" time.
7. Limits: Include control band (upper and lower limits).
8. Output advisory if loads are not available to satisfy required shed amount, advise
shedrequirements and requiring operator acknowledgement.
C. Duty Cycling:
1. Periodically stop and start loads, based on space temperature, and according to variousOn/Off
patterns.
2. Modify off portion of cycle based on operator specified comfort parameters. Maintain totalcycle
time by increasing on portion of cycle by same amount that off portion is reduced.
3. Set and modify following parameters for each individual load.
a. Minimum and maximum Off time.
b. On/Off time in one minute increments.
c. Time period from beginning of interval until load can be cycled.
d. Manually override the DCC program and place a load in an On or Off state.
e. Cooling Target Temperature and Differential.
f. Heating Target Temperature and Differential.
g. Cycle off adjustment.
D. Automatic Time Scheduling:

1. Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of building loads.
2. Support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7) "special day" schedules and two(2)
temporary day schedules.
3. Special days schedule shall support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations.
4. Any number of loads assigned to any time program; each load can have individual timeprogram.
5. Each load assigned at least 16 control actions per day with 1 minute resolution.
6. Time schedule operations may be:
a. Start.
b. Optimized Start.
c. Stop.
d. Optimized Stop.
e. Cycle.
f. Optimized Cycle.
7. Minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 100 days in length may be specified for the year.

8. Create temporary schedules.

9. Broadcast temporary "special day" date and duration.
E. Start/Stop Time Optimization:

1. Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside conditions, inside conditions, or both.
2. Adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions unattended.
3. For each point under control, establish and modify:
a. Occupancy period.
b. Desired temperature at beginning of occupancy period.
c. Desired temperature at end of occupancy period.
F. Night Setback/Setup Program: Reduce heating space temperature setpoint or raise cooling
spacetemperature setpoint during unoccupied hours; in conjunction with scheduled start/stop
andoptimum start/stop programs.
G. Calculated Points: Define calculations and totalization computed from monitored

points(analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points.
1. Employ arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean, and special function operations.
2. Treat calculated values like any other analog value, use for any function that a "hard wiredpoint"
might be used.
H. Event Initiated Programming: Event may be initiated by any data point, causing series of
controlsin a sequence.
1. Define time interval between each control action between 0 to 3600 seconds.
2. Output may be analog value.
3. Provide for "skip" logic.
4. Verify completion of one action before proceeding to next. If not verified, program shall beable to
skip to next action.
I. Direct Digital Control: Each control unit shall provide Direct Digital Control software so that
theoperator may customize control strategies and sequences of operation by defining the
appropriatecontrol loop algorithms and choosing the optimum loop parameters.
1. Control loops: Defined using "modules" that are analogous to standard control devices.
2. Output: Paired or individual digital outputs for pulse-width modulation, and analog outputs,as
required.
3. Firmware:
a. PID with analog or pulse-width modulation output.
b. Floating control with pulse-width modulated outputs.
c. Two-position control.
d. Primary and secondary reset schedule selector.
e. Hi/Lo signal selector.
f. Single pole double throw relay.
g. Single pole double throw time delay relay with delay before break, delay before makeand interval
time capabilities.
4. Direct Digital Control loops: Downloaded upon creation or on operator request. On sensorfailure,
program shall execute user defined failsafe output.
5. Display: Value or state of each of the lines which interconnect DDC modules.
J. Fine Tuning Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops:

1. Display information:
a. Control loop being tuned
b. Input (process) variable
c. Output (control) variable

d. Setpoint of loop
e. Proportional band
f. Integral (reset) Interval
g. Derivative (rate) Interval
2. Display format: Graphic, with automatic scaling; with input and output variable superimposedon
graph of "time" vs "variable".
K. Trend logging:
1. Each control unit will store samples of control unit's data points.
2. Update file continuously at discretely assignable intervals.
3. Automatically initiate upload request and then store data on hard disk.
4. Time synchronize sampling at operator specified times and intervals with sample resolutionof one
minute.
5. Co-ordinate sampling with on/off state of specified point.
6. Display trend samples on work station in graphic format. Automatically scale trend graphwith
minimum 60 samples of data in plot of time vs data.
2.14 HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS
A. General:
1. Support Inch-pounds and SI (metric) units of measurement.
2. Identify each HVAC Control system.
B. Optimal Run Time:
1. Control start-up and shutdown times of HVAC equipment for both heating and cooling.
2. Base on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements, and interiorroom
mass temperature.
3. Start-up systems by using outside air temperature, room mass temperatures, and adaptivemodel
prediction for how long building takes to warm up or cool down under differentconditions.
4. Use outside air temperature to determine early shut down with ventilation override.
5. Analyze multiple building mass sensors to determine seasonal mode and worse casecondition for
each day.
6. Operator commands:
a. Define term schedule
b. Add/delete fan status point.
c. Add/delete outside air temperature point.
d. Add/delete mass temperature point.
e. Define heating/cooling parameters.
f. Define mass sensor heating/cooling parameters.
g. Lock/unlock program.
h. Request optimal run time control summary.
i. Request optimal run time mass temperature summary.
j. Request HVAC point summary.
k. Request HVAC saving profile summary.
7. Control Summary:
a. HVAC Control system begin/end status.
b. Optimal run time lock/unlock control status.
c. Heating/cooling mode status.
d. Optimal run time schedule.
e. Start/Stop times.
f. Selected mass temperature point ID.

g. Optimal run time system normal start times.

h. Occupancy and vacancy times.
i. Optimal run time system heating/cooling mode parameters.
8. Mass temperature summary:
a. Mass temperature point type and ID.
b. Desired and current mass temperature values.
c. Calculated warm-up/cool-down time for each mass temperature.
d. Heating/cooling season limits.
e. Break point temperature for cooling mode analysis.
9. HVAC point summary:
a. Control system identifier and status.
b. Point ID and status.
c. Outside air temperature point ID and status.
d. Mass temperature point ID and point.
e. Calculated optimal start and stop times.
f. Period start.
C. Supply Air Reset:
1. Monitor heating and cooling loads in building spaces, terminal reheat systems, both hot deckand
cold deck temperatures on dual duct and multizone systems, single zone unit
dischargetemperatures.
2. Adjust discharge temperatures to most energy efficient levels satisfying measured load by:
a. Raising cooling temperatures to highest possible value.
b. Reducing heating temperatures to lowest possible level.
a. Add/delete fan status point.
b. Lock/unlock program.
c. Request HVAC point summary.
d. Add/Delete discharge controller point.
e. Define discharge controller parameters.
f. Add/delete air flow rate.
g. Define space load and load parameters.
h. Request space load summary.
4. Control summary:
a. HVAC control system status (begin/end).
b. Supply air reset system status.
c. Optimal run time system status.
d. Heating and cooling loop.
e. High/low limits.
f. Deadband.
g. Response timer.
h. Reset times.
5. Space load summary:
a. HVAC system status.
b. Optimal run time status.
c. Heating/cooling loop status.
d. Space load point ID.
e. Current space load point value.
f. Control heat/cool limited.
g. Gain factor.
h. Calculated reset values.
i. Fan status point ID and status.
j. Control discharge temperature point ID and status.
k. Space load point ID and status.

l. Air flow rate point ID and status.

D. Enthalpy Switchover:
1. Calculate outside and return air enthalpy using measured temperature and relative
humidity;determine energy expended and control outside and return air dampers.
a. Add/delete fan status point.
b. Add/delete outside air temperature point.
c. Add/delete discharge controller point.
d. Define discharge controller parameters.
e. Add/delete return air temperature point.
f. Add/delete outside air dew point/humidity point.
g. Add/delete return air dew point/humidity point.
h. Add/delete damper switch.
i. Add/delete minimum outside air.
j. Add/delete atmospheric pressure.
k. Add/delete heating override switch.
l. Add/delete evaporative cooling switch.
m. Add/delete air flow rate.
n. Define enthalpy deadband.
o. Lock/unlock program.
p. Request control summary.
q. Request HVAC point summary.
3. Control summary:
a. HVAC control system begin/end status.
b. Enthalpy switchover optimal system status.
c. Optimal return time system status.
d. Current outside air enthalpy.
e. Calculated mixed air enthalpy.
f. Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using outside air.
g. Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using mixed air.
h. Calculated enthalpy difference.
i. Enthalpy switchover deadband.
j. Status of damper mode switch.
2.15 PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES
A. Trend Point:
1. Sample points, real or computed, with each point capable of collecting samples at
intervalsspecified in minutes, hours, days, or month.
2. Output trend logs as line graphs or bar graphs. Output graphic on terminal, with each pointfor line
and bar graphs designated with a unique pattern, vertical scale either actual values orpercent of
range, and horizontal scale time base. Print trend logs up to 12 columns of onepoint/column.
B. Alarm Messages:
1. Allow definition of messages, each having minimum length of characters for each
individualmessage.
2. Assign alarm messages to system messages including point's alarm condition, point'soff-normal
condition, totalized point's warning limit, hardware elements advisories.
3. Output assigned alarm with "message requiring acknowledgement".
4. Operator commands include define, modify, or delete; output summary listing current alarmsand
assignments; output summary defining assigned points.
C. Weekly Scheduling:

1. Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on preselected time schedulefor

points specified.
2. Provide program times for each day of week, per point, with one minute resolution.
3. Automatically generate alarm output for points not responding to command.
4. Provide for holidays, minimum of 366 consecutive holidays.
a. System logs and summaries.
b. Start of stop point.
c. Lock or unlock control or alarm input.
d. Add, delete, or modify analog limits and differentials.
e. Adjust point operation position.
f. Change point operational mode.
g. Open or close point.
h. Enable/disable, lock/unlock, or execute interlock sequence or computation profile.
i. Begin or end point totalization.
j. Modify totalization values and limits.
k. Access or secure point.
l. Begin or end HVAC or load control system.
m. Modify load parameter.
n. Modify demand limiting and duty cycle targets.
6. Output summary: Listing of programmed function points, associated program times,
andrespective day of week programmed points by software groups or time of day.
D. Interlocking:
1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one or more associated masterpoints.
2. Binary contact, high/low limit of analog point or computed point shall be capable of beingutilized
as master. Same master may monitor or command multiple slaves.
a. Define single master/multiple master interlock process.
b. Define logic interlock process.
c. Lock/unlock program.
d. Enable/disable interlock process.
e. Execute terminate interlock process.
f. Request interlock type summary.
2.16 FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
A. Optical cable: Optical cables shall be duplex 900 mm tight-buffer construction designed forintra-
building environments. The sheath shall be UL Listed OFNP in accordance with NEC Article770.
The optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI, ANSI X3T9.5 PMD for 62.5/125mm.
B. Connectors: All optical fibers shall be field-terminated with ST type connectors. Connectors
shallhave ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies.
2.17 GENERAL PURPOSE DDC CONTROLLERS
A. General purpose DDC controllers shall be minimum 16 bit microprocessor based with
FLASHbase of operating system.
B. The devices shall be programmable and capable of extensive measuring, control and
monitoringfunctions. The GPC's shall be provided at locations shown on the mechanical
drawings.

C. All GPCs shall support modular architecture with the following:
D. A CPU with Power Supply Module
E. Distributed I/O modules to accommodate Input/Output points.
F. Energy management programs such as optimum start/stop, load reset, duty cycling, night
purge,distributed demand control and others must be resident on each GPC.
G. As a back up, GPC's shall store DDC programs and data files on non-volatile EEPROM or
flashmemory to allow simple and reliable additions and changes. Each GPC shall have a 72
hoursbattery backed real-time clock.
H. GPCs shall be provided where shown and specified with capacity to accommodate
input/output(I/O) points required for the application plus 20% spare points.
I. In no circumstances shall a multiple GPC's be employed to control a single piece of equipment.
J. Each panel shall be provided with a socket for a Portable Operators Terminal (POT), and a port
fornetwork communications selectable between 1 Megabit and 9600 baud.
K. Each panel shall have optional port available for modem remote to central communications.
L. The CPC I/O modules shall have provision for manual override switches for digital outputs,
andmanual override potentiometers for analog outputs.
M. The GPC I/O modules shall be installed remotely from the other main GPC modules in the
HVACequipment MCC panels and shall communicate with their CPU via a communication bus on
afree-topology twisted-pair cable.
N. Analog inputs shall have a minimum resolution of 12 bits. GPC outputs shall be binary for On-
Offcontrol, and true variable voltage (0-10v) for driving analog or pneumatic transducer devices
Analogoutputs shall have a minimum incremental resolution of one percent of the operating range
of thecontrolled device.
O. GPCs shall provide a trend logging feature which can trend and store a minimum of 20
differentdata point simultaneously.
P. GPCs shall have LEDs for continuous indication of all bus communications, power,
andoperational status.
Q. DDC Software:
1. Control Software:
a. Time Programs. Each GPC shall contain a minimum f 20 unique user modifiable timeprograms
(TP). Each TP shall consist of daily, weekly, and annual programs plus a"TODAY" temporary
function. DAILY programs shall be definable for day types such asworking day, half day, holiday,
weekend, etc. Each daily program shall allow a list oftime based (or optimum time based) analog
and digital commands to be issued touser selected plant elements and points. WEEKLY
programs shall allow a userselected set of daily programs to be defined for each day of the week
(Monday throughSunday). The ANNUAL program shall initially be an automatic compilation of 52
weeklyprograms. Selecting a date of the ANNUAL program shall allow modification of the

dailyselection entered into the weekly program (such as changing Dec. 25 from a workingday to a
holiday).
b. Control Application Software shall be customized to meet the detailed requirements ofthe
"Sequence of Operation". GPCs and UC network management devices shall beprogrammable.
All GPC control software shall be designed via a graphic programmingfacility, the output of which
shall be provided as system documentation.
c. In addition to Proportional, Proportional-Plus-Integral (PI), andProportional-Plus-Integral-Plus-
Derivative (PID) algorithms, an HVAC enhancedAdaptive Neural PID (ANPID) real time auto
tuning algorithm shall be provided andimplemented where specified. The ANPID shall be a full
PID, but modified andenhanced to minimize overshoot, settling time and actuator travel. The
ANPID shallperform as follows:
d. The loop performance is modeled by simulations across various loads, HVACequipment and
process conditions. The performance results of the model are enteredinto the ANPID as a training
function. Subsequently the pre-trained “out of the box”ANPID is applied to the loop. The ANPID
then monitors the PID (error, PI and D gains;and output) recognizes certain control loop
characteristics and load patterns andcontinuously auto adjusts the final output to prevent
repeating the error learned duringthe training process.
2. Management Software:
a. Trending. In addition to supporting OWS trending specified elsewhere, each GPC shallbe
provided with a trend archive of at least the last 200 events (digital transitions oranalog value
changes) of any user selected group of up to 20 points. A stored eventshall include date and
time, and value or status. Events occurring in excess of 200 shalloverwrite the oldest events.
b. Alarms. Each GPC shall monitor and report all Analog input points and specified digitalpoints for
off-normal conditions. Each alarm shall have an “alarm delay” attribute whichshall determine how
long (in seconds) a point must be off-normal prior to beingconsidered in an alarm state.
c. Alarm-Limits for Each analogue input or pseudo analog point, two maximum limits andtwo
minimum limits (alarm and pre-alarm) shall be set for a particular value. Each timethis limit value
is reached an alarm shall be triggered.
d. Unitary Equipment Support. GPCs and devices managing sub-networks of Ucs shallreport UC
alarms and shall be programmed to perform data reduction, trending, datasharing, and AHU GPC
optimizing routines. In no case shall mass UC optimizing databe allowed on the primary bus.
2.18 UNITARY EQUIPMENT DDC CONTROLLERS
A. Unitary Equipment DDC controllers (Ucs) shall be EEPROM base configured to perform
thesequences specified, and with I/O selected for the application.
B. Ucs shall be tested and listed under both Ul 916 for computing devices and UUKL smoke
controlapplications.
C. UC enclosures shall be flame retardant compact plastic conforming to Ul94-V5 for

plenummounting or plated steel.
D. Ucs shall be configured for DIN rail mounting using industry standard clip on adapters or
directpanel mounted.
E. Each controller shall be designed with on-board jacks for quick commissioning
andtroubleshooting with a portable programming tool.
F. UC software shall be configured to meet the requirements of the "Sequence of

Operation”specified and shall be field configurable. UC software shall support full PID control, and

shallutilize separate PID gains for heating and cooling. Where UC space sensors are provided
withtemperature set point knobs, Ucs shall be provided with unique software set-point limits. Each
UCshall have continuously running hardware diagnostics to detect malfunctions of the flow
sensor,the temperature sensor, the remote set-point sensor, and the A to D converter.
2.19 FAN COIL UNIT CONTROLLER
A. Provide a Fan Coil DDC Controller for common two-pipe fan coil units featuring pre-
programmedcooling control algorithms with automatic fan speed control. This controller shall be
provided forall fan coil units whether or not they are directly controlled by the BMS.
B. Controllers shall have integral transformers and relays directly wired to line voltage power
230vac.
C. Controller application software shall include a set point reset for energy demand limit
control.Separate unoccupied heating and cooling set points shall be provided. A standby feature
shall beprovided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user definable limit based
on statusfrom an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor, window contact or time
schedule. Toextend actuator life and minimise maintenance provide documented, advanced valve
actuatorcontrol algorithms for reduction in output cycling and hunting.
D. In addition to internal I/O selected for the application, controller shall also support distributed
I/Omodules from the network.
E. Controller shall be connected to a wall temperature sensor. The wall module must
sensetemperature, control set-point via adjustment knob, control Occupied/unoccupied via
overridebutton and LED indicator, control fan speed via OFF/1/2/3 speed switch and network
jack.
F. This controller shall be able to automatically control both fan speed and valve position in order
tomaintain space conditions.
2.20 UNITARY CONTROLLER HAND-HELD OPERATOR TERMINAL
A. A hand-held operator's terminal shall be provided to allow local UC operation. It shall be

possibleto use the operator's terminal in the immediate vicinity of the controller via a plug-in jack
and cable.
B. Data shall be displayed on a LCD screen and operation shall be via function keys.
C. The control Contractor to provide two (2) hand-held UC operator's terminal and two (2) sets
ofoperating instructions.
2.21 THIRD PARTY INTERFACE SYSTEM
A. The successful bid vendor will supply all necessary hardware and software (if required), to
createa communications interface between the proposed subsystems (i.e. chillers, etc) and
thatvendor's proposed building management system.
B. For all other third-party systems, the physical data link between the proposed
BuildingManagement system and the HVAC subsystem must be twisted pair wiring via an RS485
or RS232C protocol.

C. The following functionality must be supported by the proposed interface:
D. Read status and analog value point information from the subsystem at the proposed BMS central.
E. Command subsystem points to a digital state or to an analog value from the proposed
BMScentral.
F. Incorporate all subsystem points within the proposed BMS schedule, trend, energy
managementroutine, or graphic display functionality.
G. It is not necessary to support the configuration of subsystem devices on the proposed

BMCScentral.
H. The system shall provide communication to other thrid party building control systems via
theASHRAE SSP135 BACnet standard. Communication between BACnet devices shall be via
ISO8802-3, 10BASW2 (Ethernet). BACnet devices shall be Conformance Class 3, support the
BACnetfunctional groups for change-lf value event initiation and response, support the BACnet
standardapplication services of Read Property, Write Property, and support the standard BACnet
objecttypes of Analog Input, Analog value, Binary Input, Binary Output, and Binary Value at a
minimum.The described functionality shall provide reading and writing of all analog or digital
inputs andoutputs betwenBACnet devices on the network, and provided for change-of value
initiation andreporting.
2.22 DATA COMMUNICATIONS.
A. DDC microprocessor failures shall not cause loss of communications of the remainder of
anynetwork.
B. Primary and Secondary networks shall be peer-to-peer supporting sensor sharing,

globalapplication programs and bus to bus communications in a true peer-to-peer token
passingmanner.
C. Manchester encoding for error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data
integrity.
D. This network shall be supported by a twisted pair cable utilizing T-Taps, star and mixed
topologieson the same network. The Free Topology Transceiver (FTT) network shall not be
polarity sensitive.
E. Network media shall be Level IV 18 AWG twisted pair wire and must conform to UL Category 4
forhigh speed networks. Cable shall be supplied in plenum rated versions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to the control units and to the operator
workstation. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is installed prior to
installationproceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent walls where not subject
toexcessive vibration.
B. Install software in control units and in operator work station. Implement all features of programs
tospecified requirements and appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 15940.
C. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 16155. Electrical material
andinstallation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 16.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Start and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning prior
toplacing control systems in permanent operation.
B. Provide service engineer to instruct Binary's representative in operation of systems plant

andequipment for 3 day period.
C. Provide basic operator training for 5 persons on data display, alarm and status
descriptors,requesting data, execution of commands and request of logs. Include a minimum of
40 hoursdedicated instructor time. Provide training on site.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate complete and operating system to thebuilding.

SECTION 23 09 93
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. This section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each
type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components
required for control systems are specified in other sections.
B. Sequence of operation for:

1. Fresh Air Handling Units with Heat Wheels and Exhaust Fans.
2. Recirculating Air Handling Units - Constant Volume
3. Fan Coil Units - All Areas Except Apartments.
4. Smoke Exhaust Fans.
5. Smoke exhaust fan.
6. Parking garage ventilation systems.
7. Water Booster Pumps.
8. Fire Pumps - Diesel and Electric.
9. Sump Pumps.
10. Chilled Water Pumps.
11. Water Transfer Pumps.
12. General Exhaust Fans.
13. Diesel Transfer.
14. Transformer Room Ventilation

1. Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC
2. Section 23 09 13 – Instruments and Control Devices for HVAC
3. Section 23 09 23 – Digital Control Equipment
4. Section 25 51 00 - Building Management System
5. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical
6. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
7. Section 26 32 13 – Package Engine Generators
A. This Section defines the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each
type of control system operation are specified. Equipment, devices, and system components
required for control systems are specified in other Sections.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Sequence of Operation Documentation: Submit written sequence of operation for entire HVAC
system and each piece of equipment.
23 09 93 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls Page 1 of 24

1. Preface: 1 or 2 paragraph overview narrative of the system describing its purpose,

components and function.
2. State each sequence in small segments and give each segment a unique number for
referencing in Functional Test procedures; provide a complete description regardless of the
completeness and clarity of the sequences specified in the contract documents.
3. Include at least the following sequences:

a. Start-up.
b. Warm-up mode.
c. Normal operating mode.
d. Unoccupied mode.
e. Shutdown.
f. Capacity control sequences and equipment staging.
g. Temperature and pressure control, such as setbacks, setups, resets, etc.
h. Detailed sequences for all control strategies, such as economizer control, optimum
start/stop, staging, optimization, demand limiting, etc.
i. Effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component functions.
j. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut downs.
k. Seasonal operational differences and recommendations.
l. Interactions and interlocks with other systems.
4. Include initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, set points and parameters
that are typically set or adjusted by operating staff; and any other control settings or fixed
values, delays, etc. that will be useful during testing and operating the equipment.
5. For packaged controlled equipment, include manufacturer's furnished sequence of operation

amplified as required to describe the relationship between the packaged controls and the
control system, indicating which points are adjustable control points and which points are
only monitored.
6. Include schedules, if known.
C. Control System Diagrams: Submit graphic schematic of the control system showing each control
component and each component controlled, monitored, or enabled.
1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits.

2. Include flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic.
3. Include the system and component layout of all equipment that the control system monitors,
enables or controls, even if the equipment is primarily controlled by packaged or integral
controls.
4. Include draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control
system components, and controlled function status and value.
5. Include all monitoring, control and virtual points specified in elsewhere.
6. Include a key to all abbreviations.
D. Points List: Submit list of all control points indicating at least the following for each point.
1. Name of controlled system.
2. Point abbreviation.
3. Point description; such as dry bulb temperature, airflow, etc.
4. Display unit.
5. Control point or set point (Yes / No); i.e. a point that controls equipment and can have its set
point changed.

6. Monitoring point (Yes / No); i.e. a point that does not control or contribute to the control of
equipment but is used for operation, maintenance, or performance verification.
7. Intermediate point (Yes / No); i.e. a point whose value is used to make a calculation which
then controls equipment, such as space temperatures that are averaged to a virtual point to
control reset.
8. Calculated point (Yes / No); i.e. a “virtual” point generated from calculations of other point
values.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and set points of controls,
including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings. Warranty Documents
Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications duty signed by the manufacturer /
manufacturer’s authorized representative and by the Contractor. The Contractor shall follow the
submittal procedures outlined in the “General Requirements and Scope of Works”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 COMMON SEQUENCES
A. For each system equipment a mode selection switch shall be provided on the MCC i.e. “Hand,
Off. Auto" switch.
B. in ‘Auto’ mode the complete operation of the pump/equipment shall be carried out by the BMS i.e.
control set points, hours run, auto changeover etc.
C. In ‘Hand’ mode the pumps/equipment shalt run continuously, independent of the BMS, all
necessary interlocks shall be provided by relays, auxiliary contacts etc.
D. In ‘Off’ mode the equipment should be shut down.
E. In all instances the Hand Auto Off status should be reported at the BMS head end Safety
interlocks.
1. All safety interlocks shall be hardwired and have precedence over all other control functions.
Safety interlocks shall only be reset manually and locally (not from the operator workstation).
All hardwired safety interlocks shall have corresponding software interlocks to prevent
cascading nuisance alarms.
F. Fire interlocks
1. All fire interlocks shall be hard wired. In the event of a fire, all non-essential plant shall be
shut down by a signal generated by the fire alarm unless otherwise stated.
G. Time Scheduling
1. Each field controller shall be capable of enabling plant according to multiple pre-set time
programmers. It shall be possible to schedule each item of plant for a minimum of three
separate switching periods per 24 hours. Separate schedules shall be capable of being
defined for each day of the week.

2. Time schedules shall be capable of:

a. Grouped to form global time schedules
b. Defined on a weekly basis on a single ‘page/screen’
c. Defined 12 months in advance.
d. Copied from existing schedules
e. Linked to optimum start/stop control facilities.
f. Accommodating leap years.
g. Fixed extensions and contractions (the time schedule shall revert to the ‘normal’
switching periods following the extension/contraction period)
3. Provide:
a. Time schedule override facility to accommodate holiday periods, etc.
b. Optimum start/stop over-ride facility for user-defined override days. Optimum
start/stop control shall be enabled following the override period.
c. Operator over-ride facility.
H. Plant Start / Stop
1. Field controllers shall be capable of starting and stopping plant according to the sequences
indicated including any specific requirements for ‘off’ position or status of plant items, valves
and dampers, etc.
2. Field controllers shall be capable of automatically enabling standby plant on failure of duty
plant and
3. automatically report plant failure alarms at the operator workstation. The failure of a flow
switch or other device shall not continuously cycle plant.
4. If a flow switch fails the operator shall have the option to force either the duty or standby
plant to come on.
5. Provide the operator with the option to override any start/stop action configured within the
field controllers. When reverting to normal automatic control, ensure that the original
program is automatically reinstated and updated to the correct time.
6. Provide delayed plant-starting facilities in order to reduce power surges. It shall be possible
to start plant sequentially by adjusting the delay period for each item of plant.
7. Delayed plant starting shall initiate following power failure/re-instatement and plant shut
down/restart on fire/fireman override.
8. Provide the operator with a facility to specify minimum on/off cycle times and/or the
maximum number of starts per hour for specified items of plant.
9. Provide a plant protection routine that enables the operator to select and automatically run
items of plant for short periods during out of season shut down. Run periods shall be
operator adjustable.
I. Plant Sequencing Control
1. Provide sequence control routines to automatically sequence the operation of multiple items
of plant by monitoring load parameters and efficiently matching the plant to the load.
2. It shall be possible to define different automatic sequences of control. Provide the operator
with a facility to override the automatic sequence and define an alternative sequence.
3. Set-point values for each control action shall be variable and adjustable by the operator and
associated alarm limits shall be modified automatically.
4. The operator shall be capable of adjusting switching control differentials to prevent short
cycling.

5. Routines shall include a facility to operate all plant ancillaries associated with sequence
control, unless these have been specifically excluded.
6. Routines shall include the facility to proceed with the defined sequence when one of the
items of plant in the sequence is isolated or fails to operate (unless the safety requirements
dictate otherwise). Ensure that failed items of plant are removed from the sequence.
J. Plant rotation control
1. The relevant field controllers shall be capable of alternating the lead plant items where duty
and standby equipment is installed. This shall be achieved both by an operator command
and on a time-scheduled basis.
2. The rotation control shall be capable of being provided on the basis of run hours, elapsed
time and calendar basis.
3. Provide routines to ensure that when the maximum number of start/stop cycles for a
particular plant is reached then its schedule is automatically modified eg by rotating the
standby equipment or changing the lead machine.
4. Ensure that each item of plant operated under rotation control can operate at any stage of
the rotation sequence.
5. The plant rotation control shall accommodate a plant failure condition, in such a way that a
failed item of plant is ‘replaced’ by the next in the rotation cycle. An alarm condition shall be
raised in response to plant failure.
6. Rotation control shall be capable of being initiated outside normal operating periods.
K. Optimum start stop for cooling
1. Provide an optimum-start routine for the cooling system to compute the daily minimum pre-
cool period necessary to achieve target comfort conditions at occupation start time. Provide
an optimum stop routine to compute the earliest time for the cooling system to be shut down
in order to retain minimum comfort conditions in the space at the end of occupation.
2. The optimum start/stop routines shall have access to the system real-time clock, calendar
facility and time programme to define the occupation periods.
3. Routines shall be capable of operating the ventilation system for building purging prior to
optimum start of cooling plant.
4. It shall be possible to apply optimum start/stop control both to individual zones and overall
plant operation.
5. Provide routines to operate PHEX and ventilation plant as necessary to achieve the required
target conditions while ensuring that heating and cooling systems do not conflict in any
controlled zones.
6. Provide the operator with the facility to adjust the following cooling system optimum
start/stop parameters.
a. Target temperature for optimum start.

b. Maximum pre-cool period.
c. Earliest time for building purging during out of hours period.
d. Inside and outside temperature limits for building purging.
e. Separate time/temperature relationships for optimum start and optimum stop.
f. Minimum space temperature during building purging.
7. The internal and external air temperature sensors associated with the optimiser shall be
positioned correctly in order to provide representative readings.

L. Enthalpy Control
1. This shall be achieved by comparing the return air temperature and humidity with the fresh
air/external air temperature and humidity, to determine if the fresh air is beneficial to achieve
the design conditions. The control logic must ensure that the space humidity is maintained
M. Load shedding
1. As indicated the system shall be capable of monitoring the overall rate of electrical power
consumption and if a pre set demand level is projected to be exceeded, the system shall be
capable of shedding electrical load in a pre-determined manner.
2. The system shall be capable of as many levels of load priority as are necessary to meet the
requirements as indicated. The order of priority in each level shall be capable of rotation if
required.
3. Under conditions of partial/total power loss the system shall be able to trim demand in a
controlled manner to match available power from stand-by generator sets.
4. If load shedding routines are set up the facility to log consumption continuously shall be
provided.
5. Similarly, the system shall be capable of enabling loads in a controlled sequence to restore
normal operation.
N. Cascade start
1. As indicated the control system shall prevent the simultaneous operation of heavy electrical
loads at start up by incorporating time delays between plant start up signals.
3.2 ETS ROOM CONTROLS
A. For ETS Room control and sequence of operation, please refer to Appendix-1 to Appendix-5 of
this specification.
3.3 HEAT EXCHANGER WITH SECONDARY CHILLED WATER PUMPS
A. Heat exchanger system shall be provided with chilled water available from the District cooling
plant. The chilled water temperature supplied from the District cooling plant shall be 4.5 °C flow
and return 13.5 °C. Primary Heat exchanger system consists of heat exchangers and will be
monitored for individual temperature for heat transfer and differential pressure.
B. Secondary chilled water pumps are being controlled by the BMS system. The speed of secondary
pumps are being controlled via variable frequency drives which will be modulated by BMS as per
the differential water pressure sensor value and the set point assigned by the operator.
C. System Start/Stop Control:
1. The BMS DDC controller shall operate the CHW pumps when:
a. The Hand-Off-Auto switches are in the Auto position. If any HOA switch is in Hand
mode then the respective pump will be taken out of sequence. During maintenance
respective Pump HOA switch will be kept in Hand mode.

b. The TRIP signal coming from the VFD is in NORMAL state.
c. The operator will switch ON the secondary chilled water system using an
ENABLE/DISABLE command from the central graphic screen.
d. The operator will switch ON the secondary chilled water system using an Plant
ENABLE/DISABLE command from the central graphic screen.
e. The BMS shall continuously monitor the secondary system pump speed and shall
stop the pump with highest run hours when the pump speed falls below 40% of the
total maximum Speed of the pump.
f. The BMS shall then increase or decrease the speed of the running pump to
maintain the system pressure set point.
g. At any given point of time minimum one duty pump should be running at controlled
speed as per system pressure requirement.
h. The second pump will only run when the duty pump is unable to achieve desired
condition or fails to start. The default set-point value for the return water pressure
is 1.5 bar (User adjustable).
i. The operator would be able to switch off the secondary chilled water pumps at any
time using the ON/OFF switch described above
2. The differential pressure sensor shall be installed in the secondary supply and return chilled
water pipe line. The exact location of pressure sensors shall be finalized during the
engineering stage by the concerned authorities; however, it shall be installed at the
maximum pressure drop point.
D. Secondary Pump Fail Changeover Mode

1. The BMS will generate an alarm when the Lead pump fails. This alarm shall be generated
on the following conditions:
2. Pump does not switch ON if the command is ON and the H/O/A switch is in Auto mode.
3. Pump Trip status is in ALARM state.
E. Pumps Alarm “Reset”

1. When any one of the pumps shows a FAIL alarm, and as described earlier (Initial Start-up &
Pump Fail Changeover Mode), the controller will shift to another pump in sequence and will
only try to check whether the faulty pump is healthy or not, after 200 hours difference in run
hours (Changeover period).
2. In order to reset the alarm, after the problem has been rectified, the operator has to reset the
alarms by using the RESET switch on the screen graphics or by putting the respective pump
H/O/A switch status in OFF or HAND mode and bringing it back to AUTO mode from Local
control panel (This provision is provided to facilitate the operator to reset respective
equipment alarms in case graphic central communication fails with controllers). To do the
Plant –reset, the manual mode check box provided in the graphics should be checked and
then the RESET option should be selected. Once the RESET is activated it will come back
to NORMAL state automatically after predefined delay time and mode checkbox will be
unchecked automatically.

F. Alarms
1. The following alarms would be generated on BMS.
a. Pump Fail:
In case the Secondary CHW pump fails to start or if the differential pressure switch
for Pump water flow status is not giving the signal according to the command
(given from the BMS) due to any reason then an alarm will be generated.
The above alarms are active on the BMS irrespective of whether the H/O/A switch
is in “Hand” or “Auto” position.
b. Pump Trip:
This is generated when the Secondary CHW pump is tripped as sensed by panel
volt free contact.
c. Temperature High & Low:

Temperature HIGH and LOW alarms will be generated if the CHW supply and
return temperature rises above or falls below the alarm limits.
d. Pressure High & Low:

Pressure HIGH and LOW alarms will be generated if the differential pressure
between CHWS & CHWR header line rises above or falls below the alarm limits
3.4 CHILLED WATER PUMP CONTROLS
A. Each pump shall be provided with a variable speed drive (VFD) and the operation and controls of
pumps shall be by the BMS. For each of the chilled water pumps a mode selection switch shall be
provided on the MCC i.e. “Hand, Off, Auto" switch. in ‘Auto’ mode the complete operation of the
chilled water pumps shall be carried out by the BMS i.e. determining number of pumps required
to be operated to meet the cooling demand, hour run equalization, auto changeover to standby
pump, pressurization unit and other interlocks etc. in ‘Hand’ mode the pump shall run
continuously, independent of the BMS, all necessary interlocks shall be provided by relays,
auxiliary contacts etc.
B. When the pumps are signaled to start, the lead pump shall start first and a frequency inverter
shall vary the speed of this duty pump depending on the differential pressure in the pipework
network. Multiple (3 minimum) pressure sensors in the supply and return chilled water pipework
shall be installed in the main runs of each circuit approximately two third of the hydraulic distance
from the pumps. The exact location of the pressure sensors shall be finalized in accordance with
the recommendation of the controls manufacturer. When the chilled water 2-port valves on each
AHU/FCU start to close due to partial load, the differential pressure switch shall send a signal to
the BMS which in turn shall control the VFD on the CHW pumps to maintain the set differential
pressure in the pipework thus reducing the CHW flow in the circuit.
C. In the event the lead pump reaches 95% its maximum speed, its speed increase shall be arrested
and the 2nd pump shall start and its speed shall increase until the differential pressure set point is
met. Once met the lead pumps speed shall reduce and the lag pump's speed shall increase until
both pumps have the same speed and are maintaining the differential pressure. From now on the
speed of both pumps shalt be the same.
D. On reducing demand the lag pump shall be de-coupled when the speed of both pumps drops
below say 70%. The actual de-couple speed shall be determined by experiments on site.

E. In addition to a digital output enable signal and O ~ 1O volt analogue output control signal from
the BMS a digital input alarm signal and an analogue input feedback speed signal shall be
provided from the inverter to the BMS.
F. There shall be a water flow proving differential pressure switch across each of the pumps. in the
event there is no water flow detected across the pump, or there is an inverter alarm, after a
predetermined time delay after the pump has started, or during the operation of the pump, the
BMS shall changeover to the stand-by pump and annunciate an alarm.
G. When the chilled water demand has reduced to the extent that the duty pumps are operating at
40% of their capacity, one of the duty pumps shall be switched off automatically and the other
pump shall increase in speed to maintain the set pressure.
H. The chilled water circuits shall be provided with a two way modulation bypass valve at the end of
the index run to allow the minimum required flow of one of the duty pumps of the circuit. The
minimum bypass flow shall be 30% of the flow or one of the duty pumps. The bypass valve shall
be modulated to open position when the pump flow reduces to minimum speed and the set
pressure is exceeded.
I. The BMS shall equalise run hours of pumps in the set. The BMS shall also monitor the ELCB and
overload, interlock the pump operation with the pressurization unit, annunciate alarms as
indicated elsewhere etc.
3.5 PRESSURISATION / MAKE UP WATER UNIT CONTROLS
A. The pressurizations unit shall be a packaged unit led from the MCC and shall incorporate all
necessary pressure controls and duty/standby pumps.
B. The pressurization unit shall include volt free contacts for common alarm condition (ie. the static
pressure at the inlet to pumps is outside the operating range).
C. Contacts for remote indication of a common fault are also to be provided. ‘Panel live’, ‘system
pressure outside operating range’ and ‘common fault’ indications shall be provided at the MCC
feeding the pressurization unit and the BMS.
D. The BMS shall monitor the position of the local isolator as well as a number of fault, alarm and
status signals.
E. The BMS shall log the running hours of the pump and interface with the maintenance software to
provide a maintenance schedule.
F. Electronic level sensors and controllers shall be use to monitor and maintain the water levels with
the basement. When the water level drops to low operating water level, a signal opens a make-up
water solenoid valve to add water to the system. When the water level rises to the high operating
water level, a signal closes the makeup valve.
3.6 AUTOMATIC DOSING SYSTEM
A. The plant shall be a packaged unit with all necessary controls, it shall operate under manual
control of dosing rate operation.

B. The BMS shall monitor the position of the local isolator as well as a number of faults, alarm,
status and stored chemical level signals.
3.7 CHILLED WATER FILTRATION SYSTEM
A. The plant shall be a packaged unit with all necessary controls required to operate correctly.
B. The BMS shall monitor the position of the local isolator as well as a number of faults, alarm,
status dirty filter status.
3.8 CHILLED WATER METERING
A. See section 23 0519 – Meters & Gauges for chilled water metering which to be connected to
BMS for billing purposes.
3.9 FAN COIL UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCE (LANDLORD BUILDINGS)
A. Each FCU consists of a cooling coil equipped with a fully modulating pressure independent
control valve, and a three speed supply fan.
B. FCU controllers will be standalone and battery backed to protect data in the event of power
failure. These controllers will be pre-configured to PI control the cooling valve at the desired
temperature to the satisfaction of their space/return air temperature detectors as applicable.
C. All landlord and Back of House fan coil units shall be controlled by individual DDC controllers
being provided with an individual room/space wall mounted intelligent controller with thermostatic,
fan speed, night set back and time schedule functions. Where it is not required to have a space
mounted thermostat controller the fan coil units shall be controlled based on wall mounted or
return air mounted sensors at the discretion of the engineer. All room unit controllers will also
allow the user to override the system on/off.
D. Where a number of fan coils serve a common space they shall operate together in master/slave
configuration respective to their zone to prevent conflict.
E. BMS Monitoring Points:

1. Space temperature
2. Fan status (on, off, tripped)
3. Air flow failure
4. Space set point BMS Control Points:
5. Start/Stop Command
6. Chilled Water valve
F. Where a number of fan coils serve a common space they shall operate together in master/slave
configuration respective to their zone to prevent conflict.
G. In certain locations (as indicated on the drawings, fan coil unit operation shall be interlocked with
doors/windows to shut down operation of the FCU in the event that the window/door is opened
(after an adjustable time period)

3.10 COMMON HVAC CONTROL SEQUENCES
A. Smoke detectors shall stop all supply fans within a building upon the presence of smoke through
the Fire Alarm System (FAS) within that specific building. All controls shall return to their normal
position. A critical alarm shall be raised on the FAS and the BMS. The Contractor shall provide
wiring, relays, conduit, etc from the FAS shutdown module which should by-pass the
VFD/controls (Coordinate VFD terminations with approved VFD shop drawings) to shut down the
equipment.
B. Low suction and high discharge pressure switches for the supply and exhaust fans shall stop both
the fans via hardwired interlocks. VFD shutdown circuits should raise a critical alarm at the BMS
workstation when the duct pressure exceeds design. The fans shall remain off until the pressure
switches are manually reset. The Automatic Controls Specialist shall coordinate static pressure
high and low set points with the Contractor.
A. SYSTEM OFF:
1. When the system is off all valves, dampers and controlled devices shall be in their normal
positions as stated above.
B. SYSTEM START-UP:
1. The supply, extract and exhaust systems (excluding stair pressurization and smoke extract
systems) shall be started by the DDC system optimum start routine, time of day schedule, or
via a manual command from the BMS workstation.
2. When the system is commanded the outside air damper shall open. The supply air fan shall
start after the outside air damper has opened sufficiently as proven by the damper end
switch.
3. The exhaust air damper shall open. The exhaust air fan shall start after the exhaust air
damper has opened sufficiently as proven by the damper end switch.
4. After the supply and exhaust fan run status is proven, the control sequences shall be
enabled and the system shall be indexed to the cool-down or occupied mode.
5. Occupied Mode: Upon receipt of both the supply and exhaust fan running status the
equipment shall run under normal temperature and airflow control.
6. The fan operation shall be proven when the supply air pressure switch is made as a result of
the differential pressure between the duct and atmosphere rising above 500 Pa (adjustable)
/ or velocity rising above 1.0 m/s.
7. If the proven signal is not achieved, following a 30 second start up period, a fan failure
warning signal shall be sent to the BMS and the fan operation signal shall be removed.
C. FILTER MONITORING:
1. All filters shall be monitored by differential pressure transmitters. A maintenance alarm shall
be raised on the BMS workstation on indication of a dirty filter. The set points for dirty
condition shall be confirmed by the filter / AHU manufacturer.
D. TIME SCHEDULE
1. The BMS shall be capable of initiating start & stop of ALL plant within the building through
DDC panels on time schedules or by operator’s interventions. The access and setting of the
schedules or manual starting is to be by authorized personnel only.

2. During unoccupied periods the motorized dampers shall be activated closed (supply &
extract) by the Building Management System. During unoccupied periods, the dampers shall
remain closed, even while the on floor fan coil is op
3.11 CONSTANT VOLUME TYPE OUTSIDE AIR AHUS WITH ENTHALPY AND SENSIBLE WHEEL
HEAT RECOVERY
A. The Constant Volume fresh air ventilation AHUs shall operate under the dictates of one of the
DDC controllers inbuilt time schedules and control in the following manner.
B. Once flow is established, as described above, the system will allow its temperature control
algorithm to operate and the exhaust fan shall be started.
C. A chilled water coil with a 2 port pressure independent control valve shall be provided for supply
air dehumidification and sensible cooling. The CHW valve shall be positioned closed when the air
handling plant is not operating, and when the BMS signals a low outside temperature and
moisture content.
D. The chilled water valve shall be fully open when the BMS signals a high outside temperature
and/or moisture content. The valve shall fully open when the supply fan is proven and the BMS
signals an optimum cooling start operation.
E. The valve position shall be modulated for supply air temperature control when a normal operating
period is signalled by the BMS and the supply fan is proven.
F. The CHW valve's position is modulated in response to a PI control signal in order to obtain the
required set point.
G. A constant volume supply fan shall be provided with VFD for initial commissioning and future
flexibility.
H. The supply fan shall be disabled when the BMS signals a shutdown period.
I. A smoke detection device shall be provided in the return air ductwork. On sensing smoke the
supply fan (and extract fan) shall be stopped and an alarm raised at the BMS central supervisor.
The detector shall be manually reset.
J. A constant volume extract fan shall be provided with VFD for initial commissioning and future
flexibility.
K. The extract fan shall be disabled when the BMS signals a shutdown period. The fan operation
signal shall be disabled if a supply fan fail signal is received by the BMS.
L. The extract and associated supply fan shall be interlocked so that they only operate in unison. A
hand/off/auto selector switch shall be located on the extract fan control panel. The extract fan
motor shall be hardwired to this selector switch, the supply fan fail and the damper proving end
switches.
M. A sensible / enthalpy wheel shall be provided to transfer heat and moisture between the supply
and extract air streams. The enthalpy wheel shall be disabled when the air handling plant is shut
down or when there is a BMS night cooling signal.

N. The sensible / enthalpy wheel shall be enabled when the supply fan starter motor is operating
(except for a night cooling or fan overrun operation). The wheel shall operate when the
temperature or moisture content differential between the outside air and return air is greater than
a value of 2oC or 1g/kg respectively.
O. The speed signal to the wheel motor is then controlled utilising a PI control signal to provide the
nearest possible enthalpy set point.
P. Temperature and humidity sensor located in the main supply air duct shall maintain a preset
adjustable supply air set point by modulation of the 2-port control valve, thermal wheel and heat
pipe. The supply air conditions shall be controlled by the BMS to maintain the supply air
temperature and humidity. The supply temperature set point shall be 20°C initially and the supply
humidity shall be maximum 8.2g/kg initially. The set points shall be adjustable with suitable
password authorization from the BMS front end supervisor graphics.
Q. If the supply air temperature rises above an adjustable set point of 22°C or below an adjustable
set point of 10°C during normal operation the BMS shall give a supply air temperature high/low
warning.
R. During plant operating periods the sensible / enthalpy wheel is always to be sequenced first in
order to provide the required supply temperature and humidity set point control. Only when the
enthalpy wheel is not rotating or operating at the maximum speed setting should other plant be
utilized for temperature control purposes.
3.12 SINGLE ZONE VARIABLE VOLUME TYPE RECIRCULATING AHU
A. The Variable Volume re-circulating type AHUs will operate under the dictates of one of the DDC
controllers inbuilt time schedules and control in the following manner.
B. On a command to start the supply fan will be enabled and positive indication of this given by
means of a differential pressure switch fitted across motor.
C. The fan shall be enabled when the BMS signals for the air handling plant to operate and the
outside air, exhaust air and terminal unit air dampers are proven open. The fan operation shall be
proven when the supply air pressure switch is made as a result of the differential pressure
between the duct and atmosphere rising above 500 Pa (adjustable) / or velocity rising above 1.0
m/s.
D. When the proven signal is not achieved, following a 30 second start up period, a fan failure
warning signal shall be sent to the BMS and the fan operation signal shall be removed. The fan
operation signal shall be disabled when a high-limit thermostat incorporated in the system has
tripped.
E. The supply fan control signal shall be modulated under PI control to obtain the minimum static
pressure set points defined during commissioning. The controller shall operate utilising the
measured sensor value registering the largest negative differential from its set point.
F. The supply fan shall be disabled and a warning sent to the BMS if the supply air pressure rises
above a limit of 1500 Pa (adjustable).

G. Once flow is established the system will allow its temperature control algorithm to operate. The
system will maintain the minimum fresh air requirement (pre-set to ensure that negative pressure
is not encountered) and the fresh air and recirculating dampers will be modulated according to
the average space air quality (measured by space / return duct C0 2 sensors) to reduce the load
on the plant. This will ensure that high volumes of outdoor air are not unnecessarily cooled. An
outside air quality detector will ensure that the fresh air delivered to the space is capable of
satisfying that need. The actual fresh air volume delivered to the space will be measured by a
multi point velocity detector in the intake ductwork.
H. Fan speed will be varied by the use of inverter/VFD drives via hardwire contacts which shall also
be integrated via a suitable Modbus interface. This interface will be linked directly with the local
controller without the need for gateways to ensure reliable and quick transfer of operational
information. All parameters available in the drive shall be displayed on the BMS and
logged/alarmed wherever appropriate.
I. Indication of fan running is provided by means of a differential air pressure switch fitted across the
fan which will alarm in the event of failure. Individual indication of “fan trip” and “switch not in auto
position” will be provided through the DDC controller.
J. If the supply air temperature rises above a set point of 24°C or below a set point of 10°C during
normal operation the BMS shall give a supply air temperature high/low warning.
K. Where stated in the schedules and on the drawings an sensible / enthalpy wheel shall be
provided to transfer heat and moisture between the supply and extract air streams. The enthalpy
wheel shall be disabled when the air handling plant is shut down or when there is a BMS night
cooling signal.
L. The sensible / enthalpy wheel shall be enabled when the supply fan starter motor is operating
(except for a night cooling or fan overrun operation). The wheel shall operate when the
temperature or moisture content differential between the outside air and return air is greater than
a value of 2oC or 1g/kg respectively.
M. The speed signal to the wheel motor is then controlled utilising a PI control signal to provide the
nearest possible enthalpy set point.
N. During plant operating periods the enthalpy wheel is always to be sequenced first in order to
provide the required supply temperature and humidity set point control. Only when the enthaply
wheel is not rotating or operating at the maximum speed setting should other plant be utilised for
temperature control purposes.
O. The space conditions will be maintained by the DDC controller modulating in sequence the
cooling valve and the fan speed to the satisfaction of the space/return air temperature detectors.
Positive feedback of valve and damper position will be displayed on the BMS.
P. Temperature control of the space will be achieved with a combination of fan adjustment (airside
control) and waterside control via modulation of control valve to optimize energy performance.
Variable volume of air supply shall be achieved via VFD control. During occupied times the unit
will start at 50% design air flow (adjustable) the cooling coil valve is positioned in response to a PI
Q. control signal acting on the temperature differential between the supply or zone air temperature
and its setpoint.

R. If the space temperature cannot be achieved the supply air volume shall be increased in
increments of 10% (adjustable) to meet space cooling load demand. Again the cooling coil valve
is positioned in response to a PI control signal acting on the temperature differential between the
supply or zone air temperature and its set point. This increase continues up to 100% design flow.
During commissioning the contractor is to ensure that the PI loop time constants are set to ensure
that hunting does not occur due to over cooling of the space.
S. If space temperatures are achieved with the set supply air volume and the cooling valve position
is less than 80% (adjustable) the supply air setting will be reduced to the next lowest speed
setting (increments of 10%), further capacity reduction will be achieved by adjustment of supply
air via the valve is position in response to a PI control signal acting on the temperature differential
between the supply or zone air temperature and its set point.
T. If the relative humidity reported at the duct mounted supply air humidity sensor rises above its set
point and the supply fan is proven by the differential pressure sensors the cooling coil is to
operate in conjunction to dehumidify the supply air by cooling to 12°C (adjustable) to maintain the
space temperatures as defined above. The air side control is to begin at 50% air flow (adjustable)
increasing in increments of 10% as described previously.
U. The above temperature control mode shall be set up and commissioned for the specific project
and the set points adjusted and suitable time delays applied to ensure hunting does not occur. At
all times the outdoor air dampers will be modulated to achieve IAQ set point.
V. During the night and in the winter season the DDC controller will monitor the inside and outside
enthalpy and calculate whether it is possible to pre cool the building prior to occupancy using the
outside air. The calculation performed will also take into account the additional cost of running the
plant for that period to ensure it is economically viable. During this period the fans will run at full
speed to ensure the minimum cool down period. At times when free cooling is not available and
the building is outside occupancy hours, the fresh air damper shall be closed and the AHUs shall
re-circulate only.
W. Depending on climatic conditions the AHUs fan speed shall be reduced, such that the minimum
required air quantity is provided to maintain space night set back temperatures. When 50% or
less air flow is required, duty will be reduced by shutting AHUs down in a logical sequence.
X. Supply and return humidity will be monitored by detectors and displayed at the BMS Supervisor.
Pre and bag filters in the supply duct will have differential pressure switches fitted for indication
and alarm purposes on the BMS.
Y. A graphical representation of the plant will be produced with all set points, alarms and time
schedules displayed with simple mouse clicks. Access to the graphic will be through a system of
site plans, plantrooms and systems.
Z. All values are to be historically recorded at controller level so that locally any laptop or Portable
operator’s terminal may retrieve the data as well as the network BMS Supervisor.
AA. A fire alarm interlock shall be hard wired into the control circuit of the AHU to ensure that it shuts
down in an alarm condition.

3.13 EXHAUST SYSTEMS (EXCLUDING KITCHEN EXHAUST)
A. All extract fans shall operate under the dictates of one of the DDC controllers inbuilt time
schedules and control in the following manner, with the exception of the LV room purge fans
which shall operate under manual control after a gas suppression system event.
B. When called on to operate the respective fan damper shall be driven to the fully open position
and when the inbuilt auxiliary switch confirms this the fan shall be enabled.
C. Indication of fan running is provided by means of a differential air pressure switch fitted across the
fan which shall generate an alarm locally and at the BMS supervisor in the event of failure.
Individual indication of “fan trip” and “switch not in auto position” shall be provided through the
DDC controller.
D. A graphical representation of the plant shall be produced with all set points, alarms and time
schedules displayed with simple mouse clicks. Access to the graphic shall be through a system of
site plans, plant rooms and systems.
E. All values are to be historically recorded at controller level so that locally any laptop or Portable
F. A fire alarm interlock shall be hard wired into the control circuit of the fans to ensure that they
operate in accordance with the HVAC control sequences in an alarm condition (shut down).
3.14 CORRIDOR SMOKE CONTROL FANS
A. All set-points shall be adjustable and all proportional bands shall be field determined. Start, stop
and below modes of control shall be commanded by the DCC panel. Fans shall not start until
their respective dampers are proven open. When the fans are enabled, the dampers shall open
and the fans shall start, when the fans are stopped, the dampers shall close.
B. The DDC system shall "enable" the corridor smoke control shaft pressurization system based on
an activation signal from the FAS.
C. On activation of the corridor smoke control system corridor smoke control isolation dampers shall
open on the fire affected floor. The duty fan shall start after the isolation dampers have opened
sufficiently as proven by the damper end switch.
D. Upon signal from the Fire Alarm System, the outdoor air damper shall open and the fan shall
delay 15 seconds and start after the damper is proven open by end switch.
E. A smoke detector furnished and wired under electrical contract installed under this contract shall
stop the unit via a hardwire inter-lock if smoke is sensed. Smoke detector must be manually
reset. The system shall return to normal operation automatically when the alarm has been
cleared.
F. On failure of any corridor smoke control fan the stand-by fan shall start automatically and an
alarm shall be raised on the BMS workstation. On failure of both the duty and the stand-by
corridor smoke control fans a critical alarm shall be raised on the BMS workstation.

3.15 STAIR SHAFT PRESSURIZATION FANS
A. All set-points shall be adjustable and all proportional bands shall be field determined. Start, stop
and below modes of control shall be commanded by the DCC panel. Fans shall not start until
their respective dampers are proven open. When the fans are enabled, the dampers shall open
and the fans shall start, when the fans are stopped, the dampers shall close.
B. The required mechanical system shall operate upon the activation of the smoke detectors and by
manual controls accessible to the fire department. The required system also shall be initiated by
the following,
1. Water flow signal from an automatic sprinkler system.
2. General evacuation alarm signal.
C. On activation of the stair / lift shaft pressurization system the stair / lift shaft pressurization fan
isolation dampers shall open. The duty fan shall start after the isolation dampers have opened
sufficiently as proven by the damper end switch. The pressure relief dampers shall be modulated
in unison to maintain the average stairwell pressure at set point (adjustable-Automatic Controls
Specialist shall coordinate stairwell pressure setting with mechanical contractor).
D. Upon signal from the Fire Alarm System, the outdoor air damper shall open and the fan shall
delay 15 seconds and start after the damper is proven open by end switch. The fan speed shall
be modulated under PI control to maintain the differential pressure between the shaft and the
adjacent space at 15 Pa
E. A smoke detector furnished and wired under electrical contract installed under this contract shall
stop the unit via a hardwire inter-lock if smoke is sensed. Smoke detector must be manually
reset. The system shall return to normal operation automatically when the alarm has been
cleared.
3.16 CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEMS
A. Supply and exhaust fans shall be installed in the parking zones. Supply fan as well as exhaust
fans are installed and controlled by variable speed drive. They are to operate on following modes.
1. Normal ventilation mode.
2. Smoke exhaust mode.
B. BMS to initiate start & stop of the fans through the DDC based on CO levels. The access and
setting of the schedules to be by authorized personnel only. Different levels of access to be
created.
C. At start up the supply and exhaust fans installed for each parking zone should be at minimum
speed controlled by the variable speed drives (VSD)
D. BMS through the DDC should monitor the CO levels as indicated by CO sensors located in each
parking zone. If a number of CO sensors are located in one zone the readings should be
averaged. DDC should monitor and adjust the supply and exhaust fan speed to maintain the CO
level below the set point as required (800ppm)
E. Smoke Exhaust Mode:

1. The fire alarm system should send a signal which shall bypass the DDC in fire mode to
operate the exhaust fans at maximum speed.

2. In case the duty supply or exhaust fan should fail in fire mode then an alarm should be
indicated on the BMS panel. The system shall automatically operate the standby fan where
provided, or increase the speed of the remaining operable duty fans to retain the flow rate
set point. All components of fan monitoring should be fully fire rated.
3. Once the fire signal returns to normal the BMS should reset and start the fans in normal
ventilation mode.
F. The controls system shall monitor all faults and alarms and register them on the BMS head end.
3.17 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
A. Sequence of operation for FM-200 system shall be as follows:

1. Actuation of one detector, within the system shall:
2. Illuminate the alarm lamp on control panel face. Energize an alarm bell and an optional
visual indicator. Transfer two sets of the 10 amp rated auxiliary contacts which can perform
auxiliary system functions such as:
B. Operate door holder/closures in access doors. Transmit a signal to fire alarm system.
C. Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system shall:

1. Illuminate the pre-discharge lamp on the control panel face.
2. Energize an alarm horn or horn/strobe device. Shut down the HVAC system and /or close
dampers. System abort sequence is enabled at this time.
D. After completion of the time delay sequence, gas system shall discharge and the following shall
occur.
E. Illuminate a system fired lamp on the control panel face. Shutdown all power to high voltage
equipment. Energize visual indicator outside the hazard in which the discharge occurred.
F. The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices located at each
hazard exit. Operation of manual devices shall duplicate the verified detection sequence
description above except that the time delays and abort functions shall be bypassed.
G. In case main power supply fails, transfer switches are provided to automatically switch power to
back-up battery.
3.18 DIRECT EXPANSION (DX) SPLIT SYSTEMS
A. Direct expansion air cooled split unit is to be controlled by DDC. The control to consist of the
following
1. Fan Motor
2. Compressor State /stop
3. Room Temperature
4. Reverse Cycle
B. BMS to initiate start & stop of the Air Conditioning unit through the DDC time schedules. The
access and setting of the schedules or manual starting is to be by authorized personnel only.

C. The temperature sensor located in the room shall be used by the DDC to control the room
temperature by starting and stopping of the compressor. At all times the fan shall be operational
D. When the room temperature is +1.0 deg higher than the set point temperature the BMS shall
enable the cooling. When the temperature is -1.0 lower than the set point the reversing valve and
the compressor shall be enabled. The normal set point shall be 23 Deg C.
E. The set point shall be user adjustable via the BMS to authorized personnel only
F. The DDC shall monitor the room temperatures, compressor & fan start/stop status & fault
indication.
3.19 CLOSE CONTROL UNITS (CRAC)
A. The CRAC units provide conditioning of the space via internal on-board controls, to achieve the
supply temperature set point, initially 20˚C.
B. The CRAC units will operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to maintain set point room
conditions.
C. The following points are to be monitored by the BMS. Common Alarm for each unit (Alarms shall
be generated for set point deviations and fault), Room temperature, Room Humidity
D. All sensor readings and all control actions shall be trend logged for commissioning and
maintenance purposes.
E. On receipt of an alarm signal from the fire alarm system the units shall continue to run.
3.20 WATER BOOSTER SETS INCLUDING DOMESTIC, SUMP PUMPS
A. All packaged water booster pumps shall be a packaged unit complete with manufacturers
integrated control panel providing all necessary internal controls. Pressure transducers provided
by the manufacturer shall be installed to the system pipework to monitor pressure within the
system and to maintain a constant pressure. The booster set control panel will be interfaced with
BMS local controllers directly. The BMS shall display all parameters available from the Booster
set digital control panel.
B. The following controls facilities shall be provided by the packaged plant: -

1. Power on and common alarm lamp.
2. On/off selector switch.
3. Very low water level float switch from the cold water storage tank / water supply break tank,
to raise an alarm on the BMS and to disable the cold water booster set.
4. Common alarm on BMS.
C. A graphical representation of the plant will be produced with all set points, alarms and time
D. All values are to be historically recorded at controller level so that locally any laptop or Portable

3.21 IRRIGATION PUMPS
A. Irrigation Pump sets will be monitored by the BMS to provide the following information. Each
pump will have its Run & Trip status monitored together with the position of its controlling switch.
Tank Hi and Lo level alarm information will be given to the BMS for display and annunciation
purposes.
B. A graphical representation of the plant will be produced with all set points, alarms and time
C. All values are to be historically recorded at controller level so that locally any laptop or Portable
3.22 WATER TANKS
A. High level, low level and overflow alarms for each tank/section.
B. Common alarm from each pump set and fire pumps control panel (Include for all foul water
pumps, sump pumps, surface water pumps, chilled potable circulation water pump sets, and all
those shown on the MEP drawings.)
C. Temperature monitoring of water tanks.
D. Level switches for the water tanks.
E. Provide BMS cumulative water meter readings to monitor consumption on a daily, weekly or
monthly basis as required by the employer.
F. The cooled potable water tanks shall be cooled by chilled water via a packaged heat exchanger
unit during periods of lower demand. The associated valves and pumps shall be operated under
the dictates of dedicated user adjustable time programmes, initially set to operate during the
cooler night periods and between peak times during the day. A BMS temperature sensor shall be
provided in the tank to measure tank temperature and override time control of the valves and
pumps so as to prevent overcooling.
G. Water treatment and process equipment for status and alarms. The equipment shall operate
under the dictates of its own integral control panel. A serial interface using BACnet protocols shall
be integrated into the BMS to give full diagnostic information for display on the BMS supervisor
graphics.
H. All tanks shall have overflow situation monitored by the BMS, Separate float switches or
electrodes shall be provided to facilitate this.
3.23 DOMESTIC WATER METERS OTHER THAN AUTHORIT
A. The domestic water meters not provided by DEWA (W) shall be supplied with pulse outputs to
enable metering of water consumption by a dedicated metering and billing system. The dedicated
metering and billing system shalt record the water consumed per meter and shall include
software to enable the water consumption to be monitored, i.e. in graphical and database format
on weekly and monthly basis throughout the year. The BMS shall interface with the billing and
metering system to record and enunciate common faults and alarms.
3.24 STANDBY EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEMS
A. The Generator control panel shall be provided with an interface module to allow monitoring of all
operating conditions of the generator.
B. The BMS shall not have any control on the Generator operation. Following points are hardwired
to BMS for monitoring.
1. Fail to Start Alarm Signal
2. Low Battery Alarm Signal – voltage-free contact from the Generator panel
3. Unit Fault Status
4. Generator Fuel Level – voltage-free input from the Generator panel. (Low Level)
C. Alarms: the following alarms shall be generated at the BMS.

1. Fail to Start: This is generated when the Fail to start alarm signal is ON as sensed by panel
volt free contact.
2. Low Battery Alarm: This is generated when the low battery alarm signal is active.
3. Unit Fault Status: This alarm is generated when the unit fault alarm signal is ON as sensed
by panel volt free contact.
4. Low and High Fuel Level Alarm: This alarm is generated when the fuel level in the tanks
goes below or above the limits as sensed by the analog signal from the generator.
3.25 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Each automatic transfer switch shall be monitored by the local DDC controller to provide a
change over fault and a common general fault.
B. A graphical representation of the plant shall be produced with all status information, alarms etc.
displayed with simple mouse clicks. Access to the graphic shall be through a system of site plans,
plant rooms and systems.
3.26 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A. The Main Distribution Boards shall be monitored through the DDC controller by means of a
lonworks connection to the meters and associated equipment. All available information shall be
mapped into the local DDC controller for display on the Building Management System and all
connected computers on the network. A common fault and ACB status indication shall be hard
wired into the controller.
B. A graphical representation of the plant shall be produced with all status information, alarms etc.

3.27 FIRE ALARM PANELS
A. Each landlord fire alarm panel shall be monitored by the DDC controller to provide a system
healthy, fault and alarm. All information shall be displayed on the BMS Supervisor.
B. All MCC and DDC control panels shall be linked to the Fire Alarm system such that in a Fire
condition the plant shall either shut down or control to an agreed routine.
C. A graphical representation of the plant shall be produced with all status information, alarms etc.
3.28 UPS SYSTEM
A. Each of the UPS Systems will be monitored through the DDC controller by means of a ModBus
interface. All available information shall be mapped into the local DDC controller for display on the
Building Management System and all connected computers on the network.
B. A graphical representation of the plant will be produced with all status information, alarms etc.
displayed with simple mouse clicks. Access to the graphic will be through a system of site plans,
plantrooms and systems.
3.29 LIGHTING CONTROL
A. The BMS shall fully integrate to the lighting control systems via an EIB interface and provide
complete functionality. Although the lighting system may operate autonomously, all operations
should be accessible through the Building Management System.
B. All set points, time schedules and alarms shall be mapped into the local DDC controller and
thereby available at any point on the network.
C. A graphical representation of the system shall be produced with all status information, alarms
schedules etc. displayed with simple mouse clicks. Access to the graphic shall be through a
system of site plans, plant rooms and systems.
3.30 ELEVATORS
A. The BMS shall monitor and display on graphics all the information available from the elevator
systems packages via a BACnet gateway.

B. The elevator systems shall be monitored via an open protocol gateway (e.g. BACnet MS/TP) and
via hard wired dry contacts. The final co-ordination and detailing of the interface design,
installation and commissioning for the particular products procured shall be by the specialist
controls contractor with all necessary input and co-ordination from the elevator supplier and
electrical contractor.
3.31 CBS SYSTEM
A. Each of the CBS Systems will be monitored through the DDC controller by means of a ModBus
interface. All available information shall be mapped into the local DDC controller for display on the
Building Management System and all connected computers on the network.
B. A graphical representation of the plant will be produced with all status information, alarms etc.
displayed with simple mouse clicks. Access to the graphic will be through a system of site plans,
plantrooms and systems.
D. For more details please refer to I/O points schedule/ control schematics/ riser drawings and
sequence of operation.
E. The details provided are minimum requirements and need to be details as per the site
requirement by BMS specialist.
3.32 ENVIRONMENT MONITORING SYSTEM FOR SERVER ROOM
A. The environment monitoring system shall be supplied, installed, tested and commissioned by the
contractor in order to provide early warnings of critical events before they turn into a disaster. The
same shall be installed inside the server room in the project. The system shall monitor critical
environmental conditions (such as temperature, humidity and water leakage) that could destroy
network components in the server room. When the sensor goes out of range, the system shall
generate an alert.
B. The system shall provide the following environment monitoring parameters:

1. Temperature
2. Humidity.
3. Water Leaks.
C. The Alert Notification against any critical event due to an unusual parameter value shall be
through the following:
1. Email.
2. SNMP.
3. Voice Phone Calls.
4. SMS Messages.
5. Front Panel LED.
D. Key Features of the system shall include the following:

1. It should have a battery backup (2 Hours).
2. It should support advance sensors that can extend up to 1000 feet. Sensors are hot
pluggable.
3. The system shall be Rack mounted.

4. Operating temperature shall be between 0 & 60 degrees centigrade.
3.33 SENSORS REQUIREMENTS:
A. Temperature & Humidity Combination Sensor:

1. Application from 0 to 80 degrees centigrade with an accuracy between +/- 1 degrees.
2. Application from 20% to 80 % relative humidity with an accuracy of +/- 5%.
3. The contractor shall locate the sensor strategically in the server room including the required
length and installation requirements to insure proper system function.
B. Water Leakage Sensor (Plenum-Rope Style):
1. The sensor should detect any conductive liquid or moisture.

2. Minimum Puddle: 0.6 “ diameter.
3. The sensor should be provided with the required length to insure full server room coverage.
4. Plenum Rating: CL2P (UL) / Diameter: 0.25.
END OF SECTION
23 09 93

SECTION 23 11 13
FACILITY FUEL OIL PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
Conditions of contracts apply to this Section.
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Emergency Generator Fuel Oil Transfer Pump (Non UL Listed).
B. Fuel Storage Tank (Cylindrical).
C. Fuel Level Gauge.
D. Leak Detection System.
E. Piping (Underground).
1.2 RELATED WORK
1. Section 230508 - Vibration Isolation
2. Section 404213 - Piping Insulation
3. Section 230713 - Ductwork Insulation
A. Governing Standards:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):D2996-83Filament-Wound

Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Pipe
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):30-84 Flammable and Combustible

Liquids Code
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):250-85 Enclosures for

Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
4. Steel Tank Institute (STI):
Standards and publications for the manufacturer, installation and

protection of underground steel tanks. STI-86 .Containment System.
5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):59 Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable

and Combustible Liquids; April 15, 1986
23 11 13 – Facility Fuel Oil Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 8
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit copies of shop drawings for each tank. Drawings shall
include all critical dimensions and show locations of all fittings and accessories, i.,
manways, ladders, hold-down straps, heating coils, etc.
2. Catalog Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature.
3. Installation Instructions: Include copies of manufacturer's latest

installation instructions.
4. Calibration Charts: Contractors shall include copies of manufacturer's latest

calibration charts.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. See Separate List of Manufacturers
2.2 EMERGENCY GENERATOR FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMP (Non UL Listed)
A. Furnish and install duplex rotary screw fuel oil transfer pumps as indicated on the drawings
and specified herein.
1. Pumps shall transfer oil from main storage tank to standby generator day tanks.
2. Each pump shall be capable to deliver 1.5 LPS of fuel oil at 15 m head
pressure. The motor shall be 415V, 3 phase, 50 cycle.
B. Provide packaged type duplex fuel oil pumping and straining set (with one electrical pump
with flame proof motor). Pump sets shall be factory assembled, piped, wired and tested.
Provide one manual pump of equal capacity and make necessary piping connections with
valves. The pump shall trip/stop when it receives a signal from the generator day tank level
controller interfaced with the BAS.
C. Support base shall be fabricated of not less than 6 mm steel plate with 75 mm side rails
continuously welded to form a 25 mm high overflow lip, complete with 13 mm drain plug.
Strainer and pumps shall be bolted to individual bases, which, in turn, are welded to the
support base.
D. Piping shall be complete to suction, discharge and return line connections. Provide gate
valves and unions arranged to permit removal of either pump while the system is in operation.
Install check valves and relief valves on pump outlet and gate valves on the inlet side of
pressure gauges.
E. Suction strainer shall be flanged connection, duplex type, one-piece, cast-iron body, ASTM A
48 Class 30, with 1.2 mm perforation brass baskets.
F. Oil pump set shall be factory assembled on a structural steel channel beam base to include
pumps, motors, flexible couplings and guards. Pump set shall be suitable for diesel oil
G. Valves
1. Gate valves to be bronze body, screwed connection, 1378 kPa.
2. Check valves to be bronze body, angle type, screwed connection, stamped 413
kPa, adjustable 275 to 550 kPa, similar to Bailey No. 118, or equal and approved.
2.3 FUEL STORAGE TANK (CYLINDERICAL)
A. Furnish and install steel above ground storage tank, nominal capacity as scheduled and
shown on the drawings. Tank shall be constructed of welded black steel adequately
braced and in accordance with the latest editions of NFPA Standard No. 30 and shall bear
the UL Label. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 31, NFPA
Standard No. 37 and local authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Tank shall be complete with the following connections and accessories:
a. Fill.
b. Vent.
c. Fuel oil suction and return.
d. Remote gauge.
e. Remote high level and low level alarms.
f. Maximum high level shut-off.
g. All required anchor bolts, hold down bands and sole plates of the proper
size.
h. Steel deflector plate at bottom of fill opening.
i. A thermal iron plug for each pipe connection.
j. Concrete tank supporting saddles (at least 300 mm thick).
k. Each tank, anchor bolt, sole plate, band and turnbuckle shall be
painted with 2 coats of Koppers Bitumastic No. 50 paint in the field
after testing.
l. 600 mm diameter service manhole with bolted gasketed cover.
2.4 PIPING
A. Fuel Piping:
1. Black Steel, ASTM A53 or A120 with threaded joints and fittings.
2. Fiberglass, UL listed, reinforced epoxy resin red thread with threaded and bonded
joints, ASTM D-2996. (Minimum pipe size available is two inches which may be
substituted for smaller pipe shown on the drawings).
B. Secondary containment piping; install the fuel piping inside a secondary containment
system of fiberglass, UL listed, reinforced epoxy resin red thread pipe with split two
piece fittings. The containment pipe shall be one pipe size larger than the fuel piping
(minimum pipe size available is three inches).
C. Fittings: Malleable iron, 150 psi Class, ANSI B16.3; or forged or rolled steel, ASTM
A234; or socket welding; ANSI B16.11.

D. Miscellaneous Fittings:
1. Vent Cap: Cast iron body, threaded ends, with 40 mesh brass screen.
2. Fill Units: 100 x 100 tight fill adaptor, brass, with gasketed lockable cap.
3. Drop fill, supply and return pipe shall be glass fiber reinforced plastic,
stainless steel or aluminum.
4. Prime Valve: Cast iron body, double-poppet valve, bronze seat and discs, normal
pressure limit 170 kPa; temperature limit 177°C, and brass screen.
5. Prime Valve Extractor Fitting: Cast iron with cap and gasket. Furnish
extractor tool.
2.5 FUEL LEVEL GAUGE
A. Provide for oil storage tank an electric tank gauging system. The system is to have a tank
transmitter, of Direct Lift Magnetic Float type, containing a float with an embedded magnet
that provides a continuous uninterrupted electric signal to the remote indicator. Unit shall
be unaffected by a change in the specific gravity of the tank liquid. The gauging system
shall include indicator with scale length, compatable with tank size, high and low level
warning lights, audible alarm with silence button and two dry contacts for remote
monitoring. The dial is to be in gallons. The electric indicator is to be of the motor driven
type with a built-in simulator for testing its operations and the calibration of any level
warnings. The system shall be suitable for operation with 50 volt, 240 cycles. The low
voltage wiring from the indicator to the transmitter must be run in a separate conduit
containing no line voltage. Standard electrical practice is to be followed for
interconnection of the tank transmitter and the remote indicator. Provide nameplate as
specified in Section 15190.
2.6 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Furnish and install a continuous leak detection and monitoring system for underground
double-wall fuel tanks, sumps, and piping. System shall include electronic alarm and
locator module, fuel and water sensing cable, graphic display map, and auxiliary
equipment. The system shall detect the presence of liquid fuel at any point along the fuel
cable's length, sound an alarm, and determine the location of the leak. The sensing cable
shall be such construction that no metallic parts are exposed to the environment. The
system shall provide pre-connectorized sensing cable and components. The system shall
be UL listed and FM approved. The system shall be the Raychem Tracetek System or
approved equal.
1. The fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the interstice of the double wall
tank to detect leaks from the primary containment. The water sensing cable
shall be installed in the interstice to monitor for water entering through the
outerwall.
2. Fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the annulus of double wall pipes at the six

o'clock position. The minimum clearance required between the primary and
secondary pipes in 20 mm. Design and installation shall be in accordance with
the Tracetek Double-Containment Design Guide.
Sensing cable shall be installed using a pull rope through the pipe annulus.
Coordinate installation of pull rope with mechanical contractor. The Tracetek
cable shall be installed after piping installation is complete and pressure tested.
Access to the pipe annulus shall be provided to allow installation of the sensing
cable. Accesses shall be located at all entries, terminations, branches, after
180 degrees of pipe bend, and for every 75 meters of straight pipe. Accesses
shall be minimum 100 mm diameter and shall extend from the pipe to the
surface of grade. Coordinate location of access points with mechanical
contractor.
3. A fuel sensing cable shall be installed in the floor of the piping sump, if
required, and vertically up the length of the sidewall.
4. A graphic display map shall be prepared after completion of the installation from
as-built drawings. The map shall indicate the location of the tanks, piping,
sumps, access manholes, sensing cable, and alarm module. The map shall
correlate alarm module distance readouts to specific locations within the tank and
piping system. The map shall be located adjacent to the alarm module.
5. The Tracetek System shall be commissioned upon completion of the

installation to verify proper installation and operation. Commissioning shall be
performed by manufacturers authorized representative in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements.
2.7 SOIL SEPARATOR
A. Porous fiberglass mat consisting of borosilicate glass fibers, average diameter 8

to 12 microns, 50 - 100 mm stands, bonded with phenol formaldehyde resin. Mat
shall be 100 percent textile glass fiber and be water permeable with a thickness of 6
mm to 15 mm with a density of not less than three pounds per cubic foot
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FUEL STORAGE TANK
A. Installation of storage tank and monitoring systems shall be performed under the
supervision of a tank manufacturer's representative.
B. Piping:
1. The horizontal supply, return, gauge, and vent lines, etc. must be at least
600 mm below grade at its highest point with 2% slope upwards from the tank or
special monitoring.

2. Provide swing joints (NFPA-30) at connections to the tank and at points prior to
vertical risers and other locations as shown or required by equipment
manufacturer. Fiberglass pipe does not require swing joints if at least four feet of
straight run is provided between any directional change.
3. Open ends of pipe shall be kept capped or plugged at all times.
4. Secondary containment pipe (casing pipe) shall be installed with factory

furnished split fittings and termination fittings located at the tank connection and
at walls. Also install a tapped tee fitting for testing and installation of the lead
detection system where required.
C. Install all monitoring wiring and gauge line between the tank and the monitoring unit in
metal conduit of type specified in Division 16.
3.2 OPERATION TESTS
A. Prior to final acceptance, perform an operation test of all equipment installed under this
section to demonstrate the workability and functioning of the system. Perform these tests
in the presence of the Architect.
3.3 INSPECTION AND LEAKAGE TESTS
A. Tank Test: After tank is set in place test by applying internal air pressure of five psig for
30 minutes without loss of pressure. Leaks shall be repaired in accordance with
instructions of the manufacturer and under the personal supervision of a representative of
the manufacturer. Tank shall be retested until all leaks are repaired.
B. Fuel Pipe Test: After all piping is in place, exposed, and before connection to the tank
and equipment, test with air to 520 kPA for 30 minutes without loss of pressure.
C. Secondary Containment Pipe: After all piping is in place and exposed, test with air to 70
kPa for 30 minutes without pressure loss.
D. Final System Test: After pipe connections to tank and equipment have been made,
backfilling and paving complete, the entire system shall be tested with 35 kPa air for 30
minute without loss of pressure.
E. Any tank, pipe or equipment that does not pass the tests specified shall be repaired or
replaced, at no additional cost to the Owner and tests repeated until all items are
approved.
3.4 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
A. Execution
1. Sensing cables shall be installed after tank and piping installation and testing
is completed.

2. Fuel sensing cable shall be installed continuously along piping exceeding

8 meters in length. Containment piping shall be sized to provide a 20 mm clear
space and access to the pipe annulus shall be provided per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Fuel sensing cable shall be installed on the floor around the perimeter of
generators and interior fuel tanks and piping.
4. System installation details shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations. The

completed system shall be commissioned by the manufacturer's authorized
representative.
END OF SECTION
23 11 23

SECTION 23 11 23
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Conform to General Requirements for Mechanical Services of relevant Mechanical Division.
C. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this Section,
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section covers the complete first class natural gas system installation, within and to five (5)
feet beyond building perimeter unless noted otherwise on Contract Drawings, including but not
limited to piping, regulators, unions, valves, installation, testing and other normal parts that make
the systems complete, operable, code compliant and acceptable to the authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Furnished and install SNG installation as indicated on drawings within the buildings. Contractor is
responsible for connection to the SNG site system provided by others. The following technical
specifications apply to the specialist SNG supplier except where details for connecting to this
distribution system within or immediately external to the building by Contractor apply. Gas
detection within building by contractor in accord with Civil Defense requirements. The Pipes &
Valves should be selected as per Natural Gas usage too.
C. This section specifies the requirements for the SNG components.
• Primary metering and1st stage regulation station
• Main riser line
• 2nd stage Pressure Regulation and Distribution Panel
• Distribution Risers
• Branches and secondary metering
• Gas leak detection system
• Emergency shut off system
D. The pressure regimes shall be as follows:
• Pipework inside domestic consumer’s premises will operate at 21 mbar or less (BS 6891).
• External pipework containing branch connections to domestic consumers (e.g. droppers)

shall operate at a maximum pressure of 75 mbar (IGE/G/5).
23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 16

• External pipework not containing branch connections (e.g. riser pipework) shall operate at
standardized pressures of 75 mbar, 350 mbar (IGE/UP/2).
• One or more regulators will be installed in the rooftop lateral piping system to reduce the
pressure in the domestic droppers to 75 mbar.
• All roof top piping shall be adequately supported and secured above the roof surface.
E. Provide electrical work related to this section and complying with requirements of NFPA Std.
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the field of LPG & Natural Gas Piping
work and distribution components with characteristics, sizes and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service.
B. Professional Engineer Certification : Approval/ compliance certification shall be submitted from the
following agencies to certify that the professional engineer is legally qualified to practice in the
jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of
the kind indicated:
i. Local Civil Defense Authority

ii. NFPA 54
iii. NFPA 58
iv. British Standards Code of Practice LPG ITA.
v. I.G.E.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacture’s product specifications, installation and startup instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating tank locations, weight loadings, required
clearances and SNG pipe work distribution complete with valves, fittings and controls.
C. Submit the following elements of the SNG Distribution and Storage System: Pipe and fittings, valves,
dielectric unions, strainers, meters, instruments, storage tanks, Leak detection and alarm system.
D. Steel Pipes : Statement from manufacturer on his letterhead that the pipe furnished meets the
international standards specified and contained in this section. Subcontractor shall submit the Mill
certification papers, also known as material test reports, for the pipe furnished for this project, in
English. Code numbers on these papers to match the code numbers stenciled on the pipe. Chemical
analysis indicated on the mill certification papers to meet or exceed the requirements of the
referenced International Standard specification.
E. Certificates to be provided for welding procedure with qualification of welders including list of
welder’s names and symbols.
F. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements for power supply wiring. Submit
manufacturer’s ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate
between portions of wiring that are factory – installed and portions to be field – installed.
G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each component control and
accessory, including “trouble – shooting” maintenance manual.

H. List of spare parts for two years operation and maintenance of complete system.
A. Accept valves on Site in shipping containers with labeling in place inspect for damage and store
with a minimum of handling. Store plastic piping under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store
materials directly on the ground.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of
the work and isolating parts of completed system.
E. Handle SNG System components carefully to prevents damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do
not install damaged components, replace with new.
F. Store SNG system components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one (1) plug valve wrench for every ten (10) plug valves sized 2 inches and smaller,
minimum of one. Provide each plug valve sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench incorporating
a setscrew.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRIMARY METERING AND 1ST STAGE REGULATION:
A. At the initial stages of building design and planning, the designer/installer needs to ensure that the
installed pipes connected to the meter outlet are adequately designed in order to provide a safe
supply of gas to the point of use. This will include:
a. Ventilated Meter
b. Compartment Door
c. Meter Compartment in Specially Constructed Recess
d. Meter Outlet Valve
e. Rotary Positive Displacement Meter
f. Bypass Arrangement (not a permanent fixture)
g. Emergency shut off system (solenoid valves).
h. First stage regulator (4 bar inlet- 350 mbar outlet).
2.02 2ND STAGE PRESSURE REGULATION AND DISTRIBUTION PANEL:
A. All below listed equipments will be in a protective Aluminium box on the roof. Each panel includes
the following:
a. Outlet pressure: service 75 mbar.

b. Four Nos. General shut off valve of source of gas supply Two No. Emergency shut
off valve DIA 3/4" solenoid valve 24 DC.
c. One No. Pressure switch warning for high or low gas delivery pressure.
d. One No. Pressure gauge ND 4” Range – 4 Bar.
e. General shut off valves DIA ¾” for risers.
2.03 PRESSURE REGULATORS:-
A. Regulators supplied shall have sufficient capacity to meet the demand and capacities.
B. Regulators shall have limited capacity internal relief. The relief port of the primary service regulator
shall be piped to the bottom edge of the meter box. The pipe shall be connected to a tank fitted
through the edge of the box. Regulators shall also have over pressure and under pressure slam
shut valves.
C. Casing shall be aluminium and the body shall be ductile iron, cast iron or aluminium.
D. The exterior of the regulator shall be coated with a finish of suitable epoxy based coating. The
coating shall be capable of meeting or exceeding the corrosion and chemical resistance test
requirements as set out in ANSI B109-2 or equivalent.
E. All regulators shall have an identification label showing maximum inlet pressure, outlet pressure,
under pressure cut out setting and capacity.
F. The diaphragm shall be manufactured from Buna or an equivalent material to be submitted for
approval.
G. The spring shall be of stainless steel.
H. All regulators shall have a suitably positioned pressure test point on the outlet of the regulator.
I. A removable filter shall be fitted to the inlet of the regulator (50 micron mesh).
J. The regulator shall include a tamper proof seal/mechanism locked by a wire or similar device.
K. The Gas Regulator should comply the following;
a. To suit natural gas.

b. Body and Diaphragm Case: cast iron or die-cast aluminium.
c. Springs: Zinc-plated steel.
d. OPSO/UPSO safety features.
2.04 GAS METERS:
A. Meters shall have sufficient capacity to meet the demand and capable of operating in the pressure
of 75 mbar.
B. The exterior finish of the meters shall consist of a lead free primer and a finish coat which are
capable of meeting or exceeding the corrosion and chemical resistance test requirements as set
out in ANSI B 109-2.
C. All meters shall have the external surface coated with a polyester powder coated finish. The colour
of the finish shall be approved by client.
D. An identification label shall be affixed by the manufacturer on each meter such that it will not
interfere with the meter dial sealing or bar code reading.
E. Diaphragms shall be manufactured from Buna or an equivalent approved material.

F. Meters shall have a steel/aluminium case and all screws securing meter casing flanges shall be
steel with zinc plating or aluminium dipped.
G. All diaphragms meters shall have a suitably positioned pressure test point on the outlet pillar.
H. All meters shall have anti-reverse flow mechanism, and the index window shall have a mechanism
to prevent unauthorized access to the index and its drive.
I. Meters shall be adjusted to a proof target of +/- 2% and the manufacturer shall supply details of
any correction device or factor necessary if the proof target cannot be achieved.
J. Meters shall have the possibility of remote reading by the building management system.
K. Unions for connecting diaphragm meters shall be made of brass, bronze or gun metal.
L. The Gas Meter should comply the following;
a. Rotary Positive Displacement type in PRS

b. Diaphragm type in unit apartment.
c. Capable of remote reading facilities (thru wire or wireless)
d. Capable of interfacing with BMS system for remoter reading.
e. Should measure the natural gas consumption in m3.
2.05 FLEXIBLE JOINT CONNECTIONS:-
A. The use of a flexible connection shall be considered in situations where it is known, or anticipated,
that pipework will be subject to vibration, movement, expansion or strain. Flexible connections
shall not be used for PE pipe.
2.06 EXPANSION JOINT:-
A. Provide for the expansion and contraction of all pipes. Install expansion joints to have sufficient
flexibility to prevent end thrust and movements caused by thermal expansion and contraction
causing damage to piping and joints at each riser and droppers.
2.07 PIPING, FITTINGS & VALVES
A. General
This section includes basic design provisions and material specifications for pipe, tubing, pipe and
tube fittings, valves used to connect container appurtenances with the balance of the L P Gas
system.
B. Pipe
1. Below ground Distribution pipe work shall be seamless steel to ASTM A53, A 106 Sch40
with Factory applied polythene sleeve or HDPE/MDPE SDR11.
2. Above ground distribution pipe work shall be Seamless Carbon steel Pipe to ASTM A53
Gr.B Sch40 or copper to BS 2871 Table X or Y
3. Final connections to equipment shall be soft copper tubes to BS 2871 TableX or Reinforced
Flexible Hose steel over braided.

4. The Pipe selection should match the natural gas service in future.
C. Pipe and Tubing Fittings
1. Pipe joints in steel, brass or copper pipe shall be welded or brazed.
2. The requirements of the Local Civil Defense shall be accommodated, including pipe-in-pipe
installations within the building. Extremely ventilated shafts shall be incorporated to comply
with civil defense requirements.
3. Fittings used at pressure higher than container pressure, such as on the discharge of liquid
transfer pumps, shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 350 psi ( 2.4 Mpa gauge).
4. Fittings used with liquid L.P-Gas, or with vapor LP-Gas at operating pressures over 125 Psig
(0.9 Mpa gauge) shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 250 Psig (1.7 Mpa
gauge).
5. Fittings for use with vapor LP-Gas at pressure not exceeding 125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge) shall
be suitable for a working pressure of 125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge).
6. Soldering or brazing filler material shall have a melting point exceeding 1,000 deg. F (538
deg. C).
D. The Gas Pipe should comply the following;
1. To be painted in suitable yellow color for identification of service.
2. Buried underground
a. HDPE – High Density Poly Ethylene SDR11 PE 100 ISO 4437.
b. PE pipe shall be used only when buried or when fully protected in a purpose provided
external enclosure or a below-ground duct.
c. PE pipe must not be used within a building. For an entry or exit, it shall be sleeved.
3. Aboveground
a. Carbon Steel Pipes schedule 40 as appropriate:
b. API 5L Grade B.
c. ASTM A106 Grade B.
d. BS EN 10255
e. Or equivalent standard.
4. Carbon Steel Fittings schedule 40 as appropriate:

a. Jointing materials
b. Fittings shall be as follows:
c. Welded fittings: SA 234 Grade WPB Sch.40
d. Screwed fittings: SA 105, 1000-3000 Ibs rating
e. Flanges : SA 105, 300 Ibs rating
f. Fasteners • Stud Bolts SA 193, Grade 7
g. Nuts : SA 194 Grade 2H Cadmium
5. Copper Pipe
a. Pipe shall be to BS EN 1057 or BS 2871 Table Y.
b. MOP shall not exceed 100mbar.
c. To be used in piping inside the kitchen, connected from meter to the kitchen appliances.
6. Copper Fittings
a. Fittings shall be to, as appropriate to BS EN 1254 & BS 2051-1
b. Shall be protected against mechanical damage.
7. Containment Pipe
a. Clear PVC OR Steel , subject to Local Authorities’ Approval.
8. Containment Pipe Fittings

a. Clear PVC split and solid or Steel
9. Pipe Sleeve
a. Sleeves for metallic pipework and external PE shall be of suitable material and must not
impair the fire resistance of structure.
E. System Valves
1. Pressure containing metal parts of valves (except appliance valves), including manual
positive shut off valves, excess flow check valves (either manually or automatically
operated), used in piping systems shall be of steel, ductile (nodular) iron, malleable iron or
Brass. Ductile iron shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ASTM A 395 or equivalent and
malleable iron the requirements of ANSI/ASTM A 47 or equivalent. All materials used
including valve seat discs, packing, seals and diaphragms shall be resistant to the action of
L P Gas under service conditions.
2. Valves shall be suitable for the appropriate working pressure, as follows:
a. Valves used at pressures higher than container pressure, such as on the discharge of
liquid transfer pumps shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 350 psig (2.4
Mpa gauge). [400 psig (2.8 Mpa gauge) WOG valves comply with this provision. Valves
should be UL listed.
b. Valves to be used with liquid L P Gas, or with vapor L P-Gas at pressures in excess of
125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge), but not to exceed 250 psig (1.7 Mpa gauge), shall be suitable
for a working pressure of at least 250 psig (1.7 M pa gauge).
c. Valves (except appliance valves) to be used with vapor L P Gas at pressures not to
exceed 125 psig (0.9 Mpa gauge) shall be suitable for a working pressure of at least 125
psig (0.9 Mpa gauge).
3. Manual shut off valves, excess flow check valves and backflow check valves used in piping
systems shall comply with the provisions for container valves.
4. Emergency shut off valves shall be approved and incorporate all of the following means of
closing.
a. In the event of Fire , Gas by Manually and automatically
b. Manual shut off from a remote location.
c. Manual shut off at the installed location.
5. Solenoid valves shall be intrinsically safe construction suitable
6. Valves selection should match the Natural Gas conversion in future

7. The Gas Valves should comply the following;

a. To suit natural gas.
b. Type: Ball valves
c. PN Rating: To suit Natural Gas MOP.
d. Diameter ≤ 50mm – screwed type
e. Diameter ≥ 50mm – flanged type
2.04 Kitchen Gas Accessories
A. Each kitchen consists of the Following items;
1. Ball Valve
2. Regulator
3. Solenoid Valve
4. Gas Meter with pulse output relay
5. Copper piping works
6. Auto Shut off Valve
7. Flexible hose
8. Gas Leak Detectors
9. Emergency Gas On/off Switch
2.05 Gas Leak Detection System
A. A gas leak detection system shall be installed to monitor for gas leaks at different locations of the
gas network.
B. Control Panel
1. The central control panel shall be located in the control room located on the site and shall
easily be accessible in the event of an emergency. (EDS or Equivalent.)
2. The central panel shall have a modular design incorporating input alarm/display module for
each gas detector. Each channel shall have indication for low alarm at 15% LEL, high alarm
at 30 % LEL and fault at 0-100% LEL indicator.
3. Main SNG supply shall be shut off at 30% LEL indication.
4. The concentration of the gas shall be displayed on a common indicator with selector
switches to display the concentration of the desired channel or zone indicator.
5. Below the gas control panel is the system control panel which shall have the following
indications:
a. AC healthy
b. DC healthy
c. Sprinkler on
d. Gas pressure status
e. Gas Solenoid Valve operated
f. Common fire signals
g. Gas leak high
h. Gas Percentage at Tank

6. The panel shall have the following switches:
a. Sprinkler manual operate

b. Gas manual shut off
c. Test lamp
d. System reset
7. Gas Detectors
The gas detectors shall use a pellistor sensor to detect flammable gases and vapors. The
sensor shall be housed in a stainless steel, flame proof housing, fitted onto an explosion
proof junction box.
8. Sound Flasher
A sound flasher unit shall be installed in the vicinity of the panel located in a visible area.
9. Cables
Fire Proof cables of at least 1.5 sq. mm area shall be used to interconnect between each
detector and the control panel.
10. Logic of operation

When low-level gas leak is detected in any zone, local internal alarm and indication shall
show on the control panel. When high level gas leak is detected in any zone, the following
sequence shall occur:
a. The solenoid valve in the gas distribution channel shall be closed automatically.
b. External alarm shall be operated.
Connection to the fire alarm system:
In the event of a fire alarm signal, the following sequence shall occur.
In the event of an emergency, it shall be possible to bypass the automatic system and
operate the system manually, this shall include:
a. Manual hut off/on of the gas through the emergency shut-off push button.
b. Manual operation of the sprinkler system On/Off
c. Manual reset.
2.06 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. All pressure regulators shall be designed, manufactured and approved for LPG service.

B. Pressure regulators for individual service lines shall be capable of reducing distribution line
pressure to pressures required for users. Pressure relief shall be set at a lower pressure than
would cause unsafe operation of any connected user. Regulator shall have a single port with orifice
diameter no greater than that recommended by manufacturer for the maximum gas pressure at the
regulator inlet. Regulator vent valve shall be of resilient materials designed to withstand flow
conditions when pressed against valve port. Regulator shall be capable of limiting build-up of
pressure under no-flow conditions to 50 percent or less of the discharge pressure maintained
under flow conditions. Commercial grade diaphragm type with internal relief valve, vent valve, cast
iron body, Buna-N diaphragm. Manufactured by Rockwell or Fisher.
C. Install pressure gauge adjacent to and downstream of each line pressure regulator.
2.07 UNIONS
A. Unions in 2 inches and smaller in ferrous lines shall be right and left hand nipple/coupling
assembly, or ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends, 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be ground flange unions. Companion flanges on lines
at various items of equipment, machines and pieces of apparatus may serve as unions to permit
disconnection of piping.
B. Unions connecting ferrous pipe to copper or brass pipe shall be dielectric type.
C. Above grade flexible stainless steel appliance/equipment connectors shall conform with AGA under
the ANSI Z21.69 Standard. Hose shall be braided stainless steel with a polyolefin heat-shrink
tubing with high flame-retardant qualities. Hose shall be equipped with malleable iron unions and
spring loaded brass quick-link couplings. An easily accessible manual shut-off valve shall be
installed ahead of all hose connections. Specify T&S Brass "Safe-T-Link" or approved equal.
2.08 FLANGES
D. All 150 lb. and 300 lb. ANSI flanges shall be domestically manufactured, weld neck forged carbon
steel, conforming to ANSI B16.5 and ASTM A-181 Grade I or II or A-105-71. Slip on flanges shall
not be used. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B16.9 and, in addition, shall have
the laboratory control number stenciled on each fitting for ready reference as to physical properties
and chemical composition of the material. Complete test reports may be required for any fitting
selected at random. Flanges which have been machined, remarked, painted or otherwise produced
domestically from imported forges will not be acceptable. Flanges shall have the manufacturer’s
trademark permanently identified in accordance with MSS SP-25. Contractor shall submit data for
firm certifying compliance with these Specifications. Bolts used shall be carbon steel bolts with
semi-finished hexagon nuts of American Standard Heavy dimensions. All thread rods will not be an
acceptable for flange bolts. Bolts shall have a tensile strength of 60,000 psi and an elastic limit of
30,000 psi. Flat-faced flanges shall be required to match flanges on pumps, check valves,
strainers, etc. Only one manufacturer of weld flanges will be approved for each project.
E. All flanges shall be gasketed. Contractor shall place gasket between flanges of flanged joints.
Gaskets shall fit within the bolt circle on raised face flanges and shall be full face on flat face
flanges. Gaskets shall be cut from 1/16 inch thick, non metallic, non asbestos gasket material
suitable for operating temperatures from -150 degrees F to +75 degrees F, Klingersil C-4400,
Manville Style 60 service sheet packing, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 General:
A. All pipe work, pipe supports and brackets shall be painted with 2 undercoats and 2 finishing coats
of yellow color paint.
B. The corridor Gas Pipes should be by Pipe in Pipe work. The sleeve Pipe can be Steel or Clear
PVC (George Fischer)
C. Gas detectors should be provide for Tank Yard , PRDP , Pipe in Pipe ( Each 18 mtr or each 3
Joints.) , Air well and Kitchens
D. SNG piping shall be painted with a specific color different than other pipes. Orange or yellow colors
are recommended. Valves shall also be painted. Direction arrows to indicate the flow of gas in the
system shall be painted.
E. The system in parts and as a whole shall be tested to ensure that it will operate safely, without
leaks and to the satisfaction of the Civil Defense Authority.
F. Commissioning of the system shall be tested to ensure that all the equipment and the whole
system are in good working order.
G. The SNG contractor shall accommodate any acceptance of the system.
H. The gas network shall be leak tested using gases such as nitrogen or argon. Oxygen or flammable
gases will not be used. The leak test shall include all the different pressure stages of the system.
I. Test pressure shall be at least 1.5 times the operating pressure. The leak test duration shall be 1
hour. The specified test pressure shall be monitored for a minimum of one hour during which the
soap water method shall be used to leak test every joint. If no leak is detected and the pressured
gauge indicates no drop in the test pressure then the system will be proven to be leak free.
J. If a leak is found, the leaking joint shall be repaired or the leaking equipment shall be replaced. The
testing procedure shall be repeated to prove the complete system as leak free.
K. A test report shall be submitted to the Company for approval.
3.02 Testing and Commissioning:
L. Before installations are handed over or subjected to inspection and testing, the entire installation
shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
M. SNG shall not be introduced into a pipe work system unless it has passed a leak test for the entire
system to be commissioned, and signed records are available.
N. Purging of pipe work systems shall only be carried out by or under the supervision of competent
persons. Pipe work should be purged with an inert gas e.g. nitrogen, so that the oxygen level is
reduced to less than 9% by volume, before introducing SNG. Purge gas should be introduced in a
controlled manner using an adjustable pressure regulator.
O. When commissioning liquid systems, sudden chilling of the system from rapid vaporization shall be
avoided by purging with SNG vapor up to vapor pressure before introducing liquid, or by pre-
pressurization with the inert gas.

P. During the introduction of SNG the gas shall be released at a safe location and must not be
allowed to accumulate in any confined space.
Q. The introduction of SNG may be under taken in sections if necessary, provided suitable purge gas
release points have been provided.
R. 10% x-ray test to be performed for all the Gas pipes.
Note:
 The Pipes, Valves, Gas Meters and Hoses selection should match with Natural Gas
codes and Standards. The above said Items should work in Natural Gas in future.
3.03 Recommended Material List:
Sl No. Material Make
1. Regulator Rego, Novacomet, Madas , Reca

2. Gas Meter Elster, Suntront Dresser
3. Gas Detection system EDS, Crowcon, Sure Gas
4. Isolating Valve IMT, Giacomini, A+R
5. Shut off Valve IMT, Gurtner, RIV, Giacomini
6. Appliance Valve IMT, Gurtner, RIV, Giacomini
7. Flexible Hose Gurtner, Nova Comet, Enzed
8. Auto Shutoff valve Gurtner, Chuchu, OMB
9. Pressure Gauge Gurtner, Rego, Wika
10. Angle Valve Rego, JC Fabrica, Fisher
11. Globe Valve Rego, JC Fabrica, Fisher
12. Check Valve Rego, JC Fabrica, Fisher
13. Safety Relief Valve Rego, Ferrari, Fisher
14. C.S Pipe Mittal, TMK , Sumitomo
15. Solenoid Valve M&M, Asco, Zaksa
16. Copper Pipe Sampotube, Yorkshire, Muller
17. Flexible Joint Elster, Vimco, Metaflex

3.04 Approved Gas Contractors
1. Eurotech Gas Services L.L.C
2. Lootah BC Gas L.L.C
3. Cylingas
4. Royal Gas

SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for chilled-water
cooling, and makeup water for these systems; blow down drain lines; and condensate drain
piping.
1. Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing
pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 23 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
3. Division 00 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
materials and installation requirements.
4. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports, product descriptions, and
installation requirements. Hanger and support spacing is specified in this Section.
5. Division 23 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.
6. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages" for thermometers, flow meters, and pressure
gages.
7. Division 23 Section " Identification of HVAC Piping and Equipments" for labeling and
identifying hydronic piping.
8. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping.
9. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Controls Devices for HVAC" for temperature-
control valves and sensors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop
curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and
automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies,
alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure.
Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
23 21 13 Hydronic Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 13

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
F. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project
site.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the British Standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All piping in concealed areas or shafts will be welded.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,ERW, Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends or use BS 1387,
Medium weight pipe.
C. Steel Pipe Nipples: British Standard, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, black steel; seamless or
BS 1387.
D. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: British Standard; Classes 860 and 1725.
E. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: British Standard, Classes 1035 and 2070.

F. Malleable-Iron Unions: British Standard Classes 1035, 1725, and 2070.
G. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 1035, and 1725; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
H. Wrought-Steel Fittings: Wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
I. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Including bolts, nuts, and gaskets
of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. End Connections: Butt welding.

2. Facings: Raised face.
J. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47M,
Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B
steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
K. Flanges (including the associated nuts, bolts and washers) shall be to the minimum requirements
of B.S 4504 to suite the conditions within the pipework or to suit equipment, valves and other
pipework components having flanged connection. Where these connections have flanges greater
than the minimum requirements of B.S 4504 then special mating flanges shall be provided to suit
the connection concerned. Where flanges to B.S. 4504 are not manufactured then flanges to B.S.
10 will be accepted.
L. Flanges shall be bolted up using hexagonal nuts and bolts manufactured from high tensile carbon
steel in accordance with B.S. 916 using two flat steel washers, one each side of the jointed
flanges.
M. Gaskets for flange jointing shall be canvas reinforced neoprene full face gaskets to BS EN 1092-
1, BS EN 1092-2, BS EN 1092-4, BS EN 1514-1.
N. Mechanical coupling bolts shall be heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to physical
properties of ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength bolts shall be cadmium plated to ASTM
A165.
O. Fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, or malleable iron
conforming to ASTM A-47, Grade 32510.
P. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber

gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or
lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
Q. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 1035-kPa minimum working pressure and 121 deg C maximum operating
temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of 20-mm misalignment.
R. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Double sphere integrated back ring or floating flanges,
Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel
flanges; operating temperatures up to 121 deg C and pressures up to 1035 kPa.

S. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting
of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and
chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
T. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures. Gaskets shall be Grade ‘E’ EPDM compound conforming to ASTM
D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B 24F17Z. Temperature operating range – 300 F to + 2300F (-
340C to + 11-00C)
U. Contractor shall coordinate all threading and pipe connections and provide all required adaptors
to meet both British and ASTM Standards.
2.3 STRAINERS &VALVES
A. Use "Y" pattern strainers, Class 125, with screens oftype 304 stainless steel or Monel with
approximately 0.75mmperforations. Provide a valved blow-off connection in all caps 65mm and
larger. Maximum pressure drop with clean screen shall not exceed 6.89 Kpa, with water velocity
through inlet pipe of 1.5 m/s.
B. Strainers:
1. 65 mm and larger: Cast iron, flanged, Class 125/ PN 16.
2. 50 mm and smaller: Cast iron / Bronze, threaded, Class 125/ PN 16..
C. Strainers for copper water lines:
1. 50mm and smaller: Bronze, threaded, Class 150/ PN 16.
D. Provide drain valves for blow-off of sediment from strainers and tanks; non-shock 20mm size gate
valves with bronze body, male threaded garden hose end, cap and chain.
E. Other drain valves may be angle valves for non-shock with bronze body, 20mm threaded garden
hose end, cap and chain.
F. Gate valves
1. 50mm and smaller: Bronze non-rising stem, threaded, Class 150/ PN 16..
2. All Gate Valve to be with non-rising stem confirming to BS standards.
G. Butterfly valves:
1. Iron body, one-piece alloy steel shaft, top and bottom bearings, bronze disc or iron disc
with stainless steel trim, resilient elastomer replaceable seat with integral reinforcing ring or
keyed to body.
2. Body with threaded lugs.
3. Bubble-tight shut-off to 1 MPa pressure in either direction when the piping and connecting
flange is removed from one side of the valve.

4. Valves 150mm and larger shall be with worm gear manual operator with indication of valve
opening.
5. Butterfly valves may be provided in lieu of gate valves in sizes 65mmor larger, subject to
review by the Engineer.
H. Check valves for fluids, except immediately downstream from pumps:
1. 65mm larger: Cast iron non-shock, bronze trim swing check, renewable disc and seat,
bolted cover, flanged, ANSI B16.5, Class 125/ PN 16.
2. 50mm and smaller: Bronze, swing check, screwed cover, threaded, Class 150/ PN 16.
I. Check valves for water immediately downstream from pumps:
1. 65mm larger: Proprietary non-slam, flanged, Class 150/ PN 16.
2. 50mm and smaller: Proprietary non-slam, threaded, Class 150/ PN 16.
J. Relief valves shall be spring loaded, proprietary relief valves to ASTM B62 with Cast Brass body,
stainless steel spring and adjustable pressure setting.
K. Except where special features are required or unless otherwise approved, all globe, gate and
check valves shall be of one manufacture, with the manufacturer's name and the pressure rating
clearly marked on the outside of the valve body.
L. Balancing Valves:
1. Valves 65mm dia to 300mm dia shall be cast iron, or ductile iron, flanged to ANSI 125 psi /
PN 16or grooved fitting.
2. Valves 65mm dia to 75mm dia shall have brass ball with glass and carbon filled TFE seat
rings.
3. Valves 100mm to 300mm diameter shall be fitted with a bronze seat, replaceable bronze
disc with EDPM seal insert and stainless steel stem.
4. Valves shall be shut-off, balancing and flow calibrated, with memory stop.
5. Valves 19mm dia to 50mm dia shall be with Bronze body, npt connections design pressure
of 2069 kPa at 121°C, brass ball construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings,
Differential pressure read out ports, 1/4 NPT tapped drain port, memory stops and
calibrated name plate.
M. Pressure Independent Balancing Control Valves:
1. All modulating Control (Ratio control) valve shall be pressure independent and provided
along with actuators to provide the guaranteed performance from the manufacturer. The
pressure independent control valves shall deliver a near constant flow rate with rapid
system differential pressure changes of more than 100%. Valves shall be configured with
one integrated valve body that incorporates one chamber with an adjustable CV and a
separate pressure regulating chamber used to maintain a constant differential pressure
across the control surface.

2. All control valves shall be industrial quality and must be fully re-buildable. Valves shall be
designed to last 30 years or throughout the life of the facility. The pressure independent
section of the valve has to be designed to be debri resistant for the life of the valve. The
diaphragm area and spring rating of all the valve has to be designed for this purpose.
3. The control valve manufacturer shall provide written guarantee that the cooling coils will
meet or exceed design delta T performance at all load conditions as projected by an ARI
certified coil program at time of commissioning. The valve manufacturer will reimburse the
full purchase price of the valve if this performance level cannot be met.
4. Balancing valves and associated balancing shall not be used where pressure independent
modulating control valves are installed. The control valve must have the ability to limit flow
to the maximum design flow specific for each coil at all valve differential pressure ranges
up to 6 BAR
5. Flow shall not vary more than +/-5% through the entire operating pressure range of up to 6
bar. All PICV should be able to perform with flow not varying more than +/- 5% for
differential pressure up to 6 Bar and at all load conditions. The Manufacturer/ Supplier
should be able to field demonstrate the performance of these valves at all load conditions.
Control valve rangeability shall be a minimum of 100:1 through the operating pressure
range.
6. Each control valve size and model proposed to be offered/supplied and installed shall be
individually flow tested at the factory and verified to deviate no more than + 5% at the pump
operating pressure with each 10 degree increment.
7. There shall be three (3) ports installed at the factory as integral part of the valve and
capable of being used to measure pressure or temperature in the field. If ports are not
provided, contractor shall supply and permanently install a magnetic flow meter to allow for
flow verification for each control valve.
8. Valves should have the ability to change the valve characteristics like replacing the seal
without removal of the valve from the piping system.
9. The valve material body shall be copper alloy or gun metal or equivalent up to 2 inch and
for above sizes the body shall be ductile iron flange type. The valve diaphragm shall be
EPDM
10. All valves shall be warranted by the manufacturer for no less than a full 10 years from the
date of purchase. The warranty should be for the product and also the performance.
11. Valves should be suitable for vertical or horizontal installation.
12. It should be possible to verify the flow rate through the control valve using the valve stem
position and the differential pressure measurement between the first and second port of the
valve. If these valve features are not provided, a flow meter shall be installed at each valve
to verify the actual flow rate in operation through the valve.
13. Each control valve shall be individually flow tested and factory verified to to deviate no
more than +/- 5% through the entire operating pressure range of 34-483 kpa )(0.34 to 4.83
bar). All valves shall be tested on a test stand calibrated and verified with traceability to
NIST standards. All testing must be performed at 34 kpa( 0.34 bar) ( 0-100% opening in 10
% increments), 103-483 kpa ( 1.03 to 4.83 bar) ( 50 % and 100%)

14. All internal parts shall be brass, carbon steel, stainless steel or Teflon®. Plastic internal
parts are not acceptable.
15. The Pressure Independent balancing and control valve should be comprised of a linear
control valve and an integrated membrane based pressure controller;
16. The Pressure Independent balancing and control valve should be available in the range
from DN10 TO DN250;
17. The Valve could be used as an automatic flow limiter;
18. The Valve should have a mechanism to adjust the flow step less from 100 to 0 % of the
maximum flow;
19. Minimum possible flow in combination with a modulating actuator should be 30 l/h;
20. At the minimum setting of 30 l/h, modulation to 0% of the flow should be possible;
21. Shut off service function should be possible with setting mechanism;
22. The adjustment should be performed without a tool for dimensions DN32 or a standard tool
for valves bigger than DN32;
23. The setting, which can be locked, should be visible from the top of valves DN32 and from
the side of DN40 to DN250;
24. The Control Valve stuffing box should be serviceable under pressure for valves up to
DN32;
25. The Valves should have shut off function (positive), separated from the setting mechanism,
for valves DN40 TO DN250;
26. The leakage rate should be: No visible leakage at force of the thermal actuator (90N) for
valves up to DN32 and for Valves up to DN100 0.05% of the kV at 500N; All actuators
should be able to close against 600kPa differential pressure;
27. The authority of pressure independent control valve should be 1 at all settings (control
valve characteristic is not changed);
28. Control valve should have flow – control signal as a linear characteristic to at all settings.
Control ratio of the pressure independent balancing and control valve should be higher
than 1:300 (SUPPLIER OF THE VALVE SHOULD PROVIDE LAB TEST RESULTS AS
THERE IS NO STANDARD FOR TESTING PROCEDURE, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO
VERIFY BY INDEPENDENT LAB TO COMPARE CONTROL AND FLOW LIMITATION
FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT PICV’s AT THE SAME BASIS) ;
29. Control Valve should have the possibility to change linear characteristic to equal
percentage characteristic at all sizes and settings by adjusting actuator settings;
30. Minimum starting differential pressure for flow limitation should be 16kPa for valves up to
DN20, 20kPa for valves up to DN32. (SUPPLIER OF THE VALVE SHOULD PROVIDE
LAB TEST RESULTS AS THERE IS NO STANDARD FOR TESTING PROCEDURE, IT IS
RECOMMENDED TO VERIFY BY INDEPENDENT LAB TO COMPARE CONTROL AND

FLOW LIMITATION FUNCTION OF DIFFERENT PICV’s AT THE SAME BASIS) ; Nominal

Pressure rating 16 bar and maximal test pressure 25bar.
31. Test plug for pump optimization and flow verification should be available for DN10-DN250
Modulating Actuator For PICV
32. The valve actuator should accept a 0-10 VDC control signal, require a 24VAC power
source and provide a 0-100% position feedback signal to BMS, when connected. Only one
actuator shall be provided on each valve regardless of the valve type and capacity.
Actuators should have rotary action to ensure accurate flow regulation at all points.
Actuator should be a motor type with integral gear box to the control shaft for 90deg
actuation
33. All Control valve actuators shall be modulating type and must auto calibrate on power
supply of 24 VAC
34. All control valve actuators for 2 inch and above size shall be smart digital actuator on
power supply of 24 VDC 50 HZ, the torque open (Min 50 kgf.cm) and close (Min 40 kgf.cm)
with PWM control. The max torque will be 10 Nm Actuator shall be certified by UL or
equivalent. Valve water resistance level shall be IP 54. All actuator shall be equipped with
safe mode during the power outage.
35. All Control valve actuators shall be modulating type and must auto calibrate on power
supply of 24 VAC/220 VAC. The actuator force shall be of 250N and the max stroke shall
be 5.5 to 6 mm. the water level protection level for indoor shall be IP 40
36. The actuator should work with 24 VAC/220 VAC supply voltage and control range shall be
(0-10 Vdc)/(4-20mA).
37. To ensure energy saving the contractor shall put controls ensuring the when AHU/FCU is
off, the control signal to the Valve Actuator is disconnected and the Power supply of 24/220
VAC is maintained.
38. The actuator shall operate the valve from the fully closed to the fully open position and vice
versa in less than two minutes.
39. Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed tool less only in the location/orientation
approved by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve
location.
40. All actuator shall incorporate a manual override facility for services purposes.
41. If the contractor chooses the control valve with actuator on power supply of 24 VAC. A
suitable transformer shall be provided in order to achieve the required voltage.
42. All the FAHU’s and Common Area FCU’s (land Lord FCU’s) shall be provided with Smart
actuator to control chilled water flow based on Supply Air temperature, Room Temperature
and Chilled Water Delta-T etc..

2.4 STRESS ANALYSIS / THERMAL EXPANSION / CONTRACTION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINT

OF PIPES
A. Pipe stress analysis should be performed for water services (e.g. chilled water) pipe size 200 mm
and above. Stress analysis should break pipe isometric model into four cases
B. Stress analysis should determine thermal expansion and contraction of pipes, numbers and
location of thermal expansion joints along with location and loading of pipe anchors and pipe
guides. Also determine seismic expansion joint and anchor locations and determine anchor
loading that would be transferred into building structure. Stress analysis and steel structural
supports should be performed by a competent company / person and should approve the results
and drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Chilled Water, DN 50 and Smaller: Schedule 40steel pipe with threaded joints. Use the fewest
possible joints belowground and within floor slabs.
B. Chilled Water: DN 65 and above, Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints or
grooved mechanical-joint couplings. Piping located in shafts must be welded joints.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to
each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line.
Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install pressure independent automatic flow control valves in the return water line of each heating
or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate

system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Division 00 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation requirements.

B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 ball valve, and short DN 20 threaded nipple with
cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,
with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff
coming out the top of the main pipe.
G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-
line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers DN 50 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers
smaller than DN 50.
H. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 20 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer, supported on
a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20: Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 6.4 mm.

2. DN 25: Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 6.4 mm.
3. DN 40: Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
11. DN 300: Maximum span, 7 m; minimum rod size, 22 mm.
D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction
requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged
joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC piping.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at
heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward
slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units DN 50 and larger.
E. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression
tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with gate valve; extend
to nearest drain.
F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with
top of funnel not more than 1200 mm above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main, using
globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain,
with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.
G. Install expansion tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank. Install
tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper
water level in tank.
1. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank,
piping connections, and fittings, plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building
components and structural members.
H. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is
properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.

3.8 CHILLED WATER PRESSURISATION UNIT
A. Provide and install adjacent to the chilled water circulation pump an automatic pressurization and
make-up unit, comprising break tank pressurization pump, storage vessel, pressure transducer
with high and low pressure alarm, microprocessor control, pressure guage, safety valve, etc. With
expansion vessels with internal rubber diaphragm.
B. The unit shall be supplied as a complete package, with tank, storage vessel and control enclosed
in a sheet steel cabinet and mounted along with the expansion vessel on steel channel base
frame. The unit shall be suitable for a 230 volts, single phase, 50Hz supply. Unit should comply
with BS 7074.
C. Expansion Tank: The tank shall be fabricated from mild steel and shall be powder coated both
inside and out after completion of welding, complying with BS 4814 and listed by the WRC. The
tank shall be rated for operation at 10 bar in accordance with the pressure requirements of a
recognized internal or National testing agency. The tank shall have a neoprene rubber diaphragm
rated for continuous operation at 10 bar. Diaphragm may be fixed or removable. The tank shall be
complete with all tapping for inlet, drain recharge, and pressure relief.
D. Break Tank: 8 Liter active capacity and manufactured from polyethylene complete with ball value
to BS 1212, part 2 with type ‘A’ gap to comply with BS 6281, Part 1 1992, WRC.
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and British Standards as follows:
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
1. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
2. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium. Another liquid that is safe for workers
and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of
water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve,
or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of
vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7
times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.
3.10 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been
completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design
requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable
fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

SECTION 23 21 16
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install air vents, pressure gauges, thermometers,
strainers, air separators, expansion tanks, relief valves, water flow measuring and balancing
systems, and water flow integrating meters as indicated by the Contract Documents with
supplementary items necessary for their proper installation and operation.
to this Project.
1. ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 Design and
Fabrication of Pressure Vessels.
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by the same manufacturer
throughout.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Shop Drawings and product data, including component sizes, rough-in
requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
23 21 16 Hydronic Piping Specialties Rev.00 Page 1 of 12

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide the Owner with one differential pressure meter kit from the installed balancing valve
manufacturer for use with circuit balancing valves installed within this project. Kit shall include
meter, hoses, connection accessories, circular slide rule, carrying case and valve
manufacturer’s curve charts. If the contractors scope of the project is a renovation in an existing
building and the balance valves match existing manufacturer and models the contractor shall
inquire with Owners maintenance staff if a meter kit is required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Expansion Tanks : Bell & Gossett, Taco, Flamco, Woods, Reflex
B. Automatic Air Vents : Armstrong.
C. Air Separators : Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Reflex, Flamco
D. Water Relief Valves : Keckley, Watts, Bell & Gossett.
E. Circuit Balancing Valves : Danfoss, Armstrong, Tour & Anderson, Flowcontrol Inc.
F. Coil Package Valve Sets : Danfoss, Tour and Anderson
G. Integrating Flowmeters : Panametrics, Balance Master, Controlotron, EMCO.
H. Pressure Gauges : Dwyer, Weksler, H.O. Trerice, Weiss.
I. Thermometers : Dwyer, Weksler, H.O. Trerice, Weiss.
J. Pump Suction Fittings : Bell and Gossett, Taco, Victaulic, Anvil.
K. Strainers : Keckley, Mueller, Muessco, Strainers, Inc., Victaulic, Anvil.
L. Dirt Separators : Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Reflex.
M. Dynamic Pressurisation unit : Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Reflex, IMI.
N. Vacuum Degassers : Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Reflex, IMI.
2.3 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Tank Construction: Closed, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with Section VIII,
Division 1, of ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 125 psig rating. Clean, prime coat,
and supply with steel support saddles. Supply with renewable heavy duty butyl rubber bladder.
Construct tank with tappings for installation of accessories.
B. Provide with quick connect air charging valve connection (standard tire valve) tank drain.
C. Provide automatic cold water fill assembly complete with pressure relief valve, pressure reducing
valve and valved bypass.
D. Set expansion tank pressure relief valve and pressure reducing valve at pressures indicated on
Drawings.
E. Tank dimensions are as scheduled on Drawings.
2.4 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
A. Provide air vents at the highest points of the hydraulic piping systems and on the uppermost
connections to all hydraulic coils; 125 psig pressure rating. Provide shutoff valves to facilitate
maintenance of air vents.
B. Locate all air vents and their discharge lines in accessible locations, preferably clustered.
C. Route discharge lines to nearest floor drain without air traps.
2.5 AIR SEPARATORS
A. Steel tank, flanged inlet and outlet connections, separate top fittings for make-up line connection,
automatic air vent, and bottom connection for blow-down and cleaning. ASME/ PED construction
and stamped for 125 psig design pressure.
B. Provide stainless steel strainer with 3/16 inch diameter perforations and total free area of not less
than five (5) times the cross sectional area of the connecting pipe.
C. Alternatively, the casings shall be manufactured from mild steel incorporating internal spiral
wound copper mesh system.
D. Units shall be full line size.
2.6 WATER RELIEF VALVES
A. Pressure relief valves installed for the protection of the water circulating circuits shall be single
seated diaphragm and spring type valve with screwed connections, similar to Watts No. 174A.
B. ¾ inch size of bronze construction with bronze seat, composition shut-off disc, and rubber
diaphragm.
2.7 COIL CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES
A. Install in chilled and hot water piping systems and elsewhere where shown on Drawings per
manufacturer’s recommendation and installation instructions. Balance valves shall not be
required on systems provide with pressure independent control valves. Balance valves shall be
rated to operate and perform their intended design function at the system’s operating
temperature and maximum design pressure. The valve body shall be a wye pattern, globe-style,
and provide two pressure/temperature metering ports (PT Ports), and digital handwheel.
Balancing valve handle shall have a integral memory stop for locking the valve position after the
system is balanced.
B. Valves may also be furnished with precision machined venturi built into the valve body to provide
highly accurate flow measurement and flow balancing. The venturi shall have two, 1/4" threaded
brass metering ports and gasketed caps located on the inlet side of the valve.

2.8 COIL PACKAGE VALVE SETS
A. Install per manufacturers recommendations and instructions on hot water terminal coils with
automatic flow control Valves from ½ inch thru 2 inch: valve bodies shall be manufactured from
brass ASTM B 283 capable of working at a maximum temperature of 370 F. at a pressure of 600
psi. The valve body is a Y type with cartridge set capable of working and maintaining flow rate at
a differential pressure range between 2 to 45 psi.
B. Valves shall be furnished with precision machined cartridge orifice to provide automatic flow
balancing. The valve shall have a blow down valve to clear fine particulate from the cartridge, and
two, 1/4" threaded brass ports located on the inlet side of the valve use to acquire a differential
pressure measurement. The ports shall have caps with O-ring seals.
C. In lieu of automatic flow control valves, Tour and Anderson STAP differential pressure controllers
may be installed in conjunction with preset standard TA valves and coil components. Supply side
coil package shall including a ball valve Y strainer combo with PT port, union, and blow down.
Return side coil package shall include a union port fitting with PT port, manual air vent, union,
and male threaded tail piece as well as the TA balancing valve. STAP shall be installed per
manufacturer’s recommendations and at the locations shown on drawings with a partner TA
valve adjacent on the supply line for capillary connection.
D. Systems provided with pressure independent control valves shall not require automatic or manual
balancing valves.
2.9 INTEGRATING FLOWMETERS
A. General:
1. Install in main building chilled and hot water piping systems and elsewhere as shown on
the Drawings.
2. Integrating flowmeters must have the following characteristics:
a. Uses the transit-time principle of ultrasonic flow metering.
b. Flow sensors that are portable, clamp-on type and that do not come in contact with
the fluid or protrude into the flow path.
3. Flow element shall be installed in a straight run of pipe in accordance to manufacturer’s

guidelines for the specific installation in order to maintain rated accuracy.
B. Flow Stations:
1. Flow stations shall consist of dual flow sensors and carriers mounted in the transverse
arrangement with laminated or metal identification tag on chain giving pipe size, meter
series, and station identification.
2. Maximum fluid operating ranges:
a. Pressure: 0 to 150 psig.
b. Temperature: 32 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
3. Flow stations shall be of steel construction.

C. Flow Meter:
1. Provide a hand-held, portable meter that instantaneously displays flow and/or changes in
flow by means of a high-visibility, integral, backlit LCD, dual channel (one for chilled
water, the other for steam condensate or hot water as noted on Drawings) that displays
instantaneous flow rate in GPM and total gallons. Charts and tables are not acceptable.
2. Each channel shall have dual outputs for each of the displayed values. Outputs shall be
4– 20 mA and TTL pulse rate, each proportional to display values.
3. Meter shall have positive zero flow indication.
4. Meter shall be complete with adequate lengths of flow cables attached to sensors, with
installation and operating instructions.
5. Meter shall be capable of interfacing with and delivering a signal to the building
automation system.
2.10 FLEXIBLE HOSE
A. Furnish and install Metal flex flexible hose connectors. Hose and braid shall be bronze and male
fittings shall be steel.
B. Install connector in a straight line without offset. Piping shall be supported so that connector
does not carry pipe load.
C. Install in line without twisting connector.
D. For pipe sizes ½ inch to 2 inches only.
E.
2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Application: Provide pressure gauges as indicated on Drawings; 4-½ inch face diameter with 0.5
percent accuracy of full span, Grade 2A, ANSI B40.1.
B. Gauge Ranges:
1. Provide 0 - 160 psi gauges for 150 psi chilled/hot water service.
2. Provide 0 – 300 psi gauges for 300 psi, chilled/hot water service.
3. Provide 0 - 200 psi gauges for domestic cold water service.
4. Provide 0 – 150 psi gauges for condenser water and generator cooling water service.
5. Provide liquid glycerin filled compound pressure gauges with a graduation ratio of 30 psi
to 30 inches of mercury across basket strainer at suction of condensing water pump.
C. For each gauge, provide bronze gauge lock and globe type bleed valve:
1. Similar to Jenkins 750, Crane 362E, Stockham B-66, Powell 120 or accepted substitution
of the pressure rating for the system installed.

2.12 THERMOMETERS
A. Placement: Provide, where shown on Drawings and as indicated below, thermometers of

suitable range for the service required. Provide thermometers on the inlet and outlet sides of all
coils, heat exchangers, and heat generators.
B. Furnish thermometers for services in the following ranges and divisions with English scales:
1. Domestic hot water:
a. Range: 30 to 200 degrees F.
b. Division: 1 degrees F.
2. Heating hot water and generator cooling water:
3. Chilled water:
4. Condenser water:
C. Sockets: Provide thermometer sockets at all thermometer locations. Provide thermometer

sockets only, fitted with plug and chain and conforming to the requirements specified for
thermometers. Install all sockets vertical or at a 45-degree vertical angle to permit filling with
conducting liquid for tests.
D. Construction: Provide thermometers that are 9 inches long with an etched glass enclosed scale
of 2-degree increments, a cast aluminum case, and red reading mercury. Furnish an adjustable,
angle-type scale with a swivel nut connection into ¾-inch brass separable sockets. Use a 3-1/2
inch stem length for all pipe sizes up through 8 inches, a 6-inch stem length for 10 inch pipe size,
and a 9-inch stem length for pipe sizes larger than 10 inches.
E. Extensions: Where thermometers are installed in insulated lines, use extension-neck separable
sockets.
F. Remote Thermostats: Furnish remote bulb thermometers where specified and shown. Provide
thermometers with corrosion-resistant movements set in cast aluminum cases with black enamel
finish.
1. Furnish dials 4-½ inches in diameter, with black numbers on white dials.
2. Use copper capillary tubing protected by a spiral or double-braided bronze armor.

2.13 PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS
A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast iron body, flanged for over 2 inches, rated for 125 psig working
pressure with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16-inch diameter openings, disposable fine
mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream and
removable for cleaning.
B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gauge tapping inside.
C. Provide mated flanges at all pump suctions.
2.14 STRAINERS
A. 2 inches and smaller: Screwed brass or iron body, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel
perforated screen. 150 psi or 300 psi pressure rating to match system pressure.
B. 2-1/2 inches to 4 inches: Flanged iron body, Y pattern with 3/64 inch, screen body to be all 316
stainless steel construction and SS perforated screen with internal supports resistant to high
differential pressure. 150 psi or 300 psi pressure rating to match system pressure.
C. Over 4 inches: Flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch , screen body to be all 316
stainless steel construction and SS perforated screen with internal supports resistant to high
differential pressure. 150 psi or 300 psi pressure rating to match system pressure.
2.15 DIRT SEPERATORS
A. Furnish and install In- Line type flanged steel Dirt Separator suitable for a maximum pressure of
10 bar and more according to system static pressure and 110°C operating temperature and sized
for the full capacity /flow.
B. The entering velocities not to exceed 1.2 m/s at a specified flow rate. Units specifically designed
for high-velocity systems may have an entering velocity of up to 3.0 meters per second and shall
be used in case of pipe size or space constraint.
C. The separator must confirm to design as per Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU article 4
paragraph 3
D. The vessel shell diameter to be of a larger cross-section than the inlet/outlet pipe diameter to
reduce the flow speed in the separator. Inlet and outlet to be full size.
E. The core element is a tube mesh construction made of copper wire and the flow to be guided
through an area with a greater cross-section than the connection dimensions in order to reduce
the flow. The ensuing turbulence caused by the tube mesh causes heavy materials to move in an
undetermined direction. Depending on the volumfleow, density, and volume, parts of these
sludge particles are supported in their natural breakaway motion and guided to the bottom
section of the casing. The capacity to capture large amounts of sludge results in longer intervals
before cleaning becomes necessary.
F. Magnetic removal can be boosted by insertion of Exferro high-performance magnets. The Dirt
separator shall be able to remove effectively dirt particles down to 5 microns.
G. The units shall be designed to prevent clogging and to maintain a constant pressure drop across
the unit irrespective of the amount of dirt trapped.

H. Demountable flanged unit shall be provided at the bottom in which the lower section can be
opened completely for cleaning and inspecting the internal mechanism
I. At the top of the venting chamber shall be an integral full port float actuated brass venting
mechanism / automatic air vent.
2.16 DYNAMIC PRESSURIZATION UNIT
A. Supply and install pump controlled dynamic pressurization unit with integrated automatic water
make-up and de-aeration system for heating & cooling water systems.
B. The unit shall be two pumps and two spill valve units for maintaining system pressure. The two
stainless steel multi-stage pumps shall act as duty/standby/assist with automatic run-time change
over sequences. Both pumps shall be provided with individual adjustable soft start /stop
function.
C. They shall be two electrically actuated fail safe spill ball valves with duty/standby/assist function.
Due to the self-optimizing feature of the spill valves, in operational modes, the valves open in
terms of percentage and will continuously adapt to the current system pressure and shall not be
affected by dirt volume in the inlet strainers. The use of solenoid valves and/or mechanical valves
for the unit spill function is not allowed to avoid the pressure peaks.
D. A safety relief valve shall be included and set at 5 bar to act as a pressure safe guard for the
primary and secondary vessels which must have a design pressure of 6 bar. This safety relief
valve is exclusively provided for the above-indicated purpose and is not to be considered as a
safety relief for the connected HVAC system which must be equipped with proper safety relief
valves which are adapted to the maximum allowed system pressure
E. The unit shall be mounted on a base permitting an easy assembly on site and shall be provided
with inlet strainers/pump check valve and lockshield ball valves for individual isolation and system
connection lines.
F. The device shall have EC marking and suitable for use in surroundings where a low sound level
is required.
G. The system pressure is required to be monitored through a microprocessor controller. The control
unit shall read the system pressure via a pressure transducer and shall maintain the system
pressure within the close tolerance limit of +/- 0.2 bar.
H. The microprocessor control panel shall feature a touch TFT colour display which is integrated into
a sturdy plastic cabinet (IP 54 protection class). As standard directly mounted on the hydraulic
unit
I. Communication facilities shall consisting of:
• resistive colour touchscreen,

• two RS485 interface provisions for data exchange and BMS connection,
• Interface for BMS modules
• Volt-free output for common fault signaling
• Two electrically isolated analog outputs for system pressure and water content of the
expansion vessel (for level control type),
• Input terminal for the evaluation of a contact water meter pulse.

J. Featuring in detail:
• Main power switch on the cabinet exterior,

• Adjustable pump soft start and sequence control,
• Facilities for wiring arrangement and easily made connection,
• Available space for additional modules.
K. The microprocessor control panel is a fully automatic and freely programmable control with
touchscreen operation. Displayed on a functional diagram are the active operating mode,
common alarm, low water level, the functioning of the pump, spill valve and make-up valve.
L. Combined graphical and plain text indications for system pressure, the content of the expansion
vessel and all operating & error messages. These messages can be transferred to BMS system
using the different modules according to the BMS protocol compatibility such as LonWorks
Digital, LonWorks, Profi Bus DP, Ethernet, BACnet- IP, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU, Profibus
RTU, I/O modules
M. The control panel shall have a parameter and error memory. This way the last 20 error messages
can be chronologically displayed with an indication of date and time of occurrence. In case of
error message occurs, the root cause & remedy shall be displayed on the control unit screen.
N. The degassing of a partial flow of the installation water shall be processed according to an
optimized time schedule with selected table degassing programmes. After a period of continuous
degassing (adjustable and depending on the installation volume) at the start up, the control shall
switch automatically to an economic mode (interval degassing).
O. When the water make-up is activated, the motorised makeup valve shall open to allow the water
to accumulate in expansion vessel. An error message will be triggered, if the water make-up
cycle goes over a time limit and/or if the number of make-up cycles is exceeded over a given
period. This will result in an error message in both cases and interruption.
P. Vessel: Supply and install bladder type expansion vessel - unpressurized built and tested
according to EN 13831 and EU pressure equipment directive 2014/108/EC.
Q. The vessel shall be manufactured of steel with external, anti-corrosion paint protection. The high
quality of butyl bladder shall be used to prevent the vessel contents from permeation of oxygen.
The vessel shall be equipped with an electrode connected to a relay to indicate any
rupture/damage to the bladder.
R. Vessel shall be supplied 2 x flexible connection set to suit the hydraulic module, automatic air
vent with non- return valve to avoid the ingress of air (deaeration), level transducer (tank volume)
and swan neck (anti-vacuum). Vessels shall stand vertically with steel profile or tubular feet.
S. Buffer vessel shall be provided to compensate for minor pressure changes and prevent frequent
switching of the pump and the spill valve.
T. Supply and install pre-fabricated combined backflow preventor with contacts water meter
assembly with a valve for the direct connection of make-up units for heating and cooling systems
with the water mains.
The unit shall consist of - two isolation ball valves, - type; BA backflow preventer (RPZ valve)
according to DIN 1988/T4 (FA) respectively EN 1/17 (BA), provided with integrated dirt strainer. -
water meter with volt free pulse output, - wall bracket supplied for horizontal mounting.

The water supply line shall be fitted with a contact water meter; the total added water volume
shall be indicated on the display and an error message shall be activated in the event of
overshooting the maximum makeup volume (added up). This shall also be the case when the
established input make-up quantity exceeds against an input volume in one filling cycle, or if the
make-up system because of malfunction lets water through without being activated by the
control.
U. The size of the dynamic pressurization unit shall be calculated based on a system volume, static
head or system working pressure and permissible system temperature.
2.17 VACCUM DEGASSER
A. Supply and install vacuum degassing unit with integrated automatic refill for closed heating or
cooling systems.
B. Active and central degassing of the circuits according to the patented operating principle in a
combination of vacuum spray tube diameter/height ratio and electrically actuated ball valves.
C. Unit existing of a hydraulic part and a microprocessor control unit. It is featuring an "auto-setup"
function including a self-optimizing operation. The deaerator eliminates entirely the free gases in
the installation and withdraws up to 90% of the dissolved gases of the installation water.
D. The vacuum degassing of a partial flow of the installation water is processed according to an
optimized time schedule with selectable degassing programmes. After a period of continuous
degassing (adjustable and depending on the system water content) at the startup, the unit control
switches automatically to an economic mode (interval degassing).
E. The floor standing hydraulic component is standard provided with a discharge and with isolating
lockshield ball valves on all connection pipes Both the inlet line equipped with a strainer and the
supply for the integrated automatic water make-up are connected to three-way electrically
actuated failsafe ball valve.
F. Combined use of solenoid valves and mechanical pressure reducers or balancing valves which
require manual adjustment is not acceptable to serve this purpose. In operational modes, the unit
will continuously adapt to the current system pressure. After each period of 24 hours, the control
unit will start an eight-step optimizing cycle in order to secure the optimum position of the
electrically actuated ball valve. Consequently, the degassing process will not be influenced by
flow obstruction caused by dirt deposit in the inlet strainer nor by variation of the system medium
viscosity due to e.g. variable system flow temperature.
G. Possibility to connect the make-up supply to the water mains or to a break tank (eventually also
for glycol mixture make-up). The vacuum spray tube, which has an optimal diameter/height ratio,
is manufactured from stainless steel and has an EC approval mark.
H. The stainless steel multistage pump discharge is connected to a modulating electrically actuated
ball valve with position optimization through the microprocessor control unit.
I. The microprocessor control panel shall feature a touch TFT colour display which is integrated into
a sturdy plastic cabinet (IP 54 protection class). As standard directly mounted on the hydraulic
unit.

J. Communication facilities shall consisting of:
 resistive colour touchscreen,

 two RS485 interface provisions for data exchange and BMS connection,
 Interface for BMS modules
 Volt-free output for common fault signaling
 Two electrically isolated analog outputs for system pressure and water content of the
expansion vessel (for level control type),
 Input terminal for the evaluation of a contact water meter pulse.
K. Featuring in detail:
• Main power switch on the cabinet exterior,

• Adjustable pump soft start and sequence control,
• Facilities for wiring arrangement and easily made connection,
• Available space for additional modules.
L. The microprocessor control panel shall be a fully automatic and freely programmable control with
touchscreen operation. Displayed on a functional diagram are the active operating mode,
common alarm, low water level, the functioning of the pump, spill valve and make-up valve.
M. Combined graphical and plain text indications for system pressure, the content of the expansion
vessel and all operating & error messages. These messages can be transferred to BMS system
using the different modules according to the BMS protocol compatibility such as LonWorks
Digital, LonWorks, Profi Bus DP, Ethernet, BACnet- IP, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU, Profibus
RTU, I/O modules
N. The control panel shall have a parameter and error memory. This way the last 20 error messages
can be chronologically displayed with an indication of date and time of occurrence. In case of
error message occurs, the root cause & remedy shall be displayed on the control unit screen.
O. When the water make-up is activated, an error message will be triggered if the water make-up
cycle goes over a time limit and/or if the number of make-up cycles is exceeded over a given
period. This will result in an error message in both cases and interruption.
P. In case the water supply line is fitted with a contact water meter, also the total added water
volume is indicated on the display and an error message is activated in the event of overshooting
the maximum make-up volume (added up). This is also the case when the established input
make-up quantity is exceeded against an input volume in one filling cycle, or if the make-up
system because of malfunction lets water through without being activated by the control.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Flush and clean expansion tanks prior to delivery to the Project Site, and keep sealed during
construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Support expansion tanks from building structure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide automatic air vents at system high points and as indicated.
E. Provide manual air vents at entrance to all heating hot water coils, with a "cane" shaped
discharge tube, positioned to permit draining to a portable receptacle.
F. For automatic air vents in above-ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, extend vent tubing
to nearest drain.
G. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect as shown on
Drawings.
H. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
I. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove
temporary strainers after cleaning systems. Clean all permanent strainers after circulating
systems for a minimum of 48 hours at full capacity.
J. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
K. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low-pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers,
and expansion tanks.
L. Select system relief valve capacity so that capacity is greater than make-up pressure reducing
valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.
M. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.
N. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual
vent areas.
O. Install all pressure gauges so that they are easily readable.
P. Provide glycerin-filled compound pressure gauge upstream and downstream of each strainer.
Q. Provide liquid glycerin-filled gauges across all pumps and air compressors of ranges indicated
above. This does not include control air compressor.
R. Pressure gauges need not be furnished across in-the-line circulators. Where air compressors
and receivers are for control air only, standard 2-inch instrument gauges will be acceptable.
Equip stem gauges with coil siphons.
S. Valve bodies and /or piping components that meet ISO 6509 and ASTM B858 made with
dezincification resistant brass alloy designated with acronym (DZR) do not require dielectric
unions on piping installations with dissimilar metals.

SECTION 23 21 23
HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping & Equipment’s
B. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Control of HVAC
C. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping
D. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operation for HVAC Control
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Split-coupled, Vertical in-line centrifugal pumps.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating
characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type
of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
23 21 23 Hydronic pumps Rev.00 Page 1 of 7

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
A. Source Limitations: Supply factory assembled and tested hydronic pump sets from a single
source.
B. Retain first paragraph below to allow drawing details based on one manufacturer's product to
establish requirements and still allow competition. Coordinate with Division 01 requirements.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic
pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements.
D. Equipment Schedules are for guidance and information only, and are calculated based on
assumed equipment pressure drops. The exact pump head based on the pipe run and the
offered equipment shall be carefully checked and re-calculated for each pump and approved by
the the Engineer before ordering the equipment. Pump sets shall each be complete with pump
casing, impellers, electric motors and all necessary accessories to form a complete installation
and shall be from a single manufacturer.
E. The pump pressure rating to be minimum 1.35 times the system working pressure and as per
ANSI/HI standard.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces
and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra materials may not be allowed for publicly funded projects.
B. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.
1.10 PUMP HEAD
A. "Pump-heads shown in the schedules are only approximate values. The Contractor shall
calculate total pressure-drop and arrive at the required pump-head before ordering the pumps
and shall submit the calculation for approval of the Engineer. The required pump and motor
h.p. shall be provided without additional costs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from the

approved manufacturer’s list.
2.2 SPLIT-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, Split-coupled, in-

line pump designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted vertically. Rate pump
for maximum working pressure and a continuous water temperature based on system working
pressure.
B. Pump Construction:
1. The vertical inline pump shall encompass an initial design point of __USgpm (Lps, M³/h)
at ____ feet (m) head. The vertical inline pump shall also be capable of supplying
____USgpm (Lps, M³/h) at ____ feet (m) head at ___% minimum efficiency level at
maximum operating speed. Impeller: ASTMB 84, cast bronze; statically and balanced,
keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified
performance.
2. The Vertical In-Line (VIL) pump, single stage, single or double suction type, with pump
characteristics which provide rising heads to shut off, shall be supplied with a ___hp,
TEFC 50/3/___V, IEC Premium® efficiency motor and a unit mounted VFD with a IP55
enclosure.
3. The drive shall be integrated with the motor for a self-contained pump, motor and drive
combination to ensure optimum component matching and protection from motor
overloading at any operating point within the design or operating envelope. The Variable
flow pumps shall be selected right hand side of the best efficiency point to ensure
compliance to ASHRAE 90.1 standards of 70% Energy savings at 50% load.
4. The Pump Construction: Pump Casing - Cast Iron with PN16 flanges for working
pressure to 175 psig (12 bar) at 150°F (65°C) and Ductile Iron with PN25 flanges for
working pressures to 375 psig (25 bar) at 150°F (65°C). Suction and discharge
connections shall be flanged and the same size and shall be drilled and tapped for seal
flush and gauge connections.
5. Impeller - Bronze, fully enclosed type. Dynamically balanced. Two-plane balancing is
required where installed impeller diameter is less than 6 times the impeller width.
6. Shaft - Provide Stainless Steel pump shaft.
7. Coupling - Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminium alloy. Coupling to be designed to
be easily removed on site to reveal a space between the pump and motor shafts
sufficient to remove all mechanical seal components for servicing and replacement

without disturbing other components of the pump or motor. The coupling shall be
provided with a fully enclosed ANSI B15.1 Sect 8 and OSHA 1910.219 compliant guard.
8. The Mechanical Seals - Shall be Stainless Steel multi-spring outside balanced type with
Viton® secondary seal, carbon rotating face and silicon carbide stationary seat. Provide
a 316 stainless steel gland plate. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent to
purge air prior to pump start-up.
9. The All split coupled pumps shall be provided with a lower seal chamber throttle bushing
to ensure seals maintain positively cooling and lubrication. Seal flush line accessories, if
required to improve seal chamber cleanliness: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical
seal a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, to suit the working pressure
encountered. Filters shall be changed, by the installing contractor, after system is
flushed and on a regular basis until turned over to the owner. Alternately, a
maintenance-free accessory needing pump differential pressures exceeding 70 ft./30
psig/200 kPa for effective operation: Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a
maintenance-free sediment separator, with sight flow indicator.
10. The All Pumps used for Condenser Water application shall be provided with automatic
flush line cyclone separator.
C. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated;
and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Motor shall be compatible with VFD drive where
applicable. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
D. Integrated Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
Fundamental Requirements:
1. VFD shall be of the VVC-PWM type providing near unity displacement power factor (cos
φ) without the need for external power factor correction capacitors at all loads and
speeds.
2. VFD shall incorporate DC link chokes for the reduction of mains borne harmonic currents
to reduce the DC link ripple current thereby increasing the DC link capacitors lifetime.
3. VFD shall be UL and C-UL Listed & CE Marked showing compliance with both the EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC.
4. RFI filters shall be incorporated within the drive to ensure it meets the emission and
immunity requirements of EN61800-3 to the 1st Environment Class C1 (EN55011
unrestricted sales class B).
5. VFD and Motor Protection:

VFD and motor protection shall include: motor phase to phase fault, motor phase to
ground fault, loss of supply phase, over voltage, under voltage, motor over temperature,
inverter overload, over current. Over current is not allowed ensuring units will not
overload the motor at any point in the operating range of the unit.
6. User Interface:
VFD shall incorporate an integrated graphical / touch screen user interface that shall
provide running and diagnostic information and identify faults and status in clear English
language. Faults shall be logged / recorded for interrogation at a later date.
7. It shall be possible to upload parameters from one VFD into the non-volatile memory of a
computer and download the parameters into other drives requiring the same settings.

8. The keypad shall incorporate Hand-Off-Auto pushbuttons to enable switching between

BMS and manual control.
9. Sensorless Control Algorithm:

Sensorless control software shall be embedded in the IVS unit to provide automatic
speed control in variable volume systems without the need for pump mounted
(internal/external) or remotely mounted differential pressure sensor. The default
operating mode under Sensorless Control shall be ‘quadratic pressure control’ whereby
head reduction with reducing flow will be according to a quadratic control curve. Control
mode setting and minimum / maximum head set-points shall be user adjustable via the
inbuilt programming interface.
10. Serial Communications:

The VFD shall incorporate a USB port for direct connection to a PC and an RS485
connection with Modbus RTU protocol. Optional protocols available should include
Lonworks and BACnet.
11. Other Control Features:

 The VFD shall have the following additional features:
 Sensorless override for BMS
 Manual pump control or closed loop PID control
 Programmable skip frequencies and adjustable switching frequency for noise /
vibration control
 Auto alarm reset
 Motor pre-heat function
 Six programmable digital inputs
 Two analogue inputs
 One programmable analogue / digital output
 Two volt-free contacts.
12. Integrated pumps should have WiFi capabality to connect Active performance
management-cloud based subscription service that enables and proactively tracks and
manages pump performance and provides early diagnostic warnings, web accessible
trends and analysis along with automated reports. Integrated pumps with flow meter
capability-FLOW INFORMS, to provide transparency on the system, meet building
demand and improve the chiller plant efficiency.
E. Pump Fittings:
1. Suction Guides:
a. Furnish and install on the suction of each pump a Suction Guide, with Outlet Flow
Stabilizing Guide Vanes, removable Stainless Steel Strainer and Fine Mesh Start-up
Strainer.
b. For 10 bar flanged pipe Supply valve with cast Iron body with PN`16 flanged ports.
c. The mechanical contractor shall inspect the strainer prior to activating the pump and,
further, shall remove the Fine Mesh Start-up Strainer after a short running period. (24
hours maximum). Space shall be provided for removal of the Strainer and connection of
a Blow-down Valve.
F. Flo-Trex Valves
a. Furnish and install on the discharge side of each pump a triple duty / Combination Valve.
Each valve is to incorporate the following three functions in one body: Tight shut-off,
spring-closure type silent non-slam check and effective throttling with flow measurement
capability. The body shall have (2) 1/4” NPT connections on each side of the valve seat.
Two connections to have brass pressure and temperature metering ports, with Nordel
check valves and gasketed caps. Two other connections to be supplied with brass drain
plugs. Metering ports are to be interchangeable with drain ports to allow for
measurement flexibility when installed in tight locations. The valve disc shall be bronze
plug & disc type with high impact engineered resin seat to ensure tight shut-off and silent
check operation.
b. The valve stem shall be stainless steel with flat surfaces provided for adjustment with
open-end wrench.
c. Flange adapters, where necessary, are to be PN16 cast iron flanges with anti rotation
lugs and EPT gaskets.
d. (For 10 bar flanges) Valve body shall be Cast Iron with PN16 flanged ports.
e. The valve shall be selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions and be suitable for the pressure and temperature specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of sufficient
size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or
supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 23 Section
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps
with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers
with vertical-limit stop of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are
specified in Division 21 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping
and Equipment." Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers
and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment/Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."

3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
E. Install check valve and throttling valve and shutoff valve on discharge side of pumps.
F. Install pressure guages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-guage tapping, or
install single guage with multiple input selector valves.
G. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration
and Training."

SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof curbs, piping supports, and roof
penetration boots.
2. Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for
sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
4. Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports of HVAC piping and Equipment’s" for pipe
supports and installation requirements.
5. Division 23 Section "Identification of HVAC Piping and Equipment’s" for labeling and
identifying refrigerant piping.
6. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for thermometers and
pressure gages.
7. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control devices for HVAC" for thermostats,
controllers, automatic-control valves, and sensors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion valves,
solenoid valves, and pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and
fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil
traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show
interface and spatial relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size piping and design the actual
piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to
ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
And in accordance with approved manufacturer for VRF system.
C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
E. ASTM Standard: Comply with ASTM B 280
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system components
with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
D. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
through fire and smoke barriers.
E. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: Two each, containing everything required to conduct one
test.
2. Refrigerant: Two containers each, with 9 kg of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: Three of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.
C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver)
F. Flexible Connectors: 500-psig (3450-kPa) minimum operating pressure; seamless tin-

bronze core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, and solder-joint end connections;
dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180mm long
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, seamless black steel.
B. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for welded joints.
C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, steel, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets,
butt-welded end connection, and raised face.
D. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa working pressure, 165 deg C maximum operating temperature;
2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper tubing; forged-steel flanges
for DN 25 to DN 40 and ductile iron for DN 50 to DN 80 with 4 plated-steel bolts, with silicon
bronze nuts and fiber gasket; and having factory-applied, rust-resistant coating on flanges
and bolts.
E. Flexible connectors: 3450-kPa minimum operating pressure; stainless-steel core and high-
tensile stainless-steel-braid covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: With thread-end connections.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: With flanged-end connections.
2.3 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa working pressure and 135 deg C working
temperature; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern; forged-brass or bronze
body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and
handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, and with solder-end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa working pressure and 135 deg C working temperature;
forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating,
rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, and with solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves Smaller Than DN 25: 2760-kPa operating pressure and 141 deg C operating
temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, polytetrafluoroethylene seat, and
stainless-steel spring; globe design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with solder-end
connections.

D. Check Valves, DN 25 and Larger: 2760-kPa operating pressure and 141 deg C operating
temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-brass bolted bonnet; floating
piston with mechanically retained polytetrafluoroethylene seat disc. Valve shall be
straight- through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa pressure rating; forged-brass body with copper stubs, brass
caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, and with solder-end connections.
F. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760; 121 deg C temperature rating and 2760-kPa
working pressure; forged brass, with polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat, 2-way, straight-
through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; fitted with suitable
NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location, with 16-GRC conduit adapter and 24 /
220V holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast
bronze, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc standard coil, and
wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; suitable for refrigerant specified.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Comply with ARI 770; direct acting, brass; with pilot operator,
stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connection; suitable for refrigerant
specified.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight-through or angle pattern, brass body and disc, neoprene
seat, and factory sealed and ASME labeled for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750; brass body with stainless-steel
parts; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating type; size and operating characteristics as
recommended by manufacturer of evaporator, and factory set for superheat requirements;
solder-end connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas
bypass line, and external equalizer line.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Pulsating-dampening design, stainless-steel bellows and

polytetrafluoroethylene valve seat; adjustable; sized for capacity equal to last step of
compressor unloading; with solder-end connections.
2.4 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALITIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa working pressure; forged-brass or steel body

with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen of 80 to 100 mesh in liquid lines
up to 30 mm, 60 mesh in larger liquid lines, and 40 mesh in suction lines; with screwed
cleanout plug and solder-end connections.
B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa maximum working pressure and 93 deg C operating

temperature; all-brass body with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-
coded moisture indicator; with solder-end connections.
C. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa maximum working pressure; heavy gage

protected with corrosion-resistant-painted steel shell, flanged ring and spring, ductile-iron
cover plate with steel cap screws; wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; with
replaceable-core kit, including gaskets and the following:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ARI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant
with integral gaskets.
D. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2410-kPa maximum operating pressure and 107 deg C maximum
operating temperature; steel shell and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections;
molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
E. Mufflers: 3450-kPa operating pressure, welded-steel construction with fusible plug; sized
for refrigeration capacity.
2.5 RECEIVERS
A. Receivers, 150-mm Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed, 2760-kPa
pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. Receivers Larger Than 150-mm Diameter: ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII; 2760-kPa pressure
rating, with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level
indicator.
2.6 REFRIGERANTS
A. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-407c
C. ASHRAE 34, R-410a
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Aboveground, within Building: [Type B drawn-copper tubing.
B. Belowground for DN 50 and Smaller: Type B annealed-copper tubing.
A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of

compressor, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on each side of strainers.
B. Install check valves in compressor discharge lines and in condenser liquid lines on multiple
condenser systems.

C. Install packed-angle valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and thermostatic
expansion valve for system charging.
D. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in
liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around each dryer.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
1. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

2. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections. Coordinate
electrical requirements and connections.
G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to evaporator.
1. If refrigerant distributors are used, install them directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
4. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-
line pressure at bulb location.
H. Install pressure-regulating and pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe
pressure relief valve discharge to outside.
3.3 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream from each automatic valve, including expansion
valves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.
C. Install strainers in main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are
used.
D. Install strainers in suction line of steel pipe.
E. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
F. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers; pipe discharge to outdoors.
G. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before
each solenoid valve.
H. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic

compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
I. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line
when system shuts down.
J. Install receivers, sized to accommodate pump-down charge, on systems 17.5 kW and larger
and on systems with long piping runs.
K. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors.
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and approved manufacturer of VRF

system.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized
to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
F. Belowground, install copper tubing in protective conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from
compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I. Install bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN 50.
J. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and

expansion valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
K. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems,
seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near expansion valve bulb.
L. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 20 Section "Hangers and
Supports."
M. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6.0 m long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6.0 m or longer.
3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 6.0 m or longer, supported by a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Braze joints according to Division 20 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
scale formation.
A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Engage Testing and Inspection Agency to do and certify the necessary tests in
accordance with international standards and approved manufacturer of VRF system.
2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.
3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower of
the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and low
side of system.
a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration
of test.
b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine
solution over joint.
c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 1035 kPa or higher as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results
are achieved.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled-water controllers to the system
design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves, except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check compressor-motor alignment, and lubricate motors and bearings.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
B. Replace core of filter-dryer after system has been adjusted and design flow rates and
pressures are established.

3.9 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 67 Pa. If
vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa.
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-operating
charge.

SECTION 23 25 00
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water treatment systems for the following:
1. Chilled water piping (closed loop system).

2. Cooling water Piping (Open Loop System)
1.3 MANUAL CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed Loop System: One bypass feeder on each system with isolating and drain valves
downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by

test.
1.4 AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The automatic dosing unit shall provide a reliable continuous dosing of metered amounts of
chemical. The system shall be capable of operating in both automatic and manual modes of
operation.
B. Dosing pumps shall be duty and standby pumps with automatic duty change-over on failure
and with equal run-time operation. The switch over to the standby pump shall be
automatically controlled and monitored by the BMS.
C. The dosing pumps shall be of the mechanically or hydraulically operated piton diaphragm
reciprocating type, driven by an electric motor.
D. The manual stroke adjustment shall incorporate a calibrated dial (0-100%) to facilitate
presetting and shall be capable of adjustment regardless of whether the pump is operating
or not. Alternatively the pumps are to incorporate digital indication of the set rate.
E. Metering accuracy of the pumps shall be better than 2.5% of the set rate at a variable
suction head.
F. Adjustable back pressure valves shall be incorporated on each discharge line from the
dosing pumps to maintain dosing accuracy over the range of operating depths in the storage
tank.
23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment Rev.00 Page 1 of 11

G. Suction strainers with maximum opening of 1mm shall be provided.
H. Dosing pumps shall be fitted with a pressure relief valve with a return line to the suction
side.
I. Water hammer arrestor shall be provided in the discharge pipework from the dosing pump
and shall be suitably sized for the displacement of the pump so that discharge pressure
fluctuation does not exceed 10%. The water hammer arrestor shall have a diaphragm
separating the air chamber from the liquid chamber. The air chamber shall be pressurized
and capable of re-pressurizing by an air pump via a Schrader valve. A pressure gauge shall
be installed.
J. Drain valves shall be provided on the suction and discharge sides of the dosing pumps for
flushing and draining.
K. Automatic isolation ball valves shall be provided. The valve shall consist of 2 separate
modules, the valve body and the actuator. The actuator shall be monitored and controlled by
the BMS.
L. A pressure gauge shall be provided on the discharge side of the dosing pumps.
M. A chemical flow meter shall be installed in each common dosing line. There should be
sufficient upstream and downstream straight pipe run to prevent flow disturbances affecting
the flow meter. The dosing flow meter shall be calibrated to unit liter per hour.
N. Chemical dosing lines shall be pipe in pipe arrangement to prevent and contamination to the
environment, soil or groundwater.
A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build up of scale and
biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a hazard to
operating personnel or the environment.
B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project

site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics, and functional performance
characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of
1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling to
sustain the water characteristics provided by chemical consultant.
2. Open System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling to
sustain the water characteristics provided by chemical consultant.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at
project site.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
C. Provide MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) for all furnished chemicals.

A. Water Treatment Vendor Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized

representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for analysis and maintenance of
chemical treatment program required for this project.
B. The water treatment vendor shall provide the following services, equipment, and chemicals.
1. Obtain water samples at job site to determine required treatment. Provide thermal
and hydrodynamic review of the proposed treatment system piping routing and
equipment characteristics, to preclude thermal degradation of materials excessive
chemical feed pump discharge or suction pressure and siphoning of chemicals.
Provide report outlining water analysis with shop drawing submission
2. Provide all chemicals, corrosion coupons and testing equipment, as described in the
following paragraphs.
3. Provide all chemicals required for cleaning and flushing the systems affected by the
construction, for initially filling these systems, and for maintaining these systems at
proper concentration levels required for effective, efficient operation of the
mechanical equipment for a period of one year after the acceptance of the project by
the Owner. Fouling factors shall be maintained at 0.0005 on all heat exchange
surfaces and algae shall be maintained at levels of no appreciative build-up.
4. Provide all water chemical treatment equipment as required to implement the
chemical treatment programs specified. All chemical treatment equipment shall
become the property of the Owner.
5. Instruct HVAC Contractor on installation of feeding equipment.
6. Provide services by an experienced chemical engineer to: direct flushing, cleaning
and/or disinfection, pretreatment, metal passivation, startup and debugging
operations; direct and perform chemical control tests during construction period.
7. Provide the Engineer with three (3) sets of complete written instructions in shop
manual format for chemical feeding and test procedures.
8. Demonstrate to the Owner the proper application of the written instructions.
9. Direct and perform chemical limit control during construction period and monitor
systems for a period of 12 months after acceptance, including not less than 6 service
calls and written status reports. Obtain samples from all systems, examine corrosion
coupons from each system at least once every two months (seven samples), analyze
these samples and furnish written report and recommendations to the Engineer.
10. If a system must be drained for any reason, it shall be treated immediately upon
being refilled.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum
conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the
chilled water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period
of one year from date of Substantial Completion, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 25 percent of amount initially installed. Extra

chemicals shall not be used during Defect’s Liability Period and shall be furnished at
the end of this period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel
shutoff valve on top, air release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating
shutoff valves on sides.
1. Capacity: 19 L.
2. Working Pressure: 1725 kPa.
2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for
testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity
and for calcium hardness field tests.
2.3 CHEMICALS
A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.
B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.
C. Biocides: Two alternate non-oxidizing micro-biocides with different bill mechanisms.
D. Closed Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust
pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
E. Inhibitor: Provide sodium nitrite / borate based inhibitor. The nitrite water treatment shall be
liquid treatment; it is the intent to maintain a nitrite level of 1000 ppm in the chilled water
system. Shot feed manually. Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water treatment
laboratory.
F. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH range of 8.0 to
10.5.
G. Corrosion Coupons: Install a minimum of eight (8) black carbon steel type per ASTM 2688-
D method to simulate corrosion. Locate coupons in locations deemed to reflect the most
corrosive system condition.

H. Guarantee:
1. Protect various dissimilar materials of construction.

2. Corrosion rate of ferrous metals shall not exceed 1.0 mils penetration per year.
3. Treatment system shall not permit fouling to cause equipment capacity reduction
beyond the allowed 0.0005 "fouling factor."
2.4 AUTOMATIC DOSING SYSTEM FOR CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
A. Fully Automatic dosing systems for corrosion / scale inhibitor & biocide dosing shall be
provided for chilled water closed system as follows.
B. Positive Displacement Diaphragm pumps: Duplex (duty/standby), self priming, rated

for intended chemical with 25 % percent safety factory for design pressure and
temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate
2. Thermoplastic construction
3. Fully enclosed, continuous duty, 230 V, 50 Hz single phase motor
4. Built - in relief valve.
C. Chemical solution Tanks: Chemical - resistant reservoirs fabricated from high density
opaque polyethylene with graduated markings.
D. Moulded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator and liquid -level switch
1. Capacity - 230 litres
E. AGITATOR
1. Direct drive,1360 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment. Fully enclosed,
continuous duty.
2. Stainless steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and propeller.
F. SOLUTION METERING PUMP
1. Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable flow rate, thermoplastic

construction, continuous-duty fully enclosed electric motor and drive, and built-in relief
valve.
G. LIQUID LEVEL SWITCH
1. Polypropylene housing with integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for
connection to metering pump, and low level alarm.
H. CONDUCTIVITY CONTROLLER
1. Packaged monitor controller with solid state circuiting, five percent accuracy, linear
dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control function
light, output to control circuit and recorder.
I. WATER METER
1. Displacement type cold water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive,
impulse contact register, single pole, double throw dry contact switch.

J. SOLENOID VALVES
1. Forged brass body globe pattern, normally open or closed as required, explosion-
proof and watertight solenoid enclosure, and continuous duty coil.
K. TIMERS
1. Electronic timers, infinitely adjustable over full range, 150 second and five minute
range, mounted together in cabinet with hands-off-automatic switches and status
lights.
L. TEST EQUIPMENT
1. Manufacturers:
2. Provide white enamel test cabinet with local and fluorescent light, capable of
accommodating 4 - 10 ml zeroing titrating burettes and associated reagents.
3. Provide the following test kits:
a. Alkalinity titration test kit.

b. Chloride titration test kit.
c. Sulphite titration test kit.
d. Total hardness titration test kit.
e. Low phosphate test kit.
f. Conductivity bridge, range 0 - 10,000 micro-ohms.
g. Creosol red pH slide complete with reagent.
h. Portable electronic conductivity meter.
i. High nitrite test kit.
2.5 AUTOMATIC DOSING SYSTEM FOR CONDENSER WATER (COOLING TOWERS)
A. Provide automatic condenser water control systems for inhibitor feed, blow-down and
biocide feeds. Inhibitor application shall be meter activated, blow-down shall be conductivity
activated, and biocide shall be meter fed with blow-down locked out to ensure biocide
retention time.
B. Control system shall incorporate solid state integrated circuits and digital LED displays, in
NEMA-12 steel enclosure. Provide gasketed and lockable door.
C. Base dissolved solids control on conductivity and include:
1. LED digital readout display (micro-ohm/cm).

2. Temperature compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
3. High, low, normal conductance indicator lights (LED).
4. High or low conductance alarm light (flash or steady switch), trip points field
adjustable. Flash or steady switch shall have silence position.
5. Illuminated legend shall indicate "ALARM" whenever alarm condition exists.
6. Hand-off-automatic switch for solenoid bleed valve.
7. Illuminated legend shall indicate "BLEED" when valve is operated.
8. Adjustable hysteresis or dead-band (internal).
D. Base inhibitor feed control on make-up volume and include:
1. Solid state counter (1-15 field selectable).

2. Solid state timer (adjustable 1/4 to 5 minutes).
3. Test switch.
4. Hand-off-automatic switch for chemical pump.

5. Illuminated legend shall indicate "FEED" when pump is activated.
6. Solid state lock-out timer (adjustable 1/4 to 3 hours) and indicator light. Lock-out timer
shall deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
7. Panel totaliser (amount of makeup), electro-mechanical type.
E. Biocide programmer to include:
1. 24 hour timer with 14 day skip feature to permit activation any hour of the day.
2. Precision solid state bleed lock-out timer(0-9 hours) and biocide pump timer (0 - 2-1/4
hours), clockcontrolled.
3. Solid state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations.
4. Digital display of the time of day (24 hours).
5. LED display of day of week (14 days).
6. Fast and slow clock set controls (internal).
7. Battery back-up so clock is not disturbed by power outages, quartz timekeeping
accuracy.
8. Hand-off-automatic switches for biocide pumps.
9. Illuminated legend shall indicate "BIOCIDE A" or "BIOCIDE B" when pump is
activated.
F. Provide water meter on system make-up, wired to control system.
G. Provide solution pumps to feed sequestering agent and corrosion inhibitor from solution tank
into condenser water supply to tower. Provide agitator as required.
H. Provide conductivity controller to sample condenser water and operate 25 mm solenoid

bleed valve and piping to blow-down controller sampler wired to open when condensing
water pump is operating.
I. Introduce biocide to tower by continuous feed with solution pump or solenoid valve on tank
(chlorine).
J. Provide liquid level switch in each solution tank to de-activate solution pump and agitator,
and signal mechanical alarm system; refer to Section 23 0913.
K. Provide 19 mm water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test
specimens.
2.6 CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT
A. Final disinfection shall be effected by chlorination of the filtered water. Chlorination shall be
provided by a modular sodium hypochlorite injection unit. The chlorine solution shall be
produced using granular sodium hypochlorite batched in a mixing tank. Dosing shall be
carried out by pumping from the dosing tank into the filter outlet pressure line prior to
discharge into clear water tank.
B. The chlorination system shall be design to provide a residual free chlorine level of 0.2-0.3
mg/L at all times. mg/l is expected to be required with a maximum rate of 1.0 mg/l. The
dosing rates of the pumps as well as the dosing tank size are given on the Contract
Drawings.
C. In case the proposed residual concentration of free chlorine is not high enough to prevent
re-growth of bacteria in the most distant parts of the distribution system, the proposed
equipment shall be able to increase it up to approximately 1 mg/l without causing any taste
or health problems for the consumers located close to the clear water tank.
D. Chlorination units shall be sized for an average chlorine dosage rate of 0.5 mg/l and
maximum dosage rate of 1.0 mg/l.
E. The right residual chlorine concentration after disinfection at the Water Treatment Plant
Chlorine dosing unit shall be set and later evaluated by increasing the concentration step-
wise and checking the last service point within the distribution network for residual chlorine.
If trace amounts of free chlorine are detectable in the most distant supply point, safe
operation of the whole distribution network is ensured.
F. The modular sodium hypochloride injection dosing equipment is to be installed as a

complete unit consisting of the following components:
1. Dosing pumps (1 duty + 1 stand-by).

2. Dosing Controller
3. Dosing tank
4. Electrical agitator
5. Suction line with foot valve, filter, PVC tube etc
6. Level switch controller for dry run protection with cable for empty signal Pulsation
damper
7. Pressure retention valve
8. Injection unit
9. Accessories (overflow, drain, inlet valves, pipework etc)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical
treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical

equipment.
D. Final Fill and Inhibition
1. Passivation process chemicals are to be added while the system remains full and
circulating. The cleaning chemicals used must be compatible with the chemicals to be
used for final inhibition of the system. The passivation chemicals are to be circulated
for a period of between 16 to 24 hours.

2. Biocide chemical is to be added to the chilled water system. The chilled water system
is to be left full and circulating while all valves and strainer meshes are reinstalled. On
completion, the system is to be restored to the normal operational state.
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Inspect field assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water treatment system.
B. Test chemical feed piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory
test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory results
are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.5 HIGH VELOCITY FLUSH PROCEDURE
A. The chilled water system is to undergo a high velocity flush to remove all loose debris. The
flush will be a once through process without circulation of the flushing water. With the
closure of isolating valves the chilled water system will be subdivided into sections if
required, each of which is to receive a full flush for 30 minutes, or until the water runs clear.
At the end of each flush, the open section of the system should be valved off and the next
section opened ready for the flush to proceed. This process should continue until all parts of
the system have been flushed.
1. Complete system to be filled with potable water and vented.

2. The removal of general contaminant from the system will be achieved by using a
dynamic balanced flushing procedure. The objective of this program is to obtain
flushing velocities throughout the entire system that will be sufficient to remove
contaminants and loose particles.
3. The flushing velocities will be achieved by utilizing the installed circuit pumps. The
number of pumps running will depend on the amount of the circuit being flushed.
4. Flushing will be achieved by running the system pumps and drawing water to drain,
but only at the rate at which raw water is introduced. At all times the system pressure
will be maintained at such a level so as to exceed the static head. The system will not
be drained during the dynamic flushing, to prevent the induction of air, which could
accelerate the rate of corrosion, and also lead to air locks.
5. The aim of the flushing process will be to initially remove all large debris from the pipe
work. Continually rotate the pumps during this process so the strainers can be
cleaned. Measure and record the velocities. Clean the strainers if the flow
decreases. Set the main isolating valves to create a balanced flush. Continue
flushing until the water quality is at acceptable levels as determined by the
independent water treatment company.
6. Check all strainer screens within the system at regular intervals during the flushing
process until the screens no longer show any signs of contaminant.
3.6 DEGREASE PROCESS
A. An alkaline degreasant is to be added and circulated for a minimum of 12 hours. The chilled
°
water may be heated to a maximum temperature of 50 C if required for this process.
Checks for adequate circulation are to be carried out by taking up to four water samples
from around the system, and measuring pH levels. Further checks should be carried out by
measurement of pipe temperatures in each circuit by means of touch thermometers. On
completion, the system water is to be pumped back to the effluent storage vessel for
disposal. The system is then to be refilled and vented.
B. A high velocity flush process is to be carried out, in order to remove the products of the
degrease process. On completion the system is then drained, refilled and vented.
3.7 SURFACE OXIDE REMOVAL STAGE
A. Superior Dispersant and Stabilizer are to be introduced to the system, which is shall be
suitable to remove free iron in the system without damaging the system materials. The
°
water may be heated to a temperature not exceeding 50 C. In order to ensure complete
circulation of the chemical, water samples are to be taken and pipe surface temperature
measured. To allow analysis of pH levels, water samples are to be taken from up to four
sampling points around the system. These are to be checked for dissolved iron levels.
When iron levels are seen to plateau, water circulation is to be continued for a further two
(2) hours. On completion, the system water is to be pumped back to the effluent storage
vessel for disposal. The system is then to be refilled and vented.
B. A final high velocity flush is to be carried out. The system is then to be refilled and vented.
3.8 ADJUSTING
B. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two

separate water analyses to prove that chemical feed systems are maintaining water quality
within performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analyses at least 60
days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to operate, and maintain HVAC water treatment objectives.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and water chemistry schedules.
B. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
C. Acceptance Criteria:

1. The TDS levels achieved at the end of each high velocity flush are not greater than
10% above the incoming mains water.
2. The velocities during each high velocity flushing stage are in excess of 3 m/s in the
largest pipe in the system;
3. Iron levels recorded during the iron removal stage are below 5 ppm.
D. Schedule at least eight hours of training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven
days’ advance notice.
E. Furnish a one year service program by a qualified service person, performing service on a
full time basis. At least six service calls will be scheduled. Coordinate with the Owner as to
the day of the month the service will be performed. On completion of a service call, a copy
of the service report will be given to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
23 25 00

SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCT AND CASING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Provide materials and installation for complete first class HVAC systems; install ductwork,
flexible duct, hangers, supports, sleeves, flashings, vent flues, and all necessary accessories
as indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide any supplementary items necessary for
proper installation that make the systems operable, code compliant and acceptable to the
1. ASHRAE - Handbook of Fundamentals; Duct Design.
2. ASHRAE - Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment; Duct Construction.
3. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
4. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
5. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
Strip.
6. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the
Hot-Dip Process.
7. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality.
8. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casing Rev.00 Page 1 of 14

9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
10. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
11. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
12. SMACNA – HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
13. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
14. Engineering Design Manual for Air Handling Systems, United McGill Corporation (UMC).
15. Engineering Report No. 132 (Spacing of Duct Hangers), UMC.
1.04 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Company shall have minimum three years documented experience specializing in performing
the work of this section.
B. Installation of HVAC systems shall be performed by qualified duct man.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Pressure
1. 2 inch W.G. Pressure Class: Ductwork systems up to 2 inch w.g. positive or negative
static pressure with velocities less than or equal to 1500 fpm.
B. Medium Pressure
1. 3 inch W.G. Pressure Class: Ductwork systems over 2 inch w.g. and up to 3 inch w.g.
positive or negative static pressure with velocities less than or equal to 2500 fpm.
C. High Pressure
positive or negative static pressure with velocities greater than 2500 fpm.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide the following information for each sheet metal system furnished on the Project:
a. System name and type.
b. Duct system design pressure.
c. Duct material.

d. Duct gage.
e. Transverse joint methods.
f. Longitudinal seam type.
g. Sealant type.
h. SMACNA rectangular reinforcement type.
i. SMACNA intermediate reinforcement type.
j. SMACNA transverse reinforcement type.
1. Submit Shop Drawings on all items of ductwork, plenums, and casings including
construction details and accessories specified herein in accordance with Division 01.
Ductwork construction details and materials used for duct sealant, flexible connections,
etc. shall be submitted and approved prior to the fabrication of any ductwork.
2. [Option if no Shop Drawings are required: Prepare Shop Drawings for the purpose of
coordination with other trades including structural, piping, plumbing, electrical, lighting,
and architectural. When Shop Drawings are not required to be submitted for the Project,
field sketches and shop tickets must be available to the Owner upon request. Changes
required during construction to accommodate coordination issues will be performed at no
additional cost to the Owner.]
3. Draw ductwork Shop Drawings on minimum 1/4 inch equal to one foot scale building floor
plans and shall indicate duct sizes, material, insulation type, locations of transverse joints,
fittings, ductwork bottom elevation, offsets, ductwork specialties, fire and fire/smoke
dampers, and other information required for coordination with other trades. Clearly
designate fire and fire/smoke partitions on the Shop Drawings. Detail Drawings for
mechanical rooms and air handling unit locations shall be submitted at a minimum scale
of 1/4 inch equal to one foot.
4. Coordinate with all other trades and building construction prior to submitting Shop
Drawings for review. Indicate location of all supply, return, exhaust, and light fixtures from
approved reflected ceiling plans on Shop Drawings.
A. Deliver products to the Project Site and store and protect products under provisions of
Division 01 and Division 20.
B. Protect materials from rust both before and after installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. All ductwork shown on the Drawings, specified or required for the air conditioning and
ventilating systems shall be constructed and erected in a first class workmanlike manner.

B. The Work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the Project Substantial
Completion date against noise, chatter, whistling, vibration, and free from pulsation under all
conditions of operation. After the system is in operation, should these defects occur, they
shall be corrected as directed by the Owner at Contractor’s expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
2.02 APPLICATION
A. Ductwork systems shall be constructed in accordance with the following Materials as a

minimum standard. Refer to Drawings for any deviation from this Table.
MINIMUM PRESSURE
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
CLASSIFICATION (1)
Supply and Return Systems:
Untreated Outside Air Intake (Louver) Extruded Aluminum Low Pressure
to AHU Plenum
Treated Outside Air to AHU Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
Single Zone FCU Supply Galvanized Steel Low Pressure
Single Zone AHU Supply Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
Mixed Air (AHU Plenum) Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
AHU Discharge/Vertical Supply Riser Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
Vertical Supply Riser to Terminal Unit Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
Return Air Device to Return Distribution Galvanized Steel (2) Low Pressure
Return Air Distribution Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
Return Air Distribution/Vertical Riser Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
Exhaust Systems:
Exhaust Air Device to Exhaust Galvanized Steel (2) Low Pressure
Distribution
Exhaust Air Distribution Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
General Exhaust Vertical Riser to Fan Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure
B. Notes to Table:
1. Positive pressure unless noted otherwise in Table.
2. Air device connections may be made with insulated flexible duct as specified herein.

2.03 DUCTWORK MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION
A. All ductwork indicated on the Drawings, specified or required for the air conditioning and
ventilating systems shall be of materials as hereinafter specified unless indicated otherwise
on Drawings. All air distribution ductwork shall be fabricated, erected, supported, etc., in
accordance with all applicable standards of SMACNA where such standards do not conflict
with NFPA 90A and where class of construction equals or exceeds that noted herein.
B. Ductwork shall be constructed of G-90 coated galvanized steel of ASTM A653 and A924
Standards.
C. Minimum gage of round, oval or rectangular ductwork shall be 26 gage per SMACNA
Standards.
D. All duct sizes shown on the Drawings are clear inside dimensions. Allowance shall be made
for internal lining, where specified, to provide the required free area.
E. All holes in ducts for damper rods and other necessary devices shall be either drilled or
machine punched (not pin punched), and shall not be any larger than necessary. All duct
openings shall be provided with sheet metal caps if the openings are to be left unconnected
for future connections/phases, otherwise plastic covers are acceptable.
F. Except for specific duct applications specified herein, all sheet metal shall be constructed
from prime galvanized steel sheets and/or coils up to 60 inches in width. Each sheet shall be
stenciled with manufacturer's name and gage.
G. Sheet metal must conform to SMACNA sheet metal tolerances as outlined in SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
H. Where ducts are exposed to view (including equipment rooms) and where ducts pass through
walls, floors or ceilings; furnish and install sheet metal collars around the duct.
I. Spin-in fittings shall be as specified under Section 23 33 00 – Ductwork Accessories.
J. Duct Sealing: All ductwork, regardless of system pressure classification, shall be sealed in
accordance with Seal Class A, as referenced in SMACNA Standards. All transverse joints,
longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed.
1. All seams and joints in shop and field fabricated ductwork shall be sealed by applying one
layer of sealant, then immediately spanning the joint with a single layer of 3 inches wide
open weave fiberglass scrim tape. Sufficient additional sealant shall then be applied to
completely embed the cloth.
2. Sealant shall be water based latex UL 181A-M sealant with flame spread of 0 and smoke
developed of 0. Sealants shall be Hard Cast Iron Grip 601, Ductmate Pro Seal, Foster
32-19, Childers CP-146 or Design Polymerics DP 1010.
3. Scrim tape shall be fiberglass open weave tape, 3 inches wide, with maximum 20/10
thread count, similar to Hardcast FS-150.
4. Sealer shall be rated by the manufacturer and shall be suitable for use at the system
pressure classification of applicable ductwork.
5. Except as noted, oil or solvent-based sealants are specifically prohibited.

6. For exterior applications, “Uni-Weather” solvent-based sealant, or Foster 32-19 shall be

used.
2.04 RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCTWORK
A. Metal gages listed in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible Duct,
are the minimum gages which shall be used. Select metal gage heavy enough to withstand
the physical abuse of the installation. In no case shall ductwork be less than 26 gage per
SMACNA Standards.
B. All longitudinal seams for rectangular duct shall be selected for the specified material and
pressure classification. Seams shall be as referenced in SMACNA Standards.
C. Longitudinal seams in laboratory hood exhaust ducts shall be welded.
D. All transverse joints and intermediate reinforcement on rectangular duct shall be as shown in
SMACNA Standards. Transverse joints shall be selected consistent with the specified
pressure classification, material, and other provisions for proper assembly of ductwork.
E. Spiral round duct and fittings shall be as manufactured by United McGill Sheet Metal
Company or approved equivalent. All fittings shall be factory fabricated, machine formed and
welded from galvanized sheet metal.
F. Joints in spiral duct and fittings shall be assembled, suspended, sealed, and taped per
manufacturer’s published assembly and installation instructions.
G. Contractor may use DUCTMATE or Ward Industries coupling system, as an option, on

rectangular ductwork. The DUCTMATE or Ward Industries system shall be installed in strict
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
H. Rectangular ductwork field fabricated offsets shall not exceed 30 degrees.
2.05 FLAT OVAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. Oval ducts shall be spiral flat oval or welded flat oval equivalent to those of United McGill
Sheet Metal Company with gage and reinforcing as recommended by the manufacturer. Duct
may be shop fabricated of completely welded construction in accordance with SMACNA
Standards.
B. Oval ducts greater than 24 inch x 72 inch shall be longitudinal seam, flat oval duct, rolled,
welded and provided in standard lengths of 5 and 10 feet. Transverse joints shall be factory
welded or field connected with flanges or slip couplings. Duct will be fabricated from
galvanized steel meeting ASTM A 527 standards.
C. Duct reinforcing angles shall be of sizes specified for same size rectangular duct. Galvanized
angles shall be used where standing seams are specified for rectangular duct.
D. Oval fittings shall comply with requirements, sealing, etc., similar to that specified for round
ductwork. Manifolding taps may be permitted without increasing the length of run in the
branch duct system.
E. Elbows in oval ducts may be smooth long radius or 5-piece 90-degree elbows and 3-piece 45-
degree elbows. Joints in sectional elbows shall be sealed as specified for duct sealing.

2.06 CONICAL BELLMOUTH FITTINGS AND TAPS
A. Conical bellmouth fittings shall be made from 26-gage G-90 coated galvanized steell. Two-
piece construction with a minimum overall length of 6 inches and factory sealed for high-
pressure requirements. Average of loss coefficient for sizes 6, 8 and 10 shall be less than
0.055.
B. Provide each fitting with minimum 24-gage damper plate with locking quadrant operator and
sealed end bearings. Damper blade shall be securely attached to shaft to prevent damper
form rotating around shaft. Shaft shall be extended to clear insulation.
C. Provide a flange and gasket with adhesive peel-back paper for ease of application. The
fittings shall be further secured by sheet metal screws spaced evenly at no more than 4
inches on center with a minimum of four (4) screws per fitting.
D. Conical bellmouth fittings shall be “AIR-TITE”.
2.07 CASINGS AND PLENUMS - 2 INCH W.G. PRESSURE CLASS
A. All 2 inch w.g. pressure class casings and plenums for mixed air plenums shall be
constructed in accordance with SMACNA Standards.
B. All casings shall enclose the filter and automatic dampers as shown on the Drawings.
Casings shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal erected with three-foot center maximum
standing seams reinforced with ¼-inch bars. The casing shall be stiffened on three-foot
centers maximum with angle irons tack welded in place.
C. All openings to the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent any air leakage. Access doors
shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and shall be air tight, double skin insulated
construction with frames welded in place. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with #390 Ventlok
gasketing and equipped with fasteners equal to Ventlok #310 latches and #370 hinges that
can be operated from both the inside and the outside.
D. Casings shall be anchored by the use of angle irons sealed and bolted to the curb and floor of
the apparatus casing. Casings shall be tested and provided tight at a pressure of three
inches water column.
E. Insulate per Section 23 07 13.
2.08 CASINGS AND PLENUMS – 6 INCH W.G. PRESSURE CLASS
A. Shall enclose filters and automatic dampers at air handling unit systems. Casings shall be
constructed of cellular, standing seam panels with 3 inch deep reinforced “hat” sections as
manufactured by metal deck manufacturers and as described in SMACNA Standards.
B. All openings to the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent air leakage. Install access
doors for easy access to equipment. Access doors shall be air tight, double skin insulated
construction with frames welded in place. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with #390 Ventlok
gasketing and equipped with fasteners equal to Ventlok #310 latches that can be operated
from both the inside and outside. Hinges shall be equivalent to Ventlok #370.
C. Anchor casing by the use of galvanized angle irons sealed and bolted to the curb and floor of
the apparatus casing as indicated in SMACNA Standards.

D. A fan discharge diffuser plate shall be located on the fan discharge and shall be constructed
of 10 gage steel perforated plate installed in 6 inch channel iron frames (8.2#) rigidly
supported to withstand the fan discharge velocity. Perforations shall be 3/8 inch (0.375 inch)
staggered on 11/16 inch centers (27 percent open area). One section shall be hinged to
provide an access door between the discharge side of the fan and the entering side of the
coils. After fabrication of the diffuser plate, coat with rust-resistant paint. After installation,
touch up diffuser plate and paint channel iron frames with rust-resistant paint.
E. Provide sufficient access openings to allow access for maintenance of all parts of the
apparatus. Access door size shall be as large as feasible for the duty required.
F. Insulate per Section 23 07 13.
2.09 ELBOWS RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Construct elbows as follows in order of preference:
1. Long radius, unvaned elbows.
2. Short radius, single thickness vaned elbows.
3. Rectangular, double thickness vaned elbows.
B. Long radius elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than one and one-half (1-1/2)
times the duct width. Short radius elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than one
times the duct width.
C. Contractor shall have the option to substitute short radius vaned elbows, but shall request the
substitution at the time of submittal of Product Data.
D. Provide turning vanes in all rectangular elbows and offsets.
E. Job fabricated turning vanes, if used, shall be fabricated of the same gage and type of
material as the duct in which they are installed. Vanes must be fabricated for same angle as
duct offset. Submit Shop Drawings on factory fabricated and job fabricated turning vanes.
F. All turning vanes shall be anchored to the cheeks of the elbow in such a way that the cheeks
will not breathe at the surfaces where the vanes touch the cheeks. In most cases, this will
necessitate the installation of an angle iron support on the outside of the cheek parallel to the
line of the turning vanes.
G. In 90-degree turns that are over 12 inches wide in the plane of the turn, provide and install
double thickness vanes on integral side rails. For ducts under 12 inches in width, use single
thickness vanes. The installation of the turning vanes shall be as described for single
thickness vanes. On other types of turns or elbows, single thickness trailing edge vanes shall
be used.
2.10 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be used where flexible duct connections are shown on the Drawings to air
distribution devices and terminal units and as scheduled under “Ductwork System
Applications.
B. Acoustical Flexible Duct to Diffusers, Grilles, and Terminal Units:

1. Maximum flex duct length 6’-0” (six feet), installed with no more than 90 degrees of bend
to diffusers and grilles. Where longer duct runs or more bends are necessary, provide
rigid round ductwork.
2. Maximum flex duct length 2’-0” (two feet), installed as a straight run to the inlet of the
terminal units.
3. Acoustical flexible duct shall be manufactured with an acoustically rated CPE inner film as
the core fabric, mechanically locked by a corrosion-resistant galvanized steel helix.
4. Core shall be factory pre-insulated with a total thermal performance of R-3.5 or greater.
Outer jacket shall be a fire retardant polyethylene vapor barrier jacket with a perm rating
not greater than 0.10 per ASTM E 96, Procedure A.
5. Duct shall be rated for a minimum positive working pressure of 6 inches w.g. and a
negative working pressure of 4 inches w.g. minimum.
6. Temperature range shall be –20 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
7. Duct must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed and labeled by
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as Class I Air Duct, Standard 181, and meet GSA, FHA
standards; flame spread less than 25; smoke developed less than 50.
8. Acoustical flexible duct shall be similar to Flexmaster Type 8M for construction and
acoustical performance standards.
C. Metal Flexible Duct:
1. May be used for terminal unit connections from sheet metal ductwork where shown on the
Drawings.
2. Maximum length 2’-0” (two feet), installed in straight runs only. Where longer duct runs or
direction changes are necessary, provide rigid round ductwork.
3. Duct shall be constructed of 0.005 inch thick 3003-H14 aluminum alloy in accordance with
ASTM B209. Duct shall be spiral wound into a tube and spiral corrugated to provide
strength and flexibility.
4. Core shall be factory pre-insulated with a total thermal performance of R-3.5 or greater.
Outer jacket shall be fire retardant metalized vapor barrier jacket of fiberglass reinforced
aluminum foil, with a permeance rating not greater then 0.05 per ASTM E96, Procedure
A.
5. The duct shall be rated for a minimum positive and negative working pressure of 10 inch
w.g.
6. Temperature range shall be –40 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
7. Duct must comply with the latest NFPA Bulletin 90A and be listed and labeled by
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., as Class I Air Duct, Standard 181, and meet GSA, FHA;
flame spread less than 25; smoke developed less than 50.
8. Metal flexible duct shall be similar to Flexmaster triple lock Type TL-M.

2.11 FIRE RATED DUCT
1. Where ductwork passes between fire compartments and cannot be protected by the use
of fire dampers then the ductwork shall be constructed to meet the fire resistance value of
the highest value structure through which it passes. Compliance with the standards shall
be applicable to the ductwork system as a whole including brackets, supports, jointing and
sealing within structures.
2. The ductwork system shall be type tested in accordance with BS 476 Part 24 and shall
meet the requirements for stability, integrity and insulation applicable to the service
provided, i.e. smoke extract, kitchen extract etc. Unless advised otherwise the air
temperature applicable to the BS 476 Part 24 test shall be to the ISO 834 fire curve. The
temperature at which the fan will operate will not vary the BS 476 Part 24 test temperature
mentioned previously.
3. Ductwork shall also be required to meet the requirements of BS 5588 Part 9. External
insulation where exposed to view within any area of the building shall be further protected
with a sheet steel covering which shall resist impacts, as defined in BS 5588, Part 9.
2.12 KITCHEN EXTRACT DUCT
1. All grease exhaust ducts shall be fabricated to the requirements of SMACNA, ASHRAE,
NFPA, and shall be sloped towards the hood. All grease ducts shall be constructed of 16
ga mild steel (external liquid tight welds) and covered with Flamebar coating for 2hr. fire
rating. The entire duct system including the hangers shall be certified by Flamebar and
also shall bear the approval of UL and FM. Provide 50 mm foil faced mineral wool
insulation around all grease exhaust ducts and cover 0.7 mm aluminum jacketing.
Provide cleanouts and access per NFPA 96.
2. Ductwork for use as kitchen extract shall generally be constructed in accordance with
NFPA 96 and SMACNA with the following additional requirements:
a. Ductwork routing shall avoid undue changes of direction, sets or bends.
b. The internal joints shall be arranged such that raw edges do not oppose the airflow.
c. All mechanical fixings shall be such that the interior surfaces are smooth and safe
for hand access.
d. No fire dampers are to be added to the system.
3. Ductwork shall be fabricated to form low points in horizontal runs to collect condensation
and cleaning water. Low points shall be provided with drains which shall be male iron
connections, with blanks. Water bars shall be provided to ensure water is directed to the
various low points. Provision shall be made for injecting steam / detergent cleaning
devices within the ductwork between access openings.
4. Where ductwork passes through fire separated zones the ductwork system shall be as
described under the clauses for fire protected ductwork.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
C. Cleanliness:
1. Before installing ductwork, wipe ductwork to a visibly clean condition.
2. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork and duct taps to prevent construction dust or contaminants from entering
ductwork system. Seal ends of ductwork prior to installation to keep ductwork interior
clean. Remove closures only for installation of the next duct section.
3. For ductwork supplying Clean Rooms, Operating Rooms and other Critical Care areas,
sanitize ductwork with a biocidal agent EPA approved for HVAC systems immediately
prior to sealing ductwork.
4. During duration of construction, maintain the integrity of all temporary closures until air
systems are activated.
D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers, controllers and

other devices. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete
with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings
are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. Sleeve of
pitot tube opening shall be no more than one inch long. Opening shall be one inch wide to
accept pitot tube.
E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
F. Slope underground ducts to plenums or low pump out points at 1:500. Provide access doors
for inspection.
G. Coat buried, metal ductwork without factory jacket with one coat and seams and joints with
additional coat of asphalt base protective coating.
H. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static pressure
holds door in closed position.
I. Provide residue traps in kitchen hood exhaust ducts at base of vertical risers with provisions
for cleanout. Use stainless steel for ductwork exposed to view and stainless steel for ducts
where concealed.
J. All visible welds in ductwork between biosafety cabinets, canopy hoods and fume hoods and
the ceiling shall be ground and polished.
K. Slope duct toward grilles for moisture-laden ducts. Provide drain and trap at elbow of main
moisture exhaust duct system.

L. Project inspector shall be notified to inspect all field fabricated offsets before cover-up or
external insulation is applied.
M. Flexible Duct:
1. The terminal ends of the duct core shall be secured by compression coupling or stainless
steel worm gear type clamp.
2. Fittings on terminal units and on sheet metal duct shall have flexible duct core slipped
over duct and coupling or clamp tightened, then connection sealed with sealant.
Insulation of flexible duct shall be slipped over connection to point where insulation abuts
terminal unit or insulation on duct.
3. These insulation connections shall be sealed by embedding fiberglass tape in the sealant
and coating with more sealant to provide a vapor barrier.
N. Support flexible ducts as per SMACNA standards to prevent sags, kinks and to have 90
degree turns.
O. Hangers and Supports:
1. All ductwork supports shall be in accordance with Table 4-1 (rectangular duct) and Table
4-2 (round duct) of the SMACNA Standards, with all supports directly anchored to the
building structure.
2. Rectangular duct shall have at least one pair of supports on minimum 8’-0" (eight feet)
centers. All horizontal round and flat oval ducts shall have ducts hangers spaced 10’-0"
(ten feet) maximum.
3. Lower attachment of hanger to duct shall be in accordance with Table 4-4 of the
SMACNA Standards.
4. Vertical ducts shall be supported where they pass through the floor lines with 1-1/2 inch x
1-1/2 inch x 1/4 inch angles for duct widths up to 60 inches. Above 60 inches in width, the
angles must be increased in strength and sized on an individual basis considering space
requirements.
5. Hanger straps on duct widths 60 inches and under shall lap under the duct a minimum of
1 inch and have minimum of one fastening screw on the bottom and two on the sides.
6. Hanger straps on duct widths over 60 inches shall be bolted to duct reinforcing with 3/8
inch bolts minimum.
3.02 DUCTWORK SYSTEM CLEANING
A. If the system has been operated without scheduled filters or if the integrity of temporary
closures has been compromised, Contractor shall have ductwork cleaned according to
National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards by a Certified Regular Member of
the NADCA.
1. For ductwork supplying Clean Rooms or patient care areas, also sanitize the ductwork
interior per NADCA standards with a biocidal agent approved by the EPA for use in HVAC
Systems.

B. Before turning the installation over to the Owner, Contractor shall certify that the air handling
systems have only been operated with scheduled filters in place. Otherwise, Contractor shall
present evidence that the ductwork was cleaned as required above.
3.03 TESTING
A. All medium and high pressure duct systems (positive or negative) shall be air flow tested (Air
Balancing) according to SMACNA test procedures.
1. Design pressure for testing ductwork shall be determined from the maximum pressure
generated by the fan at the nominal motor horsepower selected.
2. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed 1 percent of the total system design airflow rate.
3. When partial sections of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all
sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.
4. Leaks identified during leakage testing shall be repaired by:
a. Complete removal of the sealing materials.
b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces.
c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials.
5. The entire ductwork system shall be tested, excluding connections upstream of the
terminal units (i.e. ductwork shall be capped immediately prior to the terminal units, and
tested as described above).
6. After testing has proven that ductwork is installed and performs as specified, the terminal
units shall be connected to ductwork and connections sealed with extra care. Contractor
shall inform the Owner when joints may be visually inspected for voids, splits, or improper
sealing of the joints. If any leakage exists in the terminal unit connections/joints after the
systems have been put into service, leaks shall be repaired as specified for other leaks.
7. Fixed flow measurement devices (i.e. orifice tubes, nozzles, etc.) shall have current
calibration documentation showing that the device was verified to a National Institute Of
Standards and Technology (NIST) standard within the previous five years or as
recommended by the manufacture and be accurate to at least +/- 2% of reading.
8. Pressure measurement instrumentation (i.e. manometer) shall have current calibration

documentation showing that the device was verified to a NIST standard within the
previous year or as recommended by the manufacture. Instrumentation shall have an
accuracy of at least +/- 2% of reading and have a resolution of 2:1 with respect to the
measured pressure (i.e. resolution of 0.01 measured 0.1).
B. All low-pressure duct systems (positive or negative) shall be inspected for visible and audible
signs of leakage.
1. Leaks identified by inspection shall be repaired by:
a. Complete removal of the sealing materials.
b. Thorough cleaning of the joint surfaces.

c. Installation of multiple layers of sealing materials.
2. Discrepancies found during testing and balancing between duct traverses and
diffuser/grille readings shall result in re-inspection, repair and retest until discrepancies
are eliminated.
C. At the option of the Owner, if documented in writing, Contractor may be allowed to eliminate
testing of terminal units by capping the supply ductwork prior to the terminal units, then
inspecting the connection to the terminal units when complete. This option may only be
exercised by the Owner, only if documented in writing prior to testing.]
D. Ductwork leakage testing and/or inspection shall be performed prior to installation of external
ductwork insulation.

SECTION 23 33 00
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following ductwork accessories indicated by
the Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.
1. Airflow control dampers and spin-in fittings.
2. Fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination fire and smoke dampers.
3. Flexible duct connections.
4. Duct access doors.
5. Screens
6. Duct test holes.
7. Guy wire systems.
to this Project.
1. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
3. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
4. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.
23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

5. UL 555 – Standard for Fire Dampers.
6. UL 555C – Standard for Ceiling Dampers.
7. UL 555S – Standard for Smoke Dampers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide product data for shop fabricated assemblies including, but not limited to, volume
control dampers, duct access doors, and duct test holes. Provide product data for
hardware used.
1. Fire Dampers: The damper manufacturer’s literature submitted for approval prior to the
installation shall include performance data developed from testing in accordance with
AMCA 500D standards and shall show the pressure drops for all sizes of dampers
required at anticipated air flow rates. Maximum pressure drop through fire damper shall
not exceed 0.05-inch water gauge.
2. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: Assign identification numbers for each damper with
corresponding number noted on Drawings. Provide air quantity, size, free area of
damper, pressure drop and proposed velocity through each damper. Provide
manufacturer’s data of damper and its accessories or options. At Owner’s request,
provide two (2) dampers (18 inch x 12 inch) for the purpose of illustrating damper
operation to Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
2.2 MANUFACTURERS.
A. Please refer vendor list in General provision (Section 20 00 02)
2.3 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Furnish and install dampers where shown on the Drawings and wherever necessary for
complete control of airflow, including all supply, return, outside air, and exhaust branches,
"division" in main supply, return and exhaust ducts, and each individual air supply outlet.
Where access to dampers through a permanent suspended ceiling (gypsum board) is
necessary, the Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of the access doors.
B. Dampers larger than three (3) square feet in area shall be controlled by a self-locking splitter
damper assembly.

C. Volume damper blades shall not exceed 48 inches (48") in length or twelve inches (12") in width
and shall be of the opposed interlocking type. The blades shall be of not less than No. 16 gage
galvanized steel supported on one-half inch (1/2") diameter rust-proofed axles. Axle bearings
shall be the self-lubricating ferrule type.
D. Volume dampers and other manual dampers shall be carefully fitted, and shall be manually
controlled by damper regulators as follows:
1. On exposed un-insulated ductwork the locking quadrant shall be made with a base plate of
16-gage cold-rolled steel and a heavy die cast handle designed with a 3/8 inch bearing
surface. A 1/4 inch-20 zinc plated wing nut shall firmly lock the handle in place.
2. On exposed externally insulated ductwork the regulator shall be 4-1/4 inch diameter, for
1/2 inch rod, designed for use on duct with insulation thickness specified for duct, and
shall have four (4) 3/16 inch holes provided to rivet or screw regulator to the duct surface.
The flange that covers the raw edge of the insulation shall be high enough so that it
slightly compresses the insulation and holds insulation in place. The handle shall be 3/8
inch above the flange, and shall easily turn without roughing up the insulation.
3. On concealed ductwork above inaccessible ceilings, the regulator shall be 2-5/8 inch
diameter chromium plated cover plate that telescopes into the base, for 1/2 inch rod.
Regulator shall be cast into a box for mounting in ceilings. Base shall be 1-1/2 inch deep.
The cover shall be secured by two screws that can be easily removed for damper
adjustment.
4. Furnish and install end bearings for the damper rods on the end opposite the quadrant.
2.4 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Each fire damper shall be constructed and tested in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories
Safety Standard 555, latest edition. Dampers shall possess a 1-1/2 hour or 3 hour (as
appropriate for the construction shown in the architectural Drawings) protection rating, 160 or
165 degrees F fusible link, and shall bear a U.L. label in accordance with Underwriters'
Laboratories labeling procedures. Construct fire dampers such that damper frame material and
curtain material are galvanized.
B. Fire dampers shall be curtain blade type and damper shall be constructed so that the blades
are out of the air stream to provide 100 percent free area of duct in which the damper is
housed.
C. Equip fire dampers for vertical or horizontal installation as required by location shown on
Drawings. Install fire dampers in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles and
other material and practices as required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by
the manufacturer when the respective dampers were tested by Underwriters Laboratories.
Mounting angles shall be minimum 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 14 gage and bolted, tack welded
or screwed to the sleeve at maximum spacing of 12 inches and with a minimum of two
connections at all sides. Mounting angles shall overlap at least equal to the duct gage as
defined by the appropriate SMACNA Duct Construction Standard, latest edition, and as
described in NFPA 90A. The entire assembly, following installation, shall be capable of
withstanding 4 inch water gauge static pressure.
D. All fire dampers shall be static rated type.

E. Completely seal the damper assembly to the building components using manufacturer
recommended material(s).
2.5 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Provide one damper motor for each 12 square feet of damper area.
B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be 1-1/2 hour fire rated under UL Standard 555,
Current Edition, and shall be further classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Leakage
Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest version of UL555S, and bear a
UL label attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested and qualified with UL, a
complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this Specification. Testing
and UL qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable. The leakage rating under UL555S
shall be no higher than Leakage Class II (4 CFM per square foot at one-inch water gauge
pressure and 8 CFM per square foot at 4 inches water gauge pressure). Maximum air pressure
drop through each combination fire/smoke damper shall not exceed 0.10-inch water gauge at
the design air quantity. (Note that this may require a larger damper than the connected duct
size.) All ratings shall be dynamic.
C. Damper frame shall be minimum 20-gage galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel
shape with tabbed corners for reinforcement, as approved in testing by Underwriters
Laboratories. Bearings shall be integral high surface area non electrolytic materials
construction to incorporate a friction free frame blade lap seal, or molybdenum disulfide
impregnated stainless steel or bronze oilite sleeve type turning in an extruded hole in the frame
or an extruded frame raceway. Dampers may be either parallel or opposed blade type. Blades
shall be constructed with a minimum of 16-gage equivalent thickness. Blade edge seal material
shall be able to withstand 350 degrees F. Jamb seals shall be flexible stainless steel
compression type or lap seal type.
D. In addition to the leakage ratings specified herein, combination fire/smoke dampers and their
operators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 350 degrees F.
Electric operators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper
fabrication. Damper and operator shall be supplied as a single entity that meets all applicable
UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and operators. Manufacturer shall provide
a factory-assembled sleeve. Sleeve shall be minimum 20-gage for dampers where neither
width nor height exceeds 48 inches or 16-gage where either dimension equals or exceeds 48
inches.
E. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (open
and close) under HVAC system operation conditions, with pressures at least 4 inches water
gauge in the closed position, and 2500 fpm air velocity in the open position.
F. Each combination fire/smoke damper, except as noted hereinafter, shall be equipped with a UL
Classified fire stat/releasing device. The fire stat/releasing device shall electrically (24 VAC)
and mechanically (pneumatically) lock the damper in a closed position when the duct
temperatures exceed 165 degrees F and still allow the appropriate authority to operate the
damper as may be required for smoke control functions. Damper must be operable while the
temperature is above 350 degrees F. Actuator/operator package shall include two damper
position indicator switches linked directly to damper blade to provide capability of remotely
indicating damper position. One switch shall close when the damper is fully open, and the other
switch shall close when the damper is fully closed. The fire stat/releasing device and position
indicator switches shall be capable of interfacing electrically with the smoke detectors, building
fire alarm system, and remote indicating/control stations or building automation system (BAS).
G. Damper releasing device shall be mounted within the airstream. Device shall be activated and
the damper shall close and lock when subjected to duct temperatures in excess of
approximately 165 degrees F.
H. Motors for operation of smoke dampers shall be smoke system fail safe, spring return normally
open supplies and normally closed returns, or as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be
furnished and installed by the damper manufacturer as required by the U.L. rating mentioned
above. Motors shall be electric or pneumatic to match the type of temperature control system
specified elsewhere in this Specification. Furnish all required relays, EP switches, wiring piping
and other labor and material necessary to completely interconnect the smoke detector system.
I. Furnish each damper in a square or rectangular configuration. Furnish and install sleeves
manufactured by the approved damper manufacturer for each damper. Construct sleeves with
square or rectangular to square, rectangular, round, or oval adapters as required. Dampers
shall be installed in the sleeves in accordance with manufacturer’s U.L. installation instructions.
The entire assembly, following installation, shall operate smoothly and be capable of
withstanding 4 inch water gauge static pressure.
J. All combination fire/smoke dampers shall be dynamic type.
K. Completely seal the damper assembly to the building components using manufacturer
recommended material(s).
2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Provide one damper motor for each 12 square feet of damper area.
B. Each smoke damper shall be dynamic rated type and shall be further classified by Underwriters
Laboratories as a Leakage Rated Damper for use in smoke control systems under the latest
version of UL555S, and bear a UL label attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have
tested, and qualified with UL, a complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required
by this Specification. Testing and UL qualifying a single damper size is not acceptable.
Leakage rating under UL555S shall be no higher than Leakage Class II (4 CFM per square foot
at one-inch water gauge pressure and 8 CFM per square foot at 4 inches water gauge
pressure). Maximum air pressure drop through each smoke damper shall not exceed 0.10-inch
water gauge at the design air quantity. (Note that this may required a larger damper than the
connected duct size.) All ratings shall be dynamic.
C. Damper frame shall be minimum 0.125-inch GI formed into a structural hat channel shape with
corner braces for reinforcement, as approved in testing by Underwriters Laboratories. Bearings
shall be stainless steel sleeve type turning in an extruded hole in the frame or an extruded
frame raceway. Dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades shall be airfoil shaped double
skin construction. Blade edge seal material shall be silicone rubber designed to withstand 392
degrees F. Jamb seals shall be aluminum flexible metal compression type.
D. In addition to the leakage ratings specified herein, smoke dampers and their operators shall be
qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 350 degrees F. Pneumatic operators
shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper and
operator shall be supplied as a single entity that meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S
qualifications for both dampers and operators. Manufacturer shall provide factory-assembled
sleeve. Sleeve shall be minimum 21-gage for dampers where neither width nor heights
exceeds 48 inches or 16-gage where either dimensions equals or exceeds 48 inches.

E. As part of the UL qualification, dampers shall have demonstrated a capacity to operate (open
and close) under HVAC system operation conditions, with pressures of at least 4 inches water
gauge in the closed position, and 2000 fpm air velocity in the open position.
F. The damper must be operable while the temperature is above 250 degrees F. The
actuator/operator package shall include two damper position indicator switches linked directly to
damper blade to provide capability of remotely indicating damper position. One switch shall
close when the damper is fully open, and the other switch shall close when the damper is fully
closed. Position indicator switches shall be capable of interfacing electrically with the smoke
detectors, building fire alarm systems, and remote indicating/control stations (BAS).
G. Motors for operation of smoke dampers shall be smoke system fail safe, spring return normally
open supplies and normally closed returns, or as indicated on the Drawings, and shall be
furnished and installed by the damper manufacturer as required by the UL rating mentioned
above. Motors shall be electric or pneumatic to match the type of temperature control system
specified elsewhere in this Specification. Furnish all required relays, EP switches, wiring piping
and other labor and material necessary to completely interconnect the smoke detector system.
H. Furnish each damper in a square or rectangular configuration. Furnish and install sleeves
manufactured by the approved damper manufacturer for each damper. Construct sleeves with
square or rectangular to square, rectangular, round, or oval adapters as required. Install
dampers in the sleeves in accordance with manufacturer’s UL installation instructions. Entire
assembly, following installation, shall operate smoothly and be capable of withstand 4 inch
water guage static pressure.
I. All smoke dampers shall be dynamic type.
J. Completely seal the damper assembly to the building components.
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Where ducts connect to, flexible connections shall be made using “Flexmaster TL-M” or
“Ventglas” fabric that is temperature-resistant, fire-resistant, waterproof, mildew-resistant and
practically airtight, weighing approximately thirty ounces (30 oz.) per square yard. Ventglas is
good for connections for inside building environments where ultra-violet light is not present.
B. Material used outdoors shall be resistant to ultra-violet sunrays. There shall be a minimum of
one-half inch (1/2-inch) slack in the connections, and a minimum of two and one-half inches (2-
1/2-inch) distance between the edges of the. This does not apply to air handling units with
internal isolation. A more rugged flexible material that is resistant to ultra violet rays needs to
be used when connecting an exhaust fan or exhaust air plenum to ductwork. Mercer Rubber
supplies a more durable flex connection for outdoor use.
2.8 ACCESS DOORS
A. Furnish and install in the ductwork, hinged rectangular, pressure relief, or round "spin-in"
access doors to provide access to all fire dampers, mixed air plenums, steam reheat coils
(install upstream), automatic dampers, etc.
B. Where ductwork is insulated, access doors shall be double skin doors with one inch (1") of
insulation in the door.

C. Where duct size permits, doors shall be eighteen inches (18") by sixteen inches (16"), or
eighteen inches in diameter, and shall be provided with Camlock latches (latches are not
required in round doors).
D. Latches for rectangular doors smaller than 18 inch x 16 inch shall be Camlock
E. Doors for zone heating coils shall be Camlock, stamped, insulated access doors, minimum 10
inch x 12 inch, complete with latch and two (2) hinges, or twelve inches (12") in diameter.
F. Round access doors shall be "Inspector Series" spin-in type door as manufactured by
Flexmaster USA.
G. Doors for personnel access to ductwork shall be nominal twenty-four inches (24") in diameter.
Doors may be fabricated in a local approved sheet metal shop in accordance with SMACNA
Standards.
H. Where access doors are installed above a suspended ceiling, this Contractor shall be
responsible for the proper location of ceiling access doors.
2.9 SCREENS
A. Furnish and install screens on all duct, fan, etc., openings furnished by this Contractor which
lead to, or are located outdoors.
B. Screens shall be No. 16 gage, one-half inch (1/2") mesh in removable galvanized steel frame.
C. Provide safety screens meeting OSHA requirements for protection of maintenance personnel
on all fan inlets and fan outlets to which no ductwork is connected.
2.10 GUY WIRE SYSTEM
A. Provide 1/4-inch diameter American Aircraft Steel Cable (plastic coated) with clip for vertical
stack off utility fans on roof, with eyebolts for attachment to anchor systems on the roof.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems
where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.
D. Provide all dampers furnished by the BAS Provider in strict accordance with manufacturer’s
written installation instruction and requirements of these Specifications.
E. Provide fire dampers, and combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where
ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components. Install with required perimeter mounting
angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings
and hinges.

F. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhausts ducts where indicated. Install dampers
so that they will open freely.
G. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans
and motorized equipment. Cover connections to medium and high pressure fans with leaded
vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps.
H. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after duct mounted filters,
coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.
Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm)
size for shoulder access, and as indicated.
I. Provide duct test holes where indicated and where required for testing and balancing purposes.
1. Furnish and install Ventlok No. 699 instrument test holes in the return air duct and in the
discharge duct of each fan unit.
2. Install test holes in locations as required to measure pressure drops across each item in
the system, e.g., outside air louvers, filters, fans, coils, intermediate points in duct runs,
etc.
J. Access doors as specified elsewhere shall be provided for access to all parts of the fire and
combination fire and smoke dampers. Doors shall open not less than 90 degrees following
installation and shall be insulated type where installed in insulated ducts.
K. Install each fire and combination fire and smoke damper square and true to the building. The
installation shall not place pressure on the damper frame, but shall enclose the damper as
required by UL555 and UL555S.
3.2 TESTING
A. After each fire damper, smoke damper and combination fire and smoke damper has been
installed and sealed in their prescribed openings and prior to installation of ceilings, Contractor
shall, as directed by Owner, activate part or all dampers as required to verify “first-time” closure.
B. Activation of damper shall be accomplished by manually operating the resettable link,

disconnecting the linkage at the fire damper fusible link, and manually operating the fire/smoke
damper through the pneumatic or electronic controls as appropriate.
C. Failure of damper to close properly and smoothly on the first attempt will be cause to replace
the entire damper assembly.
D. Coordinate smoke damper system interlock requirements with the fire alarm system.

SECTION 23 33 19
DUCT SILENCERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following sound attenuators indicated by the
Contract Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.
1. Silencers.
2. Attenuators.
3. Acoustic housings.
4. Ductwork lagging.
to this Project.
C. Conform to applicable code for sound levels at Project property line.
D. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and
1. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating.
2. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
3. AMCA 302 - Application of Sound Loudness Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices.
4. AMCA 303 - Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Ducted Air Moving Devices
Recommended Typical dBA Calculation.
5. AMCA 1011 - Certified Ratings Program Acoustical Duct Silencers.
6. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels.
23 33 19 Sound Attenuators Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

7. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
8. ARI 575 - Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Rooms.
9. ASA 16 (ANSI S1.36) - Survey Methods for Determination of Sound Power Levels of
Noise Sources.
10. ASA 29 (ANSI S1.29) - Measurement and Designation of Noise Emitted by Computer
and Business Equipment.
11. ASA 47 (ANSI S1.4) - Specification for Sound Level Meters.
12. ASA 49 (ANSI S12.1) - Preparation of Standard Procedures to Determine the Noise
Emission from Sources.
13. ASA 61 (ANSI S12.10) - Computer and Business Equipment.
14. ASHRAE 68 - Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for
Fans.
15. ASHRAE Handbook - Systems Volume, Chapter "Sound and Vibration Control".
16. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission of
Building Partitions.
17. ASTM E477 – Method of Testing Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers for
Acoustical and Airflow Performance.
18. ASTM E596 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of Sound
Isolating Enclosures.
19. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASA 61 (ANSI S12.10) standards and recommendations of
ASHRAE 68.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
C. Design application of duct silencers or acoustic housings under direct supervision of a

Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed..
D. Performance Requirements:
1. Performance requirements of silencers shall be required to meet discharge sound power

levels specified by acoustical consultant and as indicated on equipment schedules.
2. Static pressure drop shall not exceed that indicated in equipment schedules.
3. External liner shall be factory-tested air–tight to a positive static pressure equal to 2

inches w.g above air handling unit rating or the rating of attached ductwork or a
maximum of 12 inches w.g.

4. Maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed those listed below by utilizing
acoustical devices as required to achieve specified sound levels.
5. Maintain rooms at following maximum sound levels, in Noise Criteria (NC) as defined by
ASHRAE Handbook and ANSI S1.8:
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Documents:
1. Submit Shop Drawings and product data that indicate the size, type, performance and
certified test reports from a nationally known qualified independent testing laboratory
corroborating the catalogue performance. Test reports shall be based on a 24 inch x 24
inch cross sectional area of each type and model required for this Project.
1. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements that maintain

integrity of sound isolation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Fabricate products in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.
C. Acoustical Fill Material:
1. Acoustical fill materials shall consist of inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density
required to obtain the specified acoustic performance and packed under not less than 5
percent compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling.
2. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof, and impart no odor into the air.
3. The incombustible acoustical filler material shall exhibit not more than the following fire
hazard classification values when tested in accordance with the Standard ASTM E-84, or
UL 723 test method:
a. Flame Spread: 25.
b. Smoke Developed: 50.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Duct Silencers:
1. Gulf Acoustics.
2. Binaire.

3. Ruskin Sound Control.
4. CMS.
5. GIMAMCO
2.3 DUCT AND AIR HANDLING SILENCERS
A. Description:
1. Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material, with Mylar
cover, and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar
construction.
B. Configuration:
1. Tubular with inner casing and liner, with absorptive aerodynamically shaped center body
with nose cone and truncated tail cone.
2. Rectangular with line splitters with radiused nose cone and contoured tails, modular.
C. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, with
[welded seams] [mastic filled lock formed], 2 inch long, 11 gage slip joints on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gage thick, perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4-lb./cu ft. density.
D. Fill Liner: 1 mil Mylar film.
2.4 RETURN AIR SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Description:
1. Duct sections with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material and inner
casing of perforated sheet metal incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
B. Configuration:
1. Rectangular, lined with inner casing with splitters with radiused nosed and contoured
tails. Mylar covering inside and extend over around the edge, and sealed with no
exposure.
C. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel with welded seams, 3-inch long,
11 gage slip joint on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gage thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber of minimum [4 lb./cu ft (64 kg/cu m)] [3 lb./cu ft (48 kg/cu m)] density.

4. Fill Liner: 1 mil (0.0254 mm) Mylar film.
2.5 EXHAUST FAN INLET SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Description:
1. Pack less type. Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, and inner casing of
perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
B. Configuration:
1. Rectangular with lined splitters with radiused nose and contoured tails.
C. Materials:
1. All Other Exhaust Systems:
a. Outer casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel, stiffened as required, with
welded seams, 2 inch long, 11 gage slip joints on both ends.
b. Inner casing and splitter: Minimum 24 gage thick perforated galvanized steel.
D. Fill: Glass fiber of minimum [4 lb./cu ft (64 kg/cu m)] [3 lb./cu ft (48 kg/cu m)] density.
2.6 SUPPLY AIR TERMINAL SOUND ATTENUATORS
A. Description:
1. Packless type. Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material,
and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar
construction.
B. Configuration:
C. Materials:
1. Outer casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel, stiffened as required, with [mastic
filled] [welded] seams, 2 inch long, 11 gage slip joints on both ends.
2. Inner casing and splitter: Minimum 24 gage thick, perforated galvanized steel.
3. Pack less type silencers shall have no acoustical fill media, no fabric material, and no
Mylar material inside perforated partitions.
2.7 EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL SOUND ATTENUATORS – FUME HOODS, BIOSAFETY

CABINETS, AND VIVARIUM BIOHAZARD EXHAUST
A. Description:
1. Packless type. Duct section with sheet metal outer casing and inner casing of perforated
sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.

B. Configuration:
C. Materials:
1. Outer casing: Minimum 22 gage thick type 304 stainless steel, stiffened as required, with
welded seams, 2 inch long, 11 gage slip joints on both ends.
2. Inner casing and splitter: Minimum 24 gage thick perforated type 304 stainless steel.
3. Fill: None allowed.
2.8 EXHAUST AIR TERMINAL SOUND ATTENUATORS – LAB GENERAL EXHAUST, VIVARIUM
GENERAL EXHAUST
A. Description:
casing of perforated sheet metal incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
B. Configuration:
C. Materials:
1. Outer casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel, stiffened as required, with [mastic
filled lock formed] [welded] seams, 2 inch long, 11 gage slip joints on both ends.
2. Inner casing and splitter: Minimum 24 gage thick perforated galvanized steel.
4. Erosion Protection Liner: Not required.
2.9 CROSS-TALK SILENCERS
A. Description:
casing of perforated sheet metal, incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
B. Configuration:
1. Rectangular, lined, inner casing, splitters with radiused nosed and contoured tails.
C. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage thick galvanized steel with [mastic filled lock formed]
[welded] seams, 3 inch long, 11 gage slip joint on both ends.
2. Inner casing and splitter: Minimum 24 gage thick, perforated galvanized steel.

4. Fill Liner: [Bounded glass fiber.] [1 mil Mylar film.]
2.10 ACOUSTIC HOUSINGS
A. Description:
1. Modular panels, including access doors and windows nominal 4 inches thick, with outer
and inner casing.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Outer Casing: Minimum [22 gage] [18 gage] thick galvanized steel
stiffened as required, with [mastic filled lock formed] [welded] seams for [internal flange
butt] [covering strip butt over], 3 inch long, 11 gage slip joint on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 22 gage thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum [4 lb/cu ft] [4-3/4 lb/cu ft] density.
4. Fill liner: [bounded glass fiber matting] [1 mil Mylar film].
5. Window: Doubled glazed with ¼ inch safety glass.
2.11 DUCTWORK LAGGING
A. Acoustic Insulation: 2 inch thick, 3 to 5 lb/cu ft density glass fiber or mineral wool.
B. Covering: Gypsum board with surface weight minimum 4 lb/sq ft.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable and local requirements, referenced standards and
C. Support duct silencers with ductwork. Refer to Sections 23 31 00 and 23 33 00.
D. Install cross-talk silencers in wall with wall penetrations caulked.
E. Lag ductwork, where indicated by wrapping with insulation and covering. Apply covering to be
airtight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork.
F. Attach ductwork to acoustic louvers with flexible duct connections. Refer to Section 23 33 00.
G. Furnish and install prefabricated silencers in ductwork systems inside air handling units where
shown on Drawings.

3.2 TESTING
A. Acoustical testing shall be determined by the “duct to a reverberation room”, as recommended by

SIW 42 Subcommittee of the American National Standards Institute. Test shall be run with air
flowing through the silencer at not less than three (3) different flow rates and also at zero (0) flow.
All ratings shall be based on test data from a nationally known, qualified, independent testing
laboratory.
B. Test methods shall eliminate effects due to end reflection vibration flaring transmission and
standing waves in the reverberant room. Air flow and pressure loss data shall be taken in
accordance with AMCA 1011, and the data shall be obtained from the same silencer used for
acoustical performance test.
C. Static pressure drop shall not exceed that indicated in equipment schedules on Drawings.

SECTION 23 34 00
HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install the following fans indicated by the Contract
Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.
1. Tubular centrifugal fans.
2. Inline centrifugal fans.
3. Tube axial.
4. Propeller.
5. Mixed flow.
6. Vane axial.
7. Motors and drives.
8. Fan accessories
to this Project.
23 34 00 HVAC Fans Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

1. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
3. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
4. ACMA 203 - Fan Application Manual - Field Performance Measurements.
5. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
6. AMCA 301 - Method of Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
7. ACMA 803 - Site Performance Test Standard - Power Plant and Industrial Fans.
8. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.
9. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal or CE
Marking
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
D. Performance Base: 50 feet above sea level.
E. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F.
F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submittal data for approval for all fans of every description furnished under this Section
of these Specifications.
a. Provide literature that indicates dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan

performance, gages and finishes of materials, electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
b. Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. The recommended range
of operation shall be stable.
c. Fans shall be capable of operating stably at reduced loads imposed by means of

variable speed drives, inlet guide vanes or controlling pitch of fan blades.

d. Data on sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.
e. Data on special coatings and construction where applicable.
f. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
g. All data on fan accessories.
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions and operating and maintenance data.
a. Submit under provisions of Division 01.
b. Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and
wiring diagrams.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01
and Division 20.
B. Accept products on Site in factory-fabricated protective containers or coverings, with factory-

installed shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
D. Check and maintain equipment on a monthly basis to ensure equipment is being stored in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommended practices. Additionally, during each check, fans
and motors shall be rotated and greased and shafts shall be left approximately 180 degrees
from that of previous month. Maintain storage records that indicate these maintenance
requirements have been met.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Fans shall be either belt or direct drive as scheduled on the Drawings.
C. Select fans such that they do not increase motor size, increase noise level, or increase tip
speed by more than 10 percent, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20 percent, from
specified criteria. Provide fans capable of accommodating static pressure variations of plus or
minus 10 percent.

D. Statically and dynamically balance fans to eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied
areas.
E. Coat all parts of fan housing, blades, etc., exposed to corrosive air stream with specified
material to handle environmental conditions.
F. Motors and Drives: Provide motors and drives as required in this Section and as scheduled on
Drawings.
G. Finishes: Provide finishes as required in this Section for manufacturer and Site-applied as
scheduled on Drawings.
H. Accessories: Provide with accessories as require in this Section and as scheduled on

Drawings.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer Vendor List in General Provision (Section 00 00 02)
2.3 TUBULAR INLINE CENTRIFUGAL
A. Backward inclined or airfoil-type centrifugal fan wheel, mounted in a tubular housing with guide
vanes for ducted, un-ducted inlet or discharge, or roof-mounted application. Direct-drive or belt-
drive as scheduled on Drawings.
B. Wheel: Single width, single inlet, steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet
flange, heavy backplate, hollow airfoil-type or backwardly inclined or curved blades welded or
riveted to flange and backplate, cast aluminum or cast steel hub riveted to backplate and keyed
to shaft with set screws and key.
C. Housing: Heavy gage steel, continuously welded for all AMCA 99 designated Classes. Provide
continuously welded vanes to straighten discharge air flow and continuously welded,
prepunched integral inlet and discharge flanges. For belt drive fans, isolate drive components
from the air stream by a continuously welded belt tunnel and a removable bearing cover.
Housing shall be adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell.
Housing and bearing supports shall be welded structural steel construction designed to prevent
vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings.
2.4 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Backward inclined centrifugal fan wheel, mounted in a rectangular housing for ducted
application. Direct-drive or belt-drive as scheduled on Drawings.
B. Wheel: Single width, single inlet, steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet
flange, heavy backplate, backwardly inclined or curved blades welded or riveted to flange and
backplate; cast aluminum or cast steel hub riveted to backplate and keyed to shaft with set
screws and key.

C. Housing: Bolted or bolted and welded steel construction with spun, aerodynamic inlet cone for
plenum-type fan wheel. Housing shall be configurable for ducted side or front discharge. Side
panels shall be removable for access to the fan wheel and bearings.
2.5 TUBE AXIAL
A. Propeller-type fan wheel, mounted in a tubular housing with no guide vanes for ducted, un-
ducted inlet or discharge, or roof-mounted application. Direct-drive or belt-drive as scheduled
on Drawings.
B. Wheel: Propeller-type, cast or extruded aluminum, or fabricated reinforced steel, factory fixed
pitch, airfoil design. Cast aluminum or cast steel hub keyed and locked to the shaft utilizing two
set screws or a taper lock bushing.
C. Housing: Heavy gage steel, continuously welded for all AMCA 99 designated Classes. For belt
drive fans, isolate the drive components from the air stream by a continuously welded belt
tunnel and a removable bearing cover. Housing shall be adequately braced, designed to
minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell. The housing and bearing supports shall be welded
structural steel construction designed to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and
bearings.
2.6 PROPELLER
A. Propeller-type fan wheel, mounted in a steel frame for wall-mounted, un-ducted inlet or
discharge application. Direct-drive or belt-drive as scheduled on Drawings.
B. Wheel: Propeller-type, shaped steel or steel reinforced aluminum blade with heavy hubs,
statically and dynamically balanced, keyed and locked to the shaft, directly connected to motor
or provided with v-belt drive.
C. Housing: One-piece square steel frame with die formed venturi orifice, mounting flanges and
supports with baked enamel finish. Bearings affixed to mounting plate permitting belt tensioning,
neoprene vibration isolation between fan assembly and mounting plate.
2.7 MIXED FLOW
A. Mixed flow-type fan wheel, mounted in a tubular housing with guide vanes for ducted, un-
ducted inlet or discharge, or roof-mounted application. Direct-drive or belt-drive as scheduled
on Drawings.
B. Wheel: Mixed flow-type, steel construction with wheel cone, spherical backplate and single
thickness cambered blades. Smooth curved, inlet cone specifically matched to the wheel. Hub
shall be steel construction keyed and locked to the shaft.
continuously welded vanes to straighten discharge air flow and continuously welded, pre-
punched integral inlet and discharge flanges. For belt drive fans, isolate the drive components

2.8 VANE AXIAL
A. Vane axial-type wheel mounted in a tubular housing with guide vanes for ducted, un-ducted
inlet or discharge, or roof-mounted application. Direct-drive or belt-drive as scheduled on
Drawings.
B. Wheel: Cast and machined aluminum rotor blades and hub with precision machined conical
section blade base and hub socket. Blade shall be manually adjustable or in-flight controllable
as scheduled on Drawings. Hub shall be keyed and attached to the shaft with a taper lock
bushing. Incorporate ball bearing counterbalanced blade and variable pitch assembly into hub
with mechanical link to casing exterior mounted actuator, or pneumatic or electric actuator
incorporated within hub.
continuously welded vanes to straighten discharge air flow and continuously welded, pre-
punched integral inlet and discharge flanges. For belt drive fans, isolate the drive components
2.9 MOTORS AND DRIVES
A. Motors: As indicated, in total compliance with Section 20 05 13 - Motors.
B. Bearings: L-10 life at 200,000 hours self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or roller bearings.
C. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, protectively coated with lubricating
oil. Provide 304 stainless steel shafts for fume hood or corrosive applications.
D. V-Belt Drives: All v-belt drives shall be designed for a minimum of 50 percent overload. Cast
iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for
motors 15 horsepower and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-
position. Fixed sheave for 20 horsepower and over. Where more than one belt is required,
matched sets shall be used. Include an additional set of drives for each fan to be used for final
adjustments. After correct speed has been determined with variable sheave, provide fixed
sheaves.
E. Belt Guards: All belt drives shall be furnished with belt guards. Fabricate to SMACNA Low
Pressure Duct Construction Standards; of 12 gage 3/4-inch diamond mesh wire screen welded
to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short
circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of
tachometer with guard in place.
2.10 FACTORY-APPLIED FINISHES
A. Wheels and Impellers: Steel components shall be finished with a thermally fused polyester
coating. Other finishes as required on Drawings
B. Housings:
1. Interior Fans: Thermally fused polyester coating for steel. Prime coating is not required
for aluminum housings.
2. Exterior (Outdoor) Fans: Prior to assembly with minimum 6 mil saltwater-resistant,

thermally-fused polyester coating (color selected by Architect). Coating is not required
for aluminum housings.
3. Corrosive Environment: Fume hood fans, prior to assembly with minimum 4 mil, high
performance epoxy or Heresite coating by fan manufacturer as appropriate for the
chemicals being handled. Provide spark-proof construction where fan handles
flammable materials.
2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with blades supported at both ends with two
permanently lubricated bearings, variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single
control lever with control shaft for double width fans and locking quadrant.
B. Inlet Bell: Bell mouth inlet fabricated of steel with flange.
C. Outlet Cones: Fabricated of steel with flanges, outlet area/inlet area ratio of 1.5/1.0, with center
pod as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Dampers: Welded steel construction consisting of two semi-circular vanes pivoted on oil
retaining bearings in short casing section, finished by hot dip galvanizing. Provide motor
actuation.
E. Thrust Restraints: Provide thrust restraints where thrust exceeds fan weight for vane and axial
fans.
F. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid. Provide where inlet or outlet are unducted.
G. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to housing with quick opening latches and gaskets.
H. Cover: Provide weatherproof cover for motor and drive where fans are exposed to the weather.
I. Extended Wiring: Provide extended wiring for electrical connection at the exterior of the unit for
all direct drive applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not operate fans for any purpose until
ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under
observation.
C. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23 05 48.
D. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 33 00 between fan inlet and discharge
ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one-inch flex between
ductwork and fan while running.

E. Install fan restraining snubbers as required. Refer to Section 23 05 48. Adjust snubbers to
prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.
F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
G. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans where indicated. Refer to Section 23
33 00.
3.2 PAINTING
A. Provide fans with factory finish in accordance with the manufacturer's standard. Touch up
scratches and marks from handling and placement of equipment with masking enamel to match
manufacturer's color.
B. Where exhaust fans are required to have epoxy or Heresite coating, have units factory finished
with required number of coats prior to shipping to the Project Site.
C. Refer to Division 09 for Site-applied finishes.

SECTION 23 34 33
AIR CURTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS................................................................................................................. 2
1.2 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................................................. 2
1.5 COORDINATION ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.6 WARRANTY ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 3

2.1 MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 FANS ................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.3 MOTORS.......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.4 FILTERS ........................................................................................................................................... 3
2.5 ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................................... 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 4

3.1 EXAMINATION................................................................................................................................. 4
3.2 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................ 4
3.3 CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 4
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................................ 4
3.5 ADJUSTING ..................................................................................................................................... 4
3.6 DEMONSTRATION .......................................................................................................................... 4
23 34 33 Air Curtains Rev.00 Page 1 of 5

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air curtains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each unit.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations of
exterior walls.
D. Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Product: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air curtains and are
based on the specific product indicated. Other manufacturers' products complying with
requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: As defined in British Standards and DEWA or
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components with other
construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and partition
assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers. These items are specified in Division 10
Section "Louvers and Vents."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition

to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products installed
and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Furnish one set of filters and fan belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel finish over
powdered mirror.
B. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and capable of
reducing air-outlet velocity by 60 percent with louver in totally closed position.
C. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, wedge shaped, containing adjustable air-
directional vanes with 40-degree sweep front to back.
2.2 FANS
A. Fans: Galvanized steel, Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet statically and
dynamically balanced.
B. Fan Drives: Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves and pulleys for adjusting air-
outlet velocity.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Motor Type: Two speed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed, air over, with
integral thermal-overload protection.
B. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life-time, prelubricated, ball bearings.
C. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
2.4 FILTERS
A. Washable Panel Filters: Removable, stainless-steel, baffle-type filters with spring-loaded

fastening; with minimum 1.984-mm thick, stainless-steel filter frame.
B. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for bolting
together into built-up filter banks.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Automatic Door Switch: Remotely installed in door area to activate air curtain when door opens
and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
B. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 230-V ac transformer with primary and
secondary fuses, terminal strip, and IP 54 enclosure.

C. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to air curtain to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of individual
components.
2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor rotation and unit
operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest units until satisfactory results are achieved.
Operate electric element through each stage and verify proper operation of electrical connection.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust belt tension.

B. Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow.
C. Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.
D. Adjust air-directional vanes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains.

stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION
23 34 33

SECTION 23 35 00
SPECIAL EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 1 specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:

1. Inline Axial Flow Fans
2. High Temperature Fans (Smoke Extract) 400 cº for 2 hours as per DCD.
1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 23 05 13 – Common Motor requirements for HVAC Equipment: Fan motors.
B. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration Isolation: Vibration and seismic control of HVAC.
C. Section 26 05 00 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.4 REFERECE STANADRDS
to this Project.
1. ACGIH (IV) - Industrial Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Practice; American Council

of Governmental Industrial Hygienists; 2010, 28th edition.
2. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
2010.
3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same
asANSI/ASHRAE 51).
23 35 00 Special Exhaust Systems Rev.00 Page 1 of 7

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including colour charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and
base weights.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show fan room layout and relationship between components and
adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight
on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
D. Maintenance Data: For axial fans to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: As defined in British Standards and ADWEA or
B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed
to use the AMCA – Certified Ratings Seal.
C. IEC Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with IEC standards.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final locations, according to
manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points.

1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 section “Cast-in-Place
Concrete.”
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7 Section “Roof Accessories.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CAR PARK FANS
A. Axial fans shall be direct driven type.

B. Axial fans to be selected for the capacity as indicated in the schedules (Max. deviation allowed is
+/-2%). However specialist system supplier should verify the car park volume in order to select
appropriate fan volumes. Static pressure indicated in the drawings / schedule is for indication
only. Contractor shall calculate the static pressure requirement as per approved drawings and
submit for engineer’s approval.
C. Rating of fans shall be at standard air condition i.e., air temperature of 20oC and 1.2kg/m3
density.
D. Axial flow fans shall be suitable for installation as indicated on the drawings.
E. Fan manufacturer shall have minimum 15 years of experience in the manufacturer of similar
products. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a local office or a representative in UAE with
both having experienced after sales support and service / maintenance engineers.
F. Fan manufacturing facility shall have BS EN ISO 9001.94 or latter quality certification.
G. Axial fans shall consist of:
1. Casing (Covering both the impeller and motor assembly. Free inlet, ducted discharge fans
can have shorter casing.)
2. Impeller.
3. Electric motor
4. Motor mounting bracket / frame
5. Anti vibration mounts (Spring type for fire rated fans)
6. Bell mouth inlet & guard (for free inlet fans only)
H. Fan Casing and motor mounting assemblies shall be manufactured from heavy gauge mild steel
to BS 10151 or latter, Grade HR14 (Minimum thickness 3.00mm for fans up to 630mm diameter.
5.0mm for diameters for 640mm and above). Fans shall be provided with inlet and outlet flanges
integral of fan casing for connection to ducting network. Flanges shall be pre-drilled with holes for
bolts. All welding shall be continuous.
I. Complete casing and flanges shall be hot dip galvanized after manufacture to BS EN ISO 1461 or
latter at a rate of 0.46kgs of zinc per square meter for fans up to 800mm diameter or 0.61kgs per
meter square for 800mm diameter and above to ensure complete corrosion protection. (No
welding or drilling to be carried out after galvanizing process)
J. Impellers shall be with high efficiency aerofoil section field adjustable pitch angle blades clamped
to steel Hub. Impeller blade angels shall be set and fixed at factory but are field adjustable within
motor power limits.
K. The fan blades shall be of an aerofoil section, high pressure die cast from LM6 aluminum alloy
and include traceability of batch identification and be X-rayed prior to machining to ensure sound
casting.
L. Impellers shall be non-overloading type and capable of running continuously up to 15% higher
than the selected speed.
M. Impellers shall be statically balanced and dynamically checked to minimum balancing accuracy of
G6.3 or better as per ISO1940/1:1986.
N. The pitch angles of the fan blades shall be individually adjustable.
O. The impeller shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and keyway to BS4235:1972 or latter.
Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft together with a retaining
washer and screw, fitted into a tapped hole in the end of the shaft. The screw shall be locked in
position.
P. The aerodynamic design of the fan/impeller shall be such that the maximum power absorbed by
the fan occurs within the normal working range and has a non-overloading characteristic.
Q. Fans shall be directly driven by electric motors unless otherwise specified, suitable for
380˜415V/50Hz/3Ph power supply. Motors shall be flange either B3 foot or B30 pad mounted
type, totally enclosed air stream rated, non-ventilated or fan cooled depending on the application.
R. Motor shall be supplied with sealed for life bearings with an L10 bearing life of at least 20,000
hours when calculated using ISO 281 for rated fan duty.
S. Motor winding shall have Class ‘F’ insulation with Class B (80oK) temperature rise as a minimum.
Motor performance shall be in accordance IEC34-1. Motors unless mentioned elsewhere shall be
rated for ambient temperature of 40oC.
T. All motors shall have protection to IP55 standards. Motors shall be wired to an external terminal
box with the same level of protection as the motor.
U. All free inlet fans must be provided with inlet bell mouth and guard. Where fans directly
discharging air into a chamber, a conical diffuser must be provided for higher efficiency.
V. Inlet and outlet guards shall be provided where indicated on the drawings / schedules. Guards
shall be manufactured from mild steel wire and rod, all welded assembly, and shall be hot dipped
galvanized after manufacture. Guards shall comply with BS EN ISO 12499.
W. Fans shall be provided with attachable mounting feet/plates where indicated for horizontal or
vertical mounting fabricated from mild steel. Mounting feet/plates shall be hot dipped galvanized
after manufacture.
X. Fan motors must be sized to have the power to allow the fan to handle air at normal ambient
temperature to allow periodic testing at ambient temperature. Fan motors that have been derated
to the power required to handle the hot fire smoke are not acceptable as the fans must be
capable of handling relatively cool smoke during the early stage of the fire without overloading the
motor.
Y. Fans shall be rated for once only operation of 400Cº for 2 hour DCD.
Z. Further, Car park fans shall be provided by a manufacturer having similar installations in the UAE
AA. Fire rating of fans should be independently tested in accordance with EN 12101-3. Necessary
documentation as proof must be submitted to engineer.
AA. Fans shall be driven either by 2 speed class ‘H’ motors (1:2 ratio). Please refer schedule /
electrical diagrams for details.

CC. Exhaust Axial Air Forms Temperature resistance: 400Cº for 2 hour DCD.
DD. Fan Casing: The fan casing consists of a rolled welded tube of 3 mm steel plate. The Axial flow
fan is built into an oval unit made of alu-zink steel plate.
EE. Motor: The motor is designed for 400 V, 50 Hz and is capable of withstanding a D.O.L starting.
The motor protection is IP 55 according to IEC 34-5 and the insulation is class H
FF. Electric isolating switch: An electric isolating switch is installed on the fan casing.
GG. Suspension: The fan is provided with brackets for suspension to the ceiling.
HH. Surface treatment: After manufacture the fan casing is hot dip galvanized and the brackets are
made of hot dip galvanized steel plate.
II. Novax rotor: The rotor consists of two assembled hub discs with cavities, in which 4 blades are
mounted in a preset position.
JJ. Blades: The blades are made of an aluminum alloy. All the blades are subjected to dye penetrant
tests in order to detect faults.
KK. Guard: For the AUO an inlet guard is mounted at the inlet opening. The guard is made of
stainless steel.
LL. In general construction of fans shall be as per specification for standard axial fans.
MM. Where specified fans supplied shall be rated for once only operation of 400C for 2 hour.
NN. Fire rating of fans should be independently tested in accordance with EN 12101-3. Necessary
documentation as proof must be submitted to engineer.
OO. Fans shall be driven either by VFD or by 2 speed class ‘H’ motors (1:2 ratios). Please refer
schedule / electrical diagrams for details and for type of drive.
2.2 CO CONTROL PANELS (DDC) -GENERAL
A. Carbon Monoxide Detection Panels (DDC)

B. The CO monitoring (DDC) panel will receive signals from CO sensors located throughout the
levels at a spacing of no more than 1 per 400 m2. The 24Vac power supply for the CO sensors
shall be mounted in the same panel. The power supply shall be looped across the CO sensors.
C. The proposed CO sensor shall provide a 0-10Vdc signal for measuring the CO level in the car
park area.
D. Alarms to be monitored by DDC Panel
1. HI CO Level Alarm
2. Fan TRIP Alarm
3. System Not in AUTO Alarm
4. Fan Fail to RUN Alarm
5. Smoke / Fire Alarm – (Derived from Fire Alarm Panel)
E. Fusing & Insulation: All circuits will have appropriate fusing and insulation as required and should
meet national / local standards and regulations.
F. Testing: A functional test will be carried out before the panels leave the workshop. Special
attention will be paid to checking the correct functioning of fusing, thermal relays (incl. override)
and fault indicating signals.
G. Equipment switching: Equipment will be switched by the pre-determined switching strategies as
indicated in this submittal.
H. Signal Priority: The first signal received, that causes the system to switch to smoke ventilation
operation, will be retained even if a power failure in the mains supply occurs. This signal always
has a higher priority than signals for normal CO venting.
2.3 CO CONTROL PANEL AND DETECTORS
A. Controller to use common 3 wires communication link between the central panel and the local
stations (points). The operation of the system is based on the Time Division Multiplexing Principle
where each point is sequentially scanned by the central panel and its "CO" status stored in panel
memory.
B. The Central Panel displays the point number currently being scanned. The panel front displays 2
or 3 LED arrays for simultaneous and continuous visual inspection of 35PPM, 100PPM and
100PPM time delayed (as applicable) conditions of all locations in the space (monitored areas).
C. Display also includes visual SENSOR TROUBLE indicators (one for each sensor). Upon sensor
trouble condition the "LOW LEVEL" CO relay for that point automatically energizes in order to run
the fans continually until trouble is corrected.
D. Remote Sensor Stations:
1. Sensor assembly and its electronics include the necessary temperature compensating
circuits for operation in variable conditions.
2. Enclosure for sensor stations is of compact corrosion resistant PVC split enclosure with
vandal proof screws. Dimensions are 6" x 6" x 4" (152mm x 152mm x 101mm), suitable for
vertical mounting.
E. Operating Levels:
1. Factory calibrate to 35, and 100PPM.
F. Inputs/Outputs:
1. ON-OFF: The panel incorporates the necessary logic circuits to operate the exhaust logic
circuits to operate the exhaust and supply fans and motorized dampers for fresh air and / or
exhaust according to specified project requirements.
G. Flexibility of the system will enable the relay logic of the ventilation control system to be set or
modified. Selector switches with indicating lights for manual energization "ON" of all fans
controlled by the panel will be provided.
H. Provide all necessary devices for interfacing with BMS.
I. Proportional:
1. Proportional (analog) outputs as a function of the total number of points at 35 PPM
condition in a particular zone available. The proportional outputs may be one of the
following: 0-1 VDC or 0-10 VDC or 4-20maDC.
2. The proportional outputs can be manually set to a desired value whenever a minimum
signal to the controlling elements is required.
J. Self-Checking:
1. Integrity of the system is under constant supervision. Should a remote station not confirm a
response, a fault condition will be displayed at the central panel with indication of faulty
station locations.

K. Time Delay:
1. Panel shall include an optional time delay of approximately 30 minutes between the time
100PPM is detected and the time of visual display on unit cover (or panel), audible alarm
and closure of alarm contacts.
L. Standard of Acceptance:
1. ACME Model CP - MX - 01 - 01 E3R - 16 - 220 control panel (s) C/W model 01.33 AR – MX
remote sensor stations.
2. MSA
3. Gasonics
4. NAFFCO
2.4 MANUFACTURER WILL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION
A. System schematics indicating interfaces between all equipment and systems.

B. Switching diagrams indicating the operation of the exhaust fans and dampers.
C. Panel drawings for all CO Monitoring panels.
D. Equipment specifications.
E. Manufactures data for all equipment and devices.
2.5 COMMISSIONING & TESTING
A. Once the installation of the systems and equipment has been completed, manufacturer’s
engineers will attend site to carry out commissioning and to demonstrate the functionality and
correct operation of the car park ventilation equipment systems. The systems shall be
demonstrated to operate as per pre-approved system strategies for normal and smoke ventilation
modes.
B. A smoke test will be performed to validate the system smoke will be generated to simulate an
actual fire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance
activities.
C. CO System:
1. Remote sensor must be mounted vertically according to arrow on sensor. Mounting height
to be (1.50M) above floor. Locations where a parked car exhausts directly into the sensor
should be avoided.

2. Protect unit from damage and vandalism during construction period, enclosure only, without
cover, can be wall mounted and wiring connected to a plug-in terminal block supplied loose
with the enclosure.
3. When building is ready for CO control, plug the terminal block into the circuit board
attached to cover and secure cover to enclosure using the vandal proof screws.
4. "CO" Systems should be energized at all times. Supply power from separate circuit. It
should be impossible to disconnect power to a "CO" System in order to service other
equipment. All equipment is shipped factory calibrated after a 7 days operational test.
5. Locate the control panel in the appropriate location as per Civil defense requirement for the
Approval of Engineer.
6. Under this Contract the system will provide an alarm signal only on detection of 100PPM
CO.
3.2 CAR PARK VENTILATION SYSTEM
A. Car park areas must be ventilated using ducted fan system. The system used must be designed
supplied and commissioned by specialist supplier (Current design has been based on
manufacturer).
B. The ventilation system shall be designed generally in accordance with approved documents B &
F of the building regulations for UK. The system must be designed in the event of fire, to provide
min. 10 air changes per hour in order to clear and dilute smoke across floor. All the fans & main
extract fans must be rated for 400°C/2 hour, with the extract flow-rate divided between at least 2
fans in each shaft.
C. The proposed supplier must have minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing various fans.
He should have minimum 2 installations of large car parks in use with similar system in gulf.
D. Purpose of car park ventilation:
1. CO concentration of up to 20PPM Provide normal ventilation (around 3ACPH) to avoid
still air.
2. 20PPM up to 50PPM provide around 6ACPH for pollution control (CO).
3. Over 50ppm provides minimum 10ACPH by running main extract fans at high speed.
4. In case of fire provide safe escape corridor for people to escape safely by running the
main extract fans at high speed to give minimum 10ACPH.
E. Principle of car park ducted ventilation system is to draw fresh air through louvers at each floor
and extract all polluted air and smoke (in case of fire) through the smoke extract grilles that are
located at high and low levels. Each extract fan system/zone to be provided withminimum 2#
extract fans. For number of systems/zones refer to the ventilation drawings. All extract fans to be
driven by VFD (Variable Frequency drive).
F. Number & position of extract grilles indicated on the ventilation drawings is indicative only
Location of all extract grilles must be certified by specialist supplier. Unless certified by specialist
supplier, extract grilles shall not be installed.
.
G. Please refer table below for preliminary logic of operation:
Extract fan Shaft fans Remarks

Low High Low High
Net ACPH
CO Level 1   around 3.
<20ppm
Level 2 
CO Level 1    All Shaft fans

>20ppm
&<50ppm Level 2   run on part
load. Net
ACPH around 6.
Fire Level 1    Net ACPH

around 10
max. 1 level only
Level 2 Vent system
will be shut.

SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install diffusers, diffuser boots, registers/grilles,
louvers, louver penthouses, roof hoods, and goosenecks indicated by the Contract
Documents with supplementary items necessary for proper installation.
1. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
2. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
3. ARI 890 – Rating of Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies.
4. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and
Inlets.
5. SMACNA 1035 - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500.

23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets Rev.00 Page 1 of 9
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit product data and Shop Drawings, indicating type, size, location, application, noise
level, finish, and type of mounting.
2. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to
submitting product data.
1. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions under provisions of Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as scheduled on the Drawings Grilles, registers and
diffusers shall be provided with sponge rubber or soft felt gaskets where noted on the
Drawings Grilles, slot diffusers and laminar flow bars shall not be internally insulated. If a
manufacturer other than the one scheduled is used, the sizes shown on the Drawings shall
be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw, pressure drop, etc., before the
submittal is made. Selections shall meet the manufacturer’s own published data for the
above performance criteria. The throw shall be such that the velocity at the end of the throw
in the five (5) foot occupancy zone will not exceed 50 fpm nor be less than 25 fpm except
where indicated otherwise. Noise levels shall not exceed those published in ASHRAE for the
type of space being served (NC level). In the vicinity of lab hoods, terminal velocity at face of
hood shall not exceed 20 fpm.
C. Locations of air distribution devices on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated
with other trades to make symmetrical patterns and shall be influenced by the established
general pattern of the lighting fixtures or architectural reflected ceiling plan, but primarily
located to maintain proper air distribution. Where called for on Drawings, grilles, registers
and diffusers shall be provided with deflecting devices and manual dampers. These grilles,
registers, and diffusers shall be the standard product of the manufacturer, and subject to
review by the Architect.
D. Provide a frame compatible with the type of ceiling or wall in which the devices are installed.
Refer to Architectural Drawings for exact type of ceiling specified.
E. Coordinate color and finish of the devices with the Architect.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers:
1. Air Master.
2. BETA.
3. TROX.
4. Nailor Industries.
5. Ruskin.
B. Louvers:
1. Air Master.
2. BETA.
3. TROX.
4. Nailor Industries.
5. Ruskin
2.3 ROUND CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Round, adjustable pattern, stamped or spun, multicore type diffuser to discharge air in 360-
degree pattern, with sector baffles where indicated.
B. Project diffuser collar above ceiling face and connect to duct with duct ring. In plaster
ceilings, provide plaster ring.
C. Fabricate of aluminum, unless otherwise noted, with factory baked enamel, off-white finish.
D. Provide multi-louvered equalizing grid where noted on Drawings.
2.4 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular, full louvered face, directional, removable multi-core type diffuser to discharge
air in 360-degree pattern. Neck size shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Provide filler
panels, where required, for directional throw diffusers.
B. Fabricate frame and blades of extruded aluminum with factory baked enamel, off-white finish.
C. Provide multi-louvered equalizing grid .where noted on Drawings
D. Provide round neck connection as scheduled on Drawings.

2.5 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Perforated face with fully adjustable pattern and removable face.
B. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel, off-white finish.
C. Provide multi-louvered equalizing grid where noted on Drawings.
2.6 SQUARE PANEL FACE SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR CEILING DIFFUSER
A. Architectural diffuser with a square panel centered within a square housing similar to the
Titus OMNI model. Drawings that depict two-way and three-way throw options are achieved
with the use of filler panel (where required) for directional throw diffusers.
B. Opposed blade volume dampers shall be provided with the diffuser, if scheduled on the
Drawings. The volume damper design shall be similar to the Titus AG-75.
C. Although the manufacturers show this model being used only as a supply air device, this
same diffuser can also be used as a return air device. The neck connection shall be the
largest available neck size provided by the manufacturer.
2.7 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4-inch spacing, with spring or other device to
set blades, vertical face.
B. Fabricate 1-inch margin frame with concealed mounting.
C. Fabricate of steel with minimum 20 gage frames and minimum 22 gage blades, steel and
aluminum with minimum 20 gage frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel
finish.
D. Opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable from face shall only be
provided with the grille when it is scheduled on the Drawing.
2.8 PERFORATED FACE RETURN/EXHAUST GRILLES
A. Perforated face with back pan, removable face, and neck sizes as indicated on Drawings.
B. Provide frame type as indicated on Drawings.
C. Fabricate completely of 22 gage steel with a baked enamel off-white finish.

2.9 LIGHT TROFFER DIFFUSERS
A. Single plenum type constructed independent of light troffers with volume and pattern
controllers with oval top or side air inlet as scheduled.
B. Match diffusers to light troffers and connect in airtight connection without tools.
C. Fabricate of galvanized steel with welded or soldered joints and finish matte black inside.
2.10 PERFORATED FACE CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES.
A. 0.0375-inch stainless steel non-aspirating perforated panels with stainless steel plenum for
low-velocity applications.
B. Provide quick-opening fasteners with safety chains.
C. Provide multi-louvered equalizing grid where noted on Drawings.
2.11 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Fixed series of cubes comprised of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1-inch aluminum strips.
B. Fabricate one-inch margin aluminum frame.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory baked enamel finish.
D. Provide square uniform height plenum for ducted return and exhaust application of scheduled
neck size.
2.12 CEILING LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS
A. Continuous linear flow bar slot with adjustable vanes for left, right, or vertical discharge, with
volume control. Provide slot width, length and number of slots as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish.
C. Provide support clips and gasket as required for ceiling system.
D. Provide alignment strips for hairline joints and end caps where the slot terminates. Provide
mitered corners.
E. Provide black matte finish for all interior exposed-to-view components.
F. Provide externally insulated supply air plenum by diffuser manufacturer.
G. Provide return slot diffuser same as supply, except without the adjustable vane control.
Provide return air plenum for ducted return where indicated on Drawings.

2.13 PLENUM SLOT SUPPLY AND RETURN DIFFUSERS
A. Supply or return plenum slot, 3/4-inch, with single extruded aluminum curved deflector blade
to create a tight horizontal airflow pattern across the ceiling. Provide slot width, length, and
number of slots as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Diffusers shall discharge air horizontally through two outside sections and vertically through a
center down-blow section.
C. Standard nominal lengths shall be 2, 3, 4, or 5 feet. Units shall be constructed of 24 gage

steel. Maximum height of the unit’s plenum shall be 7-inches. Inlets shall have a minimum of
1-1/2-inch depth for duct connection. The standard finish shall be black on the face of the
diffuser and pattern deflectors.
D. Diffuser shall be similar to Titus N-1-R diffuser.
2.14 PERIMETER SLOT SUPPLY AND RETURN DIFFUSERS
A. High induction supply and return plenum slot, the supply is a 3/4-inch fixed slot width that
produces a horizontal discharge pattern, and a return air slot with a maximum 1-1/2-inch slot
width. Provide length as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Standard nominal lengths shall be 2, 3, 4, or 5 feet. Units shall be constructed of 24 gage

steel. Maximum height of the units shall be 7-inches. Inlets shall have a minimum of 1-1/2-
inch depth for duct connection. The standard finish shall be black on the face of the diffuser
and pattern deflectors.
C. Diffuser shall be similar to the Titus N-1-R diffuser.
2.15 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades with 90-degree one-way deflection, 1/8-inch x 3/4-inch on 1/4-inch

centers.
B. Fabricate 1-inch margin frame with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabricate of steel with 22 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and
aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel
finish.
D. Opposed blade damper with removable key operator, operable from face shall only be
provided with the grille when it is scheduled on the Drawing.
2.16 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille
with two-way deflection.
B. Fabricate 1-inch margin frame with countersunk screw, concealed mounting and gasket.

C. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions with factory clear anodized finish.
D. Provide multi-louvered equalizing grid where noted on Drawings.
2.17 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds ¾-inch spacing, with spring or other device to
set blades, vertical or horizontal face as scheduled.
B. Fabricate one-inch margin frame with concealed mounting.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory
baked enamel finish.
2.18 LINEAR BAR WALL DIFFUSERS
A. Streamlined blades with 0 to 15 degree deflection, as scheduled, 1/8-inch x 3/4-inch or 1/4-

inch centers.
B. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions, with factory clear anodized finish.
C. Fabricate 1/2-inch margin frame with concealed mounting and gasket.
D. Provide concealed fastening, straightening grids and alignment bars.
E. Provide externally insulated plenums by diffuser manufacturer.
F. Provide return bar diffusers same as supply with return air plenum.
G. Silhouette finish.
2.19 LINEAR FLOOR SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Streamlined blades with zero degree deflection, 7/32-inch x 3/4-inch on 1/2-inch centers.
B. Fabricate of high-grade aluminum extrusions with factory clear anodized finish.
C. Fabricate 3/16-inch margin heavy margin frame with concealed mounting and gasket and
mounting frame. Frameless flange for floor installation. Silhouette finish.
D. Provide concealed fastening, straightening grids and alignment bars.
2.20 LABORATORY RADIAL AIR SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
A. High-volume, low velocity performance.
B. Diffuser shall provide non-aspirating radial air pattern and shall be configured with air supply
plenums with inlet collars to assure uniform velocity over the diffuser face.
C. Furnish stainless steel back pan and stainless steel faced diffusers for animal holding rooms.
D. Furnish aluminum back pan and aluminum-faced diffusers for laboratories.
E. Performance face drops below ceiling, single-pane back pan and single piece lower
chamber. Sectioned diffuser is not acceptable.
2.21 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES – SEVERE DUTY
A. Streamlined 40-degree fixed blades, at 1/2-inch spacing, with horizontal front blades.
B. Fabricate 1-1/4-inch margin frame with vandal-proof screws.
C. Fabricate totally of steel with minimum 18 gage frames and minimum 14 gage blades with
factory baked enamel finish.
2.22 DOOR GRILLES
A. V-shaped louvers of 20 gage steel, 1-inch deep on 1/2-inch centers.
B. Provide 20 gage steel frame with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both sides of
door, with factory prime coat finish.
2.23 LOUVERS
A. Provide 6-inch deep louvers with blades on 45-degree slope with center baffle and return
bend, heavy channel frame, birdscreen on interior side with 1/2-inch square mesh for exhaust
and 3/4-inch for intake.
B. Fabricate of 12 gage extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish.
C. Furnish with exterior angle flange for installation.
D. Fabricate louver penthouses with mitered corners and reinforce with structural angles.
E. Pass 750 feet per minute free velocity with less than 0.10 inches of water pressure drop,
based in accordance with AMCA 500. Water penetration less than 0.025 ounce of water per
foot of free area at 900 feet per minute. Provide a minimum of 45 percent free area.
2.24 ROOF HOODS
A. Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA 1035, 1-inch classification
Duct Construction Standards.

B. Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage base and 20 gage hood, or aluminum,
minimum 16 gage base and 18 gage hood; suitably reinforced; with removable hood;
birdscreen with 1/2-inch square mesh for exhaust and 3/4-inch for intake, and factory prime
coat finish.
C. Roof curb shall be coordinated with Owner and roofing Contractor.
D. Hood outlet area shall be minimum two times the throat area.
2.25 GOOSENECKS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA 1035, 1-inch classification, of minimum 18 gage

galvanized steel.
B. Roof curb shall be coordinated with Owner and roofing Contractor
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform to architectural features, reflected ceiling plans, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
D. Install air outlets and inlets to ductwork with airtight connection.
E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers, regardless of
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. The use of
extractors or scoops at duct take-off to diffusers, grilles and registers is not allowed.
F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Division 09.
G. Provide all specialties and frames for air distribution devices as required for proper
installation in ceiling type as indicated on Architectural Drawings. Provide all cutting and
patching of T-bars, gypsum board, and other ceiling systems as required for installation of air
devices.

SECTION 23 41 00
PARTICULATE AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install filters, housings and frames and filter gauges
necessary for proper installation in air handling unit and fan coil unit systems. For special
filter systems, refer to Section 23 42 00.
2. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment.
3. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices
Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
4. ASHRAE 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for Removal
Efficiency by Particle Size.
5. ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
6. IEST RP-CC001 - HEPA and ULPA Filters.
7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
9. UL 586 - High Efficiency, Particulate Air Filter Units.
23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration, Rev 00 Page 1 of 11

10. UL 900 - Air Filter Units.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. IEST: Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology.
B. HEPA: High Efficiency Particulate Air.
C. MERV: Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value.
D. ULPA: Ultra-Low Penetration Air.
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section

with minimum three (3) years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on
total product. Performance characteristics shall be published in the manufacturer’s literature.
B. Where installation instructions are not included in the Contract Documents, the
manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed. All equipment affected by altitude shall be rated
to operate at the altitude where it is installed.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Shop Drawings, product data and installation instructions, including airflow,
pressure drop, and MERV rating.
1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS (THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO HOUSINGS ONLY NOT AHUs)
A. Furnish one (1) extra set of new filters for each filter bank after Substantial Completion,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Replaceable throwaway.
2. Replaceable dry type medium and high efficiency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. In general, all capacities and characteristics are shown in schedules on the Drawings.
Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. Capacities shown are
minimum capacities. Variations in capacities of scheduled equipment supplied under this
Contract will be permitted only with the written direction of Owner.

C. All equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site with not less than a prime coat of paint or
as specified hereinafter.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. American Air Filter.
B. Calgon Carbon Corporation.
C. Camfil-Farr.
D. Flanders-Precisionaire.
E. Koch Filter.
F. Purafil, Inc.
2.3 FILTERS
A. All medium efficiency air filters shall be listed as Class 1 in accordance with UL 900 and shall
be tested and reported in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52.1 and ASHRAE Test
Standard 52.2. Dust spot efficiencies listed are results when tested by ASHRAE Standard
52.1. MERV values listed are results when tested by ASHRAE Standard 52.2.
B. Type F1: Disposable, dry type, low efficiency, fiberglass filter.
1. Media: Fiberglass. Provide industry standard sizes as required for installation.
2. Frame: Heat-sealed monobound frame and scrim backing.
3. Rating: Initial resistance no greater than 0.20-inches w.g. at 500 feet per minute (fpm)
face velocity. MERV 4, dust spot efficiency of <20 percent.
4. Thickness: 1-inch.
C. Type F2: Sectional, renewable, medium efficiency media filter.
1. Media: Adhesive coated glass fiber media pads.
2. Frame: Enclosing sectional frame shall be 18-gage galvanized steel, with 11-gage wire
retainers, and equipped with a quick opening mechanism for changing filter media.
3. Rating: Initial resistance no greater than 0.10-inches w.g. at 300 fpm face velocity and
0.21-inches w.g. at 500 fpm. Filter shall have a dust spot efficiency of 25-30 percent and
shall be equal to a MERV 7 filter.
4. Thickness: 2-inches.
D. Type F3: Disposable, dry type, medium efficiency, pleated media panel filter.
1. Media: 0.18-inch nonwoven cotton and synthetic blend media, formed into a uniform
radial pleat. Provide industry standard sizes as required for installation.

2. Frame: Provide filter media in permanent removable frames with corrosion resistant
welded wire grid bonded to the downstream side of the media. Media shall be fully
bonded to frame to prevent air leakage.
3. Rating: Initial resistance no greater than 0.28-inches w.g. at 500 fpm face velocity.
MERV 7, dust spot efficiency of 25-30 percent.
4. Thickness: 2-inches or 4-inches. Pre-filters shall be 2-inches unless otherwise noted on

the Contract Documents.
E. Type F4: Disposable, dry type, high efficiency, supported media filter.
1. Media: Microfine glass laminated to a reinforcing backing formed into a lofted media
blanket with a uniform radial pleat. Provide industry standard sizes as required for
installation.
bonded to frame to prevent air leakage. Frame shall be steel alloy with media support
stabilizers mechanically fastened to diagonal support members. Filter shall be capable
of withstanding 10-inches w.g. pressure
MERV 11, dust spot efficiency of 60-65 percent percent. Thickness: 12-inch thick
(nominal) frame.
F. Type F5: Disposable, dry type, high efficiency, supported media filter.
installation.
MERV 13, dust spot efficiency of 80-85 percent. Thickness: 12-inch thick (nominal)
frame.
G. Type F6: Disposable, dry type, high efficiency, supported media filter.
installation.

MERV 14, dust spot efficiency of 90-95 percent. Thickness: 12-inch thick (nominal)
frame.
H. Type F7: High capacity, HEPA (IEST Type A) filter.
1. Media: Media shall be HEPA Grade high capacity with waterproof micro glass pleated
media, tapered corrugated aluminum separators with a hemmed edge, urethane sealant,
and one-piece seamless gasket. Provide industry standard sizes as required for
installation.
2. Frame: Provide filter media in permanent removable frames. Media shall be fully
bonded to frame with a urethane sealant to prevent air leakage. Frame shall be 16-gage
steel alloy bonded to the media pack. A poured-in-place sealing gasket shall be installed
downstream of the enclosing frame.
3. Rating: 1.35-inches w.g. initial resistance at rated capacity. Minimum Efficiency shall be
99.97 percent when evaluated under the guidance of IEST RP-CC01. Filter must carry
UL 900 Class 2 rating.
4. Thickness: 12-inch thick (nominal) frame.
I. Type F8: Terminal diffuser, HEPA (IEST Type A) mini-pleat panel filter.
1. Media: Media shall be HEPA Grade high capacity with waterproof micro glass pleated
media, continuous glass filament separators with a hemmed edge, polyurethane sealant,
and seamless gasket. Provide industry standard sizes as required for installation.
bonded to frame with a polyurethane sealant to prevent air leakage. Frame shall be
anodized aluminum bonded to the media pack.
99.97 percent when evaluated under the guidance of IEST RP-CC01. Filter must carry
UL 900 Class 2 rating.
4. Thickness: 2-inch or 4-inch thick (nominal) frame.
J. Type F9: Standard capacity ULPA (IEST Type D) filter.
1. Media: Media shall be HEPA Grade continuous waterproof micro glass pleated media,
tapered corrugated aluminum separators with a hemmed edge, urethane sealant, and
one-piece seamless gasket on both sides. Provide industry standard sizes as required
for installation.
bonded to frame with a urethane sealant to prevent air leakage. Frame shall be 16-gage
steel alloy bonded to the media pack. Poured-in-place sealing gaskets shall be installed
upstream and downstream of the enclosing frame.
99.999 percent at 0.3 micron when evaluated under the guidance of IEST RP-CC01.
Filter must carry UL 900 Class 2 rating.

4. Thickness: 12-inch thick (nominal) frame.
K. Type F10: Activated carbon filter for odor control.
1. Media: Coconut shell granular activated carbon with a minimum activity rating of 60.
Each panel shall have minimum 0.25 cubic feet of media, sufficient to provide 0.090
seconds residence time.
2. Frame: Heat-resistant polystyrene with removable service end cap.
3. Rating: Adsorptivity shall be 40-percent by weight, and retentivity shall be 29-percent by

weight (when evaluated with toluene). Maximum 0.50-inches w.g. resistance at 500 feet
per minute face velocity.
4. Thickness: 1-inch individual filter panel bed depth.
L. Type F11: Activated carbon / chemisorbent blended disposable filter.
1. Media: Activated carbon blended with powdered activated alumina impregnated with
potassium permanganate-specifically designed for removal of the following
contaminates: Hydrocarbons, volatile organic compounds, sulfur oxides, formaldehyde,
Nitric Oxide, Hydrogen Sulfide, lower molecular weight aldehydes and organic acids.
Bulk Density: 40 pounds per cubic foot, pellets. Moisture Content: 5.0 percent maximum
(acticvated carbon), 35 percent maximum (chemisorbant media). Carbon Tetrachloride
Activity: Minimum 55 percent.
2. Frame: Multi-ply paperboard product with water resistant 2 mil LDPE coating on all
exterior surfaces.
3. Rating: Gas Removal Efficiency: 85 percent minimum over life of media. Maximum 0.45-
inches w.g. resistance at 500 feet per minute face velocity.
M. Type F12: Acid impregnated activated carbon disposable filter.
1. Media: Acid-impregnated activated carbon-specifically designed for removal of ammonia

gas. Minimum ammonia removal capacity of 7 percent, by weight. Bulk Density: 40
pounds per cubic foot, pellets. Moisture Content: 2.0 percent maximum. Carbon
Tetrachloride Activity: Minimum 55 percent.
2. Frame: Multi-ply paperboard product with water resistant 2 mil LDPE coating on all
exterior surfaces.
3. Rating: Gas Removal Efficiency: 85 percent minimum over life of media. Maximum 0.45-
inches w.g. resistance at 500 feet per minute face velocity.

2.4 CHARGED MEDIA IONIZING AIR FILTRATION SYSTEMS
A. System shall be capable of filtering airborne particles at a face velocity of 500 fpm with a
minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 16. The filter efficiency for particles 1.0 microns
and larger shall be 98 percent minimum; 95 percent minimum for particles 0.55 microns to 1.0
microns; and 91 percent minimum for particles from 0.30 to 0.54 microns. Efficiency shall be
calculated by particle count, not by weight. Performance shall be rated in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 52.2.
B. The filter media shall effectively kill living microorganisms trapped on the media through the use
of electrically charged media. Germicidal effectiveness shall be 95 percent minimum based on
measurements of colony forming units of test organisms at certified independent laboratories for
bacterial spores, mold spores, and gram positive and gram negative bacteria.
C. The system shall consist of a stainless steel electrode grid, flat 2-inch disposable filter media,
control and power wiring, a system control module capable of communicating with the facility
management system, and a modular aluminum frame designed to fit a standard air handling unit
rigid filter section. All modules shall interlock to form a continuous filter system.
D. A single point power connection shall be used to serve the filter system with 120 Volt, single
phase power. Coordinate peak power demand with the Electrical Contractor. A door switch with
pilot light shall deactivate the unit and shall shut off power upon opening of the access door. The
control module shall be internally fused. Each module of the filter system shall draw a maximum
of 45 watts.
E. The system shall report status to the BAS and shall monitor the fan auxiliary relays to shut down
power when the fan is not running.
F. A fin-seal gasket shall limit air bypass on the horizontal edges of the rack. Foam gaskets and
knife edge seals shall limit air bypass on the vertical edges. The disposable filter media shall be
downstream loading.
G. The initial air pressure drop for the system shall not exceed 0.40 inches w.g. at 500 fpm.
2.5 FILTER BANK HOUSINGS
A. Standard Side Access Housing for 2-inch and Smaller Pre-Filters: 2-inch pre-filters shall be
housed in standard air handling unit (AHU) manufacturer tracks in the low velocity angled
position. Refer to air handling unit Specifications for pre-filter housing section information.
B. Side Access Housing For Filters over 2-inches Nominal Depth:
1. Housing Construction:
a. Housing shall be fabricated of not less than 16-gage galvanized steel with pre-drilled
standing flanges to facilitate attachment to air handling unit or other equipment.
b. Housing shall be equipped with hinged access doors at both ends, and provision for
receiving filters of any manufacturer without alteration to the housings. Doors are to
be fitted with positive sealing, heavy duty multiple latches and with sponge neoprene
gaskets.

c. Housings shall incorporate a permanent polypropylene filter sealing gasket provision

for sealing the filters against leakage around the filters.
d. Housing shall have a static pressure tap to allow the installation of a static pressure
gauge to evaluate the pressure drop across a single filter or any combination of
installed filters.
2. Filter Tracks: Extruded aluminum channels capable of receiving multiple stages of 6-inch
or 12-inch filters, and 2-inch deep panel type pre-filters and/or after filters as specified on
Drawings.
3. Performance: Leakage of housing to ambient rated airflow less than 1-percent at 3.0-
inches w.g. Air filter bypass around filters shall be les than 1/2 of 1-percent at rated
airflow.
C. Front Access Filter Bank for HEPA filters with Less than 20 square feet of Filter Bank Total
Face Area:
1. Construction: Bank shall be fabricated of not less than 14-gage galvanized steel,
welded, with centering dimples, pre-drilled mounting holes to align frame to frame, filter
sealing flange and swing bolts with equi-bearing clamps matched to air filters to allow
uniform gasket sealing.
2. Performance: Sealing assembly shall be capable of sealing each filter with 30 inch/lbs of
torque to 50-percent filter gasket compression.
D. Front Access Filter Bank for HEPA filters with Greater than 20 square feet of Filter Bank Total
Face Area:
1. Construction:
a. Bank shall be a one piece, factory fabricated filter bank of not less than 3.5-inches
deep 11-gage stainless steel.
b. Bank shall include filter service flanges, swing bolt filter fastener assemblies, and
curb base.
c. All filter sealing surfaces shall be ground smooth to ensure leak free filter to module
seat.
d. Size shall be as required to accommodate number of required filters.
e. Swing bolts shall be same construction as bank and have equi-bearing clamps
matched to air filters to allow uniform gasket sealing.
2. Performance: Sealing assembly shall be capable of sealing each filter with 30 inch/lbs of
torque to 50-percent filter gasket compression.
E. Standard Activated Carbon Filter Side Access Housing:
1. Housing Construction:
a. Housing shall be fabricated of not less than 16-gage galvanized steel with pre-drilled
standing flanges to facilitate attachment to air handling unit or other equipment.
b. Housing shall be equipped with hinged access doors at both ends, and provision for
receiving filters of any manufacturer without alteration to the housings. Doors are to
be fitted with positive sealing, heavy duty multiple latches and with sponge neoprene
gaskets.
c. Housings shall incorporate a permanent polypropylene filter sealing gasket provision

for sealing the filters against leakage around the filters.
d. Housing shall have a static pressure tap to allow the installation of a static pressure
gauge to evaluate the pressure drop across a single filter or any combination of
installed filters.
2. Filter Tracks: Extruded aluminum channels capable of receiving 4-inch pleated media,
disposable, after filters for dust control.
3. Performance: Leakage of housing to ambient rated airflow less than 1-percent at 3.0-
inches w.g.
F. Bag-In / Bag-Out Housing with Gasket Seal:
1. Construction:
a. 316L Stainless Steel, all welded joints, able to withstand +/- 10-inches w.g. with
upstream and downstream test sections.
b. Housing shall have a bagging ring around each access port that is sealed by a
silicone gasketed filter access door. Bagging ring shall have raised and hemmed
edges to secure change-out bag.
c. Housing shall be free of burrs and sharp edges.
d. Threaded pivot blocks in the filter clamps shall be brass, all other components
stainless steel. Filter clamps shall be operable from exterior of housing and shall
apply a uniform load along the filter frame.
e. Housing shall provide minimum full size filter sealing force of 1,400 pounds.
f. Change-out bag(s) shall be 8-mil PVC with glove sleeves, elastic shock cord
hemmed into bag opening, filter security strap, and shall be supplied specifically for
the housing.
g. Multi-wide housings shall be equipped with a filter removable rod to pull filters to the
changeout position. Removal rod shall be operable from inside of filter change-out
bag.
h. Where housing connects to ductwork, pre-drilled attachment flanges shall be

provided on housing.
i. Housing shall include factory-mounted pressure gauges to measure pressure drop

separately across each filter in the housing.
j. All housings exposed to the outdoors shall have a sloped stainless steel weather cap
bolted to housing.

2. Performance: Assembly shall accept standard filter sizes without special attachments or
devices. Assembly and bags shall be such that there is a barrier between personnel and
filter at all times.
2.6 FILTER GAUGES
A. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case. Provide vent
valves, black figures on white background, front calibration adjustment. The range of the
scale shall be no greater than 1 inches w.g. above the filter manufacturer’s recommended
final resistance for the type of filter to which the gauge is being applied, 2 percent of full-scale
accuracy. Provide with adjustable signal flag.
B. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch aluminum
tubing, 3-way vent valves.
C. Refer to Division 25 for transmitting sensor requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
C. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with neoprene gaskets. This is a minimum
standard. If more stringent gasketing is required for a particular filter application, the more
stringent gasketing will govern.
D. Install static pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount on outside of filter
housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level. Where a prefilter is
specified immediately upstream of a high-efficiency filter, the differential pressure taps shall
be installed across each filter.
E. Provide differential pressure sensor at filter bank assembly for filter type F4 and higher.
F. Provide specified filters for temporary use during construction, and replace with new filters
when the differential pressure is within 85 percent of manufacturers recommendation dirty
filter reading.
G. Assemble high pressure units by welding/bolting sections together. Refer to air handling unit
Specifications for assembly of manufactured air units and assemble filter banks in similar
fashion.
H. Do not operate fans, air handlers, etc., for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until
ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under
observation.
23 40 00 Filters Rev.00 Page 10 of 11

3.2 TESTING
A. Verify the proper installation of the filter housings and filters. Inspect thoroughly for proper fit
and seal of all filters, especially filters of 60 percent or greater efficiency, comparing relative
tightness of seal to that specified.
B. Visually inspect filters below 99 percent specified efficiency for proper installation and limited
leakage.
C. Filters of 99 percent and above specified efficiency shall be tested by subjecting the installed
filter and filter installation to a DOP "Challenge" as specified in the Institute of Environmental
Standard (IES), IES-RP-CC-001-86, "HEPA Filters."
1. Testing shall be witnessed and certified by the TAB Firm and hood certification firm (see
Testing and Balancing Specification Section).
2. Certification shall be performed utilizing a dry silica challenge of a minimum of 300,000

particles (a portion of which shall be as small as 0.10 micron) per cubic foot. Particle
concentration measurement will require at least one laser particle counter (Particle
Measuring System Model PMS 110 or equal). Counter shall have been calibrated in
accordance with IES-RP-CC-013-86-T, "Equipment Calibration or Validation
Procedures." Leakage shall be limited to no greater than that recommended by IES-RP-
CC-001-86.
23 41 00 Particulate Air Filters Rev.00 Page 11 of 11

SECTION 23 42 00
GAS PHASE AIR FILTRATION

(NON THERMAL PLASMA FILTERS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install Duct mounted non thermal Plasma Filter for
all the FAHU to control the spread of Bacteria, Viruses and pathogens via ventilation system.
1.3 GENERAL CERTIFICATION
A. The Non Thermal Plasma (NTP) generator (device) with integrated controller shall be certified
and conformity shall be declared by certificate of conformity CE.
B. The NTP device shall fulfils 2011/65/EU ROHS Directive; 2014/30/EU EMC Directive (ex
2004/108/EC); 2014/35/EU LVD Directive (ex 2006/95/EC).
C. Reference standard EN 60335-2-65:2003/A11:2012 -household and similar electrical
appliances. Safety. Particular requirements for air-cleaning appliances.
D. TÜV PROFiCERT: TÜV certifies the truthfulness of the data and performances declared in
the scientific dossiers and in the product catalogue.
E. The NTP device contributes to fulfill assessment requirements of ecologic buildings: LEED,
BREEAM, ESTIDAMA, HB Beam, WELL.
standards addressed within the specification.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. NTP system: system for air and surfaces sanitization consisting of components such as
plasma emitters and integrated controller box.
B. The NTP sanitization device, by exploiting the physical process of Non Thermal Plasma
production, promotes the controlled formation of particular ionic species (electrically charged
species) in the air, through an electrostatic field that simulates the natural process that
normally occurs through solar radiation, mechanically or by means of other physical

phenomena. The particular ionic species produced are ions, free electrons, ROS, hydroxyl
groups, etc. These have proved to be particularly effective as sanitizing agents in the air and
on surfaces, moreover are scientifically proven to be beneficial in people, especially those
with a negative electrical charge (arising from individual or small groups of molecules that
receive an electron).
C. Non Thermal Plasma production must be by DBD (Dielectric Barrier Discharge) solution.
D. The NTP actuators consist of a quartz cylinder covered with a stainless steel mesh (exposed
electrode) in which there are numerous holes, in number ranging from 30 to 45 per square
centimeter, and a coaxial electrode placed inside internal (encapsulated electrode)
E. The system is powered by an alternating electric current with mains frequency (50Hz) and
voltage not over 2850 V (nominal voltage).
F. Manufacturer: Non Therma Plasma system made by European manufacturer specialized in
NTP technology only with experience of minimum 8 years of experience in design and
construction of these devices.
G. MEP contractor: executes the mechanical, electrical and plumbing work related to the project.
H. Appropriate trained technical expert: technical staff who is instructed and certified by the
I. Manufacturer, regularly working with the NTP system, worldwide experienced with it and has
gone through adequate professional technical training.
J. Maintenance staff: staff responsible for maintaining the HVAC.
K. Operational staff: staff responsible for operating the HVAC.
L. HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning including the duct work and ventilation-control,
generally known as the air handling system.
M. IAQ: indoor air quality.
N. VOC’s: volatile organic compounds.
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. The system generates the highest Indoor Air Quality for comfort and hygiene of the occupied
indoor spaces in presence of people.
B. The system sanitizes all surfaces inside the ambient by bacteria colonies in presence of
people.
C. The NTP technology must be tested by an independent University and it must be

demonstrated its capability to eliminate 99.99999% (Log7) of alive SARS-CoV-2 virus in less
than 30 minutes according to EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 17272: 2020; EN 14476: 2019;
ISO / IEC 17025: 2017; ISO 15189: 2012 tests. Test must be PUBLIC.
D. The NTP device must be considered bactericidal with a reduction in the vitality of at least 105
according with UNI EN 17272:2020 in not more then 16 hours. EUROPEAN STANDARD EN
17272: 2020; EN 14476: 2019; ISO 15189: 2012 tests. Test must be PUBLIC.
E. technology used by the system must be tested by an independent University and it must be
demonstrated its capability to eliminate MDR Bacteria
F. The system has the capability to reduce any chemical and organic odors
G. The system effectively reduces VOC and its parts, e.g. solvents, tobacco smoke, diesel
smoke, kerosene, toluene, TCE, PCE, etc in percentual not lower then 95%
H. The system effectively reduces Volatile/Gassy Inorganic Compounds NOx, Sox, H2S, CO
and NH3 in percentual not lower then 95%
I. It effectively reduces micro-organisms (e.g. mould, bacteria, etc.) and particles in air and on
all surfaces reached by NTP (internal air duct surfaces, indoor ambient surfaces, HVAC units,
etc)
J. The system shall be conceived such that the accumulation of ozone in indoor air in excessive
concentrations is prevented. Proof through third party reports must be available upon request.
1.7 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
A. Duct-able device with integrated emitters and controller box.

B. ON/OFF robust system and user-friendly
C. No air sensors are required
D. No ozone sensors are required
E. The required number of NTP duct-able devices shall be calculated and recommended by the
manufacturer according to: ambient application, total air flow, fresh air flow and internal
ambient volume
F. The whole system shall comply with a power source 220-240VAC single phase, 50/60Hz
G. The system shall comply with following environmental conditions:
1. Temperature 0-80 °C
2. Relative humidity 0-95 %
H. No safety measures are required
I. NTP device shall provide an alarm message by the following means:
1. Standard maintenance required
2. Emitters failure
3. Emitters replacement required (end life)
J. NTP duct-able device can be connected to BMS by ModBas protocol.
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section

with minimum three (3) years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on
total product. Performance characteristics shall be published in the manufacturer’s literature.
B. Where installation instructions are not included in the Contract Documents, the
manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed. All equipment affected by altitude shall be rated
to operate at the altitude where it is installed.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit Shop Drawings, product data and installation instructions, including airflow,
pressure drop, and rating.
1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data.
1.10 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN AND MANUFACTURER
A. Country of Origin: 100% of the Manufacturer’s production must be in Europe or Western

Countries (no China production) : COO required
B. All electrical components must be documented in a quality control protocol.
C. All plasma modules must have gone through the following tests before installation:
1. Continuity test of grounding
2. High voltage test for isolation

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
B. In general, all capacities and characteristics are shown in schedules on the Drawings.
Reference shall be made to the schedules for such information. Capacities shown are
minimum capacities. Variations in capacities of scheduled equipment supplied under this
Contract will be permitted only with the written direction of Owner.
C. All equipment shall be shipped to the Project Site with not less than a prime coat of paint or
as specified hereinafter.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. JONIX or Equivalent
2.3 NON THERMAL PLASMA FILTER
A. NTP Emitter:
1. No airstream’s speed limits
2. The sanitization device shall be fully equipped with emitters tubes of the same
manufacturer.
3. Both, the mean for installing the NTP device inside the AHU and the mean for installing it
at the air duct wall of supply air, extract air or exhaust air shall be available.
4. NTP emitters shall be installed perpendicular to the airstream.
5. The plasma tube shall be connected to the plasma module with a dedicated connection
which ensures a tight sealing and allows for quick removal and refastening during
maintenance.
6. The exterior surface of each emitters tube shall be covered with a stainless-steel grade
wire mesh. The wire mesh shall be bonded with a stranded lead, insulated ground wire.
This ground wire is safely connected to the emitter module.
7. High voltage over the emitter tubes shall not exceed 2850V in order to prevent the ozone
generation.
8. All transformers shall have passed an electrical safety approval test.
B. Controller and Sensor:

1. The devices are made up of electronic control, enclosed in an insulating shell, and of
actuators: the emitters are exposed to airflow.
2. The electronics in the device is prepared to the sent at the central system, in real-time, of
an eventual alarm signal in case of failure of the system. For this reason, it is easy to
implement a software interface that can throw on video, from this signal, a request
message of maintenance.
3. The exchange of information in entrance and in exit is full managed by 2 sockets, one of 6
poles for input and control signals (RS 485 ModBus) and one of 4 poles for output signals
(anomalies signals).
4. The alarms are split up into type and marked through 2 clean contact usually opened:
5. Rl1 Maintenance alarm periodic/replacement: It is enabled after not less than 1000 hours
of functioning to indicate the necessity of a periodic cleaning of plasma generators or after
not less than 14000 hours to ask the substitution of generators themselves.

6. Rl2 broken alarm: It is enabled if the control voltage in HV generators gets out from a
defined range.
7. Two leds, with two different colors, in the electronic card inside the module provide
indications of the type of the active alarm.
8. It exists a relay that allows to activate or disactivate the sanitization through Modbus
protocol:
9. 3. Rl3 (f oUT) activation Generator of HV.
10. There is a serial line RS485 with Modbus protocol (4800N81) for the programming of the
main parameters and the remote diagnosis of the equipment.
C. Monitoring:
1. The device shall provide an interface to the Building Management System (BMS) with the
common protocol RS485 ModBus protocol (4800N81)
2. All operating conditions alarm codes and system settings shall be transferred to the BMS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The NTP sanitization device shall be mounted in an accessible location inside the building
B. Do not put the device in places where there are flammable gases, acidic, aggressive and
corrosive substances that can damage the various components beyond repair.
C. Provide a minimum clearance, in order to install the device and carry out routine and special
maintenance.
D. The electrical wiring shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendation and comply with
applicable local, state and national codes. In addition, power supply and connecting cables
shall be mechanically protected with help of corrugated tubes or aluminum pipes. Regular
fixation of tube and pipe shall be foreseen.
E. The device must be installed in strict accordance with the instructions contained in this
manual.
F. Wear suitable accident prevention clothing when installing the device, such as: goggles,
gloves, etc. as instructed in standard 686/89/EEC and subsequent amendments.
G. While performing installation, operate in full safety, in a clean environment clear of
obstructions.
H. Comply with the laws in force in the country in which the device is installed, regarding the use
and disposal of the packaging and products used for cleaning and servicing the device;
I. You should also observe the recommendations given by the manufacturer of such products
before switching the device on check the integrity of the various components and of the
electrical mains to which it is connected, making sure that it is fitted with a circuit breaker
upstream of the power line as shown in this manual.
J. Never insert objects of any kind into the device, as coming into contact with live parts or
electrical terminals may cause fires or electric shocks.
K. Do not service or clean the device without first unplugging it from the mains.
L. Worn or damaged parts must only be repaired or replaced by qualified staff and by following
the instructions given in this manual.
M. The spare parts must be approved by the Manufacturer.
N. In the event of decommissioning or disposing of the device, follow the anti-pollution
regulations set out by the country in which the device is installed.
O. In doing puncture in walls be sure of not interfere with electric ropes, plumbing and whatever
can be damaged.
P. Do not pour water or any kind of liquids on the device.

Q. Place the device so that the power cable cannot be stepped on.
R. Do not connect the device to power lines connected to any other electric utilities or devices.
S. Use the type of power supply shown on the label. If you are not sure about the type of power
supply available, ask your local retailer or electricity provider for assistance.
T. Do not touch the inside of the device, unless specified otherwise in the instructions contained
in this manual.
U. Never force the components when assembling: although it is made with high strength
materials, the parts of the device can be damaged if handled incorrectly.
V. Do not try to perform maintenance work on the device, except where specified in the
dedicated technical manual.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Connect the device to the mains using the power cable with suitable cross- section.
B. Connect the alarm contact to the machine's control system.
C. Connect to the mains supply, the device is ready to work.
D. In order to turn on the device act on the red switch 0/I turning it to I; you will hear a slight
hissing sound coming from the plasma tubes and the corresponding LED will light up,
indicating that the unit is switched on.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
A. Routine maintenance every not less than 1000 working hours: cleaning of the plasma
emitters
B. Special maintenance every not less than 14000 working hours: replacing of plasma emitters
C. Spare parts and consumables shall be available at manufacturer.
D. Initial spare parts and consumables shall be supplied according to the recommended spare
parts list.
E. One-year warranty on all parts shall be given.

SECTION 23 57 19
PLATE TYPE LIQUID –TO-LIQUID HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Perform all Work required to provide and install plate and frame heat exchangers,
accessories and trim indicated by the Contract Documents with supplementary items
necessary for proper installation and operation.
A. References:
1. ASME Section II – Material Specification
2. ASME Section V – Non-Destructive Testing
3. ASME Section IX – Welding and Brazing Qualifications
4. ASME – Pressure Vessel Code
5. ARI Standard 400 – Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers
B. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified
C. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
D. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and
A. The plate heat exchanger manufacturer shall have an established and on-going QA/QC
program including manuals available for inspection at the plant.
B. The plate and frame heat exchanger manufacturer shall have an extensive background and
experience in the design and fabrication of plate heat exchangers. The manufacturer shall
have fabricated plate heat exchangers for a minimum of ten (10) years.
23 57 19 Plate Type Liquid-to-Liquid Heat Exchangers Rev.00 Page 1 of 6

C. ARI Certification:
1. Plate heat exchanger shall be certified according to ARI Standard 400 and listed on the
ARI Prime Net site (www.ariprimenet.org). If heat exchanger is not ARI certified, then the
manufacturer shall provide an independent third party field performance test using
mapped ratings and tolerances of ARI Standard 400 to verify performance to
specification. Any and all cost associated with correcting a non-performing heat
exchanger to meet performance requirements shall be the responsibility of the supplier.
Any cost associated with the field performance test shall be included in the price of the
heat exchanger.
2. [Alternate for non-certified ARI exchangers: If exchanger is not ARI certified, then the
manufacturer shall provide 110% of the heat transfer area of an ARI certified heat
exchanger and provide written verification of performance to the specification. Any and
all cost associated with correcting a non-performing heat exchanger to meet the
performance requirements shall be the responsibility of the supplier.]
D. ASME Certification: The complete assembly shall be factory assembled and tested in
accordance with ASME Code, Section VIII, Division I, and furnished with ASME Code
Certification (VI Form) for design pressures as specified in this Section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Record Documents:
1. Submit Shop Drawings and product data for manufactured products and assemblies.
2. Indicate empty and operating weights, frame length, height, plate width, and clearance
dimension requirements, locations and size and rating of flanged connections. Provide
certified performance data heat exchanger hot and cold inlet and outlet water
temperatures, flow rates, the design approach temperature, the pressure differential at
the design flow rates as shown on the Drawings.
3. Submit design, manufacturing and material data in sufficient detail to verify that heat
exchangers meet or exceed specification requirements.
4. Submit test reports of heat exchanger pressure tests.
5. Submit manufacturer's operating maintenance and installation (IOM) instructions

including recommended insulation type, thickness and jacket material.
6. Submit samples of plates, gaskets and nuts and bolting materials for each heat
exchanger size.
1. At Substantial Completion, the contractor shall submit operation and maintenance data
that includes Start-up and shutdown instructions, assembly Drawings, and recommended
spare parts lists from the manufacturer.
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to the Project Site under provisions of Division 01
and Division 00.
B.
C. Protect internals from entry of foreign material by temporary caps on flanged openings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and
local requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Furnish and install plate and frame heat exchangers designed with manufacturer's standard
fouling allowance and guaranteed to perform to the capacities and pressure drops at the fluid
temperatures and flow rates as scheduled. The maximum allowable water pressure drops for
the cold and hot sides shall not exceed 10psi.
C. The plate & frame heat exchanger shall be shipped completely assembled, free standing,
pressure tested at factory, flushed and cleaned and dried, ready for connection at jobsite.
D. Where field erection is required, the manufacturer shall pressure test units at factory, flush
and clean and dried, then knock-down and properly crated and marked for erection at jobsite.
Manufacturer’s supervision will be required at jobsite and warranties as factory assembled
units remain in effect.
E. Units shall be pressure rated for 150 psig cold (distribution system side) and [300] [150] psig
hot (building side).
F. The plate unit shall be designed to withstand full design pressure in each circuit
independently The entire unit shall be hydrostatically tested according to ASME Code, Sect.
VIII, Div. 1 for 1.3 x design pressure at maximum working temperature.
2.2 FRAME COMPONENTS
A. The frame shall be a single pass design with all inlet and outlet connections on the fixed
cover.
B. The fixed and movable covers shall be of sufficient thickness for design pressure and code
requirements and shall have no welded reinforcements or stiffeners.
C. The frame assembly shall be of bolted construction to allow field erection on the site, where
required. Welded frame assemblies are not acceptable.
D. The movable cover shall be provided with steel roller bearing for units greater than 50” in
height (from bottom of feet) and for units with port sizes 3” and larger. This allows the
removable cover to be moved without additional rigging or handling equipment.
E. The frame assembly’s upper carry and lower guide bars shall be designed to allow for
minimum of 25% plate expansion.
F. The portion of the top carrying bar system which comes in contact with the plates shall be
stainless steel to prohibit corrosion and facilitate movement of plates. Painted or plated
surfaces are not permitted.
G. Provide carbon steel frames, cleaned of mill scale, primed and painted with two (2) coats of
baked epoxy enamel.
H. Provide a minimum of two (2) lifting lugs per frame for units with 6 inch ports and larger and
designed for lifting assembled flooded unit’s flooded weight.
2.3 PLATES
A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel heat transfer plates with herringbone corrugations designed
to provide support to adjacent plates to allow pressurization of each circuit to a full differential
with no pressure on the adjacent plate channels without deformation of the heat transfer
plates.
B. All plates shall be permanently marked to identify quality and material.
C. All ferrous materials in contact with fluids on the hot and cold sides shall be Type 316
stainless steel.
D. Each heat transfer plate shall have built-in self-aligning system to accurately locate plates in
the frame assembly and prevent lateral movement and maintain maximum gasket contact
under pressure.
E. Plates shall be reinforced on the upper and lower mounting slots to avoid bending on the
plates.
F. Overall plate area should be increased by 10% to account for fouling that will occur as the
heat exchanger is being used.
G. Heat transfer plates shall include tapered gasket grooves and shall receive standard IIB
finish.
H. Provide OSHA compliant aluminum splashguard over channel plate rack and shroud around
plate pack.
2.4 GASKETS
A. Gaskets shall be one piece molded nitrile (NRB) rubber compatible with the fluid shown on
the plan and schedule and suitable for working temperature up to 250 degrees F. Gaskets
shall fit around the heat transfer area and the port holes without the need for glue or
adhesive.
B. Gasket shall be permanently marked to indentify quality and material.
C. Gasket to have reliving grooves in the double gasketed areas to prevent any cross-
contamination between the hot and cold fluids and cause leak to flow outside of unit.
D.
2.5 NOZZLES
A. Provide flanged nozzles (sized as shown on Drawings) on end frames designed for system
working pressures as specified. Nozzle velocities shall not exceed 10 fps at the maximum
rate of heat transfer as scheduled on the Drawings.
2.6 BOLTS
A. Compression bolts shall not require the special tools and shall be equippedwith lock washers
at the movable cover to facilitate opening and closing of a unit from the fixed cover.

B. Compression bolts shall be equipped with captive nuts at the fixed cover and threaded nuts
at the removable cover. Welding of the nuts to the closure bolt is prohibited.
C. Compression bolts shall be high tensile strength carbon steel. Both the fixed and free nuts
shall be heavy duty carbon steel. The nuts and washers shall be cadmium plated and the
bolts shall be coated with molybdenum grease for rust protection. Provide plastic sleeve to
protect bolts.
D. Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and double-width hex nuts to
distribute the load, plus ball bearing box washers at all critical closing bolts on all units
greater than 50” in height.
2.7 NAMEPLATES
A. Each exchanger shall have a stainless steel nameplate permanently attached to the frame.
The nameplate shall be mounted off the surface of the heat exchanger to permit the
application of 2-inch thick insulation.
B. Nameplate brackets shall be fabricated from thermally nonconductive materials to eliminate

sweating.
C. The nameplate shall include as a minimum, the following data stamped on the face of the
nameplate:
1. Project name.
2. Customer order number.
3. Equipment designation.
4. Year manufactured.
5. Hot and cold side design.
a. Temperatures.
b. Working pressures.
c. Design flow rates.
d. Pressure differentials at design flow rates.
6. All information required for plate pack compression.
7. Model and serial numbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local requirements,
referenced standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published IOM and

recommendations.
C. Provide a competent, factory trained representative to completely supervise the installation

and to perform all on-Site tests.
D. Install to permit disassembly of plate pack with minimum disturbance to piping and
equipment.
E. Support heat exchangers on 6-inch housekeeping pads.
F. The plate heat exchanger shall be tested to full test pressure of 1.3 times the design pressure
in one circuit with zero pressure in the alternate circuit.
G. Hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1, paragraph UG-99.
H. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drains.
I. Pipe drain and vent valves to nearest floor drain.
J. Fabricate and install a galvanized steel drip pan with a 1-inch drain pipe routed to the nearest
equipment floor drain. The dimensions of the drip pan shall be wide and long enough to
capture a fluid leak coming from the plate pack.
K. Provide thermometers, wells and temperature and pressure indicating gauges in supply and
return piping at the hot and cold side connections of the exchanger.
L. Insulate the heat exchanger frame and plate shroud as required to prevent condensation on
cold surfaces.
3.2 INSITU FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Each non-ARI certified plate heat exchangers shall undergo a field performance test using
the mapped ratings, limits and tolerances of ARI Standard 400 to verify performance to
specification.
B. Include in the bid price a independent third party field performance test for each plate heat
exchanger in accordance with ARI Standard 400 procedures and tolerances
C. Field test instrumentation shall be per ARI Standard 400 and the calibration of all
instrumentation shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.
D. Notify the Owner fourteen (14) calendar days in advance to witness the field performance
test.
E. A certified test report of all data shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to Substantial
Completion. An officer of the manufacturer’s company shall sign the field certified test report.
Preprinted certification will not be acceptable; certification shall be in the original.]
END OF SECTION
23 57 19

SECTION 23 74 13
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 25 00 00 Section "Building Management System" for control wiring and

control devices connected to energy recovery units.
2. Division 23 05 48 Section “Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping &
Equipment” for Vibration Isolation.
B. This Section includes the following: Air to air energy recovery units.
C. Heat exchanger components, including but not limited to, fans, filters, coils, energy
recovery, vibration isolation, bases, sheet metal accessories, and controls are specified
elsewhere in Divisions unless otherwise indicated.
D. The general requirements for the components sections shall apply.
E. Submit for review pressure, volume and horsepower curves for each unit fan in addition to
all other performance data. Fan performance data shall be AMCA certified and shall bear
the AMCA certification label.
F. Provide an allowance for one sheave for each fan of each air to air recovery unit during
balancing procedures.
G. All fans shall be belt drive; fan and motor shall be properly aligned at the factory. Refer to
Specification Section 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation.
H. Construction of air to air energy recovery unit components including but not limited to intake
plenums, discharge plenums, damper and mixing sections, and access sections shall be the
same construction as the air to air energy recovery unit casing.
I. Variable speed drives shall be factory supplied, shipped loose for installation by the
contractor as per Division 40 97 00.
J. As per the special Requirements in view of the Corvid Pandemic, requirement to implement
the following air filtration requirements in public area AHU, FAHU and PAU for all the new
projects:
1. High holding capacity medium efficiency pre-filter

2. High efficiency final filter
3. UV disinfection using non thermal plasma technology (refer Section 23 42 00)
23 74 13 Packaged, Outdoor, Central Station Air Handling Units Rev.00 Page 1 of 11

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of air to air energy recovery unit indicated. Include the
following:
1. The unit to be Eruovent certified as whole.

2. Unit dimensions and weight.
3. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

4. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated (fans to

be AMCA certified).
5. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
6. Fan construction and accessories.
7. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.
8. Material gages and finishes.
9. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated (Coils to
be ARI certified).
10. Filters with performance characteristics.
11. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
and rails, and base weights.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Submit with Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and
relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show
support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field
measurements.
D. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From manufacturer.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements
2. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
3. AMCA 300 - Test Code for sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
4. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
5. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louver, Dampers, and Shutters.
6. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
7. ANSI/AFBMA 11- Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
8. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
9. ARI 410 - Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
10. ARI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units.

11. ARI 435 - Standard for Application for Central-Station Air-handling Units.
12. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
13. EN 1886 - Ventilation for Buildings – Air Handling Units – Mechanical Performance.
14. EN 13053 - Ventilation for Buildings – Air Handling Units – Rating and Performance
for Units, Components and Sections.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined British
Standards and Electricity Local Authorities or in by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Capacity ratings for energy recovery devices shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
D. NFPA Compliance: Modular air to air energy recovery units and components shall be
designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in relevant Divisions.
B. Coordinate installation of equipment supports.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified.

2. Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
3. Wheel Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each heat wheel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.

2.2 FRESH AIR HANDELING UNIT
A. Air to air energy recovery units shall be custom-built type, conforming to the requirements of
the drawings and specifications.
B. Units shall be factory assembled in modules in the unit manufacturer's plant. Units shall be
assembled complete with components arranged as indicated on the drawings and described
herein. Components shall be enclosed in casings constructed of insulated double walled
panels.
C. Fresh air handling unit shall be dual heat wheel (latent and sensible) in order to maintain the
fresh air supply temp and humidity as close to the set point in respective of outside
condition.
D. Unit Construction
1. Unit Base
a. Each unit shall be constructed on a 200 mm full perimeter structural steel base,
fully galvanized. The base shall be braced to support internal components and
equipment maintenance personnel without sagging or pulsating.
b. The floor shall be minimum 2mm checker plate and 1.5mm base aluminum or
GI.
c. The unit base perimeter shall have a channel continuously welded to the floor
for support. Channel shall be minimum 200 mm deep.
d. The base underside shall be insulated with a vapor barrier. Bases shall
incorporate lifting lugs, minimum four (4) per modular section..
2. Casing
a. Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with removable panels.
Removal of side panels must not affect the structural integrity of each module.
The casing must be able to withstand up to six inches positive or four inches
negative static pressure. All exterior wall panels shall be made of minimum 20-
gauge G90 galvanized steel. Closed-cell foam gaskets shall be provided
where modules are joined. Casing shall be painted with baked enamel paint.
b. Unit shall be double-wall constructed to prevent fibreglass erosion into the air
stream and to allow cleaning of the unit interior. Interior wall shall be two
inches thick of either 20-gauge solid or 18-guage perforated plate galvanized
steel. Foil faced insulation is not acceptable.
c. Condensate drain pan under cooling coils shall be insulated Single skin
stainless steel construction. Drain connections are to be provided on both
sides of the unit.
d. Interior of all units shall be coated with Bronze-glow anti-corrosion coating Bly
gold or two layers of epoxy coating. Coatings shall be factory applied.
e. Unit shall be internally insulated with 50mm thick 4.5 pound density rigid
neoprene coated fibre glass insulation and lined with perforated sheet metal
liner attached to casing. All connecting channels shall be insulated to prevent
sweating. Insulation shall meet NFPA-90A requirements and should have a
minimum thermal bridge of TB2.
f. Access doors minimum size 900mm H x 600mm W shall be provided for motor
access and coil access. Access doors shall be gasketted and attached to
casing using piano hinges. Vent locks shall be provided on doors.
g. All panels shall be flush fitting into the frame and close upon an effective
rubber gasket or O-ring fixed to provide an air tight seal. Panels shall be
securely fixed by captive locks requiring the use of a special key to open from
inside the unit.
h. All doors shall be open able with keys or tools from the inside in the event of
being accidentally closed.
i. Access panels shall be fitted with lift off type heavy duty hinges and fridge type
handles. Where hinged access panels are not suitable then the panels shall be
retained by captive screw up latches to be complete with lifting handles. Hinge
positions and handle locations to be standardized on all similar units to enable
panels to be interchangeable on similar type units.
j. Test holes shall be provided in each casing before and after each coil. These
holes shall be plugged by rubber grommets when not in use.
k. The casing panel to the fan sections shall include a glazed view ports. Within
the sections, lighting shall comprise a bulkhead luminaries with fluorescent
lamp to be externally switched from a fixed panel.
l. The power supply to the lamp switch shall be derived from a 6A MCB, to
comply with local regulations and European Standards, located within the
control panel serving the air handling unit.
m. Provide minimum 300 wide hinged access panel between each section of the
unit
E. Cooling Coil Section
1. Provide cooling coil section with coil capacity as indicated on the drawings. Coil
section shall have a 304 stainless steel coil rack supporting each coil, insulated
airtight baffle, and condensate drain panel for each coil.
2. Provide continuous circuit coil fabricated according to AHRI410, Self-draining coil

fabricated according to AHRI 410.
a. Piping Connections: Threaded, on same end.

b. Tubes: Minimum 1.6 mm diameter, 0.6mm thick copper,
c. Fins: Minimum 0.15 mm thick aluminium
d. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.
e. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints.
f. Frames: Stainless steel, 1.58 mm
g. Raings: Design tested and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.
0
1) Working Pressure Ratings: 1380 kPa, 163 C
h. Source Quality Control: Test to 2070 kPa and to 1380 underwater.
3. Drain pan shall be 304 stainless steel and extend a minimum of 50 mm upstream and
extend a minimum of 200 mm downstream from the face of the cooling coil for the
intermediate drain pan and 910 mm from the face of the cooling coil for the main floor
drain pan. Drain pans shall be individually piped to the air handling unit drain pan.
Intermediate drain pans and troughs shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
4. Coil rack shall allow any one coil to be removed through the unit casing normal to the
direction of air flow without disturbing any other coil. Provide removable access panel
on one side of cooling coil section.
F. Construction: Copper tubes and aluminum fins, fabricated with capillary wick structure, filled
with refrigerant, and sealed; mounted in galvanized steel flanged casing, with airtight
partition between airstreams.
1. Refrigerant: ASHRAE 15, Group 1.
G. Control: Provide integral plenum containing gasketed face-and-bypass opposed-blade

dampers, with rods extended outside casing for damper operator and linkage.

H. Filter Sections
1. Provide final filter sections with stainless steel or aluminum holding frames complete
with two sets of filters. Size, type and quantity as scheduled on the drawings. See
Section 23 41 00 for filter specifications.
2. Unit manufacturer shall provide a magnehelic pressure gauge for indication of filter
pressure drop. See Section 23 05 19 for pressure gauge specification.
I. Supply / Exhaust Fan Section
1. Fan sections shall have Type B double width backward curved centrifugal or plenum
fans as indicated on the drawings. The fan and motor shall be factory mounted on a
spring inertia type vibration base. See Section 23 05 48 for base type. Base shall
have an internal adjustable motor base.
2. Unit shall be provided with a factory-mounted flexible connection between fan and
discharge wall. Provide one additional set of sheaves for each fan as required to
balance the air to air energy recovery unit.
3. Provide unit with a removable panel on each side of the fan section for removal of fan
or motor.
4. Provide unit with lubrication lines extended to access side of unit casing outside.
Lines shall be prepacked with grease at the factory and terminate outside the casing
with an approved grease fitting.
5. Refer to Specification Section 23 05 48 for acceptable fan vibration levels.
J. Access Panels and Doors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation.

Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.
b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's
internal components. Minimum size shall be 600 mm wide by 1500 mm high or
full size of casing section, whichever is smaller.
d. Provide removable panels where indicated on drawings and specified herein.
Access doors and removable panels shall be double sealed and guaranteed
tight.
2. Access Doors:
a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge

and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange
doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.
b. Each access door shall have a window. Access door windows downstream of
cooling coil shall be double pane.
c. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
K. Electrical Requirements
1. General
a. Unit manufacturer shall provide electrical work listed below. Each shipped
section shall be prepiped and prewired to one identified feed location on the
outside of the unit casing.
b. Wiring shall be in conduit with copper wire.

2. Light Fixtures
a. Light fixtures shall be vaportight incandescent marine type guarded service

light fixture, 100 watts each, (A-21) R.S. bulb.
b. Each section shall have one (1) light fixtures.
3. Light Switches
a. Light switches shall be bell box with stainless steel cover plate
b. Each section shall have a light switch on exterior of casing located beside non-
hinged side of access door.
4. Electrical Outlets
a. Electric outlets shall be duplex snap cover (waterproof).

b. Each unit shall have an electrical outlet located on the inside of the unit casing
located on the non-hinged side of the access door to the fan.
L. Accessories:
1. Plenums with access doors.

2. Drain pans for condensate removal, pans to be stainless steel.
M. Factory Testing - Air to air energy recovery units
1. Contractor shall provide factory visit and Accommodations for Engineer to witness
factory testing of one unit, selected by the project engineer.
2. Factory run test the complete unit as an assembly to insure structural integrity and
design suitability under simulated operating conditions. Unit shall be completely
bolted together. The test shall be conducted to examine unit operation as a system
and minimum vibration levels as specified.
3. Assemble unit at the factory. Operate, inspect, and determine compliance with the
specifications. Correct deviations found and retest if directed by the engineer.
4. Refer to Specification Section 23 05 93 for additional requirements for the factory
performance test, as a minimum, the following tests shall be performed:
a. Conduct an air pressure test with the fans operating to insure tight housing
construction and integrity. The positive pressure side of the unit casing shall
be positively pressurized to the shutoff head capacity of the supply fans and
shall be inspected for leaks or distortion. Visible distortion shall be corrected
and leakage detected shall be stopped by sealing. The negative side casing
shall be negatively pressurized to the shutoff head capacity of the supply fans
and shall be inspected for leaks and distortion. Correct as above. Maximum
casing leakage shall be 0.5 percent of total air to air energy recovery unit
supply volume at design pressure.
b. Energize electrical devices as components to insure operational integrity prior
to the unit shipment. Replace non-functional items and certify, in writing, that
such replacements have been undertaken and are in proper operational order.
c. Submit unit housing panel acoustical performance test prior to unit shipment.
d. Submit unit housing physical properties test data prior to unit shipment. The
test data report, conducted and certified by an acceptable independent
laboratory using the applicable ASTM methods, shall be incorporated into each
set of the Operating and Maintenance Manual.
e. Provide deflection testing of casing panels to verify performance in accordance
with performance requirements.
f. Verify coil performance to rated conditions.

g. Conduct airflow tests on the supply and return, outside, airstreams at the rated
design airflow pressure condition under normal modes. Conduct test
procedures for airflow in accordance with the recommendations of AMCA
Standard 210. The system design static pressure shall be simulated by
employing a suitable transition and appropriate duct length with a variable plug.
Submit a detailed system airflow test plan to the owner’s Representative for his
review prior to conducting the factory test. The Owners Representative or his
designated representative may witness the factory test at his discretion.
Electrical power to and power factor of motors shall be metered during the test.
h. Submit a report and incorporate into operating and maintenance manual all
tests outlined above.
i. Unit Start-Up: After equipment installation is complete, provide a factory trained
service engineer to inspect the installation and supervise the startup and
checkout of the equipment. Provide tools and test equipment required to
conduct the startup and checkout.
2.3 Energy Recovery (Thermal) Wheel
A. General:
Thermal wheels shall be included within all fresh air handling units unless stated otherwise;
The principle use of the thermal wheels is the recovery of total energy from extract airflow
prior to exhausting to atmosphere and transference of the recovered energy to pre-cool the
fresh air. The extract and fresh airflows shall be in a counter-flow arrangement
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s performance data to demonstrate conformance to

the schedules regarding capacity and efficiency.
B. Rotor:
The energy recovery wheel shall be assembled from smooth and corrugated sheets of alumi-
num interleaved in a winding to form the wheel, creating a large number of axial passages
through which the air flows. Passages must pass 800 to 1000-micron particles. A smooth
flange shall be attached to the outer diameter of the wheel where the peripheral seal is in-
stalled. Sensible heat-recovery wheels shall be manufactured of aluminum treated for corro-
sion resistance.
The rotor will be mounted on a hub shaft and bearing arrangement that can be removed if re-
quired without removal of the rotor. Also as standard the rotor cassette unit comes complete
with adjustable purge sector, rotor drive motor and belt together with wear resistant contact
seals.
Wheel surfaces are to be ground and polished smooth for long seal life and to prevent annu-
lar cross contamination between the air streams.
Wheels less than 175cm wheel diameter shall be factory assembled tested and shipped as
one piece; wheels of more than 175cm in diameter shall be of segmented construction, with a
minimum of four sections. Wheels of more than 290cm in diameter shall be of segmented
construction, with a minimum of six sections. Sections shall be supported in place as pie
segments contained by peripheral channels formed together, and to adjoining sections, and,
to the hub. The design shall be such that bypassing of air around the peripheral channels
shall not occur. Segmented wheel shall be readily removable in the field and may be shipped
in sections after factory assembly and testing.

Wheels shall be capable of withstanding cleaning by vacuum cleaner, with a water and deter-
gent wash, compressed air, or low-pressure steam.
C. Desiccant:
The desiccant used is a patented system using a non porous SO3Na type resin neutralized
from an ion exchange group. The resin has no micro pores unlike that of zeolites (3angstrom)
and silica gel and does not attract organic compounds and odors Water molecules have high
polarity and are attracted to the + - ions of the resin and transferred inside the resin by osmo-
sis pressure and stored as hydrated free water, increasing its vapour pressure to equilibrium
When the resin comes in contact with air at a lower vapour pressure (exhaust air), de-
adsorption occurs and the transfer of water molecules.
Enthalpy heat and humidity recovery wheels shall be manufactured of aluminum treated for
corrosion resistance and shall include a low co-adsorption ion exchange resin media to ad-
sorb and transfer humidity in the vapor phase. The substrate and resin shall be coated with a
permeable anti-mold/mildew treatment. Wheels shall be capable of withstanding cleaning by
vacuum cleaner, with a water and detergent wash, compressed air, or low-pressure steam.
D. Cassette:
The cassette of the rotary heat exchanger shall have a built-in purge section providing a min-
imum cross contamination of exhaust air. The cassette shall be constructed of a minimum 18
GUAGE steel to ensure rigidity and stability. Casing side panels shall be removable to provide
easy access to internal parts.
E. Purge:
Cassette shall be complete with a built-in purge section to prevent carry-over of exhaust air to
the supply air stream.
F. Seals:
Supply and exhaust air streams shall be isolated from each other by means of adjustable
seals secured to the cassettes panels and duct dividers. Seals shall consist of a double layer
of neoprene wiper seals. The seals shall be installed in contact with the wheel flange in order
to minimize leakage between the supply and exhaust air systems.
G. Connections:
The cassette casing shall include turned-in flanges to permit field attachment of the supply
and exhaust ductwork.
H. Corrosion Resistance:
All metal parts exposed to the air streams shall be painted with one coat of primer and one
coat of corrosion resistant paint or coated by the powder coated method.
I. Wheel Drive:
The wheel shall be supported by ball bearings and driven by a belt or chain around the
external circumference of the wheel powered by a variable speed drive system. The
motor shall be rated for a 220-240/1/50 power supply, the motor drive assembly shall be
factory mounted. Typical rotational speed for optimum performance shall be 15-22rpm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 23 33 00
Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.
Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
D. Examine roughing-in for condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to
verify actual locations of connections before installation.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
F. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air to air recovery units for
service and maintenance.
G. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
H. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters. Temporary
filters shall utilize meet or exceed the MERV value of the permanent filter requirements.
I. Install magnetic filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount
filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter
gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream
of filters.
J. Adjust fan speeds to handle the air quantity listed on the drawings.
K. Operate the unit through control sequences and measure outlet temperatures to verify
proper operation.
L. Measure fan motor current draw to verify that motor is not overloaded.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct and fan installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and equipment installation, including electrical connections.
Report results in writing.
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
4. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B. Components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and
inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.

instructions.
2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections
to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-
overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
8. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
9. Install new, clean filters.
10. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
conditions.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit
and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units
internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels,
cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

to adjust, operate, and maintain units.

SECTION 23 81 26
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning consisting of separate evaporator-fan and

compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed
mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1. Division 23 05 48 Section " Vibration and Seismic Control of HVAC" for isolation
pads, spring isolators, and seismic restraints.
2. Division 23 38 00 Section "Digital Control Equipment" for control devices not
packaged with units.
3. Division 23 50 00 Section "Mechanical Sequence of Operation" for control sequences
affecting operation of units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil
for cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.
B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains
a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
requirements, and electrical characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in maintenance

23 81 26 Split System Air-conditioners Rev.00 Page 1 of 5

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined by DEWA
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: One year from date of substantial completion, warranty shall include all
parts and labors, except compressors, warranty period shall be 5 years.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

2. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
D. Fan Motor: Multi speed, PSC type.

E. Disposable Filters: 25 mm thick, in fiberboard frames.
F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.2 WALL- OR CEILING-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends, and discharge drain
pans with drain connection.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multi speed electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted.
D. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor

shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and
contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll type for tonnage 3 & above.

2. Single Speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
ARI 210/240, and with liquid sub cooler. Condenser shall be quoted with factory applied
coating for corrosion resistance and shall be warranted for 5years
D. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type directly connected to motor.
E. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
F. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage with sub base to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator

fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting.

C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices

securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install compressor-condenser components on 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete base; 100

mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in
Division 3, "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D. Install roof-mounted compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-
plated fasteners.
E. Connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing

to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.

C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the

following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining units.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
Maintenance Data."
notice.
END OF SECTION
23 81 26

SECTION 23 82 19
FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
B. Related Sections
1. 23 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
2. 23 0529 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
3. 23 0800 - Commissioning of HVAC
1.3 REFERENCES STANDARDS
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall
be applicable to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements
and standards addressed within all references.
D. BS 4856 Methods for testing and rating fan coil units, unit heaters and unit coolers
E. BS 7671:2008+A1:2011 – Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring Regulations.

Seventeenth edition.
F. EUROVENT 6/3 Thermal test method for Fan Coil units
G. EUROVENT 8/2 Acoustical testing of Fan Coil Units in reverberation room
H. EUROVENT 6/9 Thermal test method for Ducted Fan Coils
I. EUROVENT 6/10 Air Flow test Method for Ducted Fan Coil Units
J. EUROVENT 8/12 Sound test method for Ducted Fan Coil Units
K. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
L. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning.
23 82 19 Fan Coil Units Rev.00 Page 1 of 9

A. The manufacturer and specific model offered shall be Eurovent Certified.
B. Factory must be ISO‐9001 certified.
C. Units shall be capable of meeting the performance requirements indicated when operating
against the required external air side resistance. Performance figures shall be in
accordance with BS 4856 Parts 1 to 4 as appropriate to the unit selection. Independently
certified thermal,
D. hydraulic, air flow and acoustic data for each type of unit shall be submitted to the Engineer
before orders are placed.
E. Prior to fan coils being ordered sample units shall be provided to Engineer for approval. The
samples shall be of a size selected by the Engineer, the selection being representative of
the sizes and types to be supplied. The sample units shall be maintained on site as a
benchmark for evaluation of the units installed.
F. Units shall be selected to meet the required duty and noise levels when operating at
medium speed unless otherwise stated.
G. Unit Shall be selected to meet the required capacity with minimum 4 row coil suitable for
district cooling application with chilled water delta T of 9°C.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor to provide the following information as part of a complete and comprehensive

technical submittal:
1. Rated capacities
2. Operating characteristics
3. Testing certificates
4. Detailed assembly drawings
5. Dimensions
6. Weights
7. Required clearances
8. Method of field assembly
9. Components
10. Wiring Diagrams (Power, Signal & Control)
B. Product Data: Include specialties and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed
units.
5. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
F. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
G. Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in British
Standards and ADWEA or by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
-12
B. Provide in-duct sound power levels (dB re 10 W) measured at the air inlet and outlet of the
fan coil unit (after attenuation if necessary) and the casing-radiated sound power levels, for
the maximum design fan speed. Data to be obtained in accordance with the following, or
other equivalent, standard which can separate casing-radiated/inlet noise from
discharge/outlet noise:
C. BS 4856-4 (or AHRI 440) Methods for testing and rating fan coil units, unit heaters and unit
coolers. Determination of sound power levels of fan coil units, unit heaters and unit coolers
nd
using reverberation rooms (2 Method).
D. EN ISO 3741 Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound
pressure. Precision methods for reverberation rooms. If tests are carried out to EN ISO
n
3741 (2 Method - ducted discharge), the duct end correction can be calculated using EN
5135.
E. EN ISO 3744 Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound
pressure. Engineering method in an essentially free field over a reflecting plane.
F. EN ISO 3746:1996 Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using
sound pressure. Survey method using an enveloping measurement surface over a reflecting
plane.
G. EN ISO 5135 Acoustics. Determination of sound power levels of noise from air-terminal
devices, air-terminal units, dampers and valves by measurement in a reverberation room.
H. AHRI STANDARD 260-2001 Sound rating of ducted air moving and conditioning equipment.
I. ANSI S12.34-1988 (R 1997) Engineering Methods for the Determination of Sound Power
Levels of Noise Sources for Essentially Free-Field Conditions over a Reflecting Plane.
Casing radiated / inlet sound power levels and outlet (discharge) sound power levels should
be presented separately.

J. Tests to be done for low, medium and high speeds.
K. In the event of an installed fan coil unit failing to meet the specified acoustic performance,
the Contractor shall include for provision of necessary remedial works or replacement units
to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or Acoustic Consultant.
L. All fan coil units serving rooms that need to achieve < NC/ NR 35 / 40 shall be installed on
vibration isolating mounts to ensure that structure-borne noise does not exceed the
specified noise criteria. Refer to Acoustic performance specification for a schedule of room
required NC values.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt for each unit installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Units shall be horizontal or vertical as indicated. Horizontal units shall be arranged with the
filter and coils on the fan suction side of the unit. Vertical units shall have the coil face and
fan discharge sufficiently separated to ensure adequate development of the air-stream to
permit an even velocity distribution across the coil face.
B. The control valve assembly shall comprise pressure independent control valves, pressure
tappings, isolating valves, drain cocks all as indicated or otherwise stated. The valve
arrangement shall be as detailed elsewhere.
C. Provide a flushing bypass on each fan coil unit to enable the chilled water and heating water
systems (where applicable) to be thoroughly flushed clean without passing dirty water
through the coils.
D. Each fan coil unit is to be complete with a unique identification reference label fitted at the
manufacturer’s works. The identification reference shall be clearly visible through the
wrapping. The text and method of reference shall be as agreed with the Engineer prior to
ordering and shall be utilised in the record documentation.
E. Provide access panels for inspection of all moving parts in a safe manner.
F. Fan coil units shall meet the EMC regulations as stated elsewhere.
G. The limiting specific fan power (W/litre s-1) at the design flow rate for fan coil units shall be
no higher than 0.8 (rating weighted average).

2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and
motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic, direct-expansion cooling coil and hydronic
heating coil and electric heating coil as per drawings and schedules.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: 12.7mm PU Insulation
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a maximum flame-
spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed rating of 50, conforming to NFPA 90A.
C. Drain Pans: shall be made of stainless steel with connection for drain. Drain pan shall have a
removable plastic liner or be easily cleanable, and shall be insulated with polystyrene or
polyurethane insulation. Drain pan and liner shall be formed to slope from all directions to
drain connection.
1. Drain pans shall be one piece and positioned to collect and retain all condensate
generated by the coil and valve assemblies. The bottom of the pan shall be graded in
both directions towards the drain connection. A drain connection shall be provided,
capable of adequately discharging condensate to waste without allowing condensate
to collect in pockets or remain as standing water in the drain pan.
2. Where the connection cannot be taken from the bottom of the pan a local sump shall
be formed in the bottom of the pan and a side outlet drain connection provided.
3. The entire underside of the drain pan shall be insulated with closed cell insulation
material fire rated Class ‘O’. Drain pans shall be fabricated from non-corrosive
material against corrosion as stated elsewhere.
4. Drain pans shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to setting the units to work.
5. The operation of condensate pumps shall be checked by pouring a small quantity of
water into the drip tray prior to setting the units to work.
A. Cabinet, Exposed FCU: Double Skin, 1mm/1mm thick in/out, galvanized steel with
removable front panel with concealed latches.
1. Mounting: Wall or Floor.

2. Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, with baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard
paint. Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard color chart.
3. Discharge Grille and Access Door: Punched-louver discharge grilles allowing 4-way
discharge air pattern, with hinged door on front panel of unit for access to controls.
B. Cabinet, Concealed FCU: Single skin, 1.2mm thick galvanized steel with removable access
panels.
1. Mounting: Suspended.
C. Cabinets, Ducted FCU: Single skin, 1.2mm thick galvanized steel with baked- enamel finish,
removable access panels, and manufacturer's standard paint color.
1. Mounting: Suspended
3. Supply-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis.
4. Return-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis.
5. Dampers: Galvanized steel with extruded-vinyl blade seals, flexible-metal jamb
seals, and interlocking linkage.
2.2 WATER COILS
A. Cooling Coil: Internally grooved, copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins
spaced no closer than 2.5 mm.
B. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 2068 kPa and a maximum entering
water temperature of 135 deg C.
C. Provide manual air vent at the highest point of each coil.
D. Cooling coils shall be four rows minimum.
E. Coil water velocities shall be no greater than 1.5 m/s and air velocities no greater than 2.5
m/s at the specified speed unless otherwise stated.
F. Coils shall be selected so that the waterside pressure drop does not exceed 5 kPa on
heating coils or 15 kPa on cooling unless otherwise stated.
G. Each coil shall be fitted with a manual air vent positioned to eliminate all air from the units.
H. Vents shall be extended to the unit casing allowing ease access after installation and shall
not be hindered or restricted by the valve sets.
I. Coils shall be manufactured from seamless copper tube with aluminium fins. Fins to be
punched with die formed collars to afford maximum heat transfer surface area with the
tubes. All coils are to be unhanded and circuited to optimise output but ensure free venting
and free draining. Coils shall as a minimum be constructed from 3/8 copper tubing with 0.1
mm thick aluminium fins at a pitch of 2.1 mm (12 fins per inch). For locations with a saline
environment, where a proportion of untreated outdoor air is supplied to the unit or if the
project boundary is within 1 km of coastline the fins shall be coated aluminium, copper, or
tinned copper.
J. Maximum air velocity across the coils shall be 2m/s to minimize risk of carry over.
K. The manufacturer shall provide independent test certificates showing the chilled water delta
T under design selection conditions. In high delta T applications (>7°C) the Engineer shall
witness factory performance tests. The contractor shall allow for all testing and witnessing
expenses (minimum 4* Accommodation and Business class travel)
L. The number of coil rows shall be as required to achieve the required sensible and latent
cooling capacities
M. Every coil should be leak tested using dry air under water to 20 bar. Every coil to valve
connection should be tested under water.
2.3 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized
steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to motor.
B. Fans shall be directly driven, forward curved, double inlet width (DIDW) centrifugal type and
capable of delivering the required air volume against the external resistance as indicated.
Bearings shall be sealed for life.
C. The fan layout and suction chamber design shall be arranged to provide as even a velocity
profile as possible across the coil.
2.4 FAN MOTORS
A. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed, external rotor type with standard overload protection and
comply with BS 5000 and BS EN 60034. Fan motors shall be 4-pole with IP44 rating.
B. Each fan shall have its own resiliently mounted motor. The fan and motor unit shall be
statically and dynamically balanced.
C. Transformers shall be provided as necessary to give the correct electrical supply to the unit
controls
D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.5 FILTERS
A. Each fan coil unit shall be complete with a replaceable or cleanable air filter panel, as
indicated, located at the inlet section.
B. Filters shall be contained in lightweight frames arranged to facilitate replacement. They shall
seal positively against sealing strips fixed to the unit. Filters shall be capable of being
removed without contacting the dirty media. Access to the filter shall be obtained without
major dismantling of the unit, ceiling where applicable or connecting ductwork.
C. Prior to practical completion all fan coil unit filters shall be cleaned or replaced with new as
applicable.
D. Adequate spare replaceable or cleanable filter media shall be provided to permit

replacement of all filters. Filters shall be from 6 mm thick synthetic washable filter media in a
metal frame to provide ease of cleaning. New media shall be provided at practical
completion for each filter.
E. Air filters shall have a performance classification of grade 3 when tested in accordance with
BS EN 779 unless otherwise indicated i.e. EU3 80–90% average arrestance.
2.6 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Two-Pipe, Valve Cycle: Wall mounted thermostat, fan to run continuously and cycles
normally closed control valve.
B. The thermostat shall be digital type, with a clear backlit digital display, has an ON/OFF
switch, and has a 3 speed control switch to control the fan speed.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and rate units according to AHRI 440.

B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
fan-coil unit installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls of HVAC."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to
match lighting controls.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections “Hydronic

piping & Hydronic piping specialties”. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:

1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning u n i t s . Retest as specified above after repairs o r

replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
Maintenance Data."
notice.
END OF SECTION
23 82 19

SECTION 40 97 00
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This specification describes the electrical and mechanical requirements for three phase AC
Variable frequency drives (variable frequency drives) and harmonic mitigation equipment as
specified herein and shown on the contract drawings.
B. The Variable frequency drive (VFD) manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary
controls specified herein. The manufacturer shall have been producing this type of equipment for
a minimum of ten (10) years.
A. Drawings and general provision of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
1.3 REFERENCES
A. IEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
1. Standard 519-1992, International Harmonic Standards.

B. UL and cUL - Underwriters’ Laboratory
1. UL508C, governing Variable frequency drives in the United States and Canada.
C. IEC – International Electro-Technical Commission
1. IEC 16800, governing international standards for Variable frequency drives.

2. IEC 60529, Classification of Degrees of protection provided by Enclosures.
D. BSEN – British Standard Europaische Norm
1. BSEN 61000-3-2: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (greater than 16A and less than
75A)
2. BSEN 61000-3-12: Limits for Harmonic Current Emissions (less than 16A)
40 97 00 Variable Frequency Drives Rev.00 Page 1 of 8

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval:
1. Scope of project, highlighting the bill-of-material for approval

2. Terminal block and customer connection diagrams
3. Electrical diagrams demonstrating power connections of key components
4. Dimensional outline drawings, including approximate weight
5. Provide harmonic mitigation equipment specified later in this section.
B. The following will be submitted to the Engineer upon project completion:
1. Final as-built drawings

2. Installation and Operation manuals
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty shall be 24 months from the date of provisional handover of all the works.
B. Warranty shall include all parts, labor, and the service technician’s travel and living expenses for
the entire 24-month period.
A. The VFD Manufacturer shall furnish the following:
1. Complete VFD’s ready for installation.

2. A complete set of submittals as described herein.
3. All engineering and installation services as described herein.
4. All startup services as described herein.
5. Instructions to the Owner as described herein.
6. Owner's Manuals, complete operation instructions, and spare parts lists as described
herein.
B. The work by the MEP Contractor generally includes the following:
1. Provide the VFD Manufacturer with a complete set of approved shop drawings for each
pump and fan that will be driven by the VFD’s. Shop drawings will include pump and fan
curves with operating points designated and will also include the motor shop drawings. (V
belt drive losses will be assumed to be in accordance with AMCA Standards for fans.)
2. Provide all delivery and assembly work using appropriate tradesmen as required. In
addition, if the VFD’s require any assembly or are delivered in more than one piece per
VFD, all assembly and wiring inside the cabinets shall be provided. This wiring shall not
include wiring to external control devices that are provided by the building automation
system supplier.
3. Provide level housekeeping pads in accordance with the VFD Manufacturer's shop
drawings.
4. Provide all interconnecting control wiring between the VFD’s and the building automation
system.

a. Note all control wiring shall be tagged near terminal strip connections and checked
by the VFD Manufacturer to verify proper connection to individual terminal strips.
5. Provide the Electrical Contractor with shop drawings of the VFD’s for installation.
6. Provide the VFD Manufacturer with electrical single line drawings of the facility power
distribution and other electrical data required for the VFD manufacturer's harmonic
analysis.
7. The MEP Contractor shall verify the compatibility of VFD’s selected with the motors
selected before ordering.
C. The work by the Electrical Contractor will include the following:
1. Once delivered to the site, provide all handling and installation of the VFD’s.
2. Provide all power wiring between the power sources and the VFD’s and between the VFD’s
and the motors.
3. Jog each motor and verify proper motor rotation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Variable Frequency Drives
1. The VFD’s shall be rated for 400VAC input voltage as shown on the drawings. The VFD
shall provide microprocessor-based control of 3-phase induction motors.
2. The VFD shall be a solid-state design, utilizing PWM (pulse-width modulation) to convert
utility input power to anVariable frequency output.
3. The VFD shall utilize soft-switching IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors) and be
capable of operating without damaging the insulation in a IEC induction motor with a drive
to motor lead length of 90 meters. If output filters are required to meet this requirement
they must be a low pass type installed in series with the VFD output terminals and
specifically designed to reduce voltage waveform dV/dT. Output line reactors will not be
accepted.
4. The controllers’ full load current ratings shall be based on a variable torque application,
110% overload for 1 minute, in a maximum 40°C ambient environment.
5. The VFD’s continuous full load amp rating shall meet or exceed the full load current values
for the driven motor after de-rating the ASD for the ambient temperature requirements of
this specification and the VFD carrier frequency settings that have been made to eliminate
audible motor noise.
6. For the purposes of audio noise reduction in the driven motor, the VFD’s carrier frequency
shall be Variable from .75 kHz up to a minimum of 6 kHz for all drive sizes in this
specification. VFD’s with fixed carrier frequency below 5 kHz will not be accepted.
7. The controller and all the options listed in this specification shall be housed in a self
contained IP 55, steel enclosure.
8. The VFD shall include, within the drive enclosure, all necessary components to meet the
National Electric Code requirement for full branch circuit protection.
9. The VFD’s shall have efficiency at full load and speed greater than 96%. Efficiency shall
exceed 90% at 50% speed and load.
a. The VFD’s shall operate in humidity of 5 to 95%, non-condensing.

b. The VFD’s shall operate without fault in altitudes up to 1000 meters above sea level.

10. The VFD shall include the following features as standard:
a. All printed circuit boards in the VFD shall be protected with a factory applied
conformal coating.
b. Regardless of horsepower size, drives shall have a 3% input line reactor or a 3% DC
link reactor provided as an integral part of the AFD and it shall be mounted within the
drive enclosure.
c. All VFD’s shall have the same operator interface/keypad regardless of horsepower
rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote monitoring and control,
and provide a copy feature to copy parameter values from one drive to another.
d. The keypad shall offer an alphanumeric LCD display that uses plain English for set-
up, programming, and monitoring. A large four-digit LED display shall also be
utilized to provide a readable display from a reasonable distance.
e. The keypad shall use Hand-Off-Auto functionality to provide easy transfer from
different operating modes. The keypad will offer one-touch speed set when
operating in Hand mode.
f. The VFD’s shall provide the follow displays or meters:
i. Output frequency
ii. Motor speed (RPM)
iii. Motor speed (Percent)
iv. Motor current
v. Motor power (KW)
vi. DC bus voltage
vii. Output voltage
g. The VFD’s shall operate continuously without fault with input voltages of 400VAC -
15%/+10%, or 200 VAC – 15% / + 10% respectively.
h. The VFD’s shall be suitable for use on circuits delivering up to 100,000 AIC RMS
symmetrical, 400V maximum.
i. The VFD’s shall start into a spinning load, when required, without fault.
j. The VFD shall be able to provide continuous full load motor current while operating
in an ambient temperature range of from -10 to 40°C.
k. The VFD’s shall be able to operate with an IGBT switching frequency up to 15 kHz
for drives below 30 hp/22 KW @ 460v, up to 10 kHz for drives greater than 30 hp/22
KW up to 100 hp/75KW @ 400v, and up to 6kHz for all drives over 100 hp / 75 KW
@ 400v. Drive shall be capable of producing continuous full load motor current
across the entire switching frequency range.
l. The VFD’s shall accept 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA input reference signals without the need
for jumpers
m. The VFD’s shall be protected against the following conditions:

i. Over current
ii. Over voltage
iii. Under voltage
iv. Input phase loss
v. Incoming surge
vi. Output phase loss
vii. Inverter over temperature (heat sink over temperature)
viii. Motor stalled
ix. Motor overload (over temperature)
x. Motor under load (broken belt/shaft)

xi. Ground fault

xii. Logic board failure
11. The VFD’s shall have a highly flexible programming environment, with the following basic
programmable features:
a. Separately Variable acceleration and deceleration points, with two independent sets
and a configurable range of .01-3600 seconds.
b. In the event a speed follower signal is lost, the VFD’s shall have the programmable
option of having the drive stop and display a fault, running at a preset speed, or
running at the least known speed of the good signal.
c. The VFD’s shall offer PID control as standard with fully configurable proportional,
integral, and derivative gains. The set point shall be Variable from the keypad,
analog input, or through communication protocols.
d. The VFD’s shall utilize ‘bump less’ transfer for HOA, allowing the VFD to switch
between local and live remote speed settings without faulting and without the use of
additional relays.
e. The VFD shall have programmable inputs and outputs:

i. Analog Inputs
a) 0-10VDC
b) 4-20mA
ii. Outputs
a) Form C fault relay
b) Programmable form A relay
c) Two (2) open collector
12. Other Features
a. Input circuit breaker with handle interlocked with the enclosure door.
b. Drive shall be enclosed in a steel enclosure to reduce EMI/RFI and insure protection
from access to energized components.
c. Control Power Transformer to utilize 220V control.
d. 3 contactor bypass
i. Standard features
a) Drive input, drive output and bypass circuit contactors, sized per IEC
ratings.
b) Control of the bypass shall utilize a large mimic diagram utilizing
indicator lights for status and a switch for Inverter-Off-Bypass selection.
c) Bypass design must have coordinated circuit configuration
13. Fieldbus options
a. Manufacturer shall be capable with communicating with the building DDC system.
Provide gateway as required. Coordinate with DDC system manufacturer.
b. See BMS drawings for VFD – BMS interface output requirements.
14. Spare Parts

a. Provide one set of fuses or overloads that naturally fail due to faults within the power
distribution system or at the motor for each VFD provided.
15. Labeling
a. Provide plastic laminated name tags for each VFD. Refer to Section 15054 for
additional requirements. Name tags shall include fan or pump name and tag
number, e.g.:
i. Supply Fan SF-3
ii. Chilled Water Pump P-6
2.2 HARMONIC MITIGATION FILTER
A. General
1. All PWM AC variable frequency drives shall be equipped with harmonic mitigation
equipment to prevent power system problems resulting from high levels of harmonic
distortion.
a. The harmonic mitigation equipment and all of its components shall be manufactured
and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of UL, IEC and BS.
b. Demonstration of compatibility between the harmonic mitigation equipment and the
VFD must be available upon request.
c. Harmonic mitigation equipment shall be warranted to be free of defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of 24 months from the date of provisional handover of
all the works.
d. Factory Performance Testing: Manufacturer must be capable of factory testing for
harmonic mitigating performance and energy efficiency under actual variable
frequency drive loads. A detailed description of the program and a sample test
report must be provided at time of quotation.
B. The harmonic mitigation equipment shall treat all of the characteristic low frequency harmonics
generated by a 3-phase, diode bridge rectifier load (5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, etc.).
C. The characteristic harmonics shall be suppressed without the need for individual tuning or the
requirement to phase shift against other harmonic sources.
D. Harmonic mitigation shall be by passive inductor/capacitor network or internal phase shifting
transformer. Active electronic components shall not be used.
E. Power factor shall be .98 lagging to .95 leading in operating range from full to half load.
F. To ensure compatibility with engine generators, the harmonic mitigation equipment must never
introduce a capacitive reactive power (kVAR) that is greater than 15% of its kVA rating.
G. The harmonic mitigation equipment shall not resonate with system impedances or attract
harmonic currents from other harmonic sources.
H. The harmonic mitigation equipment in combination with the variable frequency drive shall meet all
requirements as outlined in the 1992 edition of IEE Standard 519 for individual and total harmonic
voltage and current distortion. The point of common coupling (PCC) for all voltage and current
harmonic calculation and measurements shall be the input terminals to the harmonic mitigation
equipment.

I. Total Harmonic Voltage Distortion (THVD) shall meet the requirements of IEE Standard 519 by
not exceeding 5% and by limiting the individual harmonic voltage distortion to less than 3%.
These limits shall apply while operating on either utility supply or generator supply when
applicable. The harmonic mitigation equipment vendor shall not be responsible for pre-existing
voltage distortion caused by other harmonic sources.
J. Total Demand Distortion (TDD) of the current at the input terminals of the harmonic mitigation
equipment shall not exceed the limits as defined in IEE Standard 519. For Isc/IL ratio <20, TDD
must be less than 5%. For all other Isc/IL ratios, the TDD must not exceed 8% even when
Table 10.3 allows for more relaxed limits. For single-phase applications, the TDD must not
exceed 12%.
K. The full load efficiency of the harmonic mitigation equipment/VFD combination shall be greater
than 96%. The harmonic mitigation equipment itself shall have efficiency no less than 99%.
L. Basic Requirements
1. All wiring shall be copper.

2. Insulation class: 220°C system. Temperature rise: 130°C
3. Anti-vibration pads shall be used between the reactor or transformer core and the
enclosure.
4. Ventilated, sprinkler proof IP 45 enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall furnish VFD’s for installation by the electrical contractor. The electrical
contractor shall install the VFD’s in accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendation as
outlined in the instruction manual.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Compatibility of the VFDs and the Motors for the
pumps.
C. The electrical contractor shall complete power wiring. The electrical contractor shall install the
VFD’s in accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendation as outlined in the instruction manual.
D. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible for startup, warranty, training, and spare parts.
A. Commissioning of the VFD’s shall be done by an authorized service representative to assist the
contractor with start-up of the equipment specified under this section.
3.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT
A. The manufacturer of the VFD’s shall have factory-trained application and service personnel that
are thorough versed in the operation of the drive equipment, available by phone or email for
immediate assistance.
3.4 TRAINING
A. The contractor shall provide a training session for owner’s representatives.

B. The training shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s authorized representative and shall
include:
1. Instructions on the proper operation of the equipment

2. Instructions on the proper maintenance of the equipment
3.5 START-UP SERVICE AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. The VFD Manufacturer shall provide start-up service for each VFD on the project. In providing
this service, it shall be expressly understood that the VFD Manufacturer's representative shall be
present during initial equipment startup and shall sign a startup data sheet or checklist for each
VFD. Do not initially energize any VFD except in the presence of the VFD Manufacturer's
representative.
B. The start-up service shall include the following:
1. Verify all control and power wiring connections.

2. Check power lugs on source and load sides and tighten as required.
3. Jog each motor to verify proper rotation.
4. Start and operate the VFD including fan or pump.
5. Operate each safety device. Repair each device as required.
6. Physically check each fan and VFD at start-up and shut down to insure no abnormal or
problem conditions exist.
7. Following successful start-up of the VFD’s, the manufacturer's representative shall provide
a minimum of 16 hours instruction to the Owner's operators. Training will consist of one or
two separate sessions, dates selected by the Owner.
C. The start-up service by the VFD Manufacturer shall also include a one-week period for
simultaneously monitoring the incoming power and the load side power to problem drives with
Dranetz meters.
1. It shall be the VFD Manufacturer's responsibility to prove that the problems exist outside of
the VFD itself, i.e., to prove the VFDitself is not at fault.
2. Should this testing prove that the problems exist inside the VFD, this service shall be
performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Should this testing prove that the problems exist outside of the VFD, i.e., problem is with
electrical distribution system or with motor or with the fan/pump, the testing costs shall be
borne by the responsible trades.

SECTION 25 00 00
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General

Requirements are part of this specification and shall be used in conjunction with this section
as part of the contract documents. All specifications require review for impact and
requirements related to this section.
1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Division 23, Section “Hydronic Piping”:
1. Flow meters (Air, Water, Steam)

2. Pressure and temperature sensor wells & sockets
B. Division 23, Section “Duct accessories”:
1. Airflow Stations
1.3 PRODUCTS NOT FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BUT INTEGRATED WITH THE WORK
OF THIS SECTION
A. Integrated System Coordination:
1. Coordination Meetings:
a. The Installer furnishing the Building Management System (BMS, also “BAS” or
“DDC Network”) shall meet with the Installer(s) furnishing each of the
integrated systems to coordinate details of the interface between these
products and the DDC network.
b. The Owner or his designated representative shall be present at these
meetings.
c. Each Installer shall provide the Owner and all other Installers with details of the
proposed BMS integration of his system, including hardware and software
identifiers for the interface points, network identifiers, wiring requirements,
communication speeds, and required network accessories.
d. The purpose of these meeting shall be to insure there are no unresolved
issues regarding the integration of these products into the BMS.
e. Submittals for these products shall not be approved prior to the completion of
these meetings.
2. Integrated Systems (noting primary specification sections):
Integrated System Primary Specification Section Title

Access control Access Control System
CCTV Video Surveillance
Elevators Electric Traction Elevators
Fire alarm system Intelligent Fire Alarm and Detection
25 00 00 Building Management System Rev.00 Page 1 of 49

System with Integrated Digital Audio

Specification
VFD (or, “VSD”, “VVVF”) Variable Frequency Drives
BTU (heat transfer) meters
Gas systems Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)
Fuel system (leak Fuel Oil System
detection)
Water meters Meters and Gauges
Water treatment system HVAC Water Treatment
Generators Packaged Engine Generators
Energy meters Compact Power Meters
Interior lighting system Interior lighting System
Exterior lighting system Exterior lighting System
Low voltage switchgear Low Voltage Switchgear
Medium voltage switchgear Medium Voltage Switchgear
Automatic transfer Automatic Transfer Switches
switches
Capacitor banks Capacitor Banks
Central battery system Emergency Lighting System
a. Other systems as shown in control schematic and details, and as referred to by

primary specification sections mentioned
b. Other sections and drawings may be necessary to describe mentioned
systems. All documentation to be obtained from system installer prior to
coordination meeting.
B. Communications with Third Party Equipment via software interfaces:
1. Any additional equipment control systems associated with work of this section shall be
furnished with an open HVAC protocol interface for integration into the BMS described
in this section. Refer to BMS block diagram for systems requiring such software
interfaces.
2. It is the responsibility of the BMS contractor to inform equipment suppliers of the

protocol to be used and the interfaces necessary.
3. Systems requiring server-to-server integration shall communicate over the IP network.

BMS supplier’s programming team shall coordinate with integrated system’s
programming team to ensure that required data (points, alarms, etc) is accessible to
the BMS. Accessible data may be requested by the BMS server at any time, and the
integrated system’s server shall be configured to push data to the BMS in a
time/event-driven scheme.
4. The BMS System should have its own control stations (DDC). However, control
operations / communications shall be through building fire optic network (Structural
Cabling network) under one back bone. As such, the contractor shall allow in his
scope of work for supply and installation of all necessary data point (structural cabling
points) required for integration of BMS system as part of structural cabling pacakage.
5. The BMS system shall be proposed with open protocol to integrate all the energy
conserving devices, Equipment’s and lighting control system in the building via smart
building platform. As such, the contractor shall allow in his scope of work for supply
and installation of all necessary hardware, software, gateways, cabling etc. required
for integration of BMS with building Smart system plat form.

1.4 DEFENITIONS
A. Abbreviations used in this document are explained as follows:
AHU Air Handling Unit
BACnet Building Automation Control Network
BPC BACnet Plant Controller
BMS Building Management System
BMSS Building Management System Supervisor
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
I/O Input and Output
LAN Local Area Network
PC Personal Computer
Mode of communication between controllers in which each

controller connected to the network has equal status and each
Peer to Peer
controller shares its database values with all other controllers
connected to the network.
Proportional-Integral-Derivative control. Control mode with

continuous correction of final controller output element versus
PID
input signal based on proportional error, its time history (reset)
and rate at which it's changing (derivative).
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement, manufacturer

PICS self-declaration of the BACnet functionality implemented in a
product.
VAVC VAV Controller
UPS Un-interruptible power supply
UUC Universal Unitary Controller
WAN Wide Area Network

1.5 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. The intent of the BMS specification is to provide a fully integrated Building

Management System, with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-
2001 BACnet™, MODBUS™, OPC, and other open as well as proprietary
communication protocols into one open, interoperable system.
2. The BMS shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network. Three levels of network
devices shall allow full control of building systems through a web-based operator
interface.
a. Level One: Servers and operator interfaces, including file servers,

workstations, laptops, handheld devices, webpage access, and software
programs.
b. Level Two: Primary network designed in strict compliance with ASHRAE’s
BACnet standard 135, to provide full and open interoperability between
different building subsystems. The Level Two network shall use open BACnet
network types and protocols exclusively. Non-BACnet-based or combinations
other than BACnet IP systems are not acceptable.
c. Level Three: Field devices and application specific controllers running on open
HVAC protocol, monitored and controlled by Level Two equipment. See
Appendix A for allowable open HVAC protocols. All Level Three data shall be
convertible to BACnet/IP on Level Two with no data loss.
3. The BMS shall provide control, alarm detection, scheduling, reporting and information
management for the entire project from a single ODBC-compliant database.
4. The contractor must provide PC-based programming workstations, operator

workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed
processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and
processing/control functions.
B. Level One: Servers and Operator Workstations
1. Dedicated BMS Server
a. Server will manage BMS network, store the ODBC database, and store all
long-term logs. Server shall also manage and serve web-based users.
b. Server shall be rack-mounted and installed in main server room.
c. Server shall be dedicated for the BMS.
1) Server may be used for “integrated BMS” control, managing subsystems

not covered by this section, if these systems are installed and configured
by the same supplier and subcontractor.
2) Integrated BMS is subject to approval by the Engineer and local
authorities.
2. Administration and Programming Workstations.
a. The BMS Contractor shall furnish Administration and Programming

Workstation computer(s) and printer(s) as shown in the BMS drawings.

b. These workstations must be running the standard workstation software

developed and tested by the manufacturer of the network controllers and the
standalone controllers.
c. No third party front-end workstation software will be acceptable.
d. Workstations must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device profile.
3. Web-based Operator Workstations
a. The BMS Contractor shall furnish licenses for 5 concurrent users to the BMS
system.
b. Web-based users shall have access to all system points and graphics, shall be
able to receive and acknowledge alarms, and shall be able to control setpoints
and other parameters.
c. The web-based interface must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device profile.
C. Level Two: Primary System Controllers
1. Level Two devices shall be native BACnet/IP, connecting directly to the server over
Ethernet at minimum 100Mbps (or per the rated speed of the data network).
2. Level Two devices shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory
(BTL) as Building Controllers (B-BC).
3. Ethernet-based Network Controllers (NCs)
a. The BMS Contractor shall furnish network controllers as necessary to support

all integrated systems listed above and on the BMS schematic.
b. Network controllers shall serve as gateways to link non-BACnet/IP Level Three
devices to the main BACnet/IP network. They shall be capable of
communication with all proposed open HVAC protocol BMS devices without
additional adaptors or converters.
4. Direct Digital Controllers (DDCs)
a. BMS Contractor shall furnish DDCs as necessary to meet the requirements of

the project for major equipment control including air handlers, central plant
control, and terminal unit control.
b. Each DDC will be capable of standalone operation, containing all of the I/O and
programs to control its associated equipment, and continue logging in case of
loss of network connection.
c. All major plant equipment (Chillers, Air Handling Units (AHUs), Energy
Recovery Units (ERUs), Chilled Water Pumps (CWPs), supply and extract
fans, and plumbing system pumps) shall connect to the DDC without need for
any gateways or converters, such that the sequence of operation shown in the
control details and recommended by the plant supplier is fully implemented.
Such equipment shall function as BACnet Broadcast Management Devices
(BBMDs).
d. A single DDC shall be capable of performing monitoring and control for both
equipment software interfaces and direct hardwired twisted pair connections.
D. Level Three: Application Specific Controllers and Field Devices
1. Level Three devices include purpose-designed controllers for single piece of

equipment, and field devices with software interfaces for communication with the
BMS.

2. Level Three devices shall be connect to the primary NCs over open HVAC protocol
bus at minimum 78.6 kbps. All devices of a given category shall be of the same
protocol to prevent unnecessary additional network controllers. Categories:
a. Electrical: energy meters, CBS, generators, etc
b. Mechanical: FCU controllers, VAV controllers, etc
c. Plumbing: water meters, pumps, water treatment devices, etc
3. Level Three devices shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory
(BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) or Application Specific Controllers
(B-ASC).
1.6 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. BMS WAN Segmentation
1. The BMS shall be capable of being segmented, through software, into multiple virtual
control zones across a single WAN.
2. Segmentation shall enable each workstation to manage a single virtual zone (or
building), and/or the entire system with all devices being assured of being updated by
and sharing the most current database.
B. Standard Ethernet Network Support
1. All Level One and Level Two devices shall be native BACnet/IP devices capable of
residing directly on the owner’s Ethernet TCP/IP data network with no additional
protocol conversion or network interfaces.
2. All Level One and Level Two devices shall be capable of using standard,
commercially available, off-the-shelf Ethernet infrastructure components such as
routers, switches and hubs.
3. The owner’s Ethernet TCP/IP data network shall be utilized and extended as wherever
possible to provide BACnet/IP connections to all Level One and Level Two devices.
C. System Expansion
1. The BMS system shall be scalable and expandable to twice its installed capacity at all
levels of the system using the same software interface, and the same Level One and
Level Two hardware. Systems that require replacement of either the workstation
software or field controllers in order to expand the system shall not be acceptable.
2. The BMS shall be expandable to include Security and Access Control functions at any
time in the future with no additional workstations, front-end software or Level Two
controllers required. Ethernet-based security/card access controllers shall be able to
be added to the existing Level Two network, to perform security and card access
applications.
3. Additionally, an integrated video badging option must be able to be included with no
additional workstations required. This photo ID option must share the same database
as the BMS in order to eliminate the need for updating multiple databases.
4. Additional web-based operator licenses shall be added in the field through an upgrade
of the web server’s security key, with no re-programming required.
5. The system shall use the same application programming language for all levels and all
applications.
1.7 APPROVED CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Refer to the approved manufacturers list attached to this specification.

B. No proprietary (closed) protocols are permissible anywhere in the system.
A. Installer and Manufacturer Qualifications
1. Installer shall have an established working relationship with Control System

Manufacturer.
2. Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's control
system training. Upon request, Installer shall present record of completed training
including course outlines.
3. Installer shall have successfully completed no less than five projects of size and
complexity similar to this one. References and site tours shall be provided on request
(at installer’s expense) within two weeks of Engineer receiving tender submission.
4. Installer shall have .
1.9 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the most restrictive of municipal, emirate,
and federal authorities' codes and ordinances or these plans and specifications. As a
minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt
of bids of the following codes:
1. British Standard 7671: Wiring Regulations
2. International Building Code (IBC)
a. Section 719 Ducts and Air Transfer Openings

b. Section 907 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
c. Section 909 Smoke Control Systems
d. Chapter 28 Mechanical
3. International Mechanical Code (IMC)

4. All Level Two and Level Three controllers to be UL Listed.
5. Latest ASHRAE BACnet standard 135
6. Latest standard governing proposed open HVAC protocol(s) to be used for Level
Three devices (see Appendix A).
1.10 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over
network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended
hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based
systems).
1. Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data
within 5 sec.
2. Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data
within 5 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.
3. Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning
points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 5 sec (or
1 sec if configuration is done at the local controller itself).
4. Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec.
Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.

5. Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the
workstation within 2 sec.
6. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of
running as often as once every 2 sec. Select execution times consistent with the
mechanical process under control.
7. Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID
control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times
consistent with the mechanical process under control.
8. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms
within 2 sec of other workstations.
9. Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy
listed in Table 1.
10. Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at
setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.
Table 1
Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy
Space Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Ducted Air Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Outside Air Temperature ±1.0ºC (±2ºF)
Dew Point ±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
Water Temperature ±0.5ºC (±1ºF)
Differential Temperature (Delta-T) ±0.15ºC (±0.25ºF)
Relative Humidity ±5% RH
Water Flow Volume ±2% of full scale
Airflow Volume (VAV terminal Boxes) ±10% of full scale (see Note 1)
Airflow Volume (measuring stations) ±2% of full scale
Airflow Volume (pressurized spaces) ±2% of full scale
Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa (±0.1 in. w.g.)
Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.)
Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)
Electrical (A, V, W, Power Factor) ±1% of reading (see Note 3)
Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ±50 ppm
Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10% - 100% of scale

Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure
Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters

Table 2
Control Stability and Accuracy
Controlled
Control Accuracy Range of Medium
Variable
±50 Pa (±0.2 in. w.g.) 0-1.5 kPa (0-6 in. w.g.)
Air Pressure
±3 Pa (±0.01 in. w.g.) -25 to 25 Pa (-0.1 to 0.1 in. w.g.)
Airflow ±5% of full scale
Space
±1.0ºC (±2.0ºF)
Temperature
Duct
±1.5ºC (±3ºF)
Temperature
Humidity ±5% RH
Fluid ±10 kPa (±1.5 psi) MPa (1-150 psi)
Pressure ±250 Pa (±1.0 in. w.g.) 0-12.5 kPa (0-50 in. w.g.) differential
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to installation, contractor must provide manufacturer’s Protocol Implementation

Conformance Statement (PICS) for workstation software and every controller model that is
to be installed.
Product Submittal Requirements: Meet requirements of Section 01600 on Shop Drawings,

Product Data, and Samples.
1. Provide six copies of shop drawings and other submittals on hardware, software, and
equipment to be installed or furnished. Provide drawings as AutoCAD 2007 (or newer)
compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format: .DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or
comparable). Drawings to be on A3 or larger paper.
2. Begin no work until submittals have been approved for conformity with design intent.
3. When manufacturer's cutsheets apply to a product series rather than a specific
product, clearly indicate applicable data by highlighting or by other means. General
catalogs shall not be accepted as cutsheets to fulfill submittal requirements.
4. Clearly reference covered specification and drawing on each submittal.
5. Select and show submittal quantities appropriate to scope of work. Provide equipment
schedules for items such as valves, dampers, flow stations and VFD’s. Submittal
approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to supply sufficient quantities to
complete work.
6. Submittal shall also include a trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator
workstations, control panel locations and a description of the communication type,
media, and protocol. The Systems Integrator shall be responsible for integrating those
diagrams into the overall trunk cable schematic diagrams for the entire Wide Area
Network (WAN) and/or Local Area Network (LAN) utilized by the BMS.
7. Submittal shall include a complete point list of all points to be connected to the BMS.
The Systems Integrator shall be responsible for integrating those diagrams into the
overall trunk cable schematic diagrams for the entire Wide Area Network (WAN)
and/or Local Area Network (LAN) utilized by the BMS.
8. Submittal shall include a complete point list of all points to be connected to the BMS.
Contractors shall provide necessary point lists, protocol documentation, and vendor
support information for systems provided in their respective divisions but integrated
into the BMS.
9. Submittal shall include a copy of each of the graphics developed for the Graphic User
Interface including a flowchart (site map) indicating how the graphics are to be linked
to one another for system navigation. The graphics are intended to be 80% - 90%

complete at this stage with the only remaining changes to be based on review
comments from the specifier and/or Owner.
10. Submittal shall include samples of written Controller Checkout Sheets and
Performance Verification Procedures for applications for approval.
11. A complete written Sequence of Operation shall be included with the submittal
package. Drawings and documentation shall be submitted in printed and electronic
format. Drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD™ compatible files. Application
software shall be provided on Flash media compact disk.
12. Provide submittals within 12 weeks of contract award on the following:
13. Direct Digital Control System Hardware
a. Complete bill of materials indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number,

protocol details and relevant technical data of equipment to be used.
b. Manufacturer's description and technical data such as performance curves,

product specifications, and installation and maintenance instructions for items
listed below and for relevant items not listed below:
1) Network controllers
2) Direct digital controllers
3) Application specific controllers
4) Other Level Three field devices’ BMS connections
5) Transducers and transmitters
6) Sensors (include accuracy data)
7) Actuators
8) Valves
9) Relays and switches
10) Control panels
11) Power supplies
12) Batteries
13) Operator interface equipment
14) Wiring
c. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel. Show termination numbers
and include device wiring ladder diagrams. Show protocols, gateways,
interfaces, and converters.
d. Floor plan schematic diagrams indicating field sensor locations, controller
locations and transformer locations.
e. Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and
wire types.
14. Central System Hardware and Software
a. Complete bill of material indicating quantity, manufacturer, model number, and

relevant technical data of equipment used.
b. Manufacturer's description and technical data such as product specifications
and installation and maintenance instructions for items listed below and for
relevant items furnished under this contract not listed below:
1) BMS server
2) Operator workstations and laptop computers
a) Including all processor and memory speeds
b) Including storage capacity and all data outputs

3) Handheld operator interface

4) Monitors
5) Keyboards
6) Power supplies
7) Power quality devices (surge protectors, filters)
8) Battery backups (UPS sized for 1 hour of operation, minimum)
9) Interface equipment between CPU or server and control panels
10) Operating system software
11) Operator interface software including web page access
12) Color graphic software
13) Third-party software
14) Color laser printer
c. Schematic diagrams of control, communication, and power wiring for central

system installation. Show interface wiring to control system.
d. Network riser diagrams of wiring between central control unit and control
panels.
15. Controlled Systems
a. Riser diagrams showing control network layout, communication protocol, and

wire types.
b. Schematic diagram of each controlled system. Label control points with point
names. Graphically show locations of control elements.
c. Schematic wiring diagram of each controlled system. Label control elements
and terminals. Where a control element is also shown on control system
schematic, use the same name.
d. Instrumentation list (Bill of Materials) for each controlled system. List each
control system element in a table. Show element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data sheet number.
e. Complete description of control system operation including sequences of
operation. Include and reference schematic diagram of controlled system. List
I/O points and software points specified on BMS drawings. Indicate alarmed
and trended points.
16. Description of process, report formats, and checklists to be used during the control
system demonstration and acceptance.
B. Schedules
1. Schedule of work provided within one month of contract award, indicating:
a. Intended sequence of work items

b. Start date of each work item
c. Duration of each work item
d. Planned delivery dates for ordered material and equipment and expected lead
times
e. Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or situations
2. Monthly written status reports indicating work completed and revisions to expected
delivery dates. Include updated schedule of work.
C. Project Record Documents. Submit three copies of record (as-built) documents upon
completion of installation for approval prior to final completion. Submittal shall consist of:
1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of submittal shop drawings provided as

AutoCAD 2007 (or newer) compatible files on magnetic or optical disk (file format:

.DWG, .DXF, .VSD, or comparable) and 3 prints of each drawing on A3 or larger

paper.
2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of reports,
checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements of “Control System
Demonstration and Acceptance” paragraph below.
3. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. Printed, electronic, or online help
documentation of the following:
a. As-built versions of submittal product data.

b. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of installing contractors and
service representatives for equipment and control systems.
c. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems: logging on
and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data, overriding
computer control, and changing set points and variables.
d. Programming manual or set of manuals with description of programming
language and syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of
point database creation and modification, of program creation and modification,
and of editor use.
e. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals that
explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other hardware;
how to perform preventive maintenance and calibration; how to debug
hardware problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
f. Documentation of programs created using custom programming language
including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object database. Electronic copies
of programs shall meet this requirement if control logic, setpoints, tuning
parameters, and objects can be viewed using furnished programming tools.
g. Graphic files, programs, and database on magnetic or optical media.
h. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
i. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance
information for furnished third-party hardware including computer equipment
and sensors.
j. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating
systems, custom programming language, operator workstation or web server
software, and graphics software.
k. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.
l. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,
including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration; time
between tasks; and task descriptions.
D. Training Materials: Provide course outline and materials for each class at least six weeks
before first class. Training shall be furnished via instructor-led sessions. Engineer will modify
course outlines and materials if necessary to meet Owner's needs. Engineer will review and
approve course outlines and materials at least three weeks before first class.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Warrant works as follows:
1. Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period
of 12 months after final acceptance. Control system failures during warranty period
shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to
Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner's warranty
service request.
2. Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner receives beneficial use due to
early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase
contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.

3. If Engineer determines that equipment and systems operate satisfactorily at the end of
final start-up, testing, and commissioning phase, Engineer will certify in writing that
control system operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms
of this specification. Date of acceptance shall begin warranty period.
4. Provide updates to operator workstation or web server software, project-specific
software, graphic software, database software, and firmware that resolve Contractor-
identified software deficiencies at no charge during warranty period. If available,
Owner can purchase in-warranty service agreement to receive upgrades for functional
enhancements associated with above-mentioned items. Do not install updates or
upgrades without Owner's written authorization.
5. Exception: Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused devices except those
that have been rebuilt or repaired. Installation labor and materials shall be warranted.
Demonstrate operable condition of reused devices at time of Engineer's acceptance.
1.13 OWNERSHIP OF PROPRIETARY MATERIAL
A. Project-specific software, software tools and documentation shall become Owner's property.
This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Graphics & creation/editing software

2. Record drawings
3. Database & creation/editing software
4. Application programming code & creation/editing software
5. Documentation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use new products the manufacturer is currently manufacturing and selling for use in new
installations. Do not use this installation as a product test site unless explicitly approved in
writing by Owner. Spare parts shall be available for at least five years after completion of
this contract.
2.2 COMMUNICATION
A. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall
comprise an open HVAC protocol network. Controller and operator interface communication
shall conform to latest version of open HVAC protocol standards to provide interoperability
between different building subsystems.
B. Extend building data network (Ethernet) as necessary to accommodate Level Two

BACnet/IP devices. Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a
complete and workable control network. Data network extensions serving the BMS shall be
of same rating as the primary data network, ensuring that all BMS BACnet/IP devices
communicate at the rated speed of the building data network. Refer to Technology,
Communications drawings.
C. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop
computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and
other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.
D. Network operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to network architecture.

1. An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface

with every other controller on the network as if directly connected. Controller
information such as data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable
from each network controller.
2. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across
multiple controllers shall be readable by each controller on the network. Program and
test all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies specified in control
details. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by using a
point-and-click interface.
E. Controllers with real-time clocks shall use a time synchronization service. System shall
automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated controller via the
network. If applicable, system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard
time.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Operator Interface. Web server shall reside on high-speed network with building controllers.
Each standard browser connected to server shall be able to access all system information.
In addition to the primary operator interface, the system shall include a secondary interface
compatible with a locally available commercial wireless network and viewable on a
commercially available wireless device such as a mobile phone or PDA. The following
capabilities shall be provided through this interface:
1. An operator authentication system that requires an operator to log in before viewing or

editing any data, and which can be configured to limit the privileges of an individual
operator.
2. The ability to view and acknowledge any alarm in the system. Alarms or links to
alarms shall be provided on a contiguous list so the operator can quickly view all
alarms.
3. A summary page or pages for each piece of equipment in the system. This page shall
include the current values of all critical I/O points and shall allow the operator to lock
binary points on or off and to lock analog points to any value within their range.
4. Navigation links that allow the operator to quickly navigate from the home screen to
any piece of equipment in the system, and then return to the home screen. These
links may be arranged in a hierarchical fashion, such as navigating from the home
screen to a particular building, then to a specific floor in the building, and then to a
specific room or piece of equipment.
5. Text-only version for mobile phones with small displays or low capacity.
B. Communication. Server, workstations, and Level Two controllers shall communicate using
BACnet IP. Web server or workstation and control network backbone shall communicate
using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol.
C. Computers: BMS servers and operator workstations are to be IBM-compatible PC’s.
1. Industry-standard hardware shall be of the latest server specifications at the time of

system installation. Computers shall meet or exceed BMS supplier’s recommended
specifications and shall meet response times specified above. Obtain operator’s IT
and FM departments’ approval prior to purchase.
2. Minimum specs for the server are:
Processor:
a) Intel Core i7 or higher
Operating systems:

b) Windows XP Professional (SP3, 32-bit)

c) Windows Server 2012 Standard/Enterprise (SP2, 64-bit) (R2 as well)
d) Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (32-bit and 64 bit)
e) Windows 8 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (32-bit and 64 bit)
f) Windows 7.1 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (64-bit)
g) Windows 10 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (64-bit)
Memory:
a) 1 GB RAM minimum
b) 2 GB RAM recommended for large systems
c) 8 GB or more recommended for Win 64 bit version
Hard-disk:
a) 1 TB minimum
DVD RW drive
Mouse
Keyboard
Two USB ports
Ethernet network interface card, 10/100/1000 Mbps auto-bauding
Asynchronous serial port
Monitor:
a) Flat panel colour monitor
b) 21” or bigger
c) 1280 x 1024 preset resolution or higher
d) 80 Hz refresh rate
System printer:
a) Laser printer
b) 600 x 600-dpi resolution minimum
c) 60-PPM print speed minimum
d) Ethernet network interface card, 10/100/1000 Mbps auto-bauding
Alarm printer:
a) Dot matrix printer
b) Either 80 or 132 column width
c) USB port interface
3. Anti-virus and firewall to be supplied by IT department.

4. Hard disk shall have sufficient space to store system software, a system database at
least twice the size of the existing database at system acceptance, and one year of
data for trended points. Trended points shall include all physical and integrated inputs
and outputs, as well as control loop set-points at a rate of one sample every 10
minutes.
5. Configure computers and network connections if multiple computers are required to
meet specified memory and performance.
6. Software shall be upgraded during warranty period at no cost to user, to maintain
most current operating system and interface.
7. Contractor is to provide 2 (two) workstations and 1 (one) laptop in the operator room
as well as the server which will be installed in the server room.
8. Workstations and laptop minimum specs:
Processor:
a) Intel Core i7 or higher
Operating systems:
a) Windows XP Professional (SP3, 32-bit)
b) Windows Server 2012 Standard/Enterprise (SP2, 64-bit) (R2 as well)

c) Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (32-bit and 64 bit)

d) Windows 8 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (32-bit and 64 bit)
e) Windows 7.1 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (64-bit)
f) Windows 10 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (64-bit)
Memory:
a) 1 GB RAM minimum
b) 2 GB RAM recommended for large systems
c) 8 GB or more recommended for Win 64 bit version
Hard-disk:
a) 1 TB minimum
DVD RW drive
Mouse
Keyboard
Two USB ports
Ethernet network interface card, 10/100/1000 Mbps auto-bauding
Asynchronous serial port
Monitor:
a) Flat panel colour monitor
b) 21” or bigger
c) 1280 x 1024 preset resolution or higher
d) 80 Hz refresh rate
System printer:
a) Laser printer
b) 600 x 600-dpi resolution minimum
c) 60-PPM print speed minimum
d) Ethernet network interface card, 10/100/1000 Mbps auto-bauding
Alarm printer:
a) Dot matrix printer
b) Either 80 or 132 column width
c) USB port interface
Laptop
a) Processor:
Intel Pentium™ IV, 2 GHz or higher, Core 2 Duo also acceptable
b) Operating systems:
Windows XP Professional (SP3, 32-bit)
Windows Server 2012 Standard/Enterprise (SP2, 64-bit) (R2 as well)
Windows 7 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (32-bit and 64 bit)
Windows 8 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (32-bit and 64 bit)
Windows 10 Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (64-bit)
c) Memory:
8 GB RAM minimum
16 GB RAM recommended for large systems
8 GB or more recommended for Win 64 bit version
d) Hard disk:
1 TB minimum
e) DVD RW drive
f) Mouse
g) Ethernet network interface card, 10/100/1000 Mbps auto-bauding
h) Two USB ports.

D. Operator Functions. Operator interface shall allow each authorized operator to execute the
following functions:
1. Log In and Log Out. System shall require user name and password to log in to
operator interface.
2. Point-and-click Navigation. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall
allow operators to access graphics for equipment and geographic areas using point-
and-click navigation.
3. View and Adjust Equipment Properties. Operators shall be able to view controlled
equipment status and to adjust operating parameters such as setpoints, PID gains, on
and off controls, and sensor calibration.
4. View and Adjust Operating Schedules. Operators shall be able to view scheduled
operating hours of each schedulable piece of equipment on a weekly or monthly
calendar-based graphical schedule display, to select and adjust each schedule and
time period, and to simultaneously schedule related equipment. System shall clearly
show exception schedules and holidays on the schedule display.
5. View and Respond to Alarms. Operators shall be able to view a list of currently active
system alarms, to acknowledge each alarm, and to clear (delete) unneeded alarms.
6. View and Configure Trends. Operators shall be able to view a trend graph of each
trended point and to edit graph configuration to display a specific time period or data
range. Operator shall be able to create custom trend graphs to display on the same
page data from multiple trended points.
7. View and Configure Reports. Operators shall be able to run preconfigured reports, to
view report results, and to customize report configuration to show data of interest.
8. Manage Control System Hardware. Operators shall be able to view controller status,
to restart (reboot) each controller, and to download new control software to each
controller.
9. Manage Operator Access. Typically, only a few operators are authorized to manage
operator access. Authorized operators shall be able to view a list of operators with
system access and of functions they can perform while logged in. Operators shall be
able to add operators, to delete operators, and to edit operator function authorization.
Operator shall be able to authorize each operator function separately.
10. Offline Programming. Programs and configurations shall be revisable whether online
or offline, from any workstation. Setpoints shall be adjustable from any workstation or
through remote web access.
E. System Software:
1. Operating System. Web Servers, Work Stations and Laptops shall have an industry-
standard professional-grade operating systems. Acceptable systems for servers
include Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 or latest Windows server environment.
Acceptable systems for Work Stations and Laptops shall be Microsoft Windows XP
Pro, Windows 7 or latest Windows client environment. Acceptable systems for
handheld operator devices include latest Windows Mobile, or proprietary system if
approved by the Engineer.
2. The software architecture must be object-oriented in design, a true 32-bit application
suite utilizing Microsoft’s OLE, COM, DCOM and ODBC technologies. These
technologies make it easy to fully utilize the power of the operating system to share,
among applications (and therefore to the users of those applications), the wealth of
data available from the BMS.
3. System Graphics. Operator interface shall be graphically based and shall include at
least one graphic per piece of equipment or occupied zone, graphics for each chilled
water and hot water system, and graphics that summarize conditions on each floor of
each building included in this contract. Indicate thermal comfort on floor plan summary
graphics using dynamic colors to represent zone temperature relative to zone
setpoint.

a. Functionality. Graphics shall allow operator to monitor system status, to view a

summary of the most important data for each controlled zone or piece of
equipment, and to use point-and-click navigation between zones or equipment.
b. Format. Graphics shall be saved in an industry-standard format such as BMP,
JPEG, PNG, or GIF. Web-based system graphics shall be viewable on
browsers compatible with World Wide Web Consortium browser standards.
Web graphic format shall require no plug-in (such as HTML and JavaScript) or
shall only require widely available no-cost plug-ins (such as Active-X and
Macromedia Flash).
c. The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays
for the viewing of mechanical and electrical systems, or building schematics.
These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any
attributes associated with the point (engineering units, time scales, etc).
d. The user shall have the ability to import AutoCAD generated .dwg, .dwf files as
background displays.
e. A built-in library of animated objects such as dampers, fans, pumps, buttons,
knobs, gauges, and graphs which can be dropped on a graphic through the
use of a software configuration wizard. These objects shall enable operators to
interact with the graphic displays in a manner that mimics their mechanical
equivalents found on field installed control panels. Using the mouse, operators
shall be able to adjust setpoints, start or stop equipment, modify PID loop
parameters, or change schedules.
f. Status changes or alarm conditions must be able to be highlighted by objects
changing screen location, image, size, color, text, blinking or changing from
one display to another.
g. Ability to link graphic displays through user defined objects, alarm testing, or
the result of a mathematical expression. Operators must be able to change
from one graphic to another by selecting an object with a mouse - no menus
will be required.
h. If separate, provide a copy of the full graphic editing software on each
workstation.
4. System Database
a. The files server database engine must be Microsoft SQL Server, or another
ODBC-compliant, relational database program. This ODBC (Open Database
Connectivity)-compliant database engine allows for an owner to write custom
applications and/or reports which communicate directly with the database
avoiding data transfer routines to update other applications.
b. The system database shall contain all point configurations and programs in
each of the controllers that have been assigned to the network. In addition, the
database will contain all workstation files including color graphic, alarm reports,
text reports, historical data logs, schedules, and polling records.
F. System Tools.
1. The workstation functions shall include monitoring and programming of all controllers.
Monitoring consists of alarming, reporting, graphic displays, long term data storage,
automatic data collection, and operator-initiated control actions such as schedule and
setpoint adjustments.
2. System shall provide mentioned functionality to authorized operators as an integral
part of the operator interface or as stand-alone software programs. If furnished as part
of the interface, the tool shall be available from each workstation or web browser
interface. If furnished as a stand-alone program, software shall be installable on
standard IBM-compatible PCs with no limit on the number of copies that can be
installed under the system license.
3. Automatic System Database Configuration. Each workstation or server shall store on
its hard disk a copy of the current system database, including controller firmware and

software. Stored database shall be automatically updated with each system

configuration or controller firmware or software change.
4. Controller Memory Download. Operators shall be able to download memory from the
system database to each controller.
5. System Configuration. Operators shall be able to configure the system.
6. Online Help. Context-sensitive online help for each tool shall assist operators in
operating and editing the system.
7. Security. System shall require a user name and password to view, edit, add, or delete
data.
a. Operator Access. Each user name and password combination shall have
defined permissions for accessible viewing, editing, adding, and deleting
functions in each system application, editor, and object. Authorized operators
shall be able to vary and deny each operator's accessible functions based on
equipment or geographic location.
b. Automatic Log Out. Automatically log out each operator if no keyboard or
mouse activity is detected. Operators shall be able to adjust automatic log out
delay.
c. Encrypted Security Data. Store system security data including operator
passwords in an encrypted format. System shall not display operator
passwords.
8. System Diagnostics. System shall automatically monitor controller and I/O point
operation. System shall annunciate controller failure and I/O point locking (manual
overriding to a fixed value).
9. Alarm Processing. Alarms will be tested on each scan of each controller. System input
and status objects shall be configurable to alarm on departing from and on returning to
normal state. Operator shall be able to enable or disable each alarm and to configure
alarm limits, alarm limit differentials, alarm states, and alarm reactions for each
system object. High & low alarms shall be provided for all analog signals (physical I/O
and calculated values). All motors shall employ mismatch alarms to indicate when the
system is operating in ‘hand’ or has ‘failed’. All motors and equipment shall generate
runtime maintenance reminders. All critical safeties shall be monitored and alarmed.
Alarm management features shall include:
a. Alarm Messages. Alarm messages shall use an English language descriptor

without acronyms or mnemonics to describe alarm source, location, and
nature.
b. When communication with the Level One network is temporarily interrupted,
the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in the controller. When
communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the Operator
Workstation if the point is still in the alarm.
c. Each point will be associable with up to 8 alarms at once, prioritizable to one of
three alarm notification levels (software should be capable of providing
minimum 255 levels). Each notification level will establish a unique set of
parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard
annunciation, alarm printout and record keeping.
d. Automatic logging in the database of the alarm message, point name, point
value, connected controller, timestamp, username and time of
acknowledgement, username and time of alarm silence (soft
acknowledgement)
e. Automatic printing of the alarm information or alarm report to an alarm printer
or report printer.
f. Playing an audible beep or audio (wav) file on alarm initiation or return to
normal.

g. Sending an email or sms message to anyone listed in a workstation’s email

account address list on either the initial occurrence of an alarm and/or if the
alarm is repeated because an operator has not acknowledged the alarm within
a user-configurable timeframe. The ability to utilize email and sms messaging
for alarms shall be a standard feature of the software integrated with the
operating system’s mail application interface (MAPI). No special software
interfaces shall be required.
h. Individual alarms shall be able to be re-routed to a workstation or workstations
at user-specified times and dates. (For example, a critical high temp alarm can
be configured to be routed to a Facilities Dept. workstation during normal
working hours and to a Central Alarming workstation at all other times.)
i. An active alarm viewer shall be included which can be customized for each
user or user type to hide or display any alarm attributes.
j. The font type and color, and background color for each alarm notification level
as seen in the active alarm viewer shall be customizable to allow easy
identification of certain alarm types or alarm states.
k. The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must type in
text in an alarm entry and/or pick from a drop-down list of user actions for
certain alarms. This ensures accountability (audit trail) for the response to
critical alarms.
10. Trend Configuration. Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of
value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall
be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs.
Controller shall sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive data to the
hard disk. Configure trends as specified.
11. Object and Property Status and Control. Operator shall be able to view, and to edit if
applicable, the status of each system object and property by menu, on graphics, or
through custom programs.
12. Reports and Logs. Operator shall be able to select, to modify, to create, and to print
reports and logs. Operator shall be able to store report data in a format accessible by
standard spreadsheet and word processing programs.
13. Standard Reports. Furnish the following standard system reports:
a. Objects. System objects and current values filtered by object type, by status (in
alarm, locked, normal, disabled, overridden), by equipment, by geographic
location, or by combination of filter criteria.
b. Alarm Summary. Current alarms and closed alarms. System shall retain closed
alarms for an adjustable period.
c. Program listing by controller, with status.
d. Points in each controller.
e. Network status of each controller.
f. Logs. System shall log the following to a database or text file and shall retain
data for an adjustable period:
(1) Alarm History.

(2) Trend Data. Operator shall be able to select trends to be logged.
(3) Operator Activity. At a minimum, system shall log operator log in and
log out, control parameter changes, schedule changes, and alarm
acknowledgment and deletion. System shall date and time stamp
logged activity.

14. Custom Reports. Custom Report Generation
a. The software will contain a built-in custom report generator, featuring word
processing tools for the creation of custom reports. These custom reports shall
be able to be set up to automatically run or be generated on demand. Each
workstation shall be able to associate reports with any word processing or
spreadsheet program loaded on the machine. When the report is displayed, it
will automatically spawn the associated report editor such as Microsoft Word.
b. Reports can be of any length and contain any point attributes from any
controller on the network.
c. The report generator will have access to the user programming language in
order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report,
control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional
information needed by the report.
d. It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is
initiated.
e. Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so that
any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm
condition.
f. The software shall allow the simple configuration of row/column (spreadsheet-
style) reports on any class of object in the system. These reports shall be user-
configurable and shall be able to extract live (controller) data and/or data from
the database. The user shall be able to set up each report to display in any text
font, color and background color. In addition the report shall be able to be
configured to filter data, sort data and highlight data which meets user-defined
criteria.
g. The above spreadsheet-style reports shall be able to be run to an HTML
template file. This feature will create an HTML “results” file in the directory of
the HTML template. This directory can be shared with other computer users,
which will allow those users with access to the directory to “point” their web
browser at the file and view the report.
15. Custom Application Programming. Operator shall be able to create, edit, debug, and
download custom programs. System shall be fully operable while custom programs
are edited, compiled, and downloaded. Programming language shall have the
following features:
a. Language. Language shall be graphically based and shall use function blocks
arranged in a logic diagram that clearly shows control logic flow. Function
blocks shall directly provide functions listed below, and operators shall be able
to create custom or compound function blocks.
b. Programming Environment. Tool shall provide a full-screen, cursor-and-mouse-
driven programming environment that incorporates word processing features
such as cut and paste. Operators shall be able to insert, add, modify, and
delete custom programming code, and to copy blocks of code to a file library
for reuse in other control programs.
c. Independent Program Modules. Operator shall be able to develop
independently executing program modules that can disable, enable and
exchange data with other program modules.
d. Debugging and Simulation. Operator shall be able to step through the program
observing intermediate values and results. Operator shall be able to adjust
input variables to simulate actual operating conditions. Operator shall be able
to adjust each step's time increment to observe operation of delays,
integrators, and other time-sensitive control logic. Debugger shall provide error
messages for syntax and for execution errors.

e. Conditional Statements. Operator shall be able to program conditional logic

using compound Boolean (AND, OR, and NOT) and relational (EQUAL, LESS
THAN, GREATER THAN, NOT EQUAL) comparisons.
f. Mathematical Functions. Language shall support floating-point addition,
subtraction, multiplication, division, and square root operations, as well as
absolute value calculation and programmatic selection of minimum and
maximum values from a list of values.
g. Variables: Operator shall be able to use variable values in program conditional
statements and mathematical functions.
(1) Time Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to

represent time of day, day of the week, month of the year, and date.
Other predefined variables or simple control logic shall provide elapsed
time in seconds, minutes, hours, and days. Operator shall be able to
start, stop, and reset elapsed time variables using the program
language.
(2) System Variables. Operator shall be able to use predefined variables to
represent status and results of Controller Software and shall be able to
enable, disable, and change setpoints of Controller Software as
described in Controller Software section.
G. Audit Trail
1. The workstation software shall automatically log and timestamp every operation that a
user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a workstation to changing a
point value, modifying a program, enabling/disabling an object, viewing a graphic
display, running a report, modifying a schedule, etc.
H. Fault Tolerant Server Operation
1. The system shall provide the option to provide fault tolerant operation in the event of
the loss of the CPU, disk drives, or other hardware required to maintain the
operational integrity of the system. Operational integrity includes all user interfaces,
monitoring of alarm points and access points, and executing access control functions.
2. The switchover mechanism provided shall be automatic. Should the failure be caused
by hardware, then the system shall immediately switch to the Backup computer.
Should the system failure be caused by software (instruction or data), the system shall
not pass the faulted code to the Backup computer, otherwise the Backup shall fail in
the same manner of the Primary computer.
3. Switchover to the Backup computer shall be initiated and effective (complete) in a
manner and time frame that precludes the loss of event data, and shall be transparent
to the system users, except for an advisory alarm message indicating that the
switchover has occurred.
4. When the system fails-over from the Primary to the Backup computer, no alarm or
other event shall be lost, and the Backup computer shall take control of all system
functions.
5. A single component failure in the system shall not cause the entire system to fail. All
system users shall be informed of any detectable component failure via an alarm
event. System users shall not be logged off as a result of a system failure or
switchover.
6. The Primary computer shall provide continual indication that the Backup computer is
unavailable until such time that the fault has been purged.
I. Portable Operator Terminals.

1. Provide all necessary software to configure an IBM-compatible laptop computer for

use as a Portable Operator's Terminal (POT). Operator shall be able to connect
configured Terminal to the system network or directly to each controller for
programming, setting up, and troubleshooting.
2. System shall support handheld POT, to have same functionality as laptop-based POT.
Handheld may be dedicated device, or software allowing a commercially available
smartphone or PDA to run as a POT.
3. Network shall be transparent, allowing POT access to all controllers whenever it is
connected to any controller.
2.4 ALL CONTROLLERS
A. Communication.
1. Service Port. Each controller shall provide a service communication port for
connection to a POT.
2. Signal Management. BC and ASC operating systems shall manage input and output
communication signals to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object
information and to allow for central monitoring and alarms.
3. Data Sharing. Each Level Two device shall be capable of requesting and sharing data
with all other Level Two devices.
4. Stand-Alone Operation. Each piece of equipment specified shall be controlled by a
single controller to provide stand-alone control in the event of communication failure.
All I/O points specified for a piece of equipment shall be integral to its controller.
Provide stable and reliable stand-alone control using default values or other method
for values normally read over the network.
5. Zoning. Each Level Two controller shall provide occupied and unoccupied modes of
operation by individual zone.
6. Level Two devices that utilize R232 serial or ARCNET to communicate with the
workstations will not be accepted.
B. Environment. Controller hardware shall be suitable for anticipated ambient conditions.
1. Controllers used outdoors or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted in waterproof

IP66 enclosures and shall be rated for operation at -29°C to 60°C (-20°F to 140°F).
2. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-protective enclosures
and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 120°F).
C. Keypad. Provide a local keypad and display for each NC and DDC. Operator shall be able
to use keypad to view and edit data. Keypad and display shall require password to prevent
unauthorized use. If the manufacturer does not normally provide a keypad and display for
these controllers, provide the software and any interface cabling needed to use a laptop
computer as a Portable Operator's Terminal for the system.
D. Programmability: The application software shall be user programmable. All controllers shall
be programmed in the same language. Controllers that use a “canned” program method will
not be accepted.
E. Real Time Clock (RTC): Each controller shall include a battery-backed, real time clock,
accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day,
month, year, and day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings
time and leap years.
F. Serviceability.
1. Controllers shall have diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor.

2. Wires shall be connected to a field-removable modular terminal strip or to a

termination card connected by a ribbon cable.
3. Each controller shall continually check its processor and memory circuit status and
shall generate an alarm on abnormal operation. System shall continuously check
controller network and generate alarm for each controller that fails to respond.
G. Memory.
1. Controller memory shall support operating system, database, and programming

requirements, plus alarm queuing, plus 20% spare capacity.
2. Each NC and DDC shall retain BIOS and application programming for at least 72
hours in the event of power loss.
3. Each ASC shall use nonvolatile memory and shall retain BIOS and application
programming in the event of power loss.
4. Controller shall automatically download dynamic control parameters following power
loss.
H. Immunity to Power and Noise. Controllers shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of
nominal voltage rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from keyed radios
up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
2.5 NETWORK CONTROLLERS (NCs)
A. General
1. Native BACnet NCs bridge Level Three field devices to BACnet/IP network.
2. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will
continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to the BACnet/IP
network.
B. Hardware Specifications
1. Memory: Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for
the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, flash memory. Controllers shall contain
enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus alarm
queuing, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory.
2. Communication Ports: Each NC shall provide communication to both the
Workstation(s) and the field buses. An on-board Ethernet port shall be provided for
communication within the BACnet/IP network, as well as minimum two ports for
communication to up to 50 Level Three devices.
3. Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular I/O design to allow easy
expansion. Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug-in modules of
various types. It shall be possible to combine I/O modules as desired to meet the I/O
requirements for individual control applications.
4. Hardware Override Switches: All digital outputs shall include three position manual
override switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These
switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that
the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each
analog output shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual
adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual
override switch is placed in the ON position.
5. Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status,
Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status. For each output, provide LED indication of
the value of the output (On/Off). For each output module provide an LED which gives
a visual indication of whether any outputs on the module are manually overridden.

6. Battery Backup: The NC shall include an on-board replaceable, rechargeable battery

to back up the controller’s RAM memory. The battery shall provide accumulated
backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 30 days. In the case of a power
failure, the NC shall store all data to flash memory.
7. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the
NC shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored
functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and
implement special start-up strategies as required. The NC will first attempt to restart
from RAM; if that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the NC shall restart itself
from its application program stored in its flash memory.
C. Support For Open Systems Protocols
1. NC must be capable of integrating all open HVAC protocol.
2. The system shall also provide the ability to program custom ASCII communication
drivers, that will reside in a BACnet Gateway, for communication to third party
systems and devices. These drivers will provide real time monitoring and control of the
third party systems. Once programmed, these data points shall be monitored and
controlled in exactly the same manner as native BACnet data points.
2.6 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS (DDCs)
A. General:
1. Native BACnet DDCs control equipment, both through software interfaces and through
hardwired contacts.
network.
B. Inputs and Outputs:
1. Each DDC shall have enough inputs and outputs to meet the application’s required
point count as summed by the supplier.
2. Each DDC shall support universal inputs, whereas any input may be software-defined
as:
a. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
b. Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters.
c. Analog inputs for measuring temperature, pressure, humidity, flow and position
measurements.
3. SDCU’s must support both digital and analog output types:
a. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control.
b. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity control of
primary equipment.
4. Expandability. For larger controllers (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output
expansion through the use of plug-in modules. At least two I/O modules must be
capable of being added to the base SDCU.
5. Communication. DDC shall support digital data communication to third party
microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels and VFDs.
C. Hardware:

1. Memory: Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for
the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, flash memory. Controllers shall contain
enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus alarm
queuing, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory.
2. Hardware Override Switches: All digital outputs shall include three position manual
override switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These
switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that
the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each
analog output shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual
adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual
override switch is placed in the ON position.
3. Local Status Indicator Lamps: Provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status,
Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status. For each output, provide LED indication of
the value of the output (On/Off). For each output module provide an LED which gives
a visual indication of whether any outputs on the module are manually overridden.
4. Battery Backup: The DDCs shall include an on-board replaceable, rechargeable
battery to back up the controller’s RAM memory. The battery shall provide
accumulated backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 30 days. In the case of
a power failure, the DDC shall store all data to flash memory.
5. Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the
DDC shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored
functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and
implement special start-up strategies as required. The DDC will first attempt to restart
from RAM; if that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the DDC shall restart itself
from its application program stored in its flash memory.
2.7 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASCs)
A. General
1. All ASCs shall be of the same native protocol. They will reside on the Level Three
device network supported by an NC, which will link multiple ASCs to the BACnet/IP
network.
2. Each ASC will be purpose made to control a single piece of equipment.
network.
B. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers
1. VAV controllers shall conform to BACnet profile B-AAC.

2. VAV controllers shall support, but not be limited to the control of the following
configurations of VAV boxes:
a. Single Duct – Variable Air Volume Cooling Only (Type A)
b. Single Duct – Constant Air Volume Cooling with Electric Reheat (Type B)
c. Single Duct – Variable Air Volume Cooling with Electric Reheat (Type C)
3. Refer to BMS drawings for sequence of operation and performance requirements for
VAV controllers.
4. VAV controllers for single duct applications will come equipped with a built-in actuator
for modulation of the air damper. The actuator shall have a minimum torque rating of
4 N-m (35 in-lb), and contain an override mechanism for manual positioning of the
damper during startup and service.
5. VAV controllers shall contain an integral airflow sensor. Please refer to Table 1 for
reporting accuracy requirements.

6. Each controller shall have the capability for local time of day scheduling, occupancy
mode control, after hours operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.
7. VAV controllers will interface with room thermostat, which will allow user adjustment of
temperature setpoint, and override of occupancy mode.
8. VAV controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Level Three device on
the same field bus.
C. FCU Terminal Unit Controllers
1. FCU controllers shall conform to BACnet profile B-ASC.

2. Refer to BMS drawings for sequence of operation and performance requirements for
FCU controllers.
3. Each controller shall have the capability for local time of day scheduling, occupancy
mode control, after hours operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.
4. FCU controllers will interface with room thermostat, which will allow user adjustment of
temperature setpoint, and override of occupancy mode.
5. FCU controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Level Three device on
the same field bus.
2.8 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
A. Building and energy management application software shall reside and operate in system
controllers. Applications shall be editable through operator workstation, web browser
interface, or engineering workstation.
1. The NC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:
a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)

b. Self Tuning PID
c. Two Position Control
d. Digital Filter
e. Ratio Calculator
f. Equipment Cycling Protection
2. Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical functions (+, -, *, /),
squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, Boolean logic statements, or
combinations of both. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical
statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These must
be able to be used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested
up to five parentheses deep.
3. NC’s shall perform any or all of the following energy management routines:
a. Time of Day Scheduling

b. Calendar Based Scheduling
c. Holiday Scheduling
d. Temporary Schedule Overrides
e. Optimal Start
f. Optimal Stop
g. Night Setback Control
h. Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer)
i. Peak Demand Limiting
j. Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling
k. CFM Tracking
l. Heating/Cooling Interlock
m. Hot/Cold Deck Reset
n. Free Cooling

o. Hot Water Reset

p. Chilled Water Reset
q. Condenser Water Reset
r. Chiller Sequencing
4. Each controller shall be capable of locally logging any input, output, calculated value
or other system variable.
a. Logging intervals are to be user ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes.

b. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log.
c. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum
value of the point.
d. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term
archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or manual command.
B. Scheduling. System shall provide the following schedule options as a minimum:
1. Weekly. Provide separate schedules for each day of the week. Each schedule shall be
able to include up to 5 occupied periods (5 start-stop pairs or 10 events).
2. Exception. Operator shall be able to designate an exception schedule for each of the
next 365 days. After an exception schedule has executed, system shall discard and
replace exception schedule with standard schedule for that day of the week.
3. Holiday. Operator shall be able to define 24 special or holiday schedules of varying
length on a scheduling calendar that repeats each year.
C. System Coordination. Operator shall be able to group related equipment based on function
and location and to use these groups for scheduling and other applications.
D. Demand Limiting.
1. System shall monitor building power consumption from main incoming power meter.
2. When power consumption exceeds adjustable levels, system shall automatically
adjust setpoints, de-energize low-priority equipment, and take other programmatic
actions to reduce demand. When demand drops below adjustable levels, system shall
restore loads as specified.
E. Runtime Totalization. System shall provide an algorithm that can totalize runtime for each
binary input and output. Operator shall be able to enable runtime alarm based on exceeded
adjustable runtime limit. All motors and equipment shall have configurable runtime alarm
limits.
F. Maintenance Management. System shall generate maintenance alarms when equipment

exceeds adjustable runtime, equipment starts, or performance limits. Configure and enable
maintenance alarms.
G. Sequencing. Application software shall sequence fans, chillers, boilers, and pumps as
specified in drawings.
H. Staggered Start. System shall stagger controlled equipment restart after power outage.
Operator shall be able to adjust equipment restart order and time delay between equipment
restarts.
I. PID Control. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting PID (proportional-integral-
derivative) algorithms. Each algorithm shall have anti-windup and selectable controlled
variable, setpoint, and PID gains. Each algorithm shall calculate a time-varying analog value
that can be used to position an output or to stage a series of outputs.

J. Anti-Short Cycling. Binary output objects shall be protected from short cycling by means of
adjustable minimum on-time and off-time settings.
K. On and Off Control with Differential. System shall provide direct- and reverse-acting on and
off algorithms with adjustable differential to cycle a binary output based on a controlled
variable and setpoint.
L. The application software shall be user programmable, using the same language across all
controller types. Controllers that use a “canned” program method will not be accepted.
M. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each
controller shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs
simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each
program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of
control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including
interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc.
N. Energy Calculations.
1. System shall accumulate and convert instantaneous power (kW) or flow rates (L/s
[gpm]) to energy usage data.
2. System shall calculate a sliding-window average (rolling average). Operator shall be
able to adjust window interval to 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 60 minutes.
2.9 INPUT AND OUTOUT INTERFACE
A. General. Hard-wire input and output points to controllers.
B. Protection. Shorting an input or output point to itself, to another point, or to ground shall
cause no controller damage. Input or output point contact with up to 24 V for any duration
shall cause no controller damage.
C. Binary (Digital) Inputs. Binary inputs shall monitor the on and off signal from a remote
device. Binary inputs shall provide a wetting current of at least 12 mA and shall be protected
against contact bounce and noise. Binary inputs shall sense dry contact closure without
application of power external to the controller.
D. Pulse Accumulation Inputs. Pulse accumulation inputs shall conform to binary input
requirements and shall accumulate up to 10 pulses per second.
E. Analog Inputs. Analog inputs shall monitor low-voltage (0-10 Vdc), current (4-20 mA), or
resistance (thermistor or RTD) signals. Analog inputs shall be compatible with and field
configurable to commonly available sensing devices.
F. Binary (Digital) Outputs. Binary outputs shall send an on-or-off signal for on and off control.
Building Controller binary outputs shall have three-position (on-off-auto) override switches
and status lights. Outputs shall be selectable for normally open or normally closed
operation.
G. Analog Outputs. Analog outputs shall send a modulating 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal as
required to properly control output devices. Each Building Controller analog output shall
have a two-position (auto-manual) switch, a manually adjustable potentiometer, and status
lights. Analog outputs shall not drift more than 0.4% of range annually.
H. Tri-State Outputs (Floating Point Control). Control three-point floating electronic actuators
without feedback with tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs). Tri-State outputs

may be used where indicated on designed point lists to provide analog output control in
zone control and terminal unit control applications such as VAV terminal units, duct-
mounted heating coils, and zone dampers. Refer to BMS drawings for specific I/O
requirements.
I. Universal Inputs and Outputs. Inputs and outputs that can be designated as either binary or
analog in software shall conform to the provisions of this section that are appropriate for
their designated use.
2.10 POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING
A. Controller Power Supplies
1. The power supply for the controllers shall be auto sensing, 24Vac/10-40Vdc power,
with a tolerance of +/- 20%.
2. DC power supply output shall match output current and voltage requirements. Unit
shall be full-wave rectifier type with output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak-to-peak.
Regulation shall be 1.0% line and load combined, with 100-microsecond response
time for 50% load changes.
3. Unit shall have built-in over-voltage and over-current protection and shall be able to
withstand 150% current overload for at least three seconds without trip-out or failure.
4. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages.
5. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional
AC power signal conditioning.
B. Control Transformers shall be UL listed. Furnish over-current protection in primary and

secondary circuits. Limit connected loads to 80% of rated capacity.
1. Unit shall operate between 0°C and 50°C (32°F and 120°F). EM/RF shall meet FCC
Class B and VDE 0871 for Class B and MILSTD 810C for shock and vibration.
2. Line voltage units shall be UL recognized and CSA listed.
C. Power Line Filtering.
1. Provide internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations
and controllers.
2. Surge protection shall have:
a. Dielectric strength of 1000 V minimum
b. Response time of 10 nanoseconds or less
c. Transverse mode noise attenuation of 65 dB or greater
d. Common mode noise attenuation of 150 dB or greater at 40-100 Hz
2.11 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. Motorized Control Dampers.
1. Type. Control dampers shall have linear flow characteristics and shall be parallel- or
opposed-blade type as specified below or as scheduled on drawings.
a. Outdoor and return air mixing dampers and face-and-bypass dampers shall be
parallel-blade and shall direct airstreams toward each other.
b. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed-blade.
c. Two-position shutoff dampers shall be parallel- or opposed-blade with blade
and side seals.

2. Frame. Damper frames shall be 2.38 mm (13 gauge) galvanized steel channel or
3.175 mm (1/8 in.) extruded aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.
3. Blades. Damper blades shall not exceed 20 cm (8 in.) in width or 125 cm (48 in.) in
length. Blades shall be suitable for medium velocity (10 m/s [2000 fpm]) performance.
Blades shall be not less than 1.5875 mm (16 gauge).
4. Shaft Bearings. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for
application, oil impregnated sintered bronze, or better.
5. Seals. Blade edges and frame top and bottom shall have replaceable seals of butyl
rubber or neoprene. Side seals shall be spring-loaded stainless steel. Blade seals
shall leak no more than 50 L/s·m2 (10 cfm per ft2) at 1000 Pa (4 in. w.g.) differential
pressure. Blades shall be airfoil type suitable for wide-open face velocity of 7.5 m/s
(1500 fpm).
6. Sections. Damper sections shall not exceed 125 cm - 150 cm (48 in. - 60 in.). Each
section shall have at least one damper actuator.
7. Linkages. Dampers shall have exposed linkages.
B. Electric Damper and Valve Actuators.
1. Stall Protection. Mechanical or electronic stall protection shall prevent actuator

damage throughout the actuator's rotation.
2. Spring-return Mechanism. Actuators used for power-failure and safety applications
shall have an internal mechanical spring-return mechanism or an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS).
3. Signal and Range. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or a 0-20 mA
control signal and shall have a 2-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA operating range. (Floating motor
actuators may be substituted for proportional actuators in terminal unit applications as
described in paragraph 2.6H.)
4. Wiring. 24 Vac and 24 Vdc actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring.
5. Manual Positioning. Operators shall be able to manually position each actuator when
the actuator is not powered. Non-spring-return actuators shall have an external
manual gear release. Spring-return actuators with more than 7 N·m (60 in.-lb) torque
capacity shall have a manual crank.
C. Control Valves.
1. General. Select body and trim materials in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations for design conditions and service shown.
2. Type. Provide two- or three-way control valves for two-position or modulating service
as shown.
3. Water Valves.
a. Valves providing two-position service shall be quick opening. Two-way valves

shall have replaceable disc or ball.
b. Close-off (Differential) Pressure Rating. Valve actuator and trim shall provide
the following minimum close-off pressure ratings.
(1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.

(2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at
design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head.
c. Ports. Valves providing modulating service shall have equal percentage ports.
d. Sizing.

(1) Two-position service: line size.

(2) Two-way modulating service: select pressure drop equal to the greatest
of twice the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the
pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 35 kPa (5
psi).
(3) Three-way modulating service: select pressure drop equal to the
smaller of twice the pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load) or
35 kPa (5 psi).
e. Fail Position. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as follows unless
otherwise specified.
(1) Water zone valves: normally open.

(2) Heating coils in air handlers: normally open.
(3) Chilled water control valves: normally closed.
(4) Other applications: as scheduled or as required by sequences of
operation.
4. Steam Valves.
a. Close-off (Differential) Pressure Rating. Valve actuator and trim shall provide
minimum close-off pressure rating equal to 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
b. Ports. Valves providing modulating service shall have linear ports.
c. Sizing.
(1) Two-position service: select pressure drop equal to 10%-20% of inlet

psig.
(2) Modulating service at 100 kPa (15 psig) or less: select pressure drop
equal to 80% of inlet psig.
(3) Modulating service at 101-350 kPa (16-50 psig): select pressure drop
equal to 50% of inlet psig.
(4) Modulating service at over 350 kPa (50 psig): select pressure drop as
scheduled on drawings.
D. Air Flow Stations (AFS).
1. Provide airflow/temperature measurement devices (AFS) where indicated on the plans
a. Fan inlet measurement devices shall not be substituted for duct or plenum
measurement devices indicated on the plans
2. Aiflow Stations shall utilize thermal dispersion technology and microprocessor based
digital circuitry.
3. Airflow stations shall provide the following performance requirements;

a. +2% of the reading over an airflow range of 0 to 3000 FPM under test
conditions, calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates, calibrated to standards
traceable to NIST,
b. +3% of the reading over an airflow range of 300 to 3000 FPM as installed in
the field and in an environment between 0-50 C and 0-99% RH (non
condensing)
c. Automatically temperature compensated for air density indicate FPM or CFM
on an integrated LCD display
d. Transmitter/transducer accuracy +0.01 % of full scale and drift less than 1%
over a 10 year operating period without calibration.

4. Each AFS shall consist of one or more sensor probes and a single, remotely mounted,
microprocessor-based transmitter capable of independently processing up to 16
independently wired sensor assemblies.
a. Each sensor assembly shall contain two individually wired, hermetically sealed
bead-in-glass thermistors.
b. Thermistors shall be mounted in the sensor assembly using a marine-grade,
waterproof epoxy. Thermistor leads shall be protected and not exposed to the
environment.
c. The airflow rate of each sensor assembly shall be equally weighted and
averaged by the transmitter prior to output.
d. Devices using chip-in-glass or diode-case chip thermistors are not acceptable.
e. Devices using less than two thermistors in each sensor assembly are not
acceptable.
f. Devices using platinum wire RTDs are not acceptable.
g. Pitot tubes and arrays are not acceptable.
h. Vortex shedding devices are not acceptable
5. Sensor Probes
a. Each sensor assembly shall independently determine the airflow rate and
temperature at each measurement point
b. Each sensor assembly shall be calibrated at a minimum of 16 airflow rates and
3 temperatures to standards that are traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technology (NIST).
c. Airflow accuracy shall be +/-2% of Reading over the entire operating airflow
range
1) Devices whose accuracy is the combined accuracy of the transmitter

and sensor probes must demonstrate that the total accuracy meets the
performance requirements of this specification throughout the
measurement range
d. The operating humidity range for each sensor probe shall be 0-99% RH (non-
condensing).
e. Each sensor probe shall have an integral, U.L. listed, plenum rated cable and
terminal plug for connection to the remotely mounted transmitter. All terminal
plug interconnecting pins shall be gold plated
f. A single manufacturer shall provide both the airflow/temperature measuring
probe(s) and transmitter for each measurement location
6. Duct and Plenum Probes
a. Probes shall be constructed of extruded, gold anodized, 6063 aluminum tube.

All wires within the aluminum tube shall be Kynar coated.
b. Probe assembly mounting brackets shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
c. The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 5,000 FPM unless otherwise indicated
on the plans.
d. The number of sensor housings provided for each location shall be as follows:
Duct or Plenum Area Total # Sensors /

(sq.ft.) Location
<2 4
2 to <4 6
4 to <8 8
8 to <16 12

>=16 16
7. Fan Inlet Probes
a. Sensor assemblies shall be mounted on 304 stainless steel housings

b. Mounting rods shall be field adjustable to fit the fan inlet and constructed of
nickel plated steel
c. Mounting feet shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel
d. The operating airflow range shall be 0 to 10,000 FPM unless otherwise
indicated on the plans
8. The AFS shall be UL listed as an entire assembly

9. Air flow and temperature shall be available as 0-10Vdc or 4-20ma signals
E. Binary Temperature Devices.
1. Low-Voltage Space Thermostats. Low-voltage space thermostats shall be 24 V,

bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater,
concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F)
maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
2. Line-Voltage Space Thermostats. Line-voltage space thermostats shall be bimetal-
actuated, open-contact type or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type or
equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator, UL listing for electrical rating,
concealed setpoint adjustment, 13°C-30°C (55°F-85°F) setpoint range, 1°C (2°F)
maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
3. Low-Limit Thermostats. Low-limit airstream thermostats shall be UL listed, vapor
pressure type. Element shall be at least 6 m (20 ft) long. Element shall sense
temperature in each 30 cm (1 ft) section and shall respond to lowest sensed
temperature. Low-limit thermostat shall be manual reset only.
F. Temperature Sensors.
1. Type. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) or

thermistor.
2. Duct Sensors. Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging
sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per 1 m 2(10 ft2) of duct cross-
section.
3. Immersion Sensors. Provide immersion sensors with a separable stainless steel well.
Well pressure rating shall be consistent with system pressure it will be immersed in.
Well shall withstand pipe design flow velocities.
4. Space Sensors. Space sensors shall have setpoint adjustment, override switch, LCD
screen, and communication port as shown in all occupied spaces. Space sensors in
common areas such as lobbies and corridors shall be temperature sensing only
without local adjustment capabilities. Display current temperature, relative humidity,
temperature and humidity setpoints, occupancy mode and airflow to the individual
zone.
5. Differential Sensors. Provide matched sensors for differential temperature
measurement.
G. Humidity Sensors.
1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-80%.

2. Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber.

3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-95% RH and shall be
suitable for ambient conditions of 40°C-75°C (40°F-170°F).
4. Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually.
H. Carbon Dioxide Sensors (CO2)
1. Built in self calibration feature results in zero maintenance over sensor rated life (15
years)
2. Measurement: 0-2,000 ppm CO2
3. Accuracy: ± 3% of reading
4. output: 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 4-20mA
5. Maintenance free for 15 years or more
I. Carbon Monoxide Sensors (CO)
1. high accuracy electrochemical sensor in rugged enclosure

2. CO specific (negligible interference from humidity and other gases)
3. 5 year operating life
4. Measurement: 0-200 ppm
5. Accuracy: ± 5% of reading
6. Temp Range: -4 to 122°F (-20 to 50°C)
7. Output: 4-20 mA (loop powered)
J. Flow Switches. Flow-proving switches shall be paddle (water service only) or differential
pressure type (air or water service) as shown. Switches shall be UL listed, SPDT snap-
acting, and pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum).
1. Paddle switches shall have adjustable sensitivity and NEMA 1 enclosure unless
otherwise specified.
2. Differential pressure switches shall have scale range and differential suitable for
intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.
K. Relays.
1. Control Relays. Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust
cover and LED "energized" indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage
shall be suitable for application.
2. Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed, and
shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±100% from setpoint
shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for application.
Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control panel.
L. Override Timers.
1. Unless implemented in control software, override timers shall be spring-wound line

voltage, UL Listed, with contact rating and configuration required by application.
Provide 0-6 hour calibrated dial unless otherwise specified. Flush mount timer on local
control panel face or where shown. Timers with ‘HOLD’ feature are not acceptable.
M. Current Transmitters.
1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered, combination split-core current

transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4-20 mA two-
wire output. Full-scale unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A, and 200 A,
with internal zero and span adjustment. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500
ohm maximum burden.

2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA
recognized.
3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.
N. Current Transformers.
1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely

encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.
2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for ±1%
accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.
3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation and split-core transformers for
existing wiring installation.
O. Voltage Transmitters.
1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA

output with zero and span adjustment.
2. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 250-330 Vac,
and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be ±1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum burden.
3. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be UL/CSA
recognized at 600 Vac rating.
P. Voltage Transformers.
1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall have
built-in fuse protection.
2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4°C-55°C (40°F-130°F)
and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.
3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.
Q. Power Monitors.
1. Power monitors shall be three-phase type and shall have three-phase disconnect and
shorting switch assembly, UL listed voltage transformers, and UL listed split-core
current transformers.
2. Power monitors shall provide selectable output: rate pulse for kWh reading or 4-20 mA
for kW reading. Power monitors shall operate with 5 A current inputs and maximum
error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.
R. Current Switches.
1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip

current. Select switches to match application current and DDC system output
requirements.
S. Pressure Transducers.
1. Transducers shall have linear output signal and field-adjustable zero and span.
2. Continuous operating conditions of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than
calibrated span shall not damage transducer sensing elements.
3. Water pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with minimum proof
pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Transducer shall have 4-20 mA output, suitable
mounting provisions, and block and bleed valves.
4. Water differential pressure transducer diaphragm shall be stainless steel with
minimum proof pressure of 1000 kPa (150 psi). Over-range limit (differential pressure)

and maximum static pressure shall be 2000 kPa (300 psi.) Transducer shall have 4-20
mA output, suitable mounting provisions, and 5-valve manifold.
T. Flow Rings.
1. Flow rings shall be provided where indicated in the drawings, to facilitate pressure
independent flow control for VAV terminal units.
2. Flow rings shall be averaging type, including no less than 16 flow sensing points, used
to calculate air velocity-pressure for the entire inlet.
3. Accuracy of the averaged value shall be no less than:
a. +/- 5% around the actual value for any inlet ductwork

b. +/- 5% around the actual value for any inlet with 1.5D straight duct before the
inlet (where D is the diameter of the inlet).
U. Differential Pressure Switches. Differential pressure switches (air or water service) shall be
UL listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum) and shall have scale range
and differential suitable for intended application and NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise
specified.
V. Pressure-Electric (PE) Switches. PE switches shall be UL listed, pilot duty rated (125 VA
minimum) or motor control rated, metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating
pressure rated for 0-175 kPa (0-25 psig), with calibrated scale minimum setpoint range of
14-125 kPa (2-18 psig).
1. Provide one- or two-stage switch action (SPDT, DPST, or DPDT) as required by

application.
2. Switches shall be open type (panel-mounted). Exception: Switches shall be enclosed

type for remote installation. Enclosed type shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise
specified.
W. Local Control Panels.
1. Indoor control panels shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with hinged door
key-lock latch and removable sub-panels. A common key shall open each control
panel and sub-panel.
2. Prewire internal and face-mounted device connections with color-coded stranded
conductors tie-wrapped or neatly installed in plastic troughs. Field connection
terminals shall be UL listed for 600 V service, individually identified per control and
interlock drawings, with adequate clearance for field wiring.
3. Each local panel shall have a control power source power switch (on-off) with
overcurrent protection.
2.12 WIRING AND RACEWAYS
A. General. Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in applicable
sections of Division 16.
B. Insulated wire shall use copper conductors and shall be UL listed for 90°C (200°F) minimum
service.

C. Contractor shall not run control cables between floors. All control cables to be connected to
the IT Bacnet / IP backbone within the same floor. Contractor to provide enough control
stations, DDC’s, and gateways to accommodate this requirement.
2.13 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SYSTEM
A. Optical Cable. Optical cables shall be duplex 900 mm tight-buffer construction designed for
intra-building environments. Sheath shall be UL listed OFNP in accordance with NEC Article
770. Optical fiber shall meet the requirements of FDDI, ANSI X3T9.5 PMD for 62.5/125mm.
B. Connectors. Field terminate optical fibers with ST type connectors. Connectors shall have
ceramic ferrules and metal bayonet latching bodies.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Thoroughly examine project plans for control device and equipment locations. Report
discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions to Architect or Engineer for resolution before starting
rough-in work.
B. Inspect site to verify that equipment can be installed as shown. Report discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions to Engineer for resolution before starting rough-in work.
C. Examine drawings and specifications for work of others. Report inadequate headroom or
space conditions or other discrepancies to Engineer and obtain written instructions for
changes necessary to accommodate Section 15900 work with work of others. Controls
Contractor shall perform at his expense necessary changes in specified work caused by
failure or neglect to report discrepancies.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Controls Contractor shall protect against and be liable for damage to work and to material
caused by Contractor's work or employees.
B. Controls Contractor shall be responsible for work and equipment until inspected, tested, and
accepted. Protect material not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with
temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of foreign
objects.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Site.
1. Assist in coordinating space conditions to accommodate the work of each trade where
work will be installed near or will interfere with work of other trades. If installation
without coordination causes interference with work of other trades, Contractor shall
correct conditions without extra charge.
2. Coordinate and schedule work with other work in the same area and with work
dependent upon other work to facilitate mutual progress.
B. Test and Balance.

1. Provide Test and Balance Contractor a single set of necessary tools to interface to
control system for testing and balancing.
2. Train Test and Balance Contractor to use control system interface tools.
3. Provide a qualified technician to assist with testing and balancing the first 20 terminal
units.
4. Test and Balance Contractor shall return tools undamaged and in working condition at
completion of testing and balancing.
C. Life Safety.
1. Smoke extract fans, pressurization fans, and smoke dampers are under the control of
the nearest Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). While control details are shown in the
BMS drawings for the contractor’s convenience, the Fire Alarm documents and Abu
Dhabi Civil Defence requirements will prevail in case of any conflict.
2. Interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for shutdown as specified on BMS drawings.
3.4 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP
A. Install equipment, piping, and wiring or raceway horizontally, vertically, and parallel to walls
wherever possible.
B. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for piping and equipment vibration
isolation.
C. Install equipment in readily accessible locations as defined by National Electrical Code

(NEC) Chapter 1 Article 100 Part A.
D. Verify wiring integrity to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and ground faults.
E. Equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with industry specifications and standards
and local codes for performance, reliability, and compatibility.
A. Work, materials, and equipment shall comply with rules and regulations of applicable
authorities.
B. Continually monitor field installation for code compliance and workmanship quality.
C. Contractor shall arrange for work inspection by local or state authorities having jurisdiction
over the work.
3.6 WIRING
A. Control and interlock wiring and installation shall comply with national and local electrical
codes, Division 16, and manufacturer's recommendations. Where the requirements of
Section 15900 differ from Division 16, Section 15900 shall take precedence.
B. Line voltage wiring shall be contained in raceway per Division 16 requirements.
C. Low-voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. Subfuse low-voltage power
circuits as required to meet Class 2 current limit.

D. Low-voltage wiring that is not in raceway but in concealed and accessible locations, such as
return air plenums, shall be armoured and UL listed for the intended application.
E. Install wiring in raceway where subject to mechanical damage and at levels below 3 m (10ft)
in mechanical, electrical, or service rooms.
F. Install line voltage and low voltage wiring in separate raceways. Boxes and panels
containing line voltage wiring and equipment shall not be used for low voltage wiring except
for the purpose of interfacing the two through relays and transformers.
G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.
H. Run exposed low voltage wiring parallel to a surface or perpendicular to it and tie neatly at 3
m (10 ft) intervals.
I. Use structural members to support or anchor plenum cables without raceway. Do not use
ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems to support or anchor
cables.
J. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according to code
requirements. Raceways and pull boxes shall not be hung on or attached to ductwork,
electrical raceways, piping, or ceiling suspension systems.
K. Size raceway and select wire size and type in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and local authority requirements.
L. Include one pull string in each raceway 2.5 cm (1 in.) or larger.
M. Use color-coded conductors throughout.
N. Locate control and status relays in designated enclosures only. Do not install control and
status relays in packaged equipment control panel enclosures containing Class 1 starters.
O. Conceal raceways except within mechanical, electrical, or service rooms. Maintain minimum
clearance of 15 cm (6 in.) between raceway and high-temperature equipment such as
steam pipes or flues.
P. Adhere to requirements in Division 16 where raceway crosses building expansion joints.
Q. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and enclosure openings. Seal top ends of
vertical raceways.
R. Terminate control and interlock wiring related to the work of this section. Maintain at the job
site updated (as-built) wiring diagrams that identify terminations.
S. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 1 m (3 ft)
in length and shall be supported at each end. Do not use flexible metal raceway less than
16 cm. electrical trade size. Use liquid-tight flexible metal raceways in areas exposed to
moisture including chiller and boiler rooms.
T. Install raceway rigidly, support adequately, ream at both ends, and leave clean and free of
obstructions. Join raceway sections with couplings and according to code. Make
terminations in boxes with fittings. Make terminations not in boxes with bushings.
3.7 COMMUNICATION WIRING

A. Communication wiring shall be low voltage and comply with Division 16 telecommunications
wiring specifications.
B. Install communication wiring in separate raceways and enclosures from other low voltage
wiring.
C. During installation do not exceed maximum cable pulling, tension, or bend radius specified
by the cable manufacturer.
D. Verify entire network's integrity following cable installation using appropriate tests for each
cable.
E. Install lightning arrestor according to manufacturer's recommendations between cable and

ground where a cable enters or exits a building.
F. Each run of communication wiring shall be a continuous length without splices when that
length is commercially available. Runs longer than commercially available lengths shall
have as few splices as possible using commercially available lengths.
G. Label communication wiring to indicate origination and destination.
H. Ground coaxial cable according to NEC regulations article on "Communications Circuits,

Cable, and Protector Grounding."
3.8 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. During installation do not exceed maximum pulling tensions specified by cable

manufacturer. Post-installation residual cable tension shall be within cable manufacturer's
specifications.
B. Install cabling and associated components according to manufacturers' instructions. Do not

exceed minimum cable and unjacketed fiber bend radii specified by cable manufacturer.
C. Splice and terminate according to Division 16 specifications.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
A. Install sensors according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for operating environment.
C. Install room temperature sensors on concealed junction boxes properly supported by wall
framing.
D. Air seal wires attached to sensors in their raceways or in the wall to prevent sensor readings
from being affected by air transmitted from other areas.
E. Use averaging sensors where indicated on BMS drawings. Install averaging sensors in a
serpentine manner vertically across duct. Support each bend with a capillary clip.
F. Install mixing plenum low-limit sensors in a serpentine manner horizontally across duct.
Support each bend with a capillary clip. Provide 3 m (1 ft) of sensing element for each 1 m2
(1 ft2) of coil area.

G. Install pipe-mounted temperature sensors in wells. Install liquid temperature sensors with
heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.
H. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall at designated location with sun shield.
I. Differential Air Static Pressure.
1. Supply Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pilot tube. Make
pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Return Duct Static Pressure. Pipe high-pressure tap to duct using a pilot tube. Make
pressure tap connections according to manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Building Static Pressure. Pipe pressure sensor's low-pressure port to the static
pressure port located on the outside of the building through a high-volume
accumulator. Pipe high-pressure port to a location behind a thermostat cover.
4. Piping to pressure transducer pressure ports shall contain a capped test port adjacent
to transducer.
5. Pressure transducers, except those controlling VAV boxes, shall be located in control
panels, not on monitored equipment or on ductwork. Mount transducers in a vibration-
free location accessible for service without use of ladders or special equipment.
6. Mount gauge tees adjacent to air and water differential pressure taps. Install shut-off
valves before tee for water gauges.
J. Smoke detectors, freeze stats, high-pressure cut-offs, and other safety switches shall be
hard-wired to de-energize equipment as described in the sequence of operation. Switches
shall require manual reset. Provide contacts that allow BMS software to monitor safety
switch status.
3.10 FLOW SWITCH INSTALLATION
A. Use correct paddle for pipe diameter.
B. Adjust flow switch according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.11 ACTUATORS
A. General. Mount actuators and adapters according to manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Electric and Electronic Damper Actuators. Mount actuators directly on damper shaft or
jackshaft unless shown as a linkage installation. Link actuators according to manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. For low-leakage dampers with seals, mount actuator with a minimum 5° travel
available for damper seal tightening.
2. To compress seals when spring-return actuators are used on normally closed
dampers, power actuator to approximately 5° open position, manually close the
damper, then tighten linkage.
3. Check operation of damper-actuator combination to confirm that actuator modulates
damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed positions.
4. Provide necessary mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.
C. Valve Actuators. Connect actuators to valves with adapters approved by actuator

manufacturer.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING

A. Label wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, with control system
address or termination number at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination.
B. Label pneumatic tubing at each end within 5 cm (2 in.) of termination with a descriptive
identifier.
C. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show instrument or item
served.
D. Label control panels with minimum 1 cm (½ in.) letters on laminated plastic nameplates.
E. Label each control component with a permanent label. Label plug-in components such that
label remains stationary during component replacement.
F. Label room sensors related to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.
G. Manufacturers' nameplates and UL or CSA labels shall be visible and legible after
equipment is installed.
H. Label identifiers shall match record documents.
3.13 PROGRAMMING
A. Point Naming. Name points as shown on the equipment points list provided with each
sequence of operation. See BMS drawings. If character limitations or space restrictions
make it advisable to shorten the name, the abbreviations given on BMS drawings may be
used. Where multiple points with the same name reside in the same controller, each point
name may be customized with its associated Program Object number. For example, "Zone
Temp 1" for Zone 1, "Zone Temp 2" for Zone 2.
B. Software Programming. Programming shall provide actions for each possible situation.
Graphic- or parameter-based programs shall be documented. Text-based programs shall be
modular, structured, and commented to clearly describe each section of the program.
1. Application Programming. Provide application programming that adheres to

sequences of operation specified on BMS drawings. Program documentation or
comment statements shall reflect language used in sequences of operation.
2. System Programming. Provide system programming necessary for system operation.
C. Operator Interface.
1. Standard Graphics. Show on each equipment graphic input and output points and
relevant calculated points and setpoints. Point information on graphics shall
dynamically update.
2. Install, initialize, start up, and troubleshoot operator interface software and functions
(including operating system software, operator interface database, and third-party
software installation and integration required for successful operator interface
operation).
3.14 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A. Startup Testing. Complete startup testing to verify operational control system before
notifying Owner of system demonstration. Provide Owner with schedule for startup testing.
Owner may have representative present during any or all startup testing.

1. Calibrate and prepare for service each instrument, control, and accessory equipment
furnished under Section 15900.
2. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground faults.
Verify that terminations are tight.
3. Enable control systems and verify each input device's calibration. Calibrate each
device according to manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Verify that binary output devices such as relays, solenoid valves, two-position
actuators and control valves, and magnetic starters, operate properly and that normal
positions are correct.
5. Verify that analog output devices such as I/Ps and actuators are functional, that start
and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct. Check
control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. Make
necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.
6. Prepare a log documenting startup testing of each input and output device, with
technician's initials certifying each device has been tested and calibrated.
7. Verify that system operates according to sequences of operation. Simulate and
observe each operational mode by overriding and varying inputs and schedules. Tune
PID loops and each control routine that requires tuning.
8. Verify hardware is calibrated such that software set points are correctly implemented
in physical system.
9. Alarms and Interlocks.
a. Check each alarm with an appropriate low and high signals, at values outside
the normal operating range, demonstrating alarm trip.
b. Trip interlocks using field contacts to check logic and to ensure that actuators
fail in the proper direction.
c. Test interlock actions by simulating alarm conditions to check initiating value of
variable and interlock action.
B. Summer Reliability Testing.
1. Summer reliability period shall be 31 consecutive days selected between 30 June and
30 September, during which time entire system shall operate continuously without
adjustment or repair (other than normal running adjustments).
2. Contractor shall assign full time skilled operators for running facility during entire
period.
3.15 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Demonstration. Prior to acceptance, perform the following performance tests to demonstrate

system operation and compliance with specification. Provide Engineer with log documenting
completion of startup tests.
1. Engineer will be present to observe and review system demonstration. Notify Engineer
at least 10 days before system demonstration begins.
2. Demonstration shall follow process submitted and approved. Complete approved
checklists and forms for each system as part of system demonstration.
3. Demonstrate actual field operation of each sequence of operation as specified on
drawings. Provide at least two persons equipped with two-way communication.
Demonstrate calibration and response of any input and output points requested by
Engineer. Provide and operate test equipment required to prove proper system
operation.
4. Demonstrate compliance with system performance metrics
5. Demonstrate compliance with sequences of operation through each operational mode.
6. Demonstrate complete operation of operator interface.

7. Demonstrate each of the following.
a. DDC loop response. Supply graphical trend data output showing each DDC
loop's response to a set point change representing an actuator position change
of at least 25% of full range. Trend sampling rate shall be from 10 seconds to 3
minutes, depending on loop speed. Each sample's trend data shall show set
point, actuator position, and controlled variable values. Engineer will require
further tuning of each loop that displays unreasonably under- or over-damped
control.
b. Demand limiting. Supply trend data output showing demand-limiting algorithm
action. Trend data shall document action sampled each minute over at least a
30-minute period and shall show building kW, demand-limiting set point, and
status of set points and other affected equipment parameters.
c. Building fire alarm system interface.
d. Trend logs for each system. Trend data shall indicate set points, operating
points, valve positions, and other data as required in the points list and
sequences of operation on BMS drawings. Each log shall cover three 48-hour
periods and shall have a sample frequency not less than 10 minutes. Logs
shall be accessible through system's operator interface and shall be retrievable
for use in other software programs.
8. Tests that fail to demonstrate proper system operation shall be repeated after
Contractor makes necessary repairs or revisions to hardware or software to
successfully complete each test.
9. Demonstrations of system function shall be conducted for both local control at the
controller and remote control at the operator workstation.
B. Acceptance.
1. After tests described in this specification are performed to the satisfaction of both
Engineer and Owner, Engineer will accept control system as meeting completion
requirements. Engineer may exempt tests from completion requirements that cannot
be performed due to circumstances beyond Contractor's control. Engineer will provide
written statement of each exempted test. Exempted tests shall be performed as part of
warranty.
2. System shall not be accepted until completed demonstration forms and checklists are
submitted and approved as required.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Each day clean up debris resulting from work. Remove packaging material as soon as its
contents have been removed. Collect waste and place in designated location.
B. On completion of work in each area, clean work debris and equipment. Keep areas free
from dust, dirt, and debris.
C. On completion of work, check equipment furnished under this section for paint damage.
Repair damaged factory-finished paint to match adjacent areas. Replace deformed cabinets
and enclosures with new material and repaint to match adjacent areas.
3.17 TRAINING
A. Provide training for a designated staff of Owner's representatives.

B. Provide a minimum of three, 9 hour classroom sessions to owner personnel. Schedule

training according to owner requirements. Additional training shall be provided at no
additional cost in order to accomplish the tasks listed below.
C. Training shall enable students to accomplish the following objectives.
1. Proficiently operate system

2. Understand control system architecture and configuration
3. Understand DDC system components
4. Understand system operation, including DDC system control and optimizing routines
(algorithms)
5. Operate workstation and peripherals
6. Log on and off system
7. Access graphics, point reports, and logs
8. Adjust and change system set points, time schedules, and holiday schedules
9. Recognize common HVAC system malfunctions by observing system graphics, trend
graphs, and other system tools
10. Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance manual
11. Understand job layout and location of control components
12. Access data from DDC controllers
13. Operate portable operator's terminals
14. Create and change system graphics
15. Create, delete, and modify alarms, including configuring alarm reactions
16. Create, delete, and modify point trend logs (graphs) and multi-point trend graphs
17. Configure and run reports
18. Add, remove, and modify system's physical points
19. Create, modify, and delete application programming
20. Add operator interface stations
21. Add a new controller to system
22. Download firmware and advanced applications programming to a controller
23. Configure and calibrate I/O points
24. Maintain software and prepare backups
25. Interface with job-specific, third-party operator software
26. Add new users and understand password security procedures
D. Divide presentation of objectives into three sessions (1-13, 14-23, and 24-26). Participants
will attend one or more of sessions, depending on knowledge level required.
1. Day-to-day Operators (objectives 1-13)

2. Advanced Operators (objectives 1-13 and 14-23)
3. System Managers and Administrators (objectives 1-13 and 24-26)
E. Provide course outline and materials according to submitted training proposal. Provide one
copy of training material per student.
F. Instructors shall be factory-trained and experienced in presenting this material.
G. Perform classroom training using a network of working controllers representative of installed

hardware.
3.18 CONTROL SCHEMATICS, SEQUENCE OF OPERATION & POINTS LIST
A. Refer to the BMS drawings for Control Schematics, Sequences of Operation and Points
Lists for the various mechanical systems.
APPENDIX A: Glossary of Terms

A. Terms used within the Specification Text:
1. Advanced Application Controller (AAC): A fully programmable control module. This

control module may be capable of some of the advanced features found in Building
Controllers (storing trends, initiating read and write requests, etc.) but it does not
serve as a master controller. Advanced Application Controllers may reside on either
the Ethernet/IP backbone or on a subnet.
2. Application Specific Controller (ASC): A pre-programmed control module which is
intended for use in a specific application. ASCs may be configurable, in that the user
can choose between various pre-programmed options, but it does not support full
custom programming. ASCs are often used on terminal equipment such as VAV
boxes or fan coil units. In many vendors' architectures ASCs do not store trends or
schedules but instead rely upon a Building Controller to provide those functions.
3. Building Controller (BC): A fully programmable control module which is capable of
storing trends and schedules, serving as a router to devices on a subnet, and initiating
read and write requests to other controllers. Typically this controller is located on the
Ethernet/IP backbone of the BMS. In many vendors' architectures a Building
Controller will serve as a master controller, storing schedules and trends for
controllers on a subnet underneath the Building Controller.
4. Direct Digital Controller (DDC): A control system in which a digital computer or
microprocessor is directly connected to the valves, dampers, and other actuators
which control the system, as opposed to indirectly controlling a system by resetting
setpoints on an analog pneumatic or electronic controller.
5. HVAC Open Protocol:
Protocol Media Standard

BACnet Fiber / Ethernet ASHRAE 135
Lonworks Twisted pair (Lon) EN/IEC 14908
Modbus EIA-485 / Ethernet IEC 61158, 61784 / Modbus 1.02
KNX Twisted pair / Ethernet IEC 14543-3
Profibus EIA-485 IEC 61158 Type 3
6. Smart Actuator (SA): An actuator which is controlled by a network connection rather

than a binary or analog signal. (0-10v, 4-20mA, relay, etc.)
7. Smart Sensor (SS): A sensor which provides information to the BMS via network
connection rather than a binary or analog signal. (0-10000 ohm, 4-20mA, dry contact,
etc.)
8. Web services: Web services are a standard method of exchanging data between
computer systems using the XML (extensible markup language) and SOAP (simple
object access protocol) standards. Web services can be used at any level within a
BMS but most commonly they are used to transfer data between BMS using different
protocols or between a BMS and a non-BMS system such as a tenant billing system
or a utility management system.
B. Terms used within the Sequences of Operation:
1. adj. Adjustable by the end user, through the supplied user interface.
2. AI, AO, etc. (Column Headings on Points List)
a. AI = Analog Input. A physical input to the control module.

b. AO = Analog Output. A physical output from the control module.
c. AV = Analog Value. An intermediate (software) point that may be editable or
read-only. Editable AVs are typically used to allow the user to set a fixed
control parameter, such as a set point. Read Only AVs are typically used to
display the status of a control operation.
d. DI = Digital Input. A physical input to the control module.

e. DO = Digital Output. A physical output from the control module.

f. DV = Digital Value. An intermediate (software) point that may be editable or
read-only. Editable DVs are typically used to allow the user to set a fixed
control parameter, such as a set point. Read Only DVs are typically used to
display the status of a control operation.
g. Sched = Schedule. The control algorithm for this equipment shall include a
user editable schedule.
h. Trend. The control system shall be configured to collect and display a trend log
of this object (Trending shall support recording formats based on time intervals
or Change of Value, where a sample is taken every time the value changes by
more than a user-defined minimum, is an acceptable alternative.)
i. Alarm. The control system shall be configured to generate an alarm when this
object exceeds user definable limits, as described in the Sequence of Controls.
3. KW Demand Limiting:
a. An energy management strategy that reduces energy consumption when a
system's electric power meter exceeds an operator-defined threshold.
b. When power consumption exceeds defined levels, the system automatically
adjust set points, de-energizes low priority equipment, and takes other pre-
programmed actions to avoid peak demand charges. As the demand drops,
the system restores loads in a predetermined manner.
4. Occupant Override Switch, or Timed Local Override:

a. A control option that allows building occupants to override the programmed
HVAC schedule for a limited period of time.
b. When the override time expires, the zone returns to its unoccupied state.
5. Occupant Set point Adjustment: A control option that allows building occupants to
adjust - within limits set by the HVAC control system - the heating and cooling set
points of selected zones. Typically the user interface for this function is built into the
zone sensor.
6. Optimal Start-Up:
a. A control strategy that automatically starts an HVAC system at the latest
possible time yet ensures comfort conditions by the time the building becomes
occupied.
b. In a typical implementation, a controller measures the temperature of the zone
and the outside air. Then, using design heating or cooling capacity at the
design outside air temperature, the system computes how long a unit must run
at maximum capacity to bring the zone temperature to its occupied setpoint.
c. The optimal start algorithm often includes a self-learning feature to adjust for
variations from design capacity.
d. A distributed system must use Run on Request with Optimal Start. (See
below.)
7. Requested, or Run on Request:

a. A control strategy that optimizes the runtime of a source piece of equipment
that supplies one or more receiving units - such as an air handler unit
supplying zone terminal units with heating, cooling, ventilation, or similar
service. Source equipment runs only when needed, not on a fixed schedule.
b. The source equipment runs when one or more receiving units request its
services. An operator determines how many requests are required to start the
source equipment.
c. For example, if all the zones in a building are unoccupied and the zone
terminal units do not need heating or cooling, the AHU will shut down.

However, if a zone becomes occupied or needs cooling, the terminal unit will
send a run request to the AHU to initiate the start-up sequence. If this AHU
depends on a central chiller, it can send a run request to the chiller.
d. The run on request algorithm also allows an operator to schedule occupancy
for individual zones based on the needs of the occupants without having to
adjust the schedules of related AHUs and chillers.
8. Trim and Respond, or Set point Optimization:

a. A control strategy that optimizes the set point of a source piece of equipment
that supplies one or more receiving units - such as an air handler unit
supplying zone terminal units with heating, cooling, ventilation, or similar
service.
b. The source unit communicates with receiving units to determine heating,
cooling, and other requirements, and then adjusts its set point.
c. For example, if all zones are comfortable and do not request cooling, the AHU
will gradually increase (trim) its supply air set point. When a zone requests
cooling, the AHU responds by dropping its set point. The more zones that
request cooling, the more it drops the set point. The AHU repeats this process
throughout the day to keep zones cool, but with a supply air set point that is no
cooler than necessary.
C. Contracting Terms:
1. Furnished or Provided:
The act of supplying a device or piece of equipment as required meeting the scope of
work specified and making that device or equipment operational. All costs required to
furnish the specified device or equipment and make it operational are borne by the
division specified to be responsible for providing the device or equipment.
2. Install or Installed:
The physical act of mounting, piping or wiring a device or piece of equipment in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the scope of work as specified.
All costs required to complete the installation are borne by the division specified to
include labor and any ancillary materials.
3. Interface:
The physical device required to provide integration capabilities from an equipment
vendor's product to the control system. The equipment vendor most normally furnishes
the interface device. An example of an interface is the chilled water temperature reset
interface card provided by the chiller manufacturer in order to allow the control system
to integrate the chilled water temperature reset function into the control system.
4. Integrate:
The physical connections from a control system to all specified equipment through a
software interface as required allowing the specified control and monitoring functions
of the equipment to be performed via the control system.

P-1705 Exquisite Living Residence @ Burj Khalifa, Dubai BMS Data Points Schedule
BMS I/O LIST BASIS
1705 -EXQUISITE LIVING RESIDENCE @ Burj Khakifa Community

Sr.
DESCRIPTION Qty DI DO AI AO
No.
1 SUMP PUMPS SEWAGE AND STORM WATER-BASEMENT LEVELS 1

1 Run status or submersible pumps 1
2 High Level alarm from sump pit 1
3 Trip alarm from pumps to be indicated individually 1
4 Low level alarm 1
2 WATER HIGH LEVEL WITHIN LIFT SHAFT SUMP PIT - BASEMENT LEVELS 9
1 Level indication 9
2 High level alarm from sump pit 9
3 WATER TANKS- BASEMENT, 22nd, 46th AND ROOF LEVELS 8

1 Level indication 8
2 High level alarm 8
3 Low level alarm 8
4 Fire water reserve level 8
5 Low level alarm of fire reserve 8
4 DOMESTIC WATER TRANSFER PUMP SETS- BASEMENT, 22nd and 46th Floor 3
1 H.O.A. switch position indication 3
2 Pump start / stop 3
3 Run status of each pump 3
4 Trip alarm indication in BMS of individual pump 3
5 System pressure 3
5 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY BOOSTER PUMP SETS- ROOF 1

5 System pressure 1
6 IRRIGATION PUMP SETS 1

5 System pressure 1
7 WATER FEATURE PUMP SETS AND BALANCING TANKS 2

5 System pressure 2
6 Balancing tank water level indication 2
ARIF BINTOAK 1 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
8 SWIMMING POOLS PUMP SETS 2
5 System pressure 2
9 SWIMMING POOLS BALANCING TANKS 2

1 Balancing tank water level indication 2
2 Monitoring of pool water temperature 2
10 SWIMMING POOLS HEAT/COOL PUMP UNITS 2

1 Temperature of water entering each heat pump unit 2
2 Temperature of water leaving each heat pump unit 2
3 Mixing valve modulation 2
4 Fault indication of heat pump unit 2
5 High water temperature alarm 2
6 Low water temperature alarm 2
7 Circulating pump for cooling and heating pool water, Start/ Stop Command 2
8 Circuating pump for cooling and heating pool water, run status 2
9 Circulating pump for cooling and heating pool water, trip alarm 2
10 Circulating pump for cooling and heating pool water, panel H/ O/ A status 2
11 SWIMMING POOLS HEAT EXCHANGERS 2

1 Water temperature IN/ OUT on cold side (primary side) 2
2 Water temperature IN/ OUT on hot side (secondary side) 2
3 Water flow rate on cold side (primary side) 2
4 Water flow rate IN/ OUT on hot side (secondary side) 2
5 Mixing valve modulation 2
6 Water pressure on cold/ hot sides 2
12 SWIMMING POOL CHEMICAL TREATMENT UNITS 2

1 Automatic chemical treatment sytem alarm 2
2 Chemical Tank Level indication 2
3 Chemical Tank High level alarm 2
4 Chemical Tank Low level alarm 2
13 CHILLED COLD WATER HEAT EXCHANGER 1

5 PICV valve modulation Control and Feed Back 1
14 CIRCULATING PUMP SET FOR CHILLED COLD WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 1

1 Circulating pump, Start/ Stop Command 1
2 Circuating pump, run status 1
3 Circulating pump, trip alarm 1
4 Circulating pump, panel H/ O/ A status 1
ARIF BINTOAK 2 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
15 FIRE PUMP SETS (BASEMENT, 22nd and 46th) 3
1 System pressure at each fire pipe riser mains 3
2 Run status for each electric, diesel and jockey fire pump 3
3 Trip alarm for each electric and jockey fire pump 3
4 Fail to start indication from each diesel fire pump 3
16 FUEL HANDLING SYSTEM 1

1 Bulk storage tank level 1
2 Bulk storage tank high level ( Audio Visual) 1
3 Bulk storage tank low level 1
4 Solenoid valve open/ close 1
5 Solenoid valve status 1
6 Fuel pump Start/ Stop command for each pump 1
7 Fuel pump run status for each pump 1
8 Fuel pump trip alarm status for each pump 1
9 System pressure 1
10 Motorized valve open/ close 1
11 Day tank level 1
12 Day tank high level ( Audio Visual) 1
13 Day tank low level 1
17 BTU METERS ON CHW SYSTEM 300

1 Reading 300
2 Fault Alarm 300
18 GAS METERS 300

1 Reading 300
2 Fault Alarm 300
19 ETS ROOM CONTROL AND MONITORING 1

1 To comply with District Cooling Provider Requirement
2 Refer Control and piping Schematic in the ETS Room Annexture as part of this specification.
3 Refer ETS Room Annexture as part of this specification.
20 CHILLED WATER PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER (22nd and 46th Floor) 5
5 PICV valve modulation Control and Feed Back 5
21 CHILLED WATER PUMPS - BASEMENT, 22nd and 46th Floor 11

1 CHW pump, Start/ Stop Command 11
2 CHW pump, run status 11
3 CHW pump, trip alarm 11
4 CHW pump speed for variable speed units 11
5 Pump discharge pressure at common header 11
6 Pump speedfeed back 11
22 VACCUM DEGASER AND CHILLED WATER PRESSURIZATION SYSETM (BASEMENT, 22nd and 46th Floor) 3
1 CHW system pressures 3
2 High pressure in the chilled water system 3
3 Low pressure in the chilled water system 3
4 Power status panel 3
5 Maximum Data point Available from the system control panel 3 3
23 CHW CHEMICAL TREATMENT UNITS 3

1 Automatic chemical treatment sytem alarm 3
2
ARIF BINTOAK 3 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
24 FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH HEAT RECOVERY UNITS 10
1 Fresh air Temperature and Humidity ( Global ) 2
2 Pre Filter Dirty status 1
3 Bag Filter Dirty status 1
4 Fresh air Damper Control 1
5 Fresh air Damper feedback 1
6 Extract air Damper Control 1
7 Extract air Damper feedback 1
8 Supply fan start /stop command 1
9 Supply fan HOA switch status 1
10 Supply fan Run status 1
11 Supply fanTrip indication 1
12 Supply Fan VFD Control and feedback 1 1
13 Return fan start /stop command 1
14 Return fan HOA switch status 1
15 Return fan Run status 1
16 Return fanTrip indication 1
17 Return Fan VFD Control and feedback 1 1
18 HRW start /stop command 1
19 HRW HOA switch status 1
20 HRW Run status 1
21 HRW Trip indication 1
22 ON cooling coil Temperature 1
23 OFF cooling coil Temperature 1
24 Supply air temperature and Humidity 2
25.5 Return air temperature and Humidity 2
27 Extract air temperature 2
28 Cooling coil control and feedback 1 1
29 Supply air flow Monitoring 1
30 CO2 Monitoring 1
31 Fire Alarm signal
25 AHU CONSTANT AIR VOLUME 8

1 Control valve modulating command 8
2 Entering cooling coil chilled water temperature 8
3 Leaving cooling coil chilled water temperature 8
4 Return air duct temperature/ humidity status 8
5 Supply air duct static pressure 8
6 Supply air fan run status 8
7 Supply air fan START/ STOP command 8
8 Supply air fan trip status 8
9 Supply air fan H-O-A switch 'Auto' Position 8
10 Filter status 8
11 Fresh air intake duct damper command 8
12 Fresh air intake duct damper status 8
13 Fire alarm status 8
ARIF BINTOAK 4 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
26 FAN COIL UNITS - COMMON AREA AND SERVICE ROOMS 300
1 Room Temperature 300
2 Control cooling valve modulating command (**) 300
3 Fan START/ STOP command 300
4 FCU fan speed command (High, Medium and Low) 300
5 FCU fan trip alarm 300
6 FCU fan run status 300
27 SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FANS 5

1 Fan auto manual switch 5
2 Fan START/ STOP command 5
3 Fan run status 5
4 Fan trip Alarm 5
28 MOTORIZED DAMPERS 600

1 Airflow 600
2 Damper Position 600
3 Damper Actuator 600
4 Room temperature sensor 600
29 GENERATOR UNITS 2
1 Generator Command 2
2 Run status of each generator 2
3 Generator fail to start 2
4 Generator trip alarm 2
5 Generator common alarm 2
6 Battery charger trouble alarm 2
7 Generator KWH monitoring 2 2
8 Generator High Temperature alarm 2
9 Engine Alarm 2
10 Engine Shutdown 2
11 Alternator breaker trip 2
12 Alternator breaker closed 2
13 Sychronized breaker trip 2
14 Reverse power trip 2
15 Ground fault 2
16 Over voltage trip 2
17 Emergency stop 2
18 Alternator heater contactor failure alarm 2
19 A.C. Power failure charger 2
20 Low DC battery voltage 2
21 Radiator low water level alarm 2
30 LIFT PRESSURUZATION FAN 1

1 Fan HOA Status 1
2 Fan Run Status 1
3 Fan trip status 1
4 Fan VFD speed Feedback 1
5 Damper Open / Close status 1
6 Pressure Monitoring 1
7 Smoke Monitoring 1
8 Fire Alarm signal
ARIF BINTOAK 5 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
31 STAIRCASE PRESSURIZATION FAN 1
1 Fan HOA Status 1
2 Fan Run Status 1
3 Fan trip status 1
4 Fan VFD speed Feedback 1
6 Pressure Monitoring 1
7 Smoke Monitoring 1
8 Fire Alarm signal
CARPARK VENTILATION FAN 2

1 Fan start/stop Command 2
2 Fan HOA Status 2
3 Fan Run Status 2
4 Fan trip status 2
5 Damper Open / Close command 2
7 CO Level monitoring x
8 Fan Speed comments and feed back 2
32 PUMP ROOM SMOKE EXTRACT FAN 1

1 Fan HOA Status 1
2 Fan Run Status 1
3 Fan trip status 1
5 Fire Alarm signal
33 PUMP ROOM SMOKE MAKEUP FAN 1

1 Fan HOA Status 1
2 Fan Run Status 1
3 Fan trip status 1
5 Fire Alarm signal
34 CORRIDOR SMOKE EXTRACT FAN 1

1 Fan HOA Status 1
2 Fan Run Status 1
3 Fan trip status 1
5 Fire Alarm signal
35 SMOKE MAKEUP FAN 1

1 Fan HOA Status 1
2 Fan Run Status 1
3 Fan trip status 1
5 Fire Alarm signal
ARIF BINTOAK 6 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
36 GENERAL EXTRACT FAN 1
2 Fan HOA Status 1
3 Fan Run Status 1
4 Fan trip status 1
37 GENERAL MAKEUP FAN 1

2 Fan HOA Status 1
3 Fan Run Status 1
4 Fan trip status 1
38 LIFTS 9
1 Power supply status of lift control panel 9
2 Common alarm from lift control panel 9
3 Cabin call alarm 9
39 L.V. SWITCHBOARDS 4
1 ON/ OFF status of main incoming breakers 4
2 Trip alarm of main incoming breakers 4
3 ON/ OFF status of bus couplers 4
4 Measuring voltage 4
5 Measuring current 4
6 Measuring power factor 4
7 KVA 4
8 KVAR 4
9 KWH 4
10 POWER DEMAND 4
40 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM 20

1 Battery power status 20
2 Battery charger fault alarm 20
3 System on/ off status 20
41 FIRE ALARM, CLEAN AGENT AND FOAM DELUGE SUPPRESSION PANELS 30

1 System Alarm 30
2 Power Status 30
3 Common Fire alrm 30
42 ACCESS CONTROL, CCTV, INTERCOM PANELS 4

1 System Alarm 4
2 Power Status 4
ARIF BINTOAK 7 of 8
BMS I/O LIST BASIS

Sr.
No.
43 SMATV/ MATV PANELS 5
1 System Alarm 5
2 Power Status 5
44 PUBLIC ADDRESS PANELS 10

1 System Alarm 10
2 Power Status 10
45 AICRAFT WARNING LIGHT 3

1 System Alarm 3
2 Power Status 3
46 HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM 3

1 System Alarm 3
2 Power Status 3
47 GAS LEAK MONITORING AND DETECTION SYSTEM PANELS 280

1 System Alarm 280
2 Power Status 280
48 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTION SYSTEM PANELS 3

1 System Alarm 3
2 Power Status 3
49 BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM 3
1 System Alarm 3
2 Power Status 3
2986 381 2200 1233

Total Points 6800
Notes:
a) The List of Equipment provided in the data point schedule is tentative only guidance. Contractor Must ensure to connect all the Equipments and
systems which are in the proposed project with BMS.
b) 10% spare data points or Minimum 2 data points of each type to be provided in each outstations.
c) The above mentioned quantities are indicative for guidance. For Exact Quantities and type of Equipment, refer to relevant drawings.
d) Any common Area Equipments Which missing in the above Data point schedule but included in the contract shall be monitored / controlled by BMS
System.
ARIF BINTOAK 8 of 8
ETS ROOM
ANNEX
ETS ROOM - ANNEX Page 1 of 1

APPENDIX 1
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS / SUPPLIERS -ETS without Secondary Pump
MECHANICAL
ACCEPTABLE SOURCE OF MANUFACTURER - EUROPE, NORTH AMERICA UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED. EQUIVALENT COULD
BE ACCEPTED SUBJECT TO ENGINEER'S APPROVAL
No. PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER / SUB - CONTRACTORS
A. PROCESS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A.1 MAIN EQUIPMENT

Alfa Laval -
Heat Exchanger Sweden Sondex GEA Hisaka - Japan Armstrong Flat Plate Tranter Inc Swep
A.2 SUB EQUIPMENT

Vibration Vibration
Vibration Isolation & Seismic Vibration Control Amber / Booth Co - Industrial Management Corp Korfund Dynamics Elimination Co -
Control Kinetics - USA Vibro Acoustics Solutions - USA USA Acoustics - UK - USA Corp - USA USA
Inertia Base Kinetics - USA Vibro Acoustics
Flushing Rohr Rein Chemie RCI CAT Group Culligan

Prime
Testing & Commissioning AJB CML Sutton Technologies
A.3 VALVES
Butterfly Valve VAG Bray Flowcon ERHARD AVK Mueller
Control Valve Flow Tek VAG Bray Metso AVK PAM ERHARD MOKVELD
Actuator Bernard AUMA Drehmo Rotork
Braukman -
NRV Noreva Mokveld Entech Erhard Germany
Tour & Andersson

PICV Belimo (T&A) Warren Controls Oventrop Herz Flow Control
Gate Valve Herz Econosto Nibco Socla Delta Crane Dueker
Ball Valve Vexve Naval Bray Socla Delta Herz Crane Nibco
Y-Strainer Herz Crane Socla Nibco Socla
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS - ETS WITHOUT SECONDARY PUMP Page 1 of 2

MG Piping Senior Flexonics General Rubber Grinnel Corp Pipe

Supports Div -
Flexible Joint Products Co - USA Garlock - USA Inc - USA Corp - USA Metraflex - USA USA Keflex, Inc - USA PROCO - USA
Dismantling Joint KFT - Valtorque Pipemate Klamflex Viking Johnson
A.4 CONTROL SYSTEM

Endress + Hauser
Flow meter & Energy meter Siemens ABB (E&H) Belimo Brooks GE TECO Toshiba
Thermometer & Pressure
Strataa / S
gauges Weiss Wika Controls
Temperature Transmitter Siemens ABB Kobold Emerson E&H
Pressure and Differential

Pressure Transmitter Siemens ABB Kobold Emerson E&H
Local Indicating Instrument
Gauges S Controls Siemens Emerson E&H
Differential Pressure Nivoswitch /

Indicating Switch Nivofloat / Dwyer Emerson E&H Kobold
Manifolds, Tubing and S Controls /
Fittings Sandvik Emerson E&H Kobold
ABB - Germany /
Control Panel GE -USA Honeywell - USA Schneider - France Italy Samsung - Korea
Torque
Automation Vista Automation
System Integrator Solutions FZC Systems FZE Middle East Wotek FZE
A.5 PIPING
Pre-insulated Pipe & Fititngs Perma Pipe IPL EPPI ELIPS

Chilled Water Pipe Arcelor Mittal Hysco Hyundai Seah Econosto Nippon Sumitomo Tenaris BSS
Buttweld Fitting BSS Nippon Sumitomo Tenaris
Weld-o-let & Thread-o-let Delcorte Econ Nippon

Automatic Air Vent Flamco Watts Spirax Sarco Valmatic Claval AVK - Glenfield VAG
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS/SUPPLIERS - ETS WITHOUT SECONDARY PUMP Page 2 of 2

APPENDIX 2
ETS ROOM CONTROL GUIDELINES
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER - PLC SYSTEM
The PLC system shall be capable of collecting information from the instruments inside ETS
station for monitoring and controlling of the ETS system components.
The PLC system should be modular system. The complete PLC system shall operate on 24 VDC
systems. It includes Input / Output system (Digital and Analog), HMI, control relays etc. It shall be
capable to connect to the DCP main SCADA over fiber optic / MPLS connection. All the data shall be
transferred seamlessly from local ETS station to DCP main control room.
PLC / HMI system shall have the monitoring and controlling feature, where all the parameters of
the ETS station shall be monitored.
The valve / pump shall have the manual as well as auto control. The manual control of the valves /
pumps shall be from the HMI, by entering the manual set point for valve (open / close) / pumps
increase / decrease RPM).
The auto control of the valves / pumps shall be based auto set point provision provided by HMI.
Recommended Supplier for CPU, I/O Modules, HMI:
1. Rockwell Automation
2. GE Fanuc
3. Siemens
1. PLC CPU
The CPU shall be capable of monitoring and control the complete ETS system. It shall have the
capability to communicate the third party devices on communication protocols such as Modbus,
Ethernet.
The CPU shall process all the logic with memory scan time at a maximum time interval of 1.0
milliseconds per each 1k of ladder logic memory, I/O scan time of 0.225 millisecond minimum.
The PLC CPU should have the indication of “POWER ON”, “PROGRAM RUN/STOP”, and
“BATTERY FAULT”. It should generate these signals for HMI for monitoring purpose.
The PLC CPU should have capabilities of handling Inputs / Outputs, relays, timers or counters
ETS ROOM CONTROL GUIDELINES Page 1 of 5

function. The PLC CPU shall have the data logging facility to log minimum 20-30 analog signals
at 1 (one) hour for a period of 2 (two) months.
The PLC CPU memory shall be 20% spare for future purpose.
2. INPUT / OUTPUT MODULES

The input / output modules shall accept the entire field signals available in the ETS station
(analog and digital).
a. Digital Inputs: Each input point shall have status indicating light for input powered on
status. Input modules for DC input devices shall operate at 24 Volts DC.
b. Digital Outputs: Each output point shall have the status indicating light for output
powered on status.
c. Analog Input : It shall accept 4-20mA field signals from the field instruments
d. Analog Output : It shall provide 4-20mA loop powered with 24 VDC to the field
instruments 20% spare I/Os for each type of signals ( Digital / Analog ) to be considered
during design of the system for future purpose.
3. HMI (Human Machine Interface)

HMI shall be provided at the ETS station panel for local monitoring and control purpose.
It shall be installed on the PLC panel. The HMI shall have below as a minimum requirement,
but not limited to:
a. Surface mounted on each ETS PLC panel
b. Color active matrix Thin Film Transistor ( TFT )
c. Display Size : Minimum 6” (inch )
d. Input Power : 24 VDC
e. Touch screen
f. Memory card for data logging facility
g. UL Listed and CUL certified
The HMI access shall be password protected in order to avoid unauthorized access to HMI.
The HMI shall log the data locally for 60 days with 10 parameters as a minimum.
4. PANEL & PANEL COMPONENT

The PLC control panels shall be designed in a such a way that it shall accommodate the ETS
PLC, HMI, Energy Meter, Fiber optic switches / MPLS connection, power supplies, wiring,
terminals, fan/filters etc. The main ETS panels shall be provided with the clean earth. The earth
connection shall not be shared to any electrical devices such as VFDs.

4.1 ENCLOSURE
The PLC panel shall be installed with drawing pockets and “As Built” drawings shall
be put inside the drawing pockets.
1. A free-standing enclosure shall be provided.
2. The enclosure shall be installed with proper lock and key arrangement.
3. The PLC panel shall have 230 VAC utility sockets for providing the power
supply to laptops. The PLC panel should have the stand to place the laptop
for PLC / HMI programming / troubleshooting.
Enclosure shall have 20% spare space for future requirement.
Recommended Supplier:
1. Rittal
2. Himel
4.2 TERMINALS
The terminals shall be segregated for digital / analog signals with proper labeling /
tagging. It shall be numbered and shall be as per “As Built” Drawing. The fused terminals
are to be used as required. The proper fuse rating to be used for these terminals for the
protection purpose.
1. Weidmueller
2. Phoneix Contact
3. Wago
4.3 RELAYS
The control relays shall be with 24VDC relay coil, with indication for energization / de-
energization to easy understanding. The relay should have latch option to force the input /
output for troubleshooting purpose.
1. Schneider
2. Omron
3. Relpol
4.4 MCB
The proper rating shall be used for isolating the instruments / panels. The design
calculation for the fuse / MCB ratings shall be provided as supporting documents.

1. ABB
2. Schneider
3. Relpol
4.5 VFD SIGNAL REQUIREMENT

The secondary chilled water pumps shall be driven by VFDs. The VFDs shall be
enclosed in the enclosure with proper designing.
A. PLC Signal Requirement, PLC shall have the following parameters:
1. Digital Input : Pump Run Status ( Potential Free Contact )
2. Digital Input : Pump Fault Status ( Potential Free Contact )
3. Digital Input : Pump Remote Status ( Potential Free Contact )
4. Digital Output : Pump Start / Stop Command ( Potential Free Contact )
5. Analog Input : Pump Speed Feedback ( 4 – 20 mA )
6. Analog Output : Pump Speed Control ( 4 – 20 mA )
B. Valve Signal Requirement:

1. Position Feedback (4-20 mA)
2. Position Control (4-20 mA)
5. CABLES
The analog signal cable shall be twisted pair shielded cable. The shield shall be capable to
remove noise from the electrical devices such as VFDs.
The digital signal cables can be clubbed as per the signal for the potential free contact digital
signal. The control and power cables shall be segregated in order to avoid any interference.
6. TAGGING
The tagging of individual instrument / ETS station shall be proper for the identification and
troubleshooting purpose.
Following are the places for the tagging, but not limited to:
a. Internal equipment of ETS panels tagging (Signal cable / Power Cable / PLC / HMI / Relays /
Terminals / Devices).
b. Internal cable ferrules of ETS panels
c. Instrument cables tagging (Cables from individual instruments to PLC panel, from
sensor to instruments etc.)
d. Instrument tagging with its service.
e. ETS Panel
7. IMPORTANT NOTE:
1. Building Owner Shall Provide Du MPLS Connection to Connect Ets Plc to Main DCP Control
Room.
2. All Necessary Hardware to Connect the Ets Shall Be Provided by Building Owner in Co-
Ordination With Authorized Service Provider.
3. Providing and Maintaining the Du MPLS Connection Shall Be Building Owners Responsibility.

APPENDIX 3
ETS ROOM Connection NOC Requirements
1. Sufficient space should be allowed between equipment and wall/roof to ensure freely performs
maintenance upon all equipment, pumps to be located near exit door.
2. Heat Exchangers (PHEX) and pumps should be designed exactly at 100% of the total cooling
load. PHEXs should have a provision for an expandable plates at 15% of the cooling capacity.
3. Flow meter shall be installed on chilled water supply / return header. The flow meter shall be of
electromagnetic type. The installation of the flow meter shall be as per manufacturer’s guidelines
(for example 5D / 2D installation criteria) the flow transmitter shall be installed at a human eye
sight level.
4. Temperature sensors, transmitters, gauges must be accessible and installed vertically in thermo
wells on horizontal pipe. The insertion length of thermo well shall be mid third of the pipe. The
thermo well shall be bar stock type and filled with suitable thermal conductive paste.
5. Industrial grade differential pressure transmitter to be installed across the supply and return
chilled water piping points (primary and secondary). The pipe tapping shall be ½” NPT and same
to be connected to ½” connection of DPT. It shall provide 4-20 mA (HART type) signal to PLC
system.
6. Pumps shall be VFD driven and shall vary speed based on pressure in the ETS room chilled
water network. The VFD shall be monitored and controlled by ETS PLC system. The signals such
as run, fault, remote, start/stop command, speed feedback (4-20mA) and speed control (4-20mA)
shall be provided by each VFD. All digital contacts shall be potential free.
7. HEXs motorized modulating valves on cold side shall control the flow in respond to demand load.
Control valves should have proper pressure and flow range ability to modulate the flow range
(minimum to maximum). The control valves shall have position feedback (4-20mA) and position
control (4-20mA) provision to connected to ETS PLC system.
8. ON/OFF motorized valves to be installed on hot side HEXs and to get open/close signals from
HEX cold side MCV and respond respectively. The potential free contacts shall be provided for
ETS PLC monitoring and control purpose.
9. Distribution Board (DB) for ETS should include lighting and receptacles. A separate power supply
breaker shall be provided for PLC panel from DB.
10. Condensation line PHEXs and pumps, drain line toward sump pit or drainage
line.
11. Install individual Y type strainer on each PHE inlet both cold side and hot
side.
12. Industrial grade AAV (Automatic Air Vent) (1”) on each PHE higher level pipelines with AAV to be
located on each main line highest points.
13. Stub fitting (quick fittings) for temporary chillers connections in case of cooling service
interruptions.
14. 3-phase electric power supply for the temporary chiller arrangement.
15. Fan coil unit(s) and chilled water pipe connection for the cooling of electrical MCC, ETS room
temp should not be more than 23 °c.
16. ETS room pipelines till the valve chambers should be flushed and chemically treated as per
international code of practice (flushing water velocity not less than 1.5 m/s in the lowest speed
branch). Phase demonstration & final authorization to be granted by Authorized Service Provider
projects, AUTHORIZED DC, contractor and consultant – PLS refer to below, final water
parameters requirement in both side of HEXs.
17. Chilled water pipelines pressure test should be done and demonstrated to AUTHORIZED DC.
Welded joints X-Ray test to be performed where applicable. Final authorization to be granted by
Authorized Service Provider projects, AUTHORIZED DC, contractor and consultant.
ETS CONNECTION NOC REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 2

18. Control logic of ETS should be executed by PLC controller that is be capable to communicate
between cold and hot sides of HEXs, as well as with main plant DCP on MPLS connectivity and /
or fiber optic network.
19. The system should have a control philosophy that is achievable around the year and at different
possible loads of the building on the plot and capable of maintaining the designed ΔT (15.8°F).
20. BTU meter & accessories (temperature transmitters and flow meter) should be industrial type and
initially calibrated. Calibration Certificate copy with tolerance standards to be provided.
21. BTU meter (calculator) should be enclosed and locked to avoid misuse. The BTU meter shall be
housed on PLC control panel with proper protection from tampering. The settings of the BTU
meter shall be provided. BTU meter shall support Modbus communication to communicate on
ETS PLC system.
22. PLC system shall support communication protocol such as LON, BACNET /IP, MODBUS/
RTU, MODBUS/ TCP that can communicate with external system (i.e. DCP SCADA system
over MPLS / fiber optics communication).
23. BTU meter commissioning/reset acknowledgement & minimum flow reading capability
to be demonstrated and authorized by Client, Consultant, Contractor and Service
Provider.
24. 8 hours uninterruptable power supply system (UPS) to be provided for the PLC system. In case
of power supply failure, indications such as power failure, UPS on battery and UPS battery
voltage low shall be sent to PLC from UPS.
25. Maximum (design) Flow/Tonnage in CHW header to ETS to be controlled and locked
through a DPRV or equivalent device.
26. All chilled water lines bypasses MUST be fully closed.
27. ETS room must be closed /locked and keys to be handed over to AUTHORIZED DC along
with commissioning reports, O&M manuals and as built drawings of PLC panel,
instrumentation hookup.
28. A free standing ETS PLC panel shall be installed with 6” HMI and energy meter installed on it.
29. 6” HMI shall have all the graphics for monitoring and control of ETS station.
30. A dedicated clean earth to PLC panel shall be provided.
31. The instruments are installed in such a way that it shall be easy for access / maintenance
purpose. 32- The transmitter displays shall be installed at human eye sight level for easy viewing.
32. Four wire RTDs shall be connected to energy meter.
33. The transmitters shall be provided 4-20 mA signals (HART type) for ETS PLC interface.
34. All installed instruments factory calibrated certificate shall be provided.
35. All instrumentation power supplies shall be from ETS PLC panel.
36. Control logic shall be developed to monitor and control the ETS station equipment such as valves
/ pumps.
37. All instruments shall have ½” NPT process connections. The pipe tapping shall be ½” NPT.
38. The pressure gauge, pressure transmitters, differential pressure transmitters shall be installed
with proper manifolds for isolation / calibration purpose.
ETS CONNECTION NOC REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 2

APPENDIX 4
CHILLED WATER LOOP WATER PARAMETERS
1. Heat exchangers (closed water loop) water quality requirement as follows:
a) For Nitrite based corrosion inhibitor program:
Item Operational parameters

requirement
pH 8.5 to 10
Total Dissolved Solids < 1500 ppm
(TDS)
Conductivity < 2250 µS
Chlorides as Cl- < 150 ppm
Total Hardness < 100 ppm as CaCO3
Total Alkalinity < 250 ppm as CaCO3
Total Iron < 1 ppm Fe++
Dissolved Iron < 0.5 ppm
Suspended Solids < 50 ppm
Nitrite NaNO2 800 – 1200 ppm
Appearance Clear – Pink color
Total Bacteria Count (TBC) < 1000 Colonies/ml
b) For Molybdate based corrosion inhibitor program:
Item Operational parameters

requirement
pH 8.5 to 11
Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) < 600 ppm
Conductivity < 1000 µS
Chlorides as Cl- < 150 ppm
Total Hardness < 100 ppm as CaCO3
Total Alkalinity < 250 ppm as CaCO3
Total Iron < 1 ppm Fe++
Dissolved Iron < 0.5 ppm
Suspended Solids < 50 ppm
Molybdate MoO4 80 – 100 ppm
Appearance Clear – Light Yellow color
Total Bacteria Count (TBC) < 1000 Colonies/ml
CHW LOOPS WATER PARAMETERS Page 1 of 1

ADVENTZ TOWER
NEXT ENGINEERING CONSULTANT

Volume II Part C

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume II Part C

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EXQUISITE LIVING RESIDENCES

ON PLOT NO. 345-0391

EXQUISITE LIVING RESIDENCES

ON PLOT NO. 345-0391,

BURJ KHALIFA COMMUNITY, DUBAI

Project No. 1705 – Rev. DD00

ARIF & BINTOAK

PART – A: ARCHITECTURAL; STRUCTURAL & CIVIL SPECIFICATION

Part – A1: Division 01 – Division 05

Part – B: Soil Investigation Report

PART – C: PLUMBING / MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION

PART – D: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION

Part – D: Division 26 (Electrical and related Section)

1. Bill of Quantities - BOQ BY OTHER

Volume General Index

Volume General Index

00 00 03 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

00 00 04 Basic Fire Suppression, Plumbing and HVAC Requirements

07 84 13 Penetration Fire Stopping

21 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment’s

21 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeves Seal for Fire Suppression Piping.

21 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Fire Suppression System.

21 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Fire Suppression Piping

21 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression piping and Equipment

21 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Fire Suppression piping and

21 05 53 Identification of Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment

21 08 00 Commissioning of Fire Suppression

21 10 00 Water Based Fire Suppression System

21 13 19 Pre Action Sprinkler System

21 13 39 Foam Water System

21 22 00 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System

22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment’s

22 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeves Seal for Plumbing Piping.

22 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping.

22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping

00 00 01 Table of Content Rev.00 Page 1 of 3

22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing piping and Equipment

22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control for Plumbing piping and Equipment

22 05 53 Identification of Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties

22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps

22 12 00 Facility Potable Water Storage Tanks

22 13 16 Sanitary Waste, Vent and Storm Piping

22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties

22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters

23 01 30.51 HVAC Air Distribution System Cleaning

23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

23 05 17 Sleeves and Sleeves Seal for HVAC Piping.

23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping

23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping and Equipment

23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Control of HVAC

23 05 53 Identification of HVAC Piping and Equipment

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC

23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation

23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation

23 09 00 Instruments and Control Devices for HVAC

23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System for HVAC

23 09 93 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Control

22 11 13 Facility Fuel Oil Piping

23 11 23 Facility Natural Gas Piping

23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment

23 31 00 HVAC Duct and Casing